JP7301372B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (generally called "pachinko machines") and reel-type gaming machines (generally called "pachislot machines").

Conventionally, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not a big win is made based on the winning of a game ball in a starting hole, and when the result of the lottery is a big win, the big win pattern is stopped and displayed on a display device to generate a big win game. There is known a gaming machine that allows In addition, many gaming machines have been proposed that control the game to a state more advantageous to the player after the end of the jackpot game than during normal times (eg, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-26097 A

As a conventional game machine, it is known that a time saving state is provided after the end of the big win game, but if the time saving state is provided only after the end of the big win game in this way, the game becomes monotonous and the interest is reduced. There was a risk of inviting

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in interest in gaming.

Effective solutions for achieving the above objectives are shown below. In addition, the operation etc. will be explained as necessary. Also, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations and the like are shown as appropriate in the embodiments of the invention, but they are not limited in any way.

In order to achieve the above object, in the invention according to claim 1,
A game machine having a game board formed with a game area in which game balls can flow down, and capable of being controlled to a big win state based on a winning result being derived in a predetermined lottery,
count value update means for updating a predetermined count value;
specific state control means for controlling to a specific state different from the jackpot state based on the count value becoming a specific value;
Production control means for executing a predetermined production control,
with
The production control means is
a specific notification executing means capable of executing a specific notification that enables a player to recognize information about the count value;
specific notification execution means capable of executing specific notification corresponding to occurrence of the specific state when the count value reaches the specific value and is controlled to the specific state;
has
The specific notification executing means controls the count value to reach the specific value while the specific notification is being executed and the count value when the specific notification is not executed. is the specific value and is controlled to the specific state, the common specific notification can be executed,
Furthermore, while the lottery is performed based on the ball entering the starting hole provided on the game board, the lottery is not performed based on the ball entering the non-starting hole other than the starting hole. ,
The count value can be updated not only when the ball enters the starting hole, but also when the ball enters the non-starting hole.
It is characterized by

Thus, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in amusement in a game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is at the raised position; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the outer frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. (a) is an exploded perspective view of an outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame and viewed from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as seen from the back and front, and (c) is a cylinder in a conventional pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the lock from the front, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the rear. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in FIG. 34(a) and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in FIG. 34(a) and viewed from the rear. be. (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) from the front, and (b) is a cylinder lock shown in a state rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees from the state of (a). and (c) is an explanatory view of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated clockwise by 90 degrees from the state of (a). (a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed; (a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit when it is disassembled and viewed from the front; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit when it is exploded and viewed from behind; Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit when it is disassembled and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from behind; FIG. 41(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line E--I in FIG. 41(a). FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 1; It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. (a) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of a door frame cut horizontally at the lower tray ball supply port, and (b) is a main part of a conventional door frame cut at the same part as (a). and (c) is a table comparing the number of game balls stored in the lower tray between the product of the present embodiment and the conventional product. It is a top view which expands and shows the part of the ball lending operation unit in the tray unit of a door frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the production operation unit with the production operation button directed upward, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the production operation unit of (a). FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from above. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front and lower side; (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state in which the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member is at the upper movement end position; is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where has moved to the raised position. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting/unsprung holding member is in the downward movement end position; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship of the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board, button outer decoration board, and button inner decoration board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation section; (a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. FIG. 11 is a plan view of an effect operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are provided in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit; (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and (b) is a connection between the contact detection sensor main body and the plurality of contact detection bodies in (a). FIG. 10C is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a switching portion is provided between the plate units, and FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which contact detection bodies are provided on the front side and the rear side of the same. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative contact detection body, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. is a perspective view. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 62(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line Wu-Wu. (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit. , and (d) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 66(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-E. FIG. 66(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO. (a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing a state in which the outer layer of the two-color molding is made opaque in the door frame; Fig. 10 is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in a closed state; It is a front view which shows each decoration board|substrate of a door frame. It is a top view which shows the decoration board|substrate of the site|part of the production|presentation operation unit of a door frame. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame; It is a front view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when opening and closing the door frame with respect to the body frame; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. (a) is a front perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the dispensing base unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a payout unit in a body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. Fig. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction; (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). . FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full-tank ball path unit; It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball in a main body frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear; It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. (a) is a plan view of a body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails, etc., viewed from above, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from below. FIG. 100(a) is exploded and it is the exploded perspective view seen from the front. It is an explanatory view showing a region in which the game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame circulate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball to the detour passage in the main-body frame upper part. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side. It is the perspective view which shows the part of a tank rail enlarging and seeing the pachinko machine provided with the tank rail etc. of 2nd embodiment from back. (a) is a plan view showing the assembled state of the tank rail etc. of FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the tank rail etc. of a) from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 107 and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 107 and viewed from the rear. FIG. 107(a) is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail and the like taken along the carker line in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 107 is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the flow of game balls in the tank rail of FIG. 107; FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the body frame provided with tank rails and the like of the third embodiment, with the tank rail portion enlarged, as seen from the rear right. FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the body frame provided with tank rails and the like of the third embodiment, with the tank rail portion enlarged, as viewed from the rear left. (a) is a rear view of the body frame showing an enlarged portion of the external terminal plate, and (b) is a left side view of the body frame showing an enlarged upper portion. 113(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 113(b), and FIG. 113(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 113(a). FIG. 114(b) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail. (a) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of the third embodiment as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of (a) as seen from the upper right rear, and (c) is a ) is a perspective view of the tank rail, etc., seen from the lower right rear. FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail, etc. of FIG. 116 and viewed from the front; FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail, etc., shown in FIG. 116 and viewed from behind; (a) is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and (c) is the board unit of (a) viewed from the front left. Fig. 3 is a viewed perspective view; 119(a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119(a) viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119(a) viewed from the lower right rear. 119(b) is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119(a), viewed from the front; FIG. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119(a) being exploded and viewed from behind; (a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the squeak line in FIG. 119 (a), (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Ku-ku line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view in (a). It is a cross-sectional view cut along the Keke line. 119(a) is a bottom view showing a portion behind the door frame in the pachinko machine having the board unit of FIG. 119(a). FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at an out-ball outlet of an out-ball passage; (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which an out-sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out-sensor is removed in (a). (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment, omitting the power supply unit, payout control unit, and interface unit, as seen from the front right; (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) as seen from the front left; is a perspective view. (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127 viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the lower right rear. (a) is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the corrugated line in (a), and (c) is cut along the sacer line in (a). It is a sectional view. FIG. 129(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the sea line in FIG. 129(a). FIG. 128 is an exploded front perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127; FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 when it is exploded and viewed from behind; 128 (a) is a front perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 127, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 127; FIG. 128 is an explanatory view showing elimination of clogged balls in the board unit of FIG. 127; FIG. 128 is an explanatory view showing prevention of entry of a linear unauthorized tool in the substrate unit of FIG. 127; 128 is an explanatory view showing dust removal in the substrate unit of FIG. 127; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine in which center accessories and the like are made opaque; FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 as seen from the front right; FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 as seen from the front left; FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. FIG. 4 is a schematic explanatory diagram of routing of wiring from a function display unit on a main control board; FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board with the center accessories and the like made transparent; 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to expose the inside of the game area in which the game balls circulate and the obstacle nails. 146 is an enlarged front view showing an enlarged left side of FIG. 145; FIG. 146 is an enlarged front view showing an enlarged right side of FIG. 145; FIG. (a) is a front view showing the right half of the front unit together with a panel plate and an obstacle nail, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and center right front plate in FIG. 148 and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded view of the center right front plate seal and center right front plate in FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view as seen; FIG. FIG. 149 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 148 as seen from the front, with only the center right front plate seen from the rear; (a) is a front perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit, and (b) is a back perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit. FIG. 151(a) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 151, which is viewed from the front, in which the main members of the back box are separated; and (b) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back box rear unit in FIG. 152 and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the back. FIG. 11 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front-back decorations of the front-back-lower effect unit and the rear-back decorations of the back-lower-front effect unit in the back unit are moved to raised positions; The back bottom front decoration of the back bottom front effect unit in the back unit is moved to the center of the game area, and the back top rear decoration of the back top rear effect unit is moved to the upper side of the back bottom front decoration. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-bottom rear ornament of the back-bottom rear effect unit is moved to the lower side of the back-bottom front front decoration. FIG. The front of the game board showing the state of FIG. 155, in which the front left decoration and the front right decoration in the back bottom front decoration of the back bottom front effect unit are moved to the open position and the center decoration appears. It is a diagram. A state in which the upper back decoration of the upper back rear effect unit in the back unit is moved to a lowered position, and the lower back decoration of the lower back production unit rises and abuts on the upper back decoration. It is a front view of the game board showing. The front of the game board showing the state of FIG. 157, in which the front left decoration and the front right decoration in the back bottom front decoration of the back bottom front effect unit are moved to the open position and the center decoration appears. It is a diagram. The back top front decoration of the back top front effect unit in the back unit is moved to the lowered position, and the back top rear decoration of the back top rear effect unit is moved to the rear of the back top front decoration. The back bottom front decoration of the front production unit rises and moves to the bottom of the back top front decoration, and the back bottom rear decoration of the back bottom rear production unit rises to the rear of the back bottom front decoration. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which it is in contact with the rear upper back decoration. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of the second embodiment showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to expose the inside of the game area in which game balls circulate. (a) is a front perspective view of the center accessory on the game board of the second embodiment, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the center accessory on the game board of the second embodiment. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the center front right plate and the ball guide unit in the right half of the center accessory in FIG. 162, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from behind. It is a diagram. (a) is a front view of the ball guiding unit in the center accessory of FIG. 162, and (b) is a right side view of the ball guiding unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Seuss line in FIG. 164, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Sesse line in FIG. 164, and (c) is the Sose line in FIG. 164, and (d) is a cross-sectional view cut along the tarter line in FIG. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guide unit in FIG. 164 and viewed from the front right, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guide unit in FIG. 164 and viewed from the front left. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main-control side power-on process. FIG. 168 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main-control-side power-on processing of FIG. 167; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing; 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting change processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value confirmation display processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of payout control unit power-on. FIG. 174 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the processing at power-on of the payout control unit in FIG. 173. FIG. FIG. 174 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on process subsequent to FIG. 174 . It is a flow chart which shows an example of due-out control part timer interruption processing. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing; It is a front view of the game board of the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special design and special electric accessary goods control processing (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process (step S232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the production|presentation preliminary determination process (step S245). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage process (step S234). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about special design process processing (step S238). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special design normal process (step S280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about hit determination processing (step S305). Various tables showing a low probability lottery table (A), a high probability lottery table (B), a big hit design determination table (C), an immediate short hit design determination table (D), and a small winning design determination table (E) . It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about special design stop design setting processing (step S281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about special design variation processing (step S283). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about special design stop processing (step S284). FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a relief number counting process (step S394); FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of a game state. This is a specific production example until the number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times. This is a specific example of effect when the ball enters the second starting hole during the execution of the count effect. This is a specific production example until the lottery result becomes an immediate short win. 4 is a time chart showing a count suppression period; It is a time chart showing an immediate short hit design invalid period. It is a time chart showing the combined use of the count suppression period A and the immediate short winning symbol invalid period. It is a time chart which shows the production|presentation progress of RTC production|presentation. It is a time chart showing the progress of the effect before and after the variable display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600). It is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when the start condition of the RTC effect is established before the variable display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600). It is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied after the variable display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600). It is a time chart showing the performance progress before and after the immediate short hit. It is a time chart showing the progress of the performance when the start condition of the RTC performance is satisfied before the immediate short win. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing the progress of the performance when the conditions for starting the RTC performance are met after the immediate short win. 10 is a list of RAM clear conditions indicating power-on operations for executing RAM clear. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a history display that can be displayed during a period in which a setting value is changed or a display confirmation of the setting value is being performed; It is a lottery table and a symbol determination table of a modification. It is a time chart showing the immediate short hit time during the control of the low probability time saving state B. It is a time chart showing an immediate short hit time during control of 100 times of low probability time saving state A started with a big hit C as an opportunity. It is explanatory drawing which shows the door frame top unit which can be attached or detached with respect to a door frame, and an effect operation unit. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an ID code determination target; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing grouping of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing grouping of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame; It is a timing chart showing an example of a suggestive effect that is executed as an effect during symbol fluctuation. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a suggestive effect executed as an effect during symbol fluctuation when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board. FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of button effect A during execution of rainbow effect; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of button effect B during execution of rainbow effect; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of a button effect C during execution of a rainbow effect; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the effect operation unit is not operated in button effect B during execution of rainbow effect. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the immersion prevention display is executed after execution of the simulated rainbow effect; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of erasing the immersion prevention display after execution of the simulated rainbow effect; FIG. 9 is a timing chart showing an example of limiting the execution of a simulated rainbow effect; FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where LED light emission confirmation is performed when a simulated rainbow effect is executed; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which attached the rainbow independent decoration part to the game board. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a rainbow independent decorative portion; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of executing a simulated rainbow effect when a rainbow independent decorative portion is attached; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a rainbow independent decorative portion; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a rainbow effect is executed when an initial position error of the front upper back decoration is made; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a rainbow effect is executed when a situation occurs in which a rainbow mode effect image cannot be visually recognized on the effect display device; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a rainbow effect is executed when the first to third abnormalities occur; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where first to third abnormalities occur during execution of a rainbow effect; FIG. 9 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a confirmation period other than simulated rainbow effect is provided after power is turned on. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an annular decorative portion; 9 is a timing chart showing an example of a rainbow effect using an annular decorative portion;

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. be. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view viewed from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls B (see FIG. 89) are driven by.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction and extend vertically, and the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. a lower outer frame assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40 .

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 are connected to the main body frame 4 and the main body. It is for coaxially supporting the lower frame hinge assembly 520 so as to be rotatable, and attaching the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward about the left side in front view.

In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the door frame 3 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 so that the lower outer frame assembly 40 is part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. By inverting the phase of the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiating it forward, the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 195 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 195, and the player can operate the performance operation unit 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. , the player can participate in the performance, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by the operation of the performance operation unit 301.例文帳に追加

The body frame 4 has a frame-like body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed, a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. A board unit 620 having a payout control board 633 in addition to a payout unit 560 for paying out balls B to the player side and a power board 630 having a power switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1. a back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501; I have it.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). The body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side of the front so that it can be opened and closed. is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front constituent member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front constituent member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. Main control unit 1300 having cage main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311; A peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) is arranged, an effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and can display a predetermined effect image, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1100. and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.例文帳に追加The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing movable effects and light emitting effects according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in contact with the game ball B, and a predetermined privilege given to the player by receiving or passing the game ball B. It is provided with a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2004, a gate 2002, a second starting opening 2005, and a first big winning opening 2006 that provide (for example, a predetermined number of game balls B payout). The obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁A general winning opening 2001 , a first starting opening 2004 , a gate 2002 , a second starting opening 2005 and a first big winning opening 2006 are provided in the table unit 2000 .

A game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 by the player. Thereby, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. Thus, the player can be entertained with the driving operation of the handle 195 .

In addition, the game board 5 causes the effect display device 1600 to display a predetermined effect image, the lower right unit 2400, and the back unit according to the game state changed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a. 3000 back front edge decoration unit 3200, back top front effect unit 3300, back bottom front effect unit 3400, back top back effect unit 3500, back bottom back effect unit 3600, etc. are used to perform light emitting effects and movable effects. , can entertain the player.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 which are spaced apart in the left and right direction and extend vertically, and a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 together, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

The outer frame 2 forms part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 when the main body frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2 , the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 . The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in the front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. A left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 each extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially support a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 2 . It is for attaching the body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 includes a left outer frame member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 .

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flat and concave to the right at the rear portion of the left side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a portion that is opposite to the concave portion 11a on the right side surface. It has a bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The left outer frame member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of vertically extending grooves on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 to be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 connects the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of the portion 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the left outer frame member 11, and the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the left outer frame member 11. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 while the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , is attached to the outer frame left member 11 . The upper left connecting member 12 has the horizontal fixing portion 12a in contact with the lower surface of the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left side cutout portion 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 13a extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. A fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a right side of the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. and a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d that extends short in the direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the contact portion 13 d against the front surface of the bulging portion 11 b of the left outer frame member 11 and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13 b against the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, thereby It is attached to the left frame member 11 . The left lower connecting member 13 has the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the left side cutout portion 41a of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the right outer frame assembly 20 includes a right outer frame member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, and the right outer frame member 21. and a lower hooking member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The right outer frame member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed leftward at the rear portion of the right side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a recessed portion 21a that is flat and recessed leftward from the portion opposite to the recessed portion 21a on the left side surface. It has a bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The right outer frame member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the right outer frame member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces thereof. The plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a semicircular shape. The right outer frame member 21 and the left outer frame member 11 of the left outer frame assembly 10 are formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape.

The upper right connecting member 22 connects the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle of the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of the portion 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side into the hollow portion 21c of the right outer frame member 21, and the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the right outer frame member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21 while the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. , is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The upper right connecting member 22 has the horizontal fixing portion 22a in contact with the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a in the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. Lateral fixing portion 23b, flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of upper lateral fixing portion 23b on the rear side of horizontal fixing portion 23a, and from the rear side of upper lateral fixing portion 23b. and a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d that extends short to the left. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 has the rear surface of the abutting portion 23 d in contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21 b of the right outer frame member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23 b on the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the right outer frame member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper lateral fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The lower right connecting member 23 has the horizontal fixing portion 23a in contact with the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a in the right side surface of the lower outer frame member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

An outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 to be described later is hooked to the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 . The upper hooking member 24 has a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 24b to which the outer frame hook 653 on the upper side of the cage is hooked is provided.

The lower hooking member 25 has a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction. and a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same lateral length as the lateral length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 has cutout portions 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left and right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively inserted into the cutout portions 30a on the left and right ends and attached.

In addition, the outer frame upper member 30 has a mounting stepped portion 30b at the left end portion, the upper surface and the front surface of which are recessed from the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment stepped portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and extends left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 which is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and whose rear is open is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped rear panel member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and extends to the left and right with an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear panel member 43 a mechanism 44;

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 has cutout portions 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted into the cutout portions 41a on both the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the panel rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear in the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The concave portion 41b maximizes the volume of the inner space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43. As shown in FIG.

The front panel member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape with a short depth in the front-rear direction relative to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the panel front member 42 with the panel rear member 43, the panel interior becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the panel rear member 43. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has an elongated opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The rear panel member 43 extends in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front panel member 42 to the front surface of the panel rear member 43 , the panel internal space 40 a that forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is formed in cooperation with the panel front member 42 . The rear panel member 43 has a cylindrical connection tube portion 43a extending in the left-right direction, projecting upward, and communicating with the inner space 40a of the panel at the central portion in the left-right direction of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a has an upper end that is slanted so as to be positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the rear panel member 43 . In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting tube portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 the length of the entire rear panel member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the rear panel member 43 as a whole. is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting tube portion 43a. When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection tube part 43a, thereby connecting the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of 620a to form an enclosure 624. FIG.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is arranged such that the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, thereby preventing the game ball B from being held between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. to prevent it from being caught.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so as to face the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later, and a mounting portion 44a. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting portion 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a, An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear and right sides of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and having an upper surface inclined upward toward the rear. and a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position coinciding with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size through which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate, and open to the rear surface of the rear panel member 43 . Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged behind the curtain plate rear member 43. As shown in FIG.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is designed to prevent an illegal tool such as piano wire from being inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, which will be described later. A standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the vertical wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will abut against the upper end projecting portion 44e that protrudes forward provided at the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 .

By the way, in the case where the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B tends to stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B remains on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As a result, there arises a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is discharged from the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first Through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged behind the curtain board rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 arranged on the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43 with a left-right spacing, and closes the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear side. and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which is mounted inside the front panel member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. , and a frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43 a of the rear panel member 43 .

The pair of guide members 45 are in contact with the lower end of the door frame 3 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 . The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 has a strip-like shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of blade portions 46b that are spaced apart in the up-down direction. The blade portion 46b is provided in an inclined state so that the front end side is higher than the rear end side (see FIG. 47). The grille member 46 communicates the interior of the panel front member 42 (the panel interior space 40a) with the outside through the gaps between the blade portions 46b.

The port member 47 communicates the interior space 40a (enclosure 624) of the curtain plate with the front of the outer frame 2 through the gap between the blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 by means of two cylinders. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the low-pitched sound emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (within the enclosure 624) according to the principle of Helmholtz resonance. , a rich low-pitched sound can be radiated forward of the outer frame 2 (toward the player). In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. and prevents the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 from leaking from between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

According to the grill member 46 of the present embodiment, the air vibration emitted from the interior space 40a of the curtain board by the main body frame speaker 622 to the outside is transmitted to the handle cover unit 290 diagonally upward and forward by the plurality of inclined blade portions 46b. can be directed into the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is accommodated through the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 at the . As a result, when the player is rotating the handle 195 (striking device for the game ball B) by sticking his or her finger inside the handle cover 295 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291), the body frame By vibrating the speaker 622 and blowing air into the front cylindrical portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented performance can be performed.

Further, since the port member 47 is opened forward, part of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the plurality of vanes 46b of the grill member 46 is emitted forward. Therefore, the balls are discharged from the port member 47 to the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and other players who are wandering around in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided, since the effect sound can also attract the interest of the player.

Further, since the port member 47 is provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 with respect to the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the main body frame 4, the volume of the enclosure 624 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to output an effect sound with a deeper bass, and it is possible to amuse the player and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame and viewed from above, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recessed portion 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and the outer frame upper hinge member 51. and a mounting screw 53 for mounting the locking member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 .

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is in the shape of a horizontally extending flat plate and extends forward from an upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-like forward extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right side of the forward extending portion 51b to the center of the forward extending portion 51b toward the front and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and an end edge extending downward from the left side of the forward extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. A flat edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d is provided. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a band plate-like lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and an operation piece 52b extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It has an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely to the left front, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by an attaching screw 53, at a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 , the lock body 52 a can block the bearing groove 51 c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the edge of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 . It extends forward so as to come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. As shown in FIG. The locking member 52 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 in the vicinity of the front end is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. By operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock body 52a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view. can be in a state in which the As a result, the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 has a flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. , an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a; ing. The lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. 60 d of discharge holes are formed in the horizontal part 60a so that it may contact|connect the center part of the front-back direction of the rising part 60b, and may extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal part 60a in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60 d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44 b of the ball jam prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 .

In the outer frame lower hinge member 60 assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is placed on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screwed (not shown). It is fixed to the rear panel member 43 by . The raised portion 60b is attached to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, in the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is separated from the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the gap is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the ejection hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the part of the lower hinge member 60.例文帳に追加

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. FIG. 22 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 195 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

The door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 closing the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door, a handle cover unit 290 covering the outer periphery of the handle unit 180, a tray unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper side of the tray unit 200. A door frame left side unit 420 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, a door frame right side unit 430 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit, and a door frame top unit 450 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430 .

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a vertically extending quadrangular (rectangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, and having a door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions, and a rear side of the door frame base 101. A speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner when viewed from the rear, a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end when viewed from the rear on the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and the rear surface of the door frame main relay board 104. A door frame secondary relay board 105 attached to the left side of the view, a handle rear relay board 106 attached to the rear view left side of the door frame secondary relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame secondary relay. A door frame relay board cover 107 covering a part of the board 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay board cover 108 covering the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 covering the wiring cable. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to it. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 .

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 . The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 has a handle 195 that can be rotated by the player, and the handle unit 180 operates a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery of the game ball B in the upper tray 201 to release the ball. 540 is used to play a game of hitting the game area 5 a of the game board 5 .

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. FIG. 31(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame, and FIG. 31(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and Fig. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 at the left side in front view, and closes the front surface of the main body frame 4 so as to be opened and closed. The game area 5a can be visually recognized from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a rectangular flat plate door frame base 101 with an outer shape extending vertically, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view. .

The door-frame base unit 100 also includes a door-frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in the rear view of the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101, and a door-frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101. A door frame secondary relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board mounted to the left side of the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 attached to the rear side and covering the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable are provided. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 at the lower front corner, a tray unit 200 at the lower front of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 420 at the left outer front of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1a. door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame base 101 has a quadrangular (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape with an inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door window 101a has an upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery thereof, and is close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and a lower side forming the inner periphery extends vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at about 1/3 of the height of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.) which is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side, and a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42). A cylinder insertion hole 101d into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted through the seat surface 101b and the door window 101a in the front-rear direction, and the left side of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b in a front view. and a ball feeding opening 101e that penetrates in the front-rear direction and allows the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 to face forward.

In addition, the door frame base 101 penetrates in the front and back at a position near the center in the left-right direction and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b. a passage opening 101f, a ball passage opening 101g for an upper tray that penetrates in the front-rear direction so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a in the vicinity of the left end in a front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, and a door. A glass unit mounting portion 101h recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of longitudinally long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the ball passage opening 101g for the upper tray) in a front view and penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of slits 101i are such that the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. A speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the tray unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j. It is formed so as to match the portion 114b.

[3-1b. speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is positioned in front of the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided forward. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, the player can be guided forward (to the player side) of the pachinko machine 1 in a favorable manner.

Moreover, the speaker duct 103 has a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board/Door frame secondary relay board/Handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, door frame sub relay board 105, and rear handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 (see FIG. 82). and FIG. 83) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape by combining a square extending left and right on the right side of the upper part of the square extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame secondary relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate unit 200, the door frame left side upper decoration board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420, and the door frame left side lower decoration board. 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and door frame right side lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame top relay board of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4; It is for relaying the connection, and the rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door-frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are arranged so that the vertically extending parts of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are connected to the door. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107 , and the rear side of the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150 .

The post-handle relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear handle relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover, rear handle relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 (parts extending vertically in an inverted L shape) are covered. It covers the rear side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and the left side when viewed from the front. When assembled to the door-frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door-frame relay board cover 107 and can be opened. A connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side of the housing and connected to these terminals.

The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106 . The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 with a wiring cable (not shown). It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box-like shape extending in the left and right direction, and has openings formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction for passing the wiring cables.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100 . The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that connect the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 . An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end is attached at a position near the upper end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115, which are connected to the right reinforcing frame 112, are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 with a vertical separation therebetween, and the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 are engaged. and a hooking member 116 that is attached.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically by a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101 . The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted through these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 . The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101 .

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends laterally with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113 . The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch portion 114a that is rectangularly cut downward from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end. The cut-out portion 114a is formed at the position corresponding to the upper tray ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at the position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 includes a pair of rear piece portions which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction and formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It has a pair of side pieces extending forward from the sides in a flat plate shape, and a flat front piece portion connecting the front ends of the pair of front extending portions to each other. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112 . A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 .

The hooking member 116 is attached to an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 . Door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are hooked to these hooking members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are made by punching and molding metal plates. It is formed by bending. These are assembled with rivets.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 assembled along the left side, right side, and upper side of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114. , is assembled to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101 d of the door frame base 101 .

[3-1f. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the front upper left corner of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 . The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a locking spring 124 biasing the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like attachment piece 121a that is square in front view, and flat plate-like projecting pieces 121b that extend forward from the upper and lower sides of the attachment piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 at the attachment piece 121a. Hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end extends upward. The portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 .

The flange member 123 is an E-ring and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the flange member 123 and the lower projecting piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121 . The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123 .

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower projecting piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount from the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is fully extended. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 or removed downward. can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 , so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 . can be supported as much as possible.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 .

[3-1g. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and rectangular in front view, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. A door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22, etc.) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of the door frame 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and the projecting piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer circumference of the lower end portion is tapered and chamfered. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is positioned coaxially with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b. installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 allows the door frame 3 to rotate with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. can support.

[3-1h. cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. Fig. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as seen from the back and front, and (c) is a conventional pachinko machine. 2 is a front perspective view of the cylinder lock in FIG. 2, and (d) is a rear perspective view of the cylinder lock in (a). Fig. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in Fig. 34(a) and viewed from the front, and Fig. 35(b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in Fig. 34(a) and viewed from the rear. It is a diagram. Fig. 36(a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of Fig. 34(a) from the front, and Fig. 36(b) shows the state rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees from the state of Fig. 34(a). It is explanatory drawing of a cylinder lock, (c) is explanatory drawing of a cylinder lock shown in the state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body. It is used for opening and closing with the frame 4 . The cylinder lock 130 includes a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end face of the cylinder body 131, and a regular keyhole 132 provided behind the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132. and a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

A cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and the rotation transmission member 133 is formed in opposite positions across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

More specifically, the cylinder lock 130 includes a first cam member 134 which is provided on the rear end side of the cylinder main body 131 and rotates together with a regular key inserted into the keyhole 132, and a cylinder mounting frame 115. A second cam member 135 attached rotatably about an axis in the front-rear direction at a portion below the cylinder body 131 in the upper end side rotates at a portion to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134 A band plate-shaped first arm 136 that is rotatably attached to the second cam member 135 at the lower end side of the center of rotation of the second cam member 135, and the upper end side is the first cam member 134 that rotates. a strip-shaped second arm 137 which is rotatably attached at a portion below the center and whose lower end side is rotatably attached at a portion below the center of rotation of the second cam member 135; ing.

Also, the cylinder lock 130 is mounted on the cylinder mounting frame so as to cover the cylinder main body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from behind except for the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133). Rivets that rotatably attach the rear cover 138 attached to 115 and the upper and lower end sides of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. 139 and .

The first cam member 134 has the upper end side of the first arm 136 attached to the rear side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 attached to the front side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably attached from the rear side by the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the rotation transmission member 133 is attached to the rear side across the front surface of the cylinder mounting frame 115 so as to be integrally rotatable. The second cam member 135 has the lower end side of the first arm 136 attached to the front side, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side ahead of the first arm 136 .

In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached and the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached are spaced apart at an angle of 90 degrees around their respective rotation axes. are doing. In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached is located farther from the center of rotation than the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached. .

The rear cover 138 has a cylindrical shaft portion 138a that protrudes outward from the lower ends of both left and right side surfaces of the rear cover 138. The shaft portion 138a is engaged with the L-shaped engagement slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115. It is detachably attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 by means of.

In this cylinder lock 130, the cylinder mounting frame 115, the cylinder body 131, the rotation transmission member 133, the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are made of metal. .

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3 , the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 440 b of the door frame right side unit 430 .

Here, the conventional cylinder lock 130A will be described. As shown in FIGS. 34(c) and 34(d), the conventional cylinder lock 130A has a cylinder main body 131 which penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear and the rear end of which is attached to the front piece. there is A rotation transmission member 133 is provided on the axis of a cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130A.

Next, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 34(c) and 34(d), the conventional cylinder lock 130 has a rotation transmitting member 133 on the axis of the cylinder body 131. 34(a) and 34(b), etc., a rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position spaced downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131. As shown in FIGS.

In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 36(a), the cylinder lock 130 is configured such that the upper and lower end sides of the first arm 136 are aligned with the rotation centers of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The upper and lower end sides of the second arm 137 are attached to the lower portions of the rotation centers of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise by an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state by using a proper key.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted into the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. It will happen. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 should be rotated counterclockwise by the first arm 136. On the other hand, the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached below the rotation center of the first cam member 134, so that the second cam member 135 is reversed from the second arm 137. Almost no force acts to rotate it in the clockwise direction.

Thus, when the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, causing the second cam member 135 to rotate counterclockwise. direction, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135 . The force that acts upward due to the counterclockwise rotation of the first cam member 134 is generated by the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the portion where the first cam member 134 is attached. 134 is proportional to the horizontal distance from the center of rotation. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force acting upward on the first arm 136 decreases, while the force acting upward on the second arm 137 decreases. greater power to do so.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the upward force acting on the second arm 137 becomes greater than that on the first arm 136 . , mainly via the second arm 137, the second cam member 135 rotates counterclockwise. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(b)).

It should be noted that when the key is turned counterclockwise from the normal state by 90 degrees and then rotated clockwise by 90 degrees to return to the normal state, the action opposite to the above is performed. It will work.

On the other hand, when the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is used to rotate the first cam member 134 clockwise through the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 from the normal state, the upper end side of the first cam member 134 rotates to the right of the center of rotation. As the first arm 136 attached to the side moves downward, the second arm 137 attached to the lower end of the rotation center of the first cam member 134 moves upward. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 is rotated clockwise by the first arm 136. On the other hand, the upper end of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, so that the second cam member 135 is rotated clockwise from the second arm 137. Almost no force acts to rotate in the direction of .

Thus, when the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, causing the second cam member 135 to rotate clockwise. It rotates, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135 . The force that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134. , and the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 in the horizontal direction. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, the force of the first arm 136 that tends to rotate the second cam member 135 decreases. The arm 137 exerts a greater force to rotate the second cam member 135 .

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction exceeds 45 degrees from the normal state, the second arm 137 will rotate the second cam member 135 more than the first arm 136. As a result, the second cam member 135 rotates clockwise mainly via the second arm 137 . Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated clockwise by 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(c)).

It should be noted that when the key is turned clockwise from the normal state by 90 degrees and then rotated clockwise by 90 degrees to return to the normal state, the operation is reversed to that described above. It will be done.

As described above, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 in which the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are phased at an angle of 90 degrees to each other. , so that at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is engaged regardless of the rotational position of the first cam member 134 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132). , the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133) can be rotated, and the locking and unlocking of the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 can be improved.

Further, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, rotation is transmitted by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as the rotation transmission mechanism, so that the rotation transmission member 133 ( Since the transmission cylinder 654) of the locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 can be provided at a different position, the position of the cylinder body 131 in the door frame 3 can be changed to any position without changing the locking unit 650. The cylinder body 131 (keyhole 132) can be provided in a part that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 with high decorativeness of the door frame 3 can be provided.

Further, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder main body 131 is changed in the door frame 3, there is no need to change the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, so that the locking unit 650 can be used. cost increase can be suppressed.

By the way, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided behind the cylinder body 131, a fraudulent person who has knowledge of the structure may insert a tool behind the cylinder body 131 from the front. By illegally rotating the rotation transmission member 133 with the tool, the door frame 3 may be opened to commit fraud. On the other hand, in the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position away from the axis (rear) of the cylinder body 131, a tool can be inserted behind the cylinder body 131. Even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotation transmission member 133, the rotation transmission member 133 cannot be rotated because the rotation transmission member 133 does not exist at the relevant portion, and the door frame 3, the body frame 4, etc. are opened. can be prevented from occurring.

Furthermore, in the cylinder lock 130, the second arm 137 connects the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, which are separated by a rotation angle of 90 degrees. A straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135 at the part attached to one of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 of the one arm 136 or the second arm 137 Even when positioned above, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the parts farthest from the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. be in a state where Therefore, by positioning one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 at the dead center of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 , the rotation from the first cam member 134 is transferred to the second cam member 135 . Since the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 can transmit the rotation from the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135 even if it cannot be transmitted, the rotation of the first cam member 134 The key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be smoothly rotated without a large resistance to rotation, and unlocking/locking can be easily performed, and the key inserted in the keyhole can be forcibly rotated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the key from being damaged.

In addition, since the two arms of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 transmit the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at an eccentric position, for some reason Even if one of the arms is damaged, the rotation can be transmitted by the remaining arm, and the pachinko machine 1 having the highly reliable cylinder lock 130 can be provided.

In addition, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at an eccentric position by the smooth rod-shaped (strip-shaped) first arm 136 and second arm 137. Therefore, if the rotation is transmitted by a gear, the tip of the tool may be hooked on the teeth of the gear, causing the gear to rotate and the rotation transmission member 133 to rotate. Since the arm 136 and the second arm 137 are rod-shaped with smooth surfaces, it is possible to make it difficult for the tip of the tool to get caught on the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, thereby preventing the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 from moving. It is possible to prevent the rotation transmission member 133 from being rotated, and to reliably prevent the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 from being unlocked due to illegal operation of the locking unit 650.例文帳に追加be able to.

In the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are used as the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. , but not limited to, for example, a rotation transmission mechanism using a plurality of gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using a gear and a rack gear, a rotation transmission mechanism using a sprocket and a chain, a rotation transmission mechanism using a pulley and a belt , and so on.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. FIG. 37(a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 37(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the tamper-proof member removed. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and also the game balls stored in the upper tray 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222. - 特許庁

The ball feeding unit 140 has an inlet 141a through which game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the inlet 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open end, and a box-shaped front cover 141 with a closed rear end and an open front, and a game ball entering from an entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a batted ball supply port 142a for supplying ball B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A ball extraction member 143 having a partition part 143a partitioning between an entrance port 141a and a ball extraction port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a rear cover 142 for game balls B on the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 one by one. The ball feeding member 144 is rotatably supported about an axis extending vertically between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. A ball feed solenoid 145 is provided.

As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entry port 141a in a front view, and a ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144 .

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arcuate slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the center of rotation of the ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball extracting port 141b in front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball extracting member 143, which will be described later, extends forward from 141c. The upper side of the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entry port 141a. And, it is formed so as to close from the rear side the portion that is open rearward on the upstream end side of the ball removal guideway 241c.

The ball extraction member 143 has a partition portion 143a which partitions between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b on the lower side of the entrance port 141a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and the partition portion 143a. Extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball outlet 141b. a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b; and the rotating rod 143b below the operating rod 143c. and a weight portion 143d projecting from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. An operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 is formed to protrude forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37(a)). The actuating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 that moves downward when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 is pressed through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped cut-off portion 144a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the entrance port 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143, and a cut-off portion 144a behind the cut-off portion 144a. It has a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Also, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding member 144 rotates about the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c, which is arranged at a position eccentric to the rotational axis, in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a feed position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 and enters the partition portion 143a from the entry port 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. As a result, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings vertically by driving (energization) of a ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip of the ball feeding working rod 146 which swings vertically. and a ball feeding crank 147 which rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by movement of the ball feeding member 144 and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding actuation rod 146 has an iron plate 146a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around the longitudinally extending axis. It is When the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feed actuation rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward (upward) the ball feed solenoid 145 due to the magnetic force generated, thereby feeding the ball around the right end. The left end near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feed solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end near the ball feed crank 147 moves downward around the right end. and return to the initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feed operating rod 146 near the ball feed crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feed solenoid 145 .

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction which can be engaged with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 which moves up and down, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b is arranged on the opposite side of the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. , and a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 38(b)) projecting downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center of the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

This ball feeding unit 140 operates a ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is positioned at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control section 633b (see FIG. 160) of the payout control board 633.

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the rotatably supported ball extraction member 143 or the weight 143d. However, the actuating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 may contact the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper dish ball extracting slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper dish ball extracting button 222 of the dish unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b in a normal state to partition the ball removal port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter into.

When the player presses downward the upper tray ball release button 222 of the tray unit 200, the upper tray ball release slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the operation transmission portion 242b moves downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operation rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmission part 242b, the ball removal member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition part 143a moves from between the inlet 141a and the ball removal opening 141b. partition is removed. As a result, the game ball B entering from the inlet 141a falls to the side of the ball outlet 141b, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guideway 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 formed with the operation transmission part 242b with which the operation rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 abuts is biased upward by the spring, the game ball B is placed on the partition part 143a. Even if the game ball B is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring via the operating rod 143c, preventing the ball extracting member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B being caught in the partition portion 143a. You can prevent bouncing.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular attachment recess 142b (see FIG. 38(b), etc.) recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from the back of the batted ball feed port 142a in the rear cover 142. An anti-tampering member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The tamper-proof member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is made of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The tamper-proof member 148 has a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. A lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other are provided. . The upper piece 148a of the anti-tamper member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-tamper member 148 so that the right end in a front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece 148b extends flush with the general surface of the tamper-proof member 148. As shown in FIG. As a result, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The anti-tampering member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to this tampering prevention member 148, an illicit game ball B to which a string is attached is hit into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper tray via the ball feeding unit 140, and attached to the illicit game ball B. When a fraudulent act is performed such as operating the string that has been set to make the illegal game ball B enter and exit the first starting port 2004, etc., the illegal game ball B shot (hit ball) by the ball launching device 540 is released. By force, the string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then the V shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the portion with a narrowed shape, and it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act using a fraudulent game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1j. foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. FIG. 39(a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 39(b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加As illustrated, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and having an open front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 151. 152 and .

The foul cover unit 150 is penetrated in the front-rear direction at the upper left corner in a front view, and is a penetration that communicates the lower normal dispensing passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit 200. A ball passage 150a and a full ball receiver that opens rearward on the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a in a front view and can communicate with a lower full discharge passage 610b of a lower full ball passage unit 610 of the body frame 4. and a mouth 150b.

In addition, the foul cover unit 150 is open upward on the right side of the full ball socket 150b when viewed from the front, and even though the ball is fired by the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4, it does not reach the game area 5a. A foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving a game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B received by a full ball receiving port 150b and a foul ball receiving port 150c which are open forward near the lower right corner in front view. and a ball discharge port 150d that discharges the balls forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit 200. - 特許庁

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit main body 151 and the cover member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passageway 150e having a possible width is provided.

The ball-through passage 150a is formed across both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 . The full tank ball socket 150b and the foul ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. As shown in FIG. The ball outlet 150d is formed in the lid member 152. As shown in FIG. A storage passage 150 e is formed by a unit main body 151 and a lid member 152 .

In addition, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e. and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is kept inside the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full-tank detection sensor 154 . As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, the further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to inform the player, the staff of the game hall, etc. to that effect and urge them to eliminate the full tank of the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the penetrating ball passage 150a, and serves as a lower full-tank ball path unit 610 in the later-described payout unit 560 of the main body frame 4. A door opening/closing abutting portion 150f with which the operating projection 613a of the door 613 can abut is provided (see FIG. 90). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b ( front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is detachably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. As shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front). It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 101h, and a glass frame that closes the inside of the glass frame 161 and has a glass frame on the outer periphery. 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for mounting the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. and a mounting member 163 .

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of flat mounting pieces 161a extending outward from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. and a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. A mounting piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can abut on a projecting portion 163 b of the glass unit mounting member 163 . The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base portion 163a mounted rotatably about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-like member protruding from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a projecting portion 163b. The glass unit mounting members 163 are rotatably mounted outside the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

In order to attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Then, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101 . After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the projecting portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101 .

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the procedure can be reversed. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is regulated by the projecting portion 163b when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the projecting portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally removed from the door frame base 101 .

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The crime prevention cover 170 includes a flat plate-like body portion 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat plate-like rear projecting piece 172 projecting short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171, and is spaced apart from the left and right. and a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101 .

A main body portion 171 of the crime prevention cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100 . Further, the upper end of the body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. More specifically, the upper end of the body portion 171 is shaped along a portion of an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003, a portion of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171 . Therefore, the crime prevention cover 170 is formed into a shallow box-like shape that is opened rearward by the body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . A rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 is formed along a portion of the outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. ing.

In addition, the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion positioned between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B shot by the ball shooting device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area is It does not hinder the hitting of the game ball B into 5a.

A pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100 .

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the part protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projecting piece 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front structural member 1000 . Also, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 projects further rearward than the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front structural member 1000 . . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47 and the like. FIG. 41(a) is an enlarged front view showing the portion of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the portion of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit viewed from the rear. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along line E--E in FIG. 41(a). FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A--A in FIG. Note that FIG. 46 is a sectional view of only the door frame 3 with the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 omitted.

The handle unit 180 of this embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the tray unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is moved by the player's operation. It can be driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 .

First, the handle unit 180 will be described. The handle unit 180 is rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, the rear end of which is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle cover base 291 of the handle cover unit 290, which will be described later. a plurality of handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by a handle cover base 291 to be described later; A cover pedestal 183, a handle decoration substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and a handle attached to the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration substrate 184. a front lens 185;

The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 195, and the handle 195 is attached to the front end of the handle unit 180. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186 .

One end of the handle unit 180 is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end of the handle unit 180 is attached to the handle 195 so that the handle 195 can be returned to the initial rotation position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). A biasing handle return spring 190, one end of which is attached to an inner base 186 and the other end of which is attached to a transmission gear 188, rotates a detection shaft 189a of a handle rotation detection sensor 189 clockwise when viewed from the front. and an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button 193 attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. and an operation sensor 194 .

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base portion 181a extending back and forth, a disc-shaped front end portion 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base portion 181a, and recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 181a. and three groove portions 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylindrical portion 291 c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290 . Also, the three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to three protrusions 291d of the handle cover base 291, which will be described later. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the rear tubular portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 291d, and the protrusions 291d can be inserted into the three grooves 181c. is inserted, the handle base 181 is brought into a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle cover base 291 .

The handle 195 includes a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of (here, three) spoke portions 195b radially extending outward from the central hub portion 195a at intervals in the circumferential direction, and a plurality of spokes. An annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the portions 195b, and two ring portions extending in an arc around the rotating shaft (shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub portion 195a in the front-rear direction. A slit 195d and a locking projection 195e projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center relative to the slit 195d and locking the other end side of the handle return spring 190 are provided. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the general outer peripheral surface of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine.

The three spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 rotate clockwise and clockwise around one spoke portion 195b horizontally extending leftward from the central hub portion 195a when the handle 195 is in a free state (not rotated). Two spokes 195b extend counterclockwise from 120 degree angles. The three spoke portions 195b extend to such a length that a gap is formed between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c so that a player's finger can be inserted thereinto.

An outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer peripheral ring portion 195c is formed in an annular shape with a constant cross-sectional shape in which the rounded side of the U-shape faces forward.

The handle 195 is formed so as to be translucent as a whole, and is partially provided with an electrically continuous plating portion from the central hub portion 195a to the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. As a result, the touch of the handle 195 is detected by the handle touch sensor 192 even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, the game ball B can be hit by rotating the outer ring portion 195c.

The handle guide 196 has a U-shaped guide portion 196a that opens toward the center of the handle 195, and a flat mounting stay 196b that extends toward the center from the front end of the guide portion 196a. there is The three handle guides 196 have mounting stays 196 b attached to the rear side of the spokes 195 b of the handle 195 so that the guide portions 196 a are positioned behind the outer ring portion 195 c of the handle 195 . A guide piece 291g of a handle cover base 291, which will be described later, is inserted into the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196, thereby restricting movement in the front-rear direction.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in the shape of a disk having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and has three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slits 195d of the handle 195 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the cover pedestal 183 passes through the slit 195d of the handle 195, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 195d, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 195. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within an angle of rotation of approximately 120 degrees.

The number of handle decoration substrates 184 is 1 in the center, 3 in the middle circumference at regular intervals in the circumferential direction, and 6 at regular intervals in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference, for a total of 10. LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in triple concentric circles. These LEDs 184a are divided into 5 groups: 1 in the center, 3 in the middle, 2 in the upper left corner of the outer circumference, 2 in the upper right corner of the outer circumference, and 2 in the lower part of the outer circumference. (see Figure 72). This handle decoration board 184 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 184b having a unique address for causing each LED 184a to emit light. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls 10 LEDs 184a divided into 5 groups with 3 systems for a total of 15 systems so that each can emit light in full color. I'm trying

Although not shown, the handle decoration board 184 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power to drive the LED 184a and the LED driver 184b, and a command and address line from the peripheral control board 1510. , and a clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510 are connected. . Then, in the LED driver 184b of the handle decoration board 184, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), it is divided into five groups according to the command. Each set of ten LEDs 184a can be illuminated with an appropriate color and intensity.

In this way, since the handle decoration board 184 has the LED driver 184b, the light emission of the LEDs 184a, which is larger in number than the number of electric wires constituting the wiring cable to be connected, can be individually (in this case, assembled). Since it is possible to control each unit, the number of electric wires can be reduced, and the configuration of electric wiring can be simplified.

The handle front lens 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and is translucent. The handle front lens 185 has a lens member inside which is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The steering wheel front lens 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED on the front surface of the steering wheel decoration substrate 184 .

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor. When the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and transmission gear 188. FIG. The internal resistance of the steering wheel rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance, and the handle 195 rotates. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a with strength corresponding to the angle.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, detects static electricity acting from the player when the player touches the handle 195, and detects the player's contact with the handle 195. To detect. Then, when the handle 195 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is fired with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit.

Therefore, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 195 in some way without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the shooting solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 195 in a manner different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

The one-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193 by the player. When the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, the ejection control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 stops the driving of the ejection solenoid 542. Therefore, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, the launch of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 195, and the single-shot button can be pressed. By canceling the pressing operation of 193, the game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a again with the hitting strength before the single-shot button 193 is operated.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be explained. The handle cover unit 290 covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 on the rear side of the handle 195, and includes a handle cover base 291 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101, and the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291. An inner 292 whose rear end is attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200, an annular handle cover decorative substrate 293 provided on the front side of the inner 292 and having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface, An annular board cover 294 covering the handle cover decoration board 293 from the front and a handle cover 295 covering the outer periphery of the inner 292 and having the rear end attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200 are provided.

The handle cover base 291 includes a cylindrical front cylindrical portion 291a extending in the front-rear direction with an inner diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, and a front cylindrical portion 291a whose inner diameter decreases forward from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a. a tubular rear tubular portion 291c penetrating through the intermediate wall portion 291b and extending in the front-rear direction with an inner diameter allowing insertion of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181; and the inner periphery of the rear tubular portion 291c. A plurality of (here, three) projections 291d are provided at positions corresponding to the grooves 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

In addition, the handle cover base 291 includes a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion on the rear side of the front end of the outer circumference of the front cylindrical portion 291a, and a portion extending from the middle of the flange portion 291e to the same position as the front end of the front cylindrical portion 291a. A cylindrical outer cylinder portion 291f projecting forward to the front cylinder portion 291f, a guide piece 291g projecting outward from the front cylinder portion 291a at a portion between the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a and the flange portion 291e, a front cylinder and an opening 291h penetrating at the lower portion of the portion 291a.

The middle wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends in an arcuate cross section from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a to near the center in the front-rear direction. The rear cylindrical portion 291c is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 at its rear end. The rear tubular portion 291c is formed to have the same length as the base portion 181a of the handle base 181, and the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted therein. The three ridges 291d correspond to the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181, and by being inserted into the grooves 181c, the handle base 181 can be made relatively non-rotatable. The outer cylindrical portion 291f extends forward from a position outside the radial center of the flange portion 291e. In the handle cover base 291, a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction so as to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylindrical portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g protrudes from the outer circumference of the front tubular portion 291a from the center between the outer circumference of the front tubular portion 291a and the inner circumference of the outer tubular portion 291f to a position near the front tubular portion 291a. The guide pieces 291g extend in the circumferential direction with a length in the range of about 110 degrees, and are provided three in the circumferential direction at intervals of 10 degrees. By inserting the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 behind the guide piece 291g through the space between the guide pieces 291g and rotating the handle 195, a U-shaped guide portion is formed. A guide piece 291g can be positioned within 196a to restrict movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction.

The opening 291h extends from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a to the vicinity of the flange portion 291e in the front-rear direction, and extends through the front cylindrical portion 291a with a size within an angle range of about 90 degrees in the circumferential direction. .

The inner member 292 has an annular base portion 292a with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange portion 291e, and extends rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the base portion 292a. It has a leg portion 292b and a plurality of (here, four) notch portions 292c that are cut from the rear end of the leg portion 292b to the vicinity of the base portion 292a and are spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The base portion 292a is positioned behind the flange portion 291e with the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 inserted from the front. The leg portion 292 b extends outward in a curved shape, and its rear end is attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200 . The notch portions 292c are provided in the upper and lower portions and the left and right portions of the leg portion 292b, respectively.

The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange portion 291e. The steering wheel cover decoration board 293 is mounted with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b having a unique address for causing each LED 293a to emit light. The 12 LEDs 293a (full-color LEDs) are arranged in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into 6 sets of 2 on the lower left, 2 on the left, 2 on the upper left, 2 on the upper right, 2 on the right, and 2 on the lower right from the center. divided (see Figure 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and controls 10 LEDs 293a divided into 6 groups with 3 systems for a total of 18 systems so that each group can emit light in full color. I have to.

Although not shown, the steering wheel cover decoration board 293 has two power lines (one of which is a ground line) for supplying power to drive the LED 293a and the LED driver 293b, commands from the peripheral control board 1510 and A wiring cable made up of four wires, one control signal line for receiving signals such as addresses and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510, is connected. there is Then, when the LED driver 293b of the handle cover decoration board 293 receives a command addressed to the address through the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), it is divided into six groups according to the command. The 12 LEDs 293a can be made to emit light in appropriate colors and intensities for each set.

The substrate cover 294 includes an annular front plate portion 294a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and having an outer diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the base portion 292a of the inner 292, and the front plate portion 294a. and a cylindrical side plate portion 294b with an outer peripheral edge of the cylindrical side plate portion 294b extending short rearward. The substrate cover 294 has a front plate portion 294a located between the flange portion 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative substrate 293, and a side plate portion 294b extending to the base portion 292a of the inner 292. As shown in FIG.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a having the same inner diameter as the outer cylindrical portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 at its front end, and has a spindle frustum (kamakura type or bowl type) that bulges toward the rear. , etc.), and a plurality of (here, four) notch openings 295b are provided in the circumferential direction by notching forward from the rear end. The handle cover 295 is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and has a plurality of cutout openings 295b that are aligned with the cutouts 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the plate unit body 252 of the plate unit 200 via the inner 292 .

The handle cover 295 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, the handle cover 295 is two-color molded with two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a portion of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b to appear on the outer surface. , circular and radial patterns are formed. That is, the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). When molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment are assembled to the pachinko machine 1 as shown in FIG. A portion behind the handle cover unit 290 is inserted, and the handle 195, the handle front lens 185, and the like are positioned on the front side of the handle cover unit 290. As shown in FIG. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 sandwiches the portion of the handle cover unit 290 that closes the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handle cover base 291, and the handle mounting seat surface of the door frame base 101 is mounted. 101b.

A handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is rotatably supported by a handle base 181 at a central hub portion 195a. In addition, the handle 195 is rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 by the handle guide 196 attached to the rear side of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the central hub portion 195a. The rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 is inserted (locked) between the front cylindrical portion 291a and the outer cylindrical portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g. ), and is rotatably supported while its movement in the longitudinal direction (axial direction) is restricted.

The handle 195 and the handle cover base 291, the inner 292, the board cover 294, and the handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 are formed to have translucency, and the LED 293a of the handle cover decoration board 293 is made to emit light. In addition to the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 being decorated with light, the interior of the handle cover base 291 (front cylindrical portion 291a), the handle cover 295, etc. can also be decorated with light.

The handle cover unit 290 has cutout openings 295b and cutouts 292c that match each other in the handle cover 295 and the inner 292, so that when viewed from the outside, the handle cover base 291 is positioned on both the left and right sides and on the lower side. It is possible to make it look as if a hole communicating with the inside of the front tubular portion 291a is open. As a result, the player is relieved from the mental anxiety of sticking his/her hand (fingers) into the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195. can be done.

The upper cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 (the upper cutout 292c of the inner 292) is closed by the right plate decoration unit 275 and the right side unit 430 of the door frame.

In the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the inside of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted is positioned below the inner 292 and the handle cover 295 through the opening 291h. It communicates with the notch 292c and the notch opening 295b (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B enters the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, can be discharged below the handle cover unit 290 through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b.

In addition, when the liquid or the game ball B enters the cutout openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, it passes through the gap between the front cylinder portion 291a and the leg portion 292b of the inner 292, It can be discharged downward from the notch opening 295b.

47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the cutout 292c on the lower side of the inner 292, and the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 are formed into the outer frame base assembly of the outer frame 2, as shown in FIG. It is provided on the extension line of the slanting direction of the blade portion 46b of the grill member 46 in the three-dimensional structure 40. As shown in FIG. As a result, the wind (wind pressure) emitted obliquely upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blade portion 46b due to the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 passes through the opening portion 291h, the cutout portion 292c, and the cutout opening portion 295b to the front cylinder. It can be made to enter into the portion 291a. Therefore, when the player is rotating the handle 195 (striking device for the game ball B) by sticking his/her fingers into the inside of the handle cover 295 (the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291), the main body frame speaker By vibrating the 622 and blowing air into the front cylindrical portion 291a, the player can be surprised, and an unprecedented performance can be performed.

Furthermore, since the handle cover 295 has a cutout opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the body frame 4, the right cutout opening 295b can be pulled with a finger, and the door frame 3 and the like can be pulled. It can be used as a handle when opening.

In addition, since the handle 195 is plated up to the outer ring portion 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and even if only the outer ring portion 195c is touched, the game ball B can be typed.

In addition, since the handle cover 295 has a cutout opening 295b, the rotational position of the handle 195 can be easily adjusted by placing a finger on the outer ring portion 195c and the cutout opening 295b of the handle 195. It can be fixed, and the game ball B can be continuously hit into the game area 5a with a constant strength even if the hand is not twisted continuously. As described above, the game ball B can be hit by rotating the handle 195 in various ways, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be provided in which the player can select a hitting operation suitable for the player.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is slanted so that the right end side is positioned more rearward than the left end side in plan view, and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the hole is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 and can perform the rotation operation without discomfort.

As described above, according to the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the left side is provided to be openable and closable, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is closed so as to be visible from the front. At the lower right corner of the door frame 3, there is a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b projecting radially from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer periphery connecting the tips of the plurality of spoke portions 195b. A handle 195 having a ring portion 195c and a cylindrical handle cover unit 290 extending rearward from the outer ring portion 195c is provided, so that the handle in a conventional pachinko machine is provided. A handle 195 and a handle cover unit 290 in a form never seen before can be seen at the site where the player is, which can give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the player's interest. At the same time, the player can be motivated to play the game with the pachinko machine 1, and the player who is playing in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can play the game. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to play.

In addition, since the player's fingers can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the space between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the player can When the player grips the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 when operating the handle 195 to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a, the player's fingers are inserted into the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, the player can be given a feeling different from the handle of the conventional pachinko machine for the operation of the handle 195, and the player can be entertained and entertained by the operation of hitting the game ball B with a new feeling. can be suppressed.

Then, when the player operates the handle 195 and causes the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to output the production sound, the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 causes the speaker to be output. The air inside the enclosure 624 due to the box 623 vibrates, and the vibration of the air inside the enclosure 624 through the inner space 40a and the port member 47 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2 communicating with the enclosure 624 causes sound pressure. It is emitted forward as (sound wind). At this time, the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 is transmitted to the cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the handle cover by the plurality of vanes 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47. It can be guided into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the opening 291h of the base 291, and into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Sound pressure stimulation can be applied to the player's finger operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted. Accordingly, sound pressure from the port member 47 is supplied to the player's fingers inserted in the handle cover unit 290 through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h according to the game state in the game area 5a. , the player can be surprised, the player can feel the arrival of a chance, and the operation amount of the steering wheel operation can be changed, which can entertain the player and prevent the player from getting bored. , it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, sound pressure (sound wind) from the body frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h. The inside of the unit 290 can be cooled, and the environment around the fingers of the player operating the handle 195 can be made comfortable, thereby relieving the stress on the player and suppressing the loss of interest in the game. can.

In addition, as described above, the handle 195 and the handle 195 may be pressed against the finger of the player operating the handle 195 while inserting the finger into the handle cover unit 290 through the space between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c. The sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 different from the door frame 3 on which the handle cover unit 290 is provided is applied to the grill member 46. Since stimulation is applied by guiding by a plurality of blades 46b, various sensors (handle rotation detection sensor) provided on the handle 195 are reduced compared to the case where the handle 195 is provided with a vibrating device. 189, handle touch sensor 192, single-shot button operation sensor 194, etc.) and the bearing mechanism, etc., and the handle unit 180 can be made difficult to break. It is possible to avoid giving a pleasant feeling, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 has an appearance similar to that of a steering wheel of an automobile. Although the appearance is greatly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine, the player can intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, even a player who sees the pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of the pachinko machine 1 without being confused, and the pachinko machine can be played without hesitation. It is possible to facilitate the selection of the machine 1.

In addition, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided at a portion facing downward on the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 into which the player's fingers can be inserted through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. is provided, when the inside of the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) is viewed from the front, the area below the handle cover unit 290 is visible through the opening 291h and the lower notch opening 295b. Since it is possible to give a sense of openness to the cylindrical handle cover unit 290, it is possible to reduce the player's anxiety about inserting the finger into the handle cover unit 290, and the player can be relieved. The handle 195 can be operated without hesitation.

In addition, a cutout opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided through the portion of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 facing downward, and the port of the outer frame 2 (outer frame lower assembly 40) is provided. Since the member 47 is opened forward, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B or the like enters the handle cover unit 290, it can be discharged downward through the lower notch opening 295b and the opening 291h. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the liquid discharged downward from the cutout opening 295 b and the opening 291 h to enter the port member 47 .

Further, the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer ring portion 195c, and the handle cover unit 295 of the handle cover unit 290 has the same diameter at the front end as the outer ring portion 195c. Since the notch opening 295b is provided, the central hub portion 195a can be grasped and operated in the same way as the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, the spoke portion 195b can be operated with only fingers, and the outer ring The portion 195c can be operated like a steering wheel of an automobile, the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b can be gripped by a finger, or the handle cover unit can be operated by straddling the outer ring portion 195c. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of performing an operation such as pinching the inside and outside of the 290 with fingers and capable of various game ball B hitting operations (handle operation). Therefore, the game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a in a manner that is easy for the player to operate according to the game state, the state of the player, etc., and the player is less likely to get bored. It is possible to enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B, and to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Alternatively, fingers may be hung between the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b of the handle 195 to grasp them, or the inner and outer sides of the handle cover unit 290 may be gripped by fingers while straddling the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. By doing so, the operating position of the handle 195 can be fixed. Therefore, in addition to steering wheel operations similar to those of conventional pachinko machines, steering wheel operations that cannot be performed with conventional pachinko machines can be performed, thereby providing a variety of steering wheel operations to the player. , making it difficult for the player to get bored by entertaining the steering wheel operation.

Also, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 extends rearward from the outer ring portion 195c. The appearance can be such that the 290 is integrated with the handle 195, and the pachinko machine 1 can be improved in appearance to attract the attention of the players.

In addition, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as that of the outer ring portion 195c, it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from increasing more than necessary. By suppressing the game area 5a (door window 101a) from being pressed upward, it is possible to avoid narrowing of the game area 5a, and it is possible to relatively enlarge the game area 5a, The pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous by the large game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to strongly attract the interest of the players.

Furthermore, by appropriately lighting the LED 293a of the handle cover decoration substrate 293, the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be decorated with light. Therefore, even if the player operates the handle 195, the luminous decoration of the handle cover 295 and the outer ring portion 195c is not blocked by the player's hand, and the handle cover 295 and the outer ring portion 195c are conspicuous. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of strongly attracting the interest of players.

A handle 195 is provided at the lower right corner of the door frame 3 on the side opposite to the hinge side, and a notch opening 295b is provided at a portion facing the right side of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, the notch opening 295b can be used as a handle for opening and closing the door frame 3. As shown in FIG. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the door frame 3 with a handle that deteriorates its appearance, and the appearance of the door frame 3 can be improved.

In addition, the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports an outer peripheral ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction, and a flange portion 291e for restricting movement in the front-rear direction, and A guide piece 291g is provided, and even if the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the forward movement of the outer ring portion 195c can be restricted by the guide piece 291g or the like. 195c and spoke portions 195b connecting the outer ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a are not deformed, and the handle 195 can be prevented from being damaged.

In addition, after detecting that the player is touching the handle 195 by the handle touch sensor 192, since the operation of the handle 195 is received and the game ball B is hit, only the spoke portion 195b and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are used. The game ball B can be hit even if the handle 195 is operated in a touched state. It is possible to prevent the hitting of the game ball B in a state in which the handle 195 is not touched, prevent the handle operation using a tool, and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the tray unit viewed from behind. The plate unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 includes an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and the upper plate 201 arranged below the upper plate 201 and game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. and a lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower tray 202 attached to the front surface of the tray base unit 210. and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-like dish unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper dish body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and having the upper dish 201 , and a right side of the upper dish body 212 . Mounting base (illustration omitted) protruding forward attached to the mounting base, Dish unit relay board (illustration omitted) attached to the right of the mounting base, and ball attached to the top surface of the mounting base A rental operation unit 220, an upper tray ball removal pre-unit (not shown) attached below the mounting base, an upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 attached behind the upper tray ball removal pre-unit, It has

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower part of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish main body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. a lower plate ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251; a plate left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 with a space left and right; A plate right decoration unit 275 is provided.

The performance operation unit 300 includes, as a performance operation unit 301 operable by the player, a contact operation unit 302 that can be touch-operated by the player and a press operation unit 303 that can be press-operated by the player. The production operation unit 300 includes a production operation part cover unit 310 having a spherical outer surface, an operation part base 315 housed inside the production operation part cover unit 310 and attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, and an operation part base 315. A ring-shaped effect operation part outer peripheral decoration board 320 attached to the upper surface, an outer periphery board cover 325 covering the upper side of the effect operation part outer periphery decoration board 320, and an operation attached to the rear side of the operation part base 315. and a partial relay board unit 330 .

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit 350, which can protrude upward from the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and the effect operation unit 301 is provided, and the operation unit base 315, and is attached to the effect operation unit 350. A production operation part elevating mechanism 360 that supports the part unit 350 so that it can be raised and lowered, and a projection force adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward projection force of the production operation part unit 350 by the production operation part lifting mechanism 360. there is

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the production operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the production operation unit 301 at the center in the left-right direction faces diagonally upward and forward, and the left side of the production operation unit 300 on the upper surface. An upper plate 201 is arranged on the right side of the production operation unit 300, and a ball renting operation unit 220 is arranged, and a lower plate 202 is arranged on the left side of the production operation unit 300 under the upper plate 201. - 特許庁

[3-5a. Fine plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is shaped like a container that bulges forward from the left-right center in a front view and opens upward. The upper tray 201 (upper tray main body 212) bulges most forward at about ⅓ of the width of the door frame 3 in the horizontal direction from the left end to the right. The upper plate 201 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes to the right in front view from the most bulging part, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. A guide passage portion 201a (Fig. ). The entire bottom surface of the upper tray 201 including the guiding passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the right end side of the guiding passage portion 201a in front view is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.例文帳に追加

When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 extends from a position below the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port (not shown). On the other hand, the outer diameter of the game ball B is inclined so as to become lower toward a position slightly below. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game ball B can be discharged from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. The ball can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper dish ball feeding port.

In addition, the guiding passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B contacts (rolls), the game ball B static electricity can be removed.

[3-5b. lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50 and the like. FIG. 50(a) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the door frame cut horizontally at the portion of the lower tray ball supply port, and (b) is a conventional door frame cut at the same portion as (a). It is a cross-sectional view showing the main part, and (c) is a table comparing the number of game balls stored in the lower tray between the product of the present embodiment and the conventional product. The lower tray 202 is arranged below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. - 特許庁The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a through which the game balls B can be discharged through the bottom wall in the vertical direction. The lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed by a lower tray ball removal lid 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in a plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom plate 202 is inclined so that its bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is positioned below the production operation unit 300 in the left side with respect to the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c in the assembled state of the tray unit 200. - 特許庁

The lower tray 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a can be opened. The stored game balls B can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, when the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, since the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, the ball is moved forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c. The discharged game ball B can be rapidly discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202b of the lower plate 202 is provided in front of the center axis. The lower tray ball supply port 211j is shaped like a cylinder extending straight forward so that the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 150d goes straight to the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211j can be quickly discharged downward from the lower dish ball extraction hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

By the way, when the game ball B is guided straight toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b by the lower tray ball supply port 211j, if the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b is closed by the lower tray ball extraction lid 265, Since the plate ball extraction hole 202b and the lower plate ball supply port 211j are provided in the vicinity of the right end of the lower plate 202, there is a possibility that the game balls B are concentrated in the region on the right side of the center of the lower plate 202. There is Then, when the game balls B concentrated in the right area in the lower tray 202 block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, the game balls B flow from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 toward the lower tray 202 side. As a result, the full-tank detection sensor 154 may be activated and the lower tray 202 may be determined to be full even though there is still room left in the lower tray 202. There is

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50(a), the left side wall (ball guiding portion 213) of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is extended obliquely to the left and forward, as shown in FIG. is tilted to More specifically, the distance between the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c and the front surface of the tray unit base 211 directly behind the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is such that at least one game ball B can flow. It is tilted diagonally to the left and forward so that it becomes a distance.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is positioned to the left of the central axis line (the line indicated by the dashed line) of the rear end (ball outlet 150d) of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. are moving to

As a result, the lowest portion of the lower plate 202 (the portion of the lower plate ball removal hole 202a) is moved leftward by moving the lower plate ball removal hole 202a to the left. In the state where 202a is closed, it is possible to reduce the concentration of game balls B stored on the right side of the lower tray 202. - 特許庁In the lower tray 202, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored from the portion of the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front surface of the tray unit base 211), the lower tray balls are supplied. Since the left side wall of the port 211c extends obliquely and forms a gap between it and the rear end of the lower plate 202 through which the game ball B can flow, the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper plate ball The game ball B released from the post-extraction unit 240 (ball extraction guide path 241c) to the lower tray ball supply port 211c side is guided to the left side in the lower tray 202 along the obliquely extending left side wall and released. , and the game balls B can be properly stored in the entire lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying that the tank is full even though there is a sufficient area for storing the game balls B in the lower tray 202. More game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211. It has a main body 212 and a plate unit relay board 214 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 near the lower right corner.

In addition, the plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 attached to the top of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, and an upper plate ball attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the ball rental operation unit 220. It has a pre-extraction unit (not shown) and an after-extraction upper tray unit 240 attached to the rear side of the tray unit base 211 behind the pre-extraction upper tray unit.

[3-5c-1. Plate unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends laterally across the entire width of the door frame base 101. box).

The plate unit base 211 has an upper plate ball supply port 211a that penetrates in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view and extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear, and an upper plate ball supply port 211a that penetrates in the front and rear direction below the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached on the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at a lower portion on the left side of the left-right center in front view, and a lower plate. A notch portion 211d cut in the right side wall of the portion extending cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c to a size through which the game ball B can pass, and a front view upper right side of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. and an upper plate ball feeding port (not shown) extending vertically and having an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper plate main body 212 .

The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 has a front end opened to the rear wall of the upper tray 201 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a tubular rear end of the upper tray ball passage of the door frame base 101. The opening 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

The lower tray ball supply port 211c has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower tray 202 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a cylindrical rear end that passes through the lower tray ball passage opening 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and connects with the front end of the ball outlet 150 d of the foul cover unit 150 . As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. A notch portion 211d formed in a cylindrically extending portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is connected to the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are released by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222, the upper tray ball feed opening, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, and the upper tray. The ball is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c through the ball feed guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the post-ball extraction unit 240 and the notch 211d.

The upper tray ball feed opening 211a is positioned in front of the ball receiving opening (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the state assembled to the tray base unit 210. The game ball B inside is supplied from the ball receiving opening of the unit 240 after removing the upper tray ball to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

Further, the plate unit base 211 of this embodiment has a ball guiding portion 213 that guides the game ball B supplied into the lower plate 202 to a position far from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The ball guiding portion 213 guides the game ball B guided from the upper tray 201 by the ball extraction guide path 241c to a position far from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 (left portion of the lower tray 202). be. As shown in FIG. 50(a), the ball guiding portion 213 forms part of the inner wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. More specifically, the ball guiding portion 213 forms a left inner wall facing the right inner wall where the ball extraction guide path 241c is opened in the inner wall of the cylindrically formed lower tray ball supply port 211c. It is inclined so as to move leftward from the rear end side to the front end side. Due to the inclination of the left inner wall (ball guide portion 213), at least one game ball B is placed between the front surface of the plate unit base 211 (the rear end of the lower plate 202) and the portion immediately behind the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. A distance (gap) is formed through which the liquid can flow. As a result, when the game ball B, which has flowed through the ball extraction guide portion 241c from the upper tray 201, contacts the ball guide portion 213 from the right side, it is guided left forward by the inclination of the ball guide portion 213, and the game is played. The ball B can be guided to the left end side in the lower plate 202 away from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a in the lower plate 202. - 特許庁In other words, the ball guiding portion 213 can guide the game ball B to a position far from the lowest portion in the lower tray 202 (lower tray ball extraction hole 202a).

By the way, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the lower tray ball supply port 211j in the conventional pachinko machine (also referred to as conventional product) extends straight in the front-rear direction, and thus is guided by the ball extraction guideway 241c. When the game ball B contacts the inner wall on the left side of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, it rolls forward while rebounding to the right, and is sent to a position far from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b in the lower tray 202. Instead, it is stored in the area on the right side of the bottom plate 202 where the bottom plate ball extraction hole 202b is provided. Therefore, in the conventional product, the accumulation of the game balls B (indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 50(b)) concentrates in the region on the right side of the center of the lower tray 202, and the right side in the lower tray 202 When the game balls B concentrated in the area block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, the game balls B are not released from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to the lower tray 202 side, and the tank is full. There is a risk that the detection sensor 154 will be activated and determine that the lower tray 202 is full even though there is still room in the left area within the lower tray 202 .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the ball guide portion 213 is provided, the game ball B flowing through the ball extraction guide portion 241c is guided to the left area in the lower tray 202. can do. Also, in the lower tray 202, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored from the portion of the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front surface of the tray unit base 211), the lower tray balls are supplied. From the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 (ball removal guidance path 241c) The game balls B discharged to the lower tray ball supply port 211c side can be guided to the left side in the lower tray 202, and the game balls B can be accumulated throughout the lower tray 202. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying that the tank is full even though there is a sufficient area for storing the game balls B in the lower tray 202. More game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Further, as evidence of the above effects, the inventors of the present application have found that when the full tank detection sensor 154 is activated, the fuel is stored in the respective lower trays 202 in the product of the present embodiment and the conventional product. The number of game balls B was counted. The game ball B was counted 10 times in each case. As a result, as shown in the table of FIG. 50(c), the lower tray 202 of the present embodiment (product of the present embodiment) holds more game balls B than the conventional product at any time. It was confirmed that it was possible to store about 40% more game balls B than the conventional product on average.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 . The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than the center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper plate body 212 recedes rearward as it goes rightward in front view from the most forwardly bulging portion, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The top plate main body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

The upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion near the right end, whose upper part is closed, slips under the ball lending operation unit 220 when assembled to the plate unit 200 . In addition, the upper plate main body 212 is formed with an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a in the middle portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the left plate decorative board 273, the right plate decorative board 278, and the operation part relay board 332. It is for The plate unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 . The rear surface of the plate unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211 when attached to the plate unit base 211 .

[3-5c-4. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a plan view showing an enlarged portion of the ball rental operation unit in the plate unit of the door frame. This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and cashes a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B are lent to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed, and the ball lending machine This is for returning cash or a prepaid card thrown into the machine after subtracting the amount of the rented game ball B, adjusting the sound volume, and adjusting the amount of light.

The ball rental operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 attached to the top of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, an upper plate ball ejection button 222 located near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and a button on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A translucent disk-shaped ball rental operation base 223 arranged on the right side of the upper tray ball extraction button 222, a ball rental button 224 arranged on the front left side of the ball rental operation base 223, A return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the ball rental operation base 223, a ball rental display unit 226 arranged in the rear lower part of the ball rental operation base 223, and a ball rental button 224 on the outside of the base unit 221. A volume control button 227 arranged in front and a light amount control button 228 arranged on the left side of the volume control button 227 are provided.

The upper tray ball ejection button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and has the letters "ball" on its upper surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball rental display unit 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one cannonball-shaped LED, and can be visually recognized from the player's side through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball ejection button 222 . When the ball lending button 224 is pressed after cash or a prepaid card with a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201 . When a return button 225 is pressed, the rented game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine and returned. A ball lending display section 226 displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display section 226 when the ball lending machine breaks down.

The volume control button 227 is used to adjust the volume of sound for presentation such as music, voice, and sound effects output from the top central speaker and top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4. It is for adjustment. The volume control button 227 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The volume control button 227 has a "+" character in the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character in the center of the other (lower) circle. A pattern is applied to the part of , as if the sound is coming out of the speaker. The volume control button 227 is formed such that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of the volume control button 227 increases the volume, and pressing the "-" side decreases the volume.

The light amount adjustment button 228 is for adjusting the light amount of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 . This light amount adjustment button 228 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The light amount adjustment button 228 has a "+" character in the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character in the center of the other (lower) circle. A pattern of a light bulb is applied to the part of . The diameter of the circle on the "+" side of the light amount adjustment button 228 is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of the light amount adjustment button 228 brightens the light, and pressing the "-" side darkens it.

The volume control button 227 and the light amount control button 228 are colored in different colors (for example, the volume control button 227 is white and the light amount control button 228 is black) so that the player is unlikely to make a mistake.

By the way, when the volume and the amount of light are adjusted by using the contact operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 of the effect operation portion 301, the player participation type effect requiring the operation of the effect operation portion 301 is not executed. Sometimes, the effect operation unit 301 is appropriately operated to display a setting menu for adjusting the volume, the amount of light, etc. on the effect display device 1600, and after selecting an item to be adjusted, the contact operation unit 302 is operated. Since the volume of the sound and the brightness of the amount of light have to be changed, it takes time and effort to adjust the volume and the amount of light. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by operating the volume adjustment button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228, the volume and the light amount can be directly adjusted. can be simplified and adjusted in a short time.

[3-5c-5. Unit after upper plate ball removal]
Mainly referring to FIG. 49, a detailed description will be given of the unit before ball removal of the upper plate and the unit after removal of upper plate ball 240 in the plate base unit 210 . The unit 240 after removing the upper tray ball cooperates with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. It is for discharging B to the lower tray 202 .

The upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feed opening from the rear, and a rear base 241 attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to be vertically slidable. , a spring (not shown) that urges the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. ing.

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward, and has a ball socket (not shown) through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball. A ball feeding guideway 241b that guides the game ball B received in the socket downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward; A ball removal guidance path 241c for guiding the game ball B downward from the position and then guiding it rightward in rear view is provided.

The ball receiving port is opened forward through the upper plate ball feeding port of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guiding passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201 in the state assembled to the plate base unit 210. formed in position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is positioned at the rear of the lower portion in the assembled state of the door frame 3. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The laterally extending portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c protrudes to the right in rear view from the portion where the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. It has an opening on the right side in rear view. A rear cover 244 closes the rear side of the portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending to the left and right. The upper portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c that extends vertically below the ball feeding guideway 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 when assembled to the door frame 3. At the same time, the right end of the laterally extending portion as viewed from the rear is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211 . As a result, the game ball B ejected from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is ejected into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply opening 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper disk ball removal slider 242 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes an operation receiving portion (not shown) projecting forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface on the rear side of the operation receiving portion. and a projecting operation transmission portion 242b. The operation receiving portion has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface that is inclined downward toward the rear, and a lower surface that extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion penetrates the tray unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward. The lower end of button 222 abuts. When the upper tray ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmission part 242b protrudes rearward from the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball extracting member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided on the upper surface. The rod 143c abuts.

The spring has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper disk ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper disk ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper bowl ball extracting slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring.

In the post-upper-disc-ball-extraction unit 240, the upper-disc-ball-extraction slider 242 is positioned at the upper movement end by the biasing force of the spring, and the upper-disc-ball-extraction slider 242 moves through the operation receiving portion of the upper-disc-ball-extraction slider 242. The pull-out button 222 is positioned at the end of upward movement. In addition, since the upper disk ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. A partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b to separate the two.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection opening 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and the ball is sent from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving opening. The game ball B can be sent to the ball launching device 540 side from the hitting ball supply port 142a via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144. - 特許庁

On the other hand, when the upper bowl ball ejection button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring, the upper bowl ball ejection slider 242 moves downward and hits the upper surface of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper bowl ball ejection slider 242. The operating rod 143c of the contacting ball extracting member 143 can move downward, and the ball extracting member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball extracting member 143, and the partition portion 143a moves toward the entrance 141a. It retreats from between the mouth 141b. As a result, the game ball B, which has entered the entry port 141a through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b from the upper plate 201, is discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b opening below the entry port 141a. The Rukoto. Then, the game ball B ejected forward from the ball extraction port 141b passes through the ball extraction guide path 241c and is guided into the lower dish ball supply port 211c from the notch 211d. The game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the tray 202 and discharged into the lower tray 202 .

When the downward pressure on the upper tray ball removal button 222 is released, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the biasing force of the spring, the upper tray ball removal button 222 rises, and comes into contact with the operation transmission part 242b. The ball extraction member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c which is engaged, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 or discharged to the lower tray 202 side by the upper tray ball extraction unit 240. can do.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 48 and the like. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the horizontal direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire plate unit 200. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 includes a lower dish main body 251 attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and forming the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. 211, a lower tray ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251, and the trays attached to the upper front surface of the tray unit body 252 with a space left and right. A left decoration unit 270 and a plate right decoration unit 275 are provided.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 . The lower plate main body 251 extends left and right and has a container shape (dish shape) that is open at the top and rear. The lower tray main body 251 is attached to the lower portion of the front surface of the tray unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially quadrangular shape that extends laterally in a plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction protrudes further forward than the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is formed in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower tray body 251 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by a lower tray ball removal lid 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250 , the outer periphery and part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252 . In addition, the bottom surface of the lower tray main body is located below the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211 when assembled with the tray unit 200. 211c. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200 . The plate unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. The top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward.

The plate unit main body 252 has upper side protrusions 252a which bulge forward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the top and extend downward and are spaced apart from the left and right at the bottom. and a lower front decorative portion 252b that protrudes forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251. - 特許庁

A left plate decoration unit 270 and a right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the front surfaces of the left and right upper side protrusions 252a, respectively.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side swelling portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulge 252a.

Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the plate unit main body 252 is formed between a pair of upper side bulges 252a at the center in the left-right direction, and is provided with an effect operation unit attachment portion to which the effect operation unit 300 is attached. . The performance operation unit mounting portion is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled with the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. .

[3-5d-3. Lower tray ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 27 and 50 and the like. The lower tray ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower tray main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a, the game ball B is stored in the lower tray 202 and the game ball B is discharged from the lower tray 202. It is intended for

The lower tray ball removal unit 260 includes a lower tray ball removal button 263 and a lower tray ball removal lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by operating the lower tray ball removal button 263 .

When the lower tray ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the tray decoration unit 250, the lower tray ball removal button 263 is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b of the tray unit main body 252, and the lower tray ball removal lid. 265 closes the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball extraction lid 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

In a normal state, when the lower tray ball removal button 263 is pushed backward, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is moved to open the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. The game ball B can be discharged below the plate unit 200. - 特許庁

When the lower tray ball removal button 263 is pressed to move the lower tray ball removal lid 265, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 remains in the moved state, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202a remains open. , and the game balls B in the lower tray 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

In order to close the lower tray ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower tray ball removal button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, is pushed rearward and then released. returns to its normal position, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[3-5d-4. Plate left decorative unit and plate right decorative unit]
The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 48 and the like. The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252 a of the plate unit main body 252 . The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 above the plate unit 200 .

The left plate decoration unit 270 includes a left plate decoration body 271 which is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and which has translucency, and a left plate decoration which has translucency penetrating the left plate decoration body 271. It is provided with a lens 272 and a left plate decorative substrate 273 provided on the rear side of the left plate decorative lens 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side swelling portion 252a. The left plate ornament 271 has a semi-circular arc projecting forward, with the center axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. The plate left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

The left plate decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction of the left plate decorative body 271 while being aligned with the front surface thereof. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the left plate decoration substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the left plate decoration body 271 can be decorated with light.

The left plate decoration unit 270 is connected to the lower end of the door frame left side unit 420 at its left end when assembled to the door frame 3 . Since the left plate decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the left plate decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the left plate decoration substrate 273 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the left plate decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The right plate decoration unit 275 includes a right plate decoration body 276 that is semi-cylindrical and extends in the left and right direction and has translucency, and a right plate decoration that has translucency penetrating through the right plate decoration body 276. A lens 277 and a right plate decorative substrate 278 provided behind the right plate decorative lens 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

The plate right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The right plate ornament 276 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending obliquely to the upper right at the right end and the center axis extending left and right at the left end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. The right plate decoration 276 is formed in milky white.

The right plate decorative lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction of the right plate decorative body 276 while being aligned with the front surface thereof. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the right plate decoration substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the right plate decoration 276 can be decorated with light.

The plate right decorative unit 275 is connected to the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430 at its right end when assembled to the door frame 3 . Since the right plate decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the right plate decoration 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the right plate decoration substrate 278 are lit, the entire front surface of the right plate decoration 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 partially protrude upward from the front end of the upper side protrusion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 when assembled on the door frame 3. , and the upper side bulging portion 252a, a step can be formed in which the plate left decorative unit 270 and the plate right decorative unit 275 are higher. As a result, the player can hook his finger on the step between the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 and the upper side swelling portion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. Alternatively, it can be used as a finger hold when operating an effect operation unit 301, which will be described later. In addition, the step between the left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 56 and the like. FIG. 52(a) is a front perspective view of the production operation unit with the production operation button directed upward, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the production operation unit of (a). Fig. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from above, and Fig. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from front and below. be. FIG. 55(a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member is at the upper movement end position, and (b) is a effect operation from the state of (a). FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the part unit has moved to the raised position; FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is in the downward movement end position.

The performance operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the performance when the player participation type performance is executed. It is possible. The performance operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250. - 特許庁

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that can be touch-operated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. (vibration) so that the player can participate not only in the operation of hitting the game ball B but also in the performance during the game. The effect operation section 301 has a contact operation section 302 provided above a pressing operation section 303 . In the effect operation unit 301 , the contact operation part 302 and the press operation part 303 are formed in a circular shape with a diameter about 5/8 the outer diameter of the effect operation unit 300 .

The production operation unit 300 includes a production operation unit cover unit 310 which is provided on the front surface of the plate unit 200 at the center in the left-right direction and has a spherical outer shape, and the production operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the outside and is attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250. An operation unit base 315 to be attached, and an effect operation unit provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs 320a for illuminating and decorating the upper part of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 (unit top cover 312). An outer periphery decoration board 320, an outer periphery board cover 325 attached to the operation part base 315 so as to cover the performance operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 from above, and an operation part relay board unit attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 315. 330 and.

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 includes the effect operation unit 350 having the effect operation unit 301, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 for lifting and lowering the effect operation unit 350, and the projection force of the effect operation unit 350. and a projection force adjustment mechanism 380 for adjusting the projection force. The effect operation section unit 350 is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat upward from the upper surface of the effect operation section cover unit 310 by the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 .

[3-5e-1. Production control unit cover unit]
The effect operation section cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 via the operation portion base 315 . The effect operation section cover unit 310 decorates the outer periphery of the effect operation unit 300 (the periphery of the effect operation section unit 350) at the center of the dish unit 200 in the left-right direction.

The production operation section cover unit 310 has a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 opened upward and rearward, and an annular shape having an insertion opening 312a provided above the unit lower cover 311 and through which the production operation section 301 is inserted. and a unit top cover 312 . The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and lower sides of the operation portion base 315 . The unit upper cover 312 is formed so as to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311 . In other words, the effect operation section cover unit 310 has a substantially spherical outer surface. Incidentally, the effect operation section cover unit 310 of this embodiment has a spherical shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

The effect operation section cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

The front end of the effect operation section cover unit 310 is the front end of the door frame 3 when assembled on the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is the door frame The distance is about 1/2 of the full width of the base 101 in the horizontal direction.

At least the upper unit cover 312 of the effect operation section cover unit 310 is translucent, and can be decorated with light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of the effect operation section peripheral decoration board 320, which will be described later.

The performance operation part cover unit 310 has a front end projecting farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200.例文帳に追加Further, the effect operation section cover unit 310 is connected so that the left plate decoration 271 and the right plate decoration 276 extend outward from both left and right sides of the unit lower cover 311 . As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous, and the integral decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation section base 315 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The rear side of the operation unit base 315 is attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 212 a of the upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 . The operation unit base 315 is covered with the unit lower cover 311 on the front and the bottom, and is covered with the unit upper cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301 on the top. The operation unit base 315 is formed in a container shape with an open top.

The operation unit base 315 includes a substantially cubic box-shaped body portion 315a with an open top, and a flange portion 315b extending outward from the upper end of the body portion and having a circular outer periphery. ing. The main body portion 315a accommodates the effect operation portion unit 350 therein. In addition, the lower ends of a pair of guide shafts 362 and a central shaft 366 of a production operation section elevating mechanism 360 in the production operation section unit 350, which will be described later, are attached to the bottom wall of the main body section 315a. Further, the main body portion 315a rotatably supports the lower end side of the adjusting screw 384 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 on the upper surface of the bottom wall. Further, the board base 331 of the operation section relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear wall of the main body section 315a.

The effect operation section peripheral decoration board 320 is placed on the upper surface of the flange section 315b. Further, an annular outer peripheral substrate cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the effect operation portion outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 therebetween. A unit upper cover 312 is attached to the peripheral board cover 325 .

The upper surface of the flange portion 315 b of the operation portion base 315 is positioned substantially flush with the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 when assembled to the effect operation unit 300 .

[3-5e-3. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operating section relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operating section base 315 . The operation part relay board unit 330 covers the board base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body part 315a of the operation part base 315, the operation part relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the board base 331, and the operation part relay board 332 from behind. and a board cover 333 attached to the board base 331 as shown.

The operation part relay board 332 includes the effect operation part peripheral decoration board 320 (front decoration board 321 and rear decoration board 322), button outer decoration board 355, vibration motor 356, contact detection sensor main body 358, button middle decoration board 364, and operation buttons. It relays connection between the elevation drive motor 367 , the pressure detection sensor 373 , the elevation detection sensor 374 , the protrusion force detection sensor 375 , the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 .

[3-5e-4. Production control unit]
The effect operation section unit 350 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The performance operation section unit 350 is provided so as to face outward from the insertion opening 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the performance operation section cover unit 310, and can function as the contact operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303. is.

The effect operation unit 350 includes a bottomed tubular button body 351 whose upper end side is closed, a disk-shaped contact detection body 352 attached to the upper part of the button body 351, and a button body 351 from below. A cylindrical button sleeve 353 inserted, a disk-shaped button base 354 attached to the lower end of the button sleeve 353 and supported so as to be able to move up and down by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, and arranged above the button base 354 and an annular button exterior decoration substrate 355 having a plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the upper surface thereof.

In addition, the effect operation unit 350 includes a vibration motor 356 arranged between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 attaching the vibration motor 356 to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detection body 352. a contact sensor body 358 connected to and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353 .

The button body 351 is entirely transparent. The button body 351 includes a disk-shaped upper surface portion 351a that is curved to bulge upward, a tubular portion 351b that extends downward from the outer circumference of the upper surface portion 351a, and a tubular portion 351b. and a locking portion 351c protruding downward from the lower end. The upper surface portion 351 a is formed in a shape that constitutes a part of a spherical surface having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the effect operation section cover unit 310 . The upper surface portion 351a is decorated with a circular shape whose diameter is about half the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351 a (cylindrical portion 351 b ) is about 5/8 of the diameter of the effect operation portion cover unit 310 . The length (height) of the cylindrical portion 351b is about 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 351b. The locking portion 351 c is locked to the button base 354 . Incidentally, the button body 351 of this embodiment has a diameter of about 127 mm.

The contact detection body 352 has a circular outer periphery and is formed in a dish shape in which the inner side of a certain width bulges upward from the outer periphery. The contact detection member 352 is located below the circular decoration on the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, and is formed to bulge upward obliquely and have a flat inner surface. Thereby, the contact detection body 352 looks like a part of decoration of the button body 351 . The contact detection member 352 has flat plate-like downward extending pieces 352a extending downward from the left and right ends and the rear end of the outer peripheral edge. The contact detector 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351 a of the button body 351 . The contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal. The contact detection body 352 has a plurality of holes in the punching metal to suppress the capacitance with respect to the entire area, thereby preventing erroneous detection. In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, the light from the LED 364a of the button interior decoration substrate 364 provided below can be transmitted upward, and the central portion of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351 can be satisfactorily controlled. It can be decorated with light emission in a normal state.

The contact detection body 352 is connected to the external electrode terminal of the connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358 . As a result, the contact detection body 352 can function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, and can detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface or side surface of the button body 351. can be done. In other words, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 allow the button main body 351 to function as the contact operation section 302 .

The button sleeve 353 has a vertically extending tubular sleeve body 353a and an annular flange portion 353b extending outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is formed entirely transparent. The outer diameter of the sleeve body 353 a is about 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351 , and the length of the sleeve body 353 a is substantially the same as the length of the tubular portion 351 b of the button body 351 . The button sleeve 353 can upwardly transmit light from the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button external decoration substrate 355 through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 is disc-shaped with a diameter approximately equal to the outer diameter of the button body 351, and is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the open lower end side of the button body 351. As shown in FIG. The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a vertically penetrating at symmetrical portions with respect to the center, a center hole 354b vertically penetrating at the center, and protruding from the inner surface of the center hole toward the center. and a pair of guide pins 354c. The guide shafts 362 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a. The central hole 354b is formed with an inner diameter large enough for the elevation cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c face each other on the same axis and are mounted rotatably around the axis.

The button base 354 extends downward, and further has a flat detection piece 354 d that is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 . The locking portion 351c of the button body 351 of the button base 354 is locked to the outer peripheral surface. A pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted into a pair of guide holes 354a, and the button base 354 is guided so as to be vertically movable. Further, the button base 354 is vertically moved by guiding the pair of guide pins 354 c to the cam portion 371 a of the elevation cam member 371 . The bottom surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the upper ends of the pair of elevating springs 365 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 and is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365 .

A plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted on the upper surface of the external button decoration board 355. As shown in FIG. The plurality of LEDs 355a are arranged in a line on a concentric double circumference. More specifically, the plurality of LEDs 355a are provided at a portion slightly outside the sleeve body 353a of the button sleeve 353 and at a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately lighting the LED 355a of the button exterior decoration substrate 355, the portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 outside the contact detection body 352 and the side surface (peripheral surface) of the button body 351 can be decorated with light.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to the rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight. Vibration motor 356 is arranged such that its rotating shaft extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged so that the rotation axis extends in a direction orthogonal to the advancing/retreating direction of the effect operation section 301 . Also, the vibration motor 356 is provided at a portion on a straight line passing through a pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the effect operation section 301 (the effect operation section unit 350) in the vertical direction. Thereby, the vibration from the vibration motor 356 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the effect operation section 301 . In addition, the vibration caused by the vibration motor 356 can reduce the influence on the pair of guide holes 354a (the pair of guide shafts 362).

The contact detection sensor main body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the contact detection sensor main body 358 includes a sensor IC having a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, etc., an output circuit, and supplies power to the sensor IC and the output circuit. It has a constant voltage circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connector. The contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the capacitance of the sensor electrodes that it has inside. The connector of the contact detection sensor main body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detection body 352 . That is, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can cause the contact detection body 352 to function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance with the sensor electrodes and outputs an ON signal when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined capacitance set by the external resistance. In the present embodiment, the ON signal is output when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined value, but signals in multiple stages may be output according to the magnitude of the capacitance.

The effect operation unit 350 of the present embodiment is provided with a contact detection body 352 that functions as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance by a contact detection sensor main body 358 on the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, it is possible to detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 via the contact detection body 352 . In addition, since the contact detection body 352 of the effect operation unit 350 has a plurality of downwardly extending pieces 352a extending downward, the button main body can be detected with the effect operation unit 350 projecting upward. It is possible to detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the side surface of 351 . Thus, the effect operation section unit 350 can cause the button body 351 to function as the contact operation section 302 with the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 .

The effect operation unit unit 350 is supported by a effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 so as to be vertically movable. When the effect operation section unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351 is aligned with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation section cover unit 310, and the effect operation is performed. The unit 300 looks like one sphere. When the effect operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. By pressing downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, it can function as the pressing operation portion 303. As shown in FIG.

More specifically, when the effect operation section unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), it does not move further downward even if it is pressed, and is in a state in which the pressing operation cannot be performed. . In this normal state, the detection piece 354 d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 . Then, when the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 separates from the press detection sensor 373 and becomes a non-detection state. . Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pushed downward and the effect operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower movement end against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 detects the pressing force. It is detected by sensor 373 . Thereby, the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 350 covers the upper part of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal with the button main body 351, when the contact operation unit 302 is operated, the upper surface of the smooth spherical button main body 351 is touched. As a result, the player does not directly touch the surface of the punching metal having unevenness due to the plurality of holes, and the player can smoothly operate the contact operation unit 302 . Further, since the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351 , by forming minute unevenness or a plurality of streaks on the surface (upper surface) of the button body 351 , an arbitrary tactile sensation can be given to the contact operation part 302 . can be provided, the degree of freedom in designing the contact operation unit 302 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player more can be provided.

In the above description, the button body 351 is transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button body 351 may be made opaque or translucent so that the lower side is difficult to see through the button body 351 . This makes it difficult to see the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal through the button body 351, so that the appearance of the effect operation unit 350 can be improved. Further, when the button body 351 is made opaque, it is desirable to have translucency. As a result, the button main body 351 can be illuminated with light emitted from the LED 355a of the outer button decoration board 355 and the LED 364a of the inner button decoration board 364 provided below. can entertain.

[3-5e-5. Production operation unit lifting mechanism]
The effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation unit base 315, and can move the effect operation unit unit 350 up and down. The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is mounted in the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 below the effect operation unit 350, and has a substantially circular outer circumference. A pair of cylinders arranged symmetrically, the lower ends of which are attached to the bottom wall of the body portion 315a of the operating portion base 315 and the upper ends of which extend upward through the operating portion base 315 and the button base 354. A guide shaft 362 and a disk-shaped upper base 363 which connect the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and have an outer circumference smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353, and are mounted on the upper surface of the upper base 363 to direct light upward. and a button interior decoration substrate 364 on which a plurality of irradiable LEDs 364a are mounted.

In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively inserted and urging the button base 354 upward. and a central shaft 366 that penetrates vertically and has a lower end attached to the bottom wall of the body portion 315 a and an upper end attached to the upper base 363 .

Furthermore, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operating button elevating drive motor 367 attached to the lower surface of the elevating mechanism base 361 so that the rotating shaft protrudes upward, and the rotating shaft of the operating button elevating drive motor 367. a spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368, a spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 that meshes with the lifting drive gear 368 and is rotatably attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361; and a lift cam drive gear member 370 having a central shaft 366 therethrough and rotatably mounted thereon.

In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is connected at the lower end to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366. When rotated, the elevating cam raises and lowers the button base 354. A disk-shaped gear cover 372 is attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to cover the lifting drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes a press detection sensor 373 that is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361 and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and an elevating mechanism base 361 that is attached to the elevation cam drive gear member 370. (Elevation cam member 371) by detecting the rotation position of the elevation detection sensor 374 to detect the elevation of the effect operation unit 350, and the elevation mechanism base 361 attached to the elevation mechanism base 361, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 of the elevation undersprung holding member A projection force detection sensor 375 that detects the projection force of the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the elevation of the 385 is provided.

The lifting mechanism base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a, a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base body 361a, and a pair of guide shafts 362 and lifting springs that penetrate the base body 361a. and a pair of through holes 361c through which 365 can pass. The base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 . A driven gear 369, an elevation cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and a projecting force detection sensor 375 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a. Further, an operation button elevation drive motor 367, an elevation detection sensor 374, and a protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 are attached to the bottom surface of the base body 361a. The lifting mechanism base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operating portion base 315 at the lower end of the leg portion 361b. Thus, a space in which the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 is arranged is formed between the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operating portion base 315 and the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. As shown in FIG. A pair of through-holes 361c are provided in the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 at positions half the diameter of the base body 361a forward and rearward from the center.

The pair of guide shafts 362 pass through a pair of through-holes 361c provided in the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361, forward and rearward from the center, at positions half the diameter of the base body 361a. . The central shaft 366 passes through the center of the base body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 . The pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 have their respective lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 and their respective upper ends attached to the upper base 363 . A pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods.

The upper base 363 is formed to have an outer diameter approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 . The upper base 363 has a lower projection projecting downward. The lower protrusion of the upper base 363 is brought into contact with the upper protrusion of the gear cover 372 to form a space between the upper base 363 and the lifting mechanism base 361 in which the lifting cam member 371 can be accommodated. can.

A plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the upper surface of the button middle decoration substrate 364 are full-color LEDs. The button interior decoration substrate 364 can light-embellish the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 364a.

The pair of lifting springs 365 are coil springs, through which the guide shaft 362 is inserted. The pair of lifting springs 365 have their lower ends in contact with the lower lifting spring holding members 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 and their upper ends in contact with the button base 354 .

The elevation cam driving gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevation cam member 371, and the gear portion 370a. and an elevation detection piece 370c that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape from the top and is notched at two opposing locations and is detected by an elevation detection sensor 374. The elevation cam driving gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevation cam member 371 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevation cam member 371 penetrates the gear cover 372 and is provided between the upper base 363 and the elevation mechanism base 361 . The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart in the circumferential direction by 180 degrees on the cylindrical outer peripheral surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371 a guides the guide pin 354 c of the button base 354 .

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. a second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis; a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d; (see FIG. 55, etc.). The second cam 371 d and the third cam 371 e extend upward to the same height, and the adjacent cam portions 371 a are spaced apart by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354 c of the button base 354 .

Further, the lift cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f that connects with the connecting portion 370b of the lift cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end.

The lift cam member 371 is configured so that when the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a is rotated counterclockwise in plan view of the lift cam member 371, it extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b. is formed in The elevation cam member 371 can guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 by the cam portion 371a by rotating, and the button base 354 (the effect operation portion unit 350) which is urged upward by the elevation spring 365. can be raised and lowered.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the lifting spring 365 and the lifting cam member 371 can pass. Further, the gear cover 372 has an upper protrusion projecting upward at a portion facing the lower protrusion of the upper base 363 . The gear cover 372 forms a space capable of housing the elevation cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevation mechanism base 361 by bringing the upper projection into contact with the lower end of the lower projection of the upper base 363 . be able to.

The pressing detection sensor 373 detects the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (press operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the effect operation unit 350. The press detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 when the effect operation section unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state). This press detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state because the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated when the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved upward by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 from the normal state. Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower movement end against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the press detection sensor 373 detects the button base 354. The detection piece 354d can be detected to detect the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303).

The elevation detection sensor 374 detects the elevation detection piece 370 c of the elevation cam drive gear member 370 , thereby detecting the elevation cam member 371 via the connected portion 371 f connected to the connection portion 370 b of the elevation cam drive gear member 370 . is detected.

The projection force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385 d of the lift unsprung holding member 385 in the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 .

The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can vertically support the effect operation unit 350 via a button base 354 by a pair of guide shafts 362 arranged in the front-rear direction, and the button base 354 is lifted by a pair of elevating springs 365. The effect operation section unit 350 can be urged upward through it. In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 rotates the elevation cam member 371 by the operation button elevation drive motor 367 to move the effect operation unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) up and down with respect to the effect operation unit cover unit 310. can be made In addition, the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 can light-embellish the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the button interior decoration substrate 364 .

In the normal state, the effect operation section lifting mechanism 360 has the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 locked to the locking part 371c provided on the lower end side of the lifting cam member 371 (FIG. 55(a)). ). In this normal state, the effect operation unit 350 is positioned at the downward movement end via the button base 354, and even if the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed downward, the effect operation is performed. The part unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303 is not detected. In addition, in a normal state, the surface (upper surface) of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation section cover unit 310 and the upper surface of the button main body 351 of the effect operation section unit 350 match, and the effect operation section cover unit 310 and the button body 351 form one sphere.

In a normal state (state in which the effect operation section unit 350 is in the lowered position), when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation drive gear 368 in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view, the elevation drive gear 368 is engaged. The elevation cam driving gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view via the driven gear 369, and the elevation cam member 371 connected to the elevation cam driving gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevation cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. The button base 354 moves slightly downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 354c while rolling from the 371c to the left part of the engaging portion 371c of the first cam 371b.

Then, when the guide pin 354c, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b as the elevation cam member 371 rotates, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b toward the second cam 371d, the second cam member 371 rotates. Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is moved upward along the second cam 371d by the biasing force of the lift spring 365. At the same time, the button base 354 rises, and the effect operation section unit 350 is in the state of the raised position. In this state, since the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state.

The lower lifting spring holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 with which the lower end of the lifting spring 365 abuts can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the protrusion force adjusting drive motor 381, although the details will be described later. can. Since the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 can be changed according to the vertical position of the lifting spring lower holding member 385, the effect operation unit 350 is lifted with a projecting force corresponding to the compression amount of the lifting spring 365. Can be protruded into position.

When the effect operating unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is positioned between the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam portion 371d of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in contact with the cam 371e. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the effect operation section unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the button base 354 is restricted. In addition, when the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire effect operation unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) is moved upward, and the upper surface part 351a of the button body 351 is above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. also protrudes upwards.

When the button main body 351 (pressing operation portion 303) of the effect operating unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the state of this raised position, the effect operating unit 350 , and the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372 . When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 is in the lowered position, and the effect operation unit 350 (the pressing operation part 303) is also in the lowered position together with the button base 354.

In this way, when the button base 354 contacts the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373, and the button main body 351 ( Pressing of the pressing operation portion 303) is detected.

In order to return the effect operation section unit 350 (pressing operation section 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. In (b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354, moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 354c). is pressed downward, and the button base 354 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

In addition, when returning the effect operation section unit 350 to the lowered position, the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 moves the lifting spring lower holding member 385 downward to reduce the compression amount of the lifting spring 365. state (see FIG. 56). As a result, the urging force of the elevation spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit 350 upward is weakened, so that the force acting on the third cam 371e of the elevation cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 also increases. It is possible to reduce the load applied to the operation button elevation drive motor 367 that rotates the elevation cam member 371, thereby reducing damage (failure) of the operation button elevation drive motor 367. Also, as the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367, an inexpensive motor with low torque can be used.

Then, when the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b as the elevation cam member 371 rotates, the downward movement of the button base 354 stops, and the guide pin 354c moves toward the first cam. 371b. After that, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the concave locking portion 371c by the urging force of the lift spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 by the button elevation drive motor 367, the effect operation section unit 350 returns to the original lowered position.

In the above description, in the effect operation section lifting mechanism 360, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 counterclockwise to move the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 to the first cam 371b ( An example has been described in which the button base 354 (the button main body 351) is projected from the lowered position to the raised position at once by moving from the engaging portion 371c) to the second cam 371d. In a normal state where the button main body 351 (the production operation section unit 350) is locked by the locking portion 371c of the 371 and is moving to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 moves the lifting cam member 371 in a plan view. You may make it rotate in the direction of rotation. Incidentally, the lifting distance of the button body 351 (the effect operation unit unit 350) by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in this embodiment is about 40 mm.

When the elevation cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in a normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e. will move upward along the When the guide pin 354c is in the middle position of the third cam 371e, if the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 is stopped, the button body 351 can be protruded upward at any position between the lowered position and the raised position. can be stopped. By protruding the button body 351 to a position above the lowered position, the button body 351 can be pushed downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the button body 351 can be pushed downward. can function as

When the button body 351 is projected upward by the third cam 371e, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. is desirable. As a result, the load applied to the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 (operation button elevation drive motor 367) can be reduced, and the operational feeling of pressing the button body 351 can be reduced.

Thus, depending on the rotational position of the elevation cam member 371, it is possible to change the amount of projection of the button body 351 (effect operation section unit 350), depending on the game state (for example, the first start opening 2004 and By varying the amount of projection of the button body 351 according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2005, it is possible to suggest the player's degree of expectation for the game. can.

At least one shallow concave portion capable of engaging the guide pin 354c may be provided in the middle of the third cam 371e of the elevation cam member 371. As shown in FIG. As a result, the button body 351 (the production operation unit 350) can be stably projected to the position of the same amount of projection, and variations in the amount of projection can be prevented. Further, when a concave portion is provided in at least one place in the middle of the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c is engaged with the concave portion so that the operation button elevation drive motor 367 stops the elevation cam member 371 from rotating. There is no need to continue, and the load on the operation button lifting drive motor 367 can be reduced.

[3-5e-6. Projection power adjustment mechanism]
The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The projection force adjustment mechanism 380 changes the amount of compression of the elevation spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit 350 upward, thereby causing the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) to protrude upward ( projection force) can be changed. The projection force adjusting mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 and the base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 .

The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 includes a protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361, and a spur gear-shaped pinion gear attached to the rotation shaft of the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381. 382, a transmission gear 383 that meshes with the pinion gear 382 and is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a that meshes with the transmission gear 383, and from the gear portion 384a An adjusting screw 384, which has a screw portion 384b extending downward in a cylindrical shape and having a spiral groove formed on its outer periphery, through which a central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably supported, and an adjusting screw 384, the pair of guide shafts 362 pass therethrough, and the lower ends of the pair of lifting springs 365 are in contact with each other.

The protrusion force adjusting drive motor 381 is attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to form a gap with the lower surface of the base body 361a. The rotation shaft of the projection force adjusting drive motor 381 protrudes into the gap between it and the base body 361a.

The adjusting screw 384 has a length extending from the bottom wall of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 to the base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 . A screw portion 384b of the adjusting screw 384 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter larger than that of the gear portion 384a.

The lower lifting spring holding member 385 includes a main body portion 385a extending in the front-rear direction, a screw hole 385b that penetrates vertically through the center of the main body portion 385a and is screwed with the screw portion 384b, and a front and rear portion of the main body portion 385a. It has spring holding recesses 385c which are provided at both ends and which are recessed downward to accommodate the lower ends of the lifting springs 365, and flat detection pieces 385d which extend upward from the front end of the body portion 385a. . The lift lower spring holding member 385 is penetrated by the guide shafts 362 at the centers of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c. The detection piece 385 d is detected by the projecting force detection sensor 375 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 .

The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 can rotate the adjustment screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a when the pinion gear 382 is rotated by the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 . The projection force adjustment mechanism 380 rotates the adjustment screw 384 by the projection force adjustment drive motor 381, thereby vertically moving the lifting unsprung holding member 385 through the screw hole 385b that meshes with the screw portion 384b. be able to.

In the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the lift spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c is moved upward, and the compression amount of the lift spring 365 is increased. Become. On the other hand, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the lift spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves downward, and the compression amount of the lift spring 365 becomes smaller (see FIG. 56). reference). That is, when the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member 385 is moved upward, the urging force of the lifting/lowering spring 365 that urges the effect operation section unit 350 upward can be increased, and the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member 385 is moved downward. As a result, the urging force that urges the effect operation section unit 350 upward by the lifting spring 365 can be reduced. As a result, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 can adjust the upward projection force of the effect operation section unit 350 .

The detection piece 385d of the lift unsprung holding member 385 is detected by the projecting force detection sensor 375 when the lift unsprung holding member 385 is raised to the maximum. That is, the detection piece 385d is detected by the projecting force detection sensor 375 when the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 is maximized. As a result, when the protrusion force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d while the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 is moving the lift unsprung member 385 upward, the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 moves the lift unsprung member 385 upward. By stopping the upward movement of 385, further compression of the lifting spring 365 can be prevented, and damage to the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 can be prevented.

In addition, as described above, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the projection force of the effect operation unit 350. Therefore, when the effect operation unit 350 is in the lowered position, the contact detection body 352 detects the button main body. Detecting the contact or approach of an object to be detected (for example, a player's finger, etc.) to 351, the production operation unit unit 350 is protruded by the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 and brought into contact with the object to be detected. Sometimes, the vertical position of the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member 385 may be appropriately selected to vary the projecting force of the button body 351 . As a result, when the button body 351 protrudes upward, the strength applied to the player's fingers or the like can be varied, so that if the button body 351 strongly abuts, something good will happen to the player. It is possible to make the player think that it is not possible, and to increase the player's expectation for the game. Therefore, according to the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, according to the game state (for example, according to the lottery result of the special symbol that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005) By increasing or decreasing the projecting force of the button body 351, it is possible to suggest the player's degree of expectation for the game.

By the way, as a method of changing the biasing force of the spring, it is conceivable to change the biasing force by twisting the spring. However, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring) in order to protrude the effect operation section unit 350, and if the compression coil spring is twisted to change the biasing force, it is impossible to use a force different from the original use. A large amount of stress will act on the compression coil spring, and there is a risk that the internal structure will deteriorate and break at an early stage. On the other hand, in the projection force adjusting mechanism 380 of the present embodiment, by changing the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 by moving the lifting spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction, the projection force ( Since the biasing force) is adjusted, excessive stress does not act on the lifting spring 365, and early deterioration of the lifting spring 365 can be reduced. It can be made to protrude stably over a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the action of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58 and the like. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship of the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board, button outer decoration board, and button inner decoration board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation section. FIG. 58(a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, and FIG. 58(b) is a front view of the plate unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. The performance operation unit 300 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole, and has a performance operation section 301 on the upper surface thereof which can be operated by the player. The effect operation section 301 is composed of a contact operation section 302 capable of being operated by contact or approach of the player's hand, etc., and a pressing operation section 303 capable of pressing operation. The contact operation portion 302 is provided above the pressing operation portion 303 (button main body 351).

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in a state in which the projecting direction of the pressing operation part 303 (the effect operation part unit 350) that can project upward is inclined so that the upper part is positioned forward with respect to the vertical direction. ing. In other words, the center of the effect operation section 301 is positioned forward of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300 . As a result, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can easily see the effect operation section 301.例文帳に追加

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 has the pressing operation part 303 (the effect operation part unit 350) in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button main body 351 of the effect operation part unit 350 is in the state of the effect. It matches the spherical surface of the operation section cover unit 310 . Further, in a normal state, even if the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the pressing operation portion 303 (the effect operation portion unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 looks like a mere spherical ornament to the player, making it difficult for the player to recognize that it is operable.

As shown in FIG. 57, the production operation unit 300 has a production operation unit peripheral decoration board 320 arranged below a unit upper cover 312 surrounding the outer circumference of the pressing operation unit 303 (production operation unit unit 350). , an annular button external decoration substrate 355 and an inner button decoration substrate 364 are arranged inside near the outer edge of the pressing operation portion 303 . The effect operation unit 300 is arranged outside in the order of the button outer decoration board 355 and the effect operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 centering on the inside button decoration board 364 . The LEDs 355a inside the button inner decoration substrate 364 and the button outer decoration substrate 355 are arranged below the contact detection body 352, but since the contact detection body 352 is formed of punching metal, it is translucent. Therefore, the light from them can be transmitted upward (toward the player).

The production operation unit 300 can light-embellish the annular unit upper cover 312 by means of the LEDs 320 a of the production operation section peripheral decoration board 320 . In addition, the LEDs 355a of the button external decoration substrate 355 can be used to decorate the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the upper surface of the button body 351 and the outer peripheral surface. Further, the central portion of the upper surface of the button main body 351 can be decorated with light by means of the LED 364a of the button interior decoration substrate 364. FIG.

Since the plurality of LEDs 320a of the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button outer decoration board 355, and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the button inner decoration board 364 are arranged in rows on the circumference, By sequentially emitting light, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which the light rotates around the center of the pressing operation portion 303 . In addition, since the plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 364a are arranged concentrically, light is emitted from the center of the pressing operation unit 303 to the outside, and light is emitted from the outside to the center of the pressing operation unit 303. It is possible to show the player a lighting effect that converges.

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a lowered position where the pressing operation part 303 (effect operation part unit 350) is aligned with the surface of the unit top cover 312, as shown in FIG. 58(a). state. In this state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303 is disabled. On the other hand, the contact operation unit 302 can enable contact operations in accordance with the player-participation type production to be executed.

As an effect (player participatory effect) in a normal state in which the pressing operation part 303 (the effect operation unit 350) is not projected, for example, an effect image prompting the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed. It displays on the device 1600 and outputs voices, sound effects, and the like. When the contact detection body 352 detects contact (or approach) to the button main body 351, the process proceeds to the next performance stage. When the contact is detected, the LED 355a of the outer button decoration board 355 and the LED 364a of the inner button decoration board 364 emit light to decorate the button body 351, so that the player recognizes that the contact operation has been accepted. The touch operation unit 302 may be given an operational feeling. At this time, the degree of expectation for the game (for example, occurrence of an advantageous game state such as a "jackpot" game in which the player is advantageous) is given to the player by means of the emission color, emission brightness, emission pattern, etc. of the button body 351. You may suggest it.

Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 detects contact (or approach) to the button body 351 , the vibration motor 356 may be driven to vibrate the button body 351 . As a result, it is possible to impart an operational feeling to the contact operation section 302, and to make the player strongly recognize that the contact operation has been accepted. At this time, the vibration motor 356 may give a strong vibration, a weak vibration, or a vibration having a predetermined rhythm to suggest the player's degree of expectation for the game. good.

In addition, as an effect in the normal state (player participation type effect), an effect image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 to prompt the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300, or a voice, sound effect, etc. is output. After that, when the contact detection body 352 detects the contact of the player (hand or finger) with the upper surface of the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises and lowers the button body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350). The urging force of the spring 365 protrudes (pops up) upward. More specifically, in a normal state, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves to the cam portion 371a (first cam). 371b), the button base 354 and the effect operation unit 350 (the button main body 351 and the pressing operation unit 303) vigorously protrude upward due to the urging force of the pair of lifting springs 365 to reach the raised position (Fig. 55(b)). In this elevated position, the upper surface of the button body 351 is positioned significantly higher than the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 protrudes upward. As the button body 351 protrudes upward as described above, the finger touching the button body 351 is pushed upward together with the button body 351, so that the player can be greatly surprised. It can attract a lot of attention.

After that, the game shifts to an effect of pressing the button body 351 (pressing operation section 303), and the player is entertained by the pressing operation of the pressing operation section 303. FIG. More specifically, when the button body 351 (press operation unit 303) is in the raised position and is pressed downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, the button body 351 (the effect operation unit 350) is activated. When the button body 351 moves downward, the upper surface of the button body 351 becomes flush with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 , and the detection piece 354 d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373 . As a result, the pressing operation of the button main body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected, and the presentation can be changed with the pressing operation as a trigger, and the player can be entertained by the player participation type presentation.

In addition, during the above effects, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is used to increase or decrease the protrusion force (momentum) that causes the button body 351 to protrude. may be suggested. Further, when the button body 351 is popped up or pressed, the vibration motor 356 may vibrate the button body 351 .

In the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, when the contact detection body 352 detects that the player's finger or the like approaches within the moving range (within the projecting range) of the button body 351 projecting upward, the button is activated. The main body 351 (the production operation section unit 350) may be made to protrude upward. As a result, the button main body 351 abuts the player's finger or the like and gives an impact, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. In this case as well, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the projection force of the button body 351, so that the player's expectations for the game may be suggested by the strength of the projection force.

In addition, in the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the contact detection body 352 detects that the player's finger or the like is outside the projecting range of the upward projecting button body 351 and within a predetermined distance from the projecting button body 351. The button main body 351 (the production operation section unit 350) may be projected upward when it is detected that the player approaches the . As a result, the wind pressure generated by the protrusion of the button body 351 can be applied to the player's fingers or the like, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the projecting force of the button body 351 is strengthened or weakened by the projecting force adjusting mechanism 380, and the degree of expectation for the game is suggested to the player by the strength of the wind pressure applied to the player's fingers or the like. You can do it.

Furthermore, as an effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be projected upward regardless of the detection of the player's finger or the like by the contact detection body 352. At this time, when the button body 351 is projected with a strong projection force by the projection force adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes vigorously and a sound (projection sound) is generated, so that the projection sound surprises the player. can be done. In addition, when the button body 351 is projected with a weak projection force by the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 projects quietly, so that it is difficult for the player to notice the projection of the button body 351. , the player can be surprised by the fact that the button body 351 suddenly protrudes.

As an effect after projecting the effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351), the pushing force of the lifting spring 365 is weakened by the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the button main body 351 (pressing operation part 303) is generally operated. It is also possible to execute an effect such that a pressing operation similar to that of a pressing button is performed. Alternatively, the pushing force of the lifting spring 365 may be strengthened by the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, and an effect may be executed in which the player presses the button body 351 with a strong force.

Further, as an effect after the effect operation section unit 350 (the button body 351) is projected, an effect may be executed in which the projecting button body 351 is touch-operated. At this time, since the contact detector 352 has a downwardly extending piece 352a extending downward, the side surface of the button body 351 may be touched. Also, at this time, it is desirable to increase the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 by the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380. This makes it difficult to move the protruding button body 351, thereby preventing the button body 351 (contact operation) from moving. 302) can be easily operated.

In addition, as an effect for projecting the effect operation unit 350, in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction so that the button base 354 The guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d to project the button base 354 (button main body 351) from the lowered position to the raised position at once. It is not limited to this.

For example, in a normal state in which the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked by the locking portion 371c of the elevation cam member 371 and the button main body 351 (the effect operation section unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the operation button is lifted and lowered. The drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 in the clockwise direction in plan view, thereby moving the guide pin 354c from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and moving the elevation cam member 371 in the middle of the third cam 371e. may be stopped so that the upward projection of the button body 351 is stopped at a position between the lowered position and the raised position. At this time, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 .

In this way, even when the button body 351 is protruded halfway by the third cam 371e of the elevation cam member 371, the button body 351 can be pressed, and the button body 351 can function as the pressing operation portion 303. Thus, the player can enjoy the player-participation type production. In this case, since the amount of upward protrusion of the button body 351 can be varied according to the rotational position of the elevation cam member 371, the degree of expectation for the game can be suggested according to the amount of protrusion of the button body 351. , can entertain the player.

Furthermore, as an effect of pressing the projected effect operation unit 350 (button body 351), after projecting the effect operation unit 350, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward to compress the lifting spring 365. be minimized. As a result, since the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 is in the weakest state, the effect operation section unit 350 can be pressed with a light (weak) force, and the operability of the pressing operation is improved. can entertain. In addition, as an effect of pressing the effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351), the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved to an appropriate position in the vertical direction according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn. The biasing force may be any strength from the strongest to the weakest. As a result, the player can be made to press the effect operation unit 350 strongly or weakly, so that the player can be entertained by the difference in the operation force of the effect operation unit 350, and more diverse effects can be achieved. An effect can be presented, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

In addition, as an effect using the effect operation unit 300, a contact detection body is provided so that the contact of the player's finger or the like to the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351) can be detected at a plurality of contact stages (approach stage). A plurality of stages of threshold values corresponding to the capacitance of 352 may be provided, and the effect may be changed according to each stage. In other words, focusing on the fact that the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 increases as the player's finger or the like approaches the button body 351 (contact detection body 352), a plurality of threshold values are set for the magnitude of the capacitance. may be provided to detect in multiple stages and be utilized for production. Specifically, for example, a stage where the player's fingers or the like are away from the button body 351 by a predetermined distance or more, a stage where the player's fingers or the like are within a predetermined distance from the button body 351 and are not in contact with the button body 351, By dividing the stage into stages in which a player's fingers or the like are in contact with the button body 351, etc., and changing the performance according to each stage, even one contact detection sensor body 358 presents a variety of performances to the player. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored and suppresses the decline in interest.

In the above-described embodiment, as a normal state of the production operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 385 has been moved upward, but this is not a limitation, and as shown in FIG. It may be in a state of being moved downward. As a result, since the lift spring 365 is not strongly compressed in a normal state, early deterioration (fatigue) of the lift spring 365 can be suppressed. Further, the urging force of the strongly compressed lift spring 365 can prevent early deterioration (fatigue) of the button base 354 and the lower lift spring holding member 385 .

As described above, according to the production operation unit 300 of the present embodiment, since it can be used for various patterns of player participation type production, the player can be entertained with various productions, and the player is bored. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by making it difficult.

By the way, the effect operation unit 300 is provided with an annular (two circular arcs combined) effect operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 on the upper part of the spherical effect operation part cover unit 310, and the effect operation part outer periphery A contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided in the effect operation section unit 350 that moves up and down inside the decoration board 320 . In addition, inside the button sleeve 353 of the effect operating unit 350, a button middle decoration substrate 364 whose position is fixed is provided. Since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, when the effect operation unit 350 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the contact detection sensor main body 358 (sensor electrode ) comes close to the production operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 and the button middle decoration board 364, and the proximity of the production operation section outer circumference decoration board 320 and the button middle decoration board 364 changes the capacitance of the sensor electrode, and the contact detection sensor There is a possibility that the main body 358 may make an erroneous detection.

Therefore, a conductive shield connected to the ground (GND) is provided between the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and between the button inner decoration board 364 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. (For example, punching metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) may be provided. As a result, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the production operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 or the inside button decoration board 364 changes, the contact detection sensor main body 358 is moved by moving the production operation section unit 350 up and down. , and between the production operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 and the button middle decoration board 364, a shield connected to a ground (GND) that does not change the distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 allows the production operation section outer periphery decoration board 320 and the button middle decoration board It is possible to reduce the influence of the change in capacitance due to the approach of the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, and to prevent erroneous detection in the main body 358 of the contact detection sensor.

[3-5f. Another embodiment of the plate unit]
Next, a plate unit 200 of an embodiment different from the above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like. FIG. 59 is a plan view of an effect operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are provided in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit. FIG. 60(a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and (b) shows the contact detection sensor main body and the plurality of contact detection bodies in (a). and (c) is a representation in which the left plate decoration unit, the right plate decoration unit, and the effect operation unit, etc. of the plate unit can move forward and backward. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which contact detection bodies are provided on the front side and the rear side of an operation unit or the like; FIG. 61(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative touch detector, and FIG. 61(b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. In addition, in FIGS. 59 to 61, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 59, the contact detection body 352 is divided into left and right contact detection body 390L and right contact detection body 390R on the lower side of the button main body 351 of the effect operation unit 350. A left contact detection sensor main body 391L and a right contact detection sensor main body 391R are connected to the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R, respectively. According to this embodiment, on the top surface of the button body 351, for example, when the player moves his or her finger or the like from the left side to the right side, when the player's finger or the like is positioned on the left side of the button body 351, The capacitance of the left contact detection body 390L changes and the left contact detection sensor main body 391L becomes detection, while the capacitance of the right contact detection body 390R does not change and the right contact detection sensor body 391R remains non-detection. becomes. Then, when the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button main body 351, the capacitance of both the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R changes, causing the left contact detection sensor body 391L and the contact detection sensor body to change. Both right 391R are detected. Furthermore, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detection body 390L returns to its original state, and the left contact detection sensor body 391L becomes non-detection, and the electrostatic capacity of the right contact detection body 390R The capacitance has changed and the right contact detection sensor main body 391R continues to detect.

In this way, the combination of detection and non-detection of the left contact detection sensor main body 391L and the right contact detection sensor main body 391R by the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R and the pattern of the change, the movement of the player's fingers etc. can be detected. As a result, it is possible to detect contact operations with more diverse movements, and to present to the player a player-participation-type effect that allows the contact operation unit 302 to perform various contact operations. , the player-participation-type effect that operates the contact operation unit 302 can be more enjoyable. It should be noted that more complicated motions can be detected by increasing the number of contact detection bodies.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60( a ) is an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to one contact detection sensor body 392 . According to this embodiment, a single contact detection sensor main body 392 detects contact of a human body or the like at any one of the contact detection bodies 393 in a state in which the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of mutually different locations. can do.

For example, by distributing a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 inside (lower side) of the button body 351, even if the player's finger or the like touches any part of the surface of the button body 351, the A contact can be detected by the contact detection body 393, and the accuracy of detecting contact with the contact operation unit 302 can be improved.

In addition, a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 may be used as a part of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch (for example, a part where the player may get injured, or where there is a risk of causing annoyance to other players). A certain part, a part where there is a risk of fraudulent conduct, etc.) may be provided so that when any of the contact detectors 393 detects a human body or the like, a caution or warning may be issued.

Further, the embodiment shown in FIG. 60(b) is a switching mechanism that connects only one of the contact detection bodies 393 to the contact detection sensor body 392 between one contact detection sensor body 392 and a plurality of contact detection bodies 393. This is an example in which a portion 394 is provided. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to one of the plurality of contact detection bodies 352 by the switching unit 394, it is possible to detect contact of a human body or the like only at a desired site (contact detection body 352). . The switching unit 394 may be "switched by a switching circuit using relays or transistors", "switched by other electronic circuits", or "a movable member (for example, a movable dish left decoration as shown in FIG. 60(c)." The unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 are switched along with the movement".

For example, in the production operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302), a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are arranged in a distributed manner, and a player participation type production is executed such that the parts detected by each contact detection body 393 are touched in order. Sometimes, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is switched in the order of touching by the switching part 394, and the contact detection body 393 detects whether or not the player's finger or the like touches. good. As a result, it is possible to present to the player a player-participation-type presentation with a high game quality by the plurality of contact detection bodies 393, and to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60(c), when the left plate decoration unit 270, the right plate decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 are configured to move forward and backward, the front side of the effect operation unit 300 is the first When the contact detection body 393a is provided and the second contact detection body 393b is provided on the rear side of the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300, and the effect operation unit 300 and the like are projected forward, The first contact detection body 393a and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching part 394, and when the effect operation unit 300 and the like are retracted, the second contact detection body 393b and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching part 394. You may make it switch so that it may carry out.

As a result, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like is protruded (moved) forward, the contact or approach of the player is detected by the first contact detection body 393a, and the forward movement of the effect operation unit 300 or the like is stopped. to As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 300 or the like from unnecessarily pressing the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, thereby avoiding giving the player an unpleasant feeling. be able to.

On the other hand, if the effect operation unit 300 or the like is projected forward, a gap may be formed behind the effect operation unit 300 or the like. If the operation unit 300 or the like is retracted to the initial position, the player's fingers or the like may be caught and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, the second contact detection body 393b is switched to be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 by the switching portion 394 when the effect operation unit 300 or the like moved forward is moved backward. Then, when the player's finger or the like is detected by the second contact detection body 393b, the rearward movement of the effect operation unit 300 or the like is stopped, and the finger or the like is released from the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like. is notified to the player, and only when the second contact detection body 393b is in a non-detection state, the effect operation unit 300 and the like are moved backward to return to the initial state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured due to the gap behind the effect operation unit 300 and the like, and the safety of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 61(a), the contact detection body 395 for detecting the contact of the player's fingers or the like has a star-shaped outer shape to have decorativeness (design). The shape of the decorative contact detection body 395 is not limited to a star shape, but is circular, polygonal, geometrical, a shape imitating a predetermined character, or a shape imitating a predetermined item. A shape, a shape imitating a predetermined logo, a frame-like shape, or the like may be used. Thereby, the contact detection body 395 which can be seen through the transparent button body 351 has decorativeness (design), so that the appearance of the button body 351 and the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the contact detection body 395 itself. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the contact detection body 352 is formed of punching metal, but the contact detection body is not limited to this. It may be formed by metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, or the like, and the same effect as described above can be obtained. It should be noted that the contact detection body is preferably provided on the back side of the transparent surface member so that the player's fingers do not come into direct contact with it. can be smooth.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the button interior decoration substrate 364 (LED 364a) is provided below the contact detection body 352, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. A contact detection body 397 may be provided under the transparent surface member 396, and a decoration body 398 may be provided therebelow. As a result, the decoration body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397, so that the decorativeness of the performance operation unit provided with the surface member 396 can be enhanced, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. can.

In the embodiment of FIG. 61(b), the contact detection body 397 is formed by metal vapor deposition, and in a normal state, the metallic luster of the contact detection body 397 prevents the decorative body 398 provided below from being visually recognized. Alternatively, the decoration 398 can be visually recognized through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397 by illuminating the decoration 398 with an LED provided below the contact detection body 397 by detecting contact with the surface member 396 or the like. good.

Also, the contact detection body 352 may be formed so that it cannot be recognized by the player. Here, examples of the unrecognizable contact detection body include "a body formed of a transparent member" and "a body formed so as to be seen integrally with the decoration of the surface member such as the button body". As a result, since the effect operation unit 301 provided with the contact detection body 352 cannot recognize the contact detection body 352, it does not detect the contact of the player's finger or the like or perform a contact operation. For example, when a predetermined player-participation type effect is executed and the player's finger or the like touches or approaches the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 moves the button body 351 upward. By causing the player to notice the existence of the contact detection body 352 (contact operation part 302) for the first time, the player can be greatly surprised, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decline in interest. can be done.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65 and the like. Figure 62 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. 1 is a perspective view seen from . FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view taken along line Wu-Wu in FIG. 62(a). The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421. A door frame left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422 a are mounted vertically and arranged at regular intervals on the front surface, and a door frame left side base 421 are attached to the lower front surface of the door frame left side base 421. The front side of the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 and the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted vertically at regular intervals on the front surface are covered. A left side upper reflector 424 attached to the door frame left side base 421, a left side lower reflector 425 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and a door frame left side decorative body 426 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the left side upper reflector 424 and the left side lower reflector 425 .

In addition, the door frame left side unit 420 includes a left side upper light guide member 427 that guides forward the light from the first LED 422 a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 , and upper and lower parts of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 . From the left side middle light guide member 428 that guides forward the light from the first LED 423a above the center in the direction, and the first LED 423a below the center in the vertical direction on the lower decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame and a left-side lower light guide member 429 that guides the light forward.

The door frame left side base 421 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens forward. The door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, like the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and the inner layer 3a is partly outside. A circular or radial pattern is formed by penetrating the layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. That is, the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the door frame left side base 421 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a). ). When molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted on the front surface of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction. An LED 422b is mounted. A 24-bit LED driver 422c having a unique address for causing the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b to emit light is mounted on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame.

A total of 12 full-color LEDs, ie, four first LEDs 422a and eight second LEDs 422b, are mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422. As shown in FIG. Moreover, the first LED 422a having the second LEDs 422b on both upper and lower sides is provided in the center (the center between them) between the second LEDs 422b. Also, at least the second LED 422b is a wide-angle top-view type LED that can irradiate light within an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets of two from the top, three from the third to the fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to the eighth from the top. divided. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit full-color light from the four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups. Thus, one set is controlled by a total of 15 systems, ie, 3 systems.

Although not shown, this door frame left side upper decorative board 422 has two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power for driving the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the LED driver 422c. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. are connected. Then, in the LED driver 422c of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), two sets of The four first LEDs 422a divided into three groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups can be caused to emit light with appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and the right side thereof is formed unevenly. A plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 at regular intervals in the vertical direction. An LED 423b is mounted. A 24-bit LED driver 423c having a unique address for causing the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b to emit light is mounted on the door frame left side lower decoration board 423. As shown in FIG.

A total of 18 full-color LEDs, ie, 6 first LEDs 423a and 12 second LEDs 423b, are mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. As shown in FIG. Moreover, the first LED 423a having the second LEDs 423b on both upper and lower sides is provided in the center (the center between them) between the second LEDs 423b. At least the second LED 423b is a wide-angle top-view type LED capable of irradiating light within an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets of two LEDs in order from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 423b are 3 LEDs from 1st to 3rd from the top, 3 from the 4th to 6th from the top, and 7th to 9th from the top. , and three from the 10th to 12th from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit full-color light from the 6 first LEDs 423a divided into 3 groups and the 12 second LEDs 423b divided into 4 groups. Thus, one set is controlled by a total of 21 systems, ie, 3 systems.

Although not shown, this door frame left side lower decorative board 423 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the LED driver 423c. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. are connected. Then, in the LED driver 423c of the door frame left side lower decoration board 423, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), three sets of The six first LEDs 423a divided into four groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups can be caused to emit light in appropriate colors and intensities for each group.

The left side upper reflector 424 has a through hole 424a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, and corresponds to the first LED 422a. A tubular holding tube 424b extending in the front-rear direction is formed at the position. The left side upper reflector 424 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 424a abuts on the front surface of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, and the front side around the through hole 424a faces forward. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 422b can be widely diffused forward.

A cylindrical light guide shaft portion 427a of a left side upper light guide member 427 described later is inserted into the holding tube 424b of the left side upper reflector 424, thereby holding the light guide shaft portion 427a straight in the front-rear direction. is. This holding tube 424b is provided in the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left upper light guide member 427 projecting forward through the holding cylinder 424b, the second light guide plate 422 of the door frame left upper decorative substrate 422 facing through the through holes 424a on both upper and lower sides thereof is formed. The light from the LED 422b irradiates the light guide shaft portion 427a with a uniform amount of light from both upper and lower sides, so that the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a is prevented from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426. be able to.

Further, the left side upper reflector 424 is provided with a mounting hole for mounting to the door frame left side base 421 in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is prevented from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 .

The left side lower reflector 425 has a through hole 425a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and corresponds to the first LED 423a. A cylindrical holding tube 425b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The left side lower reflector 425 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 425a abuts on the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the front side around the through hole 425a faces forward. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 423b can be widely diffused forward.

A columnar light guide shaft portion 428a of a left side middle light guide member 428 and a columnar light guide shaft portion 429a of a left side lower light guide member 429, which will be described later, are inserted into the holding tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. Thus, the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a are held straight in the front-rear direction. This holding tube 425b is provided in the center between the through holes 425a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 that protrude forward through the holding tube 425b, the through holes 425a on both upper and lower sides thereof are formed. The light from the second LED 423b of the lower decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame, which faces more closely, irradiates the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a with a uniform amount of light from both upper and lower sides. It is possible to prevent the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from appearing on the back side of the side decorative body 426.

Further, the left side lower reflector 425 is provided with an attachment hole for attachment to the door frame left side base 421 at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is prevented from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 .

The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. The door frame left side decorative body 426 has a plurality of openings 426a penetrating in the front-rear direction at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the horizontal direction. The plurality of openings 426 a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding tube 424 b of the left side upper reflector 424 and the holding tube 425 b of the left side lower reflector 425 . In these openings 426a, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left middle light guide member 428, the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left lower light guide member 429, are inserted from behind. The door frame left side decoration 426 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421 . In addition, the door frame left side decorative body 426 further includes a decorative portion 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction in a constant arcuate recessed shape so as to avoid the plurality of openings 426a. are doing.

The left-side upper light guide member 427 has four light guide shaft portions 427a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 427b that connects the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 427a. , made of a transparent material. The four light guide shafts 427a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424. As shown in FIG. Further, the light guide shaft portion 427a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 424b. Each light guide shaft 427a passes through the holding tube 424b of the left upper reflector 424 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426. It will match the surface of the side decoration 426 . The left-side upper light guide member 427 guides the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left-side upper decorative substrate 422 forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit bright light.

The left-side center light guide member 428 has three light guide shaft portions 428a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 428b that connects the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 428a. , made of a transparent material. The three light guide shafts 428a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the upper three holding cylinders 425b of the left-side lower reflector 425. As shown in FIG. In addition, the light guide shaft portion 428a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 428a passes through the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426. It will match the surface of the side decoration 426 . This left side middle light guide member 428 guides the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 forward by the light guide shaft portion 428a, and can irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit bright light.

The left-side lower light guide member 429 has three light guide shaft portions 429a extending back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 429b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 429a. , made of a transparent material. The three light guide shafts 429a are vertically spaced at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three holding cylinders 425b on the lower side of the left-side lower reflector 425. As shown in FIG. Further, the light guide shaft portion 429a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 429a passes through the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening portion 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426. It will match the surface of the side decoration 426 . The left side lower light guide member 429 guides the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 forward by the light guide shaft portion 429a, and can irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be brightly illuminated.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the color of the circular or radial patterned portion of the door frame left side base 421 is the same color as the circular or radial patterned portion of the handle cover 295 . In addition, the color of the portion of the door frame left side base 421 outside the circular or radial pattern is the same as the color of the portion of the handle cover 295 outside the circular or radial pattern.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the part above the center in the vertical direction projects slightly forward than the part below, and the vicinity of the lower end gently curves to the right. The upper end of the door frame left side unit 420 is located above the door window 101a and below the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, and the lower end thereof is below the door window 101a and located on the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. is located above the speaker mouth 211b in the . The upper part of the door frame left side unit 420 is positioned outside the left side of the door frame top unit 450 . The door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and looks like a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

According to the door-frame left-side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the door-frame left-side upper decoration substrate 422 and the door-frame left-side lower decoration substrate 423 are placed at a certain distance rearward from the front surface of the door-frame left-side decoration 426 . is provided, the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted on them is sufficiently spread and is irradiated to the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the door frame The left side decoration body 426 can be uniformly decorated with light.

In addition, light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 provided at a position away from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 rearward. is guided forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a of the upper left light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the middle light guide member 428 on the left side, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the lower light guide member 429 on the left side. As a result, the portion of the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be illuminated more brightly than the other portions.

Also, the first LED 422 a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 , the first LED 423 a of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 , the light guide shaft portion 427 a of the left side upper light guide member 427 , and the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are provided in the center between the adjacent two second LEDs 422b and 423b. As a result, the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b on both sides of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a irradiate the light with an even amount of light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected onto the left side decorative body 426 from behind, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 is evenly distributed. It can be decorated with light emission in a plane.

Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 has a decorative portion 426b extending along the width center in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 426a. As a result, even if the light from the second LED 422b or the second LED 423b projects the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a onto the door frame left side decorative body 426, , Since the decorative portion 426b is provided at the portion where the shadow is projected, the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a can be made difficult to understand, and the left side of the door frame The appearance of the luminous decoration of the side decorations 426 can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70 and the like. Figure 66 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a front view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the door-frame right side unit from the back. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame right-side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame right-side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A--E in FIG. 66(a). FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 66(a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the door frame right side base 431 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame right side base 431. A door frame right side upper decorative board 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted vertically on the front surface at regular intervals, and a door frame right side base 431 are attached to the lower front surface of the door frame. A door frame right side lower decorative board 433, a door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and a door frame right side lower side are mounted. A right side reflector 434 attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the decorative substrate 433, and a door frame right side attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the right side reflector 434. A side decoration 435 is provided.

The door-frame right-side unit 430 includes a right-side upper light guide member 436 that guides forward the light from the first LED 423a of the door-frame right-side upper decorative board 432, and a right-side lower decorative board 433 of the door-frame right-side lower decorative board. A right-side lower light guide member 437 that guides light from one LED 433a forward is provided.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 is attached so as to cover the left side of the door frame right side base 431, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating left and right in a predetermined shape. The left side decoration 438 is provided between the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side base 431 so as to close the decoration hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decoration 438. A light-transmitting right side left lens 439 having a fitting decorative portion 439a, and a plurality of light-transmissive right side left lenses 439 and a right side base 431 of the door frame are mounted so as to cover the right side of the door frame right side base 431, and penetrate left and right in a predetermined shape. A door frame right side right side decoration 440 having a decorative hole 440a is provided between the door frame right side right side decoration 440 and the door frame right side base 431. A translucent right-side right lens 441 having a decorative portion 441a fitted to close the decorative hole 440a of the decorative body 440 is provided.

The door frame right side base 431 extends vertically with a substantially constant width on the left and right. The door frame right side base 431 has a rear end extending vertically over the entire height, and a front end extending substantially straight downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction, and then curved rearward. After extending diagonally rearward, it curves vertically near the bottom and extends vertically to the bottom end.

The door frame right side base 431 has a decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and a decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 (the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the right side right lens 439). A plurality of reflector portions 431a recessed from the left and right side surfaces and extending forward to the front end are provided at a portion of the height where the decorative portion 441a) of 441 is provided. The reflector portions 431a have rear ends that are inside the decorative portions 439a and 441a, and are inclined toward the side surfaces, and have curved bottom surfaces.

In addition, the door frame right side base 431 is provided with a decorative hole 438a and a decorative hole 440a which are provided behind the front-back direction center in the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440. The reflector portion 431a corresponding to (decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441) is a , penetrates in the left and right direction (they are recessed from the left and right sides and connected to each other).

These reflector portions 431a of the door-frame right-side base 431 reflect light emitted backward from a third LED 432c of a door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and a third LED 433c of a door-frame right-side lower decorative substrate 433, which will be described later. The light is reflected in the direction, and the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 are decorated with light (see FIG. 70, etc.).

The door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction. An LED 432b is mounted. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface of the upper decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame with a gap in the vertical direction. Further, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 432d having a unique address for causing the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, and the third LED 432c to emit light.

On this door frame right side upper decorative board 432, a total of 16 full-color LEDs are mounted, including four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c. Moreover, the first LED 432a having the second LEDs 432b on both upper and lower sides is provided in the center (the center between them) between the second LEDs 432b. Moreover, at least the second LED 432b and the third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of emitting light within an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three sets of two from the top, three from the third to the fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to the eighth from the top. divided. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets of the top two and the remaining two.

This door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is divided into two sets of first LEDs 432a, three sets of second LEDs 432b, and two sets of third LEDs 432c. and the third LED 432c to emit light in full color, respectively, there are 21 systems in total, 3 systems for one set. On the other hand, the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 can control up to 24 systems. He is trying to control a total of 24 systems|strains of 3 systems|strains for 1 group above the 3rd LED433c divided into 2 groups.

Although not shown, this door frame right side upper decorative board 432 includes a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, a third LED 432c, two third LEDs 433c on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and an LED Two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and an LED A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires, one clock line for synchronizing the driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510, is connected. Then, in the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), two sets of 4 first LEDs 432a divided into 4, 8 second LEDs 432b divided into 3 groups, 4 third LEDs 432c divided into 2 groups, and 2 The two third LEDs 433c in the upper group out of the grouped groups can be caused to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 433a are mounted on the front surface of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction. An LED 433b is mounted. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface of the lower decoration board 433 on the right side of the door frame at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, the door frame right side lower decoration board 433 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for causing the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c to emit light.

On this door frame right side lower decorative board 433, a total of 22 full-color LEDs, ie, 6 first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and 4 third LEDs 433c are mounted. Moreover, 1st LED433a in which 2nd LED433b is provided in both upper-lower sides is provided in the center (center between) of those 2nd LED433b. At least the second LED 433b and the third LED 433c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of emitting light within an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets of two LEDs in order from the top. In addition, the twelve second LEDs 433b are three from the first to third from the top, three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, and from the seventh to the ninth from the top. , and three from the 10th to 12th from the top. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two.

This door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is divided into three sets of first LEDs 433a, four sets of second LEDs 433b, and two sets of third LEDs 433c. and the third LED 433c to emit light in full color, respectively, there are 27 systems in total, 3 systems for one set. On the other hand, the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decoration board 433 can control only up to 24 systems at the maximum. Among them, 3 systems for one set on the upper side are controlled by the LED driver 432d of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the front side, and the third LED 433c on the rear side ) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the lower decoration board 433 on the right side of the door frame. This can suppress an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although illustration is omitted, this door frame right side lower decorative board 433 has two LEDs for supplying electric power for driving a first LED 433a, a second LED 433b, two lower third LEDs 433c, and an LED driver 433d. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. A clock line and a distribution cable consisting of four electric wires are connected. Then, in the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decoration board 433, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), three sets of Six first LEDs 433a divided into four sets, twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four sets, and two third LEDs 433c in the lower set of the two sets, each set It is possible to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity every time.

The right side reflector 434 is formed with through holes 434a penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the second LED 433b of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. In addition, a cylindrical holding tube 434b extending back and forth is formed at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 434a abuts on the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the front surface of the through hole 434a. Around the sides it is shaped like a dish widening forward. Thereby, the light from 2nd LED432b and 2nd LED433b can be diffused widely ahead.

A columnar light guide shaft portion 436a of a right side upper light guide member 436 and a columnar light guide shaft portion 437a of a right side lower light guide member 437, which will be described later, are inserted into the holding tube 434b of the right side reflector 434. , the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are held straight in the front-rear direction. This holding cylinder 434b is provided in the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a projecting forward through the holding cylinder 434b, the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 facing through the through holes 434a on both upper and lower sides, The light from the second LED 433b of the lower decorative substrate 433 on the right side of the door frame irradiates the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a with a uniform amount of light from both upper and lower sides. It is possible to prevent the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from appearing on the back side of 435.

Further, the right side reflector 434 is provided with a mounting hole for mounting to the door frame right side base 431 at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is prevented from appearing on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 .

The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. This door frame right side decorative body 435 has a plurality of openings 435a penetrating back and forth at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the horizontal direction. The plurality of openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinders 434b of the right side reflector 434. As shown in FIG. The tip ends of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from behind. The door frame right side decoration 435 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 . The door frame right side decoration 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decoration 426 . In addition, the door frame right side decorative body 435 further includes a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction in a constant shape recessed in an arc so as to avoid the plurality of openings 435a. are doing.

The right-side upper light guide member 436 has four light guide shaft portions 436a extending back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 436a. , made of a transparent material. The four light guide shafts 436a are provided vertically at regular intervals from above the right side reflector 434 so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 434b. Further, the light guide shaft portion 436a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 436a passes through the holding tube 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The surface of the decorative body 435 is matched. This right side upper light guide member 436 guides the light from the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a, and can irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be brightly illuminated.

The right-side lower light guide member 437 has six light guide shaft portions 437a extending back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 437b connecting the lower ends of the six light guide shaft portions 437a. , made of a transparent material. The six light guide shafts 437a are vertically spaced apart from the bottom of the right side reflector 434 so as to correspond to the six holding cylinders 434b. Further, the light guide shaft portion 437a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 437a passes through the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The surface of the decorative body 435 is matched. This right side lower light guide member 437 guides forward the light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 by the light guide shaft portion 437a, and can irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be brightly illuminated.

The door frame right side left side decoration body 438 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decoration holes 438a penetrating in the left-right direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). The door frame right side left side decoration 438 has a front end side formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decoration 435 . The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, the door-frame right-side left-side decorative body 438 is two-color-molded with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, in the same manner as the handle cover 295 and the door-frame left-side base 421 described above. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, thereby forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71(a)). When molding the door frame right side left side decoration body 438, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and protrudes to the left to decorate the door frame right side left side decoration 438 . It has a decorative portion 439a that fits into the hole 438a from the inside (right side). The surface of the decorative portion 439a, when fitted into the decorative hole 438a, matches the outer (left) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 (see FIG. 70). The right side left lens 439 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 . The decorative portion 439a of the right-side left lens 439 is positioned to the left of the reflector portion 431a in the door-frame right-side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door-frame right-side lower decoration. Light from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for decoration.

Also, the right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3 a of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 . As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 439a facing from the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 has a radial pattern molded in two colors on the door frame right side left side decoration 438. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish from the part of the decoration part 439a that is decorated with light emission by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 440a penetrating in the horizontal direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). The door frame right side right side decoration 440 has a cylinder insertion opening 440b into which a cylindrical portion having a keyhole 132 is inserted at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 . This door frame right side right side decoration 440 is formed so that the vertical direction is substantially the same as the total height of the door frame 3 . Further, the door frame right side right side decoration 440 is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decoration 435 on the front end side from the upper end to the cylinder insertion opening 440b.

The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, the door frame right side right side decoration 440 includes the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b in the same manner as the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side decoration 438. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface to form a circular or radial pattern. In other words, part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71(a)). When molding the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right side right lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface above the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and protrudes rightward to the right side of the door frame. It has a decorative portion 441a that fits into the decorative hole 440a of the side right side decorative body 440 from the inside (left side). The surface of the decorative portion 441a matches the outer (right) surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 when fitted into the decorative hole 440a (see FIG. 70). The right side right lens 441 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 . The decorative portion 441a of the right-side right lens 441 is located on the right side of the reflector portion 431a in the door-frame right-side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door-frame right-side lower decoration Light from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for decoration.

Also, the right side right lens 441 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3 a of the door frame right side right side decoration 440 . As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 441a facing from the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decoration 440 has a radial pattern molded in two colors on the door frame right side right side decoration 440. It looks the same as the part, and is difficult to distinguish from the part of the decoration part 441a that is decorated with light emission by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, the colors of the circular or radial pattern portions of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 are the same as those of the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side. It is formed in the same color as the circular or radial patterned portion of the side base 421, and is outside the circular or radial patterns of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440. is formed to have the same color as the color of the portion outside the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295 and the left side base 421 of the door frame.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the portion above the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward more than the same height portion of the door frame left side unit 420 on the opposite side. The door frame right side unit 430 is formed to have substantially the same height as the door frame 3 from its upper end to its lower end. The door frame right side unit 430 has an upper portion located outside the right side of the door frame top unit 450 .

The door frame right side unit 430, in a state assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. It looks embedded.

The door-frame right-side unit 430 has a substantially half-height portion that protrudes forward greatly from the top, forming a screen. This makes it difficult for a player seated in front of the pachinko machine provided adjacently on the right side of the island facility of the game hall to see the inside of the door window 101a (game area 5a). Therefore, since the door frame right side unit 430 is formed like a screen, it is possible to block the line of sight of players located nearby, making it difficult for other players to see the entire game area 5a. By making it difficult for the player to feel as if he is being watched by other players, the other players can play without hesitation.

According to the door-frame right-side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door-frame right-side lower decorative substrate 433 are provided at positions that are somewhat backward from the front surface of the door-frame right-side decorative body 435 . is provided, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted on them is sufficiently spread and is irradiated to the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435, so that the door frame The right side decoration body 435 can be uniformly decorated with light.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 includes the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decoration board 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration board 432 provided at a position away from the front surface of the door frame right side decoration body 435 rearward. The light from the first LED 433a of 433 is guided forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, and the door frame The portion of the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 can be illuminated more brightly than the other portions.

Further, the door-frame right-side unit 430 emits light from the third LED 432c of the door-frame right-side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door-frame right-side lower decorative board 433, so that the reflector portion of the door-frame right-side base 431 is illuminated. 431a, the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The decorative portion 441a of the right-side right lens 441 that is attached can be decorated with light emission. In addition, since a part of the right and left sides of the screen-like door frame right side unit 430 (parts of the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a) can be decorated with light, the pachinko machine 1 can be used by other players. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can be made conspicuous and has a high appeal to the players.

Further, according to the door-frame right-side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door-frame right-side upper decorative board 432 and the front-side LED 432b on the front side of the door-frame right-side lower decorative board 433 The first LED 433a and the second LED 433b illuminate the door frame right side decorative body 435 on the front end side, and the third LED 432c on the rear side of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side. Together with the third LED 433c on the rear side of the lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 on the rear side of the door frame right side decoration 435 are decorated with light. Therefore, due to the presence of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the light from the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b is emitted from the rear door. The frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 are illuminated to be decorated with light, and the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c irradiates the door frame right side decoration 435 on the front side. luminous decoration or prevent it. As a result, the right-side door-frame decoration 435 and the right-side left-side door-frame decoration 438 and right-side right-side door-frame decoration 440 on the rear side can be made completely independent of each other to be decorated with light. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting a player with a light emitting performance with a higher performance effect.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, a first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and a light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436. and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are provided in the center between the adjacent two second LEDs 432b and 433b. As a result, the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b on both sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are irradiated with a uniform amount of light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected from behind, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be evenly and planarly decorated with light.

Further, in the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame right side decoration 435 has a decoration portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the horizontal direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 435a. . As a result, even if the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b causes the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a to be projected onto the door frame right side decorative body 435, the shadow is not projected. Since the decorative portion 435b is provided at the portion where the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a are located, the shadow of the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a can be obscured. be able to.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper portions of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430 .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and covering the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. a top upper cover 452 attached to a door frame top base 451, a door frame top decoration 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top base 451. and a door frame top bottom plate (not shown) connecting the bottom end of the.

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top center decoration substrate 455 attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door frame top decoration substrate 455. a door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top central decorative board 455 in front of the top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front; a door frame top right decoration board 457 attached to the right side of the door frame top central decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; (see Figure 72).

The door frame top unit 450 includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front surface of the door frame top base 451, and a pair of top speakers provided on both left and right sides of the pair of top center speakers. A side speaker (not shown), a top lower cover 465 attached to the lower side of the door frame top decorative body 453 so as to cover the front of the top central speaker and the top side speaker, and the front of the door frame top base 451 A door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the door frame top base 451 above. there is

The door-frame top base 451 extends laterally by approximately the same length as the distance between the door-frame left-side unit 420 and the door-frame right-side unit 430 . The top cover 452 protrudes forward in a semicircular arc shape in a plan view, and has an opening 452a that is largely notched forward from the rear end. The opening 452 a is closed by a door frame top plate 468 .

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame top decoration 453 extends laterally in a semicircular shape along the front end of the top cover 452 in plan view. The front surface of the door frame top decoration 453 is formed in a semicircular shape so that the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open rearward.

The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 can light-embellish the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs 455a to emit light.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip-like shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame top left decoration substrate 456 can light-embellish the left portion of the door-frame top decoration 453 by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs 456a to emit light.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can light-embellish the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 457a.

A pair of top center speakers are spaced left and right. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers that output sounds such as speech and music over a wide frequency band. The pair of top-side speakers are tweeters and output high-pitched sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of punching metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, sounds output from the top center speaker and top side speakers are radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board includes a door frame top center decorative board 455 , a door frame top left decorative board 456 , a door frame top right decorative board 457 , a top center speaker, a top side speaker, and a door frame secondary of the door frame base unit 100 . It is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105 .

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452 , has a front end locked to the top upper cover 452 , and has a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. - 特許庁The door frame top unit 450 is connected so that the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration 453 are sunk from the front to the rear portion of the upper inner side of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 . It is Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side through a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 71(a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing a state in which the two-color molded outer layer of the door frame is made opaque, Fig. 10 is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in a transparent state. The door frame 3 has, as shown in the figure, a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes the plate left decoration 271 and the plate right decoration 276 of the plate unit 200, the unit upper cover 312 and the button main body 351 of the production operation unit 300, the door frame left side decoration 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, The door frame right side decoration 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire periphery of the door window 101a.

A plate left decoration 271, a plate right decoration 276, a door frame left side decoration 426, a door frame right side decoration 435, and a door frame top decoration 453 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed in a semi-tubular shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, a plate left decoration 271, a plate right decoration 276, a unit top cover 312, a door frame left side decoration 426, a door frame right side decoration 435, and a door frame surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind or below the top decoration 453 are a left plate decoration board 273, a right plate decoration board 278, an effect operation part outer periphery decoration board 320, a door frame left side upper decoration board 422, a door frame left side lower decoration board 423, and a door frame. Since the right side upper decoration board 432, the door frame right side lower decoration board 433, the door frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 are arranged, these decoration boards are arranged. By properly lighting the LEDs, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light, or the player can be shown a light emitting performance such that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, a spherical performance operation unit 300 having a diameter larger than the distance of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction is attached to the center in the horizontal direction. As a result, since the large spherical effect operation unit 300 is positioned in the center of the plate unit 200, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 (such as the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 302) can be The operation unit 303) can be conspicuous.

In addition, in a normal state, the upper surface of the button body 351 as the effect operation section 301 is aligned with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 so as to be continuous, thereby forming a single sphere. , the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) can be made difficult to recognize that the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) can be operated. This pachinko machine can be made to recognize that it is a pachinko machine 1 different from a pachinko machine, can strongly attract the interest of the player, can enhance the appealing power to the player, and can be used as a pachinko machine to play. It is possible to facilitate the selection of the machine 1.

In addition, in the plate unit 200, since the center (center) of the effect operation section 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is positioned forward of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300, the effect operation section 301 (the contact operation section 302 , and the upper surface of the pressing operation portion 303) faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the player who recognizes that the gigantic sphere provided in the center of the plate unit 200 is the production operation section 301 can easily see the entire production operation section 301, and the production operation section 301 can be easily seen. You can make it look bigger. In addition, it is possible to make the player strongly want to operate the gigantic spherical performance operation section 301, and to heighten expectations for execution of the player-participation type performance by operating the performance operation section 301.例文帳に追加At the same time, when the player participation type performance is executed, the player can be made to actively operate the performance operation unit 301, and the player participation type performance can be enjoyed by the operation of the performance operation unit 301 to increase interest. A decrease can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 of this embodiment has a plurality of circular or radial patterns on its outer surface. FIG. 71 shows the door frame right side unit 430 as an example of a part of the exterior of the door frame 3 .

More specifically, as the exterior of the door frame 3, a plurality of circular and radial patterns applied to the outer surface are formed in two colors using two types of synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). It is formed by molding. The patterned exterior portion of the door frame 3 is two-color molded with two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b. Circular and radial patterns are formed by appearing on the outer surface.

For example, taking the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, as shown in FIG. The honeycomb pattern of the layer 3a can be seen, and the opaque outer layer 3b can be seen in the part other than the pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71(b), when the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a can be seen through the outer layer 3b. Radial patterns become difficult to see. In other words, the exterior has an appearance in which the honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a is emphasized.

In FIG. 71, in the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 molded in two colors as part of the exterior, the decorative portion 441a fitted into the decorative hole 440a is a part of the right side right lens 441. Since it is a separate member different from the door frame right side right side decoration body 440, even if the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the pattern of the decoration hole 440a (decoration part 441a) does not change.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the main members constituting the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding. By appropriately selecting and combining the color of resin), light transmittance, etc., it is possible to greatly change the appearance even if the shape remains the same.

Therefore, for example, when minor changes are made, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed without cost by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen.

Alternatively, the colors of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are changed for each production lot, and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed on the island equipment, thereby providing a colorful feeling to the players. It is possible to enhance the appeal to

Although two-color molding is shown in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may be used. Specifically, in the above-described embodiment, the exterior is configured by combining the right side right lens 441 with the two-color molded door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The frame right side right side decorative body 440 and the right side right lens 441 may be integrally formed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a circular or radial pattern is formed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side are provided outside the door window 101a facing forward from the game area 5a of the door frame 3. Decorative bodies such as the surface decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 are two-color molded (multicolor molding) with two synthetic resins having different light transmittances, and a polka dot decoration is formed by the two-color molding. Since the decoration body is formed into a desired shape, the desired decoration is applied to the decoration body at the same time. There is no need to apply a desired decoration by painting or the like after forming the substrate in a flat shape.

In addition, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. More specifically, when the polka dot decoration is formed by two-color molding, the inner layer 3a forming the inner side of the polka dot circle and the outer layer 3b forming the outer side of the circle are light-transmissive. When the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are formed in the same color with different ratios, since the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b have the same color, the polka-dot circles are difficult to see, and the appearance looks as if the polka-dot decoration is not applied. On the other hand, when the inner layer 3a forming the inner side of the polka dot circle is colored white and the outer layer 3b forming the outer side of the circle is colored pink, the color difference between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b causes The polka-dot circles become clearly visible, giving the appearance of a pink background decorated with white polka-dots. Thus, when forming the decoration, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used, the appearance of the decoration can be easily changed. Cost can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, when forming the decoration, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used, the appearance of the decoration can be easily changed. When the combination of synthetic resins used is changed for each lot, and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed in a row on the island equipment, the island equipment is made colorful. Therefore, it is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of exerting a strong impact on the players who are playing in the game hall and attracting the players.

Further, a handle cover 295 having decorations molded in two colors from a plurality of synthetic resins with different light transmittances on a portion of the door frame 3 outside the door window 101a where the game area 5a faces forward, and a door frame left side base. 421, the door frame right side left side decoration 438, and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 are provided, so that the outside of the door window 101a is decorated with the decorations to improve the appearance. can be done.

Further, since the outer layer 3b of the two-color-molded decorative body is made of a synthetic resin having a lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, the inner layer 3a can be made difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. Thus, the boundary of the decoration (polka dot pattern) formed by the inner layer 3a can be clearly seen, and the decoration can be clearly seen.

In addition, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layers 3a, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inner layer 3a through the outer layer 3b. In order to prevent the inner layer 3a from being seen through from the outside, the inner layer 3a can be seen through by using a synthetic resin having a high light transmittance for the outer layer 3b at the time of a model change. Thus, it is possible to greatly change the way of looking at the decoration of the decoration, and it is possible to easily change the appearance (decoration) without changing the shape of the decoration.

In addition, as described above, since the outer layer 3b having a low light transmittance makes it difficult to see the inner layer 3a, the surface of the inner layer 3a has a pattern (pattern by shape, painting, printing, attaching a sticker, etc.). In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b with low light transmittance prevents the pattern of the inner layer 3a from being seen through the outer layer 3b. By using such a synthetic resin, the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen through, so the appearance (decoration) of the decoration can be greatly changed without changing the shape of the decoration. , it is possible to suppress the increase in cost for model change.

Furthermore, the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board that can irradiate the inside of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440. 433, and the inner layer 3a is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the others, the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body When the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided inside the door frame 440 emit light, the inner side of the decorations formed on the surface of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 The portion of the layer 3a (portion of polka dots) can be decorated with bright light, and the outer side of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a can be decorated with light, thereby improving the appearance and allowing the player to see the right side of the door frame. The luminous decorations of the side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be enjoyed, and the decline in interest of the player can be suppressed.

Depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c irradiated to the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a can also illuminate the outer layer 3b. The entire side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 can be decorated with light emission, and the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 are displayed neatly and the game is played. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing, capable of strongly attracting the attention of players.

In addition, as described above, the decoration of the decorative bodies such as the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is two-color molding (multicolor molding) of a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances. Since it is formed by molding), the LEDs (light emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c emit light depending on the number of layers up to the surface and the difference in light transmittance of the synthetic resin used. The decoration that is visible when the LED is not lit can be made different from the decoration that is visible when the LED is illuminated, and the change in the decoration can strongly attract the player's interest. In detail, for example, taking two-color molding as an example of multi-color molding, when a hole of a predetermined shape is formed in a portion of the inner layer 3a covered by the outer layer 3b, the LED is caused to emit light. Without it, only the surface-exposed portions of the inner layer 3a are visible. On the other hand, when the LED emits light, the light from the LED directly irradiates the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the portion of the inner layer 3a where the hole is formed. The shape of the hole in the layer 3a becomes visible, and the part exposed to the surface and the part of the hole in the inner layer 3a can be seen, and the decoration different from that when the LED is not illuminated can be seen. Alternatively, for example, when the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED emits yellow light, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is illuminated. On the other hand, when the LED emits green (or white) light, both the inner layer 3a portion and the outer layer 3b portion of the surface are luminous decoration. The parts to be illuminated can be varied, and the decorations to be illuminated can be changed. In this way, the decoration of the decorative body can be made different by the light emission of the LED, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained. In addition, by causing the LED to emit light according to the game state, the change in the decoration of the decorative body informs the player of the arrival of a chance or the change of the hitting operation (for example, "right hitting"). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of suggesting and capable of various performances.

In addition, since the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 provided on the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (game area 5a) have different projection amounts in the front-rear direction, Since the pachinko machine 1 can give different impressions (appearances) when viewed from the left front and from the right front, the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Even if the player passes in front of the pachinko machine 1 once, when the player approaches the pachinko machine 1 from the opposite side, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 is different from that of the previous excursion, thereby attracting interest in the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加The pachinko machine 1 can be made to have a high appealing power to attract players who are wandering around the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 to select the pachinko machine 1 to play. .

[3-10. Arrangement and system of LEDs in the door frame]
Next, the arrangement of each LED provided on the door frame 3 and the control system will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73 and the like. FIG. 72 is a front view showing each decorative board of the door frame, and FIG. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative board of the portion of the effect operation unit of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 at the lower right corner in the front view, for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player's rotating operation. The handle 195 includes a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b from which the central hub portion 195a extends outward, an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 195b, and has an appearance similar to that of an automobile steering wheel.

The handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a whose front side is covered with a handle front lens 185. Between the handle front lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a, a handle decoration substrate 184 having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface is provided. is provided. A handle cover decorative substrate 293 having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on its front surface is provided behind the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195. As shown in FIG.

The number of handle decoration substrates 184 is 1 in the center, 3 in the middle circumference at regular intervals in the circumferential direction, and 6 at regular intervals in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference, for a total of 10. LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in triple concentric circles. These LEDs 184a are one in the center, three in the middle connected by dashed lines in FIG. and two on the lower side of the outer circumference. The LEDs 184a divided into these five groups are controlled by 15 systems by an LED driver 184b, and the LEDs 184a of each group can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the other hand, 12 LEDs 293a are arranged in a line on the handle cover decorative substrate 293 with intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are connected by a dashed line in FIG. 72, two LEDs on the lower left, two on the left, two on the upper left, two on the upper right, and two on the right. It is divided into 6 groups, 2 on the bottom right and . The LEDs 293a divided into these six groups are controlled in 18 systems by an LED driver 293b, and the LEDs 293a of each group can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this way, the handle 195 is provided with the handle decoration board 184 and the handle cover decoration board 293, so that light is emitted to rotate around the handle 195, and light is emitted toward the center of the handle 195. A player can be shown a light-emitting effect in which light is concentrated and a light-emitting effect in which light spreads toward the outside of the handle 195.例文帳に追加In addition, the outside and inside of the handle cover 295 can be illuminated by the LEDs 293a of the handle cover decoration substrate 293. FIG.

Further, the door frame 3 has, as shown in the figure, a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes the plate left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, the plate right decorative body 276, the production operation unit 300, the door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, and the door frame of the door frame right side unit 430. The right side decorative body 435 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a.

A plate left decoration 271, a plate right decoration 276, a door frame left side decoration 426, a door frame right side decoration 435, and a door frame top decoration 453 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed in a semi-tubular shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player the decoration that substantially the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lamps.

In this door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 72, a plate left decoration substrate 273 behind the plate left decoration 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a plate right decoration substrate 278 behind the plate right decoration 276, Door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 behind door frame left side decoration 426, door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and door frame right behind door frame right side decoration 435 A side lower decorative board 433, a door frame top central decorative board 455 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, a door frame top left decorative board 456, and a door frame top right decorative board 457 are provided facing forward.

More specifically, four LEDs 273a are mounted on the front surface of the plate left decorative substrate 273 in a line in the left-right direction, and an LED driver for causing the LEDs 273a and the LEDs 273a of the plate right decorative substrate 278, which will be described later, to emit light. (illustration is omitted). These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The LEDs 273a divided into these two groups are controlled in six systems by an LED driver, and the LEDs 273a in each group can emit light in full colors as appropriate.

The plate right decorative board 278 has four LEDs 278a mounted on the front surface in a line in the left-right direction. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The LEDs 278a divided into these two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the plate left decorative board 273, and the LEDs 278a of each group can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, four first LEDs 422a are mounted vertically at regular intervals, and two LEDs 422a are vertically arranged between the first LEDs 422a. It has eight second LEDs 422b and an LED driver 422c for driving a total of twelve first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b. The first LED 422a and the second LED 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a of the upper decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. The eight second LEDs 422b are connected by a dashed line in FIG. 72, the upper two, the third to fifth from the top, and the sixth to eight from the top. It is divided into three sets of three pieces up to the first one. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups are controlled by 15 systems by an LED driver 422c. The LED 422b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, six first LEDs 423a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two of each are mounted vertically between the first LEDs 423a. It has 12 second LEDs 423b and an LED driver 423c for causing a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b to emit light. The first LED 423a and the second LED 423b are mounted on the front surface. The six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets of two LEDs in order from the top, as indicated by the chain double-dashed lines in FIG. 72, the 12 second LEDs 423b are three LEDs from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top , 3 from the 7th to 9th from the top and 3 from the 10th to 12th from the top. The six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups are controlled in 21 systems by an LED driver 423c. The LED 423b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, four first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two LEDs are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 432a on the front surface. It has eight mounted second LEDs 432b and four third LEDs 432c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. In addition, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 emits light from a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, and third LEDs 432c, and two third LEDs 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. LED driver 432d. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. The eight second LEDs 432b are connected by a dashed line in FIG. 72, the upper two, the third to fifth from the top, and the sixth to eight from the top. It is divided into three sets of three pieces up to the first one. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The first LED 432a divided into two groups, the second LED 432b divided into three groups, the third LED 432c divided into two groups, and the third group divided into two groups in the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 A set of third LEDs 433c on the upper side of the LEDs 433c is controlled by 24 systems by an LED driver 432d. It can emit light in full color.

On the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, there are six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two LEDs arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a on the front surface. 12 mounted second LEDs 433b, four third LEDs 433c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction, first LEDs 433a, second LEDs 433b, and two lower third LEDs 433c. and an LED driver 433d for emitting light. The six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets of two LEDs in order from the top, as indicated by the chain double-dashed lines in FIG. 72, the 12 second LEDs 433b are three LEDs from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top. , 3 from the 7th to 9th from the top and 3 from the 10th to 12th from the top. Further, the rear four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by the dashed line in FIG. 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 3 groups, 12 second LEDs 433b divided into 4 groups, and 2 third LEDs 433c in the lower group of the 2 groups , LED driver 433d, and the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c of each set can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 provided on the left side of the door window 101a and the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 423 provided on the right side of the door window 101a are used. The substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are formed in a shape asymmetrical with respect to the lateral center of the door window 101a. In addition, the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 and the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 have different shapes in the front-rear direction. .

The door-frame left-side upper decorative board 422 and the door-frame left-side lower decorative board 423, and the door-frame right-side upper decorative board 432 and the door-frame right-side lower decorative board 433 are mounted on the respective front surfaces. While the numbers of one LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, second LED 423b and first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b are the same, the arrangement and system (one point in FIG. 72 A system connected by a chain line or a two-dot chain line) is provided symmetrically. As a result, it is possible to easily create the data of the lighting pattern of the LEDs for performing the lighting effects.

On the door frame top center decorative board 455, there are six LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface at intervals in the left-right direction, the LEDs 455a, the LED 456a of the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457. and an LED driver (not shown) for emitting light. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three groups of two from the left, as connected by dashed lines in FIG. The six LEDs 455a divided into three groups are controlled in nine systems by an LED driver, and each group of LEDs 455a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is provided with four LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface with a left-right opening. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The four LEDs 456a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decoration board 455, and each group of LEDs 456a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is provided with four LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface with a left-right direction opening. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The four LEDs 457a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decoration board 455, and each group of LEDs 457a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, And the light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 passes through the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the left side lower guide. The light guide shaft portion 429a of the light member 429, the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are arranged to form the opening of the door frame left side decorative body 426. The light is guided to 426a and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and is irradiated outward (forward). As a result, it is possible to show the player a luminous effect of brightly emitting dots in front of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. A player can be surprised by a light-emitting effect of flashing spot light.

In addition, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the plate left decorative board 273 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the LED 278a of the plate right decorative board 278, the second LED 422b of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, and the door frame left side lower Second LED 423b of decorative board 423, second LED 432b of door frame right side upper decorative board 432, second LED 433b of door frame right side lower decorative board 433, LED 455a of door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board The LED 456a of 456 and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are appropriately illuminated to light-embellish the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a, or to perform light emission so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a. can be shown to or played by the player.

That is, in the door frame 3, the system of LEDs connected by the two-dot chain line in FIG. In FIG. 72, the system of the LEDs connected by the dashed line allows the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 to perform planar light emission (surface light emission). can be done.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is transferred to the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a. By the shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light is guided to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and forward from there. Therefore, compared with the general surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, the parts of the opening 426a and the opening 435a can be illuminated brightly with high brightness. . At this time, since the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 are arranged outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 And even if the part of the opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435 is spot-lighted with high brightness, the inside of the game area 5a facing from the door window 101a is not difficult to see due to the glare, and the game is played through the door window 101a. The game ball B, the performance image, the decorative body, etc. in the area 5a can be visually recognized in good condition.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are projected forward from the door window 101a (game area 5a), and spot light is emitted with high brightness. The opening 426a and the opening 435a are connected to the front ends of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 projecting forward (connecting the front ends projecting forward in an arc in plan view). Since it is provided on a straight line in the vertical direction, the light of the spot emission is not irradiated to the rear side (door window 101a side). Therefore, the spot light emitted from the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 is reflected toward the player side by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a, and is emitted behind the door window 101a. The inside of the game area 5a is not difficult to see, and by emitting spot light with high brightness, other players can be attracted to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

Further, according to the door frame 3, the parts for spot light emission are provided in the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 which protrude forward outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3. Therefore, the spot light emitting portion is located at substantially the same position as the vicinity of the outer periphery of the pachinko machine 1 . Therefore, even if a player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the player does not block the light of the spot light emission because the spot light emitting portion is positioned outside the player. As a result, when the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are spot-lighted, other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the high-intensity spot light. Therefore, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be appealed to other players, the interest of the players can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine in the game hall can be used to select the pachinko machine to play. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with a high appeal power capable of attracting players who are wandering around to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In addition, on both sides of the spot LED (first LED 422 a, first LED 423 a, first LED 432 a, first LED 433 a) for spot light emission on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 The surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) preferably belong to the same system. As a result, both sides sandwiching the light guide pins (the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a) that guide the light of the spot LED Since the surface LEDs have the same lighting mode, the same amount of light is emitted from both sides of the light guide pin at the same timing. The shadow of the optical pin can be made even more difficult to see.

Further, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the contact operation portion 302 in the effect operation portion 301 of the effect operation unit 300, and has an annular shape with 31 LEDs 320a mounted on the upper surface. A performance operating section outer peripheral decoration board 320 is provided. This performance operating section outer peripheral decoration board 320 includes two LED drivers for causing the 31 LEDs 320a to emit light. The performance operating section peripheral decoration board 320 is divided into two parts, a front decoration board 321 and a rear decoration board 322 .

18 LEDs 320a out of 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decoration board 321 in the effect operation section peripheral decoration board 320. As shown in FIG. Of the 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative substrate 321, 6 are spaced apart on the circumference near the inner periphery, and 3 are spaced apart on the circumference between the inner periphery and the outer periphery. , and the remaining nine are spaced on the circumference near the outer circumference.

The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decoration board 322 in the effect operation section outer periphery decoration board 320. As shown in FIG. Of the thirteen LEDs 320a of the rear decorative substrate 322, four are provided on the circumference near the inner circumference, two at intervals near both ends of the arc, and three are provided midway between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. They are spaced on the circumference, and the remaining six are spaced three by three near the ends of the arc on the circumference near the outer circumference.

The 18 LEDs 320a of the front decoration substrate 321 are connected by a dashed line in FIG. are divided into three sets of one piece each, and three sets of three pieces each of the nine pieces on the outer circumference in the circumferential direction, a total of nine sets. The 18 LEDs 320a of the rear decoration board 322 are connected by a dashed line in FIG. There are 3 sets of 3 pieces each, and 2 sets of 9 pieces near each end of the outer circumference. In other words, on the effect operation section peripheral decoration board 320, 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 groups. These 16 groups of LEDs 320a are controlled in 48 systems by two LED drivers, and each group of LEDs 320a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to this effect operation unit peripheral decoration board 320, by appropriately emitting light from the 31 LEDs 320a of 48 systems, the effect operation unit 301 emits light such that the light rotates or emits light such that the light concentrates at the center. It is possible to show the player a performance or a light emission performance in which the light spreads outward.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame 3 extends vertically along the door window 101a to the outside of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a on one side and the other in the left-right direction so that the amount of protrusion in the front-rear direction differs from each other. A door frame left side decoration 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and a door frame right side decoration 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided, and the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration are provided. Door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted and door frame left side lower decorations on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted behind each of 435 A substrate 423, a door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a and second LEDs 432b are mounted, and a door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 on which a plurality of first LEDs 433a and second LEDs 433b are mounted. is provided, and the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 and forward Light guide shaft portion 427a of left side upper light guide member 427, light guide shaft portion 428a of left side middle light guide member 428, light guide shaft portion 429a of left side lower light guide member 429, right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, the upper decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame, and the right side of the door frame. The second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b of the upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are caused to emit light, so that the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 are illuminated. It is possible to make planar light emitting decoration (surface light emission), and the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432, and the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433. When the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a are caused to emit light, the light emitted forward passes through the columnar light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft. After being guided by the portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, the light is radiated forward from the front ends (front end surfaces) of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. Corresponding to the tip of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a in the frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 You can make the part where you are in a point-like light-emitting decoration (spot light emission).

Therefore, the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side upper decoration board 422, the door frame left side lower decoration board 423, the door frame right side upper decoration board 432, and the door frame right side lower decoration board 433 are The second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b are caused to emit light appropriately, so that the door frame left side decorative body provided outside the game area 5a (door window 101a) 426 and the right-side door-frame decoration 435 may be light-emitting decorated in a plane, or a part of the left-side door-frame decoration 426 and the right-side door-frame decoration 435 may be light-emitting, or the left side of the door frame may be decorated. The entire side decoration body 426 and the right side decoration body 435 of the door frame can be illuminated in a planar manner and a part thereof can be decorated in a point manner, so that the player can see various lighting effects. This makes it difficult for the player to get tired of the game and keeps the player entertained, thereby suppressing the loss of interest in the game.

At this time, a system in which the plurality of first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LEDs 423a, and second LEDs 423b of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are divided, and the door frame right side A plurality of first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, first LEDs 433a, and second LEDs 433b of the upper side decoration board 432 and the lower right side decoration board 433 of the door frame are symmetrical to each other. Since the plurality of first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a and the plurality of second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b are different systems, the door frame left side Lighting patterns of the first LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, and second LED 423b on the decorative body 426 side and the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b on the door frame right side decorative body 435 side. , for example, the data for the left side of the door frame decoration 426 may be diverted to the data for the right side of the door frame 435, or the left side of the door frame decoration 426 and the door frame Since it is possible to create data with the same flow on the right side decorative body 435 side, it is possible to simplify the labor involved in creating lighting pattern data (with the same creation time ) It becomes easier to construct more complicated lighting pattern data, and it is possible to show the player various light emitting effects of the lighting pattern, and at the same time, it is possible to show the player various light emitting effects with high effects. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of exhibiting a sufficient performance effect for the light emission performance of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 on both the left and right outer sides of 101a.

Moreover, since the two second LEDs 422b, second LEDs 423b, second LEDs 432b, and second LEDs 433b provided with the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a interposed are the same system. , so as to sandwich the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, the first LED 433a (the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, the light guide shaft portion 437a). Since the two second LEDs 422b, 2nd LEDs 423b, 2nd LEDs 432b, and 2nd LEDs 433b provided in the are always turned on at the same time, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, By irradiating light from both sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light from the respective second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b light guide shaft portion 427a and guide shaft portion 427a. The shadows of the optical axis portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a become thin so as to cancel out, and are projected onto the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be made difficult to see. The right side decorative body 435 can be evenly and planarly decorated with light.

In addition, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, which are planarly decorated with light emission by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, are the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, and the second LED 433b. The first LED 432a and the first LED 433a light-embellish the portions corresponding to the front ends of the light guide shaft portions 427a, 428a, 429a, 436a, and 437a in a dotted manner. As a result, it is possible to show the player a lighting effect that could not be seen in previous pachinko machines, such as a planar light and a partial light in a dot shape, and the light is bright in a dot shape. The player's interest can be strongly attracted by the light emission effect, etc., and the player can be surprised by the light emission effect, in which the pachinko machine does not have a conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 on one side (left side) in the horizontal direction, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower side on the other side (right side). Since the decorative substrates 433 are asymmetrical to each other, at first glance, the left side of the door frame upper decorative substrate 422, the lower left side of the door frame decorative substrate 423, the upper right side of the door frame decorative substrate 432, and the right side of the door frame. Since the side lower decorative board 433 can be identified, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame to be assembled in the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to avoid mistaking the lower right side decorative substrate 433, improve the workability of assembly, and suppress an increase in cost.

[3-11. Identification of decorative substrate]
Next, using the door frame 3 as an example, identification of various decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 74 and the like. FIG. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the plate left decoration substrate 273, the plate right decoration substrate 278, the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423, and the door frame right side are provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3. The upper side decoration board 432, the lower door frame right side decoration board 433, the door frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 will be described in detail as examples.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a white board is used as the decoration board on which the LEDs are mounted, and the LED drivers and connectors of colors other than white that are attached to the decoration board are attached to the rear side of the board. I'm trying As a result, the light from the LEDs mounted on the front surface of the decoration board is reflected forward, so that the decorations in the front can be illuminated more brightly, and the light from the front (player side) is reflected. This makes the decorative substrate inconspicuous.

The white decorative substrate may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the board itself may be white.

Since the pachinko machine 1 has a large number of decorative boards, different identification portions 7 are provided on the rear surface of each decorative board so that each decorative board can be easily identified (see FIG. 74). ). The identification unit 7 includes a character identification unit 7a using characters such as kanji, kana, alphabets, symbols, numerals, model numbers, etc., and a color identification unit 7b using different colors (indicated by shades of different shades in FIG. 74). and have

More specifically, as the character identification portion 7a, the plate left decorative board 273 has the character "lower left", the plate right decorative board 278 has the character "lower right", and the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 has the character "upper left". , the letters "lower left" on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the letters "upper right" on the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the letters "lower right" on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. The characters are "upper middle" on the door frame top center decorative board 455, "upper left" on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and "upper right" on the door frame top right decorative board 457. , respectively.

Further, the color identification portion 7b has a different color for each decorative substrate, and is applied substantially over the front surface of the rear surface. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification portion 7b is not provided on the entire rear surface, but partially so as not to hinder the soldering of LEDs and the like mounted on the decorative substrate. .

The identification portion 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), pasting a sticker, applying paint, or the like.

In the above description, the decoration board provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 was explained as an example. The decorative substrate may also be provided with identification portions 7 such as the character identification portion 7a and the color identification portion 7b.

In the above-described embodiment, the identifying section 7 includes both the character identifying section 7a and the color identifying section 7b. Alternatively, only the color identification section 7b may be provided.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the identification part 7 (the character identification part 7a and the color identification part 7b) is provided on the decoration board on which the LED is mounted, it is easy to make a decoration board with a similar shape. This makes it possible to prevent the wrong decorative substrate from being assembled during the assembly work and to improve the workability of the assembly.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the identification part 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decoration board, the front side of the decoration board can be made as white as possible, and the LED mounted on the front surface of the decoration board The light is reflected forward on the front surface of the decoration board, so that the decorations in front can be decorated with brighter light emission, and the decoration board can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side), thereby improving the appearance. can do better.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification portion 7b as the identification portion 7 is provided over substantially the entire decoration board, the desired color can be obtained by just looking at a part of the decoration board. ) can be recognized as a decorative substrate. Therefore, even when a plurality of kinds of decorative substrates are superimposed during assembly, if a part of the decorative substrate is visible, the desired decorative substrate can be easily found. can be simplified.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color of the color identification part 7b is different for each decoration board, when preparing the decoration boards required for one pachinko machine 1 at the time of assembly, the same color can be used. When there is a decorative board provided with the identification portion 7b, it can be easily recognized that the same decorative board is prepared redundantly. Alternatively, when the colors are insufficient in the color identification portion 7b of the prepared decorative board, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a decorative board that is not prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decoration substrates necessary for assembling the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to easily recognize that an extra decoration substrate is prepared or the prepared decoration substrate is insufficient. Therefore, it is possible to surely prepare the required number of decorative substrates, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily set up at the time of assembly. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled smoothly, the time required for assembly can be shortened, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the character identification portion 7a as the identification portion 7 for distinguishing from the other substrates is provided on the rear surface of the decoration board, the operator can read the characters of the character identification portion 7a. Thus, it is possible to easily know which part the decorative substrate belongs to, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the front and rear surfaces of each decoration board are white and the identification section 7 is provided on the rear surface, the transparency of the decoration provided in front of the decoration board is high. Also, the decoration board can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side), the appearance of the decoration can be improved, and the light from the LED is reflected forward by the white front surface of the decoration board. is possible, the decorative body can be decorated with brighter light emission, and the player can be entertained by the light emission performance with high performance effect, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1, the functional parts such as the LED driver are provided on the rear surface of the decoration board so that the functional parts cannot be seen from the front (player side). It is possible to avoid the deterioration of the appearance due to being visible, and improve the appearance of the decoration (game machine). In addition, since the functional parts are hidden from view by being provided on the back surface of the decorative board, there is no need to color the functional parts white (or yellow) to make them inconspicuous, and the functional parts can be used as they are. It is possible to suppress the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 by omitting the labor of coloring the functional parts.

[3-12. Effects of door frame]
According to this embodiment, with respect to the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at mutually different positions in the pachinko machine 1, the contact detection body 393 provided at a desired portion to detect the player's approach or contact is detected. and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are switched by the switching unit 394, and when the player approaches or touches the contact detection body 393 at a desired portion, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 changes. Therefore, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393 can detect a change in capacitance, it is possible to detect the player's approach or contact with a desired part, Control means such as the main control board 1310 , the peripheral control board 1510 , the peripheral control section 1511 , and the effect display control section 1512 can execute predetermined control according to the detection of the contact detection sensor main body 392 . On the other hand, in a state where the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching portion 394, the connection between the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 provided at the other parts is prevented. is cut, even if the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 provided in the other part changes due to the player approaching or touching the other part, the contact detection body 393 is Since the switching unit 394 has disconnected the connection, the change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 is not detected, and only the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 at the desired portion can be reliably detected. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection.

As described above, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394 among the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at mutually different positions. It is possible to detect capacitance with one contact detection sensor body 392 for a plurality of contact detection bodies 393, and the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control section 1511, effect display control section 1512, etc. In the control means of (1), the number of channels involved in detection of the player's approach or contact can be reduced, and the number of channels that can be used for presentation can be relatively increased. Therefore, since it is possible to control more production means (for example, movable decorations, light-emitting decorations, production display devices, etc.) by the control means, the increase in the production means allows the player to enjoy more diverse productions. It is possible to present the game, make it difficult for the player to get bored, sufficiently entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, the contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of parts of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch, and the contact detection bodies 393 provided at the desired parts by the switching unit 394 according to the game state. Connects to the contact detection sensor main body 392, detects the player's approach or contact with a desired part, and controls the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, etc. Since it is possible to leave a predetermined caution or alarm by the means, while monitoring a wide range of the pachinko machine 1 with one contact detection sensor main body 392, the number of channels that can be used for production can be relatively reduced. The number can be increased, and the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

Further, since the capacitance of a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 is detected by one contact detection sensor main body 392, each contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are provided separately. Therefore, the sensor main body having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit can be provided in a portion that is difficult for the player to see, thereby improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing its appeal to the player. can be enhanced.

Further, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 has connection terminals for electrically connecting the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in advance, the wiring from the contact detection bodies 393 can be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. The electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 393 can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 simply by connecting to the connection terminal of the pachinko machine 1. An increase in the cost of the machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with connection terminals in advance, and the contact detection sensor main body 392 and the contact detection body 393 can be connected by simply connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392 . can be connected, compared to the case where a conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor main body 392 and connected to the contact detection body 393 via the conductive member, the number of parts can be reduced. can be reduced, the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced, and the design of the conductive member for connecting to the contact detection body 393 can be eliminated, and the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor body can be eliminated. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the 392, and it is possible to facilitate the realization of the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects.

Further, a switching unit 394 for switching the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor body 392 is provided, and the contact detection body 393 to be detected can be selected by the switching part 394. are dispersedly arranged, and when a player-participation type performance is executed in which the plurality of dispersedly arranged contact detection bodies 393 are touched in a predetermined order, the contact detection sensor body 392 is operated by the switching unit 394 at the timing when the player touches in order. By switching the contact detection bodies 393 connected to the , it is possible to detect whether or not the player has touched the contact detection bodies 393 in order. This can be realized by the contact detection sensor main body 392, and the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the players more can be provided.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 that can be pressed by the player. Then, the player approaches the contact detection body 352 made of patching metal, the player side of which is covered with the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 changes. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358, the change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 can be detected. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to 351 (the effect operation unit 350).

In this way, when the player's approach or contact with the effect operation section unit 350 is detected using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the button external decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation section lifting and lowering are performed. A predetermined effect is output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button main body 351 by the effect means such as the mechanism 360, the button middle decoration board 364, and the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380, so that the player is entertained by the effect. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. At this time, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is output. It can be made to function as a contact operation part. Since the effect operation unit 350, which functions as a non-contact operation unit or a contact operation unit, can be pressed by the player when it is projected, the effect operation unit 350 can perform non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation. Since various performance operations such as operations can be performed, it is possible to easily embody the pachinko machine 1 having an appearance different from that of a conventional pachinko machine having an operation button that can only be operated by pressing, and can be used for other pachinko machines. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players by being differentiated from other machines.

In addition, according to the detection of the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, a predetermined effect is output to the player side. Since it differs depending on the distance between the player and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of electrostatic capacity thresholds and output a different effect for each threshold. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player to the button main body 351 (the production operation unit 350) to the contact thereof in multiple stages, the production corresponding to each stage is output. By doing so, it is possible to present more diverse effects to the player, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided away from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection device having electronic components such as a sensor IC and an output circuit can be used. The sensor main body 358 can be provided in a portion of the effect operation unit 350 that is difficult for the player to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved to enhance the appeal to the player.

In addition, as described above, the operation unit can perform a variety of effect operations such as non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation. By doing so, it is possible to entertain a variety of performance operations, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, to make the player enjoy the player-participation type performance, and to reduce the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 whose capacitance is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358 is made of a punching metal made of a metal plate having a plurality of holes, the player can easily touch the button main body 351 through the plurality of holes. It is possible to reduce the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 in a state of approach or non-contact, and to avoid erroneous detection by the contact detection sensor main body 358 . Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, etc. of the plurality of holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact detection body 352 while suppressing an increase in the capacitance. It is possible to widen the range for detecting the approach or contact of the player to the main body 351 (the effect operation section unit 350). As a result, the contact detection body 352 can be enlarged to widen the detection range. When the contact detection body 352 is made to have the same size as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the player can approach or touch the performance operation unit 350 (the button body 351) by executing the player participation type performance. When requested, since the contact detection body 352 covered with the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350. The movement distance is shortened, the performance operation unit 350 can be operated quickly, the operation timing in the player participation type performance can be made difficult to miss, and the player can surely participate in the player participation type performance. The effect can entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, a button as an effect means provided on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side through a plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352. The light emitting effect from the LED 364a of the middle decoration board 364 can be output to the player side, and the player can surely enjoy the light emitting effect and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) that can be pressed is provided with the contact detection body 352, the contact detection body is made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having a certain degree of strength and rigidity. 352 can reinforce the effect operation unit 350, and even if the player strongly presses or hits the effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351) when performing a pressing operation, the effect operation unit unit 350 can be made difficult to be deformed or damaged. Therefore, since the effect operation part unit 350 can be made difficult to be damaged by the contact detection body 352, the effect operation part unit 350 can be operated by pressing the effect operation part unit 350 without worrying about the player. It is possible to make the player participatory performance more enjoyable and suppress the decrease in interest.

Further, the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, and the plate thickness of the contact detection body 352 can be made thinner compared to the case where the contact detection body 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate having the same thickness. Therefore, the space for providing the contact detection body 352 can be easily secured, the contact detection body 352 can be easily provided, the degree of freedom in design can be increased, and the appeal to the player is higher. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily designed.

In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, the plate thickness is constant compared to expanded metal. The button body 351 (the effect operation unit 350) can be easily made into an optimal shape for detecting the player's approach or contact, and the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 350, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed is covered by the button body 351. It is possible to prevent the player from directly touching the contact detection body 352 formed with a plurality of holes, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable when the contact detection body 352 is formed with a plurality of holes. is used as an operation unit, the button main body 351 can be operated without a sense of incongruity, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed by entertaining the performance.

Furthermore, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal is covered with the button body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drink adheres to the plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed as the pachinko machine 1 which is easy to clean.

In addition, the effect means such as the external button decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, the internal button decoration board 364, and the projecting force adjustment mechanism 380 are arranged on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. A predetermined effect can be output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351, and the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350). Then, a predetermined effect is output through the plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352 and the transparent button body 351, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit 350, and the effect is generated. The performance output through (via) the operation section unit 350 can be surely enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, the effect means such as the external button decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, the internal button decoration board 364, and the projecting force adjustment mechanism 380 are arranged on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. Since it is provided, the effect means is covered by the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection body 352 (the effect operation unit 350) and the effect means can be compactly assembled. To provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of being easily provided with a performance operating unit 350 and performance means etc. having such functions and effects at a desired portion of the pachinko machine 1 and being differentiated from other pachinko machines. can be made easier.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351) provided to be able to advance and retreat in the vertical direction in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 of the operation unit 350 changes, the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, so that the player approaches the effect operation unit 350. Or it can detect contact. When the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the player's approach or contact with the effect operation unit 350, the effect operation unit 350 protrudes upward due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Therefore, if the effect operation unit 350 protrudes while the player is not in contact with the effect operation unit 350, it contacts (collides) with the player, and the player is in contact with the effect operation unit 350. When the effect operation section unit 350 protrudes in , the player can be presented with an effect by a physical force that pushes the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player by a performance not found in the conventional pachinko machine, to strongly attract the player's interest to the performance operation unit 350, and to the player. It is possible to reliably make the user notice the projection of the effect operation unit 350. - 特許庁

When the effect operation section unit 350 is projected, if the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved in the direction of the upper end portion of the lifting spring 365 (upward), the lifting spring 365 is strongly compressed. When the lift spring 365 is moved in a direction (downward) away from the upper end portion side of the lift spring 365, the compression of the lift spring 365 is weakened and the bias force can be reduced. By moving the holding member 385 to an appropriate position, it is possible to change the urging force of the effect operation section unit 350 by the lifting spring 365 . In this way, since the effect operation section unit 350 can be protruded with various projecting forces, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect by physical force, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, and the effect operation can be performed. It is possible to entertain the performance by the protrusion of the part unit 350, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the projecting force of the effect operation unit 350 is changed according to the game state, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350 with a finger or the like, the effect operation unit 350 is moved with a strong force. When the 350 comes into contact with the player, a strong impact is given to the player, making him strongly think that something good is happening (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous), and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by increasing the expectation for.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 350 is the pressing operation unit 303 capable of pressing operation, when the player participatory effect is executed, the player can press the effect operation unit 350 to perform the game. It is possible to make the player participate in the player-participation type presentation, and to enjoy the pressing operation of the presentation operation section unit 350, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 350 can be operated by pressing, it is possible to operate the effect operation unit 350 at any time. When the player participatory effect of pressing the effect operating unit 350 is executed, the effect operating unit 350 is protruded by the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360, so that the player participatory effect is performed by effect images, sounds, etc. Even without guiding the execution start of the performance, the player can be made to quickly recognize the start of execution of the player participation type performance, and the motivation for the pressing operation of the performance operation part unit 350 can be increased to perform the player participation type performance. can entertain you even more.

Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 350 is protruded by the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, it is compared with the case where the effect operation unit 350 is projected using a drive motor. As a result, the effect operation section unit 350 can be protruded easily and vigorously, and the effects described above can be more easily achieved.

Further, by detecting the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, the approach or contact of the player to the effect operation unit 350 is detected, and the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 352 is detected. Since the capacity varies depending on the distance between the effect operation unit 350 and the player, it is possible to set a plurality of electrostatic capacity thresholds and project the effect operation unit 350 with a different protrusion force for each threshold. becomes. Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the production operation unit 350 to the contact in multiple stages. By projecting with a projecting power, it is possible to present a more diverse performance to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of it and to suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is popped up by execution of the player participation type effect, so that the player can enter the effect operation unit 350 which is provided so that the player can advance and retreat. approaches or touches, the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 that the player touches changes. On the other hand, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided apart from the contact detection body 352 in the effect operation unit 350 detects the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352, the contact due to the approach or contact of the player is detected. Since the change in the capacitance of the detection body 352 can be captured, it is possible to detect the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350, and the contact detection sensor body 358 is detected by the capacitance. A player can be detected. Then, the detection of the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the movement (pressing) of the production operation unit 350 by the player causes the production operation unit outer peripheral decoration board 320, the button outer decoration board 355, the production operation part lifting mechanism 360, and the inside button decoration board. 364, the projection force adjusting mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600 and other effect means execute a predetermined effect. In other words, when the player advances or retreats the effect operation unit 350 or approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is executed, so that the player can be entertained by the effect. It is possible to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

At this time, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, the effect is executed. can function as On the other hand, when the player advances and retreats (presses) the effect operation unit 350, the effect is executed, so the effect operation unit 350 can be made to function like a effect operation unit (pressing operation unit). For this reason, since it is possible for the player to perform a variety of performance operations, the player can enjoy various performance operations by executing a player participation type performance that enables the player to perform the performance operation. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and the player can enjoy the player-participation type presentation, thereby suppressing the decline of the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the player is detected by the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 352 provided near the portion of the button body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 that the player touches (below the upper surface portion 351a). , the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 varies depending on the distance between the contact detection body 352 (button body 351) and the player. It is possible to execute a different effect for each threshold. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the production operation unit 350 to the contact thereof in multiple stages, the production can be presented according to each stage. Therefore, it is possible to present more diverse effects to the player, to make it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, and to suppress the loss of interest.

In addition, since a predetermined effect is executed by the detection of the player by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358, the effect operation (non-contact operation, A sense of operation can be given to the contact operation), and the player can enjoy the performance operation more.

Furthermore, the player is provided with a production operation unit 350 that can be advanced and retreated (pressable), and a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor main body 358 that can detect the approach or contact of the player to the production operation unit 350. Therefore, in the player-participating production, the player has an operation (pressing operation) to advance and retreat the production operation unit 350, an operation to approach or touch the production operation unit 350 with a finger or the like (non-contact operation, contact operation). ), etc., and the various operations can increase the player's desire to participate in the player participation type performance and make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type performance. can be done. When the player participates in the player-participation type production, various operations using the production operation section unit 350, the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can prevent the player from getting bored. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player participation type production, and to suppress the decline of the player's interest.

In addition, by engaging the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the effect operation unit 350 with the engaging portion 371c of the elevation cam member 371 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the effect operation unit 350 is locked so as not to advance or retreat. Therefore, until the effect to move the effect operation unit 350 forward and backward is executed, the effect operation unit 350 is prevented from advancing and retreating by the guide pin 354c and the elevation cam member 371. 350 can be prevented from moving or shaking without permission. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or anxiety due to the arbitrarily moving or swaying of the performance operation unit 350, thereby making the performance by the performance operation unit 350 more enjoyable. can be made available.

Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 350, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided at a position away from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection sensor having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit The main body 358 can be provided in a part that is hard to be seen by a player, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, since the contact detection body 352 for detecting the capacitance and the contact detection sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC for detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, an output circuit, etc. are separated, Since the shape, material, etc. of the contact detection body 352 can be appropriately selected regardless of the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection body 352 can be matched with the shape, form, specifications, etc. of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350. , and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the player can attach the outer button decoration substrate 355, the inner button decoration substrate 364, or the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 covering the decoration 398. When a finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the button outer decoration substrate 355, the button inner decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398. changes, and according to the change, a predetermined effect is executed in which light is emitted to the player side by the external button decorative board 355, the internal button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398. Therefore, the player side The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the outside button decoration board 355, the inside button decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398 by the light emitted to the button, and the executed performance can entertain the player. At this time, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the outer button decoration substrate 355, the inner button decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398 is detected by the button body 351 or the contact detection body 397. Since it is formed along the decorative portion provided on the surface member 396, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is a part of the decoration portion. It is possible to make it impossible for the player to recognize that the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is for detecting the player.

In this way, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is made unrecognizable from the player side, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be compared with the button external decoration substrate 355, the button inside decoration substrate 364, or the decoration. Even if a part of the body 398 (effect) is blocked, the player will not be bothered by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397. Even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is provided in front of the player, the presence of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the effects of the outside button decoration board 355, the inside button decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398 in a good state, so that the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

In addition, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351 or the surface member 396 by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the button outside covered by the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is detected. Since the decoration board 355, the inside button decoration board 364, or the decorative body 398 is designed to irradiate the player with light, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 can be attached to the effect operation section 301 (contact operation section). 302), and can provide the player with a feeling of operation by light. Therefore, for example, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player's fingers or the like are made to approach or contact the button main body 351 or the surface member 396, and the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 moves the finger or the like to approach or contact the button body 351 or the surface member 396. Upon detection of contact, an effect is executed by the external button decorative board 355, the internal button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398, so that the player can participate in the player participation type effect, and the player can participate in the player participation type effect. You can enjoy the type production.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 detects the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the player's finger or the like are detected. Since it is possible to change the effects of the outer button decoration board 355, the inner button decoration board 364, or the decoration 398 according to the distance from the button outer decoration board 355, the movement (position) of the player's fingers, etc. It is possible to change the performance by the decorative board 364 inside the button or the decorative body 398, so that the player can see a more colorful performance, and the colorful performance makes it difficult for the player to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

In addition, it is designed to detect a change in capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, and when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the external decoration board 355, the button interior decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398 changes, the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 is not affected by the game. The pachinko machine 1 that can easily detect the approach or contact of a person's fingers or the like and has the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is adapted to detect a change in capacitance, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be made of a conductive member. When the contact detection body 397 is a metal vapor deposition film, the vapor deposition film can be made transparent by thinning the vapor deposition film, and the vapor deposition film can be thickened to have a metallic luster so that it looks like a part of the decoration. can be done. Alternatively, when the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 are made of punching metal having a design like a star or a heart, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 look like a part of decoration. be able to. For this reason, the contact detectors 352, 395, and 397 can be made unrecognizable by the player, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the electrostatic capacity is increased by the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the transparent button body 351 covering the upper surface side (surface side). Depending on the change, the button external decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part lifting mechanism 360, the button inside decoration board 364, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the effect presentation means such as the effect display device 1600 produce a predetermined effect. Contact detection body 395 etc. (including contact detection body 352, left contact detection body 390L, right contact detection body 390R, contact detection body 393, and contact detection body 397, etc.) for presenting the , the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated with the contact detection body 395 itself, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with a good appearance and high appeal to players. In addition, the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with a transparent button body 351, and an effect is presented according to the change in the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 395 and the like due to the approach of the player's finger or the like to the contact detection body 395. Since a predetermined effect is presented via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., the predetermined effect is presented in response to the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351. As a result, the button main body 351 can be made to function as the effect operation section 301 . Since the contact detection body 395 or the like that can be seen through the button body 351 has a design property, the effect operation unit 301 looks like it has a design property. The pachinko machine 1 having the operation part 301 can give a strong impact to a player and can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of being differentiated from other pachinko machines. In addition, as described above, the contact detection body 395 and the like having a design can give a strong impact to the player, so that the contact detection body 395 and the like (the button main body 351) can strongly arouse interest in the player. It is possible to heighten expectations for the operation of the button body 351 (performance operation section 301), and to entertain the operation of the button body 351 when the player participatory performance for operating the button body 351 is executed. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest of the player.

In addition, since the contact detection body 395 or the like for detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button main body 351 is formed in an outer peripheral shape with a design, at first glance, depending on the player, the effect presentation It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the effect operation unit 301 (the button main body 351) for presenting the effect by means. Therefore, when the player-participation-type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301 is executed, the button body 351 is activated by the contact detection body 395 or the like for the first time by urging the player to approach or touch the button body 351. It is possible to make the player notice that it is the operation unit 301, and to give the player unexpectedness to make the player participation type performance more enjoyable. Alternatively, when the player participatory effect that operates the effect operation unit 301 is executed, if the player approaches or touches the button main body 351 without knowing the effect operation unit 301, the contact detection body 395 or the like is stopped. Since the performance is presented by the performance presenting means by changing the electric capacity, the player can be surprised, and the presented performance can amuse the player and suppress the deterioration of interest.

Furthermore, since the effect is presented by the effect presenting means in accordance with the change in the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 395 or the like, the player's finger or the like to the button main body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like is presented. Approach and contact can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be easily realized. In addition, since an effect is presented in accordance with a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 395 or the like, the player's finger or the like approaches the button main body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like and touches the button body 351 . Since it is possible to detect the interval (distance) in multiple stages, by presenting an effect according to each stage, it is possible to present a more colorful effect to the player. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by making it difficult to get tired of.

In addition, since the outer periphery of the contact detection body 395 and the like is formed in a predetermined shape, even if an inorganic material such as punching metal, expanded metal, or wire mesh is used as the conductive contact detection body 395 or the like, Designability can be imparted to the contact detection body 395 or the like, deterioration in appearance due to the contact detection body 395 or the like can be prevented, and the contact detection body 395 or the like can be made conspicuous, and the above effects can be achieved. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily realized.

In addition, since the outer peripheral shape of the contact detection body 395 and the like is formed into a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct a device having designability without forming the contact detection body 395 and the like into a three-dimensional shape. can. Therefore, the contact detection body 395 and the like can be formed in a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the manufacturing cost of the contact detection body 395 and the like can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button main body 351, the contact detection body 395 and the like are prevented from being contaminated with dust, food and drink, etc., and cleaning is easy. can be More specifically, since the contact detection member 395 or the like is made of a material having unevenness such as punching metal, dirt such as dust and food and drink easily adheres to the unevenness, and it is troublesome to clean the dirt. However, since the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the button main body 351, even if the contact detection body 395 and the like is made of a punching metal having unevenness, the button body 351 This makes it possible to prevent dirt from adhering, and to reduce the burden on the side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed as it is easy to clean.

In addition, since the surface side of the contact detection bodies 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button main body 351 so that the player does not touch the contact detection bodies 395 and the like, the contact detection bodies 395 and the like are made of a metal vapor deposition film or the like. When a material such as foil stamping that enhances the design is used, it is possible to prevent early wear due to touch by the player, and to increase the durability of the contact detection body 395 and the like.

Furthermore, the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button body 351, and as described above, the transparent button body 351 prevents the player from directly touching the contact detection body 395 and the like. Since it is possible to use an object that does not feel good to the touch or an object that gives discomfort to the player as the sensing element 395 or the like, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the material used for the contact sensing element 395 or the like, and to meet the needs. The contact detection body 395 and the like can be formed from suitable materials.

In addition, when the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like to change the capacitance of the contact detection body 395 or the like, the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395 are changed. Since a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the button main body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., the player brings his/her finger or the like closer to or touches the button main body 351. can be intuitively recognized, and the player can enjoy the actions of fingers and the like.

In addition, the effect is presented to the player through the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., and when the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395, etc. , the button main body 351, the contact detection body 395, and the like are executed, the effect presented to the player is executed. can be provided, and the operation using the button body 351 (player participation type performance) can be enjoyed.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in order to operate the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 capable of performing a plurality of operations, the player approaches or touches the button body 351 with a finger or the like, and touches the contact detection body 352. When the entry of a finger or the like into the detection area is detected by (contact detection sensor main body 358), a plurality of LEDs 355a of button outer decoration board 355 and a plurality of LEDs 364a of button inner decoration board 364 emit light to play through button body 351. A light emission effect in which light is emitted to the player, a effect in which the player's finger or the like that is in contact with the button body 351 is vibrated by the vibration motor 356, and a projection upward of the button body 351 by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. , the button body 351 can be made to function as the contact operation unit 302, and the player can enjoy the game. can let Also, at this time, effects such as light, vibration, impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. are given to the player through the button body 351, so that the player can be surprised and amused by the effects. , and the willingness to operate the button body 351 can be enhanced. Then, when the player's finger or the like touches the button body 351 and moves the finger or the like appropriately to press the button body 351 downward, the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation portion 303, so that the contact detection body The player can be entertained with a variety of performance operations by the contact operation by detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like by 352 and the pressing operation of the button body 351, and the player is less likely to get bored and is interesting. can be suppressed.

Also, the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the contact detection body 352 is provided near the back surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351, the contact detection body 352 detects the button main body 351. The approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like on the upper surface portion 351a can be detected, and the same effects as above can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit can be arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button body 351, so that the contact detection sensor body 358 can be arranged in an inconspicuous portion, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look better.

In addition, on the back side (lower side) of the button body 351, the outer button decoration board 355, the inner button decoration board 364, and the effect operation section lifting mechanism 360 are provided, so that the player can receive light and light through the button body 351. Effects such as vibration, impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. can be easily imparted, and the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall structure of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. 75 is a front view of the body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a rear view of the body frame of the pachinko machine. 77 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front right, FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front left, and FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the back.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, pays out the game ball B to the player side, and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). As shown, the body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached openable and closable to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 opens and closes so that the open front side is closed. Mounted possible.

The body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. a body frame top hinge member 510 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame top hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame top hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; A main body frame hinge assembly attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 in front view, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and rotatably attached to the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3. A solid 520 is provided.

The main body frame 4 includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and is positioned within the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launching device 540 for hitting a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base unit 500 in a front view on the rear side, and the payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for dispensing game balls B to the player side, a substrate unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. a back cover 640 that is openable and closable and covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501; and a locking unit 650 for locking between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

The body frame base unit 500 includes a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member for guiding a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a box-shaped ball tank attached to the payout base 551 extending left and right and opening upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in an upwardly open groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 away from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and a tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570, based on instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and a game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides to the board unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the body frame base 501 , a plurality of door frame hooks 652 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of locking with the door frame 3 , and a unit base 651 protruding rearward. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be engaged with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that vertically moves the door frame hooks 652 or the outer frame hooks 653, and the door frame hooks 652 are attached downward. It has a lock spring 655 that biases the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The body frame base unit 500 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 83 and the like. FIG. 82(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The body frame base unit 500 includes a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a body frame base 501 attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the body frame base 501 to guide a connection cable 503 . and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 which is rotatably attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth. ing.

The body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 includes a base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base body 501a. A game board insertion opening 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game board on which the game board 5 is placed, which forms the lower side of the game board insertion opening 501b. A placing portion 501c and a game board restricting portion 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the horizontal direction and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 in the left, right, and rearward directions.

In addition, the body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 501c in the front view of the base body 501a in front view, and has a launcher attachment portion 501e for attaching the ball launcher 540, and a launcher attachment portion 501e. A cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted is inserted in the right side of the portion 501e in the front view, and a substrate unit is inserted in the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c in the front view. A circular speaker opening 501g for facing forward the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a at 620, and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. It has a cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h in front view.

Further, the body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate-like shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base body 501a when viewed from the front. A rear extending portion 501j rotatably attached and a rear extending portion 501j are formed near the upper and lower ends of the left end in the front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. An upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

Further, the body frame base 501 has a door for detecting opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted on the front surface of the base body 501a. A frame release switch is installed. When the door frame 3 is opened (released) with respect to the body frame 4, the door frame open switch is depressurized and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. A detection signal from the door frame open switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 . Further, the body frame base 501 has a body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base body 501a below the position where the door frame open switch is attached. there is When the body frame 4 is opened (released) with respect to the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch is depressing and can detect the opening of the body frame 4. As shown in FIG. A detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 .

A game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 around a longitudinally extending axis below the game board placing portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 enables the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b to be detachable by regulating the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position to the right of the speaker opening 501g and below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed to have a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably attached about an axis that extends vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, and both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a projecting forward and extending rightward from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of protruding strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a guide body 502a are penetrated in the front-rear direction at the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, and a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that an attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis extending vertically near the right end of the cable attachment recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503 . The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 and the other end of which is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame secondary board. It is connected to the relay board 105 .

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 is attached to the body frame base 501 at an end (right end) on the side opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the hinge in the left-right direction. ) is mounted rotatably about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3 .

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a side connected to the interface board 635 connected to the connection cable guide member. 502 is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and in a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 are installed. (see FIG. 83(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, bends back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 .

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (preferably α/3≧β). (see FIG. 83(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but the increase stops when the opening angle α exceeds a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). transition as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this manner, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501 . By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not caught between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. problems can be prevented.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees. You can get used to it. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the crease. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the crease of the door frame 3 can prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is attached to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a guides the leading end of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis) side of the lower door frame hinge pin 126 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the center axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, and the door is positioned closer to the speaker duct 103 than the cable holder 103a. The angle between the tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open through the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and effects similar to those described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Main body frame upper hinge member]
Main body frame upper hinge member 510 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the door frame 3. is rotatably mounted on the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the above.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge body 511 in which the rear part of a horizontally extending plate-like plate is bent downward into an L shape, and a columnar shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge body 511. and a main body frame hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame hinge assembly 50 . The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a which penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in the horizontally extending portion and supports the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 pivotally. I have it.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501 k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 . The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 .

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to attach the main body frame 4 to the door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the door frame 3. door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521. The lower hinge second main body 522 is formed by bending the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member upward into an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 spaced upward from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 abuts against the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521 .

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

The lower hinge second body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. , is equipped with The door frame lower hinge hole 522 a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 . can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcing frame]
Main body frame reinforcement frame 530 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500 . The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view that is U-shaped with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a rear portion extending rightward from the front end thereof, which restricts the forward and vertical movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached with a space therebetween in the vertical direction.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove 530a that opens to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into the groove 530a. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove portion 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 is in a meandering state in plan view, and an unauthorized tool can be inserted from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also extends from the left side of the main body frame 4 through between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( Prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the game board 5).

[4-5. ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84(a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and FIG. 84(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and shoots the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 onto the game board attached to the main body frame 4. 5 for hitting into the game area 5a. The ball shooting device 540 can hit the game ball B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 .

The ball launching device 540 includes a flat plate-shaped launching base 541 attached to the launching device attachment portion 501e of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front, and rotates. A firing solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through a firing base 541; A shooting rail 544 is attached to the front surface of the shooting base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is configured such that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544. In this state, when the handle 195 is rotated, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 . Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the shooting rail 544 and hit into the game area 5a.

It should be noted that if the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball B, etc., the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From the gap, the ball drops into the foul ball socket 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[4-6. payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a front perspective view of the payout base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout base unit. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and attached to the rear side of the body frame base unit 500 .

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 . The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a front-rear width extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. a right side plate portion 551c extending short downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a; and a rear side of the top plate portion 551a. and a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and a rear plate portion 551b extending from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width to the right. A back plate left portion 551e, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b, and rightward from the front portion of the lower side of the left side plate portion 551b. A bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f are provided. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open forward and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the horizontal direction with a length substantially equal to the horizontal width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b extending above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with a length substantially equal to the height of the direction. The dispensing base 551 has front ends of a top plate portion 551a, a left side plate portion 551b, and a right side plate portion 551c attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the dispensing base 551 has a vertically extending shallow concave portion opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the left side portion 551e of the back plate, and the inner side plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is attached. In addition, the dispensing base 551 protrudes rightward from the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and includes a box-shaped ball tank 552 that extends left and right and is open upward, and a part that extends left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape that is open upward.

In addition, the dispensing base unit 550 includes a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction, and a first rail cover 554 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. and a ball stop member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 has a length in the left-right direction that is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a rightward position in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is oblique to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and the shape extends straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560 .

In addition, the upper end of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left is steeper than the bottom surface with respect to the horizontal so that the height of the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side is lower at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. A first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball straightening member 556, and a ball stop member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are provided to prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from widening or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the end on the side of the first rail cover 554 is arranged around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 has rectifying pieces 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 91). By delaying the flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B that are circulating in two stages, the rectification pieces 556a rectify the flow of the game balls B so that they flow in one stage on the downstream side. Even if the height is lowered, the balls will not be clogged.

The ball stop member 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in a front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

Furthermore, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 in front view on the top surface of the portion extending left and right of the payout base 551 . The external terminal plate 558 is for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 has a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion opening 501b side of the main body frame base 501 . A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a front perspective view of the payout unit in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. FIG. 87(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. be. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550. As shown in FIG.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570 and guided by the ball guiding unit 570. a payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and an upper full ball path unit A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the side of the door frame 3 or the side of the board unit 620 is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580 . The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pull out lever 593 is operated from the ball pull out passage 580b to the upper full ball path unit A game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides down the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball withdrawal passage 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the side of the door frame 3 via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for

The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a meandering manner through which the game ball B flows, and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward, and the front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. A flat guide passage front cover 572, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by a game ball B flowing through the guide passage 570a, and a game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 91).

In the sphere guide unit 570, the shape of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 when viewed from the front is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the top surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the top end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends rightward to guide The guide unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while being repeatedly folded between the widths of the unit base 571 in the horizontal direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guiding unit base 571 .

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the circulation direction in which the game ball B is circulated. It can be guided in a line.

The ball guide unit 570 has a movable piece member 573 attached near the top thereof so as to be able to move forward and backward into the guide passage 570a. Specifically, the upper portion of the movable piece member 573 is attached to the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in a front view so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. is formed to This movable piece member 573 is in a state where the game ball B abuts on the part protruding into the guide passage 570a, and the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. becomes.

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball-off detection sensor 574 is in a state of detection when the game ball B exists in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B does not exist in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guide unit 570, since the guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guide unit 570, and many games are played in the guide passage 570a. Ball B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guide unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball end detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89 and the like. FIG. 88 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction. FIG. 89(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball ejection movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached from behind to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 .

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a opened rearward and through which the game balls B can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a; A flat dispensing device rear lid 582 closing the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward are provided. ing.

Dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between dispensing device main body 581 and dispensing device front lid 583. A spur-gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached thereto, and a spur-gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583 , a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispenser main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and the second transmission gear 587 meshes with the second transmission gear 587. and a plurality of detecting pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a. a payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a rotating integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and protruding into the payout passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 is provided.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a. A movable ball removal piece 592 attached to open and close the ball removal passage 580b at a portion branched from the dispensing passage 580a by a lid 582, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. and a ball extracting lever 593 attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically in a plan view. Dispensing device 580 has a width in the left-right direction larger than the width in the left-right direction of ball guiding unit 570 toward the right in front view.

As shown in FIG. 88, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It is open downward. The dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the top to about 1/3 of the total height so as to move leftward little by little as it goes downward from the upstream end, and after bending slightly obliquely downward to the right from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotational axis) of the delivery blade 589 . Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer circumference of the payout blade 589 is formed, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the center of the delivery blade 589 in the rear view.

A payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout vane 589 and directly above the downstream end in the payout passage 580a.

The ball extraction passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and branches at a portion where it is bent rightward, and extends vertically along the left side of the rear view to the lower end. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b diverge. The body-side guide wall 581a protrudes rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and is formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b in a rear view. and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a branch from the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 of the height from the top. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side walls of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball removing movable piece 592 rotates through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end when viewed from the rear. The drive gear 585 , the first transmission gear 586 , the second transmission gear 587 , and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581 and covered with a dispensing device front lid 583 on the front side. The dispensing gear member 588 is provided with three outwardly extending flat detection pieces 588b at angular intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 . The delivery blade 589 has a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape, and three blade pieces 589a are provided at angular intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The wing piece 589a is arranged so that the distance between the wing piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B at the portion extending toward the rotating shaft from above in the payout passage 580a and then extending rightward in rear view. Further, it protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The payout blade 589 has a ball housing portion 589b recessed in an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotates clockwise in the rear view. Thus, the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b can be moved downstream.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially attached to the payout device rear cover 582 and the payout device front cover 583 so as to be rotatable together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotating shaft of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the delivery blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the delivery gear member 588 that rotates together with the delivery blade 589 .

The upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592 is rotatably attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a around an axis extending back and forth. The ball removing movable piece 592 is bent in a V-shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball removing movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It can protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat out of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 and to the left in the rear view. A portion of the ball removal lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extracting lever 593 at the lower end, the lower part thereof can come into contact with the ball extracting movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball extracting movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal movable piece 592 can close the ball removal passage 580b. Further, by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the upper end, the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened (Fig. 89).

When the ball extraction lever 593 is lifted to make the ball extraction movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which was in a state like a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball extraction movable piece 592, moves to the ball extraction movable piece 592. and flows down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout vane 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a side. will flow down quickly.

In this way, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball extraction passage 580b at a high speed. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the game ball B vigorously, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b by the force of the contact. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592 by the game ball B, and the ball extraction movement due to the collision of the game ball B is prevented. It is possible to suppress deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 .

For this reason, since the ball removal movable piece 592 can be made difficult to break, more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580b, so that pachinko It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement, maintenance, etc. of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Also, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball extraction movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B, and the ball extraction passage 580b. , the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the back cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the gap is larger than the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the narrow gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the ball after that is released. Since the movement of the movable ball removal piece 592 is due to inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable ball removal piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable ball removal piece 592, and the main body side guide. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated downstream of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550 . The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610 . The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has an open rear side, and a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full-tank base 601 and has an open front side. and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full-tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in a front view, and has a back cover attachment portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

In addition, the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper delivery ball receiving passage 600a, extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left-right center of the upper ball storage passage 600b in a front view and opening downward on the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. An upper full discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the ball storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the bottom surface, and an upper opening near the right end in the front view on the top surface and substantially perpendicular to the bottom. and an upper ball extraction passage 600e extending downward and opening downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 91).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side in front view, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball extraction passage 600e are arranged in order and open downward. When the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600 e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580 b in the dispensing device 580 . As a result, the game ball B released (discharged) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full payout passage 600d. is emitted downward from any of the In addition, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank ball route unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower portion of the upper full ball path unit 600 . The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c. 611, a lower full-tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full-tank base 611, a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full-tank base 611 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth, and A payout passage opening/closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full-tank payout passage 610b and a payout passage opening/closing door 613 are attached in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full-tank payout passage 610b. and a biasing closing spring 614 .

The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full-tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the part extending upward at the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b extend forward side by side and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball passage unit 610. As shown in FIG. The lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b extends forward while being slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full-tank dispensing passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the middle in the front-rear direction.

The payout passage open/close door 613 is rotatably mounted between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening/closing door 613 is biased clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 has an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape centering on the center of rotation of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and the front end surface of the actuating protrusion 613a approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is slanted to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed to contact the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4. As shown in FIG.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full payout passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are connected to the upper full ball passage. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d passes through the lower full payout passage 610b. , and the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

In addition, when the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank ball socket 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 opened leftward in the base unit 620b of the board unit 620. As shown in FIG.

In the normal state (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4), the lower full-tank ball path unit 610 is such that the actuating projection 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 contacts the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By coming into contact with the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As shown in FIG. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated clockwise in front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of Game Ball B in Payout Unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the body frame. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 in the state assembled to the body frame 4 . In a normal state, the ball extraction lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is positioned at the lower end to close the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a at the branched portion. Further, in the lower full-tank ball path unit 610, the dispensing passage open/close door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are supplied from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the ball-out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 and sent through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580.例文帳に追加When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout vane 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout vane 589. becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570 a of the ball guide unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573 , and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573 . As a result, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589 .

In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b moves clockwise in the back view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a 589 is discharged downstream. After being detected by the payout detection sensor 591, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (ball housing portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The game balls B sent to the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 pass through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state and are arranged directly under the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. , is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 at .

When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the payout device. The game ball B paid out from 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full ball path unit 600 that is in communication. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down toward the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full ball payout passage 600d passes through the lower full ball payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving opening 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. can be received. After that, the game ball B received by the full ball socket 150b is discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball outlet 150d, and the lower tray ball supply opening 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are put out, the game balls B can be automatically put out to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

In addition, when the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, and the game balls B cannot be released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower tray The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full by voice (for example, ``Please remove the ball! stop temporarily until

When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are ejected from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball extraction lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the state of the rising end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball removing movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

At this time, at the position of the ball extraction movable piece 592, the falling game ball B contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extraction movable piece 592, so that the ball extraction movable piece 592 is less likely to break.

Then, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through and discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96 and the like. FIG. 92(a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and FIG. 92(b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. FIG. 96 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 .

The substrate unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board placing portion 501c, and a speaker cover 621 facing forward near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front. and a container-like speaker box 623 that is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and that opens forward. .

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed of a plurality of vertically extending slits penetrating in the vicinity of the left end in front view, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b is recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extends in the left and right direction, obliquely downward and rearward. and an open connecting portion 621c.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side so as to face forward. The connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs low frequencies.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that opens forward. is formed so that the protrusion of the As a result, a sufficient space can be secured on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front, so that the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620 a forms part of an enclosure 624 that encloses the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 . In the enclosure 624, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a space front concave portion 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front. Even if it is formed stepwise so as to reduce the volume, a sufficiently wide space is ensured on the right side of the body frame speaker 622 .

When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connection cylinder part 43a so that the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the body frame speaker 622 is positioned behind the speaker unit 620a. and the inner space 40a of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication. Therefore, on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43 can form a wide enclosure 624. It is possible to output (radiate) the sound forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42. As shown in FIG.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body-frame speaker 622 (part of the enclosure 624) extends to the right in a front view with a relatively large depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since it is communicated with the lower outer frame assembly 40 through the connecting tube portion 43a, the lower outer frame assembly 40 can be connected to the lower outer frame assembly 40 without particularly attenuating the low frequency range in the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear. In addition, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel member 42 .

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a phase-inverted state, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622, and the sound is output from the plate unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a loud sound with deep bass.

In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are produced. This allows the player to listen to sound with rich bass.

In the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b. A through-cylinder 623a extending in a tubular shape communicating with the through-hole 621d and penetrating back and forth is formed. When assembled into the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other, and the enclosure 624 is independent. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through-hole 621d and the through-cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. and a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed by a front base 625 and a rear base 626 in cooperation, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a front view. A ball ejection guiding part 627 that guides to the right, and a discharged ball receiving part that opens upward on the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball ejection guiding part 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball ejection port 629 for ejecting downward the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ejection ball receiving portion 628.

The ball ejection guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens leftward on the upper left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end that opens to the left end side of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 . The ball removal guide part 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a state where it is assembled to the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the ejected ball receiving portion 628. - 特許庁

The ejected ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends laterally. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 at the left end in front view, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 to the right in the front view after guiding the ball ejection guide part 627 and the ejected ball receiving part 628. Since the ink is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a wide space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer bass than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and .

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (Fig. 96) and The payout control board 633 activates the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5 or the like. It is for controlling and paying out the designated number of game balls B to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, thereby increasing the deterrence against fraud.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and a rear side of the interface substrate 635. and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 .

The circuit board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at a portion that protrudes most rearward to the rear of the body-frame speaker 622 . The interface board 635 is connected to one end (body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 . The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends rightward in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. back cover]
The back cover 640 of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 . The back cover 640 has its right side in a front view attached to the rear end of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically. and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600. As shown in FIG.

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward when viewed from the front. It is formed so as to be positioned substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the body frame 4 can be seen from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 .

[4-10. locking unit]
Locking unit 650 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 97(a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and FIG. 97(b) is a back perspective view of the locking unit. The locking unit 650 is attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 and locks the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 .

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lock units protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 protruding backward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and a door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the direction of rotation. and a transmission cylinder 654 for vertically moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the body frame 4 , a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 , transmission cylinders 654 , and outer frame unlocking levers 656 are positioned forward of the front surface of the body frame base 501 . Protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. Engaged with the transmission member 133, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are engaged with the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the door frame hooks 652 are locked. The frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the lock unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise in a front view. The door frame hook 652 moves upward and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the body frame 4 . On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654 to unlock the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 . When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 , sliding the outer frame unlocking lever 656 downward causes the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 to move downward. 4 is unlocked. Thus, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the front end sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are moved by the hooking member 116 and the upper hooking member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, it is locked by the biasing force of the lock spring 655. As shown in FIG.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 105. FIG. FIG. 98(a) is a plan view of the body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). FIG. 99 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper portion of the perspective view of the body frame as viewed from behind. FIG. 100(a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails and the like as viewed from above, and FIG. 100(b) is a perspective view of FIG. 100(a) viewed from below. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100(a) exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in which game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour path in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 105 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side.

As described above, the body frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 at its rear portion, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 by means of the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer circumference of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped body that is attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base 501 in a front view on the rear side. A payout base 551, a sphere tank 552 that is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box shape (container shape) that extends left and right and opens upward, and a ball tank 552 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opens upward. A tank rail 553 extending leftward in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 leftward in front view. a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553; A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the payout base 551, a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 and for paying out game balls B to the player side, It has

The sphere tank 552 has a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a. It is The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end of the front wall 552b on the opposite side (the side of the right side wall 552e) with a length of about 3/4 of the length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. It is formed over

The tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 on the right end side (upstream side) when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552 . . The tank rail 553 extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom, and has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction orthogonal to the direction of circulation of the game ball B. have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. In a plan view, the main guiding portion 553a extends leftward from the right end parallel to the axis extending in the leftward and rightward direction from the right end to a position about 1/10 of the total length in the leftward and rightward directions, and then leftward. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move rearward as it goes, and extending from there to the left end in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction. . The main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 has a portion extending from the left end to the right in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. As shown in FIG. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the passage through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) at which only one can be circulated.

In addition, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main guide portion 553a is arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guide portion 553a and that changes in width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guide portion 553a. there is By this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes downstream. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end toward the main guiding portion 553a downward. Thus, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing in the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction is aligned in a row toward the downstream side and downward side.

The center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is arranged on the inner side, and the bulging portion 553b is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slight bulge at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved swelling portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the swelling portion 553b acts depends on the position of the contacting swelling portion 553b. Since the direction changes in various directions, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of spheroids in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends constantly, the game ball B flowing through the bulging portion 553b is always subjected to reaction force in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force becomes difficult to disperse, and the game ball B inside is always pushed in a fixed direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and ball clogging (ball jam) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B to be pushed are dispersed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball jam) can be made difficult to occur.

The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clog (ball jam) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the clogged place can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the clogging of the balls can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be enhanced. A decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen through the tank rail 553 from the rear. When a problem occurs in the movement of the movable effect unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be checked while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. It is possible to achieve the effects of

The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552 and extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552 d of the ball tank 552 . In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is inclined so that the height is higher. and an overflow surface portion 501m extending rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to above the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. , and the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is inclined to be lower, and part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m and a detour passage 552g that guides the

In addition, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 among both left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g. and a discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is open, and a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g across the discharge portion 551j. An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) are covered, and the upper surface is overflowed. and a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than the surface portion 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the body frame base 501 . The overflow surface portion 501m is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. extended to The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the length in the horizontal direction is about 1/3 of the length in the horizontal direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in a front view extends from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is positioned to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the horizontal direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. This overflow surface portion 501m forms a gap with a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and includes a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m, The upper end of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o is higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right outer sides, and extends in the front-rear direction in a strip shape. and a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. In addition, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right stepped portion 501o is longer in the left-right direction than in the front-rear direction. Further, the right stepped portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is raised. The gap between is formed at a height narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m is aligned with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the ball tank 552 in the front view. The right end of the right stepped portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG. In the following, the container-shaped area surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is simply referred to as the sphere tank 552 as well. The detour passage 552g extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in a flat plate shape, and has a passage surface 552h whose front end is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and whose rear end is lower. and a dam portion extending upward from the opposite side of the passage surface 552h to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 at the left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side when viewed from the front. It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes from the right end side. In addition, the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be horizontally inclined in the horizontal direction.

The detour passage 552g is arranged such that the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is aligned with the front end side of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank-like shape and that extends obliquely in the left-right direction. extended. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552g changes its distribution direction from the slanted rear end so as to be perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, from the rear end of the detour passage 552g, since the game ball B is released in a direction substantially perpendicular to the circulation direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552g A game ball B from can be received. In addition, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a substantially vertical direction (perpendicular direction) to the circulation direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552g Ball clogging in 553 can be made difficult to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the obliquely extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released to the upstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrowed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball slugs in the tank rail 553 by releasing it to a wide area of the tank rail 553 .

In addition, the portion where the game ball B is guided by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear portion of the left wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outer left portion of the rear wall 552c of the tank rail 553 in front view. A game ball B that passes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) from inside the ball tank 552 flows through this portion. For this reason, in the portion behind the detour passage 552g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). height). Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured, so that the detour passage 552g The tank rail 553 can surely receive the game ball B guided backward by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not fall backward from the tank rail 553.例文帳に追加

The sphere tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f of the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side extending from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the position about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to about 1/2 of the full length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the full length, it extends in parallel with the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it extends parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the spherical tank 552, in a plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape and the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side. and has an opening 552k penetrating in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 has flat flanges extending laterally outward and vertically on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper edge of the portion of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edge of the two flange portions 552l is equal to the upper edge of the left wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (body frame base 501). upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled together, the upstream end of the tank rail 553 (right end in front view) is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552 . In addition, the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are positioned (protruded) behind the ball tank 552 . )are doing. The rear end side of the left detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is positioned at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. As shown in FIG. The discharge part 551j is arranged in the ball tank 552 so that when assembled to the main body frame 4, the height lower than the bypass passage 552g is lowered rearward in a stepwise manner to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in front view to the tank rail 553, it extends leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). position in the vicinity), and then extends backward.

The external terminal plate 558 has a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a arranged in the lateral direction on the rear surface thereof. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the gripping portion can be opened by operating a lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. As shown in FIG. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG.

Next, the function and effect of the upper portion of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lowered as indicated by the white arrows in FIG. The left stepped portion 501n has a rear right corner, and the right stepped portion 501o has a rear left corner. Also, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side thereof becomes lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lowered.

Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island equipment, first, the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest in the upper edge of the outer periphery, is crossed. The game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface portion 501m, and can be made to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from increasing further in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). , it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball jam) due to engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 .

Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, the game balls B overflowing the overflow surface portion 501m from the ball tank 552 can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressure on the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and clogging of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 can be avoided. can be prevented. In addition, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m can be prevented from spilling outside (rear side) of the body frame 4. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the game ball B spilled outside the body frame 4 is caught between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and the body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552 Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

In addition, since the height of the upper edge of the outer periphery of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than the overflow portion 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g The upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, after overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m over the overflow portion 552f, the game ball B circulating from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g is on the left side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning from the detour passage 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the ball is released. It is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552 .

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is positioned from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). Since the height is also high, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) with respect to the detour passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552g is prevented from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a constant direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the detour passage 552g can be in a constant direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing each other and getting caught due to the direction of the pressure applied to the game balls B being varied, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B can be prevented. can be prevented.

In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guiding portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding portion 553a, thereby aligning in the horizontal direction. Since they are aligned, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the tank rail 553 has a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged in a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, the game ball released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the effects described above can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side so that the width of the main guiding portion 553a becomes smaller. Since they are changed so as to coincide with each other, a plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a line in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B circulates decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) By circulating a plurality of game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the height direction to the downstream side through the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced and a row is formed. can be aligned to Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide a plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the capacity inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552 .

In addition, on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j in between, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since it is provided with a terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the external terminal plate 558), the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be distant from the ball tank 552 to which game balls B are supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to reach (abut) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , the contact of the game ball B does not cause a short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring.

In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed backward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is placed in the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 103) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and clogging of the game ball B occurs in the ball tank 552. can be prevented.

In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 103, these inclinations can guide the game ball B to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B passes under the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game balls are piled up on the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) capable of stacking the game balls B upward can be secured. , the game ball B guided by the detour passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B can be prevented from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[4-12-1. Second embodiment of tank rail, etc.]
Next, a second embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 110 and the like. FIG. 106 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine provided with the tank rails and the like of the second embodiment, viewed from behind and showing an enlarged portion of the tank rails. Fig. 107(a) is a plan view showing the assembled state of the tank rail etc. of Fig. 106 together with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of Fig. 107 as seen from the front, and (c). 2 is a rear perspective view of the tank rail and the like in (a). FIG. Fig. 108(a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in Fig. 107 and viewed from the front, and Fig. 108(b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in Fig. 107 and viewed from the rear. FIG. 109 is a sectional view of the tank rail and the like taken along the carka line in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the tank rail of FIG. 107 in cross section. The tank rail 553A of the second embodiment, which is different from the above, has a first rail cover 554A, a second rail cover 555A, and a ball straightening member 556A in addition to the tank rail 553A. , the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556, and the same components will be described with the same reference numerals.

The tank rail 553A of this embodiment rectifies the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers them to the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560 . The tank rail 553A extends leftward in a groove shape that opens upward. The tank rail 553A has a first rail cover 554A so as to close the upper end side, a second rail cover 555A provided on the left side of the first rail cover 554A in front view, and a A ball straightening member 556A provided is attached, and a ball stop member 557 capable of blocking the circulation of game balls B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A.

As shown in FIG. 107(a) and the like, the tank rail 553A has a meandering portion 553c meandering in the front-rear direction downstream of the bulging portion 553b. The circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c. The first rail cover 554A is attached upstream (on the ball tank 552 side) of the meandering portion 553c.

The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction so as to cover the open upper end of the tank rail 553A from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in front view) including the meandering portion 553c. The second rail cover 555A includes a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 553A; and an opening 555c penetrating through the cover portion 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b are formed in a meandering shape following the meandering portion 553c of the tank rail 553A at the portion where the meandering portion 553c is provided. Straightening pieces 556a of a ball straightening member 556A, which will be described later, are inserted through the openings 555c from above.

The ball rectifying member 556A extends back and forth at its upstream end side and is attached rotatably around an axis. The ball straightening member 556A is provided above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A and between the pair of protective walls 555b, penetrates the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A, and protrudes into the tank rail 553A. It has flat plate-like rectifying pieces 556a. This ball rectifying member 556A abuts on the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the tank rail 553A from above, thereby breaking down the stages of the game balls B and making it easier to align them in a row. The game ball B is restrained from moving rapidly to the downstream side, thereby preventing the occurrence of ball biting on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

According to the tank rail 553A and the like of this embodiment, in the assembled state, the ball straightening member 556A is positioned below the upper end of the protective wall 555b between the pair of protective walls 555b in the second rail cover 555A. ing. As a result, the electric wire (indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 106) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558 provided on the front upper side of the portion of the tank rail 553A to which the ball straightening member 556A is attached is It is possible to prevent contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above. By the way, when the wire connected to the wire connection terminal 558a contacts the ball rectifying member 556A from above, the weight of the wire causes the game ball B to contact the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A. may not be able to rotate upward, and there is a risk that the rectifying action of the game ball B by the ball rectifying member 556A may not be sufficiently exhibited. In contrast, in this embodiment, the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from contacting the ball rectifying member 556A. When the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the rectifying member 556A, the ball rectifying member 556A can be rotated upward, and the rectifying action is sufficiently exerted to prevent ball biting and ball bite in the tank rail 553A. The occurrence of clogging can be prevented.

Further, since the meandering portion 553c is provided on the tank rail 553A, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c. By the way, in the tank rail 553A whose height becomes narrower toward the downstream side, if the upper game ball B among the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages moves first to the downstream side, ball jamming is likely to occur. . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c, thereby preventing the upper game ball B from moving downstream first. can be suppressed, and the occurrence of ball jamming can be reduced.

In addition, as described above, the protective wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A prevents the electric wire from contacting the ball rectifying member 556A, thereby preventing ball clogging. Arranging the terminal board (for example, the external terminal board 558) to which the electric wire is connected or near the control board, or arranging the terminal board or the control board to which many electric wires are connected near the tank rail 553A. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with a high degree of freedom in arranging the tank rail 553A (the ball tank 552), the terminal plate, and the like.

[4-12-2. Third embodiment of tank rail etc.]
Next, a third embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 111 to 118 and the like. FIG. 111 is a perspective view showing the body frame provided with the tank rail and the like of the third embodiment, with the tank rail portion enlarged, as seen from the rear right. FIG. 112 is a perspective view showing the body frame provided with the tank rail and the like of the third embodiment, with the tank rail portion enlarged, as viewed from the rear left. FIG. 113(a) is a rear view of the body frame showing an enlarged portion of the external terminal plate, and FIG. 113(b) is a left side view of the body frame showing an enlarged upper portion. 114(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 113(b), and FIG. 114(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 113(a). FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in FIG. 114(b). Fig. 116(a) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of the third embodiment as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of (a) as seen from the upper right rear, and (c) is a It is the perspective view which looked at the tank rail etc. of (a) from the lower right back. FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 116 and viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 116 and viewed from the rear.

The tank rail and the like of the third embodiment are similar to the tank rail and the like of the first embodiment (the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball straightening member 556, and the ball stop member 557), a protective cover 559 for covering the ball rectifying member 556 from above is added.

The tank rails and the like of this embodiment are attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and extend left and right into a box-like ball tank 552 that is open upward. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 above the portion where it is located, is open upward, and extends leftward in a groove shape.

The ball tank 552 has a length in the left-right direction that is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a rightward position in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is oblique to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and the shape extends straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560 .

In addition, the upper end of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left is steeper than the bottom surface with respect to the horizontal so that the height of the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side is lower at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a.

The tank rail 553 has an opening on the bottom surface of a portion that extends straight to the left (a portion that decreases in height toward the downstream side) so that dirt and dust in the tank rail 553 can drop. A plurality of portions 553d are formed. These openings 553d are provided at portions below a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, and a ball straightening member 556, which will be described later. The opening 553d is opened downward and rearward of the tank rail 553, extends to the left and right, and is formed in a size that the game ball B cannot pass through. When the game ball B exists on the tank rail 553, a part of the game ball B can be directly visually recognized from behind through the opening 553d. Also, the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be touched by the operator's finger, a thin stick, or the like through the opening 553d. As a result, ball clogging occurring at that portion can be eliminated through the opening 553d. In addition, through the opening 553d, the ball straightening member 556 can be lifted through the game ball B of the relevant portion, and the operation of the ball straightening member 556 can be confirmed.

Further, the tank rail or the like is located to the left of the ball tank 552 and closes a predetermined range above the right end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends leftward with a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction. A second rail cover 555 that closes the upper part from the part spaced between the first rail cover 554 and the first rail cover 554 of the tank rail 553 to the left end, and the first rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 A ball straightening member 556 provided between the rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a ball stop member 557 provided near the left end of the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and the first rail cover 554. and a protective cover 559 covering the second rail cover 555 from the middle in the left-right direction to the middle in the left-right direction across the ball rectifying member 556 .

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from widening or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. .

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the end on the side of the first rail cover 554 is arranged around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 has rectifying pieces 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114(a), etc.).

By the way, in the tank rail 553, the game balls B stacked up and down are arranged in one row. When trying to overtake the game balls B in the lower stage, the game balls B may mesh with each other and become stuck (so-called ball clogging). On the other hand, in the ball rectifying member 556 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is circulated in the tank rail 553 in two stages, the game ball B on the upper stage comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a, By slowing down the flow of the game ball B, it is possible to prevent the player from overtaking the game ball B on the lower side. As a result, the game balls B on the lower side first move to the downstream side, and the game balls B on the upper side move after that, so that the game balls B can be aligned in one row. At this time, since the game ball B on the upper side presses the straightening piece 556a from below, the ball straightening member 556 moves so that the straightening piece 556a moves upward, and the game ball on the upper side due to its own weight The ball B can be pushed downward, and the vertical swing of the ball straightening member 556 (straightening piece 556a) can promote the movement of the game ball B on the upper side to the lower side, as well as the tank rail. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging at the relevant portion of 553 (the portion whose height decreases toward the downstream).

The ball stop member 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in a front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

The protective cover 559 includes a strip-like top plate portion 559a extending left and right, a flat plate-like rear plate portion 559b extending downward from a part of the rear side of the top plate portion 559a, and a top plate portion 559a. It has a flat plate-like front plate portion 559c extending downward from the front side and the left side thereof, and a flat plate-like guide plate portion 559d extending forward from the front plate portion 559c. The top plate portion 559a and the guide plate portion 559d are inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The guide plate portion 559d is formed such that the left side of the top plate portion 559a wraps around from the front side to the left, and the rear end of this portion coincides with the rear end of the top plate portion 559a in the front-rear direction.

The protective cover 559 is positioned so that the top plate portion 559a covers the upper portion from the middle of the first rail cover 554 in the left-right direction to the middle of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction when assembled to the main body frame 4. A space is formed between the spherical straightening member 556 and the spherical straightening member 556 so that the spherical straightening member 556 can swing up and down. The rear plate portion 559b extends to a position below the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to cover the rear of the ball straightening member 556. As shown in FIG.

The front plate portion 559 c extends rightward from the top plate portion 559 a at its right end, and extends to the ball tank 552 along the tank rail 553 . The guiding plate portion 559d projects forward from the front plate portion 559c at a portion on the front side of the top plate portion 559a with a length larger than the diameter of the game ball B, and is formed to be able to guide the game ball B leftward. It is The guide plate portion 559d is inclined more gently than the upper end of the tank rail 553 is inclined. The front end of the guide plate portion 559d forms a slight gap between the rear surface of the payout base 551 and the game ball B, which cannot enter.

The protective cover 559 can prevent contact with the ball straightening member 556 from the outside in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. The operation of the ball straightening member 556 can be checked by inserting a thin rod into the opening 553d of the tank rail 553 and contacting it from below, or by inserting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 through the opening 553d. It can be confirmed by pushing it upward by lifting the game ball B, for example.

In addition, the protective cover 559 can guide the game ball B, which has entered behind the external terminal plate 558 for some reason, to the left by the guide plate portion 559 d so that it can be discharged to the outside from the left side surface of the body frame 4 . .

In this embodiment, the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball straightening member 556, the protective cover 559, etc. are made of a transparent material. The game ball B can be visually recognized from the outside.

In addition, since the upper side of the tank rail 553 is covered with the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, it is possible to prevent dirt, dust, etc. from entering the tank rail 553 from above. be able to.

In addition, since the top of the tank rail 553 is covered by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, the ball straightening member 556 and the game ball B cannot be touched from above. Therefore, if dirt or dust adheres to the game ball B or the like, it is necessary to remove the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the protective cover 559, and the like. It is meaningful to provide a plurality of openings 553d in the bottom. More specifically, when the ball straightening member 556 or the game ball B in the tank rail 553 is covered with dirt or dust, the game ball B inside is touched through the opening 553d, and the game ball B or the game ball B is touched through the opening 553d. Since the ball rectifying member 556 can be shaken by pressing, the dirt, dust, etc. adhering to the game ball B or the like can be dropped. Garbage, dust, etc. dropped from the game ball B or the like can be discharged to the outside through the opening 553d.

By the way, in the body frame 4 , the portion where the tank rail 553 extends leftward at a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction is provided behind the external terminal plate 558 , so that the wire connection terminal 558 a of the external terminal plate 558 is provided. When the electric wire connected to the ball contacts the ball straightening member 556 from above, the ball straightening member 556 rotates upward due to the weight of the wire even if the game ball B contacts the straightening piece 556a of the ball straightening member 556. There is a possibility that the rectifying action of the game ball B by the sphere rectifying member 556 cannot be exhibited sufficiently.

In addition, since the wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558 is connected to a wire whose tip is stripped of the coating, if the game ball B remains behind the external terminal plate 558 for some reason, the wire connection terminal If the connection (insertion) of the electric wire to 558a is insufficient, there is a possibility that the remaining game ball B may cause a short circuit.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the protective cover 559 covers the upper part of the ball straightening member 556, the protective cover 559 prevents the electric wire connected to the wire connection terminal 558a from contacting the ball straightening member 556. can do. As a result, when the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556, the ball rectifying member 556 can be rotated upward, and the rectifying action is sufficiently exerted to allow the ball to move within the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball biting and ball clogging.

By the way, if for some reason an electric wire is pulled out from the external terminal plate 558 and the tip of the wire comes into contact with the game ball B existing behind the external terminal plate 558, a short circuit will occur and necessary information will be sent to the game hall computer. It becomes impossible to receive it, and an error occurs in the counting at the game hall. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, since the protective cover 559 is provided with the guide plate portion 559d, the game ball B that has entered the rear of the external terminal plate 558 for some reason is guided to the left and It can be discharged outside from the left side of the frame 4 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from remaining behind the external terminal plate 558, thereby preventing the occurrence of a short due to the remaining game ball B. Therefore, by avoiding short-circuiting of electric wires, it is possible to ensure that the computer (hall computer) in the game hall receives the necessary information, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of counting errors in the game hall. A pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Further, according to this embodiment, since the game ball B is discharged to the left side of the body frame 4 by the guide plate portion 559 d of the protective cover 559 , the game ball B can be discharged behind the body frame 4 . It is possible to avoid the occurrence of troubles such as disconnection or short-circuit due to contact with various electric wires and wiring provided on the side.

[4-13. Another Embodiment of Substrate Unit]
Subsequently, a substrate unit 620A of another embodiment (second embodiment) different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 119 to 124 and the like. FIG. 119(a) is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and (c) is a board unit of (a). It is the perspective view seen from the left front. 120(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) viewed from the lower right rear. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) as seen from the front, and FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) as seen from the rear. FIG. 123(a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the squiggly line in FIG. 119(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Ku-ku line in (a), and (c) is a ) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Keke line. FIG. 124 is a bottom view showing a portion behind the door frame in the pachinko machine having the board unit of FIG. 119(a).

The board unit 620A of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear surface of the body frame base unit 500 in place of the board unit 620 described above. In the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 described above. Here, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the board unit 620 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame covering a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 660 attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 660, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

The base unit 660 includes a front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface of the front base 661 attached to the rear side. A rear base 662, and an out ball passage 663 provided between the front base 661 and the rear base 662, through which game balls B ejected downward from the game board 5 flow, and a game through which the out ball passage 663 is distributed. An out sensor 664 that detects balls B one by one, a ball extraction guide part 627 that receives and guides the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 to the right in front view, The game ball B guided by the ball removal guide part 627 is circulated, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662 and the rear side of the ball removal discharge passage 665 are closed. and a passageway wall member 666 attached to the rear base 662 as shown.

The front base 661 is formed in the shape of a box that is open forward and elongated in the left and right directions. The rear base 662 has a flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction. A ball extraction discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a.

In the base unit 660, a front base 661, a rear base 662, and a passage wall member 666 are made of transparent members. Accordingly, the ball removal guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 are also formed transparent. Therefore, the inside of the ball removal guiding portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 can be well visually recognized from the upper side or the lower side of the base unit 660, making it easy to check ball clogging or the like. there is

The out ball passage 663 is formed on the front side of a flat plate-like partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction of the rear base 662, and is open at the front. The front end is closed by front base 661 .

The out-ball passage 663 is open upward at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1 and extends in the left-right direction. Out-ball rectifying portion 663b that rectifies in a row while making it meander in the left-right direction, a downward guiding portion 663c that guides downward the game balls B rectified in a row by the out-ball rectifying portion 663b, and the lower end of the downward guiding portion 663c. It has an out ball discharge port 663d which is open downward and discharges the game ball B downward from the lower surface of the base unit 660. - 特許庁An out-ball discharge port 663d of the out-ball passage 663 is provided behind the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 124).

The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end side is lowered.

The out-ball straightening portion 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from a position to the right of the right end of the discharged ball receiving portion 663a toward the lower side of the discharged ball receiving portion 663a so that the left end side is lower. In addition, the out-ball straightening portion 663b has a depth in the front-rear direction that narrows toward the downstream side (leftward), and is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B in the vicinity of the downstream end below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. It has depth. In addition, the portion of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b that is left of the right end of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a has a lower vertical height as it goes downstream (leftward), and near the downstream end, the game ball B The height is slightly larger than the diameter. As a result, the game balls B can be aligned in a row in the out-ball straightening section 663b.

The downward guide portion 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out ball straightening portion 663b below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. It is bent backward in a small crank shape so that it becomes like this. Thereby, the downstream end (out ball discharge port 663 d ) of the downward guiding portion 663 c is located behind the front surface of the partition wall portion 662 a of the rear base 662 . An out-sensor 664 is provided upstream of the cranked portion of the downward guiding portion 663c. Since the downward guide portion 663c is bent in a crank shape and is formed in a curved shape so as not to have a portion extending in the horizontal direction, the downward guide portion 663c passes the out sensor 664 and bends in a crank shape. Even if the game ball B comes into contact with the part where the game ball B is located, it does not bounce upward toward the out-sensor 664 side, and it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected twice by the out-sensor 664 .

The out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch with high durability and long life because the game ball B passes frequently.

The ball discharge guide portion 627 is provided to the left of the ball discharge receiving portion 663 a in the out ball passage 663 . The ball removal guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens toward the left in the upper part of the left side surface in a front view, and a downstream side that bends rearward and extends to the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. , is connected to the upstream end of the ball discharge passage 665 (see FIG. 123(a), etc.).

The ball extraction discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a in the rear base 662. As shown in FIG. The ball discharge passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 while being open rearward, and the rear end side is closed by a passage wall member 666 . The rear end of the ball discharge passage 665 is located forward of the rear end of the rear base 662 by about one outer diameter of the game ball B. In other words, between the ball discharge path 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662, a gap corresponding to one game ball B or more is formed.

The upstream end (left end) of the ball discharge passage 665 is connected to the downstream end of the ball discharge guide portion 627, and has the same inclination as the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and is inclined more than the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. A lateral guide portion 665a extending to the right, a vertical guide portion 665b extending vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the lateral guide portion 665a to the lower surface of the rear base 662, and the downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide portion 665b. ) has a ball discharge port 665c that opens downward. The ball discharge port 665c is provided slightly behind the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 124).

The ball removal passage 665 has a plurality of projections 665d alternately protruding inward at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guiding portion 665b. In the ball discharge passage 665, a game ball B flowing through a vertical guiding portion 665b extending vertically downward contacts with a plurality of projections 665d alternately, thereby causing the game ball B to flow down in a zigzag manner and flow. An increase in speed can be suppressed, and the speed of the game ball B ejected downward from the ball ejection port 665c can be suppressed.

Since this ball discharge passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage formed by the horizontal guiding portion 665a and the vertical guiding portion 665b, when the ball removing lever 593 is operated to discharge the game ball B in the ball tank 552, , a large number of game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

According to the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B that has been struck into the game area 5a and discharged from the game board 5 is received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and then the out sensor 664 is detected and discharged to the island facility side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to discharge (remove) the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the like, the ball discharge lever 593 of the payout device 580 is operated to move the game ball B discharged to the ball discharge passage 580b side to the out ball passage 663. The ball is discharged to the island facility side of the game hall through the ball removal guide part 627 and the ball removal discharge passage 665 which are separated and independent. As a result, only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be accurately detected. can be counted. Therefore, based on the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664, the number of game balls B can be accurately counted. The pachinko machine 1 is capable of calculating a payout rate (ball payout rate).

The number of game balls B counted by the out-sensor 664 (the number of out-balls) is driven into the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005, the first The number of game balls B accepted by the big winning hole 2006, the second big winning hole 2007, etc. and ejected from the game board 5, and the number of the winning holes received after hitting into the game area 5a It is the sum of the number of game balls B that have been accepted by the out port 1008 without being discharged and discharged from the game board 5, and the number of game balls B that have been hit into the game area 5a (the number of shot balls). It's about.

In addition, since the payout rate (ball payout rate) changes according to the game state, the payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) is defined as "payout within a predetermined period. number/number of out-balls in a predetermined period=payout rate in a predetermined period".

Further, according to the present embodiment, the substrate unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is detachably attached is provided with the out ball passage 663 through which the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 flow. The game ball B flowing through the passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 can be detected, so the "out ball" on the game board 5 is detected. There is no need to provide an out-ball detection unit, the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified, and the cost can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, between the rear end of the ball extraction and discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662, a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is provided. , the out-ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 are kept away from the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, etc., and the out-ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 are used by many game balls B The pachinko machine 1 can reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc. due to the static electricity, the induced current, etc. generated by the circulation of the game balls B, and the malfunction caused by the circulation of the game balls B is reduced. can be

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the game ball B whose circulation speed is suppressed by the out ball straightening section 663b of the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, the circulation of the game ball B Since the impact applied to the out-sensor 664 can be weakened, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the out-sensor 664 is quickly worn out and damaged.

Furthermore, when the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, Since the player desires to pay out a large number of game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is high, the player can immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out a large number of game balls B. The pachinko machine 1 to be played can be easily selected. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so that it can be visually recognized from the player side, the displayed payout rate will be larger than usual if a large amount of game balls B are paid out. The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraud can make other players, staff members of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. easily notice the fraudulent activity, and can make them hesitate to perform the fraudulent activity. can be

In addition, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position where the player cannot see it, the staff of the game hall can see it for the same reason as above. can detect fraudulent activity. Also, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different than the normal value, it is possible to change the displayed payout rate inside the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the obstacle nail N, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the relay Boards, connectors, wiring cables, various sensors, etc.) can be considered, so it is possible to deal with problems early, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Furthermore, since an out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 flows, a configuration for detecting the game ball B discharged to the game board 5 (for example, To reduce the cost of a game board 5 without providing an out-ball detection unit, and to secure a space in the game board 5 for the configuration for detecting the discharged game balls B.例文帳に追加By installing a performance device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can entertain the players more.

In addition, since the ball extraction and discharge passage 665 has a vertical guide portion 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d protrude alternately, the game ball B circulates through the vertical guide portion 665b. Since the speed can be suppressed, damage in the ball discharge passage 665 due to the impact of the circulating game ball B, damage to the island facility side of the game hall that receives the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge passage 665, etc. can be prevented.

In addition, the out-ball passage 663 is provided with a meandering out-ball straightening portion 663b, and the ball extraction and discharge passage 665 is provided with a vertical guide portion 665b having a plurality of projecting projections 665d. Since it is possible to suppress the circulation speed of the ball, it is possible to reduce the electrical noise emitted from the game ball B that circulates in the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal discharge passage 665. It is possible to reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the circulation of the game balls B.

In addition, since the out ball discharge port 663d and the ball discharge port 665c of the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 are opened downward, the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage Since the game ball B is discharged downward from 665, the game ball B is less likely to collide with other pachinko machines or walls provided behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, and other pachinko machines. It is possible to avoid damage to the machine, walls, etc. In addition, since the game ball B is discharged downward from the out-ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665, the discharged game ball B is less likely to scatter. Collection of discharged game balls B can be facilitated.

Furthermore, since the base unit 660 in which the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 are formed is provided below the portion of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is attached, the game board 5 can be Only by discharging the game ball B struck into the area 5a downward, it becomes possible to deliver it to the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. , the configuration can be simple (simple), and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

Further, since the ball discharge port 665c of the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 Since it is possible to prevent the discharged game ball B from colliding with the outer frame 2, the game ball B vigorously flowing through the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 collides with the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent the outer frame 2 from being damaged and to provide the pachinko machine 1 which is hard to be damaged.

In addition, since the ball discharge port 665c of the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, the part for collecting the game balls B on the island facility side ( An out receiving part, a bucket, etc.) need not be advanced to a position superimposed on the outer frame 2, and labor for installing the pachinko machine 1 and labor for moving the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

[4-13a. Another embodiment of ball ejection in the substrate unit]
Next, another embodiment of ball ejection in the substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126 and the like. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out-ball discharge port of the out-ball passage. FIG. 126(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out-sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out-sensor is removed in (a).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, a guiding piece 667 for guiding the game ball B rearward is provided at the out ball outlet 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660 . More specifically, in this embodiment, in the vicinity of the downstream end of the out ball passage 663, there is a confluence portion 663e that joins the ball removal discharge passage 665. As shown in FIG. The merging portion 663e opens downward, and the opening end serves as an out-ball discharge port 663d (ball removal discharge port 665c). The guide piece 667 protrudes slightly rearward from the front wall of the out-ball outlet 663d.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 125, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d abuts against the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed obliquely backward and downward. . As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.), and the game balls B can be reliably collected on the island facility side.

In addition, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. Even if it is provided at a position close to directly below the game area 5a of the attached game board 5 (a position close to the front side in the island facility), the game ball B can be reliably received by a bucket or the like in the island facility. Therefore, since the out-ball passage 663 (out-ball discharge port 663d) can be arranged as far forward as possible, the space behind the out-ball passage 663 in the body frame 4 can be widened. Therefore, by moving the out-ball passage 663 away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., the static electricity generated by the circulation of many game balls B in the out-ball passage 663, the electric noise caused by the induced current, etc. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633 and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the circulation of the game balls B can be provided.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, an out-ball sensor 664 can be attached to and detached from below at a portion of the out-ball discharge port 663d in the out-ball passage 663. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f that is formed at the downstream end of the downward guide portion 663c in the out ball passage 663 and opens downward to accommodate the out sensor 664, and an out sensor that is housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f. and a sensor cover 668 that restricts the downward movement of 664 .

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end portion of the downward guiding portion 663c connected to the downstream end of the out-ball straightening portion 663b in the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. As shown in FIG. Also in this embodiment, the base unit 660 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from above or below the base unit 660 .

The sensor cover 668 has a main body portion 668a that extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and is rotatably mounted on the base unit 660 on the base end side. A through hole 668b through which the game ball B can pass through at a portion corresponding to the hole, and an elastically deformable locking claw portion 668c provided on the opposite side of the base end side of the main body portion 668a. have.

The base end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the sensor mounting recess 663f of the base unit 660 on the outside of the sensor mounting recess 663f opposite to the out-ball rectifying portion 663b. An engaging claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is engaged with an engaging portion 663g provided outside the sensor mounting recessed portion 663f of the base unit 660 on the out-ball straightening portion 663b side.

The sensor cover 668 accommodates the out-sensor 664 in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out-sensor 664 coincides with the out-ball passage 663, and the locking claw portion 668c moves upward. By rotating and closing the locking claw portion 668c by locking it to the locking portion 663g, the main body portion 668a abuts on the lower surface of the out sensor 664, restricting the downward movement of the out sensor 664, and closing the out sensor. A sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 126(a)). In this state, the through-hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 coincides with the detection hole of the out-sensor 664, and after the game ball B circulating through the out-ball passage 663 is detected by the out-sensor 664, the through-hole 668b is detected. discharged downwards. The through-hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as an out-ball outlet 663d of the out-ball passage 663. As shown in FIG.

When replacing (removing) the out-sensor 664, by operating the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668, the locking claw portion 668c is elastically deformed to release the locking with the locking portion 663g. Then, the sensor cover 668 is rotated about the base end side of the body portion 668a to open so that the locking claw portion 668c moves downward. , and the out sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 126(b)).

As shown in FIG. 126(b), in this embodiment, when the sensor cover 668 is rotated and opened, the lower end of the sensor cover 668 and the upper end of the contact-hazardous object indicated by the two-dot chain line (for example, the outer frame 2) , the upper end surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40, the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43, etc.), or the lower end of the main body frame 4. ing. As a result, even if the body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 will not come into contact with the contact-threatening object, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented. be able to.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, the out sensor 664 detects all the game balls B hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, so many game balls B circulate. However, as described above, the out-sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below by opening the sensor cover 668, so that the out-sensor 664 can be easily replaced. can.

Further, according to this embodiment, even if the body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 does not come into contact with the outer frame 2 or other objects that may come into contact. Therefore, damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented. More specifically, the sensor cover 668 supports the out-sensor 664 from below. There is a possibility that the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 may come off due to the vibration caused by the sensor cover 668 and the sensor cover 668 may open. When the sensor cover 668 opens and the out-sensor 664 drops downward during the game, the out-sensor 664 detects the game ball B even though the game ball B is hit in the game area 5a. Therefore, the main control board 1310 or the like notifies the occurrence of the abnormality. Upon notification of the occurrence of this abnormality, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 so that the staff of the game hall can confirm the abnormality. Since there is a gap between the sensor cover 668 and the contact risky substance, the body frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with the contact risky substance, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented.

Furthermore, according to the embodiment of FIG. 126, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at the outside portion opposite to the out-ball straightening portion 663b in the sensor attachment recess 663f. In addition, since the base unit 660 is transparent, the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from below by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out-sensor 664 . Therefore, when the game balls B are jammed in the out-ball passage 663, the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the place where the game balls B are jammed can be specified at a glance. It is possible to eliminate the clogging of the game balls B at an early stage.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed so as to be substantially flush with the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be turned over to stand upright in an upside-down state, and the replacement of the out-sensor 664 by opening and closing the sensor cover 668 and the out-ball passage 663 from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660 can be performed. It is possible to easily perform the confirmation work of the inside and the inside of the ball removal discharge passage 665, and the like.

Further, according to the present embodiment, even if the out-sensor 664 is damaged, the out-sensor 664 can be easily replaced. Thus, it is possible to alleviate the player's frustration due to the interruption of the game, suppress the decline in interest, suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1, and reduce the burden on the game hall side. can.

Furthermore, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened when replacing the out-sensor 664, the sensor cover 668 will not be removed from the base unit 660. Since the sensor cover 668 is in a suspended state and does not fall off, loss of the sensor cover 668 can be avoided.

In addition, in the sensor cover 668 that holds the out sensor 664 from below, at the outer part near the out ball passage 663 in which many game balls B in the base unit 660 circulate, Since it is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, the downward force distribution applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to the circulation of the game ball B is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 (one side). ), and is relatively small on the locking claw portion 668c side (the other end side) locked to the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, even if a downward force is applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664, the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to one end of the game ball B passing through the out sensor 664. Since the sensor cover 668 is opened, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the sensor cover 668 is opened and the out sensor 664 is dropped. .

[4-14. Third Embodiment of Substrate Unit]
Next, a board unit 700 of a third embodiment, which is different from the above, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 127 to 136 and the like. FIG. 127(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment, omitting the power supply unit, payout control unit, and interface unit, as seen from the front right, and (b) is the board unit of (a) 1 is a perspective view seen from . 128(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127 as seen from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) as seen from the lower right rear. 129(a) is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the corrugated line in (a), and (c) is cut along the Sacer line in (a). FIG. 130 is a cross-sectional view taken along the sea line in FIG. 129(a).

131 is an exploded front perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127, and FIG. 132 is an exploded rear perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 133(a) is a front perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 127, and FIG. 133(b) is a back perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. FIG. 134 is an explanatory view showing elimination of ball clogging in the substrate unit of FIG. 127; FIG. 135 is an explanatory view showing prevention of entry of a linear unauthorized tool in the substrate unit of FIG. 127. FIG. 136 is an explanatory diagram showing dust removal in the substrate unit of FIG. 127. FIG.

The substrate unit 700 of the third embodiment differs from the substrate unit 620 and the substrate unit 620A described above only in the configuration of the base unit 710, and the other configurations are the same. Components similar to those of the board unit 620A are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. 127 to 136, illustration of the power supply unit 620c, the payout control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e is omitted.

The board unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear surface of the body frame base unit 500 in place of the board unit 620 or the board unit 620A. The substrate unit 700 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame covering a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 710 attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 710, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

This board unit 700 includes a first ball path 701 through which game balls B released downward from the game board 5 can flow, and a first ball path 701 provided behind the first ball path 701 and released downward from the game board 5. A second ball path 702 through which the game ball B can circulate, a first ball sensor 703 for detecting the game ball B circulating in the first ball path 701, and a game ball circulating in the second ball path 702. A second ball sensor 704 for detecting B and a ball extraction passage 705 through which the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 flows. The entrances of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are open upward, respectively. Eject downwards.

In this embodiment, on the game board 5, the game ball B received by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 circulates through the first ball path 701, and on the game board 5, the general winning The game ball B received in the opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, and the second big winning opening 2007 is configured to flow through the second ball path 702. ing. In other words, out balls flow through the first ball path 701 and safe balls flow through the second ball path 702, and the number of all out balls can be counted by the first ball sensor 703. At the same time, the number of all safe balls can be counted by the second ball sensor 704 . As a result, for the winning openings (winning opening sensor) such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, and the second big winning opening 2007 of the game board 5 When a fraudulent act is committed, the number of safe balls on the game board 5 side and the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704 are different, and thus fraudulent action with respect to the winning opening can be detected. .

More specifically, the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 includes a front base 711 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a front base 711 attached to the rear side of the front base 711. A rear base 712 having a power supply unit 620c attached to its rear surface and having a ball extraction passage 705, and a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702 provided between the front base 711 and the rear base 712. and a front base 711 and a rear base 712 to eliminate clogging of game balls B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 and prevent unauthorized tools from entering. a crime prevention cover 714 provided openable and closable on the rear base 712; and a frame relay board 716 . In the base unit 710, the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are transparent.

The front base 711 is formed in the shape of a box that is elongated in the left and right direction and is open rearwardly and upwardly. The ball path member 713 is housed inside the front base 711 from behind. The front base 711 closes the front end side of the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713 with a front wall. The front base 711 has a ball receiving opening 711a that is long in the left-right direction in the upper peripheral wall, and a release opening 711b that is open in the lower peripheral wall at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction. ing. The front base 711 accommodates the ball path member 713 therein, and the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 face upward from the ball socket 711a. Further, the front base 711 supports the crime prevention cover 714 rotatably about an axis extending in the left-right direction at the front end side of the elimination opening 711b.

The rear base 712 is formed in the shape of a box that is open rearward and elongated in the left and right directions. The rear base 712 closes the rear end side of the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 with a front wall. The rear base 712 receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, guides it to the right in the front view, and then guides it downward to discharge the ball extraction passage 705. have. The ball removal passage 705 is provided in a box-shaped rear base 712 and is entirely open rearward. The ball removal passage 705 is closed on the rear end side by a passage wall member 715 . A portion of the ball extraction passage 705 of the rear base 712 located above the speaker box 623 (a portion on the left end side in front view) penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the front end side is closed by the front base 711. , the rear side of which is closed by a passage wall member 715 .

In addition, the rear base 712 includes a first ejection guide portion 712a that receives the game ball B that has circulated through the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713, guides it backward, and then ejects it downward, and a second ball path member 713. It has a second discharge guide portion 712b that receives the game ball B that has circulated through the ball path 702, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward. The entrance sides of the first ejection guide portion 712a and the second ejection guide portion 712b protrude forward from the front wall of the rear base 712, and the entrance of the first ejection guide portion 712a opens forward. , the inlet of the second discharge guide portion 712b is open upward. The outlets of the first ejection guide portion 712a and the second ejection guide portion 712b are provided at the same position in the front-rear direction. The first ejection guide portion 712 a and the second ejection guide portion 712 b are open rearward from the front wall, and are closed at the rear end side by the passage wall member 715 .

In the rear base 712, the exits of the ball extraction passage 705, the first discharge guide portion 712a, and the second discharge guide portion 712b are located to the left of the dissolving port 711b of the front base 711 in front view. are arranged in order from the right to the left. The exit of the ball removal passage 705 widens greatly forward at the front end and slightly widens rearward at the rear end with respect to the exits of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b (Fig. 128(b) )). That is, the outlet of the ball removal passage 705 is formed larger (broader) in the front-rear direction than the outlets of the first ejection guide portion 712a and the second ejection guide portion 712b.

The ball path member 713 is inserted into the box-shaped front base 711 from behind and accommodated therein. The ball path member 713 has a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702 . The ball path member 713 has a left wall portion 713a extending vertically downward from the upper end at the right end, and an upper left shelf portion 713b inclined downward from the lower end of the left wall portion 713a toward the right. , a stepped wall portion 713c extending vertically downward from the right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b, an upper right shelf portion 713d inclined downward from the lower end of the stepped wall portion 713c toward the right, The straightening wall portion 713e extends obliquely downward to the left from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the upper right shelf portion rises rightward from a position separated rightward from the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e. A lower shelf portion 713f that extends to the right from the portion 713d, a right wall portion 713g that extends vertically upward from the right end of the lower shelf portion 713f to substantially the same height as the upper end of the left wall portion 713a, and a right wall portion 713g. An upper wall portion 713h that extends leftward from the upper end of the wall portion 713g to the same position as the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and a U-shaped opening that is connected to the left end of the upper wall portion 713h and opens upward. and a groove wall portion 713i. The left end of the groove wall portion 713i is positioned on the right side of the center of the upper right shelf portion 713d in the left-right direction.

The ball path member 713 includes a lower wall portion upper portion 713j extending leftward from the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e, and an upper portion extending vertically upward from the left end of the lower wall portion upper portion 713j to the lower surface of the upper left shelf portion 713b. The protruding middle wall portion 713k, the eaves portion 713l extending downward from the middle of the left side surface of the middle wall portion 713k, and the lower shelf portion 713f near the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f extend vertically and vertically. It has an extending hanging wall portion 713m and a lower wall portion lower portion 713n extending leftward from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 713m in parallel with the lower wall portion upper portion 713j. A portion of the lower wall portion lower 713n located below between the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e and the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is notched vertically to a size through which the game ball B can pass.

Further, the ball path member 713 extends downward from the lower surface of each of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, and has a plurality of obstacles spaced apart in the left-right direction. It has a rib 713o. The ball path member 713 includes a left wall portion 713a, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a step wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a rectifying wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f, a right wall portion 713g, a groove wall portion 713i, It has a flat partition wall portion 713p that divides the space surrounded by the lower wall portion upper portion 713j, the middle wall portion 713k, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall portion lower portion 713n into front and rear.

In addition, the ball path member 713 has a plurality of cutouts that are recessed from the front and rear ends of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f toward the partition wall portion 713p. has a notch 713q. Each of the notch portions 713q is provided so that a gap in the front-rear direction smaller than the radius of the game ball B is formed between the front base 711 and the rear base 712 when assembled on the board unit 700. Dirt, dust, etc. in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged downward through the gap.

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f on the front surface of the partition wall portion 713p, and has a plurality of laterally extending guide ribs 713r. ing.

Further, the ball path member 713 is surrounded by a lower wall portion upper portion 713j, a hanging wall portion 713m, and a lower wall portion lower portion 713n on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p. It is surrounded by a lower wall portion upper portion 713j, a hanging wall portion 713m, and a lower wall portion lower portion 713n on the rear side of the front portion 713s and the partition wall portion 713p. 713t and.

In the front 713s of the sensor housing portion and the rear 713t of the sensor housing portion, the detection holes of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are positioned below the portion between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f. In other words, the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 are accommodated with the detection hole on the right side. Although not shown, the wiring cables extending from the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 extend leftward from the inner wall portion 713k from the front 713s of the sensor housing portion and the rear 713t of the sensor housing portion. .

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion forward of the partition wall portion 713p on the lower surface of the lower wall portion 713n. have. When the first ball guiding portion 713u is assembled to the board unit 700, the right half of the rear end side is closed by the front surface of the rear base 712, and the left half is the entrance side of the first ejection guiding portion 712a of the rear base 712. is coming. In front of the partition wall portion 713p, the first ball guide portion 713u guides the game ball B flowing downward from between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f to the right and then to the rear, It can be delivered to the first ejection guiding portion 712 a of the rear base 712 .

On the other hand, on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713, a portion of the lower wall portion lower portion 713n that is open downward (the portion of the detection hole of the second ball sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor housing portion 713t) ) is located below the second discharge guide portion 712 b of the rear base 712 . As a result, the game ball B flowing downward from between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f behind the partition wall portion 713p can be transferred to the second ejection guide portion 712b of the rear base 712.

The right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b is located slightly to the right of the left end of the dissolution opening 711b in the front base 711. As shown in FIG. The right end of the upper right shelf portion 713 d is positioned to the right of the right end of the dissolution opening 711 b of the front base 711 . The left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is positioned to the left of the left end of the dissolution opening 711b in the front base 711. As shown in FIG. Accordingly, the portion of the front base 711 immediately above the clearance opening 711b is covered with the rectifying wall portion 713e. The upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f are linearly inclined. On the other hand, the straightening wall portion 713e is inclined in a curved shape, and the left end side is curved downward vertically. The distance (height) between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is inclined so as to become narrower toward the left so that the left end side has a height through which one game ball B can pass. . The rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f can straighten a plurality of game balls B in a line and guide them downward.

Between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, as described above, the vertical dimension is formed to narrow toward the left (downstream direction in which the game ball B circulates). Depending on the amount of balls B distributed, a plurality of game balls B may get caught between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, resulting in ball clogging (see FIG. 134). Since the straightening wall portion 713e is located above the clearing port 711b, when ball clogging occurs between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the security cover 714 is opened to clear the clearing port 711b. In the opened state, a bar-shaped tool is inserted between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f from below through the dissolution port 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f, and the game ball B is bitten by the tool. You can clear the clogged ball by hitting the .

By the way, since the lower shelf 713f is provided with a notch 713q for eliminating ball clogging and for dropping dirt and dust downward, a wire-shaped unauthorized tool such as a piano wire or a catheter may be used. from below through the notch 713q and into the upper part of the lower shelf 713f (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702). There is a risk of cheating on the game board 5 provided above by extending upward from the ball path 702). Insertion of such an unauthorized tool is not limited to the lower shelf portion 713f, and there is a similar concern in the upper left shelf portion 713b and the upper right shelf portion 713d in which the notch portion 713q is provided.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of flat plate-like obstruction ribs 713o are provided on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h and are spaced apart in the left-right direction and extending downward. is provided, even if the tip of the linear unauthorized tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it abuts against the hindrance rib 713o and the tip ends. Movement can be blocked and further unauthorized tool insertion can be blocked (see FIG. 135). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of fraudulent acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrence against fraud can be provided.

In addition, in the portion of the upper right shelf portion 713d and the upper left shelf portion 713b on the right side of the middle wall portion 713k, the lower part and the left and right sides thereof are the rectifying wall portion 713e in which the notch portion 713q is not provided, and the lower wall. Since it is closed by the upper part 713j and the middle wall part 713k, an unauthorized tool cannot be inserted from below through the corresponding cutout part 713q of the upper right shelf part 713d and the upper left shelf part 713b. No fraudulent act is performed through the notch 713q.

As described above, the ball path member 713 is provided with a plurality of notches 713q in the upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f. (see Figure 136). Dust discharged downward through the notch 713q located above the sensor housing front 713s and the sensor housing rear 713t in the upper left shelf 713b is discharged through the rectifying wall 713e, the lower wall upper 713j, and the middle wall 713j. It is housed in the space surrounded by the wall portion 713k. As a result, dust or the like does not adhere to the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 housed in the front sensor housing portion 713s and the rear sensor housing portion 713t.

Further, wiring cables are connected by connectors to the left end sides of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the sensor housing front 713s and the sensor housing rear 713t. It protrudes leftward from the front 713s of the sensor housing portion and the rear 713t of the sensor housing portion. That is, the wiring cables and connectors of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 protrude leftward from the inner wall portion 713k. In this middle wall portion 713k, since the eaves portion 713l extends leftward from the left side above the sensor housing portion front 713s and the sensor housing portion rear 713t, it is formed on the upper left shelf portion 713b. Dirt and dust that have fallen downward through the cutout portion 713q are guided leftward by the inclination of the eaves portion 713l, and the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 protruding leftward from the inner wall portion 713k. It is possible to prevent the product from falling on the wiring cable and the connector, thereby avoiding the occurrence of problems caused by dust or the like.

The base unit 710 includes a left wall portion 713a on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a stepped wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a straightening wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f, The right wall portion 713g, the groove wall portion 713i, the first ball guide portion 713u, and the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712 form the first ball path 701, and the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 rear left wall portion 713a, upper left shelf portion 713b, step wall portion 713c, upper right shelf portion 713d, straightening wall portion 713e, lower shelf portion 713f, right wall portion 713g, groove wall portion 713i, and rear base 712 A second ball path 702 is formed by the second discharge guide portion 712b.

The crime prevention cover 714 is formed in a flat plate shape, and is attached near the front end of the release opening 711b of the front base 711 in a state where the front end side can rotate about an axis in the left-right direction. Moreover, the security cover 714 has an elastic locking portion 714a that is locked to the rear base 712 on the rear end side. As shown in FIG. 130, the crime prevention cover 714 closes the release port 711b when the elastic locking portion 714a is locked to the rear base 712 and placed horizontally. is released and rotated so that the rear end side is positioned downward to be vertical, the disengagement opening 711b is open. In other words, the security cover 714 can open and close the dissolution opening 711b.

By closing the security cover 714, the removal opening 711b of the front base 711 can be closed. It can be prevented from being inserted into the two ball path 702). In addition, the security cover 714 opens the clearing port 711b of the front base 711 by opening the clogged ball between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f of the ball path member 713. Therefore, a bar-shaped tool can be inserted between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the clearing port 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f from below to clear the clogging of the game balls B. can be done. This ball clogging elimination work is carried out with the body frame 4 opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2 .

The security cover 714 has a lower end (an end on the side of the elastic locking portion 714a) in a state in which the release port 711b is opened (in a vertical state). It is positioned below the height of the connection tube portion 43a) of the member 43 (the height indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 130). Therefore, in order to eliminate the clogging of game balls B in the ball path member 713, after opening the body frame 4 forward with respect to the outer frame 2, the body frame 4 is opened with the security cover 714 open. is to be closed against the outer frame 2, the open crime prevention cover 714 comes into contact with the contact-hazardous object (the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43), and the body frame 4 cannot be closed. As a result, it is possible to avoid forgetting to close the security cover 714, and to securely close the security cover 714 so that the security cover 714 exhibits its crime prevention function.

Further, in this embodiment, if the security cover 714 is opened for some reason while the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, even if the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as it is. , the open crime prevention cover 714 comes into contact with the object that may come into contact with from the front. Since the crime prevention cover 714 rotates in the direction to close when it contacts, the main body frame 4 can be opened without the crime prevention cover 714 being caught by the contact-threatening object, and damage to the security cover 714 and the contact-threatening object can be avoided. .

It should be noted that the security cover 714 of the present embodiment rarely causes clogging of the game balls B between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and is basically kept closed. The locking by the elastic locking portion 714a is set to be hard so as to make it difficult.

The passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closes the rear end side of the ball removal passage 705 that is open rearward. In addition, the passage wall member 715 closes the portion of the rear base 712 that is open rearward on the exit side of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b, and closes the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b. The game ball B that has flowed through the secondary ejection guide portion 712b can be ejected downward. Furthermore, the passage wall member 715 sandwiches the frame relay board 716 with the rear base 712 and covers the rear side of the frame relay board 716 .

The frame relay board 716 is sandwiched between the rear base 712 and the passage wall member 715 . The frame relay board 716 is for relaying the connection between the handle touch sensor 192 of the door frame 3, the single button operation sensor 194, the first ball sensor 703, and the second ball sensor 704 and the main control board 1310. .

As shown in FIG. 129(a), the base unit 710 of this embodiment has an upper left shelf portion 713b and a part of an upper right shelf portion 713d of the ball path member 713 extending from the ball socket 711a of the front base 711. It faces upward and can receive all the game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5.例文帳に追加The game ball B dropped to the upper left shelf portion 713b or the upper right shelf portion 713d through the ball socket 711a rolls to the right and flows down from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d to the lower shelf portion 713f. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the lower shelf portion 713f rolls leftward on the lower shelf portion 713f. At this time, if a plurality of game balls B are piled up and down on the lower shelf 713f, they are collapsed by the upper rectifying wall 713e so as to form a line toward the left.

The game ball B rolling to the left on the lower shelf portion 713f falls downward from the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f, and if it is in front of the partition wall portion 713p, it is stored in the sensor housing portion front 713s. After being detected by the first ball sensor 703 and passing through the first ball guiding portion 713u, the ball passes through the first discharge guiding portion 712a of the rear base 712 and is discharged downward. On the other hand, in the case behind the partition wall portion 713p, after being detected by the second ball sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor housing portion 713t, the ball is discharged downward through the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712. be done.

As described above, in the base unit 710 of the present embodiment, the game balls B flow through paths separated from each other before and after the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 and are discharged downward. A first spherical path 701 is located on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p, and a second spherical path 702 is located on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p. Therefore, the game ball B dropped forward from the partition wall 713p of the ball path member 713 from the game board 5 flows through the first ball path 701, is detected by the first ball sensor 703, and is discharged downward. be able to. On the other hand, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 behind the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 flows through the second ball path 702, is detected by the second ball sensor 704, and is discharged downward. be able to.

In addition, the base unit 710 moves the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in order to extract the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the like into the ball extraction passage 705 of the rear base 712. can be discharged downward through the The game ball B ejected downward from the first ejection guide portion 712a (first ball path 701), the second ejection guide portion 712b (second ball path 702), and the ball extraction passage 705 of the base unit 710 is It is delivered to the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) for collecting the game ball B on the side.

According to the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 of this embodiment, since the upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f are provided with a plurality of cutouts 713q, dust can be collected through the cutouts 713q. Since dust can be dropped and removed from the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, it is possible to avoid obstruction of the circulation of the game balls B by dust etc., and suppress the occurrence of clogging etc. can be made

Further, since the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are formed transparently, the door frame 3 can be opened forward with respect to the main body frame 4, and the game board can be opened from the main body frame 4. 5 is removed, from above the base unit 710 (board unit 700), presence or absence of clogging of game balls B in the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702). can be easily verified. In addition, since the notch portion 713q is provided in the lower shelf portion 713f at the portion where the game balls B are aligned in a row by the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f in the ball path member 713, the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2, and the crime prevention cover 714 is opened to remove a rod-shaped tool from below through the clearing opening 711b and the notch 713q. It can be inserted between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and ball clogging can be eliminated by the tool.

Furthermore, a dissolution opening 711b that opens downward is provided in a portion below the rectifying wall portion 713e in the lower shelf portion 713f, and a security cover 714 that closes the dissolution opening 711b is provided. In addition to being able to eliminate ball clogging as described above, in a normal state, by closing the elimination opening 711b with the security cover 714, a linear illegal tool can be passed from the elimination opening 711b to the first ball path 701 or the like. The pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being inserted into the second ball path 702 and has a high deterrent effect against fraud.

In addition, since the crime prevention cover 714 for opening and closing the release port 711b is opened and closed by rotating it about the axis in the left-right direction at the front end side, the body frame 4 can be opened and closed while the crime prevention cover 714 is forgotten to be closed. If you try to close the outer frame 2, the security cover 714 will come into contact with the potentially dangerous object (connection cylinder 43a of the rear panel member 43), and the body frame 4 will not be able to be closed. The security cover 714 can be made to notice that it has been forgotten to be closed, and the crime prevention cover 714 can be reliably closed so that the crime prevention function of the crime prevention cover 714 can be exhibited.

Furthermore, since a plurality of flat plate-like obstruction ribs 713o are provided on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h and are spaced apart in the left-right direction and extend downward, linear Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool attempts to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it abuts against the inhibition rib 713o to prevent the tip from moving. Further insertion of unauthorized tools can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of fraudulent acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrence against fraud can be provided.

Further, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 meander or crank due to the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712 and the ball path member 713 as described above. Therefore, even if an illegal linear tool is inserted from the exit side of the first ejection guide part 712a or the second ejection guide part 712b, the entry can be prevented by the complicated path. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 5 through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 .

Further, since all the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected (counted) by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, the game balls B discharged to the game board 5 can be detected (counted). There is no need to provide a configuration (for example, an out-ball detection unit) for detecting the game ball B, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced. A space corresponding to the structure can be secured, and by installing a performance device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can entertain the players more.

In addition, out balls flow through the first ball path 701 and safe balls flow through the second ball path 702, respectively. By comparing with the count number of , it is possible to determine whether or not cheating is being performed on the game board 5, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against cheating.

Furthermore, when the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, Since the player desires to pay out a large number of game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is high, the player can immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out a large number of game balls B. The pachinko machine 1 to be played can be easily selected. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so that it can be visually recognized from the player side, the displayed payout rate will be larger than usual if a large amount of game balls B are paid out. The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraud can make other players, staff members of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. easily notice the fraudulent activity, and can make them hesitate to perform the fraudulent activity. can be

In addition, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position where the player cannot see it, the staff of the game hall can see it for the same reason as above. can detect fraudulent activity. Also, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different than the normal value, it is possible to change the displayed payout rate inside the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the obstacle nail N, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the relay Boards, connectors, wiring cables, various sensors, etc.) can be considered, so it is possible to deal with problems early, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Also, since the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are separated from the ball extraction path 705 for discharging the game ball B in the ball tank 552, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 The game ball B without a ball is not counted. Therefore, only the game balls B released from the game board 5 can be accurately counted by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 .

In the above embodiment, the first ball path 701 is the out ball and the second ball path 702 is the safe ball. Alternatively, the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 may pass through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 701 regardless of the safe ball or the out ball. Any one of the sphere paths 702 may be flowed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the security cover 714 is rotated to open and close the dissolution opening 711b. However, the security cover 714 is not limited to this. It is good as a thing.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, by partitioning with one partition wall portion 713p, the game ball B released downward from the game board 5 is separated into the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 before and after the two paths. Although it is shown that the ball is discharged through one of the three ball paths, it is not limited to this, and the ball path is divided into three or more in the front and back by a plurality of partition walls, and any ball path is provided. The game ball B released from the game board 5 passing through may be ejected downward.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 147. FIG. FIG. 137 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine in which the central accessories and the like are made opaque. 138 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 viewed from the front right, FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 viewed from the front left, and FIG. 140 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the rear. . FIG. 141 is a schematic explanatory diagram of routing of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 142 is a front view of the game board with the center accessories and the like made transparent. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. FIG. 145 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to expose the inside of the game area in which game balls circulate and the obstacle nails. 146 is an enlarged front view showing the left side of FIG. 145, and FIG. 147 is an enlarged front view showing the right side of FIG.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which game balls B are hit by the player's operation of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 . In the game area 5a, there are a general prize winning port 2001, a gate 2002, a variable prize winning port 2003, a gate 2002, a variable prize winning port 2003, A first starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, a first big winning opening 2006, and a second big winning opening 2007 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a gate 2002, a variable winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, a first big winning opening 2006, and a third opening. It is for performing a game that entertains the driving operation of the handle 195 and the circulation of the game ball B within the game area 5a so as to be accepted or passed through the second prize winning opening 2007 or the like.

The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. It has a plate-shaped game panel 1100 and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 (see FIG. 160) for detecting magnetism acting illegally in the game area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIGS. 145 to 147, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 within the game area 5a.

In addition, the game board 5 includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is performed by hitting game balls B into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 160, etc.) for controlling contents.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side. A panel relay board (not shown) that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a rear surface of the game panel 1100. and a back unit 3000 to be mounted.

A production display device 1600 is provided on the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is provided on the rear surface of the production display device 1600. - 特許庁

The table unit 2000 is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a, with a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are capable of receiving the game ball B hit into the game area 5a and are always open. A gate 2002 for detecting the passage of the game ball B, and a variable prize winning opening 2003 for accepting the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal pattern drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002. And, the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005, which are provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and are always open to receive the game ball B, and the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 A first big prize winning port 2006 that enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the lottery result of the first special pattern or the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn by accepting the game ball B, and the first big prize. Depending on the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is provided at a position different from the opening 2006 and is drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005 2007, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 (see FIG. 160) for detecting magnetism acting illegally in the game area 5a.

The front unit 2000 further comprises a first sub-out port 2021 and a second sub-out port 2022 which are provided at predetermined positions in the game area 5a and which are always open to receive the game ball B. .

Furthermore, the front unit 2000 includes a starter unit 2100 having a first starter opening 2004 attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and a front surface of the starter unit 2100. A side unit 2200 provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and having four general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300, and a lower right unit 2400 having a second starting port 2005 and a second sub-out port 2022, which is provided on the right side of the starting port unit 2100 in front view, which is the lower right corner in front view in the game area 5a, It is provided above the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the lower right unit 2400 and slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a. A frame-shaped center role 2500 having a big winning slot 2007 and a first sub-out slot 2021, and a gate 2002 provided to the left of the center role 2500 and near the center in the vertical direction of the game area 5a. and a gate member 2600 having a .

The front unit 2000 is provided on the right side of the game area 5a, and has a specific obstacle nail group 2700 consisting of a plurality of obstacle nails N. As shown in FIG.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and is open at the front. A back box rear unit 3030 detachably attached by a lock slider 3020, and a back board unit 3040 arranged behind the back box unit 3030 and attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010. there is

In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided in the lower part near the front end in the back box 3010, and the back ball guiding unit 3100 through which the game balls B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 circulates, and the front end in the back box 3010 a back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 provided in the back box 3010, a back front front effect unit 3300 provided at an upper part in the back box 3010 at a position substantially the same as the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 in the front-rear direction, and the inside of the back box 3010 A back bottom front effect unit 3400 provided at the lower part behind the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in the back box 3010 and a back top back effect unit 3500 provided behind the back top front effect unit 3300 in the back box 3010 (Fig. 155 etc.) and a back bottom post effect unit 3600 provided behind the back bottom front effect unit 3400 in the back box 3010 .

[5-1. Front component]
The front constituent member 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The front structural member 1000 is formed transparent as a whole. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape clockwise from the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in a front view, passing through the upper end of the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending obliquely upward to the right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc from the lower center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail An impact portion 1006 which connects the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and contacts the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 is provided.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is urged by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Furthermore, the front structural member 1000 has an out port 1008 penetrating back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view within the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide section 1003 passes through the out port 1008 and is discharged to the rear of the front constituent member 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front component member 1000 is provided on the outside of the portion near the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially perpendicularly from the lower ends thereof, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1009 projects backward from the security cover 170 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch 1010 is aligned with the notch 1122 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 pass through the lower full ball path unit 610. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b face forward.

Further, the front structural member 1000 includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 formed in the upper left corner in a front view, to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp pasting portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. there is

In addition, the front structural member 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the game panel 1100, the back unit 3000, and the like arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front structural member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 145, etc.).

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder, and is the minimum required thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is implanted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that In addition, in this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front structural member 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed through the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

In addition, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes 1113 formed in the form of round holes and short elongated holes penetrating in the front and rear direction, and the upper edge and the lower edge are spaced apart in the left-right direction, respectively, and the plate thickness is formed thin. and a plurality of engagement shoulders 1114 (see FIG. 148). The positioning hole 1113 is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 . The engaging stepped portion 1114 is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engaging claw (not shown) or an engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. is.

The panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 offset above the center in front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game ball B (the circumferential direction of the frame shape) is the left side and the left side except for the upper side from the center. The right side and the lower side have a wide width in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be arranged.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding stepped portion (not shown) recessed from the front side toward the rear side and having approximately the same size as the panel plate 1110, and the holding stepped portion has a size approximately equal to that of the game area 5a. It has a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a notch portion 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch portion 1122 is formed to match the notch portion 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion and penetrates the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the full ball path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 extending upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and recessed forward from the rear surface. Out recessed portion 1123 communicates with out port 1008 at its upper portion.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 has a plurality of protruding pins projecting forward from the holding stepped portion and inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and a plurality of protruding pins extending outward from the holding stepped portion. Three engaging claws elastically engaged with the engaging stepped portions 1114 at the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110 and projecting upward from the lower outer side of the holding stepped portion, the panel A pair of engaging pieces that engage with the two engaging stepped portions 1114 on the lower side of the plate 1110 are provided. The panel holder 1120 engages the engaging stepped portion on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above the front, and then moves the upper portion of the panel plate 1110 rearward to tilt the upper side and the lower left side. By elastically engaging the engaging stepped portion 1114 of the portion where the panel plate 1110 is held with the engaging claw, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being accommodated in the holding stepped portion. At this time, the protruding pins of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 to position the panel plate 1110 at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120 .

Since this game panel 1100 is transparently formed together with the front structural member 1000 attached to the front side, when assembled on the game board 5, it is possible to reduce the boundary of the game area 5a from being clearly visible. It is possible to give a sense of openness to the player, and to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player, although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change.

In addition, since the game panel 1100 is made transparent together with the front structural member 1000, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (toward the player). By doing so, it can be made to appear to emit light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is slanted downward toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched rearward from the front end at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 in the state assembled to the game board 5 from the lower side and the rear side, and the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 , the ejecting portion 1201 is located directly above the ejected ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620 b of the substrate unit 620 of the body frame 4 . As a result, all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. The ball can be discharged from the discharge part 1201 formed in the lower part to the discharged ball receiving part 628 or the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 123). The game balls B discharged to the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664 .

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Main control unit 1300 in game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 160) for controlling game content and the payout of game balls B, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. and has.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and molded transparently. A main control board 1310 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are molded transparently from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized alteration has been made, or whether or not an unauthorized IC is mounted) ) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320 . In addition, the main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the main In order to open the control board box 1320, its sealing mechanism must be destroyed, and the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

A main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like. In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2601, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a first big winning opening sensor 2525, and a second big winning opening. It is connected to the sensor 2561, the variable winning opening solenoid 2522, the first large winning opening solenoid 2524, the second large winning opening solenoid 2563, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the like.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311a capable of switching and confirming setting values of the pachinko machine 1, a setting switching button 1311b capable of selecting and switching setting values, A setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted is provided. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected (inter-board connection) to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connection between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is connected by a harness). ). By this connector connection (connection between boards), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310. FIG. The right and left sides of the setting change board 1311 have substantially the same vertical distance as the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 . A center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 and a center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311 are shorter than the distance dimension in the direction. match.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311 so that the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is located on the center line. Along the left side of the control board 1310, the center position of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is arranged on the center line. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated is arranged below the center line of the setting change board 1311, and a pressing operation part is arranged above the center line of the setting change board 1311. A switching button 1311b is arranged, and a setting change permission lamp that can emit a single color (for example, red) on the center line of the setting change board 1311 and above the setting key switch 1311a (lower left of the setting switching button 1311b). 1311c is arranged. Above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN, a setting display 1310g composed of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is arranged. A base monitor 1310h composed of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) arranged in a row from the center toward the right side is arranged below the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310. A RAM clear switch 1310f having a depressing operation part is arranged in the .

In this embodiment, the position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion opening formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion opening is along the vertical direction). , the setting key switch 1311a is turned off as an initial position. When the setting key cylinder is at the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion opening and can be pulled out from the insertion opening. In the present embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the setting key is inserted into the insertion port, other players arranged in a line opposite the island facilities of the game hall can be used. The distance dimension of the setting key switch 1311a in the depth direction is adopted so that the member of the pachinko machine (or the member of the island facility of the game hall) and the setting key do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

The setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, and the setting key ON signal is set. It is input from the change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . When the setting key cylinder is turned counterclockwise by 60 degrees from the initial position and turned on for the second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on to turn the decision key ON. is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . In addition, the setting key cylinder is moved so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the original position (ie, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by being rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees and turned off, and the setting key switch 1311a can be moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the enter key is turned on to the original position. (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a), the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn off the setting key switch 1311a. can be turned off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . In this embodiment, two completely different functions, that is, the setting key ON function and the enter key ON function, can be realized by only the setting key switch 1311a alone, depending on the direction in which the setting key cylinder is rotated. An operation for turning on the setting key and an operation for turning on the determination key can be collectively performed only by the single setting key switch 1311a.

The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f are connected through openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320, respectively. However, the "gap" formed between the front face of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the corresponding openings. In order to prevent a wire or the like from entering and altering the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310, a wire penetration prevention portion is molded in the cover body for these openings. . The setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover and the base and cannot be touched at all. , the set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized through the cover.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern for transmitting a setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a decision key ON signal for the setting key switch 1311a, and a setting key switch The wiring pattern to which the OFF signal of 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are routed so that they do not come close to each other on the setting change board 1311 (apart from each other). At the same time, connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed at a distance. is transmitted (that is, a wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal for the setting key switch 1311a, and a wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, and a wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a. ) and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting switch button 1311b are formed so as not to come close to each other (at a distance from each other), and the RAM clear switch 1310f The wiring patterns to which the signals from are transmitted are also formed so as not to come close to each other (at a distance from each other).

The setting key switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting display 1310g will be briefly described. Here, first, the case of changing the settings of the set values will be briefly described, and the case of displaying the current set values for confirmation will be briefly described. In addition, since the setting key is an important key that can be used not only to change the setting value but also to check the current setting value, etc., only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, can possess it. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the settings of the set values, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily), the body frame is changed to the outer frame 2. 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. The "predetermined setting value change permitting condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on must be satisfied. In other words, the person who actually changes the setting value must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then check the outer frame 2. After the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. The power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by turning on the key switch 1311a. As the above-described "predetermined setting value change permission condition", it is also possible to set a condition that an operation signal is input by operating the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f. That is, when power is restored to the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure), the body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a is activated. The setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a on. The setting value may be changed when the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated is satisfied.

A person who changes the setting values must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. After performing the opening operation, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. The key switch 1311a is set to ON. Subsequently, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a (see FIG. 7). As a result, a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a controls the current setting values stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON for the first time). (set value) is displayed on the setting indicator 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from the off state to the on state.

When a person who changes the setting value presses the push operation part of the setting change button 1311b, the detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311 is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. is input to Each time a person who changes the setting of the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a changes the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. When it reaches the maximum set value of 6, it returns to the initial set value of 1, increases again by 1, and controls to display the set value on the setting display 1310g.

When the setting value is to be determined, the person who changes the setting value rotates the setting key cylinder counterclockwise by 120 degrees (that is, turns the setting key switch 1311a ON. The cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return from the rotational position of the cylinder to the initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a), and then turned off. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by rotating it counterclockwise by 60 degrees and performing the second ON operation. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

The setting key cylinder is rotated counterclockwise by 120 degrees (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on from the setting key cylinder rotation position to the initial position (that is, setting key 1311a). When the switch 1311a is returned to the turning position of the setting key cylinder to turn it off, a decision key ON signal may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this case, After the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g by pressing the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, the setting value is determined simply by turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key is removed from the setting key cylinder. and workability is improved.

A person who changes the setting value should return the setting key switch 1311a from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the decision key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by turning the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees and turning it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting values to not displaying them, and switches the setting change permission lamp 1311c from lighting to turning off.

A person who changes the setting value pulls out the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and changes the setting value. to complete.

When confirming and displaying the currently set setting value, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily), the outer frame 2 The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn the first ON. It is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined set value display permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by being operated. In other words, the person who actually confirms and displays the set values that are currently set must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (state that power has been restored after a power outage or momentary power failure). Then, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, and then the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion opening of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to open the first key. is turned on, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on.

A person who confirms and displays the currently set setting values must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (state that power has been restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), and then confirm that the power is restored. Then, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Thus, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a controls the current setting values stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON for the first time). of which, the set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the state where the setting change permission lamp 1311c is extinguished is maintained. Correspondingly, the setting value is not changed at all, nor is the content displayed on the setting display 1310g.

After confirming the currently set value, the person who confirms and displays the currently set value must move the setting key switch 1311a from the setting key cylinder rotation position to the original position (that is, to the original position). The setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return to the turning position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and is turned off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 .

The main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting value to not displaying the setting value.

A person who confirms and displays the currently set value pulls out the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and displays the current setting. Complete the task of confirming the setting value displayed.

As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is the power supply when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily). When power is restored during recovery, the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise. While it is necessary that the setting key is turned ON by being rotated by 60 degrees and the first ON operation is performed, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is the pachinko machine as described above. 1 is turned on or after power is restored after a power failure (an instantaneous power failure), the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key must be turned ON by inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the key cylinder and rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Thus, the predetermined set value change permission condition and the predetermined set value display permission condition are that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key cylinder insertion opening of the setting key switch 1311a is opened. , the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees, and the first ON operation is performed to turn the setting key ON. The setting value change permission condition requires "at the time of power recovery", whereas the predetermined setting value display permission condition requires "after power recovery".

Here, to briefly explain the set value, the "set value" is the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit or a small hit or not, in addition to the probability It is possible to change the probability of lottery determination when transitioning to time, the allocation rate to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc. The probability (the degree of advantage) of increasing the number of game balls B that can be played is set in advance. In the present embodiment, set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are prepared in advance as set values. A probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values (for example, a big hit determination table that defines the ratio of the big hit determination value indicating that the big win has been won, A big hit pattern determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the decision, a small hit determination table that defines the ratio of the small hit determination value indicating that the small win has been won, and a ratio of the determination value of the determination value of the small hit pattern Select a small hit pattern determination table, a normal transition determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the transition determination from the probability variation to the normal time, etc.), or use various distribution rates associated with the set value Various tables (for example, a sorting table that defines a sorting time, a block that manages driving of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) is selected. In various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values, various determination values are allocated at predetermined ratios. Various tables used in various lottery determinations are set so that at least some values differ from each other, and various tables used for various sorting rates are set so that at least some values differ from each other. The value may differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of one electric drive source and the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of another electric drive source. Some are set to In addition, as the set values described above, six set values (integers) ranging from set value 1 to set value 6 were used, but a smaller range may be used, or a larger range may be used. can be anything. For example, four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4 may be used, or eight setting values (integer) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8 may be used.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the set values, but also checks the contents of the internal RAM when the main control MPU 1310a restores power to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, and if the main control side power-off processing has not ended normally when the power is turned off, there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the internal RAM (or it is unreliable). is not possible), an error is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication.

Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h collects game balls B shot into the game area 5a through an out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5. The number of game balls B that have been played is displayed. Out of the game balls B launched into the game area 5a, the game balls B recovered by the out port 1008 are detected by the out sensor 664 (see FIG. 160, etc.), and this detection signal is sent to the main unit via the panel relay board. It is input to the control MPU 1310a.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected through the outlet 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position, which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a is set from the initial position. The setting key switch 1311a' may be rotatable only within a range up to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the key is turned ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a' is turned counterclockwise so as to return from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) which is the original position. By rotating the setting key switch 1311a' by 60 degrees toward the direction and turning it off, the setting key switch 1311a' can be turned on for the decision key. (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be described as "determination key modification (1)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the push operation portion of the enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button. A wire penetration prevention part is attached to the opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter through the "gap" formed in the opening and modify the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. It becomes a structure to be molded. When the pressing operation portion of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation portion of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button. When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

The position where the enter key button is arranged on the setting change board 1311 may be near the setting key switch 1311a or near the setting switching button 1311b. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, there are stickers printed with the names of each button at positions corresponding to the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b so as not to confuse the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b. is affixed (instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body). In order to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b, a button with a cover (for pressing the pressing operation part) covering the pressing operation part of either the entering key button or the setting switching button 1311b is provided. The cover needs to be opened at the same time.), the color of the pressing operation part may be different, and the outer shape or pressing operation of the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b may be changed. A switch with a different shape of the part may be adopted, or a switch of a different type that does not have a depressing operation part may be adopted as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the enter key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Switches can be mentioned. Further, when the setting change board 1311 is provided with the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b, the wiring pattern to the enter key button and the wiring pattern to the setting switching button 1311b are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. are formed so as not to come close to each other on the setting change board 1311 (separated from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also spaced apart. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the enter key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b should not be placed close to each other ( spaced apart from each other). Further, when the setting key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. (The form of the Enter key button (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Decision key modification (2)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the finger is touching, and a detection from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will. A signal may be branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and whether or not the enter key is ON may be determined based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the palm or fingers are in contact with the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192. When it is not touched, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON, and/or when the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the decision key is ON. On the other hand, when the launch of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. Good.) may be described as “determination key modification (3)”).

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A firing reference pulse is branched in the payout control board 633 from the firing timing control circuit provided in 633b and is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Based on these firing reference pulses, the determination key is selected. The presence or absence of ON may be determined. The launch reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B to be launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the firing reference pulse is input from the payout control board 633, while determining that the decision key is not ON when the firing reference pulse is not input. (The mode of the firing reference pulse may be described as "determination key modification (4)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the motion of the player sitting opposite the pachinko machine 1 is detected. When a distance measuring sensor that can be used is provided on the game board 5 and a detection signal from this distance measuring sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via a relay board, the detection signal from this distance measuring sensor It may be branched at the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and based on this detection signal, it may be determined whether or not the enter key is ON. The light emitted by the light emitting part of the distance measuring sensor passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected by the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance dimension. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light-receiving section, thereby detecting the action of the player. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a receives a detection signal from the distance measuring sensor through the relay board, and determines whether or not there is an action based on this detection signal. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no movement, it is possible to determine that the enter key is not ON (the aspect of the distance measuring sensor may be described as "determination key modification (5)"). .

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on to set the decision key, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise so that the setting key cylinder is returned to the initial position (i.e., the setting key cylinder turning position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the key is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by being rotated and turned off, and the setting key switch 1311a can be moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the decision key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the turning position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the key switch 1311a. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, the information for transmitting the setting key ON, enter key ON, and OFF is transmitted to the outside as serial information. A serial output circuit capable of serial output may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311, but may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 633 instead. . When the serial information serially output from this serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a turns on the setting key, the enter key on, and the It is possible to determine which of OFF is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as "determination key modification (6)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on to set the decision key, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise so that the setting key cylinder is returned to the initial position (i.e., the setting key cylinder turning position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the key is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by being rotated and turned off, and the setting key switch 1311a can be moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the decision key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the turning position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the key switch 1311a. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information for transmitting the setting key ON, decision key ON, and OFF is sent to the outside as a pulse signal. A pulse output circuit capable of outputting may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311, but may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 633 instead. . The pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit is set to have a pulse width of 1 ms when the information indicates that the setting key is turned on, and is set to a pulse width of 3 ms when the information indicates that the decision key is turned on. If the information indicates OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a turns on the set key, the decision key, and OFF (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be described as "determination key modification (7)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on to set the decision key, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise so that the setting key cylinder is returned to the initial position (i.e., the setting key cylinder turning position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the key is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by being rotated and turned off, and the setting key switch 1311a can be moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the decision key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the turning position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the key switch 1311a. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The voltage level of the signal is changed between the boards from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310 using an intermediate potential (for example, a potential of 2V to 3V in the range of 0V to 5V), By providing a comparator circuit and inputting the comparison result by the comparator circuit to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control MPU 1310a turns ON/OFF the setting key ON signal, ON/OFF the enter key ON signal, and OFF signal. ON/OFF may be determined. As a result, it is possible to improve the security with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a (the mode of the setting key switch using the intermediate potential is sometimes described as "determination key modification (8)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation part An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the enter key button. and a structure in which a wire penetration prevention portion is molded in the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter from the "gap" formed in the opening and modify the payout control board 633. Become. When the pressing operation portion of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation portion of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button. When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

It should be noted that the position where the determination key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch having a depressing operation section which will be described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, stickers printed with the names of the respective buttons are attached to positions corresponding to the enter key button and the error release switch so as not to confuse the enter key button and the error release switch. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body). In order to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the error release switch, a button with a cover that covers the depressing operation part of either the enter key button or the error release switch (a cover for depressing the depressing operation part) ) may be adopted, the color of the pressing operation part may be different, the external shape of the enter key button and the error canceling switch, or the shape of the pressing operation part A different type of switch may be employed, or another type of switch that does not have a depressing operation section may be employed as the decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the enter key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Switches can be mentioned. Also, when the payout control board 633 is provided with the decision key button and the error cancellation switch, the wiring pattern for the decision key button and the wiring pattern for the error cancellation switch are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. In the control board 633, they are formed so as not to come close to each other (at a distance from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed at a distance, Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the enter key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the error canceling switch should not come close to each other (separately from each other). ) is formed. Further, when the determination key button is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. (The form of the enter key button (which may include the form of the set key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variation (9) of the enter key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation part A signal from the error release switch is branched in the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and based on this signal, it is determined whether or not the decision key is ON. good too. As described above, the error release switch is for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display. When the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the time processing is completed and an interrupt processing is being performed), and no error has occurred as the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation portion of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the error canceling switch is operated based on the signal from the error canceling switch, while the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON based on the signal from the error canceling switch. Therefore, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON when the depression operation portion of the error canceling switch is not operated. As a result, the security can be improved depending on whether or not the decision key is ON (the mode of the error canceling switch may be referred to as "the modification (10) of the decision key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation part The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors the logic of the signal from the error cancellation switch in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on processing described later, and creates a command, and the payout control unit power-on processing described later. A command created in the command transmission process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receiving this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. As described above, the error release switch is for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display. When the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the time processing is completed and an interrupt processing is being performed), and no error has occurred as the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation portion of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, in the main control MPU 1310a, in frame command reception processing in the main control timer interrupt processing described later, the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is being operated based on the signal from the error cancellation switch, and notifies that effect. When the command is received, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, while the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch, and receives the command to notify that effect. When the button is pressed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, the security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on (mode 2 of the error canceling switch may be referred to as "variation (11) of the enter key").

In the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key switch). 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees to return to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off 1311a to turn it off, and further rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees to perform a second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on for the decision key, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided in the payout control board 633, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched in the payout control board 633 to pay out. Input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the control board 633, and determination may be made based on an operation signal input to the main control MPU 1310a as to whether or not the enter key is ON. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is activated when the depressing operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while depressing the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later), the main control MPU 1310a stores a predetermined area of its own built-in RAM (RAM excluding specific areas) must be cleared. Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears the predetermined area of the built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be diverted as a determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a is based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. When the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the determination key ON On the other hand, based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, when the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, it is determined that the determination key is not ON. can be done. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the enter key ON.

The pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the RAM clear switch 1310f can be pressed. In order to prevent a wire or the like from entering through the "gap" formed in the portion and the corresponding opening to modify the payout control board 633, the wire penetration prevention portion is provided with the cover body for the opening. It becomes a structure that is molded into

The position where the RAM clear switch 1310f is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch having a depressing operation portion which will be described later. On the cover of the payout control board 633, there are stickers printed with the names of the respective buttons at positions corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover). Also, in order to avoid confusion between the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error cancel switch, a button with a cover covering the depressing operation part of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error cancel switch (for depressing the depressing operation part) The cover needs to be opened at the same time.), the color of the pressing operation part may be different, and the external shape or pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error canceling switch may be changed. A switch having a different shape may be employed, and a switch of a different type that does not have a pressing operation part may be employed as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the RAM clear switch 1310f include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Various switches can be mentioned. Also, when the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error cancellation switch are provided on the payout control board 633, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern to the error cancellation switch are routed. are formed so as not to come close to each other on the payout control board 633 (separately from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed at a distance. Also, in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the error cancellation switch is transmitted should not be brought close to each other (mutually spaced apart). Further, when the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a must be rotated only within the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. (The mode of the RAM clear switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may also be included.) may be described as "determination key modification (12)").

In the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key switch). 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees to return to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off 1311a to turn it off, and further rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees to perform a second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on for the decision key, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633. A command is created by monitoring in the process, and the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later is transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that receives this command It may be determined whether or not the determination key is ON. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is activated when the depressing operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while depressing the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later), the main control MPU 1310a stores a predetermined area of its own built-in RAM (RAM excluding specific areas) must be cleared. Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears the predetermined area of the built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be diverted as a determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a can use the RAM clear switch 1310f based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the payout control MPU determines that the depressing operation unit is being operated and receives a command to that effect, it can determine that the enter key is ON. When the payout control MPU determines that the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated based on the operation signal of , and receives a command to that effect, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON. Thus, it is possible to improve the security against whether or not the Enter key is ON (RAM clear switch mode 2 (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may also be included). ”).

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 574 or the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and branched at the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on. is monitored by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 in the port input processing of the payout control unit power-on processing described later, and a command is created in the command transmission processing of the payout control unit power-on processing described later. The command may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receiving this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the payout unit). The aspect (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (16)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, it can be determined that the decision key is ON based on the detection signal of , while the body frame 4 remains open with respect to the outer frame 2. is maintained, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (main body frame open). The form of the switch (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "determination key modification (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value must close the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to open the body frame 4 again by pressing the button, remove the setting key from the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 again.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4, it can be determined that the decision key is ON based on the detection signal of , while the door frame 3 remains closed with respect to the body frame 4. is maintained, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (door frame opening). The form of the switch (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "determination key modification (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value must open the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 in order to turn on the enter key. Then, it is necessary to close the door frame 3 again, remove the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion opening of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is shifted from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). (rotational position)) to turn it OFF by turning it counterclockwise 60 degrees, and turning it further counterclockwise by 60 degrees) to turn it ON. can be set to turn ON the enter key, and the signal of this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310 (the mode of the setting key switch may be described as "determination key modification (18)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is shifted from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). (rotational position)) to turn it OFF by turning it counterclockwise 60 degrees, and turning it further counterclockwise by 60 degrees) to turn it ON. can be set to turn ON the enter key, and the signal of this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder from the rotational position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to the initial position and turning it off. By inputting the signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the Enter key is ON when the OFF signal is input, while the OFF signal is input. If not, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (setting key switch 1311a'). mode 2 (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (19)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) which is the original position. 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then turn it on again to turn the setting key switch 1311a into the enter key ON. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the press operation portion of the enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button. and a structure in which a wire penetration prevention part is molded in the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter from the "gap" formed in the opening and modify the main control board 1310. Become. When the pressing operation portion of the decision key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation portion of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button. When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

The position where the enter key button is arranged on the main control board 1310 may be in the vicinity of the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, there are stickers printed with the names of the respective buttons at positions corresponding to the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so as not to confuse the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f. is affixed (instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body). Also, in order not to confuse the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, a button with a cover covering the depressing operation part of either the enter key button or the RAM clear switch 1310f (for depressing the depressing operation part) The cover must be opened at the same time.), the color of the pressing operation part may be different, and the external shape or pressing operation of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f may be changed. A switch with a different shape of the part may be adopted, or a switch of a different type that does not have a depressing operation part may be adopted as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the enter key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Switches can be mentioned. Also, when the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for the enter key button and the wiring pattern for the RAM clear switch 1310f should be routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. are formed so as not to come close to each other on the main control board 1310 (spaced apart from each other). Further, when the enter key button is provided on the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A setting key switch 1311a' can be used (the mode 2 of the Enter key button (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "Modified example (20) of the Enter key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, a RAM clear switch to which the main control MPU 1310a is input is provided. Whether or not the enter key is ON may be determined based on the operation signal from 1310f. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is activated when the depressing operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while depressing the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later), the main control MPU 1310a stores a predetermined area of its own built-in RAM (RAM excluding specific areas) must be cleared. Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears the predetermined area of the built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as the determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the determination key is ON when the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the enter key ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (RAM clear switch). mode 3 (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (21)"). It should be noted that the period during which the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is applied to the payout control board 633, as will be described later. Since it is input to the payout control MPU, the payout control board 633 does not need an error canceling switch when the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also function as an error canceling switch, which will be described later.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Gate sensor 2601, various sensors of various winning openings (for example, general winning opening sensor 3001, first starting opening sensor 3002, second starting opening sensor 2401, variable winning opening sensor 2526, first large winning opening sensor 2525, second large The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signals from the winning opening sensor 2561) and the out sensor 664 of the main body frame 4 are inputted may determine whether or not the decision key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (various sensors, etc.). mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (22)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 to turn the decision key ON, sends the game ball B into the gate 2002, or opens various winning ports. It is necessary to send the game ball B to or send the game ball B to the out port 1008 .

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. It controls the operation of the movable body (accessory) by controlling the drive of the electrical drive source such as the solenoid, and the movable body (accessory) based on the detection signal from the optical sensor (photo sensor, distance measurement sensor, etc.) When determining the original position, the operating position, etc., the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on the detection signal from this optical sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (optical function). The aspect of the object sensor (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (23)"). In this case, the person who changes the set value must open the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 so that the optical sensor detects the original position of the movable body (accessory) in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to move the movable body (accessory) so as to detect the operating position, etc.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a is detected. The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is inputted may determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050. FIG. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the magnetic sensor's The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (24)"). In this case, the person who changes the set value needs to bring the magnet close to the front of the game board 5 from the front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the enter key.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or hit. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated to change the path of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5, thereby causing various winning openings and gates (gates 2002) provided on the game board 5 to move. When the game board 5 is provided with a vibration sensor that detects a fraudulent act of entering a ball, the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor, and based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. It is also possible to determine whether or not the decision key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the vibration sensor may The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (25)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the decision key.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, radio waves are emitted to the pachinko machine 1 to play A game board 5 or a payout device 580 is provided with a radio wave sensor for detecting a fraudulent act of illegally obtaining a game ball B by making various sensors of various winning ports provided on the board 5 or various sensors provided in the payout device 580 malfunction. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may determine the presence or absence of the enter key ON based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the radio wave sensor The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (26)"). In this case, it is necessary for the person who changes the setting value to irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the enter key.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 373 that detects the pressing operation of the production operation unit 350 and a detection signal from the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the contact of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 350 are input to the peripheral control board 1510. It may be branched at the peripheral control board 1510 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (effect operation button The form of the unit (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (27)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the internal space of the main control board box 1320 composed of the cover body and the base body. It may be housed in a body setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320 . In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are crimped by a one-way screw or the like of the crimping portion. This crimping part is a sealing mechanism, and has a plurality of crimping parts. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping part using one sealing mechanism. It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. That is, unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed, the cover cannot be removed from the base. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the press operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding thereto. It is possible to modify the setting change board 1311 by inserting a wire or the like from the "gap" formed between the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button and the corresponding opening. In order to prevent this, a structure is adopted in which a wire penetration prevention portion is molded in the cover body with respect to the opening. It should be noted that unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, the configuration of the setting change board box is such that the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body. A setting change board cover open/close switch capable of detecting opening of the cover may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover opening/closing switch may be directly input to the main control board 1310, or (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. may be configured to be Based on the detection signal from the setting change board cover body open/close switch, the case where the cover body is released from the base body can be included in the predetermined setting value change permission condition (setting change board box is sometimes referred to as "determination key modification (28)").

In the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are connected to each other. A wiring pattern for transmitting a key ON signal, a wiring pattern for transmitting a decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting an OFF signal for the setting key switch 1311a, and a setting switching button 1311b. The wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting change board 1311 is formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other), and the terminals of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (main control The connection to the terminal of the connector MSCN of the substrate 1310 is also formed at a distance. , a wiring pattern to which a decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and a wiring pattern to which a setting key switch 1311a OFF signal is transmitted) and a signal from the setting switching button 1311b. was formed so as not to approach each other (separated from each other). 1311a through which the decision key ON signal is transmitted, one of the wiring patterns is connected via another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately from the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. , connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 and another connector provided on the main control board 1310 separately (connection between boards) may be connected (inter-board connection), and the other connector provided on the setting change board 1311 and the main control board may be connected. It may be electrically connected to another connector provided on the 1310 via a harness (the mode of routing of the wiring pattern may be described as "determination key modification (29)").

In addition, it is also possible to employ a mode in which one of the above-described modification examples (1) to (29) of the decision key is appropriately selected and combined (the mode of selection and combination of the modification examples is referred to as "Modification example (30) of the decision key"). ”).

In addition, in the above-mentioned setting value, in addition to the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit or not, and the probability for lottery determination whether it is a small hit, for lottery determination when shifting from probability variable time to normal time , the rate of distribution to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous to the player possible) probability (degree of advantage) is set in advance. In the present embodiment, set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are prepared in advance as set values. A probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player is set in advance. By the way, although the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a plurality of set values ranging from set value 1 to set value 6, other pachinko machines have a probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player. Some have a single preset value. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, which has a game specification in which the probability of being advantageous to the player (the degree of advantage) exists as a plurality of set values in advance and requires setting changes, is advantageous to the player. There are game specifications in which only a single set value of the probability (advantage degree) exists in advance and no setting change is required. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed according to such game specifications and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 depends on the game specifications, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 have similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, it is desired that the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be used in common without depending on the game specifications, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in a game specification in which there is only a single set value in advance for the probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player and there is no need to change the setting, the probability (advantage degree) that the set value is advantageous to the player Since there is no need to use it as a can be done.

For example, after the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of its built-in RAM (an area excluding a specific area out of all areas of the RAM), it is possible to set a plurality of actual machine confirmation operation patterns (after clearing the RAM It can be used as a setting value that allows variation in the method of starting the pachinko machine 1). In this case, the set value 1 is set to "all operations (movable bodies (role Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 that specifies "movement of object (object), lighting of light emitter)" is assigned, and real machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies "movable object (character object) operation" is assigned as setting value 2, and set Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "illumination of light emitting body" is assigned as value 3, and detailed operation of movable body (character object) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operation area, other An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies "interference check with structures and other movable bodies (accessories), operation order with other movable bodies (accessories)" is assigned, and the setting value 5 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 that specifies "lighting of light emitters per port (lighting of light emitters by predetermined output port units (that is, each output port) of the main control MPU 1310a)" is assigned, and set value 6 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 specifying "no operation" is assigned (the mode of change setting of actual machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing may be described as "modification (1) by common hardware configuration"). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a performs the operation of the movable body (accessory) and the lighting of the light emitter such as the lamp and the LED by repeatedly performing the operation of confirming the real machine after clearing the RAM and the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, controls the movable object to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 with the content (actual machine confirmation operation pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to perform the operation of (accessory) and lighting of the light emitter. By changing and setting the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM, it is possible to provide variations in the method of starting the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM.

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of times from the end of the pattern fluctuation until the demonstration (demonstration effect performed while waiting for the player). In this case, time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" is assigned as setting value 1, time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" is assigned as setting value 2, and "20 seconds" is assigned as setting value 3. is assigned, time setting pattern 4 is assigned to specify "25 seconds" as setting value 4, time setting pattern 5 is assigned to specify "30 seconds" as setting value 5, A time setting pattern 6 that specifies "35 seconds" is assigned as the set value 6 (the change setting mode of the time from the end of the pattern variation to the player waiting state is set as "Modified example by common hardware configuration (2 )”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing and setting the time from the completion of the symbol variation to the player waiting state, the time from the completion of the symbol variation to the demonstration can be varied.

In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of contents of a demonstration (demonstration performed in a player waiting state) to be performed after the completion of symbol variation. In this case, a demonstration effect setting pattern 1 that designates "comical effect" is assigned as setting value 1, and a demonstration effect setting pattern that designates "comical effect, action effect of movable body (character object)" as setting value 2. 2 is assigned, a demonstration effect setting pattern 3 specifying "serious effect" is assigned as setting value 3, and a demonstration effect setting pattern specifying "serial effect, action effect of movable body (role object)" is assigned as setting value 4. 4 is assigned, a demonstration effect setting pattern 5 that specifies "historical drama effect" is assigned as setting value 5, and a demonstration effect setting that specifies "historical drama effect, movable body (role object)" is assigned as setting value 6. Pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of changing and setting the content of the demonstration effect may be described as "modification (3) based on common hardware configuration"). In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can demonstrate with a demonstration effect (demonstration effect setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner of changing and setting the details of the demonstration effect, variations can be given to the details of the demonstration effect performed after the pattern variation is completed.

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value for setting a plurality of default sound volumes to be adjusted by the sound volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 . By rotating the volume control switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" is assigned as setting value 2, and "volume 3" is assigned as setting value 3. is assigned a volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "", a volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, a volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "volume 5" is assigned as the setting value 5, A volume setting pattern 6 that designates "volume 6" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the change setting mode of the default volume may be described as "modification (4) based on common hardware configuration"). It should be noted that the volume is set to increase from setting value 1 to setting value 6. FIG. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, sets the default sound volume (volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of "volume 1" assigned to setting value 1 is moved to the direction of decreasing the volume of the volume adjustment switch (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of increasing the volume), and the movement to the end of the minimum volume is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the minimum side volume, the sound may be muted, or the volume may be such that the sound can be recognized when the player stops in front of the pachinko machine. In addition, the default volume of "volume 6" assigned to set value 6 is moved in the direction of increasing the volume of the volume control switch (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of decreasing the volume), and the movement to the maximum volume end is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the maximum side volume, the volume may be set to the maximum volume, or the volume may be set to a predetermined percentage (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. This mode of changing and setting the default sound volume allows variation in the default sound volume adjusted by the sound volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 .

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value for setting a plurality of sound volumes of error notification sounds for error notification such as various problems, gotos, and errors. Various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, are not dependent), and the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound by maximizing the volume is used in the game hall. Although it is easy for a staff member such as a store clerk to notice it, it may be offensive to a player who is playing a game with another pachinko machine. Therefore, there is also a demand for a device capable of adjusting the volume of various error notification sounds. In this case, error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, and error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification volume 2" is assigned as setting value 2. , error notification volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification volume 3" is assigned as setting value 3, error notification volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as setting value 4, and setting value 5 is assigned as " An error notification volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification volume 5" is assigned, and an error notification volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as a setting value 6 (error notification sound volume is sometimes described as "modification (5) by common hardware configuration"). In addition, setting value 1 (the volume that does not mute the sound, and the volume that allows you to recognize the error notification sound when you stop in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound) to setting value 6 (the maximum volume, The volume of the error notification sound is set so that the volume of the error notification sound increases toward a volume at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if the player is several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, performs control to emit an error notification sound at the error notification sound volume (error notification volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner of changing and setting the volume of the error notification sound, it is possible to provide variation in the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification.

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value for setting a plurality of default luminances of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs. It is possible to increase or decrease the brightness from the default brightness for the light emitters to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, the default brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the default brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies "brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and the setting value 3 is " A default brightness setting pattern 3 specifying "brightness 3" is assigned, a default brightness setting pattern 4 specifying "brightness 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and a default brightness setting pattern specifying "brightness 5" is assigned as the setting value 5. 5 is assigned, and a default brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies "brightness 6" as the setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of change setting of default brightness is sometimes described as "modification (6) by common hardware configuration"). be). Note that the main control MPU 1310a adjusts the luminance of the light emitters by repeatedly performing main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to change the default luminance, and perform lighting, blinking, gradation points, and the like of the light emitters. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, is subject to control by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light emitters, lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitters can be performed. Variations can be given to the default brightness of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs by changing and setting the content of the default brightness.

In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of luminances of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs for reporting errors such as various defects, gotos, and errors. An error notification luminance setting pattern 1 that designates "error notification luminance 1" as the setting value 1 is assigned to the lamp to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, and "error notification luminance 2" is assigned as the setting value 2. An error notification brightness setting pattern 2 is assigned to be specified, an error notification brightness setting pattern 3 specifying "error notification brightness 3" is assigned as a setting value 3, and an error notification specifying "error notification brightness 4" is assigned as a setting value 4. A luminance setting pattern 4 is assigned, an error notification luminance setting pattern 5 specifying "error notification luminance 5" is assigned as the setting value 5, and an error notification specifying "error notification luminance 6 (maximum luminance)" is assigned as the setting value 6. A luminance setting pattern 6 is assigned (the manner of changing the luminance of the light emitter in the error notification may be described as "modification (7) based on common hardware configuration"). In addition, from setting value 1 (the brightness of the lamp is low so that the error notification can be recognized when stopping in front of the pachinko machine even though it does not turn off), the lamp brightness is increased from setting value 6 (maximum brightness). Brightness is set to high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitters by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to change the brightness of the light emitters in the error notification, and adjust the lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitters. conduct. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, is the object to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification luminance (error notification luminance setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light emitters, lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitters can be performed. By changing and setting the luminance of the light emitters in this error notification, it is possible to provide variations in the luminance of the light emitters such as lamps and LEDs in the error notification.

Further, the various setting values assigned to the modifications (1) to (7) based on the above-described common hardware configuration are determined when the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established in the setting value confirmation display processing (to be described later) performed by the main control MPU 1310a. However, it may be displayed on the setting display 1310g all the time after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on until the power is turned off (set value display (8) may be referred to as "modification (8) by common hardware configuration").

Also, any one of the modifications (1) to (8) based on the above-described common hardware configuration may be appropriately selected and adopted as the above-described modification (30) of the enter key.

In addition, the predetermined setting value change permission condition described above is applied to the outer frame 2 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily). Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary that the setting key had been turned ON. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while depressing the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a clears a specific area out of all the areas of the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-on processing described later. is cleared except for , and then the game proceeds by performing interrupt permission setting and the like. Further, when the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition is established at the time of power recovery of the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs setting change processing in the main control side power-on processing described later, and stores the main control built-in RAM. The game proceeds by clearing the entire area except for the specific area, and then performing interrupt permission setting and the like. In other words, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is restored, the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition is established. In either case, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission etc. It will happen. Therefore, as the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure), the outer frame 2 Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. In addition to the ON operation of the setting key, the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f may be pressed (this may be described as "a modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition"). be).

In addition, the predetermined setting value display permission condition described above is applied to the outer frame 2 after the power is restored after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily). Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary that the setting key had been turned ON. When this predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets and displays the current setting value in the setting value confirmation display processing which is performed as one processing of the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later. displayed on vessel 1310g. Moreover, as described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f needs to be pressed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the period of pressing is limited. Therefore, as the above-described predetermined setting value display permission condition, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (an instantaneous power failure), the outer frame 2 Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. In addition to the ON operation of the setting key, the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f may not be pressed (in the case described as "a modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition"). there is). In this case, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the setting value confirmation display processing as one processing of the main control side timer interrupt processing described later when the predetermined modification of the set value display permission condition is satisfied. In the processing at the time of entry, the game proceeds by performing the initial setting and start-up setting of the built-in WDT, and then performing the interrupt permission setting and the like. When the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established and the setting value confirmation display processing is performed, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the interrupt permission setting yet, so the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. A detection signal from the body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is initialized. The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning clockwise 60 degrees from the position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) and performing the first ON operation. The setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is read and is not stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as input information to be described later. For this reason, the main control MPU 1310a controls the main body frame opening for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 when the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established and the setting value confirmation display processing is performed. The detection signal from the switch and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a are read.

By adopting both the above-described modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the modification of the above-described predetermined setting value display permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs) When the power is restored after the momentary power failure that occurs), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. Assuming that the setting key is turned ON by rotating the key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees and performing the first ON operation, the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed. Sometimes, the main control MPU 1310a performs setting change processing in the main control side power-on processing described later, clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then performs interrupt permission setting etc. While the game is progressing, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs set value confirmation display processing in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then, The game progresses by performing interrupt permission setting and the like. By adopting this mode, the main control MPU 1310a never performs the set value confirmation display process once the progress of the game is started. In other words, the main control MPU 1310a never displays the currently set setting value on the setting display 1310g when the progress of the game is started by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like. The main control MPU 1310a recovers by the out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4 through the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 in the ball counting process of the main control side power-on process described later. The number of game balls B collected is counted, and output to the base monitor 1310h in the port output process of the main control side power-on processing to be described later, and the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008 is displayed on the base monitor 1310h. to display. Therefore, the current set value displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the base monitor 1310h described above (this may be described as a "modification of how to use the base monitor"). . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a uses the base monitor 1310h to display the current set value that is set during the period from when the power is restored until when the progress of the game is started by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like. In addition, when the progress of the game is started by setting interrupt permission after the power is restored, the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008 (out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4) is displayed. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the setting display 1310g, which contributes to cost reduction.

Any one of the above-described modification of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the modification of the method of using the base monitor may be selected as appropriate. It may be selected and employed in the modified example (30) of the enter key described above.

Any one of the above-described modification of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the modification of the method of using the base monitor may be selected as appropriate. It may be selected and employed in modifications (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration described above.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 137 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the lottery result of normal symbols, the lottery result of special symbols, and the like. .

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 displays a state indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game state, and the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the gate 2002. It is provided with a normal symbol display made up of two LEDs and a normal reservation display made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the reception of game balls B to the gate 2002. - 特許庁

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2004, and a first starting A first special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the opening 2004, and a second special design drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start opening 2005. A second special pattern indicator consisting of eight LEDs that displays the lottery result, and a second special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2005 and have.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 repeats the opening and closing pattern of the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is "win" or the like. A round indicator consisting of five LEDs displaying (number of rounds) is provided.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 144 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is provided behind the performance display device 1600 provided behind the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 160) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520; The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, and the like, and an effect display control part 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decoration boards on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, etc. (see FIG. 160).

The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the set plate 1650 that attaches the performance display device 1600 to the back box 3010, although the details will be described later.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 and the set plate 1650 . The effect display device 1600, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the front surface of a set plate 1650 detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 (see FIGS. 151 to 153). ). The performance display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the transparent game panel 1100 and the frame-like center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 .

The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and is mounted vertically. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the rear end partially projects into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. there is

The table unit 2000 is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a, and a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are capable of receiving the game ball B hit into the game area 5a and are always open. A gate 2002 for detecting the passage of the game ball B, and a variable prize winning opening 2003 for accepting the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal pattern drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002. And, the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005, which are provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and are always open to receive the game ball B, and the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 A first big prize winning port 2006 that enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the lottery result of the first special pattern or the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn by accepting the game ball B, and the first big prize. Depending on the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is provided at a position different from the opening 2006 and is drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005 and a second big prize winning port 2007 that allows the reception of game balls B.

The front unit 2000 further comprises a first sub-out port 2021 and a second sub-out port 2022 which are provided at predetermined positions in the game area 5a and which are always open to receive the game ball B. .

A plurality of (here, four) general winning holes 2001 are arranged on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction in the lower part of the game area 5a. The gate 2002 is arranged near the left end in the front view in the game area 5a at a height slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction. A variable winning opening 2003 is arranged on the upper right side of the gate 2002 . The first starting port 2004 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowest end at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The second starting port 2005 is arranged above the first starting port 2004 on the right side of the first starting port 2004 in the lower part of the game area 5a. The first big prize winning opening 2006 is arranged directly above the variable winning opening 2003 at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom in the game area 5a. The second big winning opening 2007 is arranged close to the right end of the game area 5a slightly higher than the height of 3/4 from the bottom in the game area 5a.

The first sub-out port 2021 is arranged between the second big winning port 2007 and the left end of the game area 5a. The second sub-out port 2022 is arranged to the right of the second starting port 2005 .

The front unit 2000 is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start opening 2004, and the left side of the start opening unit 2100 On the other hand, a side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 and has four general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit 2300 that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. , A lower right unit 2400 provided on the right side of the starting port unit 2100 in the front view and having a second start port 2005 and a second sub-out port 2022, which is the lower right corner in the game area 5a in the front view. ing.

In addition, the front unit 2000 is provided above the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the lower right unit 2400 and slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a. A frame-shaped center role 2500 having a big prize winning port 2006, a second big prize winning port 2007, and a first sub-out port 2021, and to the left of the center role 2500 and near the center in the vertical direction of the game area 5a. A gate member 2600 having a gate 2002 is provided, and a specific obstacle nail group 2700 is provided in the right part of the game area 5a and is composed of a plurality of obstacle nails N.

Although details will be described later, the lower right unit 2400 can accept the game ball B received in the second large winning opening 2007, and has a pseudo large winning opening 2402 having a larger opening than the second large winning opening 2007, and a pseudo A pseudo-out port 2404 for discharging the game ball B not received in the big winning port 2402 to the rear of the game panel 1100 is provided.

[5-8a. starting unit]
Next, starting unit 2100 of front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 145 and the like. The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starter opening unit 2100 has a first starter opening 2004 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first starting port 2004 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and is opened upward, so that the center accessory 2500 can move in the horizontal direction. Located just below the center. More specifically, the first starting port 2004 of the starting port unit 2100 is located directly below the center release portion 2513a of the stage 2513 in the center accessory 2500 in the assembled state on the game board 5. As a result, the game ball B released from the central release portion 2513a of the stage 2513 is received in the first start port 2004 with a high probability.

The starting port unit 2100 guides the game ball B received in the first starting port 2004 to the rear of the game panel 1100 in a state attached to the game panel 1100, and delivers it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. can be done. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 is detected by the first starting hole sensor 3002 and discharged downward.

[5-8b. side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 145 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is provided with four general winning openings 2001 which are open to receive game balls B at all times. The four general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002 . Each of the four general winning openings 2001 opens upward.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, the four general winning holes 2001 project forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁This side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 . The game ball B delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 and discharged downward.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
Next, side upper left unit 2300 of front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 145 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that slopes downward to the right.

When the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled on the game board 5, the shelf 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center role 2500 to the right side below the center role 2500 by the shelf part 2301 .

[5-8d. lower right unit]
Next, the lower right unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 147 and the like. The lower right unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the starter unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in the front view, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1100 from the front. This lower right unit 2400 includes a second starting port 2005, a second sub-out port 2022, and a second starting port sensor 2401 (see FIG. 149, etc.) that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2005. , is equipped with

In addition, the lower right unit 2400 includes a pseudo big winning hole 2402 extending left and right over the full width in the horizontal direction, a pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the pseudo big winning hole 2402, and a pseudo out port 2404 provided below near the left end of the pseudo big prize winning port 2402 . The pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 and the pseudo out opening 2404 are open forward. The pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 is larger (wider) in the left and right than the second big winning opening 2007 . Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the width in the left-right direction of the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is about 170 mm, which is wider than the maximum width of 135 mm of the usually used big winning opening.

In addition, the lower right unit 2400 includes a pseudo big winning door 2405 that openably closes the pseudo big winning door 2402, and a pseudo big winning door solenoid 2406 that opens and closes the pseudo big winning door 2405 (see FIG. 149, etc.). ), and The pseudo big prize winning door 2405 has a flat plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and its lower side is supported so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the horizontal direction.

In the lower right unit 2400, the second starting port 2005 is arranged to the right of the pseudo out port 2404 and directly above the pseudo big prize winning port 2402, and the second sub-out port 2022 is to the right of the second starting port 2005. placed adjacent to each other.

When the lower right unit 2400 is assembled on the game board 5, the left end is located near the right side of the out port 1008, the right end is close to the right rail 1005, and the left and right direction is almost the same as the lower right rail 1004. It is formed in a length that covers the upper part.

The lower right unit 2400 protrudes forward from a flat base plate 2407 that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 and the base plate 2407, forming a space (pseudo game area 2010) independent of the game area 5a. and a possible delimiter 2410 . The base plate 2407 and partition 2410 are made of a transparent material. The second starting port 2005, the second sub-out port 2022, the pseudo big prize winning port 2402, and the pseudo big prize winning port 2404 are provided so as to penetrate the base plate 2407, and the pseudo big prize winning port sensor 2403 is located on the base plate 2407. located on the rear side. A pseudo big prize winning slot 2402 and a pseudo out slot 2404 are provided inside the delimiter 2410 .

The dividing portion 2410 includes a bottom wall portion 2411 extending left and right over the entire width and inclined so that the right end side is higher, and a first vertical wall portion 2412 extending upward from the right end of the bottom wall portion 2411. , a right slanted wall portion 2413 extending obliquely to the lower left from the upper end of the first standing wall portion 2412, a right lateral wall portion 2414 horizontally extending from the lower end of the right slanting wall portion 2413 to the first standing wall portion 2412, A second vertical wall portion 2415 that is separated leftward from the right horizontal wall portion 2414 and extends upward from the first vertical wall portion 2412 from a portion at the same height as the lower end of the right horizontal wall portion 2414 , and A left slanted wall portion 2416 extending obliquely to the lower right from a portion at the same height as the upper end of the single standing wall portion 2412 to the same height as the lower end of the second standing wall portion 2415, and A left lateral wall portion 2417 extending horizontally to the left from the standing wall portion 2415, and an inclined wall portion 2418 extending obliquely downward to the left from the left end of the left lateral wall portion 2417 to the same position as the left end of the bottom wall portion 2411. , and a third standing wall portion 2419 extending downward from the lower end of the inclined wall portion 2418 to a position below the left end of the bottom wall portion 2411 .

The bottom wall portion 2411 is formed to have a length shorter than the length of the lower right rail 1004 in the left-right direction by about one game ball B. As shown in FIG. The horizontal interval between the first standing wall portion 2412 and the second standing wall portion 2415 is slightly shorter than the length of the second big winning opening 2007 in the horizontal direction. The distance between the lower end of the right slanted wall portion 2413 and the lower end of the left slanted wall portion 2416 is approximately half the length of the second big prize winning opening 2007 in the horizontal direction.

The second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022 are arranged at a portion between the second standing wall portion 2415 and the inclined wall portion 2418 in the left lateral wall portion 2417 . The pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 is arranged directly below the right lateral wall portion 2414, the left lateral wall portion 2417, and the inclined wall portion 2418, and the portion along the inclined wall portion 2418 is obliquely cut away from the oblong rectangle. The shape is open towards the front. Pseudo-out port 2404 is arranged adjacent to a portion where bottom wall portion 2411 and third standing wall portion 2419 intersect.

The lower right unit 2400 also includes a flat lower right decorative portion 2431 that closes the front end side of the triangular frame formed by the first standing wall portion 2412, the right oblique wall portion 2413, and the right lateral wall portion 2414. , which closes the front end side of the triangular frame formed by the second vertical wall portion 2415, the left oblique wall portion 2416, and the left lateral wall portion 2417, and forwards the second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022. It is provided in the center between the extending plate-like right lower left decorative portion 2432 and the lower right right decorative portion 2431 and the lower right left decorative portion 2432, and extends forward from the base plate 2407 in a downward arrow shape. It has a protruding lower right central decorative portion 2433 (see FIG. 137 and the like).

Furthermore, the lower right unit 2400 is provided behind the base plate 2407, and the pseudo big prize winning opening 2402, the lower right right decorative portion 2431, the lower right left decorative portion 2432, and the lower right middle decorative portion 2433 are independent of each other. It further has a lower right decorative substrate 2434 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light and decoration are mounted on the front surface.

In addition, the lower right unit 2400 has transparent decorative stickers on the front surfaces of the pseudo grand prize winning door 2405, the lower right decorative portion 2431, the lower right left decorative portion 2432, and the lower right middle decorative portion 2433. is pasted.

The lower right unit 2400 is provided in the lower right corner of the game area 5a in a state where the game balls B cannot flow to the right side and the lower side in a state assembled on the game board 5.例文帳に追加The front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed forward around the upper portion of each of the right slanted wall portion 2413, the second standing wall portion 2415, and the left slanted wall portion 2416, and a plurality of obstacles are present at these portions. A nail N is planted. A portion between the first standing wall portion 2412 and the second standing wall portion 2415 is located below the second prize winning opening 2007 of the center accessory 2500 . The upper end of the second standing wall portion 2415 is located near the lower end of the attacker left wall portion 2568 in the center accessory 2500 described later, and the right side of the second standing wall portion 2415, that is, the inside of the partition portion 2410, is the game It is a space (pseudo game area 2010) independent of the area 5a.

In addition, in the lower right unit 2400 assembled on the game board 5, the second starting port 2005 is located slightly to the right with respect to directly below the right discharge passage 2565 of the center accessory 2500, and the inclined wall portion 2418 The lower end (left end) of is located below the first starting port 2004 . Above the second starting port 2005, the second sub-out port 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418, the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed forward, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are also planted in this portion. is set.

Further, in the lower right unit 2400 assembled on the game board 5, the pseudo out port 2404 is separated from the out port 1008 by about one game ball B to the upper right. In addition, the pseudo big prize opening sensor 2403 can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent base plate 2407 or the like.

The lower right unit 2400 can guide the game ball B received in the second starting hole 2005 to the rear of the game panel 1100, detect it by the second starting hole sensor 2401, and discharge it downward. Also, the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 can be guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and discharged downward.

The lower right unit 2400 has a pseudo big prize winning port 2402 and a pseudo out port 2404 inside the delimiter 2410 (pseudo game area 2010). Inside the partitioning portion 2410, only the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007 is formed to circulate.

In the normal state of the lower right unit 2400, the pseudo big winning door 2405 is in an upright state, and the pseudo big winning door 2402 is closed by the pseudo big winning door 2405 so that the game ball B cannot be received. ing. In this state, the game ball B supplied to the inner side (pseudo game area 2010) of the partitioning portion 2410 passes in front of the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 closing the pseudo big winning opening 2402, and the bottom wall portion 2411 It flows upward, rolls leftward along the slope of the bottom wall portion 2411, and is prevented from further rolling leftward by the third standing wall portion 2419, and opens forward at that portion. is received in the pseudo-out port 2404 . The game ball B received in the pseudo-out port 2404 is not returned into the game area 5a, but is discharged downward after being guided to the rear of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁

In the lower right unit 2400, the bottom wall portion 2411 is provided close to the lower right rail 1004, and the pseudo out port 2404 is provided close to the out port 1008. The game ball B rolled to the left and received by the pseudo out port 2404 can give the player the illusion that it rolls on the lower right rail 1004 and is received by the out port 1008 .

The pseudo big prize winning opening door 2405 closing the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start opening 2004 and the second start opening 2005, and the second opening. According to the lottery result of the second special symbol, when the pseudo big prize opening solenoid 2406 is energized, it rotates so that the upper end moves forward around the lower side, and the upper end is positioned slightly above the lower end. It is in a state of protruding forward from the base plate 2407 (game panel 1100) so that the rear becomes lower. In this state, the pseudo big winning opening 2402 can receive the game ball B. Then, when the pseudo big prize winning port 2402 is in a state capable of receiving the game ball B, when the game ball B flows down to the front of the pseudo big winning prize port 2402, it hits the pseudo big winning prize port door 2405 protruding forward. Then, it is guided backward by the inclination of the pseudo big prize winning door 2405 and is received in the pseudo big prize winning port 2402 .

The pseudo grand prize winning port 2402 is not accepted by the second grand prize winning port 2007 and extends leftward even to the lower part of the right discharge passage 2565 for discharging downward from the center accessory 2500. When the game ball B is released downward from the right discharge passage 2565 while the big winning opening 2402 (pseudo big winning opening door 2405) is opening and closing, the game ball B is also received by the pseudo big winning opening 2402. It is possible to give the illusion that the player is

In addition, since it also extends to the left at a portion immediately below the second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022, it can be received by the second large prize winning port 2007 when the pseudo large prize winning port 2402 is opening and closing. The game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 of the center accessory 2500 and received in the second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022 is as if received in the pseudo big prize winning port 2402. can be an illusion.

The game ball B received in the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403, and discharged downward. The pseudo big winning opening sensor 2403 can be visually recognized from the player side even through the open pseudo big winning opening 2402 . By visually recognizing the pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403, the player can be tricked into thinking that the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is a real big winning hole.

The pseudo big winning gate sensor 2403 is for executing a predetermined effect by detecting the game ball B, and for opening and closing the pseudo big winning gate door 2405 by counting the number of the game balls B. . By opening and closing the quasi-big prize door 2405 according to the number of game balls B received in the quasi-big prize mouth 2402, it is possible to make it easier to give the illusion that the quasi-big prize mouth 2402 is a real big prize mouth. can.

According to the lower right unit 2400 of the present embodiment, since it has a pseudo big winning opening 2402 that is wider than the maximum width of 135 mm of the big winning opening that is normally used and extends long to the left and right, The pachinko machine is equipped with a large prize-winning opening that has never been seen before, and can make a player feel an illusion and give a strong impact to the player. This pachinko machine 1 can be made to be actively selected, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced.

In addition, according to the lower right unit 2400, the right lateral wall portion 2414 and the left lateral wall portion 2417 are placed above the pseudo big prize winning port 2402 whose lateral direction is larger than that of the second big prize winning port 2007. And an inclined wall portion 2418 is provided, and between the right horizontal wall portion 2414 and the left horizontal wall portion 2417 (the right inclined wall portion 2413 and the left inclined wall portion 2416), and the game ball B is received by the pseudo big winning opening 2402.例文帳に追加As a result, a plurality of game balls B received in the second large prize winning port 2007 can be aggregated in a narrow range and directed to the pseudo large prize winning port 2402, so that the game received in the second large prize winning port 2007 The player can be given the illusion that more game balls B than the balls B are received in the pseudo big winning opening 2402, and the player can be greatly entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 to 150 and the like. FIG. 148(a) is a front view showing the right half of the front unit together with the panel plate and the obstructing nail, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front. 149(a) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate in FIG. 148, and FIG. 149(b) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate in FIG. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the back. 150 is an exploded perspective view from the front of FIG. 148 with only the center right front plate viewed from behind.

The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged above the starter unit 2100 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in the shape of a transparent frame, and the effect display device 1600 provided behind the game panel 1100 and various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front. .

Although the details will be described later, the center accessory 2500 includes a variable prize winning opening 2003 that opens and closes to accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal symbol that is drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, and the first starter. A first big prize that opens and closes so that the game ball B can be received according to the lottery result of the first special pattern or the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn by accepting the game ball B into the opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005. An opening 2006 and a second prize winning opening 2007 are provided.

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a portion (part of the peripheral wall portion 2501) projecting forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and is driven into the game area 5a. A game ball B cannot enter the frame.

The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-shaped portion that protrudes from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat support portion 2503 protruding from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 . The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward until the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is aligned with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled to the game board 5 . Moreover, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening portion 1112 of the panel plate 1110 into which the center accessory 2500 is inserted. This peripheral wall part 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering the inside of the frame from the outside of the center accessory 2500 in a state assembled to the game board 5 .

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is formed thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502 ) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110 .

A plurality of support portions 2503 are partially provided on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501 . The support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501 . In addition, the support portion 2503 has an edge protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or in a linear shape, so that the support portion 2503 is inconspicuous. The support portion 2503 protrudes from the peripheral wall portion 2501 in a range from the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm). It is made to be inconspicuous from.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2511 which is open to the front side of the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in front view so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter. A warp exit 2512, which is open in the frame on the rear side of the front surface of the game panel 1100 so that the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 can be released, and the game ball B released from the warp exit 2512 are moved left and right. It is provided with a stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in a direction, and a stage cover 2515 that is provided so as to cover the upper side of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 146, etc.). The stage cover 2515 bounces back the game ball B bounced on the stage 2513 to the stage 2513 side, thereby preventing the game ball B from entering from outside the frame of the center accessory 2500 into the frame.

The stage 2513 of the center role 2500 has a curved shape with the central side in the left-right direction depressed, and is positioned directly above the first start port 2004 of the starter unit 2100, that is, the center role 2500 is positioned on the panel plate of the game panel 1100. It is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) so that when it is attached to 1110, the substantially central position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. This stage 2513 has a portion (central release portion 2513a) slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction and the lowest portion (side release portions 2513b) on both left and right sides, which are arranged in a forward direction. It is inclined so that it may become low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (central release portion 2513a) at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2513 is positioned directly above the first starting port 2004 of the starting port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central release portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, it is received in the first start port 2004 with a very high probability.

[5-8e-1. 1st Attacker Division]
The center accessory 2500 has a first attacker part 2520 having a variable winning opening 2003 and a first big winning opening 2006 above the warp entrance 2511 on the left outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall part 2501 . The first attacker part 2520 of the center accessory 2500 has a variable winning opening door 2521 that can open and close the variable winning opening 2003, and the game ball B passing through the gate 2002. According to the lottery result of the normal pattern drawn. A variable winning opening solenoid 2522 (see FIG. 160 etc.) that is energized to open and close the variable winning opening door 2521, a variable winning opening sensor 2526 that detects the game ball B received in the variable winning opening 2003,

In addition, the first attacker unit 2520 includes a first large winning opening door 2523 that opens and closes the first large winning opening 2006, and a game ball B to the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005. 1st large winning opening solenoid 2524 (see FIG. 160 etc.) that is energized according to the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by and the lottery result of the second special symbol to open and close the first large winning opening door 2523 , and a first big winning hole sensor 2525 for detecting the game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2006 .

Furthermore, the first attacker section 2520 is provided with a transparent plate-shaped center left front plate 2527 provided in front of the variable winning opening 2003, the first big winning opening 2006, and the left second guide passage 2532 (Fig. 137, etc.).

The center accessory 2500 is provided with a first attacker part 2520 above the warp entrance 2511 on the left outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall part 2501 . The first attacker section 2520 has a variable winning opening 2003 and a first big winning opening 2006 .

The variable winning opening 2003 is provided above the warp entrance 2511, in front of the outwardly extending flange portion 2502 on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, near the center in the vertical direction of the center accessory 2500. It is open to the left. In addition, the first big winning hole 2006 is opened upward with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B directly above the variable winning hole 2003 .

The variable winning opening door 2521 is rotatably supported on the lower end side around an axis extending back and forth, and can receive a game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003 by setting it in an upright state (normal state). can be closed to When the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 is energized, the variable winning opening door 2521 rotates so that the upper end moves to the left, and the variable winning opening 2003 is in a state (open state) in which the game ball B can be received. ). When the variable winning entrance door 2521 is open, the upper end side is higher than the lower end side, and since it is inclined to be lower rightward, the game ball B flowing down from above and in contact with the upper surface is pushed to the right. It is possible to guide to the variable winning opening 2003 on the other side.

The game ball B received in the variable winning opening 2003 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and after being detected by the variable winning opening sensor 2526, is delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and discharged downward. be done.

The first big prize winning opening door 2523 is in the form of a flat plate that is inclined downward to the left, and is provided so as to be able to move forward and backward from the front surface of the flange portion 2502 . In a normal state, the first big winning opening door 2523 protrudes forward from the flange portion 2502, making it impossible to accept the game ball B into the first big winning opening 2006.例文帳に追加In this state, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper side of the first large winning opening door 2523 is guided leftward by the inclination of the first large winning opening door 2523, and flows through the left second guide passage 2532. .

When the first big winning opening solenoid 2524 is energized, the front end of the first big winning opening door 2523 retreats rearward from the front surface of the flange portion 2502 to push the game ball B to the first big winning opening 2006. Acceptable. In this state, the game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2006 flows down in front of the flange part 2502, and is provided at a height between the first big winning hole 2006 and the variable winning hole 2003. After being detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2525 , it is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 right above the variable winning hole 2003 . After that, the game ball B is delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and ejected downward.

[5-8e-2. Left guidance passage group]
The center accessory 2500 is provided in front of the flange portion 2502 on the left outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and has a left guide passage group 2530 consisting of a plurality of (here, two) passages through which the game balls B can flow. there is In other words, between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the inner rail 1002, a left guide passage group 2530 consisting of a plurality of (here, two) passages through which the game balls B can flow is provided. Therefore, when the game ball B hits the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B circulates, the game ball B always passes through the left guide path group 2530 .

The left guide passage group 2530 is provided below and to the left of the upper end of the inner rail 1002 when assembled to the game board 5, and is provided at a portion at a height of about 2/3 from the bottom of the game area 5a. ing. The left guide passage group 2530 has a height approximately three times the diameter of the game ball B in the vertical direction. The left guide passage group 2530 is formed so that the game balls B in circulation can be visually recognized in good condition.

The left guide passage group 2530 is composed of a left first guide passage 2531 in contact with the inner rail 1002 and a left second guide passage 2532 provided on the right side of the left first guide passage 2531 . The left first guide passage 2531 and the left second guide passage 2532 are partitioned by a passage wall 2533 projecting forward from the flange portion 2502 .

A first big winning opening 2006 is provided downstream of the entrance of the left second guide passage 2532 . Therefore, when it is desired to receive the game ball B into the first big winning hole 2006 , it is necessary to perform a driving operation so that the game ball B enters the left second guide passage 2532 .

[5-8e-3. Right guidance passage group]
Further, the center accessory 2500 has a right guide passage group 2540 which is provided in the upper right corner and consists of a plurality of (here, two) passages through which the game balls B can circulate. When the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the right guide path group 2540 (the end of the upper right corner of the center role 2500) is aligned with the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the impact of the front component 1000). It is almost in contact with the right rail 1005 in the vicinity of the stopping portion 1006 , and is formed so that the game ball B struck to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 always passes through the right guide passage group 2540 .

The right guide passage group 2540 has a length in the vertical direction that is about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. This right guide passage group 2540 allows the game balls B in circulation to be visually recognized in good condition.

The right guide passage group 2540 is provided on the right outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and is provided on the right side of the right first guide passage 2541 away from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the right first guide passage 2541. and a right second guide passage 2542. The entrance of the right first guide passage 2541 and the entrance of the right second guide passage 2542 are separated left and right.

The first right guide passage 2541 extends rearward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 at a portion directly below the entrance, then extends downward, and then extends downward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 at a position on the left side directly below the entrance. After extending forward, the exit opens diagonally to the lower right. In addition, the right second guide passage 2542 extends downward from the entrance and then bends to the right, and the exit opens obliquely to the lower right while being aligned on the right side of the exit of the right first guide passage 2541. are doing. In other words, the right first guide passage 2541 and the right second guide passage 2542 are twisted so that the left and right cross each other.

The right guide path group 2540 is located above the space forming part 2550 (specific obstacle nail group 2700) in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. As shown in FIG. In addition, the right first guide passage 2541 has the right end of its entrance located directly below the lower end of the impinging portion 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the game balls B that hit the impinging portion 1006 It is formed to enter one guide passage 2541 .

The game ball B that has entered the right first guide passage 2541 is released to the side near the right peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and enters the first guide area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, which will be described later. On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the right second guide passage 2542 is released near the right rail 1005 and enters the second guide area 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 described later. Although the details will be described later, the game ball B that has entered the second guide area 2712 is more likely to be received by the first sub-out port 2021 provided downstream, so the right second guide passage 2542 When the game ball B is entered, it is more likely to be accepted by the first sub-out port 2021 than when it is entered into the right first guide passage 2541 .

This right guide passage group 2540 is provided with a circulation detection sensor 2543 capable of detecting the game ball B that is circulating in the right first guide passage 2541 (see FIG. 144). As a result, for example, when the number of game balls B detected by the circulation detection sensor 2543 per hour is less than a predetermined number in a game situation in which the player is forced to hit to the right, the game situation can be enjoyed more. In order to make it so, it is possible to prompt "right hitting" or to instruct the hitting strength for avoiding acceptance to the first sub-out port 2021 by entering the right second guide passage 2542. becomes.

[5-8e-4. Space forming part]
The center accessory 2500 includes a space forming portion 2550 provided below the right guide passage group 2540 and a second attacker portion 2560 provided below the space forming portion 2550 (see FIG. 147, etc.). ). The space forming portion 2550 is provided between the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the right rail 1005, and is formed at a height approximately half of the total height of the game area 5a. The second attacker section 2560 has a second big winning opening 2007 and a first sub-out opening 2021 and is provided at the lower right corner of the center accessory 2500 .

In the space forming portion 2550 , the flange portion 2502 extending rightward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends to a position close to the right rail 1005 when the game board 5 is assembled. The space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500 includes a right wall portion 2551 protruding forward from the right side of the flange portion 2502, and a portion below the space forming portion 2550 in the peripheral wall portion 2501 protruding forward from the flange portion 2502. It has a guide wall portion 2552 extending rightward and an opening 2553 penetrating the flange portion 2502 in the front-rear direction at a portion between the right wall portion 2551 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552. ing.

The right wall portion 2551 extends along the right rail 1005 so as to form a slight gap with the right rail 1005 when the game board 5 is assembled. Further, the right wall portion 2551 is provided with a notch portion 2551a penetrating left and right in the vicinity of the upper portion thereof. The guide wall portion 2552 is provided so that a space of about three times the diameter of the game ball B is formed in the horizontal direction between the lower end (right end) and the right wall portion 2551 .

The opening 2553 extends vertically over substantially the entire height of the space forming portion 2550 . The opening 2553 has a side closer to the peripheral wall 2501 and the guide wall 2552 at a constant distance from the peripheral wall 2501, and a side closer to the right wall 2551 moves away from the right wall 2551 downward. That is, in the space forming portion 2550 , the side of the flange portion 2502 close to the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552 extends vertically with a constant width to the right from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552 . The side close to the right wall portion 2551 of , extends vertically so as to widen leftward as it goes downward.

When the game board 5 is assembled, some of the plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the front surface of the game panel 1100 are inserted through the opening 2553 from behind. The plurality of obstructing nails N inserted through the opening 2553 are a specific obstructing nail group 2700 implanted in a specific gauge arrangement, which will be described later in detail. That is, the space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500 forms a space in which the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is arranged.

The space forming portion 2550 bulges forward from the flange portion 2502 and extends left and right, and has a plurality of rear projections 2554 spaced apart in the front-rear direction. The rear projections 2554 are provided at positions corresponding to a plurality of front projections 2555d of the center right front plate 2555, which will be described later, so that the front-rear direction is staggered. As a result, the game ball B flowing down in front of the flange portion 2502 in the space forming portion 2550 can be flowed down while meandering in the front-rear direction by the front ridge portion 2555d and the rear ridge portion 2554.

Furthermore, the space forming portion 2550 includes a transparent plate-like center right front plate 2555 that covers the area from the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the front end of the right wall portion 2551, and a translucent plate attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555. and a center right front plate seal 2556 (see FIG. 149, etc.). The center right front plate 2555 extends upward to the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 and closes the front side of the right guide passage group 2540 .

The center right front plate 2555 has a plurality of first accommodation portions 2555a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and each accommodates the heads of a plurality of obstacle nails N (comb nail portion 2701), and one obstacle that penetrates in the front-rear direction. A second accommodating portion 2555b for accommodating the head of the nail N, a peeling hole 2555c penetrating back and forth at a portion where the center right front plate seal 2556 is affixed, and bulging rearward from the rear surface and extending left and right. and a plurality of front ridges 2555d spaced apart in the front-rear direction. The center right front plate 2555 is attached so that it cannot be removed from the center role 2500 unless the center role 2500 is removed from the game panel 1100 .

The first accommodating portion 2555a is provided in the shape of an elongated hole that forms a certain gap with respect to the peripheral line surrounding and in contact with the heads of the plurality of obstructing nails N (interlocking nail portion 2701) that are accommodated. It is In this embodiment, one first accommodating portion 2555a is formed to have a size to accommodate the heads of two obstructing nails N, and the centers of the first accommodating portions 2555a are different from the centers of the obstructing nails N. It is eccentric. The second accommodating portion 2555b is formed concentrically with the obstructing nail N. As shown in FIG. The first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b are provided at portions corresponding to respective obstructing nails N of a specific obstructing nail group 2700, which will be described later.

The gap between the front end (head) of the obstructing nail N in the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b is in the range of 1 mm to 3 mm, preferably 1.5 mm to 2.5 mm. It is desirable to be within the range of If the gap is smaller than this range, when the center right front plate 2555 expands and contracts due to changes in the environment, the obstacle nail N may be affected and the obstacle nail N may be bent. This is because it becomes difficult to accommodate the front end of the obstructing nail N in the portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b, which is troublesome and may increase the cost. Further, if the gap is larger than this range, the degree of bending of the obstructing nail N when it is bent due to the impact caused by the contact of the game ball B, etc., exceeds the allowable range, making it difficult to circulate the game ball B in the intended flow. This is because there is a risk that

As a result, since it is possible to restrict the movement of the head of the obstructing nail N housed in the first housing portion 2555a and the second housing portion 2555b, the impact caused by the distribution (abutment) of the game ball B is reduced. It is possible to suppress deformation (bending) of the obstacle nail N due to external impact or the like, and it is possible to reduce the game ball B from flowing down in an unintended flow. The game ball B can be circulated in a stable state in the obstacle nail group 2700, the effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be exhibited continuously, and the movement of the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700. can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, deformation of the obstacle nail N can be suppressed by the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555. The labor required for maintenance of the obstacle nail N can be reduced.

Also, in the state assembled to the game board 5, the front sides of the first housing portion 2555a and the second housing portion 2555b are closed by the center right front plate seal 2556 attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555. The obstructing nail N whose head is stored in the first storage portion 2555a or the second storage portion 2555b cannot be touched from the front. As a result, it is possible to avoid bending the obstructing nail N due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or intentionally bending the obstructing nail N. Further, when the obstacle nail N whose head is accommodated in the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b through the center right front plate seal 2556 is bent, the trace remains on the center right front plate seal 2556, It is possible to make it easier to notice the failure of the obstructing nail N.

With the center right front plate seal 2556 attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, the stripping hole 2555c is formed by inserting a rod-shaped member such as a wire from the rear side, and using the rod-shaped member, removes the center right front plate seal 2556 from the rear. is pushed forward, a part of the center right front plate seal 2556 can be rolled up forward from the center right front plate 2555 . Then, the center right front plate seal 2556 can be easily removed (peeled off) from the center right front plate 2555 by pulling the curled portion of the center right front plate seal 2556 by an operator. As a result, it is possible to improve workability such as re-sticking of the center right front plate seal 2556 at the time of manufacturing and sorting at the time of disposal.

This peeling hole 2555c is provided in front of a triangular portion surrounded by the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501, the guide wall portion 2552, and the closing wall portion 2566 when the game board 5 is assembled. Through 2555c, it is possible to prevent a linear fraudulent tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the rear side of the game panel 1100 or the part where the game ball B circulates, thereby preventing fraudulent acts. .

In addition, since the peeling hole 2555c is hidden from the front by attaching the center right front plate seal 2556 to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, deterioration of the appearance due to the peeling hole 2555c can be suppressed, and the player can On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the peeling hole 2555c, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the peeling hole 2555c.

The plurality of front projections 2555 d are provided at positions corresponding to the plurality of rear projections 2554 protruding from the flange portion 2502 . The front ridges 2555d are provided so as to alternate in the vertical direction with respect to the rear ridges 2554. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B flowing down in front of the flange portion 2502 in the space forming portion 2550 can be flowed down while meandering in the front-rear direction by the front ridge portion 2555d and the rear ridge portion 2554.

[5-8e-5. Second Attacker Section]
The second attacker part 2560 of the center accessory 2500 consists of a second big prize winning opening 2007 that is elongated in the horizontal direction and that opens upward, and a first sub-out opening 2021 that is provided on the right side of the second big winning opening 2007. and have The second big prize winning opening 2007 has a right end located at a portion slightly less than twice the diameter of the game ball B from the right end (lower end) of the guide wall portion 2552 to the right, and the left end has a full width in the game area 5a. It is located about 1/3 from the right of . The second big prize winning opening 2007 is provided at a position higher than the upper end of the stage cover 2515 . The right wall of the first sub-out port 2021 is continuous with the right wall portion 2551 of the space forming portion 2550 .

In addition, the second attacker part 2560 can open and close the second big winning hole 2007 by moving forward and backward with the second big winning hole sensor 2561 that detects the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007. A flat plate-like second large winning opening door 2562 that is closed to the left and inclined to be lower to the left, and the reception of the game ball B to the first start opening 2004 and the second start opening 2005. It has a second large winning opening solenoid 2563 which is energized according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol to open and close the second large winning opening door 2562. - 特許庁

In addition, the second attacker part 2560 is provided above the second big winning opening door 2562 in front of the flange part 2502, and the game ball B can flow to the left. A right release passage 2565 extending downward from the left end of the attacker passage 2564 on the left side and capable of releasing the game ball B downward, and a wall of the ceiling of the attacker passage 2564 projecting forward from the flange portion 2502 and a closing wall portion 2566 forming a part of the guide wall portion 2552 and extending leftward from the lower end of the guide wall portion 2552 to the peripheral wall portion 2501 .

The attacker path 2564 extends to the left with a height slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B, and the ceiling wall is composed of a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the closing wall portion 2566. In addition, the wall of the floor is composed of the second big winning entrance door 2562 . In this attacker passage 2564, a plurality of rear projections 2564a bulging forward and extending in the vertical direction are provided at intervals in the left-right direction at the portion of the attacker passage 2564 in the flange portion 2502. , in the part of the attacker passage 2564 in the center lower right front plate 2572 to be described later, it bulges rearward and extends in the vertical direction, and is spaced in the left and right direction so as to alternate with the rear ridges 2564a. A plurality of ridges (not shown) are provided. Due to the plurality of front and rear ridges 2564a, the game ball B can be circulated leftward while meandering in the front-rear direction in the attacker passage 2564, and the circulation speed can be suppressed.

The right release passage 2565 extends vertically downward with a lateral width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B. Right discharge passage 2565 has an exit at a height between stage 2513 and the upper end of stage cover 2515 . The right discharge passage 2565 has a right wall formed by the attacker left wall portion 2568 and a left wall formed by a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501 .

Furthermore, the second attacker part 2560 protrudes forward from the flange part 2502 on the right side of the second large prize winning opening door 2562 and is higher than the right end of the second large winning opening door 2562 and slightly higher than the right end of the closing wall part 2566. An attacker right wall portion 2567 extending downward from a lower position, and a position lower than the left end of the second large prize winning port door 2562 protruding forward from the flange portion 2502 on the left side of the second large prize winning port door 2562 and a right shelf portion 2569 extending downward from the lower end of the attacker right wall portion 2567 and the right shelf portion 2569. A left shelf portion 2570 extending downward to the right from near the upper end of the attacker left wall portion 2568 so as to form a gap, and a left shelf portion 2570 provided in the center between the left shelf portion 2570 and the right shelf portion 2569 . and a middle wall portion 2571 that

The second big prize winning opening 2007 is defined in the lateral direction by the attacker right wall portion 2567 and the attacker left wall portion 2568 . That is, the lateral width between the attacker right wall portion 2567 and the attacker left wall portion 2568 is the lateral width of the second prize winning opening 2007 . Incidentally, in this embodiment, the width in the left-right direction of the second big winning opening 2007 is 131 mm.

The attacker left wall portion 2568 extends downward from the lower end of the attacker right wall portion 2567, and the lower end is bent short to the right. When the attacker left wall portion 2568 is assembled on the game board 5, the upper end of the second standing wall portion 2415 of the lower right unit 2400 is close to the lower end, making it impossible for the game ball B to come and go between the left and right sides. there is The lower ends of the right shelf portion 2569 and the left shelf portion 2570 are positioned above the lower end of the attacker left wall portion 2568 . Between the lower end portion of the right shelf portion 2569 and the middle wall portion 2571 and between the lower end portion of the left shelf portion 2570 and the middle wall portion 2571, the second big winning opening sensor 2561 is provided. The middle wall portion 2571 is positioned directly above the lower right middle decorative portion 2433 of the lower right unit 2400 when assembled to the game board 5 .

The second attacker part 2560 moves in front of the attacker passage 2564, the right discharge passage 2565, and the space formed by the attacker right wall portion 2567, the attacker left wall portion 2568, the right shelf portion 2569, and the left shelf portion 2570. It further has a closed transparent plate-like central lower right front plate 2572 (see FIG. 137 and the like).

In the normal state, the second attacker part 2560 projects forward from the front end of the second large winning opening door 2562 from the front surface of the flange part 2502, and cannot receive the game ball B to the second large winning opening 2007. is closed to The second big prize winning opening door 2562 which openably closes the second big winning opening 2007 is formed in a flat plate shape extending left and right and front and rear, so that it is difficult to see when viewed from the front. , it is difficult to determine the open/closed state.

In this normal state, the game ball B struck to the right side of the center accessory 2500 and flowed down the right guide path group 2540 and the space forming part 2550 (specific obstacle nail group 2700) is guided by the guide wall part 2552 and the right wall. 2551 to the second attacker portion 2560 side. At this time, the game ball B flowing down along the right wall portion 2551 is received by the first sub-out port 2021 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and discharged downward.

The game ball B, which was not accepted by the first sub-out port 2021 and flowed down on the second big prize winning port door 2562, is meandered in the front-rear direction by the plurality of front and rear ridges 2564a, and enters the attacker passage 2564. After rolling to the left, it enters into the right discharge passage 2565 from the left end of the second big prize door 2562, and is returned from the lower end (exit) of the right discharge passage 2565 into the game area 5a.

The second attacker part 2560 of the center accessory 2500 is positioned directly above the lower right unit 2400 when assembled on the game board 5, and is the attacker left wall constituting the right wall of the right release passage 2565. The upper end of the second standing wall portion 2415 of the lower right unit 2400 is close to the lower end of the portion 2568 . As a result, between the right release passage 2565 side and the right side of the second standing wall portion 2415, the movement of the game ball B is blocked. In other words, an area (pseudo-game area 2010) that cannot be entered from the right release passage 2565 or the game area 5a is formed to the right of the second standing wall portion 2415.

In other words, a pseudo-game area partitioned by the front face of the game panel 1100, the delimiter 2410 of the lower right unit 2400, and the attacker left wall 2568, right shelf 2569 and left shelf 2570 in the second attacker part 2560. 2010 is formed. This pseudo-game area 2010 allows only the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007 to circulate.

Then, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, the second big winning port solenoid 2563 When the power is turned on, the second large prize winning opening door 2562 retreats, and the second large winning prize opening 2007 becomes ready to receive the game ball B. At this time, the game ball B flowing through the attacker passage 2564 and the game ball B flowing down from the space forming section 2550 to the second big prize opening 2007 are accepted by the second big prize opening 2007 .

The game ball B received in the second large winning opening 2007 rolls on the right shelf 2569 or the left shelf 2570, is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2561, and is released into the pseudo game area 2010 below. It will be done. In this second attacker part 2560, since two second big winning hole sensors 2561 are arranged on the left and right, even if many game balls B are received in the second big winning hole 2007 in a short time, they are not delayed. can be detected without

According to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, the center right front plate 2555 is provided with the first storage portion 2555a for storing the heads of the plurality of obstacle nails N of each nail group 2701 constituting the specific obstacle nail group 2700. is provided, it is possible to limit the movement of the head of the obstacle nail N, and the obstacle nail N is deformed by the impact caused by the circulation (contact) of the game ball B or the impact from the outside. (bending) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the unintended flow down of the game ball B, and the game ball B can be circulated in a stable state in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the effects of the specific obstacle nail group 2700. can be exhibited continuously, and the movement of the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, according to the center accessory 2500, the second large prize winning port door 2562 that openably closes the second large prize winning port 2007 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction. Since the second large prize winning port 2007 is opened and closed by moving the winning prize port door 2562 back and forth, the second large prize winning port door 2562 can be made difficult to see when viewed from the front. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the big prize winning opening 2007 . As a result, it is possible to make the pseudo big winning gate 2402 (pseudo big winning gate door 2405) which is provided below the second big winning gate 2007 relatively conspicuous, so that the player's interest in the virtual big winning gate 2402 can be increased. can be strongly attracted to, and a strong illusion can be made as if the pseudo big prize mouth 2402 is a real big prize mouth. Therefore, if the pachinko machine is provided with a large prize winning opening that has never been seen before, it is possible to make the player feel an illusion, to give a strong impact to the player, and to make the player enjoy the game. This pachinko machine 1 can be made to be positively selected as the pachinko machine to be played, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced.

Furthermore, according to the center accessory 2500, since the supporting portion 2503 protruding inward is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. As a result, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the outside of the part of the peripheral wall 2501 where the support part 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall 2501 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the strength of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the injection mold without being deformed.

In addition, since the transparent support portion 2503 protrudes short from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is partially provided on the entire periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is provided behind the back. It is possible to reduce hindrance to the visibility of the decorative body of the unit 3000, the effect image of the effect display device 1600, and the like.

Furthermore, by providing the support portion 2503, the support portion 2503 in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) has a portion where the flange portion 2502 projecting outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided. In the near portion, the obstacle nail N can be implanted at a position as close to the peripheral wall portion 2501 as possible. As a result, the game area of the plurality of obstacle nails N can be made as wide as possible in the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to enjoy the original game.

In addition, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has the same shape as the inner peripheral shape of the opening portion 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. is provided on substantially the same surface as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the support part 2503 can be made inconspicuous to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel plate 1110. be able to.

Furthermore, since the support part 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center accessory 2500, compared to the case where the support part 2503 is provided over the entire circumference, the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 can be further expanded. It can be widened, and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided in the rear can be made more visible. In other words, if the non-distribution area (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 is to be made to look larger, the support portion 2503 is provided along a portion of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. You can do it. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided behind in a front view.

[5-8f. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2600 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The gate member 2600 of the front unit 2000 is arranged on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a and attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. FIG. More specifically, the gate member 2600 is provided at a position below the variable prize winning opening 2003 of the center accessory 2500 slightly lower than the center skein in the vertical direction of the game area 5a. Right above the gate member 2600, the exit of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center accessory 2500 is arranged. Also, at the lower right of the gate member 2600, the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 opens toward the left.

The gate member 2600 includes a gate 2002 for performing a lottery of normal symbols for opening and closing the variable winning opening 2003 by passing the game ball B, and a gate sensor 2601 for detecting that the game ball B has passed through the gate 2002. have. In this embodiment, the detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2601 is the gate 2002 .

[5-8g. Specified obstacle nail group]
Next, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 among the plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The specific obstacle nail group 2700 is provided on the upstream side of the second big winning opening 2007 in the right part of the game area 5a. The specific obstacle nail group 2700 of this embodiment is provided in the space formed by the space forming part 2550 of the center accessory 2500 .

The specific obstacle nail group 2700 has a plurality of interlocking nail parts 2701 in which a plurality of interfering nails N arranged adjacent to each other form one group, and the plurality of interlocking nail parts 2701 are one game ball each other. They are arranged at intervals that allow them to pass through B. In this embodiment, the interlocking nail portion 2701 is composed of two obstructing nails N. As shown in FIG.

The specific obstacle nail group 2700 is provided so that portions (gap portions) between a plurality of interlocking nail portions 2701 arranged at intervals are arranged in a predetermined pattern. The game ball B can be guided by the part 2701 . Thus, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 forms a guiding area 2710 capable of guiding the game ball B from a specific position to a desired position with a predetermined probability.

The guide area 2710 formed by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B to a desired position with a predetermined probability. The guiding area 2710 is composed of a first guiding area 2711 and a second guiding area 2712 provided on the right side of the first guiding area 2711 . The first guide area 2711 can guide the game ball B from the exit of the right first guide passage 2541 in the right guide passage group 2540 to the position on the left side from the center of the guide wall portion 2552 . The second guide area 2712 can guide the game ball B from the exit of the right second guide path 2542 in the right guide path group 2540 to the position of the right part from the center of the guide wall 2552 .

A first guide region 2711 and a second guide region 2712 formed by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 are provided in an arc shape such that the center in the vertical direction bulges rightward. More specifically, in the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712, in a plurality of nail pegs 2701 forming the outer side of the arc, a straight line connecting the pegs 2701 near the upper end and near the lower end. , the arc formed by the plurality of nail pegs 2701 forming the inner side of the arc is provided so as to be in contact therewith. That is, the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712 are formed so that the width in the left-right direction is the distance of two game balls B. As shown in FIG. Since the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712 extend in an arc shape, the portion extending vertically is reduced, making it easier for the game ball B to meander in the left-right direction.

In addition, the plurality of nail pegs 2701 that form the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712 are located below the two pegs 2701 that are spaced apart from each other to the left and right. 2701 is provided to the right of the center between the upper two nail sets 2701 (the side farther from the center of the arc). This makes it difficult for the game ball B to move outward from each of the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712 .

Further, in the plurality of nail pegs 2701 forming the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712, the gaps between the pegs 2701 arranged in a circular arc are separated from each other. They are provided so as to be positioned higher toward the right column. In other words, in the plurality of nail pegs 2701 forming the left and right walls of the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712, the two pegs 2701 paired in the left-right direction have the right The peg part 2701 is arranged to be higher. This makes it easier for the game ball B to meander in the left-right direction.

A guidance area 2710 formed by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B downward with a sense of meandering in the left-right direction by means of a plurality of interlocking nail portions 2701 arranged at intervals. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and made slower than in the area where the obstacle nail N is planted in a general arrangement, and the falling time of the game ball B to the predetermined position ( time of arrival) can be delayed. In addition, by forming a set of two obstacle nails N in the nail assembly part 2701, it is possible to increase the number of collisions between the obstacle nail N and the game ball B as compared with the case where the obstacle nail N is configured with one obstacle nail N. The effect of delaying the fall of ball B is enhanced.

In the guiding area 2710, since the plurality of nail parts 2701 are arranged with intervals in the vertical direction, the game ball B being guided moves to the left outer side or the right outer side through the part of the interval. Sometimes I put it away. That is, the game ball B moves from the first guide area 2711 to the second guide area 2712, moves from the second guide area 2712 to the first guide area 2711, or moves left outside from the first guide area 2711. or move to the right outside from the second guidance area 2712 .

The game ball B guided to the lower end by the first guiding region 2711 and the second guiding region 2712 comes into contact with the guiding wall portion 2552, and is located between the guiding wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 (the second big prize On the entrance door 2562, or inside the second prize winning entrance 2007).

The game ball B that has moved to the left outside from the first guide area 2711 passes through a plurality of protrusions 2554 provided on the flange portion 2502 between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. And, due to a plurality of front projections 2555d provided on the center right front plate 2555, the water flows down while meandering in the front-rear direction. Then, it comes into contact with the guiding wall portion 2552 and flows down between the guiding wall portion 2552 and the attacker's right wall portion 2567 (on the second big winning opening door 2562 or inside the second big winning opening 2007). .

The game ball B, which has moved to the right outside from the second guide area 2712, passes between the specific obstruction nail group 2700 and the right wall portion 2551, after a plurality of ridges 2554 provided on the flange portion 2502 and the center right front plate. Due to a plurality of front ridges 2555d provided on 2555, the water flows down while meandering in the front-rear direction. Then, it flows down to the first sub-out port 2021 or between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker's right wall portion 2567 (on the second big winning gate door 2562 or inside the second big winning gate 2007).

As a result, when the game ball B enters the right second guide passage 2542 in the right guide passage group 2540, it flows through the second guide area 2712, and when the game ball B moves from the second guide area 2712 to the right outside, the There is a possibility that it will be accepted by one sub-out port 2021 . That is, in the present embodiment, in the right guide path group 2540, the right second guide path 2542 has a higher probability of receiving the game ball B into the first sub-out port 2021 than the right first guide path 2541. . Therefore, it is possible for the player to perform a hitting operation such that the game ball B enters the right first guide passage 2541 . In other words, when striking to the right, hitting hard makes it easier for the game ball B to enter the right first guide passage 2541 near the impinging portion 1006, so it is necessary to hit the game ball B with fine adjustment. It is possible to easily perform the driving operation.

By the way, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, if the interfering nail N alone constitutes the interlocking nail portion, the obstacle nail N is paired to form a gap through which the game ball B can pass. Other obstructing nails N become obstructing nails N in all directions forming a gap with the obstructing nail N as the center. In other words, one obstacle nail N is in charge of forming gaps in all directions. As a result, when the obstacle nail N is bent, the gap widens in one direction and narrows in the opposite direction, so that the deformation of one obstacle nail N greatly changes the guiding probability of the game ball B by the guiding area 2710.例文帳に追加As a result, it becomes difficult to circulate the game balls B in a stable state. In addition, when the obstacle nail N is bent, it is necessary to adjust the obstacle nail N provided in all directions so that the gap is a desired distance, which requires a great deal of time and effort for maintenance. becomes.

On the other hand, if the interfering nail portion 2701 is composed of a plurality of obstructing nails N as in this embodiment, the direction of the interfering nail N adjacent to a certain interfering nail N in the interfering nail portion 2701 is as follows. Since adjacent obstructing nails N are in charge of forming the gap, the directions in which a certain (single) obstructing nail N is in charge of forming the gap can be limited to only a part of the directions. can reduce the number of obstructing nails N that form pairs. As a result, even if one obstructing nail N of the nail group 2701 is bent, the area of the gap affected is small, so that the change in the probability of guiding the game ball B by the guiding area 2710 can be suppressed. In addition, when a certain obstructing nail N is bent, it is sufficient to adjust the gap to the obstructing nail N in some directions so as to have a desired distance, which is easier to maintain than when adjusting the gaps in all directions. Such time and effort can be reduced.

When the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of this embodiment is assembled on the game board 5, the head of the obstacle nail N is inserted into the first accommodation portion 2555a or the second accommodation portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 and accommodated. The interlocking nail portion 2701 composed of a plurality of obstructing nails N is housed in the first housing portion 2555a so as to surround the heads thereof.

As a result, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the obstacle nail N is accommodated in the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, thereby restricting the movement of the head portion of the obstacle nail N. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deformation (bending) of the obstacle nail N due to an impact due to the circulation (abutment) of the game ball B or an impact from the outside. It is possible to reduce the unintended flow of B, and it is possible to circulate the game ball B in a stable state in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is sustained. The movement of the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, as described above, the head of the obstacle nail N is accommodated in the first accommodation portion 2555a or the second accommodation portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, thereby preventing the deformation of the obstacle nail N. Since it can be suppressed, it is possible to reduce the labor required for the maintenance of the obstacle nail N on the side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b that accommodate the heads of the obstacle nails N are attached to the center right front plate seal 2556 attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555. , the obstacle nail N cannot be touched from the front. As a result, it is possible to avoid bending the obstructing nail N due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or intentionally bending the obstructing nail N. Further, when the obstructing nail N of the specific obstructing nail group 2700 is bent from the front, its trace remains on the center right front plate seal 2556, so that the failure of the obstructing nail N can be easily noticed.

Further, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 has a function of distributing the inflowing game balls B to either the first sub-out port 2021 or the second prize winning port 2007 . This function is an important function that influences the payout rate. No nail adjustment is allowed in the game hall. Therefore, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of this embodiment, as described above, the center right front plate 2555 cannot be removed unless the center accessory 2500 is removed from the game panel 1100, and the center right front plate 2555 and the center Since the right front plate seal 2556 covers the front side of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, it is impossible to perform any nail adjustment.

In the above-described embodiment, the plural interfering nail portions 2701 forming the specific interfering nail group 2700 are configured by two interfering nails N. The obstacle nail N described above may be used. When the interlocking nail portion 2701 is composed of three or more obstacle nails N, the plurality of obstacle nails N may be arranged in a line, or may be arranged in a polygonal shape such as a triangle, quadrangle, pentagon, or hexagon. Also good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the guidance region 2710 by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is composed of two regions, the first guidance region 2711 and the second guidance region 2712, but is not limited to this. , one, or three or more regions.

According to the specific obstruction nail group 2700 of the present embodiment, since it is possible to suppress and delay the flow speed of the game ball B, for example, in the second attacker section 2560 provided downstream, According to the lottery result or the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, "small hit"), the second big winning opening 2007 is opened and closed in a short time so that the game ball B can be accepted. Even if the player tries to hit the game ball B so that it reaches the second big winning hole 2007 at the timing when it can be accepted, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 causes the game ball B to reach the second big winning hole 2007 at the desired timing. It is possible to make it difficult to reach the ball, and it is possible to make the timing of hitting the game ball B difficult. As a result, the degree of difficulty can be given to the operation of hitting the game ball B, so that the player can be entertained with a rewarding game, and the decline in interest can be suppressed. Further, in the above case, it is possible to make it difficult to accept the game ball B into the second big winning hole 2007, so that an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be suppressed.

Further, according to the specific obstruction nail group 2700, since the circulation speed of the game ball B is suppressed by planting a plurality of obstruction nails N, the configuration of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be compared with the case of being composed of a synthetic resin member. cost can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

[5-8h. Pseudo-game area]
Next, the pseudo game area 2010 formed in front of the game panel 1100 by the front unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 147 and the like. The pseudo-game area 2010 is independent of the game area 5a, and is an area where only specific game balls B can circulate. More specifically, the pseudo game area 2010 is an area in which only the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007 (a so-called hit ball that no longer affects the game) can circulate. This pseudo-game area 2010 is provided on the same plane as the game area 5a.

The pseudo-game area 2010 consists of a portion where the front surface of a flat-plate-shaped game panel 1100 having a game area 5a provided in front thereof is exposed, and a plurality of obstacles planted in the exposed portions of the game panel 1100. Pseudo big winning that can be opened and closed according to the lottery result of the first special pattern and the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn by receiving the nail N and the game ball B to the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005. It has an opening 2402 and a pseudo-out opening 2404 for discharging the game ball B not received in the pseudo-big winning opening 2402 to the rear of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁In other words, the pseudo game area 2010 has a plurality of obstacle nails N, a pseudo big prize winning port 2402 as a receiving port capable of receiving the game ball B, and a pseudo out port 2404 for discharging the game ball B, It has a configuration similar to that in the game area 5a.

The pseudo game area 2010 is formed by the game panel 1100, the delimiter 2410 of the lower right unit 2400, and the second attacker part 2560 of the center accessory 2500. The pseudo-game area 2010 is partitioned at the upper end by the right shelf 2569 , the left shelf 2570 and the middle wall 2571 of the second attacker part 2560 . The pseudo game area 2010 is partitioned at the right end by the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the first vertical wall 2412 of the partition 2410 . The left end of the pseudo-game area 2010 is divided by the attacker left wall portion 2568 of the second attacker portion 2560, the second vertical wall portion 2415 of the dividing portion 2410, the left horizontal wall portion 2417, the inclined wall portion 2418, and the third vertical wall portion 2419. ing. The lower end of the pseudo-game area 2010 is separated by the bottom wall portion 2411 of the partition portion 2410 .

In the simulated game area 2010, the front surface of the game panel 1100 is exposed forward between the second attacker part 2560 and the simulated big winning opening 2402, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in this part.

The second big winning opening 2007 as a supply source of game balls B to the pseudo game area 2010 is opened and closed by the second big winning opening door 2562 . Since the second large prize winning opening door 2562 is formed in a flat plate shape that advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, the second large winning prize opening door 2562 is difficult to see from the player side. The pseudo-game area 2010 is provided on the same plane as the game area 5a, and the parts (partitioning part 2410, the attacker left wall part 2568 of the center accessory 2500, etc.) partitioned from the game area 5a are made transparent. In addition, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the exposed portion of the game panel 1100, the player will feel that the simulated game area 2010 is part of the game area 5a. can be an illusion.

The pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 provided in the pseudo game area 2010 is formed longer in the horizontal direction than the second big winning prize opening 2007 provided above. In this embodiment, the lateral size of the second big prize winning opening 2007 is 131 mm, and the lateral size of the pseudo big winning prize opening 2402 is 170 mm. Since the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is open forward, the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 that can open and close the pseudo big winning opening 2402 closes the pseudo big winning opening 2402 (normally ), the surface faces forward, and the pseudo big winning door 2405 stands out from the player.

For this reason, when the player looks at the pachinko machine 1, the pseudo-big prize hole 2402 is more conspicuous than the second big prize hole 2007. It is possible to make the player think that the game is provided with an unusually large prize winning opening, and to strongly attract the player's interest.

In the pseudo game area 2010 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the pseudo big winning door 2405 is upright, and the pseudo big winning door 2402 makes the game ball B unacceptable. Closed. In addition, in a normal state, the second big prize winning port 2007 is closed by the second big winning prize port door 2562, so the game is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 and flows down to the second big prize winning port door 2562. The ball B rolls to the left on the second big prize gate door 2562, passes through the right release passage 2565, and is released into the game area 5a. Therefore, in a normal state, the game ball B does not circulate within the pseudo-game area 2010 .

From the normal state, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, the lottery result of the second special symbol, etc., the second When the large winning prize opening door 2562 retreats, it becomes possible to receive the game ball B into the second large winning prize opening 2007 . In this state, when the game ball B is received in the second big winning hole 2007 , the game ball B is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2561 and supplied to the pseudo game area 2010 .

Then, the game ball B supplied to the simulated game area 2010 flows down while coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the front exposed portion of the game panel 1100 . At this time, if the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is closed by the pseudo big winning opening door 2405, the game ball B supplied into the pseudo game area 2010 passes through the front of the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 and reaches the bottom. After flowing down on the wall portion 2411 and rolling leftward along the slope of the bottom wall portion 2411, the third vertical wall portion 2419 prevents further leftward rolling and rolls forward at that portion. A pseudo-out port 2404 that is open to the outside is discharged to the rear of the game panel 1100 . In other words, it is discharged from the pseudo-game area 2010 .

Since the pseudo-out port 2404 of the pseudo-game area 2010 is provided close to the right side of the out-port 1008, the game ball B received in the pseudo-out port 2404 will appear to the player as if it were the out port 1008. can give the illusion of being accepted by Thereby, it is possible to give the illusion that the pseudo-game area 2010 is part of the game area 5a.

Therefore, the game in which the game ball B passes in front of the pseudo big winning hole 2402 in the pseudo game area 2010 is the same as the game in which the game ball B passes through the big winning hole in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to disappoint the player by not accepting the game ball B into the pseudo big winning hole 2402.例文帳に追加On the other hand, since the game ball B accepted in the second large prize winning port 2007 circulates in the pseudo game area 2010, even if the game ball B is not accepted in the pseudo large prize winning port 2402, the second large prize winning port 2007 A predetermined number of game balls B are paid out by acceptance. As a result, the game ball B is paid out even though the game ball B has not been received in the pseudo big winning opening 2402, so that the player can be made to feel that he or she has won the game, and the player is entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest.

By the way, when the pseudo big prize winning port 2402 is opened and closed, the large pseudo big prize winning port door 2405 conspicuous from the front opens and closes, so the player instantly notices that the pseudo big prize winning port 2402 can be received. can let As a result, the game ball B can be hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called “right hitting”) so that the game ball B can be received in the pseudo big winning opening 2402 . Further, the pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 may be opened and closed as a kind of advance notice, or the pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 may be opened and closed as one of the signals for instructing the player to hit to the right. Since this pseudo big prize winning slot 2402 is entered only when the player hits to the right, it is intuitively easy for the player to understand.

For this reason, for example, before the second big winning hole 2007 becomes ready for acceptance, the pseudo big winning hole 2402 may be opened and closed, and the player may be made to "right-handed". . As a result, at the timing when the second large prize winning port 2007 becomes acceptable, the "right-handed" game ball B can easily reach the second large prize winning port 2007, so that the player can be more entertained. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Then, when the second big winning hole 2007 opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern during the "jackpot" game, if the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is also opened and closed, many game balls B are thrown through the second big winning hole 2007 in a short time. It can be supplied into the pseudo-game area 2010, and by circulating many game balls B in the pseudo-game area 2010, the player can enjoy the movement and the game of the game ball B in the pseudo-game area 2010. can let At this time, when the pseudo big prize winning port 2402 opens and closes, the game ball B is received in the large pseudo big prize winning port 2402, so that the player can be greatly entertained and the decline in the player's interest is suppressed. can be made

In this embodiment, the pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 is formed to be larger in the horizontal direction than the second big winning prize opening 2007. A slanted wall portion 2418 is provided, and a game ball B passing between the right lateral wall portion 2414 and the left lateral wall portion 2417 (between the right slanted wall portion 2413 and the left slanted wall portion 2416) enters the pseudo big winning opening. 2402 is accepted. The distance between the right lateral wall portion 2414 and the left lateral wall portion 2417 is approximately half the distance of the second prize winning opening 2007 in the horizontal direction. Therefore, a plurality of game balls B accepted in the second large prize-winning port 2007 are collected in a narrow range and headed toward the pseudo-big prize-winning port 2402, so that the game balls B received in the second large prize-winning port 2007 The player can be given the illusion that a larger number of game balls B are accepted in the pseudo big winning hole 2402, and the player can be greatly entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

The pseudo big winning opening 2402 of the present embodiment does not pay out the game balls B by accepting the game balls B, or give a privilege to the player. Therefore, the pseudo big prize opening 2402 can be opened and closed in patterns not found in conventional pachinko machine big prize openings (for example, 337 time signature, minuet, waltz, bossa nova, swing, 8 beat, 16 beat, BGM, and predetermined patterns). The tempo of the music, etc.) can be opened and closed to entertain the player.

In addition, in the pseudo-game area 2010, a windmill W may be provided in addition to the obstacle nail N. By making the windmill W exist in the pseudo game area 2010, it becomes more realistic, and it becomes difficult to distinguish between the pseudo game area 2010 and the game area 5a.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls within the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B within the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147 and the like. In the state assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at both the left and right outer portions and the lower portion of the center accessory 2500. As shown in FIG. In addition, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300 .

First, on the left side of the center accessory 2500, a left guide passage group 2530, a gate 2002, and a side upper left unit 2300 are arranged with a gap from above, and between them and above the left guide passage group 2530 , a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted. A plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the left guide passage group 2530 are arranged so that game balls B are collected above the entrance of the left second guide passage 2532 . Thereby, when the game ball B is hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500, it can be distributed to the left second guide passage 2532 with a higher probability than the left first guide passage 2531. - 特許庁The game ball B that has circulated through the left second guide passage 2532 circulates downward while approaching the center accessory 2500, and flows down the left side of the variable winning opening 2003 with a high probability.

In the vicinity of the entrance in the left second guide passage 2532, there is provided a first large prize winning port 2006 which is normally closed by the first large prize winning port door 2523 so that it cannot be received. The game ball B that has entered into rolls on the first big winning opening door 2523 and flows down. Then, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, the first big winning port door 2523 is opened. When the game ball B enters the left second guide passage 2532 while retreating, it is accepted in the first big winning hole 2006 with a high probability.

The game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2006 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 even after being detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2525 provided below, and the back ball of the back unit 3000 is guided. It is discharged downward through the unit 3100 . When the game ball B is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2525, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided.

A plurality of obstructing nails N planted between the left guide passage group 2530 and the gate 2002 are arranged so as to be gathered just above the gate 2002 at a portion below the variable prize winning opening 2003 . As a result, when the game ball B is hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500, it can pass through the gate 2002 with a certain probability. The gate 2002 is arranged so that the game ball B circulates downward on both the left outer side and the right outer side of the gate 2002 .

When the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, a normal symbol lottery is executed. Then, when the lottery result of the drawn normal symbols is "normal hit", the variable prize winning opening 2003 is in a state capable of receiving the game ball B for a predetermined time. When the variable winning opening 2003 is in an acceptable state, the variable winning opening door 2521 rotates to the left, so that the game ball B circulating through the left second guide passage 2532 has a high probability of variable winning. It is received in mouth 2003 . The game ball B received in the variable winning opening 2003 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and after being detected by the variable winning opening sensor 2526, is transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and downward. is discharged to When the game ball B is detected by the variable winning hole sensor 2526, the privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided.

Between the gate 2002 and the side upper left unit 2300, a warp entrance 2511 and a windmill W are provided from above. The warp entrance 2511 opens leftward in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 . The windmill W is arranged between the center accessory 2500 and the inner rail 1002 and closer to the center accessory 2500 .

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate 2002 and the windmill W are such that the game ball B flowing through the gate 2002 and the right outer side of the gate 2002 mainly flows down the portion on the right side of the center of the windmill W. are arranged to Therefore, the game ball B that has flowed through the gate 2002 and the right outside of the gate 2002 can enter the warp entrance 2511 with a certain degree of probability. On the other hand, the game ball B that has circulated outside the left side of the gate 2002 does not enter the warp entrance 2511 .

The game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 is provided near the lower end of the central portion of the center role 2500 in the left-right direction from the warp exit 2512 that opens in the frame of the center role 2500 through the warp passage. Provided to stage 2513 . The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls in the horizontal direction on the stage 2513 and is released so as to flow back into the game area 5a from either the central release portion 2513a or the side release portion 2513b.

Since the center release portion 2513a of the stage 2513 is provided directly above the first starting port 2004 in the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, the game ball B released from the center release portion 2513a has a high probability of reaching the first It is received in the starting port 2004 . The game ball B released from the side release portions 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central release portion 2513a is received in the first starting port 2004 with a certain degree of probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting hole 2004 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and detected by the first starting hole sensor 3002. is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 at . When the game ball B is detected by the first starting opening sensor 3002, a lottery for the first special symbol is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2004 is received in the out port 1008 and discharged out of the game area 5a. The game ball B received in the out port 1008 is discharged downward after being guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the out guide section 1003 .

A game ball B that circulates on the right side of the center of the windmill W has a high probability of being positioned on the upper side of a plurality of obstructing nails N that are diagonally arranged along the lower side of the center accessory 2500 in two tiers. It flows down onto a plurality of obstructing nails N. A game ball B that does not flow down on the plurality of obstacle nails N on the upper side through the right side of the windmill W flows down on the plurality of obstacle nails N on the lower side. On the other hand, the game ball B, which has circulated on the left side of the center of the windmill W, flows down onto the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300, rolls on the shelf 2301 to the right, and then rolls onto the plurality of obstacle nails N on the lower side. flow down to

The game ball B, which has flowed to the right of the center of the windmill W and flowed down to the upper side of the plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally, is located in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction ( There is a possibility that it will be guided to the first starting port 2004 ) side and accepted by the first starting port 2004 . In addition, on the upper side where a plurality of obstacle nails N are obliquely arranged, there is a gap through which one game ball B can pass, so it may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through the gap. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 . The game ball B that has not been received by the general winning hole 2001 or the first starting hole 2004 is discharged from the out hole 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, in the lower left part of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B that has flowed down to the lower side of the plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally is moved in the horizontal direction of the game area 5a by the plurality of obstacle nails N. It is guided to the center side, is received by the out port 1008 without being received by the first starting port 2004, and is discharged from the game area 5a. On the lower side, since a plurality of gaps through which one game ball B can pass are provided on the way, there is a possibility that the game ball B can be received in the general prize winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 through the gaps.

The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then transferred to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001. On top, it is discharged downwards. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided.

Next, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, a right guide passage group 2540, a space forming section 2550, a specific obstacle nail group 2700, a second attacker section 2560, and a lower right unit 2400 are arranged in order from the top. A specific obstacle nail group 2700 composed of a plurality of obstacle nails N is provided in a space forming portion 2550 between the right guide path group 2540 and the second attacker portion 2560 .

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is moved with such a force that the game ball B enters above the portion of the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 that is lowered toward the right from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction. When struck, the game ball B circulates through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 .

A game ball B hit relatively strongly aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 contacts the impinging portion 1006 and enters the right first guide passage 2541 of the right guide passage group 2540 . On the other hand, the game ball B, which is hit relatively weakly aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500, rolls rightward on the upper surface of the upper end portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and passes through the right guide passage group 2540. Enter the right second guide passage 2542 .

The game ball B that has entered the right first guide passage 2541 is detected by the circulation detection sensor 2543, and then moves downward from the side near the peripheral wall portion 2501 between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005. released. After passing through the right first guide passage 2541, the game ball B enters the first guide area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 arranged in the space forming section 2550, and moves in the left-right direction within the first guide area 2711. It flows down while meandering. The game ball B that has circulated through the first guide area 2711 contacts the guide wall portion 2552 and circulates along the guide wall portion 2552 obliquely to the lower right.

A plurality of nail pegs 2701 forming walls on both the left and right sides of the first guide region 2711 form a gap between each other in the vertical direction, through which one game ball B can pass. Through, the game ball B may move to the left outer side or the right outer side of the first guide area 2711 (second guide area 2712). The game ball B that has moved to the left outside from the first guide area 2711 flows down to the guide wall section 2552 through between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the peripheral wall section 2501 . At this time, due to the plurality of rear projections 2554 of the flange portion 2502 and the plurality of front projections 2555d of the center right front plate 2555, the water flows down while meandering in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that has flowed down to the guide wall portion 2552 circulates obliquely to the lower right along the guide wall portion 2552 . The game ball B that has moved to the right outside from the first guide area 2711 flows through the second guide area 2712 .

On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the right second guide passage 2542 is released downward from the side near the right rail 1005 between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005 . After passing through the right second guide passage 2542, the game ball B enters the second guide area 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 arranged in the space forming section 2550, and moves in the left-right direction within the second guide area 2712. It flows down while meandering. The game ball B that has circulated through the second guide area 2712 contacts the guide wall portion 2552 and circulates along the guide wall portion 2552 obliquely to the lower right.

A plurality of pegs 2701 forming the walls on both the left and right sides of the second guide region 2712 form a gap between each other in the vertical direction, through which one game ball B can pass. The game ball B may move to the left outside (the first guiding area 2711) or the right outside of the second guiding area 2712 through. The game ball B that has moved leftward from the second guide area 2712 circulates through the first guide area 2711 . The game ball B that has moved to the right outside from the second guide area 2712 passes between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the right rail 1005 or the right wall portion 2551, and passes between the guide wall portion 2552 and the right wall portion 2551. flow down to the part. At this time, due to the plurality of rear projections 2554 of the flange portion 2502 and the plurality of front projections 2555d of the center right front plate 2555, the water flows down while meandering in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that has moved to the right outside from the second guide area 2712 is received by the first sub-out port 2021 with a high probability and is discharged outside the game area 5a. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 is guided backward of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward through the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 .

The game ball B guided by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is reduced in circulation speed compared to the portion where the obstacle nail N is planted in a general gauge arrangement, and even if the game ball B is at the same height. It will flow down with a delay.

A game ball B that has passed through the specific obstruction nail group 2700 (space forming portion 2550) and has not been received by the first sub-out port 2021 passes through the second attacker portion from between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567. 2560 enters the attacker passage 2564 provided above the second big winning opening 2007 . In a normal state, the second large winning opening door 2562 advances and closes the second large winning opening 2007 so that it cannot be received. After rolling leftward on the upper surface of , it is discharged downward through the right discharge passage 2565 . In this attacker passage 2564, the game ball B meanders in the front-rear direction and rolls leftward due to the rear ridge portion 2564a of the flange portion 2502 and the front and rear ridge portion of the center lower right front plate 2572.

The game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 of the second attacker portion 2560 flows down while coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the lower right unit 2400 (left lateral wall portion 2417). do. Then, with a certain degree of probability, it is accepted by the second starting port 2005 that is always open upward below the right discharge passage 2565 . Also, although the probability of acceptance to the second starting port 2005 is lower than that of the second starting port 2005, it is accepted by the second sub-out port 2022 opened on the right side of the second starting port 2005 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received by the second starting hole 2005 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the second starting hole sensor 2401, and discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2401, a lottery for the second special symbol is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is discharged downward after being guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 .

The game ball B released from the right release passage 2565 and not received by either the second starting port 2005 or the second sub-out port 2022 rolls obliquely downward to the left on the inclined wall portion 2418 of the lower right unit 2400. After moving, it is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B circulating through the attacker passage 2564 of the second attacker part 2560 is the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 or the second When the second large prize winning port door 2562 retreats according to the lottery result of two special symbols, it is accepted in the second large prize winning port 2007 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the second large winning opening 2007 is supplied to the pseudo game area 2010 after being detected by either of the two second large winning opening sensors 2561 provided below. When the game ball B is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2561, the privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided.

The game ball B supplied from the second big winning opening 2007 into the pseudo game area 2010 flows down while coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game area 2010 . Then, when the pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 is closed by the pseudo big winning prize opening door 2405, it passes in front of the pseudo big winning prize opening door 2405 and flows down onto the bottom wall portion 2411, along the slope of the bottom wall portion 2411. After rolling to the left, it is received in the pseudo-out port 2404 . The game ball B received in the pseudo-out port 2404 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and discharged downward.

When the game ball B is circulating in the pseudo-game area 2010, the lottery result of the first special pattern drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005 and the second special pattern If the pseudo big prize winning door 2405 is rotated forward by the peripheral control board 1510 according to the result of the lottery, there is a high probability that it abuts on the pseudo big prize winning door 2405 and is accepted by the pseudo big prize winning port 2402 behind. be done. The game ball B received in the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403, and discharged downward. By detecting the game ball B by the pseudo big winning opening sensor 2403, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect.

As an effect using the pseudo big winning opening 2402, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn and the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, according to "big hit", "small hit", etc.) When the second big winning opening 2007 is open, the peripheral control board 1510 opens the pseudo big winning opening 2402 for the effect. At that time, since the peripheral control board 1510 can know the opening timing of the second big winning hole 2007, the degree to which the pseudo big winning hole 2402 picks up the game ball B can be adjusted by the peripheral control board 1510. Using this property, it is possible to suggest that when the pseudo big winning opening 2402 picks up a lot of game balls B, it will be in a high probability state (so-called probability variable state) after the "jackpot". Conversely, when there are many omissions at the pseudo big winning opening 2402, it can be suggested that a low-probability state (so-called normal non-variable state) occurs after the "jackpot". Furthermore, it is also possible to suggest a probability setting (generally, 6 levels of settings 1 to 6) based on such a state of failure.

Thus, in this embodiment, even if the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the normal state, there is only a possibility that it will be accepted in the second start port 2005 where the privilege is given, and the gate 2002 is closed. Since there is no possibility of passing through or being accepted into the general prize winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2004, it is possible to perform a driving operation such that the game ball B circulates to the left side of the center accessory 2500.例文帳に追加

In detail, the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2004, and the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2005. As for the lottery result, the special variation time for suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern to the player is set longer for the lottery result of the second special pattern than the lottery result of the first special pattern. Therefore, since the lottery result of the second special symbol takes more time to consume the number of reservations, even if the number of received game balls B per unit time for the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005 is the same , the number of lottery results of the second special symbol executed by the second starting port 2005 is smaller. Also, even if the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2005, the number of the game balls B to be paid out is one. For this reason, in the normal state, even if the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500, there is a possibility that it will only be accepted at the second start port 2005, and even if it is accepted at the second start port 2005, it will be a privilege. Since the number of game balls B to be paid out is one, the player can easily hit the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500 .

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first big prize hole 2006 or the second big prize hole 2007, the privilege that many game balls B are paid out is provided. In order to enable the acceptance of the game ball B into these first big prize opening 2006 and second big prize opening 2007, the first start opening 2004 and the second start opening 2005 are made to accept the game ball B, and they It is necessary to draw lots for the first special design and the second special design that can be accepted.

For this reason, in a normal state, the player is instructed to allow the game ball B to flow down the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B can be accepted by the first starting port 2004. The ball B can be driven in, the movement of the game ball B guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, and the original game of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the first start port 2004. It is possible to raise expectations for acceptance of the game ball B to the.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2004, "hit" (for example, "small hit", "middle hit", "big hit", etc.) is drawn as a lottery result of the first special symbol. Then, the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007 opens and closes. The operation can be enjoyed, and the expectation for receiving the game ball B into the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007 can be heightened.

Specifically, when the first big winning hole 2006 becomes receivable, it is possible to perform a driving operation so that the game ball B circulates to the left side of the center accessory 2500 . On the other hand, when the second big winning hole 2007 becomes acceptable, a hitting operation (“right hitting”) can be performed so that the game ball B circulates to the right side of the center accessory 2500 .

When hitting the game ball B to the right side of the center role 2500, on the right side of the center role 2500, a right guide path group 2540 consisting of a right first guide path 2541 and a right second guide path 2542 and a specific obstacle A guide region 2710 consisting of a first guide region 2711 and a second guide region 2712 by the nail group 2700 is provided, and the guide passage for circulating makes it easier to be received in the second sub-out port 2022. The hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B circulates through the passage (here, the right first guide passage 2541), and the player is instructed to hit the game ball B. can entertain.

In addition, since the second big winning hole 2007 has a larger opening in the horizontal direction than the first big winning hole 2006, the second big winning hole 2007 can be opened in a short time to the player just by looking at it. It can be recognized that many game balls B can be accepted. As a result, when the second big winning hole 2007 can be accepted, the player can immediately change the hitting operation so that the game ball B circulates to the right side of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to heighten the expectation for receiving the game ball B into the big prize winning opening 2007 and suppress the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, when the game ball B is received in the second big winning hole 2007, the game ball B is supplied in the pseudo game area 2010 provided with the pseudo big winning hole 2402 having a larger opening than the second big winning hole 2007. Therefore, it is possible to heighten expectations for the acceptance of the game ball B into the pseudo big prize opening 2402, and it is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball B in the pseudo game area 2010, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. can be made

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning hole sensor 3001 for detecting a game ball B received by the general winning hole 2001 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and a first starting hole 2004 to receive the game ball B behind the game panel 1100. A first starting opening sensor 3002 for detecting the guided game ball B is provided. The general winning opening sensor 3001 and the first starting opening sensor 3002 are provided in the back ball induction unit 3100 .

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and is open at the front. A back box rear unit 3030 detachably attached by a lock slider 3020, and a back board unit 3040 arranged behind the back box unit 3030 and attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010. there is

In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided in the lower part near the front end in the back box 3010, and the back ball guiding unit 3100 through which the game balls B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 circulates, and the front end in the back box 3010 a back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 provided in the back box 3010, a back front front effect unit 3300 provided at an upper part in the back box 3010 at a position substantially the same as the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 in the front-rear direction, and the inside of the back box 3010 A back bottom front effect unit 3400 provided at the lower part behind the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in the back box 3010 and a back top back effect unit 3500 provided behind the back top front effect unit 3300 in the back box 3010 (Fig. 155 etc.) and a back bottom post effect unit 3600 provided behind the back bottom front effect unit 3400 in the back box 3010 .

[5-9a. Back box relation]
Next, the configuration of the back case 3010 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153 and the like. FIG. 151(a) is a front perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit, and FIG. 151(b) is a rear perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit. FIG. 152(a) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 151 with respect to the back case separated into main members and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the back. 153(a) is an exploded perspective view of the back box rear unit in FIG. 152 and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the rear.

The back unit 3000 includes a box-shaped back box 3010 opened forward, a back box rear unit 3030 attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010, and a back box rear unit 3030 provided behind the back box unit 3030. and a back board unit 3040 attached to the rear side of 3010 . The back box rear unit 3030 is detachably attached to the back box 3010 by a lock slider 3020 .

The back box 3010 has a box-like shape with an open front, and has a rectangular opening 3010a penetrating through the rear wall, and a back box rear unit 3030 (set plate 1650) provided on the lower side of the opening 3010a. two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the opening 3010a; and a lock mechanism portion 3010d to which the lock slider 3020 is slidably attached to the left and right.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed in a quadrangular shape with an aspect ratio of 3:4 when viewed from the front. The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size in the left-right direction as the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. In addition, the opening 3010a is provided at a position that is vertically offset (eccentric) with respect to the center of the back box 3010 in the vertical direction. The opening 3010a is formed to have the same size as a 19-inch liquid crystal display device.

The upper fixing pieces 1651 of the set plate 1650 in the rear box unit 3030 are inserted into the two fixing grooves 3010c of the back box 3010 from below. Further, the lower fixing piece 1652 of the set plate 1650 can be inserted into the lock mechanism portion 3010d of the back case 3010 from behind while the lock slider 3020 is slid leftward in a rear view. With the lower fixed piece 1652 of the set plate 1650 inserted into the lock mechanism portion 3010d, when the lock slider 3020 is slid rightward in rear view, the lock slider 3020 prevents the lower fixed piece 1652 from moving rearward. be able to.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the back ball guide unit 3100 and the like at appropriate positions.

Further, the back box 3010 has a pair of shaft support portions 3010f capable of supporting the shaft portion 3041a of the back substrate unit 3040 rotatably around the axis extending in the vertical direction on the rear surface, and a pair of shaft support portions 3010f. is provided on the rear surface on the opposite side in the left-right direction, and has an engaging portion 3010g to which the engaging claw 3041b of the rear substrate unit 3040 is engaged.

The back box rear unit 3030 is detachably attached to the back wall so as to close the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 from behind. The back box rear unit 3030 includes an effect display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a set plate 1650 having the effect display device 1600 attached to the front side and attached to the back box 3010, and attached to the rear surface of the set plate 1650. and a peripheral control unit 1500 in which a peripheral control board 1510 is housed.

The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch liquid crystal display device with an aspect ratio of 3:4.

The set plate 1650 is formed in the shape of a rectangular flat plate having the same size as the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 . The set plate 1650 has two upper fixing pieces 1651 protruding upward from the upper side in the left-right direction, and one lower fixing piece 1652 protruding downward from near the center of the lower side in the left-right direction. there is The two upper fixing pieces 1651 are inserted into the fixing grooves 3010c of the back box 3010. As shown in FIG. The lower fixing piece 1652 is inserted into the lock mechanism portion 3010 d of the back box 3010 .

The set plate 1650 also has a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 1653 that opens forward on the front side. The liquid crystal mounting portion 1653 is formed in a size corresponding to the effect display device 1600, and the effect display device 1600 is fitted and attached from the front. In this embodiment, the center of the liquid crystal mounting portion 1653 and the center of the set plate 1650 match when viewed from the front. The set plate 1650 is transparent. As a result, the inside of the back case 3010 can be viewed from behind through the set plate 1650 .

The peripheral control unit 1500 comprises a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 160, etc.) having a peripheral control section 1511 and an effect display control section 1512, and a peripheral control board box 1520 housing the peripheral control board 1510. It is Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of set plate 1650 so that the upper side of peripheral control board box 1520 is positioned slightly below the upper side of set plate 1650 . As a result, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the set plate 1650, there is a region of about 1/3 of the total height of the set plate 1650 between the lower end of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the lower end of the set plate 1650. formed.

The back board unit 3040 includes a box-shaped board box 3041 that is L-shaped when viewed from the front and is thin in the front and rear, and a panel relay board and effect drive board (not shown) housed in the board box 3041. I have. The board box 3041 has two shafts 3041a rotatably supported by the shaft support 3010f of the back box 3010 on the outer sides of the vertically extending L-shaped portion. Further, the circuit board box 3041 has locking claws 3041b that are locked to the locking portions 3010g of the back box 3010 at the ends of the L-shaped portions extending to the left and right.

The back substrate unit 3040 is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 across the opening 3010a (back box unit 3030). When assembled to the game board 5, the vertically extending L-shaped portion of the back board unit 3040 is positioned to the left of the peripheral control unit 1500 in rear view. In addition, the L-shaped portion of the back board unit 3040 extending to the left and right is positioned between the lower end of the rear side of the set plate 1650 and the lower end of the peripheral control unit 1500 .

The back board unit 3040 is rotated so that the locking claw 3041b moves rearward about the shaft 3041a by releasing the locking between the locking portion 3010g and the locking claw 3041b. The rear of the rear unit 3030 can be opened, and the rear box unit 3030 can be attached and detached from the rear box 3010 without removing it from the rear box 3010.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, an opening 3010a large enough to mount a 19-inch liquid crystal display device is provided in the rear wall of the back box 3010, and a set plate 1650 is attached to the opening 3010a. A 15-inch production display device 1600 is attached to the front side of 1650. As a result, when the effect display device 1600 has a size of 19 inches, the effect display device 1600 can be directly attached to the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, and when the effect display device 1600 is smaller than 19 inches, the effect display device 1600 can be attached directly to the opening 3010a. The display device 1600 can be attached to the opening 3010a of the back case 3010 via a set plate 1650 corresponding to the size of the display device 1600. FIG. Therefore, the effect display device 1600 having a different size can be attached only by changing the set plate 1650 while leaving the back box 3010 as it is. That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, the design of the back box 3010 is changed according to the model change, but in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back box 3010 can be used as a common part even if the model is changed. , the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Also, since the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650, when the position of the effect display device 1600 is desired to be changed due to a design change or the like, it can be easily handled by changing only the set plate 1650.例文帳に追加It is possible to reduce the cost for design change and the like.

In the above embodiment, the set plate 1650 is transparent, but is not limited to this, and may be colored, such as colored transparent, colored opaque, or the like. If the set board 1650 can be visually recognized from the player side, it is desirable to use an opaque color including black. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 from being degraded due to the inside of the island equipment being seen from the player side or the light coming from behind. In this case, especially by making the set board 1650 black, even if the set board 1650 can be visually recognized from the player side, the set board 1650 can be made inconspicuous. 1600 and other decorations can be made more conspicuous, and it is possible to make it easy to fully exhibit the effect of their presentation.

[5-9b. back ball induction unit]
Next, the back ball guide unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back ball guide unit 3100 is provided in the lower part near the front end inside the back box 3010 . The back ball guidance unit 3100 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and a first starting opening sensor 3002 that detects the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2004. , and a magnetic sensor 1050 capable of detecting illegal magnetism acting on the game board 5 (see FIG. 160, etc.).

The back ball guidance unit 3100 includes a general winning hole 2001, a variable winning hole 2003, a first starting hole 2004, a second starting hole 2005, a first big winning hole 2006, a second big winning hole 2007, a first sub-out hole 2021, and It has a discharge passage for receiving the game ball B received by the second sub-out port 2022 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, guiding it to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the lower end part, and then discharging it downward. there is

[5-9c. Back front edge decoration unit]
Next, the back front peripheral edge decorative unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back front edge decoration unit 3200 is attached in the back box 3010 near the front end. The back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 includes a back front peripheral decoration body 3201 formed in an annular shape along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5, and a back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201 for luminous decoration. and a back front peripheral decoration board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

The back front peripheral decoration body 3201 is formed in a shape imitating a sumo wrestling ring. The back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201 is formed so as to have translucency, and can be decorated with light emitted from LEDs mounted on the back front peripheral edge decoration substrate.

According to the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200, the peripheral edge of the game area 5a can be annularly decorated with the back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201, and the appearance of the game area 5a can be improved. In addition, by luminous decoration of the back front peripheral decoration body 3201, the peripheral edge of the game area 5a can be annularly illuminated, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game area 5a.

In addition, since the back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201 can independently emit light from a plurality of parts divided in the circumferential direction by the plurality of LEDs of the back front peripheral edge decoration substrate, it is possible to rotate the light in the circumferential direction. The light emitting effect can be shown to the player, the player can be entertained, and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

[5-9d. Back upper front production unit]
Next, the back top front effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back top front effect unit 3300 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 at substantially the same position as the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in the front-rear direction. The back top front effect unit 3300 includes a back top front decoration body 3310 that is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a back top front decoration body 3310 that is provided behind the back top front decoration body 3310 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. An upper front decoration substrate (not shown) and a back upper front lifting unit (not shown) for raising and lowering the back upper front decoration body 3310 are provided.

The back upper front decoration body 3310 is provided so that sumo ranking rankings such as "yokozuna", "ozeki", and "sekiwake" are arranged from the left, and each ranking is displayed by the LED of the back upper front decoration substrate. can be independently illuminated and decorated. The back upper front decoration 3310 is formed to have a length that crosses the front of the effect display device 1600 in the horizontal direction.

The back upper front decoration body 3310 is attached so as to be movable up and down, and can be lifted and lowered by the back upper front lifting unit. The front upper back decoration 3310 can move up and down within a range of substantially the same height as the front upper back decoration 3310 . In a normal state, the back upper front decoration 3310 is in a raised position where it is moved to the highest position. In this state, when the game board 5 is assembled, the center in the vertical direction is positioned at substantially the same height as the upper end of the inner rail 1002 in front view, and is positioned above the game area 5a. Most of the back upper front decoration 3310 can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the rest can be seen through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500. can.

The back upper front decoration body 3310 can be moved downward from the normal raised position state to the lowered position state by the back upper front lifting unit. When the back upper front decoration 3310 is in the lowered position, the center in the vertical direction is positioned at substantially the same height as the upper end of the left guide passage group 2530 in the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 159). The back upper front decoration 3310 can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500 in the state of the lowered position.

According to the back front front effect unit 3300, the numbering of the back front front decoration body 3310 can be independently decorated with light emission. It is possible to perform a light-emitting effect such that the variation is stopped by light-emitting decoration. As a result, when the ranking with a high rank is decorated with light, the player can be made to think that a chance has arrived, and the expectation for the game can be heightened, thereby suppressing the decline in interest.

In addition, according to the back upper front decoration 3310, the order of the ranking with the luminous decoration suggests to the player the degree of expectation that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game) will occur in which the player is advantageous. can do. As a result, when the variable light-emitting decorations of the plurality of rankings of the back upper front decoration body 3310 are started, the player can feel nervous and excited depending on whether or not the variation is stopped at the desired ranking, It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, when the back upper front decoration body 3310 is moved from the raised position to the lowered position by the back upper front lifting unit, the back upper front decoration body 3310 moves to the center side of the game area 5a, and the front of the effect display device 1600 Since the upper part is blocked, the attention of the player can be strongly attracted to the upper back decoration body 3310, and the player's attention can be drawn to the upper back decoration body 3310. - 特許庁As a result, it is possible to reliably show the player the light emission effect using the back upper front decoration body 3310 as described above, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest. In addition, if the above-described light emitting effect is executed at the lowered position rather than at the raised position, it is possible to enhance the sense of premium for the player. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

[5-9e. Back lower front production unit]
Next, the back bottom front effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back lower front effect unit 3400 is provided in the lower part in the back box 3010 behind the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 . The back-bottom front effect unit 3400 includes a back-bottom front decoration body 3410 that is elongated in the left-right direction, and a back-bottom front decoration board (illustrated in the figure) provided behind the back-bottom front decoration body 3410 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. are omitted), and a lower front lifting unit (not shown) that lifts and lowers the front lower front decorative body 3410 .

The back bottom front decoration body 3410 can be decorated with light emission by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back bottom front decoration substrate. In addition, the underside front decorative body 3410 is provided so as to be able to move up and down between the lowest lowered position and the highest raised position by the lower back front elevating unit. The back lower front decoration 3410 is formed to have a length that crosses the front of the effect display device 1600 in the horizontal direction.

The back lower front decoration 3410 includes a base decoration 3411 that is long in the left and right direction, a center decoration 3412 provided in the center of the base decoration 3411 in the left-right direction, and a base decoration 3411 that can cover the center decoration 3412 from the front. It has a front left decorative body 3413 and a front right decorative body 3414 provided in front of the center in the left-right direction (see FIG. 156, etc.).

The base decorative body 3411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape resembling a rope and has translucency. The central decorative body 3412 has a circular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with the characters of "gohan" in relief. The center decorative body 3412 is rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction around the center by a drive motor (not shown).

The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are positioned so as to be in contact with each other, and are provided so as to move away from each other in the horizontal direction. Each of the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 has translucency. The front left decorative body 3413 is formed with the character "heaven" in relief. The front right decorative body 3414 is formed with the character "rise" in relief.

The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are normally positioned in a closed position in close contact with each other, and hide the central decorative body 3412 provided at the rear invisibly from the front. ing. The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 can move from the normal state to the open position separated from each other in the horizontal direction. In this open position state, the center decoration 3412 provided at the rear can be visually recognized from the front through the space between the front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3414 .

In the normal state, the back bottom front effect unit 3400 has the back bottom front decoration body 3410 positioned at the lowered position. In addition, in a normal state, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are positioned at the closed position, and the central decorative body 3412 is invisible from the front. When the back lower front decoration body 3410 in the normal state is assembled on the game board 5, the center in the vertical direction is located at a height slightly higher than the side upper left unit 2300, and the lower end is the lower end of the center accessory 2500. , and the upper end is positioned slightly lower than the warp entrance 2511 . A portion of the back and front decoration 3410 in the normal state is visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the rest is transparent panel board 1110 of game panel 1100 and transparent center accessory 2500. It is visible through

The front lower back decoration 3410 can be moved from the lowered position to the raised position by the front lower back lifting unit. When the front lower back decoration body 3410 is in the raised position, the upper end is positioned slightly lower than the front upper back decoration body 3310 in the raised position (see FIG. 154). In other words, the center in the vertical direction of the back lower front decorative body 3410 at the raised position is positioned at substantially the same height as the first big prize winning opening 2006 . In addition, the back lower front decoration 3410 moves the front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3414 between the open position and the closed position at any position (height) between the lowered position and the raised position. can be moved.

According to this back bottom front effect unit 3400, when the back bottom front decoration body 3410 is moved upward from the lowered position, it moves to the center side of the game area 5a and blocks part of the effect display device 1600. , and can draw attention to the back lower front decoration body 3410 .

In addition, when the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are moved from the closed position to the open position, the central decorative body 3412 provided at the back becomes visible (appears). ), the appearance of the central decorative body 3412 can make the player think that something good will happen, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation for the game and suppressing the decline in interest.

Furthermore, in the back lower front decoration 3410, since the center decoration 3412 can be rotated about the axis in the front-rear direction, the front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3414 are moved to the open position to open the center decoration. By rotating the central decorative body 3412 with the body 3412 appearing, it is possible to make the player strongly believe that something good must happen, thereby further increasing the player's expectation. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by making it possible. In addition, since the central decorative body 3412 can be rotated, when the central decorative body 3412 appears to be visible, the player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not the central decorative body 3412 rotates. can entertain.

In addition, the back bottom front effect unit 3400 raises and lowers the back bottom front decoration body 3410 as described above, moves the front left decoration body 3413 and the front right decoration body 3414 to appear the center decoration body 3412, and rotates the center decoration body 3412. By appropriately combining , it is possible to show a variety of movable performances to the player, to make it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, and to suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, in addition to the movable effect of the lower back front decoration body 3410 as described above, the back lower front effect unit 3400 enables light emission effect by a plurality of LEDs of the back lower front decoration substrate, so that more diverse effects can be achieved. The game can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

[5-9f. Back side post production unit]
Next, the back up post effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described. The back top rear effect unit 3500 is provided at the upper part in the back box 3010 behind the back top front effect unit 3300 . The back top rear effect unit 3500 includes a back top back decoration body 3510 (see FIG. 155 etc.) that is long in the left-right direction, and a back top back decoration body 3510 provided behind the back top back decoration body 3510, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. It is provided with a rear top decoration substrate (illustration is omitted) and a back top rear lifting unit (illustration is omitted) for lifting and lowering the rear top decoration body 3510 .

The back upper decoration body 3510 has translucency, and can be decorated with light emission by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back upper decoration substrate. In addition, the rear upper back decorative body 3510 is provided so as to be able to move up and down between the highest raised position and the lowest lowered position by the rear upper back lifting unit. Furthermore, the back upper back decoration 3510 is provided behind the back lower front decoration 3410 .

The back upper rear decoration 3510 is formed in a shape that imitates the upper half of a winning cup, and the letter "Yu" is formed in relief in the center in the left-right direction. The rear upper back decoration 3510 can form one large winning cup by abutting the rear lower back decoration 3610 on the lower end (see FIG. 157, etc.). The upper back decoration 3510 has substantially the same height as the front upper back decoration 3310 .

In the normal state, the upper back rear effect unit 3500 has the upper back rear decorative body 3510 positioned at the raised position. In this state, the rear upper back decoration 3510 is positioned behind the front upper back decoration 3310 in the raised position, and is invisible from the front.

When the back top rear decoration body 3510 is moved to the lowered position by the back top rear lifting unit 3500, the bottom end of the back top rear decoration body 3510 is at the height of the substantially central center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. is located. In a state in which the back upper rear decoration body 3510 is moved downward from the raised position, it is positioned in front of the effect display device 1600 . In this state, if the front top back decoration 3310 or the front bottom back decoration 3410 has not moved in front of the back top rear decoration 3510, the back top rear decoration 3510 is visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500. can do.

According to the back top rear effect unit 3500, the back top rear decoration body 3510 can be raised and lowered so that it can be visually recognized from the front, so that the player can be surprised by the appearance of the back top rear decoration body 3510. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the loss of interest. In addition, the upper back decoration body 3510 can form one large decoration by bringing it into contact with the rear lower back decoration body 3610, so that a strong impact can be given to the player. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest by making the child think that a chance has arrived.

[5-9g. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the rear lower post effect unit 3600 of the rear unit 3000 will be described. The back bottom post effect unit 3600 is provided behind the back bottom front effect unit 3400 in the lower part inside the back box 3010 . The lower back side effect unit 3600 includes a lower back side decoration body 3610 (see FIG. 155, etc.) that is long in the left-right direction, and is provided behind the back side back decoration body 3610, and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. It is provided with a back-bottom decoration substrate (not shown) and a back-bottom lift unit (not shown) for raising and lowering the back-bottom decoration body 3610 .

The back underside decoration 3610 has translucency, and can be decorated with light emission by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back underside decoration substrate. In addition, the rear underside decorative body 3610 is provided so as to be able to move up and down between the lowest lowered position and the highest raised position by the lower back elevation unit.

The rear lower back decoration body 3610 is formed in a shape that imitates the lower half of a winning cup, and the letter "prize" is formed in relief in the center in the left-right direction. The rear lower back decorative body 3610 can form one large winning cup by abutting the upper rear decorative body 3510 on the upper end (see FIG. 157, etc.). The lower back decoration body 3610 has substantially the same height as the lower back front decoration body 3410 .

In the normal state, the underside post effect unit 3600 has the underside afterside decoration 3610 positioned at the lowered position. In this state, the rear lower back decoration body 3610 is located behind the front lower back decoration body 3410 in the lowered position, and is invisible from the front.

In a state in which the rear bottom rear decoration body 3610 is moved to the raised position by the rear bottom rear lifting unit 3600, the upper end of the rear rear rear decoration body 3610 is the lower end of the rear upper rear decoration body 3510 at the raised position. It is positioned at a height where it almost abuts. In the state in which the rear lower back decoration body 3610 is moved upward from the lowered position, it is positioned in front of the effect display device 1600 . In this state, if the front top back decoration 3310 or front bottom back decoration 3410 has not moved in front of the back bottom rear decoration 3610, the back bottom rear decoration 3610 is visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500. can do.

According to the behind-the-back effect unit 3600, the behind-the-back decoration body 3610 can be raised and lowered so that it can be visually recognized from the front. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the loss of interest. In addition, since the rear lower back decoration body 3610 can form one large decoration by bringing it into contact with the rear upper back decoration body 3510, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest by making the child think that a chance has arrived.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 154 to 159 and the like. FIG. 154 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-bottom front decoration body of the back-bottom front effect unit and the back-bottom rear decoration body of the back-bottom post-effect unit in the back unit are respectively moved to the raised positions. . In FIG. 155, the back-bottom front decoration of the back-bottom front effect unit in the back unit is moved to the center of the game area, and the back-up rear decoration of the back-up rear effect unit is moved to the upper side of the back-bottom front decoration. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear-bottom decoration of the rear-bottom effect unit is moved to the lower side of the front-bottom-front decoration. FIG. 156 shows a state in which the front left decoration and the front right decoration in the back bottom front decoration of the back bottom front effect unit are moved to the open position to reveal the center decoration in the state of FIG. 155. FIG. It is a front view of a game board.

In addition, FIG. 157 shows that the back top rear decorative body of the back top rear effect unit in the back unit is moved to the lowered position, and the back bottom rear decoration body of the back bottom rear effect unit rises and the back top rear decoration body is moved. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in contact with. FIG. 158 shows a state in which the front left decoration and the front right decoration in the back bottom front decoration of the back bottom front effect unit are moved to the open position to reveal the center decoration in the state of FIG. It is a front view of a game board. FIG. 159 shows that the front upper back decoration of the front upper back effect unit in the back unit is moved to the lowered position, and the upper rear decoration of the upper back effect unit of the back upper rear effect unit is moved to the rear of the front upper back decoration. The back bottom front decoration body of the back bottom front effect unit rises and moves to the lower side of the back top front decoration body, and the back bottom rear decoration body of the back bottom rear effect unit rises to the back bottom front decoration. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back of the body is in contact with the rear upper back decoration.

The game board 5 of this embodiment includes a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, a starting port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, a side Since the upper left unit 2300, the lower right unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, and the gate member 2600 are formed substantially entirely transparent, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. Back front peripheral decoration 3201 of back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in back unit 3000 arranged behind 1100, back top front decoration 3310 of back top front effect unit 3300, and back bottom of back bottom front effect unit 3400. The front decorative body 3410 and the like can be visually recognized well, and the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well through the frame of the center accessory 2500 .

More specifically, the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 of the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 is annularly provided along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a, and can be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the like. can be done. The back upper front decoration body 3310 of the back upper front effect unit 3300 is positioned above the upper end of the effect display device 1600 and at a raised position where the center in the vertical direction is approximately the same height as the upper end of the inner rail 1002, Most of them can be seen through the frame of the center role 2500 and the rest can be seen through the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center role 2500 .

In addition, the back bottom front decoration body 3410 of the back bottom front effect unit 3400 is located in a lowered position near the lower end of the effect display device 1600, where the center in the vertical direction is slightly higher than the side upper left unit 2300. A part can be seen through the frame of the center role 2500 and the rest can be seen through the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center role 2500 . The front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3414 of the back lower front decoration 3410 are positioned directly above the center accessory 2500 near the stage 2513 . The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well through the square area between the front upper back decoration 3310 and the front lower back decoration 3410 within the frame of the center accessory 2500 .

The back top rear decorative body 3510 of the back top rear effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 is positioned behind the back top front decoration body 3310 and cannot be visually recognized from the front. Further, the back bottom rear decorative body 3610 of the back bottom rear effect unit 3600 is positioned behind the back bottom front decoration body 3410 and cannot be visually recognized from the front.

The game board 5 is a back unit 3000 according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005. A back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, a back top front effect unit 3300, a back bottom front effect unit 3400, a back top rear effect unit 3500, and a back bottom back effect unit 3600 perform predetermined movable effects and light emitting effects. In addition, the game board 5 performs an effect using the game ball B (here, a so-called hit ball that no longer affects the game) in the lower right unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 .

Specifically, for example, the back unit 3000 can be used to perform movable effects as shown in FIGS. First, as shown in FIG. 154, the back bottom front decoration 3410 of the back bottom front effect unit 3400 and the back bottom rear decoration 3610 of the back bottom post effect unit 3600 are moved together to the raised position. As a result, the back bottom front decoration body 3410 crossing the performance display device 1600 moves upward so as to traverse the performance display device 1600, so that the player's interest is attracted to the back bottom front decoration body 3410. It can make you wonder if something good is going to happen.

By the way, in FIG. 154, when only the front lower back decoration 3410 is moved upward, the rear lower back decoration 3610 in the lowered position becomes visible from the front. Since it is formed so as to be paired with the rear decoration body 3510, if only the backside rear decoration body 3610 is visible, it looks half-baked and unnatural, and the appearance of the game area 5a deteriorates. There is fear. In addition, when the lower back decoration body 3610 is seen, its imperfect shape causes some players to perceive that it is combined with another decoration body, and the combination with the upper back decoration body 3510 to be described later. When the movable effect is executed, the impact given to the player is reduced, and there is a risk that a sufficient effect cannot be obtained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rear lower back decoration 3610 is moved upward together with the front lower back decoration 3410, the rear lower back decoration 3610 can remain hidden. It is possible to prevent the appearance of the game area 5a from deteriorating, and it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the lower back decoration body 3610, and it is possible to move jointly with the upper back decoration body 3510 described later. It is possible to sufficiently exhibit the performance effect of the performance.

Next, from the state shown in FIG. 154, as shown in FIG. 155, the front back decoration 3410 is moved to the center of the game area. At this time, for the same reason as described above, the rear lower back decoration 3610 is moved together with the front lower back decoration 3410 so that the front lower back decoration 3410 is positioned forward. In addition, the upper back decoration 3510 is moved to a portion between the front upper back decoration 3310 and the front lower back decoration 3410, and the lower rear decoration 3610 is moved to the lower side of the lower front decoration 3410. Let

As a result, the front surface of the effect display device 1600 is substantially covered with the upper back decoration body 3510, the front lower back decoration body 3410, and the back lower decoration body 3610, so that a strong impact is given to the player. You can give and you can convince yourself that something good is going to happen. In this state, the upper back decoration body 3510 and the lower back decoration body 3610 forming one decoration (here, the winning cup) are vertically separated from each other. Since the back bottom front decoration body 3410 is positioned, the player can have an illusion that the middle of the vertically long winning cup is hidden by the back bottom front decoration body 3410, resulting in poor appearance. can be avoided.

Then, from the state shown in FIG. 155, as shown in FIG. 156, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are moved from the closed position where they are close to each other to the open position where they are separated from each other. Then, between the front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3414, the center decoration 3412 appears to be visible. As a result, when the center decoration body 3412 newly appears in the back lower front decoration body 3410, an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) in which the player is advantageous to the player is generated. It is possible to make the player think strongly, heighten expectations for an advantageous game state, and suppress a decline in interest.

When the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are moved to the open position, they may be gradually moved or repeatedly opened and closed. Thus, depending on whether or not the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 open and the central decorative body 3412 appears, the player can be thrilled and entertained.

In the state shown in FIG. 156, the central decorative body 3412 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 may be further rotated. As a result, the rotation of the central decorative body 3412 can convince the player that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) in which the player is advantageous will occur. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation and suppress the decline in interest.

Subsequently, from the state shown in FIG. 156, the front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3414 of the back bottom front decoration 3410 are moved to the closed position as shown in FIG. , the back lower front decoration 3410 is moved to the lowered position, and the back upper rear decoration 3510 and the back lower rear decoration 3610 are moved to the center in the vertical direction and brought into contact with each other (combined). As a result, a large winning cup appears in the center of the game area 5a, so that the player can be convinced that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) in which the player has an advantage will occur. , the sense of anticipation for the advantageous game state can be heightened, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Thereafter, from the state shown in FIG. 157, as shown in FIG. 158, the front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3414 of the back bottom front decoration 3410 are moved from the closed position to the open position. As a result, the player can be strongly convinced that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) in which the player is advantageous will occur, and the player's expectation for the advantageous game state is heightened and interest is reduced. can be suppressed.

In the state shown in FIG. 158, the center decoration 3412 of the back lower front decoration 3410 may be rotated. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the occurrence of an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) in which the player is advantageous has been confirmed, and the expectation for the advantageous game state can be heightened. can be suppressed.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 154, the first operation is to move the front lower back decoration body 3410 (the rear lower back decoration body 3610) to the raised position, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for example, as shown in FIG. The back lower front decoration body 3410 is moved to the lower side of the back upper front decoration body 3310, and the back lower back decoration body 3610 together with the back lower front decoration body 3410 is moved to the rear of the back lower front decoration body 3410. It is also possible to move to . Alternatively, the front bottom decoration 3410 may be moved together with the rear bottom decoration 3610 to the center of the game area 5a. These can also produce the same effect as the above.

Thus, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the series of effects as described above is the lottery of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005. It is executed according to the result and the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the player can be entertained. In addition, the series of productions is designed to progress to the end or end in the middle depending on the lottery result of the first special pattern and the lottery result of the second special pattern, and can be performed in multiple stages. By showing it, it is difficult for the player to get bored.

In addition, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the above-described movable effect can be appropriately combined with the light emitting effect, and can also be combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, various patterns of effects can be presented to the player by appropriately combining light emission effects, display effects, etc., and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, the player can be entertained by various effects. It is possible to keep the player entertained and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect as described above is the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, and the second Although what is executed according to the lottery result of the two special symbols is shown, it is not limited to this, and it may be executed according to the detection of the game ball B by the pseudo large winning opening sensor 2403. As a result, even during the occurrence of an advantageous game state (for example, a ``jackpot'' game state) in which the player is advantageous, the movable performance can be enjoyed, and the player is less likely to get bored, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. be able to.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 160 and the like. FIG. 160 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1, as shown, is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls game operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays an effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control part 1511. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the . The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls payout of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 195. FIG.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although not shown in detail, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control board that is a microprocessor that contains a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. MPU 1310a, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. A circuit, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, a setting display 1310g for displaying set values and errors, and a game board 5. A base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008 provided in the formed game area 5a is provided. The main control MPU 1310a has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a to identify the individual (there is only one code in the world). Since the ID code assigned once is stored in a non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control MPU 1310a also incorporates a circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "internal reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and if the contents of the register change to inconsistent contents, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly affected by electrical noise. This is the reset circuit. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be controlled and disabled by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset is applied without executing the main control side power-off processing described later, and the main control side power-on processing described later is executed again. It will be done. In this case, since the main control side power failure processing has not been executed, as will be described later, a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control built-in RAM, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased ( cleared). In addition, even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control board 1310 (main control Only the MPU 1310a) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in a started state.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a includes a hard random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in hard random number circuit”) is built in. This main control built-in hard random number circuit generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is preset), The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and the clock signal (main Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without overlapping, and the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When all the values of are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is again extracted, and another value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU 1310a selects the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a jackpot judgment random number. is set as

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various sensors are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit that

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting opening sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2004, and a second starting opening that detects the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2005. Opening sensor 2401, general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting game ball B received in general winning opening 2001, gate sensor 2601 for detecting game ball B passing through gate 2002, game received in first big winning opening 2006 A first big winning hole sensor 2525 for detecting the ball B, a second big winning hole sensor 2561 for detecting the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007, and a game ball B discharged from the game board 5 are detected. Detection signals from the out sensor 664, the magnetic sensor 1050 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and the vibration sensor that detects vibration acting on the game board 5 are sent to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port.

Detection signals from setting key switches 1311a and setting switching buttons 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

In addition, the detection signal from the door frame open switch and the detection signal from the main body frame open switch are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (i.e., through the payout control input circuit and the payout control output circuit, which will be described later). When input to the main control board 1310 as they are), they are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first starter sensor 3002, and the second starter sensor 2401 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without going through other boards, and the main control It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via an input circuit. On the other hand, detection signals from the general winning gate sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2601, the first big winning gate sensor 2525, the second big winning gate sensor 2561, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the vibration sensor are transmitted through the panel relay board. It is input to the main control board 1310 via, that is, indirectly, and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby outputting the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 from the main control solenoid drive circuit. Each drive signal to the big winning opening solenoid 2524 and the second big winning opening solenoid 2563 is output via the panel relay board, that is, indirectly, or is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the function display unit 1400. State indicator, normal symbol indicator, normal pending indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special pending number indicator, second special symbol indicator, second special pending number indicator, round indicator, to Each drive signal is directly output without going through another board. Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311 by outputting the drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) about the game to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) is output to the power failure monitoring circuit, or the game ball B is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B, a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B is output to the payout control board 633 . The logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch is set to the launch permission logic when launch is permitted, while the launch stop logic (fire non-permission logic) inverts the launch permission logic when launch is not permitted. is set to As for the logic of the firing permission signal, as an initial value (default), after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after the power is restored), firing permission signal setting processing in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is started. Until then, it is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) is set by inverting the firing permission logic.

In this embodiment, the first start sensor 3002, the second start sensor 2401, the variable winning sensor 2526, the gate sensor 2601, the first big winning sensor 2525, the second big winning sensor 2561, the out sensor The 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, while the general winning hole sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005, the variable winning hole 2003, and the gate 2002, so the first starting hole sensor 3002 and the second starting hole sensor 2401 and the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2601 also occur frequently. Therefore, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the variable winning opening sensor 2526, and the gate sensor 2601.

Also, when an advantageous gaming state (such as a "jackpot" game) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning hole 2006 is opened and the game ball B enters frequently, so that the first big winning hole sensor Detection of game ball B by 2525 also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is also used for the first prize winning opening sensor 2525 . In addition, since a large amount of the game balls B launched into the game area 5a are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a that is partitioned and formed on the game board 5, the game balls B are frequently detected by the out sensor 664. occurs in For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used for the out sensor 664 as well. On the other hand, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning hole 2001 into which the game ball B does not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used for the general winning hole sensor 3001 . It should be noted that regardless of whether or not the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001 frequently, a proximity switch with high durability and long life may be used.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. or Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. The main control MPU 1310 a , which will be described later in detail, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 , shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, although detailed description will be given later. A power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when power is cut off. described.). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1310a can store various information in the RAM during power-off processing even when the power is off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633 .

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
A payout control board 633 that controls the payout of game balls B includes a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and a launching control unit that performs shooting control by a shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by a ball feeding solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED indicator for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch having a pressing operation unit for releasing the error displayed on the error LED indicator, and a ball A ball extracting switch for discharging the game balls B in the tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201) and starting the ball extracting operation. , is equipped with

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
The payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 633, is a microcontroller that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout It has a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. The payout control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM as well as functions for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) on the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port. In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, the ball cut detection sensor 574, payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. input to the MPU.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, and a power failure of the main control board 1310. A power failure warning signal from the monitoring circuit and an error cancellation signal from the error cancellation switch are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator. , Output to the error LED indicator via the payout control I / O port, and send a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Also, the number of game balls B actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

An error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the boards with the payout control board 633), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is cut Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it informs that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "ball is caught" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 591 has malfunctioned based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , when the number "5" is displayed, it informs that a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, the tank is full with game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). Notifies that when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR unconnected" (that the electrical connection is cut off anywhere from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), When the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that the game is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number). .

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a return requesting signal for the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner. is entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a signal indicating the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input to and displayed on the ball rental display section 226 of the operation unit 220 .

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The shooting control unit 633b performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit that receives detection signals from various detection switches related to firing, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for firing the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing control circuit, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, the launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , a ball-feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 detects whether or not the palm or fingers are in contact with the handle 195, and detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the will of the player. A detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit and the firing timing control circuit. A launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 for permitting launch of the game ball B is input to the launch timing control circuit after being input to the launch control input circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the intensity of hitting the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 195, is input to a launch solenoid drive circuit.

Based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, the firing timing control circuit satisfies the firing condition 1 that the palm or finger is touching the handle 195, and based on the CR connection signal, connects the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate. are electrically connected to each other, and the shooting condition 3 that game ball B is permitted to be shot based on a launch permission signal from main control board 1310 is not satisfied. , for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be fired.

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this firing solenoid drive circuit applies a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launching strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 195. Triggered by the input, it outputs to the firing solenoid 542 . On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feed reference pulse, thereby causing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to One ball of B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side by stopping the output of the constant current. send. In this way, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

In addition, in this embodiment, the discharge control board 633 is equipped with a firing control section 633b that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. may be configured. In this case, the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be directly input to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633. It may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that does not.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
Peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1511, which controls the effects in the peripheral control board 1510, has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. on one semiconductor chip, although detailed illustration is omitted. An integrated peripheral control IC, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC that performs high-quality sound performance, and sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects that the sound source IC refers to. and a stored sound ROM.

The peripheral control IC has a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip. The CPU of the control IC transmits game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 through the serial I/O for the lamp drive board. Game board side drive data for transmitting from the port to each decoration board of the game board 5 and for outputting a drive signal to the drive motor for actuating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is provided for the game board decoration drive board. It is transmitted from the serial I/O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, or the drive signal to the vibration motor 356 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, the projection force adjustment drive motor 381, etc. and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. The door side drive light emission data to be transmitted to the door frame 3 side from the frame decoration drive board serial I/O port, and the control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 are sent to the display control unit serial In addition to transmitting from the I/O port to the effect display control unit 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from the contact detection sensor main body 358, the pressure detection sensor 373, the elevation detection sensor 374, and the projecting force detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a signal (operation signal) from the performance display control unit 1512 to inform that the performance display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and based on this operation signal, the performance display control unit 1512 activity is monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the sound information to the top center speaker, top side speaker, etc. , the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 and the like are controlled so that sounds such as music and sound effects are played in accordance with various presentations. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume control switch protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, By transmitting a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a sound effect (sound performance) with a more realistic feeling than before.

The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The built-in WDT and the external WDT are used together to diagnose whether or not the own system is running out of control.

A display command output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input/output port. Kilo (k) bps (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting and blinking command, the game board side lighting and blinking command, the movable body driving command, etc., which are output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side, are multiple serial input/output signals different from the display commands. It is performed by the port, and 250 kbps is set as the bit rate in this embodiment.

[6-3b. Effect display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the effect display device 1600 . Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands and various data, and a VDP that controls the display of the effect display device 1600. (abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have it.

This display control MPU incorporates a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to render the effect display device 1600 . are controlling. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to that effect. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores not only various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, but also control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, the control data (display commands) and A plurality of corresponding nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 . The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data in chronological order, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The non-resident area transfer data defines in advance the order of transferring various data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM for the screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

The display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs the screen data following the top screen data to the VDP. It extracts from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. Thus, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and extracts the sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600 . Also, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. Note that the VDP employs a line buffer method. The "line buffer method" is to hold one line of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 in a line buffer, and transfer the one line of drawing data held in this line buffer to the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. The sprite data is base data, which is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

A “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600 . For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be made into one sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 after setting the position to be arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites are superimposed (hereinafter referred to as "sprite superimposition order").

Note that the sprite is constructed by gluing together a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels each in length and width. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". A small sprite can be expressed using one sprite character, and a relatively large sprite such as a person can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters, for example, arranged horizontally 2 times vertically 3 times. can be expressed. Larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 sequentially repeats the main scanning for setting the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front and the main scanning in the direction crossing the one direction. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially scans one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. are output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the pixels are sequentially output from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600, respectively, to pixels for one line.

[7. Game content]
The contents of games played by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, and the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 are played. is hit into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and the more the handle 195 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. B, that is, game balls B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front surface of the game panel 1100. When the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nail N, the game ball The flowing speed of B is suppressed, and various motions are imparted to the game ball B so that the motion can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500. As shown in FIG.

When the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest part in front view, it hits a plurality of obstacle nails N, It will flow through either the left first guide passage 2531 or the left second guide passage 2532 of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center accessory 2500 . In the vicinity of the entrance in the left second guide passage 2532, there is provided a first large prize winning port 2006 which is normally closed by the first large prize winning port door 2523 so that it cannot be received. The game ball B that has entered into rolls on the first big winning opening door 2523 and flows down.

The game ball B that has circulated through the left guide passage group 2530 is released above the gate 2002, and in the normal state, the left guide passage group 2530 and the gate 2002, and then pass through the gate 2002 with a certain probability.

When the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 and is detected by the gate sensor 2601, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and when the lottery result of the lottery normal symbol is "normal win", the variable winning opening. The variable winning opening 2003 closed by the door 2521 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the receiving of the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003 becomes possible.

In this embodiment, since the variable winning opening 2003 is provided in a portion near the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the flow of the left second guide passage 2532 is higher than the left first guide passage 2531. It is accepted in the variable prize winning port 2003 with probability. Then, when the game ball B is received in the variable winning hole 2003, a predetermined number (for example, 1 to 5) of the game ball B from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, the upper tray 201 is paid out to

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate 2002, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the indication of the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the lottery result of this normal symbol is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The variable winning opening 2003 is opened after the normal variable time has elapsed.

If the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 during the period from when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 to when the normal symbol lottery result is suggested, the normal symbol lottery result cannot be suggested. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the normal symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the previous normal symbol ends. In addition, the upper limit of the number of reserved lottery results of normal symbols is up to four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

At the site of this gate 2002 , the game ball B flows down either the gate 2002 , the left outside of the gate 2002 , or the right outside of the gate 2002 . Then, the game ball B flowing downward from the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 opened in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 . In this embodiment, due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the area between the gate 2002 and the windmill W, the game ball B that has passed the right outside of the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 with a high probability. .

The game ball B entering the warp entrance 2511 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512 . The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and is released forward from the central portion in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the central release portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the central release portion 2513a is located directly above the first start port 2004, so there is a high probability that it will be the first ball. It is received in the starting port 2004 .

When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, the first special symbol (for example, "loss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", A lottery for "time saving (time reduction) hit", "probable variable time saving hit", "probable variable time saving hit", "second big hit", etc.) will be held. If the lottery result of the lottered first special symbol is other than "losing", an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol that has been drawn is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special fluctuation time).

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2004 until the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is suggested (special fluctuation time), the first start When the game ball B is received in the mouth 2004, it is not possible to start suggesting the lottery result of the first special symbol. The start of suggesting the lottery result of the symbol is suspended. The number of retained lottery results of the first special symbols to be retained is up to four for the first starting port 2004, respectively, and for more than that, the game ball B is accepted by the first starting port 2004. However, the lottery result of the first special symbol is discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting port 2004 of the starting port unit 2100 .

By the way, if the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it will be pushed toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200 , or the first starting opening 2004 of the starting opening unit 2100, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500, the center role 2500 Through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the guide passage group 2540, the nails are discharged into the space forming portion 2550 in which the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is implanted.

The right guide passage group 2540 of the center accessory 2500 includes a right first guide passage 2541 whose entrance is open near the blocking portion 1006, and an entrance spaced leftward from the entrance of the right first guide passage 2541. and a right second guide passage 2542 that is open. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with the strength to contact the impingement portion 1006 (so-called right hitting), it enters the right first guide passage 2541 and does not contact the impingement portion 1006 (right When the game ball B is hit with a strength somewhat weaker than hitting, it enters the right second guide passage 2542 with a high probability. In other words, the game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 circulates through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 according to the hitting strength.

In this embodiment, the game ball B that has circulated through the right first guide passage 2541 is released to the first guidance area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the game ball B that has circulated through the right second guide passage 2542 is released into the specific obstacle It is discharged into second guide region 2712 of nail group 2700 .

The game ball B released to the specific obstacle nail group 2700 flows down while meandering in the horizontal direction along the guidance area 2710 . As a result, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the falling speed of the game ball B is suppressed compared to the normal area.

In the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712, the game ball B may deviate from the guide area 2710, and if it deviates to the right outside from the second guide area 2712, the first sub-out port 2021 provided below accepted with high probability. When the game ball B is received in the first sub-out port 2021, it is discharged out of the game area 5a without a chance of being received in the second big winning port 2007 or the second starting port 2005 provided downstream.

In this embodiment, the first sub-out port 2021 has a higher probability of receiving the fluid through the right second guide passage 2542 than through the right first guide passage 2541 . As a result, it is possible for the player to perform a hitting operation of the game ball B so that the game ball B circulates through the right first guide passage 2541 when "hitting to the right". there is In other words, when hitting to the right, the game ball B is hit with such a force that the game ball B abuts against the impingement portion 1006, so that the hitting operation of rotating the handle 195 by a large amount is encouraged. The pachinko machine 1's original game can be easily enjoyed by a relatively easy driving operation.

A game ball B that circulates through the specific obstacle nail group 2700 (space forming portion 2550) and is not received by the first sub-out port 2021 passes between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 and passes through the second attacker. Enter section 2560 . In a normal state, the second large winning opening 2007 provided in the second attacker portion 2560 is closed by the second large winning opening door 2562 so that the game ball B cannot be accepted, so that the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker The game ball B that has passed between the right wall portion 2567 flows down onto the second large winning opening door 2562, rolls leftward on the second large winning opening door 2562 (attacker passage 2564), and then rolls to the right. It is discharged downward from the second attacker portion 2560 through the discharge passage 2565 .

A second starting port 2005 is provided below the right discharge passage 2565, a second sub-out port 2022 is provided on the right side of the second starting port 2005, and a lower right unit 2400 is located on the left side of the second starting port 2005. Sloped walls 2418 are provided respectively. A plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted between the outlet of the right discharge passage 2565 and the second starting port 2005, the second sub-out port 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418. Therefore, the game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 is accepted by the second starting port 2005 with a certain degree of probability. In addition, the game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 is accepted by the second sub-out port 2022 with a probability lower than that of the second starting port 2005 . The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is discharged out of the game area 5a.

Then, the game ball B that is released downward from the right release passage 2565 and has not been received by the second starting port 2005 or the second sub-out port 2022 flows down on the inclined wall portion 2418 and follows the inclination of the inclined wall portion 2418. It rolls obliquely downward to the left along the line, is discharged leftward at a portion below the first starting port 2004 and is received in the out port 1008 .

That is, in a normal state, when the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 ("right hit"), the second starting port 2005 is the only opportunity for receiving the game ball B. As a result, in a normal state, the player can actively perform a hitting operation such that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center role 2500, and the right side of the center role 2500 (" A feeling of premium can be imparted to a right-handed player.

When the game ball B hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is received in the second starting port 2005, a predetermined number (for example, one) is sent from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. The game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201, and at the main control board 1310, the second special symbol (for example, "loss", "small hit", "2R big win", "5R big win", "15R big win") , “Probability change (probability change) hit”, “Time saving (time reduction) hit”, “Probability change time saving hit”, “Probability change time saving no hit”, “Second big hit”, etc.) lottery is done. If the lottery result of the lottered second special symbol is other than "losing", an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the drawn second special symbol takes a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special variation time) longer than the special variation time of the lottery result of the first special symbol. suggested.

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2005 until the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn is suggested (special fluctuation time), the second start When the game ball B is received in the mouth 2005, the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol cannot be started. The start of suggesting the lottery result of the symbol is suspended. The number of retained lottery results of the second special symbol to be retained is up to 4 for each of the second start ports 2005, and for more than that, the game balls B are accepted by the second start ports 2005. However, the lottery result of the second special symbol is discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

The special fluctuation time of the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the second start port 2005 is the time of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2004. It is set longer than the special fluctuation time of the lottery result. As a result, the second special symbol lottery result takes more time to consume the number of reservations, so the number of accepted game balls B per unit time for the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005 is the same. Also, the number of lottery results of the second special symbol to be executed in the second starting port 2005 is smaller. Therefore, in the normal state, even if the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500, there is a possibility that only the second starting port 2005 will be accepted, and the frequency with which the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed is low. , the player can be made to positively perform a hitting operation such that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center accessory 2500. - 特許庁

As described above, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, the first big prize The opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 are opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, and the game ball B can be received.

When the first big winning hole 2006 can be accepted, the first big winning hole 2006 is provided in the left second guide passage 2532 on the left side of the center accessory 2500. A driving operation can be performed so that the game ball B flows through the second guide passage 2532 . Then, when the game ball B entering the left second guide passage 2532 is received by the first big winning hole 2006 when the first big winning hole 2006 is open to accept the game ball B, the main control board 1310 and A predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 by the payout control board 633 .

On the other hand, when the second big winning hole 2007 can be accepted, the second big winning hole 2007 is provided below the right side of the center role 2500. can be driven so that the game ball B circulates. Then, when the second big winning hole 2007 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, the game ball B entered the attacker passage 2564 of the second attacker part 2560 from between the guide wall part 2552 and the attacker right wall part 2567. is accepted in the second big winning hole 2007, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

In this way, when the first big winning hole 2006 and the second big winning hole 2007 can accept the game ball B, by allowing the first big winning hole 2006 and the second big winning hole 2007 to accept the game ball B, Since a large number of game balls B can be paid out, the player can be entertained and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

By the way, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is, for example, a "small hit", the second big winning hole 2007 can accept the game ball B for a short time. It opens and closes between (for example, a small hit rush). At this time, at the timing when the second big winning hole 2007 opens and the game ball B can be received, even if the game ball B is aimed at the second big winning hole 2007, the second big winning hole 2007 is opened. Since the specific obstruction peg group 2700 capable of delaying the flow speed of the game ball B is provided upstream, it is difficult to get the timing to hit the game ball B. As a result, a degree of difficulty is given to the operation of hitting the game ball B, so that the game can be made worthwhile, the player can be entertained, and the loss of interest can be suppressed. . Further, in the above case, it is possible to make it difficult to accept the game ball B into the second big winning hole 2007, so that an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be suppressed.

In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn and the lottery result of the second special symbol are "big hit", after the second big winning opening 2007 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, When a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds to 40 seconds) elapses, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are accepted into the second big winning hole 2007, the game balls B are satisfied. (one opening/closing pattern is called one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R big win", 5 rounds for "5R big win", and 15 rounds for "15R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "jackpot", after the end of the jackpot game, change the probability that the first special pattern such as "jackpot" and the second special pattern are drawn ("probability hit"), or change the lottery result of the first special pattern And there is a "hit" that changes the display time of the effect image that suggests the lottery result of the second special pattern ("time saving hit").

When the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, the lottery result of the second special symbol) is the "second big hit", the first big winning port 2006 or the second big winning port 2007 After making it possible to accept game balls B in a predetermined pattern, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous game state. This ST maintains the state of probability variation and time saving during a predetermined specific number of variations.

In this embodiment, below the second big winning hole 2007, there is a pseudo game area 2010 in which only the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007 can circulate. The game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007 enters the pseudo game area 2010 after being detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2561 . The game ball B that has entered the pseudo game area 2010 flows down while coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game area 2010, and when the pseudo big winning opening 2402 can accept the game ball B. , a game ball B is received in the pseudo big winning opening 2402 . On the other hand, when the pseudo big winning opening 2402 cannot receive the game ball B, it passes in front of the pseudo big winning opening 2402 and is discharged from the pseudo out opening 2404 without being returned to the game area 5a.

For example, when the second big winning opening 2007 is capable of receiving the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern due to the above-mentioned "jackpot" or the like, the pseudo big winning opening 2402 receives the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. become acceptable. Since this pseudo big winning hole 2402 is provided so as to be larger and conspicuous than the second big winning hole 2007, many game balls B received in the second big winning hole 2007 enter the pseudo big winning hole 2402. By being accepted, it is possible to keep the player from getting bored during the "jackpot" game, and to keep the player from losing interest.

In this embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special symbol lottery results (the first special symbol lottery result and the second special symbol lottery result). Suggestion of the lottery result of the special pattern in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs, blinking for a predetermined time, and thereafter suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern by the combination of the lit LEDs. .

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the result of the lottery of the special symbol is suggested as the effect image. The effect image suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern on the effect display device 1600 is displayed by changing each pattern row in a state in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are arranged in the horizontal direction and displayed. The pattern rows are successively stopped and displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stop-displayed so that the patterns of the three stopped-displayed pattern rows are combined corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern. When the lottery result of the special pattern is other than "losing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern is displayed on the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁, an advantageous game state (for example, a "small hit" game, a "big hit" game, etc.) occurs according to the lottery result of the drawn special symbols.

It should be noted that the time to suggest the lottery result of the special pattern in the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (special fluctuation time)) and the time to suggest the lottery result of the special pattern in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the time until the finalized image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol by the effect display device 1600, according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn, the effect operation unit in the door frame 3 A player-participation type effect can be performed in which the contact operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation part 301 in 300 are operated. In the player-participation type performance, the pressing operation section 303 can be raised by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player-participation type performance can be enjoyed by operating the performance operation section 301 .

In the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided on the door frame 3, each decoration board provided on the game board 5, the performance display device 1600, the lower right unit 2400, and the back front of the back unit 3000 are displayed. Peripheral edge decoration unit 3200, back front front effect unit 3300, back bottom front effect unit 3400, back top back effect unit 3500, back bottom back effect unit 3600, etc. can be appropriately used to perform light emission effect, display effect, etc. Thus, the player can be entertained by various effects, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to allow the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake in performing the operation to be performed or does not perform the operation in the player-participation-type effect of operating the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303. to notify the player to that effect.

[8. Second embodiment of game board]
Next, the game board 5A of the second embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 161 to 166 and the like. FIG. 161 is a front view of the game board of the second embodiment showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the inside of the game area in which game balls circulate. FIG. 162(a) is a perspective view of the center accessory on the game board of the second embodiment as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory on the game board of the second embodiment as seen from the rear. be. Figure 163(a) is an exploded perspective view of the center front right plate and the ball guide unit in the right half of the center accessory shown in Figure 162 and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 164(a) is a front view of the ball guiding unit in the center accessory of FIG. 162, and (b) is a right side view of the ball guiding unit. 165(a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Seuss line in FIG. 164, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Sese line in FIG. 164, and (c) is a saw in FIG. 164 is a cross-sectional view taken along line s, and FIG. 164(d) is a cross-sectional view taken along line tarter in FIG. 166(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit of FIG. 164 and viewed from the front right, and FIG. 166(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit of FIG. 164 and viewed from the front left.

The game board 5A of the second embodiment differs only in the configuration of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and part of the front unit 2000. FIG. Other parts have the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, and detailed descriptions of the parts having the same configuration are omitted.

In the game board 5A of the second embodiment, three general winning openings 2001 are provided. Further, in the game board 5A, instead of the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005 of the lower right unit 2400 on the game board 5 is used as the normal winning opening 2008, and the variable winning opening 2003 of the game board 5 is used as the normal winning opening 2008. A second starting port 2005 is opened and closed according to the lottery result of the normal symbol lottered by receiving the ball B. Furthermore, in the game board 5A, instead of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, a ball guiding unit 2580 capable of guiding the game ball B is provided.

Due to the above differences, in the game board 5A of the second embodiment, the variable winning opening sensor 2526 of the game board 5 is replaced with the second starting opening sensor, and the second starting opening sensor 2401 of the game board 5 It has been replaced with a normal winning mouth sensor.

The center accessory 2500 of the game board 5A is provided in the space forming part 2550 between the right guide path group 2540 and the second attacker part 2560, and is a ball that can guide the game ball B that has flowed through the right guide path group 2540. It has a guide unit 2580 and a flat center right front plate 2590 extending vertically from the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 to the upper end of the second attacker part 2560 so as to cover the front of the ball guide unit 2580. .

The space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500 of the game board 5A has an opening 2553 penetrating a vertically elongated rectangular flange portion 2502 extending rightward from the peripheral wall portion 2501, and an opening portion 2553 below the opening portion 2553. It has a lower right first passage 2550a and a lower right second passage 2550b through which the game ball B guided by the ball guiding unit 2580 flows.

The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are formed in the shape of a crank that extends downward from the entrance, extends rightward, and then extends downward. A lower right second passage 2550b is provided on the right side of the lower right first passage 2550a. The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are open in front and closed by the center right front plate 2590. As shown in FIG. The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are located substantially in the vertical center of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5A.

Between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker portion 2560, a space is formed in which the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the .

Right above the first sub-out port 2021, the lower right second passage 2550b opens downward. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the lower right second passage 2550b has a higher probability of being received by the first sub-out port 2021 than the lower right first passage 2550a. Since the game ball B that has passed through the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 and the second guide passage 2580b of the ball guide unit 2580 flows through this lower right second passage 2550b, In order to reduce the acceptance probability of the game ball B, the player can be made to positively perform the hitting operation of entering the game ball B into the right first guide passage 2541 . Therefore, when striking to the right, hitting hard makes it easier for the game ball B to enter the right first guide passage 2541 near the impinging portion 1006, so it is necessary to hit the game ball B with fine adjustment. It is possible to easily perform the driving operation.

[8-1. ball guidance unit]
The ball guide unit 2580 separately guides the game balls B that have flowed through the right first guide passage 2541 and the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 in such a manner that they can be visually recognized from the front. The ball guide unit 2580 has a first guide path 2580a that guides the game ball B from the right first guide path 2541 and a second guide path 2580b that guides the game ball B from the right second guide path 2542. are doing. A second guide passage 2580b is provided on the right side of the first guide passage 2580a. The first guide path 2580a and the second guide path 2580b can guide the game ball B downward while rocking it in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction in a visible state.

The first guide passage 2580a of the ball guide unit 2580 has an inlet opening forward near the upper end and an outlet opening obliquely forward and downward at the lower end. The second guide passage 2580b has an entrance opening forward at a position slightly lower than the entrance of the first guide passage 2580a, and an exit opening obliquely forward and downward at the lower end.

The sphere guide unit 2580 includes a left passage member 2581 provided with a first guide passage 2580a that opens to the right, and a second guide that is attached to the right side of the left passage member 2581 and opens to the right. It is composed of a right passage member 2582 provided with a passage 2580b and a flat passage closing plate 2583 attached to the right side of the right passage member 2582 . The sphere guiding unit 2580 is made transparent.

The left passage member 2581 has a flat plate-shaped side wall portion 2581a that extends in the front-rear and up-down directions, and protrudes rightward from the right-facing surface of the side wall portion 2581a, and is inclined so that one side in the front-rear direction is lower. , and has a plurality of inclined portions 2581b spaced apart in the vertical direction. The plurality of inclined portions 2581b are provided at intervals that allow the game ball B to flow in the vertical direction, and are provided so that the lower sides alternately differ in the upper and lower directions. In addition, the plurality of inclined portions 2581b are arranged such that the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2581b extends outward in the front-rear direction from the lower end of the upper inclined portion 2581b with a space that allows the game ball B to circulate. is provided.

In addition, the left passage member 2581 includes standing wall portions 2581c extending upward from the upper end portions of the inclined portions 2581b, and extending upward from the upper end of the standing wall portions 2581c to the upper inclined portion 2581b. and a protruding top wall portion 2581d.
The ceiling wall portion 2581d extends in the front-rear direction substantially in parallel with the inclined portion 2581b above the inclined portion 2581b on which the standing wall portion 2581c rises. Further, the top wall portion 2581d extends in the front-rear direction from the upper inclined portion 2581b to near the lower surface of the further upper inclined portion 2581b, forming a gap between the upper inclined portion 2581b and the further upper inclined portion 2581b. .

Further, the left passage member 2581 includes a plurality of first projecting portions 2581e projecting rightward from portions between the vertically spaced inclined portions 2581b of the side wall portion 2581a, and the inclined portion 2581b of the side wall portion 2581a. and a plurality of first protruding pieces 2581f protruding rightward from a portion between the lower end and the standing wall portion 2581c. The first projecting portion 2581e is provided at a position corresponding to the vicinity of the center of the inclined portion 2581b in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate shape extending parallel to the lower inclined portion 2581b, and has a triangular shape with a tapered tip. formed. The first protrusion 2581f extends vertically, has a lower end in contact with the upper surface of the inclined portion 2581b, and has an upper end inclined downward to the right.

In the left passage member 2581, the uppermost inclined portion 2581b is inclined so that the rear end is lowered, and the upper end extends upward in an arc shape to form the lower side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2580a. . In addition, the lowermost inclined portion 2581b is inclined so that the front end is lower, and is positioned rearward from the front end of the upper inclined portion 2581b, forming the lower side of the exit of the first guide passage 2580a. are doing. Further, the lowermost ceiling wall portion 2581d does not extend from the upper end of the standing wall portion 2581c. The left passage member 2581 of this embodiment is provided with eight inclined portions 2581b.

The right passage member 2582 includes a flat side wall portion 2582a that closes the first guide passage 2580a that opens to the right, and a plurality of second guide passages 2582a that protrude leftward from the leftward surface of the side wall portion 2582a. It has one protrusion 2582b. When the ball guide unit 2580 is assembled, the plurality of first protrusions 2582b are provided two by two in the front-rear direction on one inclined portion 2581b of the left passage member 2581 with the first protrusions 2581e interposed therebetween. The upstream side of the first projecting portion 2581e of the first projecting portion 2582b projects to the left in a triangular shape, and the downstream side of the first projecting portion 2581e has an inclined edge on the upstream side and extends downstream to the vicinity of the standing wall portion 2581c. It protrudes to the left in a protruding trapezoidal shape.

In addition, the right passage member 2582 protrudes rightward from the rightward facing surface of the side wall portion 2582a, is inclined so that one side in the front-rear direction is lower, and is provided with a gap in the vertical direction. It has a plurality of inclined portions 2582c that are aligned. The plurality of inclined portions 2582c are provided at intervals that allow the game balls B to flow in the vertical direction, and are provided so that the lower sides in the upper and lower directions are alternately different. In addition, the plurality of inclined portions 2582c are arranged such that the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2582c extends outward in the front-rear direction from the lower end of the upper inclined portion 2582c with a gap that allows the game ball B to flow. is provided.

In addition, the right passage member 2582 includes standing wall portions 2582d extending upward from the upper end portions of the inclined portions 2582c and extending upward from the upper end of the standing wall portions 2582d to the upper inclined portion 2582c. and a protruding top wall portion 2582e.
The ceiling wall portion 2582e extends in the front-rear direction substantially in parallel with the inclined portion 2582c above the inclined portion 2582c on which the standing wall portion 2582d rises. In addition, the top wall portion 2582e extends in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the lower surface of the further upper inclined portion 2582c of the upper inclined portion 2582c, forming a gap with the further upper inclined portion 2582c. .

Further, the right passage member 2582 includes a plurality of second projecting portions 2582f projecting rightward from portions between the vertically spaced inclined portions 2582c of the side wall portion 2582a, and the inclined portion 2582c of the side wall portion 2581a. and a plurality of second protruding pieces 2582g protruding rightward from a portion between the lower end and the standing wall portion 2582d. The second protruding piece 2582g is provided at a position corresponding to the vicinity of the center of the inclined portion 2582c in the front-rear direction. is formed in The second projecting piece 2582g extends vertically, has a lower end in contact with the upper surface of the inclined portion 2582c, and has an upper end inclined downward to the right.

In the right passage member 2582, the uppermost inclined portion 2582c is inclined such that the rear end is lowered, and the front end forms the lower side of the entrance of the second guide passage 2580b. In addition, the lowermost inclined portion 2582c is inclined so that the front end is lower, and is positioned rearward from the front end of the upper inclined portion 2582c, forming the lower side of the outlet of the second guide passage 2580b. are doing. Further, the lowermost ceiling wall portion 2582e does not extend from the upper ends of the standing wall portions 2582d. The right passage member 2582 of this embodiment is provided with eight inclined portions 2582c.

The passage closing plate 2583 includes a flat side wall portion 2583a that closes the second guide passage 2580b that opens to the right, and a plurality of second guide passages 2583a that protrude leftward from the leftward surface of the side wall portion 2583a. It has two protrusions 2583b. When the ball guide unit 2580 is assembled, the plurality of second projections 2583b are provided two by two in the front-rear direction on one inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582 with the second projections 2582f therebetween. The second projecting portion 2583b projects leftward in a triangular shape on the upstream side of the second projecting portion 2582f, and the upstream side of the second projecting portion 2582f is inclined and extends downstream to the vicinity of the standing wall portion 2582d. It protrudes to the left in a protruding trapezoidal shape.

In the ball guide unit 2580 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2580a through the right first guide passage 2541 of the right guide passage group 2540, it moves backward by the inclined portion 2581b of the left passage member 2581. roll towards. A first projecting portion 2581e projects from the left above the inclined portion 2581b, and two first projecting portions 2582b of the right passage member 2582 project from the right so as to be anteroposterior to the first projecting portion 2581e. there is As a result, the game ball B is guided leftward by the first projecting portion 2582b, then guided rightward by the next first projecting portion 2581e, and further guided leftward again by the next first projecting portion 2582b. Then, it rolls while meandering (swinging) in the horizontal direction to the rear end (lower end) of the inclined portion 2581b.

Then, it flows down from the lower end of the inclined portion 2581b onto the lower inclined portion 2581b along the standing wall portion 2581c. At this time, the game ball B guided to the left by the first projecting portion 2582b is guided to the right by the first projecting piece portion 2581f projecting to the right and flows down to the lower inclined portion 2581b. do. As a result, the game ball B does not fall vertically from the upper inclined portion 2581b to the lower inclined portion 2581b.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the lower inclined portion 2581b rolls forward according to the inclination of the inclined portion 2581b. Also above this inclined portion 2581b, a first projecting portion 2581e projects from the left, and two first projecting portions 2582b of the right passage member 2582 project from the right so as to be anteroposterior to the first projecting portion 2581e. there is As a result, the game ball B guided to the right by the first projecting portion 2581f on the rear side is guided to the left by the first projecting portion 2582b, and then guided to the right by the next first projecting portion 2581e. Then, it is again guided to the left by the next first projecting portion 2582b and rolls while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction to the front end of the inclined portion 2581b. After that, when flowing downward from the front end of the inclined portion 2581b, it is guided to the right by the first projecting piece portion 2581f on the front side and further flows down on the inclined portion 2581b on the lower side, and the outlet of the first guide passage 2580a. Until then, the movement of the game ball B as described above is repeated.

Further, in the ball guide unit 2580, when the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2580b through the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540, it is pushed backward by the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582. Roll. Also in this second guide path 2580b, similarly to the first guide path 2580a, the game ball B flows down while rocking in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction. More specifically, above the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582, a second projecting portion 2582f projects from the left, and the second projecting portion 2582f of the passage closing plate 2583 protrudes from the right so as to be anteroposterior to the second projecting portion 2582f. Two protruding portions 2583b protrude. As a result, the game ball B is guided leftward by the second projecting portion 2583b, is guided rightward by the next second projecting portion 2582f, and is again guided leftward by the next second projecting portion 2583b. Then, it rolls while meandering (swinging) in the horizontal direction to the rear end (lower end) of the inclined portion 2582c.

Then, it flows down from the lower end of the inclined portion 2582c to the lower inclined portion 2582c along the standing wall portion 2582d. At this time, the game ball B guided to the left by the previous second projecting portion 2583b is guided to the right by the second projecting piece portion 2582g projecting to the right and flows down to the lower inclined portion 2582c. do. As a result, the game ball B does not fall vertically from the upper inclined portion 2582c to the lower inclined portion 2582c.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the lower inclined portion 2582c rolls forward according to the inclination of the inclined portion 2582c. Above the inclined portion 2582c, a second protrusion 2582f protrudes from the left, and two second protrusions 2583b of the passage closing plate 2583 protrude from the right so as to be anteroposterior to the second protrusion 2582f. there is As a result, the game ball B guided to the right by the second projecting portion 2582g on the rear side is guided to the left by the second projecting portion 2583b, and then guided to the right by the next second projecting portion 2582f. Then, it is again guided to the left by the next second projecting portion 2583b and rolls while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction to the front end of the inclined portion 2582c. After that, when flowing downward from the front end of the inclined portion 2582c, it is guided to the right by the second projecting piece portion 2582g on the front side and further flows down on the inclined portion 2582c on the lower side, and the outlet of the second guide passage 2580b. Until then, the movement of the game ball B as described above is repeated.

As described above, according to the ball guiding unit 2580 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has passed through the right guide passage group 2540 is caused to flow down while rocking (meandering) in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction, and then released downward. Therefore, compared with the case where the game ball B is made to flow down vertically or through a spiral passage, the staying time (flowing time) of the game ball B at the same height is lengthened. can be done. As a result, since the circulation speed of the game ball B is relatively slowed down, the game ball B can be easily seen by the player, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest. can.

In addition, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, since the game ball B is caused to flow down while swinging (meandering) in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction, compared to the case where the game ball B flows down through a spiral passage, moves in a complicated manner, the player can be entertained by the motion of the game ball B which has not been seen in the past pachinko machines, and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the ball guide unit 2580, since the left side faces the frame of the center role 2500, by looking through the frame of the center role 2500, the game ball B moves forward and backward in the ball guide unit 2580. The circulation of meandering balls can be visually recognized in a good condition, and the movement of the game balls B can be enjoyed.

Further, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, since the falling speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and delayed, it is possible to achieve the same effect as the specific obstacle nail group 2700 described above. In detail, for example, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, " Lottery for "small hit"), the second big winning opening 2007 of the second attacker part 2560 provided below the ball guiding unit 2580 is opened and closed in a short time so that the game ball B can be received (for example, , Small Win Rush), the player drives the game ball B so that the game ball B reaches the second big winning hole 2007 at the timing when the second big winning hole 2007 can be accepted. It will be done. At this time, even if the player attempts to hit the game ball B at that timing, since the ball guidance unit 2580 capable of delaying the flow speed of the game ball B is provided upstream of the second big winning hole 2007, It is possible to make the timing of hitting the game ball B difficult. As a result, a degree of difficulty can be imparted to the operation of hitting the game ball B, so that the game can be made worthwhile, the player can be entertained, and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the ball guide unit 2580, gaps are formed between the inclined portion 2581b and the ceiling wall portion 2581d and between the inclined portion 2582c and the ceiling wall portion 2582e. When ball clogging occurs inside the second guide passage 2580b, the ball clogging can be eliminated by inserting a thin rod-shaped member through the gap.

Also, according to the ball guide unit 2580, the left passage member 2581, the right passage member 2582, and the passage closing plate 2583 form the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b for guiding the game ball B. , compared to the case of forming a passage using a plurality of obstacle nails N, the passage of the game ball B is not deformed (deformation of the obstacle nail N), and the game ball B is guided in a stable state. can do.

[8-2. Center right front panel]
The center right front plate 2590 of the game board 5A is transparent and formed in a flat plate shape, and the center accessory 2500 covers the front from near the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 to the upper end of the second attacker part 2560. is attached to the front end of the right outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 in . The center right front plate 2590 covers the front of the right guide passage group 2540 and the space forming portion 2550 (including the ball guiding unit 2580).

The center right front plate 2590 has, at its lower portion, a plurality of first storage portions 2590a penetrating in the front-rear direction and each accommodating the head of a plurality of obstructing nails N, and a plurality of first accommodating portions 2590a penetrating in the front-rear direction to store the heads of one obstructing nail N. It has a second accommodation portion 2590b in which the head is accommodated, and a peeling hole 2590c penetrating back and forth.

In the first accommodation portion 2590a and the second accommodation portion 2590b, between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker portion 2560, the panel plate of the game panel 1100 whose front surface is exposed Heads of a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted in 1110 are accommodated.

The first accommodating portion 2590a is arranged to have a constant angle with respect to a circumferential line surrounding and in contact with the heads of a plurality of (not shown, but two or three in this embodiment) obstacle nails N that are accommodated. provided in the shape of an elongated hole forming a gap between the As a result, the center of the first receiving portion 2590a is different (eccentric) from the center of the obstructing nail N. The second accommodating portion 2590b is formed concentrically with the obstructing nail N. As shown in FIG. The first receiving portion 2590a and the second receiving portion 2590b match the obstructing nails N implanted between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker portion 2560, respectively. provided in the part.

As a result, since it is possible to restrict the movement of the head of the obstacle nail N housed in the first housing portion 2590a and the second housing portion 2590b, the impact due to the circulation (abutment) of the game ball B is reduced. It is possible to suppress deformation (bending) of the obstacle nail N due to external impact or the like, and it is possible to reduce the game ball B from flowing down in an unintended flow. The ball B can be distributed in a stable state, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed to suppress the deterioration of interest.

In addition, as described above, deformation of the obstacle nail N can be suppressed by the first accommodation portion 2590a and the second accommodation portion 2590b of the center right front plate 2590. The labor required for maintenance of the obstacle nail N can be reduced.

The peeling hole 2590c of the center right front plate 2590 is provided in a mounting boss for mounting the center right front plate 2590 to the main body of the center accessory 2500, and is provided coaxially with the mounting hole of the mounting boss. When a sticker for decoration or protection is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, a rod-shaped member such as a wire is inserted into the peeling hole 2590c from the rear side while the sticker is attached. A part of the seal can be rolled up forward from the center right front plate 2590 by pressing the seal forward from the rear side with the rod-shaped member. The seal can be easily removed (peeled off) from the center right front plate 2590 by an operator pulling the curled portion of the seal. As a result, it is possible to improve workability such as re-sticking of the seal during manufacturing and sorting during disposal.

Since this peeling hole 2590c is provided at the portion of the mounting boss, if a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the peeling hole 2590c into the rear side of the game panel 1100 or the portion through which the game ball B circulates, Also, in the state assembled to the game board 5, the rear side is closed by the mounting screw, it is possible to avoid the insertion of an illegal tool, and to prevent the fraudulent act.

If a sticker is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, the sticker can make it difficult to see the peeling hole 2590c from the front. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the peeling hole 2590c, and to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the peeling hole 2590c.

In addition, when a sticker is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, when assembled on the game board 5, the seal attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590 allows the first storage portion 2590a and the second storage portion 2590a to be attached. Since the front side of the portion 2590b can be closed, the obstructing nail N whose head is stored in the first storage portion 2590a or the second storage portion 2590b cannot be touched from the front. As a result, it is possible to avoid bending the obstructing nail N due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or intentionally bending the obstructing nail N. In addition, when the sticker is attached, when the obstacle nail N whose head is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590b is bent through the sticker, the trace remains on the sticker. It is possible to make it easier to notice the failure of the obstructing nail N.

[9. Relationship between the present invention and the embodiment]
The center right front plate 2555 of the center accessory 2500 in the game board 5 of this embodiment is the holding plate of the present invention, and the first storage portion 2555a and the second storage portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 of this embodiment are storage portions of the present invention. 2555d in front of the ridge portion of the center right front plate 2555 in this embodiment respectively correspond to the protrusion of the present invention.

[10. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B enters the specific obstacle nail group 2700 consisting of a plurality of obstacle nails N in the game area 5a of the game board 5, a predetermined guide area 2701 (first guide area 2711 or the second guidance area 2712) can be guided with a predetermined probability. The specific obstacle nail group 2700 is composed of at least a plurality of interlocking nail portions 2710 in which two interfering nails N constitute a pair of interlocking nail portions 2710. Since a gap is provided through which the ball B can pass, one obstacle nail N of the nail group 2710 forms a gap through which the game ball B can pass in the direction in which the remaining obstacle nails N are adjacent to each other. Therefore, only the formation of the gaps in the directions in which the remaining obstructing nails N are not adjacent to each other is in charge. In other words, in the peg part 2710, in one obstacle peg N, the direction in charge of forming the gap through which the game ball B can pass can be a part of the direction. Therefore, even if one obstacle nail N of the nail group 2710 is bent, the number of gaps affected by the number of gaps formed by the nail group 2710 paired with the nail group 2710 is affected. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a large change in the flow of the game ball B, and to facilitate the circulation of the game ball B in a desired and intended flow path in a stable state.

At this time, the first accommodating portion 2555a of the center right front plate 2555 accommodates the front end of each of the obstructing nails N of the plurality of interfering nail portions 2710 constituting the specific obstructing nail group 2700. The front ends of individual obstructing nails N constituting the specific obstructing nail group 2700 are housed in the second containing portion 2555b of 2555 . In the peg part 2710, the front ends of two obstruction nails N planted close to each other are accommodated in one first accommodating part 2555a, and two obstruction nails planted close to each other are accommodated in one first accommodating part 2555a. Since it is difficult for the nails N to bend in the directions in which they are approaching each other, by surrounding the portions in the direction in which they are not approaching each other with the first accommodation portion 2555a as a set, the obstructing nails N can be bent in any direction. It can also be made difficult to bend. On the other hand, since the front end of one obstacle nail N implanted alone is accommodated in the second accommodation portion 2555b, the obstacle nail N can be made difficult to bend by the second accommodation portion 2555b. For this reason, the interfering nail N of the plurality of interfering nail portions 2710 and the individual interfering nail N constituting the specific interfering nail group 2700 are placed in the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b of the center right front panel 2555. Therefore, even if impact is applied to the obstacle nail N due to the contact of the game ball B or the contact of a tool or the like during maintenance, the front end of the obstacle nail N will remain in the first accommodation portion. 2555a and the peripheral wall of the second accommodating portion 2555b, it is possible to prevent further movement of the (plurality of) obstacle nails N and make it difficult to bend the plurality of obstacle nails N (specific obstacle nail group 2700). It is possible to maintain the flow of the game ball B by the intended initial state (at the time of shipment). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to bend the plurality of obstacle nails N constituting the specific obstacle nail group 2700 by the plurality of first accommodation portions 2555a and the second accommodation portions 2555b of the center right front plate 2555. It is possible to stably circulate in an intended flow, to continue to guide the game ball B with a predetermined probability by the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and to achieve the intended effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700. The pachinko machine 1 can be exhibited reliably, and the performance assumed by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 can be exhibited for a long time.

Further, since the specific obstruction nail group 2700 is composed of a plurality of interlocking nail portions 2710 and a single obstruction nail N, the number of implanted obstruction nails N can be relatively increased. The game ball B can be brought into contact with the obstacle nail N of the . Therefore, by increasing the number of times that the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nail N, it is possible to further suppress the circulation speed of the game ball B and change the circulation direction of the game ball B in various directions. The movement of the game ball B can be made more enjoyable, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, the center right front plate 2555 is provided with a plurality of rearwardly protruding front ridges 2555d. Since the distribution speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and the distribution direction of the game ball B can be changed, the player can see more various movements of the game ball B, which amuses the player and adds interest. A decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the front 2555d of the ridge portion of the center right front plate 2555 does not bend unlike the obstacle nail N, the flow of the game ball B can be stably maintained by the front 2555d of the plurality of ridge portions, and the pachinko machine 1 The performance expected by the manufacturer can be exhibited for a long time.

In addition, since the center right front plate 2555 is provided with the front ridge portion 2555d, the ridge portion front 2555d of the center right front plate 2555 inhibits the circulation speed of the game ball B or changes the circulation direction. Since the function similar to N can be exhibited and the front end of the obstacle nail N is accommodated in the accommodation part of the center right front plate 2555, the center right front plate 2555 is provided near the front end of the game area 5a. The center right front plate 2555 can be extended to a portion in the game area 5a where the obstructing nail N is difficult to be implanted, and a front ridge portion 2555d can be provided at the portion. As a result, in place of the obstacle nail N, the front ridge portion 2555d is provided in place of the obstacle nail N in a portion where the obstacle nail N cannot be planted in a conventional pachinko machine or in a portion outside the specific obstacle nail group 2700. Since the B can be made to move in the same way as the obstacle nail N, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B in a wider range, and the decline in the player's interest can be suppressed.

In addition, downstream of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, a second big prize winning opening 2007 is provided which opens and closes to accept the game ball B according to the progress of the game (lottery result of the first special symbol and lottery result of the second special symbol). Since the game ball B can be brought into contact with many obstacle nails N in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the circulation of the game ball B can be delayed. When guided by the group 2700, the game ball B can be delayed to reach the second big winning hole 2007 provided downstream compared to the normal plurality of obstacle nails N. The timing of hitting the game ball B aimed at the winning hole 2007 can be made difficult, and a desired degree of difficulty can be imparted to the hitting operation of the game ball B.例文帳に追加At this time, since the obstacle nail N of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is made difficult to bend by the center right front plate 2555 as described above, the game ball B can be continuously guided by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 with a predetermined probability. Thus, a desired difficulty level can be set for the driving operation without fail, and the difficulty level of the driving operation as the performance assumed by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 can be maintained for a long time. As described above, it is possible to arouse the player's desire for the hitting operation, and the player can enjoy the hitting operation of the game ball B, and the game ball B is accepted in the second prize winning opening 2007. A sense of accomplishment can be imparted by being received, and a decline in interest of the player can be suppressed. In addition, as described above, since the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can impart a degree of difficulty to the driving operation, it is possible to make it difficult to accept the game ball B into the second big winning hole 2007, and the second By suppressing the chance of paying out the game balls B by accepting them into the big winning hole 2007, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, since the plurality of first storage portions 2555a and the second storage portions 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 have a gap between them and the front ends of the obstructing nails N stored therein, temperature and humidity are reduced. Even if the center right front plate 2555 expands and contracts due to such environmental changes, the gaps can absorb changes in the positions of the first accommodating portion 2555a or the second accommodating portion 2555b and the obstacle nail N due to expansion and contraction. Therefore, even if the center right front plate 2555 expands and contracts, it is possible to avoid bending of the plurality of obstructing nails N and breakage of the center right front plate 2555 due to resistance from the plurality of obstructing nails N. As a result, by enlarging the center right front plate 2555, even if the change in the distance from one end to the other end becomes large due to expansion and contraction, the above-described effects can be achieved. The plate 2555 can be enlarged, and the plurality of obstacle nails N of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 planted in a wide range in the game area 5a can be reliably made difficult to bend. Therefore, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B to the downstream second big winning hole 2007 with an intended predetermined probability, and the movement of the game ball B according to the intended flow of the game ball B can be enjoyed. The decline in interest can be suppressed, the flow of the game balls B by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be stably maintained, and the performance assumed by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 can be exhibited for a long time. As this large center right front plate 2555, for example, the height is in the range of 1/3 to 3/3 of the height of the game area 5a, and the left and right width is 1/10 to 10/10 of the width of the game area 5a. A range can be mentioned.

In addition, in the plurality of first accommodation portions 2555a and second accommodation portions 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, since there are gaps between the front ends of the plurality of obstacle nails N of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the game board The front ends of the implanted obstruction nails N can be easily inserted into the corresponding first receiving portion 2555a and second receiving portion 2555b when assembling the pachinko machine, thereby facilitating assembly. An increase in the cost of the machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the center right front plate seal 2556 for closing the first storage portion 2555a and the second storage portion 2555b is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, the first storage portion 2555a and the second storage portion 2555b are attached from the front. It is not possible to touch the obstructing nail N whose front end is housed in the . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the obstructing nail N from being bent due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or the obstructing nail N being intentionally bent. Further, in this case, when the obstacle nail N whose front end is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2555a or the second accommodating portion 2555b through the center right front plate seal 2556 is bent, the trace remains on the center right front plate seal 2556. Therefore, the failure of the obstructing nail N can be easily noticed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the door frame 3 are supplied to the lower tray 202 through the ball removal guiding path 241c of the tray unit base 211, From the right side in the vicinity of the front end of the lower tray ball supply port 211c that opens forward in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 for supplying the game balls B that cannot be stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202 from behind The game ball B enters the storage passage 150e and rolls to the left side on the opposite side. On the left side opposite to the lower tray ball supply port 211c, there is provided a ball guiding portion 213 which is inclined so as to move to the other side as it goes forward, so that game balls from the ball extraction guiding path 241c are provided. B rolls along the ball guiding portion 213, making it easier to roll along the periphery of the lower plate 202, which is a high portion on the bottom surface of the lower plate 202, so that the game ball B is far from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. It can be rolled to the other part in the left-right direction, and the supplied game ball B can be prevented from immediately reaching the part of the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. From such a thing, since the game ball B can be rolled so as to revolve toward the lowest lower tray ball extraction hole 202a in the lower tray 202, evenly in each direction centering on the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a The game balls B can be stored, and it is possible to make it difficult for the game balls B to accumulate in the vicinity of the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e. That is, it is possible to reduce clogging of the game balls B in the vicinity of the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e (ball extraction guideway 241c) at an early stage when the game balls B are stored in the lower tray 202. As many game balls B as possible can be stored even if the player does not level the bottom tray 202.例文帳に追加Therefore, when the player is in an advantageous game state such as a "jackpot" game, the frequent execution of guidance for prompting the discharge of the game ball B in the lower tray 202 to the dollar box or the like can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel annoyed, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, since the left side surface of the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e is inclined as the ball guiding portion 213 so as to move to the other side toward the front side, the lower tray ball of the storage passage 150e in the lower tray 202 Even if a plurality of game balls B accumulate in front of the supply port 211c, it is possible to form a gap through which the game balls B can flow between the pool of the game balls B and the ball guide portion 213. The game ball B sent to the lower tray 202 without being stored in the upper tray 201 through the gap, the game ball B from the ball extraction guideway 241c, etc. can be sent to the left part of the lower tray 202, As many game balls B as possible can be stored on the plate 202.例文帳に追加

In addition, the center of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, which opens toward the front of the storage passage 150e, is located on the right side of the center of the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202. Compared to the case where the center of the outlet 150e in the horizontal direction coincides with the center of the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a (see FIG. 50(b)), the right side of the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a in the lower tray 202 is Since the area can be widened, the number of stored game balls B can be increased when the game balls B are stored in the lower tray 202 until the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e is blocked. . Therefore, in combination with the function and effect of the ball guiding portion 213 as described above, it is possible to store as many game balls B as possible without leveling the lower plate 202 by the player. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which is more likely to exhibit its effects.

By the way, in the conventional pachinko machine 1 as shown in FIG. The game ball B cannot be supplied to the plate 202. - 特許庁As a result, although the lower tray 202 still has room, the full-tank detection sensor 154 is turned on, and the payout of the game balls B is stopped. Then, depending on the player, the payout is stopped despite the fact that the lower tray 202 has room, and there is a risk that the player will feel distrust and lose interest in the game. Alternatively, if guidance is executed to open the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b and move the game ball B to the dollar box in spite of the fact that the lower tray 202 has room, the player feels annoyed and loses interest. There is a risk that it will be lost. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, even if the player does not level the bottom plate 202, as many game balls B as possible can be stored until the bottom tray 202 is almost full. Therefore, when the player looks at the lower tray 202 when the payout is stopped, the player can immediately recognize that the lower tray 202 has no room and is full, without giving the player a sense of resistance. The ball extraction hole 202a can be opened and moved to the dollar box, and the player can be made to recognize that many game balls B have been paid out, thereby entertaining the player and suppressing the decline in interest. .

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is stuck in the tank rail 553 of the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 (when a so-called ball jam occurs), the tank rail 553 By touching the clogged game ball B from the outside through any of a plurality of openings 553d penetrating at the bottom (main guide part 553a) of the game ball B, the clogged game ball B is broken and clogged. can be done. Therefore, since the clogging of balls in the tank rail 553 can be easily eliminated, the interruption time of the game can be shortened as much as possible, so that the discomfort given to the player due to the interruption of the game can be reduced. It is possible to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the ball straightening member 556 that can swing in the vertical direction is provided on the upper part of the tank rail 553, the ball straightening member 556 comes into contact with the game balls B stacked vertically on the tank rail 553 from above. When the game balls B circulate in this state, the height of the game balls B stacked vertically changes, and the change in height causes the ball straightening member 556 to swing vertically. By swinging the ball rectifying member 556 in the vertical direction, resistance is applied to the upper game ball B in contact with the ball rectifying member 556, and the lower game ball B tends to move to the downstream side faster than the lower game ball B. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from engaging with each other by moving downward so as to cut into the row of the lower game balls B arranged in a row. Further, when the ball straightening member 556 moves downward, the upper game ball B is hit downward, so that the upper game ball B can be collapsed and the game balls B stacked up and down can be broken. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B, to reduce the interruption of the game due to clogging as much as possible, and to suppress the deterioration of the interest caused by the interruption of the game.

Furthermore, as described above, by circulating the game ball B in the tank rail 553, the game ball B can be hit downward by the ball rectifying member 556. In addition, the tank rail 553 can be vibrated to make it easier to discharge the dirt, dust, etc. in the tank rail 553 downward from the opening 553d. Therefore, since the dirt, dust, etc. in the tank rail 553 can be reduced as much as possible, it is possible to make it difficult for balls to clog due to dirt, dust, etc., and the same effect as described above can be achieved. can.

In addition, since at least one of the plurality of openings 553d is provided below the portion where the ball straightening member 556 is provided, dirt, dust, etc. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can make it difficult for ball jamming to occur and can more easily exhibit the above-described effects.

In addition, since a plurality of openings 553d having the above-described effects are provided in the direction in which the game ball B is guided in the tank rail 553, even if the ball clogging occurs in any part of the tank rail 553, It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can eliminate ball clogging through the opening 553d at the closest position and can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

Furthermore, since the opening 553d extends long in the guiding direction of the game ball B, the opening of the opening 553d can be made relatively large, and the game ball rolling on the bottom of the tank rail 553 It is possible to make it easier to discharge dirt, dust, etc. from B downward. Therefore, it is possible to reduce dust, dust, etc. in the tank rail 553 as much as possible, and it is possible to easily embody the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects.

In addition, since the opening 553d is opened downward and rearward, the game ball B cannot pass through and is less likely to interfere with rolling (circulation), while the opening is large enough to be contacted from the outside. 553d, it is possible to facilitate the realization of the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects.

Furthermore, since the opening 553d is opened downward and rearward, the game ball B inside can be easily visually recognized through the opening 553d only by looking from the rear without looking in from below. Therefore, even if the tank rail 553 is opaque, it is possible to easily identify the place where the clogged ball occurs, so that the clogged ball can be easily eliminated, and the pachinko machine reliably exhibits the above-described effects. Machine 1 can be provided.

In addition, since at least one opening 553d is provided in the portion below the ball straightening member 556 in the tank rail 553, in a state in which a plurality of game balls B are filled in the tank rail 553, By touching the game ball B so as to press upward through the opening 553d, the ball straightening member 556 can be pressed upward through the plurality of game balls B. At this time, by confirming the upward movement of the ball straightening member 556, it is possible to confirm whether or not the ball straightening member 556 is in a swingable state. The aligning effect of the game balls B can be surely exerted to suppress ball clogging. In addition, since the state of the ball straightening member 556 can be easily confirmed through the opening 553d, workability in maintenance can be improved, and the burden on the gaming hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced. can be made

In addition, since a transparent protective cover 559 is provided to cover the upper part of the tank rail 553 in a state in which the ball rectifying member 556 can be swung in the vertical direction, the protective cover 559 prevents dust and dirt from entering the tank rail 553 from above. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can prevent dust and the like from entering and that can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

Furthermore, since the protective cover 559 that covers the ball straightening member 556 and the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the state of the ball straightening member 556 can be seen from the outside through the protective cover 559, and the state of the ball straightening member 556 can be easily confirmed. can do. In addition, since the state inside the tank rail 553 can be seen through the protective cover 559, when ball clogging occurs, the location of the occurrence can be easily found. As a result, maintenance work can be reduced, and the effects described above can be reliably achieved.

In addition, as described above, by hitting the game ball B from above to below with the ball straightening member 556, it is possible to drop dust and dirt adhering to the game ball B, and the opening portion 553d can be used to clean the tank. Since the garbage, dust, etc. in the rail 553 can be discharged to the outside, the game balls B with as little dust, dust, etc. as possible can be supplied to the payout device 580, and the garbage in the payout device 580 can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of defects caused by dust, etc.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the payout base unit 550 of the main body frame 4, a plurality of game balls B are connected to the external terminal plate 558558 to which the electric wire with the coating removed from the tip is connected from behind. A stored ball tank 552 is provided adjacent to the right direction, and a tank rail 553 for aligning and guiding the game balls B from the ball tank 552 to the payout device 580 is below and behind the external terminal plate 558. A ball straightening member 556 is provided which extends in the left-right direction at the portion of the tank rail 553 and swings up and down so that the game balls B stacked on top of the tank rail 553 can collapse. Then, a top plate portion 559c covering an upper part of the tank rail 553 and an upper portion of the ball straightening member 556 and a guide that can guide the game ball B outward in the left direction in front of and below the top plate portion 559c A protective cover 559 having a plate portion 559d is provided. As a result, the guide plate portion 559d of the protective cover 559 is provided between the top plate portion 559c above the tank rail 553 and the external terminal plate 558 at a position lower than the top plate portion 559c. An electric wire connected to the plate 558 and hanging backward can be bridged between the external terminal plate 558 and the top plate portion 559c like a bridge, and the game ball B is placed below the electric wire at the portion of the guide plate portion 559d. can form a gap through which the liquid can flow. Therefore, even if the electric wire connected to the external terminal plate 558 from behind hangs down on the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559, the game ball is Since it is possible to secure a gap in the height direction through which B can flow, the guidance of the game ball B to the left by the guide plate portion 559d is not hindered by the electric wire, and the guidance of the protective cover 559 By the plate portion 559d, the game ball B near the external terminal plate 558 can be guided outward in the left direction away from the external terminal plate 558, and the game ball B can be reliably removed from behind the external terminal plate 558. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from staying near the external terminal plate 558 . Therefore, even if the electric wire connected to the external terminal plate 558 is pulled out due to incomplete insertion of the electric wire into the external terminal plate 558 or the electric wire is pulled backward for some reason, Since the game ball B with which the tip of the electric wire contacts does not exist near the external terminal plate 558, the tip of the electric wire does not contact the game ball B, and the short circuit of the electric wire can be avoided. . By avoiding short-circuiting of electric wires, it is possible to ensure that the computer (hall computer) in the game hall receives the necessary information, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of counting errors in the game hall. A pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

In addition, since the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559 covers at least a portion of the upper portion of the ball rectifying member 556 and the tank rail 553, the electric wire connected to the external terminal plate 558 may Even if it comes off from the terminal plate 558, the top plate portion 559c can prevent the tip of the wire that has come off from contacting the game ball B in the tank rail 553, and the wire is pulled out due to contact with the game ball B. short-circuit can be prevented, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

In addition, as described above, short-circuiting of the electric wire can be avoided, so that necessary information can be reliably received by the hall controller due to short-circuiting of the electric wire, and errors in counting can be prevented. , it is possible to avoid maintenance due to the occurrence of the error, etc., and to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, since the guide plate portion 559d of the protective cover 559 guides the game ball B outward in the left direction, even if the game ball B falls onto the protective cover 559 for some reason, the game ball B can be dropped to the outside of the game machine in the horizontal direction, and the game ball B can be prevented from falling to the rear side of the game machine. Therefore, since the game ball B does not come into contact with the electric wire hanging down on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, the game ball B may get caught on the electric wire hanging down on the rear side and stay there, or the game ball B may be caught on the electric wire. There is no fear that the electric wire will be pulled out from the external terminal plate 558 due to contact, and the game ball B will stay behind the pachinko machine 1, the electric wire will be pulled out from the external terminal plate 558, etc. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of defects.

By the way, in the tank rail 553, the game balls B stacked up and down are arranged in one row. When trying to overtake the game balls B in the lower stage, the game balls B may mesh with each other and become stuck (so-called ball clogging). On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the ball straightening member 556 is provided in the upper part of the tank rail 553, the ball straightening member 556 contacts the game balls B stacked up and down on the tank rail 553 from above. When the game balls B circulate in this state, the height of the game balls B stacked vertically changes, and the change in height causes the ball straightening member 556 to swing vertically. By swinging the ball rectifying member 556 in the vertical direction, resistance is applied to the upper game ball B in contact with the ball rectifying member 556, preventing the lower game ball B from being overtaken. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from engaging with each other by moving downward so as to cut in behind the lower game balls B arranged in a line. Further, when the ball straightening member 556 moves downward, the upper game ball B is hit downward, so that the upper game ball B can be collapsed and the game balls B stacked up and down can be broken. , the game balls B can be prevented from being clogged, and the tank rail 553 and the ball straightening member 556 can align the game balls B stacked in the ball tank 552 and supply them to the payout device, The game ball B can be paid out without delay by the payout device 580.例文帳に追加

Since the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559 covers the upper part of the ball rectifying member 556, the wires hanging down from the external terminal plate 558 come into contact with the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559, causing the ball rectifying member 556 to It is possible to prevent the sphere rectifying member 556 from being unable to swing in the vertical direction due to the contact of the electric wire. Therefore, even if the electric wire hangs down from the external terminal plate 558 above the ball rectifying member 556, the ball rectifying member 556 is protected by the protective cover 559 so that the ball rectifying member 556 can swing vertically. The game balls B piled up can be surely collapsed by the movement, and the occurrence of ball clogging can be prevented.

In addition, since the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559 covers the upper part of the ball straightening member 556, even if the game ball B flows down toward the ball straightening member 556 for some reason, the top plate portion of the protective cover 559 The game ball B can be guided in a direction away from the external terminal plate 558 and eliminated before contacting the ball straightening member 556 by 559c. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the game balls B are placed on the ball rectifying member 556 and cannot swing in the vertical direction. occurrence can be prevented.

In addition, since the tank rail 553 extends in the left-right direction so as to pass behind the external terminal plate 558, the volume of the tank rail 553 can be increased. The amount of stored game balls B for payout in can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, when the player is in an advantageous game state such as a "jackpot" game in which a large number of game balls B are paid out, the game balls B to be paid out run out (so-called ball runs out), and the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to prevent the player from giving the game a loss of interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a box-shaped back box having an opening 3010a penetrating back and forth behind the game panel 1100 in front of which the game area 5a of the game board 5 is provided. 3000 is provided, and at the position of the opening 3010a of the back box 3000, a performance display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined performance image is detachably attached directly to the back box 3010 when the size is the same as the opening 3010a, Since it is detachably attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650 when it is smaller than the opening 3010a, when the size of the effect display device 1600 is smaller than the opening 3010a, it can be attached to the back via the set plate 1650. A presentation display device 1600 can be attached to the box 3010 . More specifically, in this embodiment, the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is sized to accommodate a 19-inch performance display device, and a 19-inch set plate 1650 corresponding to the opening 3010a has a 15-inch After attaching the effect display device 1600, the set plate 1650 is fitted into the opening 3010a and attached to the back box 3010. - 特許庁As a result, the 15-inch performance display device 1600 can be attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650 .

Therefore, when the size of the performance display device 1600 is changed due to model change or design change, the performance display device 1600 can be attached by a set plate 1650 matching the size of the performance display device 1600 without changing the back box 3010. Therefore, the back box 3010 can be used as it is, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. As a result, the effect display device 1600 having a size different from the conventional one can be provided while suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the effect display device 1600 having a different size can be compared with the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a high appeal to the player by making it easier to make the pachinko machine 1 with different appearances to strongly attract the player's interest.

In addition, since the back box 3010 is box-shaped and the strength and rigidity of the back box 3010 are high, even if a large (heavy) effect display device 1600 is attached, it can be sufficiently supported. The opening 3010a to which the 1600 is attached can be made as large as possible, and the largest effect display device 1600 (here, 19 inches) can be attached to the back box 3010 (pachinko machine). . In addition, due to model changes and design changes, various decorations and effects such as a back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200, a back top front effect unit 3300, a back bottom front effect unit 3400, and a back top rear effect unit are provided in front of the effect display device 1600. 3500 and the back and bottom rear effect unit 3600, when the range that can be seen from the front is changed, the effect display device 1600 (here, 15 inches) of the optimum size for the range is set to the set plate 1650. can be attached to the back box 3010 via the . Therefore, by using the set plate 1650, it is possible to attach the effect display device 1600 of various sizes, so that it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being provided with an unnecessarily large effect display device 1600.例文帳に追加Therefore, an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650 arranged in the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, the position of the effect display device 1600 with respect to the back box 3010 may be changed due to design changes or the like. In the case of change, the position of the performance display device 1600 can be changed only by changing the set plate 1650 without changing the back box 3010, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. The effect display device 1600 can be provided at a more effective position, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the players can be provided.

Also, when the effect display device 1600 is smaller than the opening 3010a, the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650, so that the effect display device 1600 and the opening 3010a can be closed by a set plate 1650. Therefore, in the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, dust, dirt, game balls B, etc. cannot enter the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the performance display device 1600 and the opening 3010a. can be prevented, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of defects that cause the interruption of the game, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing due to the interruption of the game, so that the player can enjoy it. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the set plate 1650 for attaching the effect display device 1600 to the back box 3010 is transparent and flat, when the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650, the effect display device Through the space between 1600 and the opening 3010a, it is possible to visually recognize from the front to the rear or from the rear to the front. Therefore, it is possible to check the inside of the pachinko machine 1 from the outside and to check the inside of the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed from the inside of the pachinko machine 1, thereby facilitating maintenance. By doing so, the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In addition, since the set plate 1650 is formed in a flat plate shape, the space occupied by the set plate 1650 in the front-rear direction can be reduced. The back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200, the back top front effect unit 3300, and the back bottom front as a decorative body, a performance device, etc. that can easily secure a space for arranging and can expect a higher effect. A production unit 3400, a back-up post-production unit 3500, and a back-down post-production unit 3600 can be provided, and the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players can be provided.

Furthermore, since the back box 3010 is provided behind the game panel 1100 in front of which the game area 5a is provided, the performance display device is attached to the back box 3010 through the game panel 1100 when viewed from the front. The effect image by 1600 can be visually recognized, and the player can be entertained by the effect image. In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 can be made to have a feeling similar to that of a conventional pachinko machine in which a performance image can be seen in the game area 5a, the player who is familiar with the conventional pachinko machine can be given a sense of security by appearance. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played.

In addition, a pachinko machine is provided by a back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, a back top front effect unit 3300, a back bottom front effect unit 3400, a back top post effect unit 3500, and a back bottom after effect unit 3600 arranged inside the back box 3010. can be characterized, the pachinko machine 1 can easily attract the player's interest, and the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player can be provided. In addition, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back top front effect unit 3300, the back bottom front effect unit 3400, the back top after effect unit 3500, and the back bottom after effect unit 3600 arranged inside the back box 3010 , the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back upper front production unit 3300, the back lower front production unit 3400, the back upper rear production unit 3500, and the back lower rear production unit 3600, and By appropriately combining the effect image of the effect display device 1600, it is possible to show various effects to the player, to prevent the player from getting bored, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the back box 3010, when the effect display device 1600 breaks down, the effect display device 1600 can be easily removed from the back box 3010, thus requiring maintenance. can be reduced to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, within the game area 5a of the game board 5A where a game is played with the game balls B, the ball guidance unit 2580 of the center accessory 2500 is provided in the left-right direction. 1st guide passage 2580a and 2580b through which the ball B can flow, and the downstream side of the 1st guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b according to the progress of the game (lottery result of the special symbol drawn) Since the second big winning hole 2007 that can accept the game ball B is provided, when the second big winning hole 2007 becomes acceptable according to the lottery result of the drawn special symbol, the second big winning hole 2007 In order to accept the game ball B into the big winning opening 2007, the player is asked to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a so that the game ball B flows through the first guide path 2580a or the second guide path 2580b. It is possible to make the game ball B hit the entrance of the first guide passage 2580a and the entrance of the second guide passage 2580b ("right shot"), and to perform the operation ("right shot") within the game area 5a. Depending on whether or not the hit game ball B is guided by the desired first guide path 2580a which is easily accepted into the second big winning hole 2007, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player's sense of anticipation. can be made to raise and the decline of interest can be suppressed. Also, at the timing when the second big winning hole 2007 can be accepted, the game ball B passing through the first guide path 2580a or the second guiding path 2580b reaches the second big winning hole 2007 The hitting operation of the game ball B can be urged to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a, and the hitting operation of the game ball B can be enjoyed to suppress the deterioration of interest.

Then, when the game ball B enters the first guide path 2580a or the second guide path 2580b, a plurality of vertically inclined sides are alternately provided so that one side in the front-rear direction is lower. The inclined portion 2581b of the left passage member 2581 or the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582, and the vertical wall portion 2581c and the vertical wall portion 2582d extending upward from the lower ends of the respective inclined portions 2581b and 2582c allow the game ball B is guided downward in a zigzag manner in the front-rear direction, and a first projecting portion 2581e, a first projecting portion 2582b, and a second projecting portion 2582b project from the side wall portion 2581a and the side wall portion 2582a above the respective inclined portions 2581b and 2582c. The side wall portion 2581a is located between the second projecting portion 2582f and the second projecting portion 2583b of the passage closing plate 2583, the lower end of the upper inclined portion 2581b or the inclined portion 2582c, and the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2581b or the inclined portion 2582c. The game ball B is guided in a meandering manner in the horizontal direction by the first projecting piece portion 2581f and the second projecting piece portion 2582g projecting from the side wall portion 2582a. As a result, the game ball B is guided downward while rocking in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction in a visible state, so that the player can experience the movement of the game ball B that has never been seen in the conventional pachinko machine 1. , and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

At this time, the side wall portion 2581a, the side wall portion 2582a, and the side wall portion 2583a provided on the left and right sides of the inclined portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c move the game ball B from the inclined portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c to the left and right outer sides. In addition, the vertical wall portion 2581c or the vertical wall portion 2582d extending upward from the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2581b or the inclined portion 2582c allows the downward inclination from the upper inclined portion 2581b or the inclined portion 2582c. Since it is possible to prevent the game ball B moving to the part 2581b and the inclined part 2582c from dropping outward in the front-rear direction, the game ball B can be guided along the plurality of inclined parts 2581b and the inclined parts 2582c. It is possible to reliably achieve the above-described effects.

Since the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b have a plurality of inclined portions 2581b and 2582c that are inclined so that one side in the front-rear direction is lower, the inclined portions 2581b and the inclined portions When the game ball B guided at 2582c is viewed from the front, the speed of the game ball B flowing down is slower than that of a free flow, and the position of the game ball B in the forward and backward direction looks unclear. As a result, it is possible to make it appear as if the game ball B is slowly flowing down against the gravity, so that the player can see the movement of the game ball B, which could not be seen in the conventional pachinko machine, and the game is played. It is possible to entertain the person and suppress the decline of interest.

In this way, since the game ball B can be swung in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction and guided downward by the first guide path 2580a and the second guide path 2580b, compared with the case where the game ball B is allowed to flow freely. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball B can be relatively slowed down (delayed). As a result, the staying time of the game ball B in the game area 5a can be lengthened, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B for a long time, and the player is less likely to get bored. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

By the way, if the guide passage is designed to allow the game ball B to spirally flow down, the spirally flowing game ball B will pass through the most front portion of the spiral many times. It is easy to get the timing for Therefore, at the time of a "small hit" or the like, it is possible to relatively easily accept the game ball B into the second big winning hole 2007 on the downstream side. There was a risk that they would get bored early and lose their interest. On the other hand, in the ball guide unit 2580 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is guided by the first guide path 2580a or the second guide path 2580b, Since the circulation speed is suppressed by rocking the game ball B in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction, the game ball B is delayed to the second big winning opening 2007 on the downstream side compared to other areas in the game area 5a. As a result, the timing of hitting the game ball B aimed at the second big winning hole 2007 can be made difficult, and a degree of difficulty can be imparted to the hitting operation. As a result, it is possible to arouse the player's desire for the hitting operation, and the player can enjoy the hitting operation of the game ball B, and the game ball B is accepted in the second prize winning opening 2007, which is achieved. It is possible to impart a sense of excitement to the player and suppress the decline in the interest of the player.

In addition, since it is possible to impart a degree of difficulty to the driving operation of the game ball B aimed at the second large winning opening 2007 by the first guiding passage 2580a and the second guiding passage 2580b, the second large winning opening 2007 It is possible to make it difficult to accept the game ball B. As a result, since it is difficult to accept the game ball B to the second large winning opening 2007 by the first guide path 2580a and the second guide path 2580b, a predetermined number of game balls are received by accepting the game ball B to the second large winning opening 2007. It is possible to reduce the chance of B being paid out, and to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, when the game ball B is clogged in the first guide passage 2580a or the second guide passage 2580b (when ball clogging occurs), the inclined portion 2581b of the left passage member 2581 as a communicating portion and the ceiling wall portion 2581d The clogging can be easily eliminated by inserting a thin rod-like member from the outside through the gap between them and the gap between the inclined part 2582c of the right passage member 2582 and the top wall part 2582e and striking the game ball B. can be done. Therefore, even if a clogged ball occurs in the first guide path 2580a or the second guide path 2580b during the game, it can be resolved early, so that the game interruption time can be shortened as much as possible. , it is possible to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the first guide path 2580a and the second guide path 2580b are provided in the horizontal direction, the player can see the game balls B guided in the first guide path 2580a and the second guide path 2580b, respectively. It is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball B and suppress the deterioration of interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player hits the game ball B into the game area 5a in order to play a game, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the game area 5a , the game ball B flows down while making various movements, and the game ball B that has flowed down to the downstream end in the game area 5 a is discharged from the out port 1008 . In this game area 5a, the progress of the game (lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005 and the lottery result of the second special symbol) Since the second large prize winning port 2007 that opens and closes according to the is provided, when the game ball B is accepted in the second large prize winning port 2007 when the second large prize winning port 2007 is in a state capable of receiving the game ball B , the game ball B is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2561 and then circulates in the pseudo game area 2010 . Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are also planted in this pseudo game area 2010, the game ball B flows down while making various movements due to these obstacle nails N, and reaches the downstream end in the pseudo game area 2010. The game ball B that has flowed down is discharged from a pseudo-out port 2404 adjacent to the out port 1008. - 特許庁And, in this pseudo game area 2010, since a pseudo big winning hole 2402 having a larger opening than the second big winning hole 2007 is provided, the pseudo big winning hole 2402 receives the game ball B as the game progresses. A game ball B received in the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2561 .

As a result, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the game area 5a and the pseudo-game area 2010, respectively, the game ball B flows down while making complicated movements due to the plurality of obstacle nails N. The player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B, and the player can hardly get bored. In addition, since the out port 1008 of the game area 5a and the pseudo out port 2404 of the pseudo game area 2010 are adjacent to each other, the player has the illusion that the pseudo game area 2010 is part of the game area 5a. can be made Furthermore, since the door 2562 of the second large prize winning port 2007 is designed to move in the front-rear direction, the existence of the second large prize winning port door 2562 can be seen when viewed from the front (player). It is possible to make it difficult, and it is possible to make the openable and closable pseudo big winning opening 2402 (pseudo big winning opening door 2405) stand out relatively. And since the opening of this pseudo big winning hole 2402 is made larger than the second big winning hole 2007, it gives the illusion that the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007 circulates again in the game area 5a. In addition, since the game area 5a can give the illusion of being provided with a huge prize winning opening that has never been seen in a pachinko machine so far, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the game can be played. While being able to strongly attract the interest of a player, it is possible to make the player strongly pay attention to the pseudo game area 2010 regardless of the presence or absence of the game ball B in the pseudo game area 2010, and the appeal to the player. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high

In addition, since the opening of the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is made larger than the second big winning hole 2007, when the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is in a state where it can receive the game balls B, many game balls B can be delivered in a short time. It is possible to make the player instantly recognize that it can be accepted, strongly attract the player's interest to the pseudo big winning hole 2402, and throw the game ball B into the pseudo big winning hole 2402.例文帳に追加It is possible to suppress the decline of interest by increasing the expectation for the acceptance of the game, and the pseudo big prize opening 2402 provided in the pseudo game area 2010 is a real big prize provided in the game area 5a. A player can be made to think that it is a mouth. In addition, since the game ball B is accepted by the player in the pseudo-big winning opening 2402 which is normally closed, the player receives a predetermined privilege (for example, the game ball B is paid out, which is advantageous to the player). It is possible to make the player strongly think that the occurrence of an advantageous game state, etc.) will be given, and to increase the player's expectation for the game.

For this reason, when the second big winning hole 2007 and the pseudo big winning hole 2402 are opened according to the progress of the game and become ready to receive the game ball B, the second big winning hole 2007 is opened to the player. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a aiming at , and the player can be entertained. Then, when the game ball B is received in the open second big winning hole 2007 and supplied into the pseudo game area 2010, the game ball B is caused by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game area 2010. While making various movements, the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed, and the player can be thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the game ball B is accepted in the pseudo big winning opening 2402. , the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, when the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is opened according to the progress of the game and it becomes possible to accept the game ball B, the player can be made to think that a chance has arrived, and the pseudo big winning opening 2402 (first It is possible to drive the game ball B aiming at the two major winning openings 2007), and to entertain the player by receiving many game balls B in the pseudo large winning opening 2402. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game of the player.

In addition, since the opening of the pseudo big prize opening 2402 is made larger than the second big prize winning opening 2007, the player is provided with a huge big winning opening that has never been seen in a pachinko machine so far. It is possible to make the player misunderstand that the pachinko machine 1 is there, give a strong impact to the player, make the player strongly interested in the pachinko machine 1, and make it easy for the player to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players. Then, when the second big winning hole 2007 opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern and the pseudo big winning hole 2402 opens and closes due to a "jackpot" or the like, as described above, the second big winning hole comes with a chance for the player. It is possible to make the player perform the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at 2007 (pseudo big winning hole 2402), and to greatly entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest. At this time, since the game ball B that circulates in the pseudo game area 2010 is accepted by the second big winning hole 2007 and finished the game (so-called hit ball that no longer affects the game), To suppress an increase in the burden on a game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed without giving a privilege such as the payout of a game ball B to a player even if the ball is accepted in a pseudo big winning hole 2402.例文帳に追加can be done. In addition, since the payout is performed for all the game balls B accepted in the second big prize winning port 2007, the game ball B is paid out to the player by accepting the game balls B in the pseudo big prize winning port 2402. It is possible to give the illusion that the game ball B is there, and to entertain the acceptance of the game ball B into the pseudo big winning opening 2402.例文帳に追加Furthermore, since the payout is performed for all the game balls B accepted in the second big winning hole 2007, the game balls B that were not accepted in the pseudo big winning hole 2402 on the downstream side of the second big winning hole 2007 , the player can be given the illusion that the number of game balls B paid out is greater than the number of game balls B accepted in the pseudo-big prize opening 2402. , the player can be made to feel that he or she has won, and the player can be entertained, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, the pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 may be opened and closed to accept the game ball B as a "big hit" or as an advance notice that the player will be in an advantageous gaming state. Thus, by opening and closing the pseudo big winning opening 2402, it is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, to increase the player's expectation for the game, and to suppress the decline in interest. can. As this advance notice, for example, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation for an advantageous gaming state based on the opening/closing speed and the number of opening/closing times of the pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 . Alternatively, by opening and closing the pseudo-big prize opening 2402 with a rhythm such as 337 beat or the rhythm of music in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, the degree of expectation and the game state after the "big hit" (for example , time-saving state, probability variable state), etc. can also be suggested. In this way, the opening and closing operations of the pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 can present various effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored.

Furthermore, in the normal state, the second large winning opening 2007 is closed and the game ball B cannot be accepted, so even if the pseudo large winning opening 2402 is open, the pseudo large winning opening 2402 is provided. Since the game ball B cannot be circulated in the game area 2010, a premium feeling can be imparted to the circulation of the game ball B within the pseudo game area 2010, and the second large winning opening is opened according to the progress of the game. It is possible to raise the player's expectations so that 2007 becomes acceptable.

In addition, since the game ball B supplied to the pseudo-game area 2010 from the second big winning opening 2007 is discharged from the pseudo-out port 2404 without being returned to the game area 5a, the pseudo-game area 2010 is a game Since it is possible to make the player strongly think that it is a special area (premium area) independent of the area 5a, the player strongly desires the circulation of the game balls B within the pseudo game area 2010.例文帳に追加can be done, and when the pseudo big prize winning port 2402 is opened and closed according to the progress of the game, the game ball B is actively aimed at the second big prize winning port 2007 in order to circulate the game ball B in the pseudo game area 2010. can be driven into the game, and the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

In addition, when the game ball B supplied to the pseudo game area 2010 is accepted in the second big winning opening 2007 is not accepted in the pseudo big winning opening 2402, the pseudo out opening at the downstream end in the pseudo game area 2010 2404, the player can be made to think that the pseudo-out port 2404 is similar to the out-port 1008 provided at the downstream end in the game area 5a, and the pseudo big prize winning port The acceptance of the game ball B into 2402 can be enjoyed without a sense of incongruity in the same way as the openable and closable second big winning hole 2007 provided in the game area 5a, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the pseudo out port 2404 for discharging the game ball B that is not accepted in the pseudo big winning port 2402 is provided adjacent to the out port 1008 provided at the downstream end in the game area 5a, The game ball B supplied to the pseudo game area 2010 from the second major prize winning port 2007 and not received in the pseudo big prize winning port 2402 can be made to appear as if it is discharged from the out port 1008.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, the pseudo-game area 2010 is supplied with the game ball B (so-called dead ball that no longer affects the game) that has been detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2561 and finished the game. In the area 2010, the game ball B, which no longer affects the game, is used for the effect. Therefore, for example, compared with a performance device in which pseudo game balls similar to game balls B are enclosed, there is no need to provide a mechanism for circulating pseudo game balls for presentation, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403 can detect the acceptance of the game ball B into the pseudo big winning hole 2402, the detection of the game ball B can execute a predetermined effect, making the player more attractive. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of entertaining players and suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, since the pseudo big winning opening sensor 2403 is made visible to the player, the game ball B that has finished playing (so-called dead ball that no longer affects the game) circulates in the pseudo game area 2010. Even if this is done, the player can be given the illusion that the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is a real big winning hole. It is possible to strongly desire acceptance of B, and it is possible to enjoy hitting the game ball B aiming at the second big winning hole 2007 (pseudo big winning hole 2402) and suppress the decline of interest.

[11. Various control processing of the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 to 172. FIG. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side power-on processing, FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 167, and FIG. 169 is an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. 170 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing, FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value confirmation display processing, and FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be explained, followed by the movement of the initial value update type counter, main control side power on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, setting value confirmation display processing, error Display processing will be described.

[11-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a special random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big win game or a small win game, and an initial value determination random number for hit determination for use in determining the initial value of this special random number And, a reach determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a reach (reach loss) when not generating a jackpot game, and a first special symbol display device and a second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 A random number for the variable display pattern for use in determining the variable display pattern of the special symbols to be variably displayed in the function display unit 1400 when generating a jackpot game with the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device A symbol random number for use in determining the jackpot symbols and small winning symbols to be derived and displayed (determination of the hit type) and a random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol for use in determining the initial value of the symbol random number are prepared. ing. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a normal symbol per determination random number for use in determining whether or not to open and close the variable winning entrance door 2521 capable of guiding the game ball B to the variable winning entrance 2003, and this normal symbol per An initial value determination random number for determination per normal symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random number for determination, and a normal pattern for determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol variably displayed on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 Random numbers for symbol variation display patterns and the like are prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

[11-2. Operation of initial value update type counter]
For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hard random number circuit built into the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first uses one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and performs a high-speed preselection based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another, and when all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the main control Based on the clock signal input to the MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number. It is designed to

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determining a normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter updating method is called an "initial value updating type counter". The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch (RWM switch 633d) of the payout control board 633 is operated when the power is turned on, the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the stored various information as numerical values is the stored checksum value ( sum value), etc., when clearing except for a specific area out of all areas of the main control built-in RAM, the initial value determination random number for determining per normal symbol is built in by the main control MPU 1310a An ID code is extracted from a non-volatile RAM, and an initial value derivation process is executed for always deriving the same fixed value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for determining a normal winning pattern based on the extracted ID code. It is a mechanism in which the derived fixed value is set. That is, the initial value determination random number for determining a normal per symbol is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. In this way, the value set to the initial value determination random number for normal per symbol determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the non-volatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure is to prevent the ID code from being rewritten using an external device once the ID code is stored. A second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code by execution is taken to prevent analysis by taking a two-step security measure.

Here, the advantage of taking out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the taken out ID code as the initial value determination random number for normal per symbol determination will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains game balls to be paid out as prize balls obtains the game board 5 by some means, disassembles it, and uses the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number obtained illegally and the normal symbol hit determination value coincide with each other, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a' provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5'. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in the other game board 5', that is, in the other pachinko machine 1', so it is disassembled and analyzed. Even if the game ball is caused to pass through the gate 2002 at each predetermined interval, the variable winning port door 2521 is opened and closed to guide the game ball B to the variable winning port 2003. A possible state cannot be generated.

[11-3. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1310a is circuit-configured such that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIGS. 167 and 168, main control side power-on processing is performed. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs power failure clear processing (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure (phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when it becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until it rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). It is

Following step S12, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S14). The RAM clear switch has three functions (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error cancel switch), and completely erases the information stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. functions as a RAM clear switch for In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear is to be performed when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is to be performed and the RAM clear switch is operated. It should be noted that the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, to the determination in step S14 is extremely short. The player turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU 1310a makes it possible to perform RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, game information related to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls This flag indicates whether or not to erase various types of information, including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, etc.). . The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not the body frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a receives a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and detects whether the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. Then, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) to turn it on, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a. This is done based on the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a when the key is turned ON. It should be noted that the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, to the determination in step S18 is extremely short, and therefore the person who actually turns on the setting key switch 1311a , the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on after the setting key switch 1311a is turned on.

In the determination of step S18, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 from the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b, and furthermore, determines that the setting key switch is turned on by the setting key ON signal. When 1311a determines that the setting key is ON, it sets the value 1 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S18, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b, and/or the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 0 (step S20B). The setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area (a setting value dedicated area in a specific area, which will be described later) of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. is a flag that indicates whether or not it is permitted to change or confirm the setting of the set value 1 to set value 6 at the time when is turned ON. A value of 1 is set when display is permitted, and a value of 0 is set when setting changes of set values and confirmation display are not permitted. The value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in the general storage element (general purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU 1310a performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process. In addition, when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time waiting process, the payout control board 633 completes booting in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510. ) can receive various commands.

Following step S22, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure warning signal. When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it returns to step S24 and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. A detailed description of the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be given later.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1. (Step S25). The main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, so that the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied. judge.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S25 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not 1, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 1. Also, it is determined whether or not the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0 (step S26). The main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, so that the predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied. , it is determined to erase various information in the same manner as when a predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S26 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not 0, it calculates a checksum (step S29). . This checksum is calculated by regarding the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S29, the main control MPU 1310a compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at power-off), which will be described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S30 that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power failure processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the main-control-side power-off process has been completed normally, and set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S29 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , will be described later.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When (the value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power failure processing has not ended normally, an error display processing is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is terminated is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power supply interruption processing has not completed normally at the time of power supply interruption, If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is determined to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

The pachinko machine 1 is powered off, the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is shifted from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). After turning it clockwise by 60 degrees and turning it on, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while operating the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633, and this routine is executed again. The main control side power-on processing is started. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is being operated in the determination of step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. In step S18 described above, it is determined that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. Since it is determined that the setting key is ON and the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in the above-described step S20A, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 in the determination of the above-described step S25. Also, it is determined that the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, and that the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied. In the process of S38, by clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, the RAM error can be canceled and the game can proceed (hereinafter referred to as "first RAM error “Release method”).

As a method different from this first RAM error canceling method, the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and the setting key cylinder remains at the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633, the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, is started again. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is being operated in the determination of step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. On the other hand, in step S18 described above, it is determined that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b, and/or the setting key switch is turned on by the setting key ON signal. 1311a determines that the setting key is not turned ON, and sets the value 0 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in step S20B. Assuming that the value is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0, that is, the predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied, the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied. It is determined that various information should be erased, and in the processing of step S38 described later, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, thereby canceling the RAM error and allowing the game to proceed. (hereinafter referred to as "second RAM error canceling method").

Thus, in this embodiment, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination of step S30, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU 1310a When the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally, an error is displayed in step S33, and the main control built-in RAM If there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the RAM (or it is unreliable), there are two cancellation methods: the first RAM error cancellation method and the second RAM error cancellation method. It can be done by As a result, when there is no need to change the settings of the set values, the RAM error can be cleared by performing the second RAM error clearing method using the RAM clear switch.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main control side power failure processing has been completed normally, the main control built-in A working area of the RAM is set (step S34). For this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read out from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU 1310a progresses the game based on the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition to the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, the term “recovery of power” refers to the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous A state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with a high frequency from a hidden high frequency output device) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored is also included.

After step S34, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 0 (step S36). As a result, various types of information, checksum values (sum values), etc. are changed as a result of subsequent various processing, so that the main control side power failure processing described later is normally terminated and the backup flag BK- is set. If FLG is not set to 1, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, as will be described later.

Following the determination in step S36, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1 (step S27). The main control MPU 1310a judges that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied by judging that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1. judge.

In step S27, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, and the predetermined set value display permission condition is established. When it is determined that there is, a setting value confirmation display process is performed (step S28). In this set value confirmation display process, which will be described later in detail, the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM are displayed on the setting display 1310g.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is value 1, that is, the predetermined setting value is changed. When it is determined that the permission condition is satisfied, setting change processing is performed (step S37). This setting change process, which will be detailed later, is performed based on a signal from the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633 . As described above, the RAM clear switch has three functions (the RAM clear switch, the setting switching button, and the error canceling switch). functions as a function of Every time the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is operated, a signal (setting value selection switching signal) is input to change the setting value and display it on the setting display 1310g. Based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a when the setting key cylinder is turned from ON to OFF, the changed set value is determined and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0, that is, the predetermined Although the set value change permission condition is not satisfied, when it is determined to erase various information in the same way as when the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area to clear (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a writes the value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (all areas of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area). In this embodiment, when the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it is determined to erase various information, and when the setting change process ends, the main control built-in RAM (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area)) is cleared. Here, the "specific area" includes a setting value dedicated area in which setting values are stored, an out port 1008, a first sub-out port 2021 and a second sub-out port provided in the game area 5a divided and formed on the game board 5. 2022 and an out-ball counting dedicated area in which the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by 2022 is stored. The set value dedicated area stores set values to be changed in the setting change process described later, and the out ball count dedicated area stores the out hole 1008, the first sub-out hole 2021 and the first sub-out hole 2021 that are counted in the ball number counting process described later. A counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the second sub-out port 2022 is stored.

The main control MPU 1310a may read out a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM and set it as an initial value. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a, when erasing various information, the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that tells that the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633 has been operated instructs the RAM clear. If the values do not match, or if the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally, the unique ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and this taken out ID code An initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determination per normal symbol is performed, and this fixed value is the initial value of the random number for determination per normal symbol described above. It is set to the initial value determination random number for normal design hit determination for use in determination.

Following step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets the working area of the main control built-in RAM as initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize number information output determination counter is set (set) to 0, which is the initial value. Further, the main control MPU 1310a progresses the game based on the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following steps S36, S28 or step S40, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer set value is set in the WDT control register") to activate the main control built-in WDT and start counting time until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is activated, the main control built-in WDT starts clocking, and the watch dog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a ( hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control built-in WDT will forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and starts timing, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register before the clocked time reaches the time set by the timer set value, The clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and clocking is restarted. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a can be operated normally by repeating the process of clearing the clocking by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the clocking. It is possible to monitor whether or not

Following step S41, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built in the main control MPU 1310a (for example, a serial input/output port (receiving channel and transmitting channel) for the payout control board 633, a serial input/output port (receiving channel and transmitting channel) for the peripheral control board 1510 ), the transmission serial port prescaler is set for the communication speed and the presence or absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is set for initialization of the transmission circuit and transmission permission.

Following step S44, the main control MPU 1310a initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various test information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the game machine testing facility.

Following step S46, the main control MPU 1310a performs activation setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a special random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game is latched in a hardware random number control register built into the main control MPU 1310a in order to update the hardware. In addition to setting the hardware random number setting register to activate the hard random number circuit incorporated in the main control. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another without duplication based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, and the predetermined When all values within the numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is again extracted, and the predetermined numerical range is rapidly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. successively extract the other values in the , without duplication. When the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit. A random number (random value) extracted by the random number circuit is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU 1310a sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). Create a power-on state command, a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when power is turned on, and use it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. memorize to In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this various information are stored. be. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information, then the state command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. A detailed description of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be given later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. be. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that there is no input of the power failure warning signal, the main control MPU 1310a performs a non-hit/fall random number update process (step S56). In this non-hit-lose random number update process, the above-described ready-to-win determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big win symbol initial value determination random number, small winning symbol initial value determination random number, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-hit-lose random number update process, software updates the random numbers that are not related to the hit-lose determination (big hit determination). Incidentally, the above-described random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random numbers, normal symbol variation display pattern random numbers, etc. are also updated by this non-hit-lose random number update process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is called "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, preventing writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protecting the above-mentioned game information and various information including other information from being rewritten.

Following step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting to output the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S12 is performed.

Following step S60, the main control MPU 1310a outputs to, for example, various displays of the function display unit 1400, the variable winning opening solenoid 2522, the first large winning opening solenoid 2524, the second large winning opening solenoid 2563, a special monitor, etc. stop the driving signal (step S62).

After step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, as numerical values.

After step S64, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This setting of RAM access prohibition disables access to the main control built-in RAM, thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S41, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the clocking starts again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power-on process again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power failure processing".

As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a cannot perform the determination of step S54, and cannot perform the main control side power failure processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main-control-side power-off processing, and the main-control-side power-on processing is executed again. . In other words, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power failure processing based on immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored because the main control side power failure processing is not executed. The checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power failure processing is executed at the time of power failure, and the checksum calculated in step S28 when restarting after forced reset by the built-in reset circuit. There is no way that the value (sum value) and the value (sum value) match, and it always becomes a checksum (sum value) error in the main control built-in RAM, and in the processing of step S38, out of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, except for a specific area It will be completely erased (cleared).

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure.

In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control internal RAM is normal. are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information has been stored by fraud.

Further, when it is determined in step S25 that the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it is permitted to change the setting value, setting change processing is performed in step S37, In the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1). When it is determined that the various information should be erased, in the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area. In this way, when the pressing operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch), the setting value is changed and determined. When changing settings that can be performed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs setting change processing), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This is because when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, probability variation (probability variation)). state, etc.), it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information described above before the start of the next business. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the operation unit. Also, when deciding to change the setting value, if the setting change process is performed (even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value obtained before the setting change process is performed) It is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information including various information such as game information etc. from the main control built-in RAM.As described above, the setting key can change the set value as well as the current setting Since it is an important key that can be used to check the setting values, etc., only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, are allowed to possess it, and the number is limited to 2 to 3 people. is not determined to be changed, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, a staff member such as a game hall clerk can delete (clear) the game backup information from the RAM By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the clear switch, the game backup information can be erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM.

Here, it will be described that the determination of the presence/absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 after the wait time standby processing in step S22, and the subsequent processing proceeds. I will explain the problems in

The VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged with the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off as described above. +5 V is applied for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or momentary power failure. In other words, even if the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the charge charged in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5 V, and the island facility of the game hall The main control-side power-off process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply is cut off from the main control side. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the island equipment of the game hall When the power supply from the main control side is cut off, the main control side power cut-off processing can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 when the power is restored, the waiting time (boot timer) until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots). 2.5 seconds is set.), and if an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs immediately before reaching the standby time, a hardware called an electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. is applied as +5 V, but within a period of about 7 ms, interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, it may not be possible to complete the main-control-side power-off processing in the main-control-side power-on processing. Therefore, the main control side power-on processing is started when the power is restored again without storing the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on processing is started, and the wait time standby processing of step S22 is completed without occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure. and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred. Instead, in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. In other words, when the power is restored, the RAM clear switch is operated by a game hall clerk or other attendant, and even if the game hall clerk or other attendant does not indicate the intention of clearing the RAM, the memory is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM. There is a problem that the game backup information described above is deleted (cleared).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24, the determination of step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the game cannot be progressed. Before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step When it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the game cannot be progressed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize number information output determination counter) can be prevented from being updated, so that the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64. Therefore, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM and held immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is not initialized. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure from being initialized.

Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, step S22 When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is progressing the game, the pachinko machine 1, the supply of power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, supplies game information and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) according to the progress of the game. Information indicating the value of the information output determination counter), which is a backup process for storing various information including the process of steps S58 to S68 and the process when the main control side power is turned off, which is composed of an infinite loop, is performed by the main control board. Since the main control MPU 1310a of 1310 can be completed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a, when it restarts, receives the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation in the backup process. Since it is determined that the result (that is, the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64) matches, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by restoring the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control built-in WDT causes the main control MPU 1310a to forcibly reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S24, the power failure warning signal has not been input. As a result, the main control side power failure processing can be reliably completed within the "power supply securing period for momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on processing is performed at the time of power restoration, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU 1310a, as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power failure processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the step immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22 In S24, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input, and when the power failure warning signal is input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is continued. By repeating this, the game cannot be progressed.

By preventing the progress of the game by such software, the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission is enabled in step S52). By blocking the progress to the control flow of setting and starting the main control side timer interrupt processing described later), the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize number information output determination A mechanism was adopted in which updating of various information (including information indicating the value of the counter for use) can be avoided. In this way, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize number information output judgment (Information indicating the value of the counter for use, etc.)) is covered by software so that it is not changed at all, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and Other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of the number of main prize balls) and other information are not changed at all. , The content of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of the number of main prize balls information, etc.)) is reliably prevented from being changed. can be done.

Next, a description will be given of the fact that a command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, it is determined that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). In order to communicate, create a power-on state command that is classified as power-on, a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when power is turned on, and incorporate the main control as transmission information. Stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This main control return destination command at power-on includes information indicating the driving state of the variable winning opening solenoid 2522, information indicating the driving state of the first large winning opening solenoid 2524, and driving of the second large winning opening solenoid 2563. It consists mainly of information that indicates the state. Here, first, in the power-on main control return destination command, information indicating the driving state of the variable winning opening solenoid 2522, information indicating the driving state of the first large winning opening solenoid 2524, and information indicating the driving state of the second large winning opening solenoid H.2563 drive state information and the problem in the case where the command is not included, that is, in step S50, the problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is not performed for the main control return destination command at power on. I will explain the points.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big win game screen (for example, the big win game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 turns the second big winning opening solenoid 2563. When an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs while the second big prize winning port 2007 is driven and opened by the opening and closing member, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 moves to the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of, by restoring to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the second big winning opening solenoid 2563 is driven. Starting, the state in which the second big prize winning port 2007 is closed by the opening/closing member is shifted to the state in which it is open.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot game as a game state, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will receive the power from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the received power-on state command, even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state and returned, any of the jackpot games Round or cannot be displayed at all. That is, for example, when a game ball enters the second big winning hole 2007, it is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2561, and the number of the game balls entering the second big winning hole 2007 is counted as one big winning hole. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits the display command to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the display command, the peripheral control board 1510 enters the second big winning hole 2007 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number of played game balls can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the second big winning port solenoid 2563 and opens and closes the second big winning port 2007, for example, when finishing four rounds (fourth round) of the jackpot game. The main control board 1310 issues a large prize winning port 1 close display command to indicate that the state of being opened by a member is changed to the state of being closed (that is, the start of closing the second large prize winning port 2007 between rounds). When sending to the control board 1510, when the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the jackpot game, start driving the second large winning opening solenoid 2563 and the second large winning opening 2007 opens and closes member The main control board 1310 issues a 5th large winning opening opening display command to instruct the transition from the closed state to the open state (that is, the start of opening the 5th round of the 2nd large winning opening 2007). to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game from the screen according to the probability and time saving state described above and displays it in the display area of the effect display device 1600 .

In addition, for example, a screen (for example, a screen indicating that the variable winning entrance door 2521 is open) is displayed to the effect that the game state is such that the game ball can be received into the second start opening 2005 and the game state is advantageous to the player. to the player) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the variable winning door solenoid 2522 to open the variable winning door 2521. A momentary power failure or power failure occurs when the game ball B can be guided to the second start port 2005 by operating it, and when the power is restored after that, the main control board 1310 incorporates the main control of step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the RAM, by restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 Driving is started and the variable winning opening door 2521 is closed, and the second start opening 2005 is closed.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. , and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a game state in which a game ball can be received into the variable prize winning port 2003 as a game state and a game state advantageous to the player is generated, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs. , When the power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 produces a screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600 and can be returned, a game state in which a game ball can be received into the variable prize winning opening 2003 is reached and a game state advantageous to the player is displayed. can not be displayed at all in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the peripheral control board 1510 . Therefore, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised at the momentary power failure or power failure, and when the power is restored, the game ball can be received into the variable winning opening 2003 just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In such a case, even if the game state is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be received into the variable winning opening 2003 as the game state at the time of power restoration, Regardless, when the power is restored, the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the variable winning opening 2003) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. There is also a problem that if such a game is played, it becomes difficult to understand.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including when the power is turned on, and when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the power-on state command and a command to return to main control at power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, a state command at power-on classified as power-on, a command to return to main control at power-on, and a command at power-on A counter notification command for main prize number information output determination is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 receives from the main control board 1310, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, for example, in the above example, in the four rounds of the jackpot game, instantaneously When power is restored after a power outage or power outage occurs, the main control board 1310 returns to a state in which the second large winning opening solenoid 2563 starts to be driven and the second large winning opening 2007 is closed by the opening and closing member. Since it is possible to transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 that it will shift to the open state, the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen that specifies that it is 4 rounds of the jackpot game (that is, how many rounds ) can not be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but it is a jackpot game, and the driving of the second large winning opening solenoid 2563 is started, and the second large winning opening 2007 is opened by the opening and closing member. A screen that tells you that you are in a state where the to the player) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the player seated in front of the pachinko machine is instructed to enter a game ball into the second prize winning hole 2007 after power is restored. In addition, for example, in the above-described example, in a state in which a game ball can be received into the variable winning opening 2003 and in a state in which the game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs. When the power is restored after that, the driving of the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 is started as the return destination of the main control board 1310, the variable winning opening door 2521 is opened, and the game ball B can be guided to the variable winning opening 2003. (For example, a screen that conveys to the player the message ``The variable winning opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the variable winning opening.'') is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the peripheral control board 1510, and the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine can be instructed to enter a game ball into the variable winning hole 2003 after power is restored. .

As a result, when power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the main control board 1310 can give detailed instructions on the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 . Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30 In the comparison judgment, the checksum values cannot match, and in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, the state command at power-on classified as power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on By creating an output determination counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and the main prize ball when power is turned on. Only three commands, namely, the number information output determination counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, in the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, these commands first transmit a power-on state command, then transmit a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then transmit the number of main prize balls when power is turned on. An information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on state command is used when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure) when the RAM clear switch is operated and the RAM is cleared. When the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the above-mentioned low Information indicating which state (probability and time-saving state) to return from among probability time-saving state, high probability time-saving state, low probability non-time-saving state, and high probability non-time-saving state, and the model code of the pachinko machine It consists of information and Here, a problem in the case where the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine is not included in the power-on state command will be described.

The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specifications that the state will continue until the next big hit game occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times) It is possible to specify whether it is a game specification (such as a so-called ST machine) that a probability fluctuation occurs in a state of being played.

In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed. Then, the worker of the production line is the owner of the copyright of which work out of the copyrights of multiple kinds of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, manga E, and manga F). It becomes unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright for the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is required to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also an assumption and misunderstanding that it flows to the production line.

For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the production line may It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is copyrighted, and even if the same work is copyrighted, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) type), and what kind of game specification (game specification or ST machine in which the state is continued until the next big win game occurs when the probability fluctuation occurs).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works coexists, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is produced. With 1310 mixed, it is sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 . For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line sometimes attaches to the game board 5 the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine In step S50, in order to transmit a power-on state command including information indicating to the peripheral control board 1510, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on A counter notification command for main prize number information output determination is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, an operator on the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying which type it is, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game will occur In addition to the game specification that the state continues until the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.) that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of fluctuations of special symbols is limited, Based on this, by visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 belongs to. The type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what kind of game specifications (when probability fluctuation occurs, that state will continue until the next big hit game occurs) It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the production line The operator can accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications by looking at the inspection monitor, so that the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work can be sorted into the following. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5 .

[11-4. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, main control side timer interrupt processing will be described. This main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed for each interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 167 and 168 .

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches register banks as shown in FIG. 169 (step S100). The general-purpose storage elements (general-purpose registers) of the main control MPU 1310a have two register banks consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing to the second switch the register bank to the other register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine is started, it is not necessary to save each register to the stack.

Following step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 light up according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) transmitted Time management such as ACK signal input judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not the payer ACK signal that informs that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands is input or not. . Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a detects, for example, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2601, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, and the detection from the second starting opening sensor 2401. signal, detection signal from variable winning opening sensor 2526, detection signal from first big winning opening sensor 2524, detection signal from second big winning opening sensor 2561, detection signal from out sensor 664, first ball sensor 703, and a detection signal from the second ball sensor 704, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050, an operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), a detection signal from the door frame open switch, and a detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b. , a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, a signal from the setting switching button, and a payout control board 633 that informs that the payout control board 633 has normally received a prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. , are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Also, when the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401 are read, the corresponding starting opening winning command classified into others is used as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start sensor 3002, the corresponding start start winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and from the second start sensor 2401 When there is a detection signal of , the starting opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Note that in this embodiment, when the switch input processing is started, the state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including those subjected to empty terminal processing). , are read first, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, they are read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the third time, and the result of the third reading is compared with the result of the second reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the fourth time, and the result of the fourth reading is compared with the result of the third reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball or as if the input is ignored.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the states in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including those subjected to vacant terminal processing) are checked for the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Since it is possible, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2601, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401, and the variable winning A detection signal from the mouth sensor 2526, a detection signal from the first big prize mouth sensor 2524, a detection signal from the second big prize mouth sensor 2561, an out sensor 664, a first ball sensor 703, and a second ball sensor 704. Detection signal, detection signal from magnetic sensor 1050, operation signal from RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), detection signal from door frame open switch, detection signal from body frame open switch 4b, signal from setting key switch 1311a , the signal from the setting switching button, and the payout control board 633 that informs that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later can be improved in reliability. can.

Following step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal failure monitoring process, the state of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a that have undergone empty terminal processing is checked based on the information obtained in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND) as an idle terminal processing, so the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information obtained in the switch input process in step S104 determines whether or not the logic state of the input terminal to which the idle terminal process is performed is LOW among the input terminals of the various input ports. based on When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the logic state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal processing is applied is not LOW, the main control MPU 1310a classifies the information display to inform that the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU 1310a has a problem. The defective command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU 1310a performs win-loss random number update processing (step S106). In this winning/losing random number update process, the above-described symbol random number is updated. Also, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 168, And the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol is also updated. These big hit symbol initial value determination random numbers and small winning symbol initial value determination random numbers are updated in the main control side main processing and this main control side timer interrupt processing, respectively, thereby enhancing the randomness. . On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to win/lose determination (win/lose determination), each counter counts up only each time this win/lose random number update process is performed. Incidentally, the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number and normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this win/lose random number update process.

For example, the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is, as described above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the minimum value is counted up toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by this win/lose random number update process. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are set to the non The win/lose random number update process and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively, but each time an interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven. If the number of executions of the non-win-lose random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the small-hit symbol initial value determination random number may be updated only in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs ball count processing (step S107). In this number-of-balls counting process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the out sensor 664 is input, the ball is ejected from the game board 5, and circulates through the out-ball passage 663. A game ball (which is driven into the game area 5a and accepted by a winning opening such as a general winning opening 2001, a variable winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, a second large winning opening 2007, etc. The game ball ejected from the game board 5 is received in any one of the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 without being received in any prize winning port after being hit into the game area 5a. When the out sensor 664 detects a game ball ejected from the game board 5 after being picked up, an operation is performed to add (increment) the value of the total recovered ball counter by 1, and the detection from the first ball sensor 703 is performed. When the first ball sensor 703 detects the game ball received by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 after the signal is input and circulates through the first ball path 701, the out port 1008 is detected. , the value of the out-ball counter that counts the number of game balls collected by the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 (so-called out balls) is added (incremented) by 1, A detection signal from the two-ball sensor 704 is input and driven into the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2007, When the second ball sensor 704 detects a game ball that is accepted by a winning opening such as the second ball path 702 and flows through the second ball path 702, the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first start opening 2004, the second start A safe ball counter that counts the number of game balls, so-called safe balls, received in the winning openings such as the opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2007 is added (incremented) by 1. . That is, in the number-of-balls counting process, the out-sensor 664 is accepted by the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2007, and the like. Both the ball and the game ball received in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 are detected, and the first ball sensor 703 detects the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port. 2022 detects the collected game balls, and the second ball sensor 704 detects the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2007, etc. Detects a game ball accepted by

Then, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value of the total collected ball counter, which is the calculation result, to the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2007, and the like. The total number of the game balls received in the mouth and the game balls received in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 is stored in the total collected ball count dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. , the value of the out-ball counter is stored as the total number of out-balls collected by the out-ball outlet 1008, the first sub-outbox 2021 and the second sub-outbox 2022 in the out-ball counting dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. The counter value is stored in the main control built-in RAM as the total number of safe balls received in the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2007, etc. Store in the area dedicated to safe ball counting in a specific area of . In addition, the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of paid out prize balls) to the value of the total collected ball counter, that is, the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of paid out prize balls) to the total number of game balls hit is calculated. Then, the calculation result is stored in the base calculation area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the special monitor is set, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a, when the value of the total collected ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2007 Each time the total number of game balls collected at the winning openings such as , the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021 and the second sub-out opening 2022 reaches 10 balls, a ball collection command is created to notify that effect, and the transmission information is stored in the output information storage area. Note that the main control MPU 1310a determines that each of the recovered ball counter value, the out ball counter value, and the safe ball counter value, which are the calculation results, reaches the maximum value (value 65535 in this embodiment), and the recovered ball When the value of the counter, out-ball counter, and safe-ball counter is incremented by 1, the values of the recovered-ball counter, out-ball counter, and safe-ball counter overflow and become 0. conduct.

Following step S107, the main control MPU 1310a performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read out from the input information storage area described above, and a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on this input information. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between boards. Then, the generated prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the second big prize hole 2007, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 prize balls, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is 10. , the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 633, or this Self-check for confirming the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 when the payout control board 633 does not input the payer ACK signal to inform that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command within a predetermined time. A command is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633 .

Further, in the prize ball control process of step S108, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area and based on this input information. , a main award number information output command classified as other is created to convey that effect, and is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. The main prize number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize number information output determination counter is determined based on the input information read out from the above-described input information storage area. To a game ball entered into various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2007 (hereinafter referred to as "various winning openings provided on the game board 5") Based on this, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is counted, and in the prize ball control process of step S108, the memory is updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. ing. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read. is read from the input information storage area, and based on this input information, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of 10. (that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10), a main prize number information output command is created to notify that effect, and as transmission information In addition to storing in the output information storage area, the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the main prize number information output judgment counter value. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (eg, frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) divided into state displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to notify the payout control board 633 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command)) are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S110, the main control MPU 1310a performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent act detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize balls is checked. If it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation") is being performed, the value of the radio wave irradiation counter is incremented by one. The value of this radio wave counter is incremented each time radio wave irradiation is determined in the fraudulent act detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle at which the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed in the fraud detection processing. ), a radio wave irradiation notification command classified into a notification display indicating that radio wave irradiation is being performed is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Further, in the fraud detection process in step S112, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input, fraud using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as "magnet goto") is detected. ) is being performed, and the value of the magnetic goto counter is incremented by one. The value of this magnet counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation is performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. A value of 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnetic goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle at which the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed in the fraudulent act detection processing). ), a magnet informing command classified into informing display indicating that radio wave irradiation is being performed is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the magnetic goto with such a mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the fact that the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall can discover the magnetic goto at an early stage. It's becoming

Further, in the fraudulent act detection process of step S112, for example, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the detection signal from the first big winning hole sensor 2525 or the second big winning hole sensor 2561 is detected when the game is not a jackpot game. When inputting (when a game ball enters the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007), etc., when the big winning hole abnormal winning occurs, the winning abnormality classified as an abnormal state is displayed. A display command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. The total number of game balls detected by the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first large winning opening sensor 2525, and the second large winning opening sensor 2561, that is, the actual general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, When different from the total number of game balls received in the winning openings such as the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2007, etc., an abnormal state is indicated on the notification display. A classified winning abnormality display command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In the fraud detection process in step S112, when the radio wave irradiation goto and/or the magnet goto are detected, the value 1 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud, while the radio wave emission goto and the magnet When no fraud is detected, the value 0 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as no fraud is detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and is set to 0 (zero) as an initial value when the RAM is cleared. Further, when detecting the occurrence of an abnormal winning of a large winning opening, the value 1 may be set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud.

Following step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs firing enable signal setting processing (step S113). In this shooting permission signal setting process, the logic of the shooting permission signal that tells the shooting control section 633b of the payout control board 633 that the shooting of the game ball B is allowed is set. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a determines that fraud has not been detected when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is 0 based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG. Sometimes, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing permission logic and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. is detected, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. The main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, receives a detection signal from the door frame opening switch to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. When the door frame open switch detects that the door frame open switch 4b detects that the body frame open switch 4b is open with respect to the outer frame 2, a detection signal is input from the body frame open switch 4b. is set to a firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. As an initial value (default), the logic of the firing permission signal is set after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored). It is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the firing permission logic is set until the start of the firing.

Following step S113, the main control MPU 1310a performs special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is A hard random number latch register built in the control MPU 1310a is obtained, and the obtained random number is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a) and the big hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match (big hit A counter value for determining whether or not to generate a game (referred to as a "special lottery") or updating the symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM according to the type of big win or small win. It determines whether it matches with any of the hit type determination values (determines the hit type).

When these determination results (lottery results) are due to the first start opening sensor 3002, while creating various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, the determination results (lottery results) are the second start opening sensor 2401 If it is due to, various commands related to special figure 2 tuning effect are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the above-described random number for the variable display pattern. Then, the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 to light up the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined special symbol fluctuation display pattern The output of the lighting signal to the indicator is set, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big win game, various commands classified as related to big wins (big win opening command, big winning mouth 1 open Nth time display command, big winning mouth 1 closing display command, big winning 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, for example, to open and close the opening and closing member to the second big winning opening solenoid 2563 When the output of the drive signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the second big prize winning port 2007 changes from the closed state to the open state is two times, the function display unit 1400 The function display unit 1400 sets the output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round display lamp so as to light the 2nd round display lamp of the round indicator and stores it in the output information storage area as output information, or when the number of rounds is 15. Set the output of the lighting signal to the 15 round display lamp so as to light the 15 round display lamp of the round indicator, store it in the output information storage area as output information, or light the presence or absence of time saving in a predetermined color The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set and stored as the output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the normal winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2601 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol per judgment random number is extracted and incorporated into the main control as normal winning opening winning prize information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

0th section to 3rd section (four sections) are provided in this normal winning opening winning information storage area, and the normal winning opening is provided in order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. Winning information is stored. For example, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2601 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning opening Winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When the normal winning opening winning information is set, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage and the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. The normal winning entry winning information of the section is stored in the first section of the normal winning entry winning information storage, and the normal winning entry winning information of the third section of the normal winning entry winning information storage is stored in the second section of the normal winning entry winning information storage. After shifting, the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the normal winning entry winning information is stored in the first and second sections of the normal winning entry winning information storage, the normal winning entry winning information in the first section of the normal winning entry winning information storage is the normal winning. The normal winning entry winning prize information in the second division of the normal winning entry winning information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the normal winning entry winning information storage, and the normal winning entry winning prize information in the second section of the normal winning entry winning prize information storage is shifted to the first section of the normal winning entry winning prize information storage. The 2nd section and the 3rd section of the normal winning opening prize information storage become empty areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first section to the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information is regarded as a reserved ball, and the normal winning opening of the function display unit 1400 In order to light up the suspension indicator, the output of the lighting signal for the normal suspension indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-described normal winning opening winning information, and is stored as the output information in the above-described output information storage area.

Following the normal winning opening winning process, the normal winning opening winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for normal symbol per determination is taken out from the read normal winning opening winning information and the main control is performed. It is determined whether or not the value coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the variable winning opening door 2521 is determined based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening and closing operation is to be performed by this determination, the variable winning opening door 2521 is opened so that the game ball can be received into the variable winning opening 2003, and the game state is advantageous to the player. . The normal symbol variation display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-described random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, various commands classified into the normal symbol synchronization effect are created, and the above-described transmission information storage is performed as transmission information. In addition to storing in the area, output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for judging normal symbol hit matches the normal hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to normal electric role performance are created and transmitted. While storing as information in the transmission information storage area, setting the output of the drive signal to the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 so as to open and close the variable winning opening door 2521, and storing as output information in the output information storage area described above, When the value of the taken-out random number for normal symbol hit determination does not coincide with the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display is performed based on the above-described normal symbol variation display pattern random number. A pattern is determined, various commands classified into the normal pattern synchronization production relation are created, stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and the normal pattern of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal pattern fluctuation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the display device, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. In this example, the probability of winning the normal lottery (probability of winning a normal prize) is 1/2.

Following step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control MPU 1310a, for example, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information, when the various commands from the payout control board 633 has been normally received, the payout control board 633 Or, when it is a jackpot game, a driving signal is sent to the first big winning opening solenoid 2524 and the second big winning opening solenoid 2563 for opening and closing the opening and closing members of the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 that performs the opening and closing operation of the variable winning opening door 2521 for opening and closing the second start opening 2005, 15 rounds jackpot information output signal, 2 rounds jackpot Information output signal, small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, information output signal during time saving information output signal, starting entrance winning information output signal, etc. Payout control of various information (game information) signals related to games output to the substrate 633, output a firing permission signal set to firing permission logic or firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) to the payout control substrate 633, or output the number of payouts (payout To output a display signal to a special monitor that displays the ratio of the total number of prize balls won), and to display the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g and output a lighting signal.

Following step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands that are classified into special figure 1 synchronization effect related, various commands that are classified into special figure 2 synchronization effect related, and are classified into big hit related Various commands (for example, when detecting a game ball entering the second large winning opening 2007, based on the detection signal from the second large winning opening sensor 2561, the large winning opening 1 corresponding to the large winning opening count command count display command), various commands categorized as power-on, various commands categorized as related to general map synchronization effect, various commands categorized as normal electric role effect related, various commands as categorized as notification display, status display Various commands classified, various commands classified into test-related commands, and various commands classified into others (for example, the main control board 1310 can control prize balls based on game balls entered into various winning holes provided on the game board 5). Each time the number of game balls scheduled to be put out reaches 10, a main prize number information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 558 as main prize number information. main winning ball number information output command, etc.), and various commands classified into specific history (for example, general winning opening 2001, variable winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2004, second starting opening 2005, first big winning opening 2006, the second big prize winning hole 2007, etc., the out hole 1008, the first sub-out hole 2021, and the second sub-out hole 2022, every time the number of game balls collected reaches 10 balls A collection command, a setting change command that informs that the setting value has been changed, an error display command that informs that there is an abnormality (or is unreliable) in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM, A setting key ON operation command for confirming a setting value stored in a setting value dedicated area described later in a specific area of the control built-in RAM, etc.) is stored. One packet of the main circumferential serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating variations of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands as main peripheral serial data, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. The VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure. The main-circumference serial transmission port incorporated in the control MPU 1310a can at least transfer the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management section, and complete transmission from the transmission shift register as main-circumference serial data. It is possible. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs after the power is turned on, the In order to notify that the power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command to be performed, a power-on state command that is classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter for determining the number of main prize balls information output at power-on Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the order of the status, mode, and sum value that constitutes the power-on state command as the main peripheral serial data Transmit to the peripheral control board 1510, then transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then main prize ball number information when power is turned on. The status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the output determination counter notification command, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information, then the state command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

In addition, winning openings such as general winning opening 2001, variable winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2004, second starting opening 2005, first big winning opening 2006, second big winning opening 2007, out opening 1008, first sub-out Every time the number of game balls collected at the port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 reaches 10, a ball collection command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 Winning openings such as general winning opening 2001, variable winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2004, second starting opening 2005, first big winning opening 2006, second big winning opening 2007, etc. The number of game balls collected at the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 is counted, and ball collection information (counted value (That is, the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first large winning opening 2006, the second large winning opening 2007, etc., the out opening 1008, the first sub-out Information that associates the total number of game balls collected at the port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 with the updated date and time) is updated. It should be noted that if the pachinko machine 1 is powered off due to the end of the business hours of the game hall without being able to receive the ball collection command, the last counted value (that is, the general winning opening 2001 and the variable winning opening 2003 , 1st starting port 2004, 2nd starting port 2005, 1st big winning port 2006, 2nd big winning port 2007, etc. are collected at the winning ports, the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022. Ball recovery information in which the total number of game balls played) is associated with the updated date and time is stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when the game hall starts operating, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 stores and retains the ball collection information stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The ball recovery information is created again from the start date, and the ball recovery information is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) as ball recovery history information. It should be noted that the counted value to be stored as ball collection information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) may be a value counted from 0 (zero) on that day, or a value counted from 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the sum of the counted values so far may be used.

Following step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122) and terminates this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT in step S122 is performed by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, by restarting the clocking by the main control built-in WDT, the main control MPU 1310a can be prevented from being forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 has the above-described backup function for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power restoration, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information that has executed the backup process as a return destination for the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. When the power is turned on to indicate the driving state of the variable winning opening solenoid 2522, the first big winning opening solenoid 2524, and the second big winning opening solenoid 2563, which are the electric drive sources by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine A main control return destination command can be output to the peripheral control board 1510 . In other words, the main control board 1310, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at step S50 in the power-on process on the main control side shown in FIG. In order to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of , a power-on state command classified as power-on, When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command and when the power is turned on, the main prize number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in step S120 of this routine. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, as main peripheral serial data, the status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on state command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, and then the main control return destination at power-on. The status, mode, and sum value constituting the command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, followed by the status, mode, and sum value constituting the counter notification command for determining the output of the main winning ball number information at power-on. are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored to the display area of the effect display device 1600. can be displayed in As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while a player is playing a game and power is subsequently restored, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, since the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and notified, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding that the machine is out of order. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding a malfunction by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power is restored.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, as described above, FIG. At step S38 in the main control side power-on processing shown, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are always cleared except for a specific area. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same processing shown in FIG. , main control return destination command when power is turned on, and main prize number information output determination counter notification command when power is turned on and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A state in which only three commands, namely, the status command, the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and the counter notification command for main prize number information output judgment command when power is turned on, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the state command at the time of power-on, are sent as the main peripheral serial data to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in this order. Then, transmit to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then output main prize ball number information when power is turned on. The status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the determination counter notification command, are transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in this order. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code for specifying which type is the above-mentioned model type from the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (For example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs with a limited number of special symbol changes (ST machine ), etc.), and detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process.

[11-5. Setting change process]
Next, setting change processing will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the current setting values as shown in FIG. 170 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this setting value, it may be read out or taken out. When the setting value is taken out, the taken out setting value is set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is calculated by considering various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the sum. This is the same processing as the calculation of .

Subsequent to step S202, the main control MPU 1310a stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main-control-side power-off processing (at power-off) in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the checksum value (sum value) matches (step S204). When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S204 that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 167, respectively. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control side power failure processing described later. A flag indicating whether or not data is stored in the RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power failure processing has been completed normally, and to a value of 0 when the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally. be done.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S204 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When (the value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main-control-side power-off processing has not ended normally, it is determined whether or not the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). . Here, the "normal range" is a value that can be set and changed. It is preset to values up to a value of 6. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM by proceeding to the determination of step S208, or when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally at the time of power-off. Therefore, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). Therefore, in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 are within the normal range of setting values 1 to 6. It is determined whether or not it is in any of the values, and when it is determined that it is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is out of the normal range in the determination of step S208, it sets the setting value 1, which is the initial value, to the setting value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination of step S208, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM obtained in step S200 is within the normal range of setting values 1 to 6. However, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum value (sum value) does not match in the determination of step S204 without performing the determination of step S208. or in the determination in step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally. In some cases, the process of step S210 may proceed to set the setting value 1, which is the initial value, to the setting value obtained in step S200.

In the determination of step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, when it determines that the main control side power failure processing has ended normally, or in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU 1310a When the MPU 1310a determines that it is within the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to light the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). .

Following step S214, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the setting switching button has been operated (step S216). This determination reads the detection signal from the setting switching button, and determines whether or not the detection signal from the setting switching button is input. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button is operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button is input, and determines that the setting switching button is operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button is not input. determine that it is not.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S216 that the setting switching button has been operated, the main control MPU 1310a updates the setting value by adding (incrementing) 1 (step S218). At this time, when the setting value is acquired in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area 1 is added (incremented) to the set value set in .

Following step S218, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting display 1310g, and displays the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. is displayed (step S220).

Following step S220 or in the judgment of step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a judges that the setting switching button has not been operated, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether or not the decision key has been operated (step S222). ). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. When the key cylinder is turned 120 degrees (that is, the setting key cylinder turns from the setting key switch 1311a to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder turning off the setting key switch 1311a), the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. (rotation position) is turned counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and further turned counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it back to the second ON operation. 1311a determines that the enter key has been operated based on the enter key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and determines that the enter key has been operated when the enter key ON signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a; When the determination key ON signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the determination key has not been operated.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S222 that the enter key has not been operated, it returns to the determination in step S216 to determine whether or not the setting switching button has been operated. When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S216 that the setting switching button has been operated, the main control MPU 1310a performs steps S218 and S220 again, determines step S222, and determines that the enter key has not been operated. When the determination is made, the process returns to the determination of step S216, and each time the setting switching button is operated, the setting value is incremented by 1 and updated until the enter key is operated. , and if the setting switching button is not operated, the setting value updated by operating the setting switching button immediately before is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored before it is determined in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, the set value updated immediately before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is used by the main controller. Since it is not stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the built-in RAM, it is discarded and the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S222 that the decision key has been operated, it stores the updated set value in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when the setting value is acquired in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area , the updated setting value is returned to the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs after the processing of step S224 is completed and the power is restored, the updated set values when the enter key is operated before the power failure or momentary power failure occur are stored in the main control built-in RAM. is stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of

After step S224, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a moves the setting key cylinder from the initial position (that is, setting key 1311a) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and the decision key is turned on. The setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return to the turning position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the switch 1311a. When the OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. Sometimes it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S226 that the setting key has not been turned OFF, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination in step S226 and repeats the determination in step S226 until the setting key is turned OFF.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S226 that the setting key has been turned off, the main control MPU 1310a stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the updated setting values on the setting display 1310g. Then, the updated setting values are hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S228).

After step S228, the main control MPU 1310a stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to turn off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

After step S230, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to 0 (step S232). This setting change permission flag CS-FLG is, as described above, the current set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the first ON state). A flag indicating whether or not to permit setting change of setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time of operation), and when permitting setting change of setting value It is set to a value of 1, and to a value of 0 when it is not permitted to change the setting of the set value. In the processing of step S232, the value 0 is set to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG, thereby disallowing the setting change of the setting values thereafter.

After step S232, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). "Normal range" is the same as the determination in step S208. It is preset to values up to a value of 6. In the determination of step S233, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the set value stored in the set value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224 is normal in order to reconfirm whether the set value is abnormal. A determination is made as to whether or not the value is within the range of set values 1 to 6, and if it is determined to be within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

In the judgment of step S233, when the main control MPU 1310a judges that it is within the normal range, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initialization (step S234), then creates a setting change command to set transmission information (step S236), Subsequently, peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing is performed to transmit the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data (step S238), and this routine ends. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initialization in step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is mainly transmitted in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 prior to the serial communication initialization in step S44. Although it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as peripheral serial data, it is prioritized before the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the processing at power-on on the main control side shown in FIG. This is to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed by the setting change command. The setting change command is a command for notifying the changed setting value and the completion of storing the setting value. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the setting value history information (information that associates the setting value with the date and time) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). do.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S233 that it is not within the normal range, it performs error display processing (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is terminated is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power supply interruption processing has not completed normally at the time of power supply interruption, If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is determined to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[11-6. Setting value confirmation display process]
Next, setting value confirmation display processing will be described. This setting value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

When the setting value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0 (step S350), as shown in FIG. This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Each is set to the value 0 when the value is not being acknowledged.

In the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0, that is, when the setting value is not displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the body frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned on. is determined (step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the above-described input information storage area and, based on this input information, detects the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. A setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder moves clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by being rotated by 60 degrees and the first ON operation is performed. is open, and it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by the setting key ON signal, thereby determining that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established. On the other hand, it is determined that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b, and/or the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. It is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied by determining that there is no display.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S352 that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a terminates this routine as it is, while the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the setting value is to be displayed for confirmation, the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to 1 (step S354), and then the current setting value is acquired (step S356). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S356, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the set value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The “normal range” is the same as the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process of FIG. A value of 3, a set value of 4, a set value of 5, and a set value of 6 are set in advance. In the determination of step S357, the main control MPU 1310a reconfirms whether or not the setting value is abnormal, so that the setting value acquired in step S356 (that is, the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM set value stored in ) is within the normal range of set values 1 to 6, and if it is determined to be within the normal range, the set value is used as it is. do.

In the determination of step S357, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is within the normal range, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU 1310a creates a setting key ON operation command, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and sets the setting key ON operation command (step S360). ) to end the routine. This setting key ON operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The ON operation command of the setting key indicates that the set value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has started (that is, confirms the set value stored in the set value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM). This is the command to send.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key ON operation command, the setting key ON operation history information (set value confirmed) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) is stored. (Information that associates the message with the date and time) is updated.

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the above-described ball collection history information, set value history information, error display history information, and setting key ON operation history information are generated. A predetermined specific history information display permitting condition is satisfied that the display of the specific history information can be permitted. The CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 is configured so that a person who confirms the specific history information can perform the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 in a state where the predetermined condition for permitting display of the specific history information is satisfied. , the image that has been displayed so far is switched to a specific history information display image for selectively displaying specific history information, and control is performed to display it in the display area of the effect display device 1600 .

On the other hand, in the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting key has been turned OFF. It is determined whether or not (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, inserts the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a is pressed. The setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the decision key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by turning off the setting key switch 1311a. When the setting key switch 1311a receives an off signal from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned off. On the other hand, when the OFF signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S362 that the setting key has not been turned off, the main control MPU 1310a terminates this routine as it is. The confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to 0 (step S364), and then the output of the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the set value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g is stopped. Then, the acquired setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S366), and then a setting key OFF operation command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , the OFF operation command of the setting key is set (step S368), and this routine is terminated. This setting key OFF operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The OFF operation command of the setting key indicates that the set value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has ended (that is, indicates that the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM have been confirmed). is a command that tells

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key OFF operation command, the above-described predetermined specific history information display permission condition is not satisfied. At this time, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 performs control to display the above-mentioned specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, immediately before switching to the specific history information display image. Control is performed to switch to the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and return to the original image.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is not within the normal range in the determination of step S357, it sets interrupt non-permission (step S370). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 169, which has been repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

After step S370, the main control MPU 1310a performs error display processing (step S372), and then enters an infinite loop in which the main control built-in WDT continues to be cleared (step S374). Due to this infinite loop, the main control built-in WDT continues to be cleared. By setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built into the control MPU 1310a, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and when the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is restarted, the main control by the main control built-in WDT is started. The MPU 1310a does not have to be forcibly reset. In addition, the infinite loop keeps the state in which the error display processing is finished, so that the game cannot be progressed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power supply interruption processing has not completed normally at the time of power supply interruption, If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is determined to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[11-7. Error display processing]
Next, error display processing will be described. This error display process is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 167, and the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 171), and is the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG.

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 172 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal informs the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted. On the other hand, if the logic is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the launch permission logic, it is possible to tell that the launch is to be stopped (non-permission). .

The error display process of this routine is one of the processes performed in step S33 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 167 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. (Specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 170), the main control MPU 1310a interrupts step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Since the permission setting cannot be performed, the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 169 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting processing of step S113 in the same processing cannot be performed. Since the firing permission signal is output to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit with reset function, at the time of power recovery, The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic is fire stop logic (fire non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the fire enable logic.

Therefore, the error display processing of this routine is the processing performed in step S33 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 167 or the processing performed in step S37 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. When started as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 170), the main control MPU 1310a restores the power in step S400 and then displays an error display in this routine. In order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being shot even after the process has started, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic), and its predetermined output port is set. output terminal to the discharge control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function.

When the error display process, which is this routine, is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. In the determination, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM. Although the main control MPU 1310a has already performed the interrupt permission setting in step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 168, the error display process shown in FIG. Since the interrupt non-permission setting is performed in step S370 in the setting value confirmation display processing, when the error display processing of this routine ends, an infinite loop is entered as described above. Timer interrupt processing cannot be performed, and firing enable signal setting processing in step S113 in the same processing cannot be performed.

Therefore, when the error display process, which is this routine, is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. In order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being fired in a certain state, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) and reset from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. Output to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with function.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display is output to the setting display 1310g to display an error on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU 1310a displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400. FIG.

Following step S404, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initialization (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets transmission information (step S408), and then sets in step S406. A peripheral control board transmission command transmission process for transmitting transmission information (error display command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data is performed (step S410), and this routine ends.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 170 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S410 is the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S238 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 170 and the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120. The error display processing, which is this routine, is the processing performed in step S33 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 171) and step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, serial communication initialization is performed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 is used as main peripheral serial data in peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410. Sending to 1510.

The error display command is a command to notify that there is an abnormality (or that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is unreliable). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC stores and holds error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the received date and time) in the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). ).

In addition, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays a blue background image saying "A RAM error has occurred. Please call an attendant." Control is performed to display a message image of white characters, and an announcement of "A RAM error has occurred. Please call a member of staff." Control is performed so that the sound is forcibly set to the maximum volume without being dependent on the volume of the speaker (top center speaker, top side speaker, body frame speaker of the body frame 4, etc.). The processing for notifying the RAM error by means of the error display command is the processing with the highest priority. Prioritize error reporting.

[12. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 to 176. FIG. FIG. 173 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit, FIG. 174 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit in FIG. FIG. 176 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the power-on process, and FIG. 176 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout control section timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[12-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, as shown in FIGS. . When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is set to have the highest priority.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input/output setting (input/output setting of I/O) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. . Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage after the power is turned on until it rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 . Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage after the power is turned on and stabilized. ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is made based on a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. FIG.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch, and when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, it is determined that the RAM clear is not instructed. On the other hand, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is instructed, and the RAM is cleared. It is determined that the switch is operated.

When the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU makes it possible to perform RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM (that is, payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on.

On the other hand, when the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, prize ball information storage area The logic state of the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., and the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area are set. This is a flag indicating whether or not to erase the payout information related to payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc.). Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs setting to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). This setting enables access to the payout control built-in RAM, and enables writing (storage) or reading of payout information, for example.

After step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or a temporary return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the register contents, return address, etc. are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

After step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the payout information is erased, and to the value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it determines not to erase the payout information (step S524). This checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in payout control unit power-off processing (at power-off) described later. (step S526). When the payout control MPU determines that they match in step S526, it determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in payout control unit power failure processing described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power failure processing is normally completed, and the value 0 is set when the payout control unit power failure processing is not completed normally.

In the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is the value 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power failure processing has been normally completed, payout control built-in RAM is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the information at the time of power recovery is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM). Information is set in the working area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, which are the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various information stored in the various information storage areas (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area) Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area, in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout of mismatch counter reset determination time, etc., stored in the time management information storage area. It should be noted that the term "recovery of power" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, but also the state in which the power has been restored after a power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it determines to erase the payout information, or in the determination of step S526, When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, When it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the working area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). For this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set the interrupt period when the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). Due to this setting, the interrupt period set in step S536, that is, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in this order.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. be done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

In the judgment of step S540, when the payout control MPU judges that there is no power failure warning signal input, it judges whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. set.

In the determination of step S542, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU returns to step S540, and the payout control MPU receives the power failure warning signal. Determine whether or not

On the other hand, in the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is the value 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544 ).

After step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, a value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various kinds of information are read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, the payout motor 584 is controlled by paying out payout motor 584 with payout ACK information that tells that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (a prize ball command and a self-check command) have been received normally. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display are stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU, the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or the drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Alternatively, the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is output to the external terminal plate 558 as a winning ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the payout motor 584 actually pays out 10 game balls). A prize number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 each time the ball is played.

Specifically, a winning ball number information output determination counter is provided for determining whether or not to output the winning ball number information. The number of game balls put out is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) not shown for monitoring.

In the process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, the number of prize balls information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM The number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 to be described later, and the memory is updated.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize number information output determination counter value is read from the prize ball information storage area. In other words, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10, a prize number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeded is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as the value of the counter for determining the number of prize balls information output), and a display signal is output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, RAM clear switch operation signal (RAM clear signal), detection signal from blade rotation detection sensor 590, detection signal from dispensing detection sensor 591, detection signal from full tank detection sensor 154, BRQ signal from CR unit, The BRDY signal, CR connection signal, main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that tells that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, etc. are read and input as input information. Store in the information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, when determining whether or not the ball is stuck due to the payout vane 589 to which the rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, the ball stickiness determination time set as the determination condition; Skip determination time that is set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, is set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the bottom tray 202 is full with the game balls stored During the full tank determination time, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 by the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 is a predetermined number or more. In addition to performing time management such as the ball out judgment time set as the judgment condition, the number of game balls received and paid out by the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the actual payout detection sensor 591 When determining whether or not to reset an inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not inconsistent game ball payouts due to inconsistency between the number of balls detected in step 1 and the number of balls detected in step 1 are repeated Time management is performed for the mismatch counter reset determination time that is set as the condition. For example, when the ball jam determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms. By setting it to 0, it accurately measures the time it takes to determine if the ball is stuck. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) are input from the CR unit is checked. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage areas etc. (for example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout such as PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the signal is set.

By this process, for example, even if there is an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. just before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, even if the payout operation of the game balls is executed by the payout device 580 and cannot be continued due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the payout operation can be continued when the power is restored. Therefore, the game balls can be put out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 just enough. In other words, the payout control MPU, while exchanging various signals with the CR unit in the CR communication process, when the gaming balls are being put out to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202, the momentary power failure or power failure causes the CR unit Even if the exchange of various signals is cut off and the game ball payout cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration By restoring the value stored as payout backup information to the value of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, the instantaneous The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before a power failure or power failure can be continued from the time of power restoration, and the payout of game balls can be continued. ing.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power failure or stoppage when the power is restored even if the momentary power failure or stoppage occurs. This prevents the various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit from changing due to the effects of an instantaneous power failure or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be enhanced.

Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when the power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. If the PRDY signal output setting information read out by the lever is set to, for example, the logic state of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is impossible, the PRDY signal is put out and controlled. Output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU to the CR unit. Then, in, for example, a retry operation monitoring process that is performed as one process of the main operation setting process, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information to determine whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball stick operation determination setting process, As an error state output setting to the CR unit, for example, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal that informs that the dispensing operation for dispensing rental balls is impossible when not communicating with the CR unit is output. It is set in the setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, the logic state of the PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt after the power is restored, and the PRDY signal is sent to the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, the state is restored when the power is restored. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the dispensing operation for dispensing the rental balls is impossible can be output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU to the CR unit. It is possible to inform that the game ball payout operation by is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal, at an extremely early stage after power is restored.

Further, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is used to notify that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible. While outputting the logic state of the signal as HI to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU sets the logic state of the PRDY signal to LOW in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is impossible. is output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. In addition, the logic state of the EXS signal that informs the start or end of one payout operation is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 633 and A CR connection signal that tells whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing (step S556). In this full-tank and ball-out check process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, a game ball stored in the lower tray 202 is detected by a detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154. , and the number of game balls introduced into the guide passage 570a of the above-mentioned ball guide unit 570 by the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 exceeds a predetermined number. and determine whether or not For example, the determination of whether or not the bottom tray 202 is full of stored game balls is made by using the timer interrupt period of 2 ms, and the full tank detection sensor 154 is detected in the current full tank and out of ball check processing. When the detection signal is ON, and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned OFF in the previous (2 ms ago) full tank and bulb out check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned from OFF to ON. When the transition is made, timing of the full-tank determination time described above is started in the timer update process of step S552. Then, when the full-tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full-tank determination time is reached, the full-tank and out-of-ball check process checks whether the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON. determine whether or not In this determination, when the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON, full-tank information indicating that the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls is stored in the above-described state information storage area. do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is not full of stored game balls, and full tank information is stored in the state information storage area.

Judgment whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also performed using the timer interrupt period of 2 ms in the current full tank and ball exhaustion check process. When the detection signal from the ball-out switch is ON, and the detection signal from the ball-out switch is OFF in the previous (2ms ago) full tank and ball-out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 is When it transitions from OFF to ON, it starts counting the above-mentioned dead ball determination time in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the dead ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the dead ball determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the dead ball detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and dead ball check process determine whether or not In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 is ON, the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is determined to be equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and the ball run-out is communicated. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number. Bulb-out information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball command and self-check command) are received. When these various commands are normally received, payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands can not be received normally, there is an abnormality in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (abnormalities occur in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs main action setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize balls, rental balls, ball removal, and ball picking are performed, retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of prize balls in stock) is monitored. .

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-described state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored as LED display information in the above-described output information storage area. do. For example, the above-mentioned out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, and based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a corresponding action is taken. Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created, and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various types of information are read out from the above-described state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into state displays are created based on the various types of information. and transmit it to the main control board 1310 . For example, when the out-of-ball information is read out from the state information storage area, and based on this out-of-ball information, if the number of game balls introduced into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, frame state 1 It creates commands and transmits them to the main control board 1310 .

After step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S568, returning to step S539, the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines in step S540 whether or not a power failure warning signal is input, and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. If no signal is input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, 2 ms has elapsed, step S544. At step S546, the value 0 is set to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, the value B is set to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL at step S546, port output processing is performed at step S548, port input processing is performed at step S550, and step S552. performs timer update processing, performs CR communication processing in step S554, performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing in step S556, performs command reception processing in step S558, performs command analysis processing in step S560, and performs command analysis processing in step S562. Main operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. conduct. The processing of steps S539 to S568 is called "payout control unit main processing".

Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310, the processing contents of the payout control unit main processing differ. Therefore, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU will vary. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal that indicates that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received. there is Thereby, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so as to sufficiently perform other processing that fluctuates.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S540 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the payout control MPU sets interrupt prohibition (step S570). Due to this setting, the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt processing is not performed, preventing writing to the payout control built-in RAM and protecting the rewriting of the payout information described above.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). As a result, the payout of game balls is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU clears the watchdog timer (step S576). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

After step S576, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, as numerical values.

After step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU performs prohibition setting of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading become impossible, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared because the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is not set to the values A, B and C in that order. For this reason, the payout control MPU is reset, and thereafter the payout control unit power-on process is performed again. Incidentally, the processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power failure processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure, and the payout control unit power-on processing is performed by the subsequent restoration of power.

In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S528, it is checked whether or not the payout control unit power failure processing has been completed normally. are inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information has been stored by fraud.

[22-2. Dispensing Control Unit Timer Interrupt Processing]
Next, the payout control section timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt period (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 173 to 175.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU, as shown in FIG. 176, disables the timer interrupt and switches (saves) the register (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the payout control unit main processing described above is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of general-purpose registers used in the payout control unit main processing.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms each time this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and has a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed, and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. set respectively.

After step S592, the payout control MPU switches (restores) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[13. Various control processing of the peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 to 181. FIG. FIG. 177 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 178 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 179 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. 180 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 181 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit power outage notice signal interrupt processing. First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing. . In this embodiment, as the priority of interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510") includes the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and Various I/O interfaces and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[13-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs initial setting processing (step S1000). This initial setting process includes a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, a process of determining hot start/cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after resetting, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), and the like. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs processing to initialize the peripheral control IC itself. can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, the command related to the control of the game effect output from the main control board 1310 and various commands such as commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when power is turned on. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after executing the current time information acquisition processing so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. are set to the value 0 when not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG receives a V-blank signal from the VDP of the peripheral control IC, which indicates that the screen data (information specifying the configuration of the screen) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in peripheral controller V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), it returns to step S1006 to check whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. Repeatedly determine whether or not By repeating such a determination, a standby state is established until the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. ing.

In the determination in step S1006, when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, that is, when determining to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG. A value of 1 is set (step S1008). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs 1ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is started, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed by the 1 ms interrupt timer being started is counted. 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this production operation unit monitoring process, in the production operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the press detection provided in the production operation unit 300 Rotation (direction of rotation) and rotation of the contact operation unit 302 based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 373 and the elevation detection sensor 374 (hereinafter referred to as "various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300"). Various kinds of information obtained by operating the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotating direction) history information of the contact operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and pressing operation Operation history information of the contact operation unit 303, etc.) is set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. It is appropriately determined whether or not to reflect the operation state of the operation unit 303 in the game presentation. Specifically, if the sound volume has been adjusted in the effect operation unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness has been adjusted, the lighting mode is changed according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the schedule data for generation. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and brightness is reflected in real time, and the performance proceeds with the adjusted volume and brightness.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of LEDs used as direct light, the luminance of LEDs used as indirect light, and respectively. During the progress of the production, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, the player (or the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall) operates the production operation unit 301 (the contact operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303), and the first When one specified brightness value ranging from the specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value, which is the maximum brightness, is set, the above-described scale set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is set so as to achieve the specified specified brightness value. Tone information can be updated.

Here, the brightness designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. As the brightness specification value, one brightness specification value can be set in a range of 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specification value that is the minimum brightness (lights off) to the 31st brightness specification value that is the maximum brightness. A normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance corresponding to the 0 (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, respectively. A player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall) operates an operable effect operation section 301 (a contact operation section 302 and a pressing operation section 303) to obtain a 31st luminance that is the maximum luminance from the first luminance specified value. A specified brightness value can be set up to a specified value.

For example, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall) designates the 0th (zero) brightness assuming that the current brightness is the minimum brightness (turns off) when the contact operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise. When the value is set to the first specified brightness value, which is the next highest level of brightness, a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear While the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to be higher along the tone curve or spline tone curve, the touch operation unit 302 is reversed. When the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness in the case of the clockwise rotation operation, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, linear or spline tone curve), the luminance of the LED used as indirect light and the luminance of the LED used as direct light are changed to be lower. When the player (or an attendant such as a game hall clerk) rotates the contact operation unit 302 to select a desired luminance and presses the push operation unit 303, the selected desired luminance is confirmed. In this embodiment, a case is prepared in advance where the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) can set the brightness while the effect is in progress. , etc.) can set a desired brightness by operating the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 . In addition, when the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the touch operation unit 302, the predetermined luminance value to the 31st luminance are displayed at predetermined positions in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the progress of the effect. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator that indicates the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually indicate in the form of an image how much brightness the player (or staff such as a game hall clerk) desires. It is possible. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th luminance specified value is set as an initial value (default).

Normally, the pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are directly irradiated as light. be. For the normal palette value, one level is selected from among 17 levels in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum palette value (100%), which is the maximum value. A formula (for example, a linear tone curve , or a spline-like tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is the maximum palette value corresponding to one luminance designation in the 32-step range from the 0 (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, which is the luminance designation value described above. (100%) is a value of 20%, and similarly for the other palette values, the values (%) written in parentheses are the above-described brightness specified values, 0 (zero) brightness specified value ~ It is the value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation in the range of 32 levels up to the 31st luminance designation value.

In this embodiment, the maximum palette value (100%) is normally selected in advance for various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are directly irradiated as light. Among the various decorative boards provided on the side of the game board that are set as the gradation information described above and that are directly illuminated as light, the pallet A value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

The special palette value is set as the gradation information described above for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one level, and is one of the 32 levels ranging from the 0 (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, which are the brightness specified values described above. Palette values corresponding to luminance designations are set as the gradation information described above along predetermined mathematical expressions (for example, linear tone curves or spline curve-like tone curves).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate is darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light at the first luminance designated value, which is the next highest luminance step after the 0th (zero) luminance designated value, which is the minimum luminance (lights off). As the lowest possible brightness, it is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value Among them, one luminance designation value and the corresponding palette value are set according to a predetermined formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

Thus, in the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the LED When setting the brightness and the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. Brightness by operating While set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) touches the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit for the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. It is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the luminance specified value by the operation of 303 . As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as the direct light is dazzling and sets the brightness by operating the contact operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 in order to reduce the brightness, The brightness of the LED used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (lights off)), and in conjunction with this In addition, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value that is the next highest level of brightness after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (lights off)). Even so, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). The minimum brightness is set so that the light guide plate can be visually recognized as emitting light by indirect light.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually adjusts the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side for the LEDs used as direct light. Even without setting, the light emission mode accompanying the flow of performance is set, and the flow of performance by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side. , set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too bright (or a slightly darker luminance can produce a more dramatic effect), and other By setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed very easily. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the operable effect operation section 301 (contact operation section 302, pressing operation section 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness. Even if one specified brightness value is set up to the specified brightness value, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one specified brightness value is set for a particular decorative board. , one brightness designation value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set for the other decoration boards, respectively, so that the relationship between the mutually set light emission modes (bright or dark The brightness can be adjusted very easily without destroying the relationship of .

Furthermore, indirect light from the light guide plate is more difficult to adjust the brightness than direct light, but for LEDs used as indirect light, a special palette value different from the normal palette value (that is, independent from the normal palette value) The brightness can be set by . As a result, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is managed by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is managed by the normal palette value. and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC and generates one screen on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC in the display data creation process to be described later. Drawing data for one frame is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600 . In the display data output process, when drawing is performed in excess of the drawing capability of the VDP of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. there is As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time. 622 and the like (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers") can give priority to performances by sound effects such as music and sound effects that match various performances.

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process to be described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the data to various speakers from the set output channel. . As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various presentations.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, to instruct which screen data from the first screen data is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC. , update the pointer.

Further, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is set to indicate the number of light emission data to be output from the top light emission data among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for light emission mode generation. Update.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the sound data of the production sounds such as music and sound effects arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, and the sound command data instructing the sound data of the notification sounds and notification sounds, The pointer is updated to indicate what number of sound command data from the first sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data, the drive data of which order from the head drive data is to be output. Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, are repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt, which will be described later. It is updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing, which is repeatedly executed each time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is executed. Update the pointer to the data and update the pointer each time you do your own work. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be instructed, the scheduler update process is forcibly instructed to the drive data that should be instructed.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, and the received various commands are analyzed and used for various settings of effects. Update the random number (for example, the random number used for pending lookahead-related effects). Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyzes various commands received. The CPU of the peripheral control IC reads screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, etc. from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands. (extracted) and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the luminance of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the above-described luminance designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value. and , respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads out (extracts) the schedule data for generating the lighting mode from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and executes the lamp palette setting process. Execution, the player (or staff such as game hall staff) operates the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, press operation unit 303), the above-mentioned, from the first specified luminance value to the maximum luminance When one specified brightness value is set up to the 31st brightness specified value, the grayscale information described above can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to achieve the set brightness specified value. It is possible.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, a start winning prize command for instructing the start of the starting winning prize effect, normal symbol Normal design storage command for identifying the number of reservations (0 to 4), variation pattern for instructing the start of variable performance such as variable display of decorative symbols in the performance display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of special symbols Command, pattern storage command output when the number of start pending changes, big winning opening 1 count display command output each time a game ball is accepted in the first big winning opening 206 or the second big winning opening 2007 It analyzes whether or not, and recognizes which game state it is at present.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyze various commands. Various commands include various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronization effect, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power on, normal Various commands classified as related to figure synchronization effects, various commands classified as normal electric role effects related, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as test related, and In addition, there are various commands classified. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 executes lottery processing related to advance notice and the like based on the received command, and based on the result of the lottery, schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical Drive source schedule data and the like are read out (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

The peripheral control ROM stores in advance the peripheral control unit 1511, various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511 and the like, various data, various control data, and various schedule data. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sound for generating sound effects such as music and sound effects. There are generation schedule data and electric drive source schedule data for generating the driving mode of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 . The schedule data for generating the lighting mode is configured by arranging the lighting mode data defining the lighting modes of various LEDs in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for indicating which of the plurality of output channels of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC is to be used, and a number of tracks of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. , and a track number for indicating in which track sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines operations of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 include various commands classified as notification displays, an abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In addition, in the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality notification is automatically changed to the remaining abnormality notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is designed to Thus, a plurality of abnormalities can be simultaneously monitored without losing information that one abnormality has occurred due to the occurrence of another abnormality after the occurrence of one abnormality and before the abnormality is resolved. can be done.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. By this RCT acquisition information updating process, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, are updated, and based on this updated time information, the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Date is updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation is stored in the peripheral control ROM. is read (extracted) from and output to VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads out image data from the SDRAM based on the input screen data and renders (displays) one screen on the effect display device 1600. Minutes (one frame) of drawing data is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is It is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. , set the output channel to use according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady-state process is performed), the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is changed based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. are identified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the sound volume corresponding to the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is obtained, and in the sound data output processing of step S1018, the output set in the sound data generation processing is performed. Sound data is output from each channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various presentations.

Specifically, the resistance value is changed by rotating the volume control switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the value is 0 to 0. It is converted into values in 1024 steps up to a value of 1023. In this embodiment, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and music are played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker for bass sound of the body frame 4. Sound effects are flowing. In this way, by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the volume control switch, music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker for bass sound on the body frame 4. ing.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the hall clerk of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraudulent action against the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Contains the subvolume value to be used.

Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is set for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display. A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit 0.5 seconds after receiving the variable pattern command and starting the variable display of the decorative pattern, or 0.5 seconds after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit and after the fixed display of the decorative pattern. ) can be adjusted by operating the contact operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 .

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after power-on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), A certain period of time when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) (in this example, peripheral Until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern after receiving the variation pattern command in the control unit, or 0.5 seconds after the peripheral control unit has received the stop display command and after the fixed display of the decorative pattern. Seconds have elapsed), by operating the touch operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation process is applied to the substrate. The voltage is converted into seven levels of volume 0 to 6, and further divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume control switch. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value accordingly, the sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume to set the substrate volume.

The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is Actually, it is amplified up to a master volume value which is the sound volume flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4, and serializes this amplified production sound to audio data. It is designed to be output as

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the top center speaker on the side of the door frame 3 is amplified to the master volume value, The volume of sound emitted from the top side speaker and the main body frame speaker for bass sound of the main body frame 4 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the sound effects, among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, the sound data of the sound effects incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the sound effects incorporated in the track to be used and the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the synthesized production sound, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually adjusted to the center of the top on the side of the door frame 3. Amplifies to the master volume value that is the volume of the sound that flows from the speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4, serializes this amplified production sound, and outputs it as audio data. , The sound data of the informational sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume control switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the informational sound incorporated in the track to be used. The volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker for bass sound of the main body frame 4. Then, the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, when the performance sound is played from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker for low sound of the main body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions and the pachinko machine 1 is fraudulent. To briefly explain the control of playing the notification sound to notify the staff of the hall of the action, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the sound effect is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound effect is incorporated. The sound data of the track, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track in which the informational sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the informational sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and this synthesis is performed. The volume of the produced sound and the volume of the notification sound are amplified to a master volume value which is the volume actually flowing from the top central speaker on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker, and the body frame speaker for bass of the body frame 4. Then, the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, only the notification sound with the maximum volume is actually emitted from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker for bass sound of the body frame 4. At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound does not flow from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker for bass sound of the main body frame 4, but the production sound is generated as described above. progressing according to the schedule data for

In this embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the top central speaker on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker, and the body frame speaker for bass sounds of the body frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After a predetermined period of time has passed, the volume of the effect sound progressing according to the schedule data for sound generation that has been forcibly set to mute is changed to the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume control switch as the sub volume value. set again (at this time, if the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the contact operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the adjusted sub-volume value of the effect sound ), and the sound flows from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker for bass sound on the body frame 4.

In this way, when the performance sound is flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker for bass sound of the body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions and the pachinko machine 1 does not work. When a notification sound is played to notify a hall clerk or the like of a fraudulent act, the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is emitted from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the bass sound of the main body frame 4. Although it flows from the main body frame speaker, this muted effect sound progresses according to the schedule data for sound generation. When the main body frame speaker for bass sound of the main body frame 4 stops flowing, the effect sound does not start to flow again from the point where the informative sound started to flow, but the schedule data for sound generation until a predetermined period has passed since the informative sound started to flow. It is designed to start flowing again from the point where it progressed according to

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are not dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the peripheral volume from muted to maximum volume by program. The sound source of the IC can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall rotates the volume control switch to set the volume to a low volume, the performance sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers become small, but the pachinko machine 1 does not. When a problem occurs or the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for staff members such as store clerks in the game hall to notice the occurrence of a problem or the player's dishonesty.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are provided in the SDRAM. Copy and back up to the backup area for regular processing.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing (step S1036). In this WDT clearing process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0 as execution completion of the steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting a value of 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. That is, in step S1006, the system waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004. Thus, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1008 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing".

In this peripheral control unit steady-state processing, first, in step S1008, the value 1 is set to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed. , and step S1036, and finally in step S1038, the normal processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0 to indicate completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing, and the processing is completed. Become. The peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006. This V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, as described above, is a V-blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, which is executed in response to the input to the CPU. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. .3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[13-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to indicate that screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. will be explained. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the steady process flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 178 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when the processing is completed.

In the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, it determines that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, Exit the routine. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the execution of the steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. They are each set to a value of 0 when no routine processing is executed.

In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. When the processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1050. When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, it is determined in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. By setting the value 1 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG, the fact that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control of FIG. By setting the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the peripheral control unit of this routine indicates that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. By notifying the V blank signal interrupt processing, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, that is, whether the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the peripheral controller steady-state processing cannot be completed until the next V-blank signal is input after the V-blank signal is input.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing, if the processing cannot be completed within about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next processing will be performed by the determination in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the current peripheral controller steady-state processing that failed is approximately 66.6 ms. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is normally executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer occurs by activating a 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is the current peripheral control unit steady process that failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed 64 times. is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral controller steady-state processing fails, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the presentation.

[13-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 177 will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33, as shown in FIG. 179 (step S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine after the 1ms interrupt timer is started by the 1ms interrupt timer start processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. .3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed at intervals of about 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. is executed, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, . will occur.

In step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt process has started when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred. When the determination is made, this routine is terminated as it is. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the priority of the interrupt processing is given to the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, , the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, it adds 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increments it, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, a pointer indicates the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In accordance with the drive data, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series. Every time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed, the pointer is updated. do. As a result, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3, an electric drive source provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5, etc.) ) are driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 have been input. position history information, movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC, based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the original position (standby position) of the various movable bodies provided in the various effect units provided on the game board 5 or acquire the movable position to grasp the movable position.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs effect operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input, history information of detection signals from various sensors 302 rotation (rotation direction) history information and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Whether or not the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated can be obtained from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by operating the effect operation unit 301, the volume of the effect sound output from the top central speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker of the main body frame 4 can be adjusted, and the door frame 3 and the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 can be adjusted.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to the SDRAM. It is backed up by copying it to the provided backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing. In this embodiment, the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set in different areas, and the SDRAM The backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM and the backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 are executed within a period of 1ms as the progress of the effects. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. there is In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, Therefore, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V-blank signal, the peripheral control unit will not be affected by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt. After forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is prevented from collapsing. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the size of the liquid crystal of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is output even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In this embodiment, the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, this It is possible to absorb the time lag due to slight changes in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[13-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 start to be sent as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses this as a trigger to transmit the main peripheral serial data to the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC by 1 byte (8 bits). ) is fetched into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt occurs with this as a trigger, and the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing is performed. One packet of the main-circumference serial data consists of 3 bytes. The 1st byte is the status, the 2nd byte is the mode, and the 3rd byte is the status and mode. is assigned a sum value calculated from

When the peripheral controller command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral controller IC determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 180 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

In the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, out of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, reads 1-byte (8-bit) information. When it is determined that it is within the period in which reception is possible, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC. step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the main circumference serial data is read out from the reception buffer. When it is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. An initial value of 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, are sequentially sent from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the judgment of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, when the value of the reception counter SRXC is not 3, that is, after the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. Then, when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, has not been taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. A 1-byte reception period timer is set in step S1208, thereby setting a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is 3, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, following the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, reads the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. In a certain mode, and when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). This calculation is performed by considering the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the mode, which is the second-byte of the main-circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, as numerical values, and summing them (sum value ) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main-circumference serial data among the main-circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island facilities of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become electrically charged, electrostatic discharge occurs and noise is generated. in a receptive environment.

Therefore, in this embodiment, on the side of the peripheral control board 1510, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated using the main control board 1310, and does this calculated sum value match the sum value assigned as the 3rd byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310? is determining whether or not As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has been affected by noise between the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 and has changed to non-normal main peripheral serial data. can judge.

In step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the received main peripheral serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216 ), exiting this routine.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 is When it is determined that the period for which information can be received has passed, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC reads the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202. and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, the routine ends.

[13-5. Peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral controller power outage warning signal interrupt process executed when the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 as a trigger. 181, the CPU of the peripheral control IC starts a 2-microsecond timer (step S1300) to determine whether a power failure warning signal has been input. (step S1302). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it ends this routine.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If it is determined in step S1304 that two macroseconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If so, this routine is terminated, and if it is determined that a power failure warning signal has been input, it is again determined in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. In other words, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine.

In the determination in step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, the power saving process is performed. (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially executing the turning off of the backlight of the performance display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. By suppressing, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, a period of at least 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control ICs can receive the commands being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control section command reception interrupt processing is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup process, commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and backed up.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1312). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clearing process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, or after step S1314, it returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power failure warning signal has been input. determine whether In other words, it is endlessly determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. By endlessly continuing the determination in this way, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it is no longer possible to output a clear signal to the external WDT. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing in step S1314. CPU is not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 177 is started again.

As described above, if the input of the power failure warning signal continues in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power failure state by executing the WDT clearing process in step S1314. It is designed not to take. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It's becoming As a result, even if the peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the judgment in step S1302 is passed, step If it is determined in S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset because the WDT clear processing of step S1314 is not executed. Such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting.

[Game content]
Next, game contents by the game board 5 of the third embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 182 is a front view of the game board of the third embodiment.

In the game board 5 of the third embodiment, one of the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 of the first embodiment is used as the second starting opening 2005, and the first execution The second start opening 2005 provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 of the form is used as the general winning opening 2001 . Other parts have the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, and detailed descriptions of the parts having the same configuration are omitted.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 are rotated by the player rotating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 . is hit into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195. The more the handle 195 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. B, that is, game balls B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, there are a variable winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, and a A first prize winning port 2006 is provided, and a second prize winning port 2007 is provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 as a ball entrance into which the game ball B can enter. Of these, the first start opening 2004 and the second start opening 2005 are always open at the top, and the reception of the game ball B is always possible, while the variable winning opening 2003 and the first big winning opening 2006 , The second big winning hole 2007 is closed in a normal state, and is opened when a predetermined condition is established, thereby allowing the reception of the game ball B.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nail N, the game ball The flowing speed of B is suppressed, and various motions are imparted to the game ball B so that the motion can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500. As shown in FIG.

When the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest part in front view, it hits a plurality of obstacle nails N, It will flow through either the left first guide passage 2531 or the left second guide passage 2532 of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center accessory 2500 . In the vicinity of the entrance in the left second guide passage 2532, there is provided a first large prize winning port 2006 which is normally closed by the first large prize winning port door 2523 so that it cannot be received. The game ball B that has entered into rolls on the first big winning opening door 2523 and flows down.

The game ball B that has passed through the left guide path group 2530 is released above the gate 2002, and in the normal state, the left guide path group 2530 and the gate 2002, and then pass through the gate 2002 with a certain probability.

When the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 and is detected by the gate sensor 2601, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and when the lottery result of the lottery normal symbol is "normal win", the variable winning opening. The variable winning opening 2003 closed by the door 2521 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the receiving of the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003 becomes possible. In this example, the probability that the lottery result of the normal pattern will be "normal hit" in the normal lottery in the low probability non-time saving state and the high probability non-time saving state is 0/100, and other game states (high probability time saving State, low probability time saving state A, low probability time saving state B, low probability time saving state C) in the normal lottery, the probability that the lottery result of the normal pattern will be “normal hit” is 100/100. That is, in the low-probability non-time-saving state and high-probability non-time-saving state, some peculiar situations (high-probability short-time state, low-probability short-time state A, low-probability short-time state B, low-probability short-time state C After the variable winning Except for the situation where a part of the opening operation of the mouth door 2521 has continued), the possibility of receiving the game ball B in the variable winning opening 2003 is set to be extremely low, and the high probability time saving state, the low probability time saving state A , In the low probability time saving state B and the low probability time saving state C, the possibility that the game ball B is accepted in the variable winning opening 2003 is set to be higher than the low probability non time saving state and the high probability non time saving state.

In this embodiment, since the variable winning opening 2003 is provided in a portion near the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the flow of the left second guide passage 2532 is higher than the left first guide passage 2531. It is accepted in the variable prize winning port 2003 with probability. Then, when the game ball B is received in the variable winning hole 2003, a predetermined number (for example, 1 to 5) of the game ball B from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, the upper tray 201 is paid out to

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate 2002, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the indication of the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the lottery result of this normal symbol is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The variable winning opening 2003 is opened after the normal variable time has elapsed.

If the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 during the period from when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 to when the normal symbol lottery result is suggested, the normal symbol lottery result cannot be suggested. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the normal symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the previous normal symbol ends. In addition, the upper limit of the number of reserved lottery results of normal symbols is up to four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

At the site of this gate 2002 , the game ball B flows down either the gate 2002 , the left outside of the gate 2002 , or the right outside of the gate 2002 . Then, the game ball B flowing downward from the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 opened in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 . In this embodiment, due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the area between the gate 2002 and the windmill W, the game ball B that has passed the right outside of the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 with a high probability. .

The game ball B entering the warp entrance 2511 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512 . The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and is released forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center release portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the center release portion 2513a is located directly above the first start port 2004, so there is a high probability that it will be the first ball. It is received in the starting port 2004 .

When the game ball B hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500 is received in the first starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of The game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201, and at the main control board 1310, the lottery of the first special symbols (for example, "miss", "small hit", "big hit", "immediate short hit", etc.) is done. If the lottery result of the lottered first special symbol is other than "missing", an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol that has been drawn is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special fluctuation time).

By the way, if the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it will be pushed toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200 general prize winning opening 2001, second starting opening 2005, or first starting opening 2004 of starting opening unit 2100, etc. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

Regarding the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005, the upper part is always open, and the reception of the game ball B is always possible. However, for the first start port 2004, the game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a is accepted with a high probability, but for the second start port 2005, the center There is no possibility that the game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2513 of the accessory 2500 will be accepted. Therefore, the game ball B hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500 is received by the first starting hole 2004 with a higher probability than the second starting hole 2005.例文帳に追加

When the game ball B hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500 is received in the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning port 2003, a predetermined number (for example, , 1) game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201, and in the main control board 1310, the second special symbol (for example, "miss", "small hit", "big hit", "immediate short hit") , etc.) will be selected. If the lottery result of the lottered second special symbol is other than "loss", an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the lottery second special symbol is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special fluctuation time).

In this embodiment, in the order of acceptance to the first start port 2004, the second start port 2005 or the variable winning port 2003, the lottery of the first special symbol by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2004, the second A lottery for the second special symbol is performed by accepting the game ball B into the starting port 2005 or the variable winning port 2003. - 特許庁That is, the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2004, and the lottery of the second special symbol by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2005 or the variable winning port 2003 Suggestion of the result is made in the order of acceptance to the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005 or the variable prize winning port 2003.

Lottery results of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) drawn from the start of the special lottery by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2004, the second start port 2005 or the variable winning port 2003 suggest. If the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2004 during the period (special fluctuation time), the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol cannot be started, so the special symbol that was previously drawn. The start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is completed. The number of retained lottery results of the first special symbols to be retained is up to four with respect to the first starting port 2004, and for more than that, the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2004. Also discarded without holding the lottery result of the first special symbol. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

Similarly, a lottery of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) drawn from the start of the special lottery by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2004, the second start port 2005 or the variable winning port 2003 Until the result is suggested (special fluctuation time), if the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning port 2003, it is not possible to start suggesting the lottery result of the second special symbol. , The start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol is withheld until the suggestion of the lottery result of the previously drawn special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is completed. The number of retained lottery results of the second special symbol to be retained is up to four with respect to the second start port 2005 and the variable winning port 2003, and for more than that, the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning Even if the game ball B is received in the mouth 2003, the lottery result of the second special symbol is discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

In a normal state, even if the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500, there is no possibility that it will be accepted into the first start hole 2004, the second start hole 2005, or the variable winning hole 2003. Then, the game ball B can positively perform the hitting operation so that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center accessory 2500.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500, the center role 2500 Through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the guide passage group 2540, the nails are discharged into the space forming portion 2550 in which the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is planted.

The right guide passage group 2540 of the center accessory 2500 includes a right first guide passage 2541 whose entrance is open near the blocking portion 1006, and an entrance spaced leftward from the entrance of the right first guide passage 2541. and a right second guide passage 2542 that is open. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with the strength to contact the impingement portion 1006 (so-called right hitting), it enters the right first guide passage 2541 and does not hit the impingement portion 1006 (right When the game ball B is hit with a strength somewhat weaker than hitting, it enters the right second guide passage 2542 with a high probability. In other words, the game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 flows through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 according to the hitting strength.

In this embodiment, the game ball B that has circulated through the right first guide passage 2541 is released into the first guidance area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the game ball B that has circulated through the right second guide passage 2542 is released into the specific obstacle nail group 2700. It is discharged into second guide region 2712 of nail group 2700 .

The game ball B released to the specific obstacle nail group 2700 flows down while meandering in the horizontal direction along the guidance area 2710 . As a result, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the falling speed of the game ball B is suppressed compared to the normal area.

In the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712, the game ball B may deviate from the guide area 2710, and if it deviates to the right outside from the second guide area 2712, the first sub-out port 2021 provided below accepted with high probability. When the game ball B is received in the first sub-out port 2021, it is discharged out of the game area 5a without a chance of being received in the second big winning port 2007 or the second starting port 2005 provided downstream.

In this embodiment, the first sub-out port 2021 has a higher probability of receiving the fluid through the right second guide passage 2542 than through the right first guide passage 2541 . As a result, it is possible for the player to perform a hitting operation of the game ball B so that the game ball B circulates through the right first guide passage 2541 when "hitting to the right". there is In other words, when hitting to the right, the game ball B is hit with such a force that the game ball B abuts against the impingement portion 1006, so that the hitting operation of rotating the handle 195 by a large amount is encouraged. The pachinko machine 1's original game can be easily enjoyed by a relatively easy driving operation.

A game ball B that has circulated through the specific obstacle nail group 2700 (space forming portion 2550) and has not been received by the first sub-out port 2021 passes between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 and passes through the second attacker portion. Enter 2560. In a normal state, the second large winning opening 2007 provided in the second attacker portion 2560 is closed by the second large winning opening door 2562 so that the game ball B cannot be accepted, so that the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker The game ball B that has passed between the right wall portion 2567 flows down onto the second large winning opening door 2562, rolls leftward on the second large winning opening door 2562 (attacker passage 2564), and then rolls to the right. It is discharged downward from the second attacker portion 2560 through the discharge passage 2565 .

A general starting port 2001 is provided below the right discharge passage 2565, a second sub-out port 2022 is provided on the right side of the general starting port 2001, and an inclined wall portion of the lower right unit 2400 is on the left side of the general starting port 2001. 2418 are provided respectively. A plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted between the outlet of the right discharge passage 2565 and the general starting port 2001, the second sub-out port 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418. Therefore, the game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 is accepted by the general starting port 2001 with a certain degree of probability. In addition, the game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 is received in the second sub-out port 2022 with a probability lower than that of the general start port 2001 . The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is discharged out of the game area 5a.

Then, the game ball B that is released downward from the right release passage 2565 and has not been received by the general starting port 2001 or the second sub-out port 2022 flows down onto the inclined wall portion 2418 and along the inclination of the inclined wall portion 2418. and rolls obliquely downward to the left, is released leftward at a portion below the first starting port 2004 and is received in the out port 1008 .

In other words, in the normal state, when the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 ("right hit"), the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning port 2003 Opportunity of acceptance There is no As a result, in a normal state, the player can actively perform a hitting operation such that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center role 2500, and the right side of the center role 2500 (" A feeling of premium can be imparted to a right-handed player.

As described above, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, the first big winning port 2006 and the second big prize winning opening 2007 are opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern, and the game ball B can be received.

When the first big winning hole 2006 can be accepted, the first big winning hole 2006 is provided in the left second guide passage 2532 on the left side of the center accessory 2500. A driving operation can be performed so that the game ball B flows through the second guide passage 2532 . Then, when the game ball B entering the left second guide passage 2532 is received by the first big winning hole 2006 when the first big winning hole 2006 is open to accept the game ball B, the main control board 1310 and A predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 by the payout control board 633 .

On the other hand, when the second big winning hole 2007 can be accepted, the second big winning hole 2007 is provided below the right side of the center role 2500. can be driven so that the game ball B circulates. Then, when the second big winning hole 2007 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, the game ball B entered the attacker passage 2564 of the second attacker part 2560 from between the guide wall part 2552 and the attacker right wall part 2567. is accepted in the second big winning hole 2007, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

In this way, when the first big winning hole 2006 and the second big winning hole 2007 can accept the game ball B, by allowing the first big winning hole 2006 and the second big winning hole 2007 to accept the game ball B, Since a large number of game balls B can be paid out, the player can be entertained and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

By the way, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn or the lottery result of the second special symbol is "big win", the second big winning hole 2007 can accept the game ball B as a big win game. A predetermined time (eg, 20 seconds to 40 seconds) has elapsed after the open state, or a predetermined number (eg, 10) of game balls B are received into the second big winning opening 2007. When the conditions are satisfied, the opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is called one round) in which the game ball B is in a closed state is repeated for a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 5 rounds are repeated for a "5R jackpot", and 10 rounds are repeated for a "10R jackpot" to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player. At this time, at the timing when the second big winning hole 2007 opens and the game ball B can be received, even if the game ball B is aimed at the second big winning hole 2007, the second big winning hole 2007 is opened. Since the specific obstruction peg group 2700 capable of delaying the flow speed of the game ball B is provided upstream, it is difficult to get the timing to hit the game ball B. As a result, a degree of difficulty is given to the operation of hitting the game ball B, so that the game can be made worthwhile, the player can be entertained, and the loss of interest can be suppressed. . Further, in the above case, it is possible to make it difficult to accept the game ball B into the second big winning hole 2007, so that an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be suppressed.

In addition, in the "jackpot", after the jackpot game is over, the probability that the first special pattern or the second special pattern such as the "jackpot" will be drawn is changed ("variable hit") to increase the probability of being drawn. There is a "hit" to change ("time saving hit") so that the acceptance of the game ball B to 2003 is facilitated. For example, when the normal lottery is performed, the probability that the lottery result of the normal pattern is "normal hit" is increased, or when the lottery result of the normal pattern is "normal hit", the variable winning entrance door 2521 is closed. By increasing the time and the number of times that the variable winning opening 2003 is open, acceptance of the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003 is facilitated.

In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is "small win", the first big winning hole 2006 can receive the game ball B for a short time as a small win game. It opens and closes in between (for example, a small hit rush).

In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is "immediate short winning", the big winning game or the small winning game is not executed, and the first big winning port 2006 or the second big winning The opening 2007 does not open to accept the game ball B, but after that, it maintains the time-saving state as an advantageous game state for a predetermined specific number of fluctuations.

In this embodiment, below the second big winning hole 2007, there is a pseudo game area 2010 in which only the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007 can circulate. The game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007 enters the pseudo game area 2010 after being detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2561 . The game ball B that has entered the pseudo game area 2010 flows down while coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game area 2010, and when the pseudo big winning opening 2402 can accept the game ball B. , a game ball B is received in the pseudo big winning opening 2402 . On the other hand, when the pseudo big winning opening 2402 cannot receive the game ball B, it passes in front of the pseudo big winning opening 2402 and is discharged from the pseudo out opening 2404 without being returned to the game area 5a.

For example, when the second big winning opening 2007 is capable of receiving the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern due to the above-mentioned "jackpot" or the like, the pseudo big winning opening 2402 receives the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. become acceptable. Since this pseudo big winning hole 2402 is provided so as to be larger and conspicuous than the second big winning hole 2007, many game balls B accepted in the second big winning hole 2007 are accepted into the pseudo big winning hole 2402. As a result, it is possible to keep the player from getting bored during the "jackpot" game, and to keep the player from losing interest.

In this embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special symbol lottery results (the first special symbol lottery result and the second special symbol lottery result). Suggestion of the lottery result of the special pattern in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs, blinking for a predetermined time, and thereafter suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern by the combination of the lit LEDs. .

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the result of the lottery for the special symbol is suggested as the effect image. The performance image suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern in the performance display device 1600 is displayed by changing each pattern row in a state in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are arranged in the horizontal direction and displayed. The pattern rows are successively stop-displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stop-displayed so that the patterns of the three stop-displayed pattern rows are combined corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern. When the lottery result of the special pattern is other than "lost", the effect display device 1600 displays a finalized image suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed. , Advantageous game states (for example, "small winning" game, "big winning" game, "time saving" game, etc.) are generated according to the lottery result of the drawn special symbols.

It should be noted that the time to suggest the lottery result of the special pattern in the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (special fluctuation time)) and the time to suggest the lottery result of the special pattern in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the time until the finalized image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol by the effect display device 1600, according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn, the effect operation unit in the door frame 3 A player-participation type effect can be performed in which the contact operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation part 301 in 300 are operated. In the player participatory effect, the pressing operation part 303 can be raised by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player participatory effect can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation part 301 .

In the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided on the door frame 3, each decoration board provided on the game board 5, the performance display device 1600, the lower right unit 2400, and the back front of the back unit 3000 are displayed. Peripheral edge decoration unit 3200, back front front effect unit 3300, back bottom front effect unit 3400, back top back effect unit 3500, back bottom back effect unit 3600, etc. can be appropriately used to perform light emission effect, display effect, etc. Thus, the player can be entertained by various effects, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to allow the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake in performing the operation to be performed or does not perform the operation in the player-participation-type effect of operating the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303. to notify the player to that effect.

[Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (especially the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 183 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. On the condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first starting port 2004) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and stored in the RAM. A first start opening passing process such as storing in one special symbol reservation storage area is executed (step S232). Also, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2005) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number A second starting port passing process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM is executed (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether or not a flag during execution of a jackpot indicating that the jackpot game is being controlled is set (step S235), and if the flag during execution of a jackpot is set, jackpot control for controlling the jackpot game. The process (step S240) is executed. In addition, in the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) becomes a mode suggesting "big hit A", 10R A process of controlling the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2007 is executed according to the big winning game. In addition, when the state of suggesting "big win B" is reached, processing for controlling the opening and closing of the second big winning port 2007 is executed according to the 5R big win game, and when the state of suggesting "big win C" is reached. , 10R jackpot game according to the processing of opening and closing the second big winning opening 2007 is executed.

Also, in the jackpot control process (step S240), after performing the opening control of the second big winning opening 2007, each set process of a high probability flag, a time saving flag, and a time saving number counter is executed. The high-probability flag is a flag indicating a high-probability state, and when the 10R jackpot game is terminated based on the fact that the result of the lottery process at the time when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped is in a mode suggesting a "jackpot A". , is set when the 5R jackpot game is terminated based on the state suggesting "jackpot B". Then, the high probability flag is reset by special symbol stop processing shown in FIG.

In addition, the time saving flag is a flag indicating a time saving state, and the 10R big hit based on the fact that the result of the lottery process when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped has become a mode suggesting "big hit A" or "big hit C". When the game ends, it is set when the mode suggests "immediate short hits A to C". Then, the time saving flag is reset by the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 194 to be described later when the next big hit or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes "0".

In addition, the time-saving number counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of variable display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of times the time-saving state continues, suggesting "big hit A" or "big hit C". When ending the 10R jackpot game based on the mode of doing so, when the mode of suggesting ``immediate short wins A to C'' is reached, the number of times of continuation of the time saving state is set. The time-saving frequency counter is counted down every time the variable display of the special pattern is executed until the counter value becomes "0", but the next big hit occurs before the counter value becomes "0". Sometimes, it is reset (the counter value is returned to "0") by the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 194 which will be described later.

Also, if the big hit running flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the small winning running flag indicating that the small winning game is being controlled is set (step S236), and the small winning running flag is set. If it is set, a small winning control process (step S239) for controlling a small winning game is executed. In addition, in the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) becomes a mode suggesting "small hit", A process of opening and closing the first big winning opening 2006 according to the small winning game is executed.

Also, if the flag during execution of the small hit is not set, a special symbol process including a lottery process related to the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed (step S238). In this example, when the first special random number of the first special design is obtained from the random number counter, and when the second special random number of the second special design is obtained from the random number counter, both are common special design reserved storage It is configured to execute the variable display of the first special design and the second special design in the order stored in the area and stored in the special design reservation storage area.

FIG. 184 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first starting port passing process (step S232).

Now, in the process of step S231, if it is determined that the first starting hole sensor 3002 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the first starting hole 2004, as shown in FIG. Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S241.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special reservation number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the special symbol reservation storage area from the main control built-in RAM, and this counter value (step S242). In the process of step S242, if it is determined that the first pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to the following steps S243 to newly suspend the variable display control of the first special symbol. The processing of S245 is to be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S244, each random number obtained in step S241 is stored in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM by the counter value of the first special reservation number counter and the counter value of the second special reservation number counter. It is stored in the special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the total value consisting of values.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number acquired in step S241, the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol. is a big win, a small win, or an immediate short win, the type of big win in the case of a big win, the type of small win in the case of a small win, and the type of an immediate short win in the case of an immediate short win Preliminary determination information such as whether to execute a ready-to-win effect as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 when a big hit, a small win, or an immediate short win does not occur, or the type of game effect to be executed (variation pattern type). is executed before the variable display corresponding to the start winning is started (step S245), and then the process is terminated.

However, in the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended.

In addition, when the number of the first reservation memory changes based on the game ball entering the first start port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reservation number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the first reservation memory. In addition to updating to correspond to the number, a command (first reservation number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0 to 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation command 0-4 (special symbol 1 memory command 0-4). It's like

FIG. 185 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S245). The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when starting the effect pre-determination process, uses the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random number obtained in step S241 or the random number obtained in step S251 described later, specifically the special random number (first special random number, second special random number), symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number), reach random number, and fluctuating random number are compared to determine whether a big hit, a small hit, or an immediate short hit. If it becomes a big win, if it becomes a small win, it will be a small win, if it will be an immediate short win, it will be an immediate short win, and if it will not be a big win, a small win, or an immediate short win, the effect display device. Whether the ready-to-win effect is executed as the game effect to be executed at 1600 or the mode type (type of variation pattern) of the game effect to be executed is specified (step S261).

Then, the specified advance judgment information (whether it is a big hit, a small win, or an immediate short win, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is a small hit, the type of small hit, if it is an immediate short hit, , the type of immediate short hit, the big hit, the small hit, and when it is not an immediate short hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed (variation pattern type), etc.), the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number, second special random number), and the pending memory number (value of the pending number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number set the pre-determined command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process related to the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reservation memory number (the One special pending number counter value), and set the first special symbol pre-determination command according to, and in the second special symbol performance pre-determination process executed in step S255 of the second start opening passage process described later, Set the second special symbol pre-determination command according to the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the second special random number, and the second reservation memory number (second special reservation number counter value) (step S262 ).

Then, by transmitting the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), the first start opening 2004 and the second start opening 2005 where the start winning has occurred In addition to the number of reserved memories stored corresponding to , whether the display result of the variable display of the special symbols based on the generated starting prize is a big win, a small win, or an immediate short win, and if it is a big win, it is a big win. Type, type of small win in the case of a small win, type of an immediate short win in the case of an immediate short win, big win, small win, and in the case of not an immediate short win, the game executed by the performance display device 1600 Preliminary determination information such as the ready-to-win effect is executed as the effect or the type of game effect to be executed (variation pattern type) is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before starting the variable display according to the start winning. Peripheral control IC can be grasped.

When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a reserved storage area for storing pre-determination information regarding variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol).

In addition, the reserved storage area has 1 to 8 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved storage areas obtained by summing the number of the first reserved storage area and the number of the second reserved storage area, and the peripheral control IC The indicated advance determination information is stored in order from the first (earliest) storage area. Then, when the advance judgment command is received when the advance judgment information is stored in the nth (n=1 to 7) storage area, the advance judgment information notified to the (n+1)th storage area (n=1 to 7). is stored, and when receiving a variation pattern command (first variation pattern command, second variation pattern command) that notifies the start of variation display of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), according to the received variation pattern command discard the prior determination information stored in the first storage area of the reserved storage area, and replace the prior determination information stored in the Nth (N=2 to 8) storage area with the (N-1)th (N= 2 to 8)th storage area (shift the pre-determination information stored in the reserved storage area). As a result, the pre-determination information of the special symbols (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is stored in such a manner that the order in which the start of the variable display is postponed can be specified, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information. Become so.

When the variable display control is placed in a suspended state in this way, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (suspended state), the degree of expectation for the big hit (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control ) can be notified at a predetermined timing, such as when the pending display is newly output or when the pending display is shifted according to the completion of the pending display. .

FIG. 186 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passing process (step S234).

Now, in the process of step S233, if it is determined that the second starting hole sensor 2401 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the second starting hole 2005, as shown in FIG. Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reservation storage number is set to its maximum value (upper limit value ) (step S252). In the processing of this step S252, when it is determined that the second pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253- The process of S255 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S254, each random number obtained in step S251 is stored in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM by the counter value of the first special reservation number counter and the counter value of the second special reservation number counter. It is stored in the special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the total value consisting of values.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is based on the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number acquired in step S251, the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol. is a big win, a small win, or an immediate short win, the type of big win in the case of a big win, the type of a small win in the case of a small win, and the type of an immediate short win in the case of an immediate short win Preliminary determination information such as whether a ready-to-win effect is executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 when a big hit, a small win, or an immediate short win is not achieved, or the type of game effect to be executed (variation pattern type). is executed before the variable display corresponding to the start winning is started (step S255), and then the process is terminated.

However, in the processing of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S255, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended.

In addition, when the second reservation memory number changes based on the game ball entering the second start port 2005, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reservation number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the second reservation memory. In addition to updating to correspond to the number, a command (second reservation number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation command 0-4 (special symbol 2 memory command 0-4). It's like

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the number of first reserved memories based on the game ball entering the first start port 2004 is set to "4", and the game ball enters the second start port 2005. The upper limit of the number of second reserved memories based on entering the ball is set to "4". In addition, during the time saving state, it becomes easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003 than during the normal state, so the period in which the second retention memory number is the upper limit continues for a long time. Even if a game ball enters the opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005, the player is prevented from being in a disadvantageous state in which he cannot get a chance to win a lottery.

FIG. 187 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S238). In the special symbol process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed according to the above-described special symbol process flag.

1. The special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a are read, and based on the read special random numbers, the lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the special symbols, etc. Performed special symbol normal processing (step S280)
2. Special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which determination processing of the mode when the variation control of the special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the special symbol is stopped.
3. Based on the fluctuating random numbers, the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) of the function display unit 1400 are changed. Variation pattern setting processing (step S282) in which lottery processing and the like are performed for the variation mode of the effect display to be executed correspondingly
4. Special symbol variation processing (step S283) to wait until the special symbol variation display on the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. The display mode when the special symbol variation control is stopped is such that the special symbol display mode when the special symbol variation control is stopped is displayed on the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process. Special symbol stop processing (step S284) for stopping the variable display of symbols

The special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed in the main control side power-on process (see FIG. 167).

FIG. 188 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol normal process (step S280).

When the special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As, there is a variable display control of special symbols (first special symbol, second special random number) in a pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter and the counter value of the second special pending number counter or not. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the special symbols in the pending state, then as the process of step S302, the special symbols stored in the special symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a Random number related to the display mode of the design (for example, special random number (first special random number, second special random number), design random number (first design random number, second design random number), reach random number, variable random number) The random number stored in the storage area is read out from the same RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, when the read special random number is the first special random number, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and when the read special random number is the second special random number, the above While counting down the second special reservation number counter, a random number related to the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the special design stored in each storage area of the special design reservation storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU (special random number ( First special random number, second special random number), symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number), reach random number, variable random number) are shifted in a First-In First-Out manner.

Specifically, the special symbol reservation storage area has eight storage areas 1 to 8, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning in order from the first (first) area. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 7) storage area and the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the (n+1)-th storage area (n=1 to 7), and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 8) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 8)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the special symbols occurs is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

After that, as the process of step S305, if the read special random number is the first special random number, the first special random number, and if it is the second special random number, based on the second special random number, the above Win determination processing, which is lottery processing for winning and losing the big win, the small win and the immediate short win, is carried out. After that, when the above special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) so as to shift to the special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281), this process is terminated.

FIG. 189 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state) (step S311), at the time of high probability shown in FIG. 190 (A) Select the lottery table (step S312), if the current gaming state is a low probability state (low probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state) (step S311), the lottery at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 190 (B) A table is selected (step S313), and the selected lottery table and the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) read in step S302 of the special symbol normal process are compared (step S314).

Figure 190 (A), the lottery table shown in (B), for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number), when the gaming state is low probability (low probability non-time saving state (normal state), A low probability lottery table used in the case of low probability time saving state) and a high probability lottery table used when the game state is high probability (high probability non time saving state, high probability time saving state) I have it. Then, in the low-probability lottery table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, 1/319 when the set value is 1, 1/309 when the set value is 2, and 3 when the set value is 3. 1/299 at the set value of 4, 1/289 at the set value of 4, 1/279 at the set value of 5, and 1/269 at the set value of 6. Instant short hit determination indicating that the first special random number has won an immediate short hit with an immediate short hit probability of 3/319, which is the same for any of the set values 1 to 6. The first special random numbers are associated with each other such that the first special random numbers match the value and match the deviation determination value indicating that the other first special random numbers are the deviation. In addition, in the lottery table at low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number, 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, and 3 when the setting value is 3 1/299 at the set value of 4, 1/289 at the set value of 4, 1/279 at the set value of 5, and 1/269 at the set value of 6. It matches the big hit judgment value indicating that the second special random number has won a small hit with a small hit probability of 144/319, which is the same for any of the set values 1 to 6. The second special random numbers are associated with each other such that the second special random numbers match the deviation determination value indicating that the other second special random numbers are deviations. In addition, the lottery table for the high probability is constructed such that the probability of a big win for each set value is ten times higher than that for the lottery table for the low probability.

In the above, the lottery table referred to for comparison with the first special random number does not have a small hit determination value, whereas the lottery table referred to for comparison with the second special random number has a small hit A judgment value is provided. As a result, in the time-saving state, it becomes easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003, and in addition to the fact that the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning to the variable winning hole 2003 is easily executed, the variable winning hole Since there is a possibility of winning a small prize due to the start winning in 2003, the game can be played without reducing the number of balls in the player's possession.

Further, in the lottery table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, an immediate short hit determination value is provided, whereas in the lottery table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, an immediate short Hit judgment value is not set. As a result, in the non-time-saving state, it is difficult to accept the game ball B to the variable winning opening 2003, and the first special symbol variation display based on the starting winning to the first starting opening 2004 is mainstream. Since there is a possibility of winning an immediate short win by starting winning to the first starting port 2004, even in a state where a disadvantageous game is being played in a non-time saving state, the game can be played with expectation. .

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the lottery table with the special random number (special random number (first special random number, second special random number) read in step S302 of the special symbol normal process), and as a result, a big hit, When it is determined to be either a small hit or an immediate short hit (step S315), a hit flag (big hit flag, small hit A flag, an immediate short hit flag) is set (step S316), and the hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if none of the big win, small win, or immediate short win is won, that is, if it is determined to be out, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S317).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is a time saving state. and a reach determination table at the time of state. Then, in the reach determination table during the time saving state, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number will reach, and the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach random numbers will not reach. A random number is associated with each.

In addition, in the reach determination table in the non-time-saving state, five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time-saving state match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached, The reach random numbers are associated with each of the 67 types of reach random numbers so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is not reached. Thus, in this embodiment, in the non-time saving state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is increased more than in the time saving state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S317). is set, and the process is terminated (step S319).

FIG. 191 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the special symbol process flag indicates that the special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. The result of the lottery process for the display mode when the display is stopped, that is, the result of the win determination process (step S305) is discriminated. The determination of the result of the lottery process is performed by determining whether or not the big hit flag, the small hit flag and the immediate short hit flag are set (step S321).

If the big hit flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a reads out the symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) in step S302 of the special symbol normal process and the big hit time shown in FIG. 190 (C) (Step S322), the type of the big win is determined by comparing with the symbol determination table (step S322), and the mode (stopping pattern of the special symbol) of the special symbol corresponding to the determined kind of the big win is determined. (Step S323).

in particular,
1. After the second big winning hole 2007 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second big winning hole sensor 2561 detects that 10 game balls have won the second big winning hole 2007, it is closed. By repeating the opening/closing pattern 10 times (10 rounds), the game ball is controlled (easily) into a 10R jackpot game in which the game ball can (easily) enter the second jackpot 2007, and after the jackpot game is finished, the next jackpot is achieved with a high probability. Jackpot A controlled in a time-saving state
2. After the second big winning hole 2007 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second big winning hole sensor 2561 detects that 10 game balls have won the second big winning hole 2007, it is closed. By repeating the opening/closing pattern five times (five rounds), the game ball is controlled to enter the second big winning hole 2007 (easily) into a 5R big win game, and after the big win game ends, the next big win is achieved with a high probability. Jackpot B to control in a non-time saving state
3. After the second big winning hole 2007 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second big winning hole sensor 2561 detects that 10 game balls have won the second big winning hole 2007, it is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 10 times (10 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 10R big win game that can (easily) enter the second big winning hole 2007, and after the big win game ends, special symbols (first special symbol, second A big hit C controlled to a low probability time saving state A in which the time saving state is terminated if the big hit is not achieved before the variable display of two special symbols) is executed 100 times.
4. After the second big winning hole 2007 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second big winning hole sensor 2561 detects that 10 game balls have won the second big winning hole 2007, it is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 10 times (10 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 10R big win game that can (easily) enter the second big winning hole 2007, and after the big win game ends, special symbols (first special symbol, second A big hit D controlled to a low-probability time-saving state A in which the time-saving state is terminated if the big hit is not achieved before the variable display of two special symbols is executed 599 times.
One of the four types of jackpots is determined.

The symbol determination table at the time of the big win, which is compared with the first symbol random number, assigns judgment values to the big win A, the big win B, the big win C and the big win D. Specifically, for the first symbol random number (for example, a random number of 1 to 100), the determination value is distributed at a ratio of "jackpot A: jackpot B: jackpot C: jackpot D = 25: 25: 49: 1" It is On the other hand, in the big win symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number, the judgment values are sorted to the big wins A and C, but the judgment values are not sorted to the big wins B and D. Specifically, the judgment value is distributed to the second symbol random number (for example, a random number of 1 to 100) at a ratio of "jackpot A:jackpot C=70:30". Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the probability of being determined as a big hit A in the jackpot pattern determination table compared with the second pattern random number is higher than in the jackpot pattern determination table compared with the first pattern random number. The variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning to the second starting opening 2005 or the variable winning opening 2003 was executed rather than the variable display of the first special design based on the starting winning to the first starting opening 2004. In this case, the player is in an advantageous state.

Further, when the type of the big win is determined, a stop pattern corresponding to the type of the big win is determined as a mode when the special symbols are stopped. Specifically, when the big win A is determined, the big win A pattern is determined as the big win pattern, when the big win B is determined, the big win B pattern is determined as the big win pattern, and when the big win C is determined, the big win is determined. A big win C pattern is determined as a pattern, and when a big win D is determined, a big win D pattern is determined as a big win pattern.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the immediate short hit flag is set in step S321, the symbol random number read in step S302 of the special symbol normal process (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) and By comparing with the symbol determination table at the time of immediate short winning shown in FIG. 190 (D) (step S322), the type of immediate short winning is determined, and the variation of special symbols corresponding to the determined type of immediate short winning A mode (stop symbol of a special symbol) at the time of control stop is determined (step S323).

in particular,
1. A low probability that the time-saving state is terminated unless a big hit is achieved before the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 100 times without controlling to the big winning game or the small winning game. Immediate short hit A to control to time saving state C
2. A low probability of ending the time-saving state unless a big win is achieved before the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 40 times without controlling to a big win game or a small win game. Immediate short hit B to control to time saving state C
3. A low probability that the time-saving state is terminated unless a big hit is achieved before the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 20 times without controlling to the big winning game or the small winning game. Immediate short hit C to control to time saving state C
Any one of the three types of immediate short hits is determined.

In addition, the symbol determination table at the time of immediate short winning which is compared with the first symbol random number has determination values distributed to immediate short winning A, immediate short winning B and immediate short winning C. Specifically, for the first symbol random number (for example, a random value of 1 to 100), the judgment value is the ratio of "immediate short hit A: immediate short hit B: immediate short hit C = 10: 20: 70" are distributed. On the other hand, since there is no instant short winning by lottery based on the second special random number, the symbol determination table for immediate short winning compared with the second symbol random number is immediate short winning A and immediate short winning B. The judgment value is not distributed to the short hit C. However, an immediate short win is won by lottery based on the second special random number, and the symbol determination table for the immediate short win compared with the second random number is also an immediate short win A, an immediate short win B, and an immediate short win. The judgment value may be distributed to the hit C at a ratio of "immediate short hit A:immediate short hit B:immediate short hit C=10:20:70". In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, after an immediate short winning is won by lottery based on special random numbers, the type of immediate short winning is determined using a symbol determination table for immediate short winning that is compared with the symbol random numbers. However, in the lottery table that is referenced for comparison with the special random numbers, the determination value for immediate short win A, the determination value for immediate short win B, and the judgment value for immediate short win C are set. , it may be determined to win an immediate short win A, an immediate short win B, or an immediate short win C when the respective judgment values and the special symbols match. That is, the type of immediate short winning may be determined only by lottery based on special random numbers.

Further, when the type of immediate short winning is determined, a stop pattern corresponding to the type of immediate short winning is determined as a mode of stopping the special symbols. Specifically, when it is decided to be an immediate short hit A, it is decided to be an immediate short hit A pattern as an immediate short hit pattern, and when it is decided to be an immediate short hit B, it is decided to be an immediate short hit B pattern as an immediate short hit pattern. When it is determined to be an immediate short winning C, it is determined to be an immediate short winning C symbol as an immediate short winning symbol.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the small hit flag is set in step S321, the symbol random number read in step S302 of the special symbol normal process (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) and the figure By comparing with the symbol determination table at the time of the small hit shown in 190 (E) (step S322), the type of the small hit is determined, and when the variation control of the special symbol corresponding to the determined type of the small hit is stopped. A mode (stop symbol of the special symbol) is determined (step S323).

in particular,
1. The opening and closing pattern in which the first big winning hole 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed twice to control the small winning game in which the game ball can enter the first big winning hole 2006 (easily). Decide accordingly.

In addition, the judgment value is distributed to the small hit in the small hit design determination table compared with the second design random number. Specifically, a determination value is set for selecting one type of "small hit" for all of the second symbol random numbers (for example, random numbers of 1 to 100). On the other hand, since no small win is won by lottery based on the first special random number, the symbol determination table at the time of the small win compared with the first symbol random number does not distribute the determination value to the small win. However, a small win may be won by lottery based on the first special random number, and a judgment value may be distributed to the small win in the symbol determination table at the time of the small win compared with the first symbol random number. In addition, although only one type of small win is set in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a plurality of types of small wins with different opening times and opening times of the first big winning hole 2006 are set and compared with the pattern random numbers. Any one of a plurality of types of small wins may be determined by using a symbol determination table for the small wins.

Further, when the type of the small win is determined, the stop pattern corresponding to the type of the small win is determined as the mode of the stop of the first special symbol. Specifically, when it is determined to be a small hit, it is determined to be a small hit symbol.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when none of the big hit flag, the small hit flag and the immediate short hit flag is set, determines the design to be out (step S324). After the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S328 as the lottery result (big hit type, immediate short hit type, small hit, reach A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that an instruction (which may be an instruction for the mode of a stop symbol of a special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. (step S328). After that, as the process of step S329, this process is terminated when the special symbol process flag is updated so as to shift to the variation pattern setting process (step S282).

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variably displayed, and left decorative design → right decorative design → middle Stop and display in the order of the decorative patterns (the left, middle and right decorative patterns may be synchronously displayed with the same pattern and stopped and displayed at the same time)). Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 specifies the jackpot A from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop pattern) when the variation of the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped, the jackpot A is determined. Designs (left, middle, right decorative patterns are "0" to "9" patterns with the same odd number design) are determined, and if it is determined to be a big hit B, a big hit B pattern (left, middle, If the right decorative pattern is a combination of "579" patterns), and if the jackpot C is decided, the jackpot C pattern (left, middle, right decorative patterns are "0" to "9" patterns) ), and if the jackpot D is determined, the jackpot D pattern (the left, middle and right decorative patterns are the same even number pattern among the patterns "0" to "9"). combination). When the big win C or the big win D is determined, a combination of common even-numbered symbols can be displayed. The game is continued by imparting a feeling of anticipation of something. Also, if it is determined to be an immediate short hit A, it is determined to be an immediate short hit A pattern (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are "549" symbols), and if it is determined to be an immediate short hit B Immediate short hit B pattern (left, middle, right decorative pattern is a combination of "549" pattern), and when it is decided to be immediate short hit C, immediate short hit C pattern (left, middle, right The decorative pattern is determined to be a combination of "549" patterns. In addition, when the immediate short win A, the immediate short win B, and the immediate short win C are determined, the common combination of "549" can be displayed, and at the stage of displaying the symbol combination, it is possible to determine which hit is. The game is continued by imparting a sense of anticipation of a more advantageous immediate short win without clearly indicating it to the player. In addition, when it is determined to be a small hit, it is determined to be a small winning pattern (a combination in which the left, middle and right decorative patterns are "135"). In addition, when the reach out is specified, the out pattern with the reach (the left and right decorative patterns are a combination of the same patterns of "0" to "9" and the middle decorative patterns are different; the reach If it is determined to be an outlier pattern) and the outlier is specified, the outlier pattern without reach (a combination of at least the left and right decorative patterns of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are different patterns. However, immediate short Winning B symbols, immediate short winning C symbols, and minor winning symbols are determined), and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game performance), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the performance display device. 1600 for display control. In addition, although it will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, even if it is determined to be an immediate short hit A, an immediate short hit B, or an immediate short hit C, the game state at that time is a game state other than the low probability non-time saving state If it is (high probability time saving state, high probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state), the process of setting the time saving flag and the time saving number counter corresponding to the immediate short hit A, the immediate short hit B, and the immediate short hit C is executed. Since it does not, in the game state other than the low probability non-time saving state, even if the immediate short hit A, the immediate short hit B, and the immediate short hit C are determined, the immediate short hit A to C patterns (left, middle, right decorative patterns is a combination of "549" symbols), and the above-described "outlier symbols without reach" are determined.

FIG. 192 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the special symbol process flag indicates that the variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. (Step S341), select the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big win and the game state determined in step S323 of the special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S342), and set the small hit flag. If entered (step S341), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the small hit determined in step S325 of the special symbol stop symbol setting process and the game state are selected (step S342), and immediately If the short hit flag is set (step S341), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of immediate short hit according to the type of immediate short hit determined in step S325 of the special symbol stop symbol setting process and the game state is displayed. Select (step S342). Also, if the reach flag is set (step S343), select a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach (step S344), and set any of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, the immediate short flag, and the reach flag. If not, that is, if it becomes a normal loss (a loss that does not execute a ready-to-win effect), a variation pattern table for loss (not shown) is selected (step S345).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S302 of the special symbol normal process (step S348), and the peripheral control board to start the determined variation pattern Set the variation pattern command to be notified to 1510 and set the special design (first special design, second special design) displayed on the special design indicator (first special design indicator, second special indicator) of the function display unit 1400 ) is started (step S349). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the variation timer (step S350). As a result, the effect control is performed by the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 only for the fluctuation time thus determined.

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). It is stored in such a way that it is associated with each variable random number. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a compares the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read out in step S302 of the special symbol normal processing among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. Then, by acquiring the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table, the fluctuation pattern of the special design (first special design, second special design) is determined. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, it is set so as to determine the mode type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect is to be executed and the fluctuation random number. . For example, in the super ready-to-win performance among the ready-to-win performances, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than that in the normal ready-to-win performance, and when the super ready-to-win performance is executed, the player's degree of expectation for the big winning game is increased.

In addition, although the details will be described later, after turning on the power with clearing the RAM or after executing a jackpot game, the variable display of special symbols in a low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600). Execution of variable display of special symbols. In some cases, a specific variation pattern table is selected when a predetermined condition is established, and when the specific variation pattern table is selected, a specific variation pattern (variation pattern for help mode L omen effect, which will be described later) is determined. ing. Then, when the specific variation pattern is determined, the help mode L in which the variation display of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) is executed only with the variation display of the special symbols. The foreshadowing effect is executed.

Further, when the variable display control of the special symbols is started, next, as the process of step S351, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time saving number counter for setting the number of continuations of the time saving state is "0". Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time saving number counter (step S352), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short number counter is "0" (step S353). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", a time saving end flag indicating that the control of the time saving state (time saving control) ends is set (step S354).

When it is determined that the counter value of the time saving number counter is "0" in the process of step S351, when it is determined that the time saving number counter is not "0" in the process of step S353, at that point , the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the above special symbol process flag is updated so as to shift to the special symbol variation process (step S283), this process is terminated.

FIG. 193 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol variation process (step S283).

When the special symbol process flag indicates that the special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 1 is subtracted from the variable timer for which the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process (step S282) for the variable pattern is set. When it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of this step S373, this process is terminated when the above-mentioned special symbol process flag is updated so as to shift to the special symbol stop process (step S284).

FIG. 194 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol stop process (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of , display control is performed to display the stop symbol determined in the special symbol stop symbol setting process on the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and the special symbol is stopped on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag and resets the time saving flag (step S384). As a result, when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times corresponding to various time saving states such as 100 times, 40 times, 20 times, etc.) Control (time saving state control) is ended and non-time saving control (normal state control) is started.

Further, when the big win flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big win start command indicating to start the big win game (step S387), and starts the big win game. A jackpot execution flag indicating that the game is in progress is set (step S388), and a standby time until the start of the jackpot game (time for displaying the start of the jackpot game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S389). ). In step S389, a process of setting the number of rounds corresponding to the type of big win to the number of big wins counter indicating the number of remaining rounds is also executed. The jackpot number counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process (step S240). It is controlled to make a judgment and end the big winning game. Also, when the jackpot flag is set (step S386), when the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and when the time saving flag is set, the time saving flag is reset, and if the counter value of the time saving number counter is not "0", the counter value is reset (returned to "0").

The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (jackpot A start command, jackpot B start command, jackpot C start command, jackpot D start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D) is set. . As a result, the effect of the big win game corresponding to the kind of the big win instructed by the big win start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like. In addition, in the present embodiment, a common effect (the effect executed by the effect display device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc. is the same) is set as the effect of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C start command and the jackpot D start command. ing. Also, if the performance of the big win game corresponding to the big win C start command and the big win D start command is to be a common performance, the big win C start command and the big win D start command are set to the same command instead of different commands. You can leave it.

In addition, the jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is, when the jackpot game is ended, specifically the second jackpot winning opening 2007 corresponding to the jackpot type in the jackpot control process (step S240). After opening and closing control (for example, opening the second large winning opening 2007 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or that 10 game balls have won the second large winning opening 2007 The second large winning opening sensor 2525 detects It is reset when the opening/closing control that repeats the opening/closing pattern that is closed 10 times or 5 times) is completed (all rounds that can be executed in the big hit game). While the jackpot control process (step S240) is not executed in the special pattern and special electric auditors product control process (step S114) by resetting the jackpot executing flag, the function display unit 1400 displays the first special pattern. It becomes possible to perform the variable display of the first special symbol on the device and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 .

Further, if the small hit flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a small hit start command indicating to start the small hit game (step S387), A small winning running flag indicating that the game is being executed is set (step S388), and the waiting time until the start of the small winning game (time for displaying the start of the small winning game, etc.) is set to the interval timer. set (step S389). In addition, the small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the kind of the small hit. In step S389, a small-hit start command is set according to the type of small-hit. As a result, the production of the small-hit game corresponding to the kind of the small-hit instructed by the small-hit start command is executed by the production display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like.

In addition, when the small hit running flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed, when the small hit game is ended, specifically, the first It is reset when the opening/closing control of the big winning hole 2006 (for example, the opening/closing control in which the first big winning hole 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is repeated twice). While the small hit control process (step S2341) is not executed in the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S114) by resetting the small hit executing flag, the first special of the function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

In addition, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are not set, if the immediate short hit flag is set (step S390), the high probability flag and the time saving flag are not set and the low probability non time saving It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step S391). Then, if it is a low probability non-time saving state, the time saving flag is set, and the number of times the time saving state continues according to the type of the immediate short time special symbol (first special symbol and second Special symbol) is set to a time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of times of variable display (step S392). Specifically, if it is an immediate short hit A, set "100" to the time saving number counter, if it is an immediate short hit B, set "40" to the time saving number counter, and in the immediate short hit C If there is, "20" is set in the time saving number counter. On the other hand, if the gaming state other than the low probability non-time saving state is a high probability time saving state, a high probability non time saving state, or a low probability time saving state, the process of setting the time saving flag or the time saving counter is not executed.

As described above, in the low probability state, when it becomes an immediate short hit, it controls to the time saving state based on the immediate short hit, whereas in the high probability state, when it becomes an immediate short state, immediately It is not controlled in a time-saving state based on a short hit. In this way, the "immediate short hit" is aimed at relieving the fact that a disadvantageous game is being played in a low probability state, and in the time saving state based on the immediate short hit, the game ball to the variable winning opening 2003 Since it becomes easy to accept B, the game can be played without reducing the number of balls the player has.

In addition, in the time saving state, when it becomes an immediate short hit, the already controlled time saving state is continued without newly controlling to the time saving state based on the immediate short hit. In this way, the "immediate short hit" is aimed at relieving the disadvantageous game in the non-time saving state, and in the state that is already controlled in the time saving state, the new immediate short hit I try not to control it in a time-saving state based on it. As another example, in the time-saving state, when an immediate short-time hit occurs, the already-controlled time-shortening state may be ended, and a new time-saving state based on the immediate short time may be controlled. Also, as another example, in the time-saving state, if it becomes an immediate short-time hit, compare the remaining number of time-saving times in the already controlled time-saving state with the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state based on the immediate short time hit. Then, control may be performed so that the number of times of time saving is greater. Also, as another example, in the time-saving state, if it becomes an immediate short-time hit, the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state based on the immediate short-time hit is calculated against the remaining number of time-saving times in the time-saving state that is already controlled. It may be controlled to add.

In addition, in the low probability state, when it becomes an immediate short winning pattern, the immediate short winning pattern is stopped and displayed, and the time saving flag is set. It may be at the start or end of the fixed time, which is the time to be maintained. Of these, when the time saving flag is set at the start of the fixed time, control is performed to the time saving state based on the immediate short hit, and the state in which the game ball B is easily accepted into the variable winning hole 2003 is quickly established. can be granted. In addition, when the time saving flag is set at the end of the fixed time, the fixed time after the stop of the immediate short winning pattern is used to execute the effect of notifying the start of the time saving state based on the immediate short winning, During the variable display of the special symbols, which is before the immediate short winning symbols are stopped, it is possible to specialize in the win-lose performance. When executing the performance notifying the start of the time saving state based on the immediate short win, the fixed time after the stop of the immediate short win pattern is set to a specific fixed time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than the normal fixed time (for example, 1 second). ) can be exemplified.

Further, when the big win flag or the small win flag is not set, that is, when it becomes an immediate short win or a loss, the big win game or the small win game is not executed, so the waiting time until the start of the next special symbol variation display is established. The time (the time during which the special symbols are stopped) is set in the interval timer (step S392), and the process proceeds to step S393. In addition, in this embodiment, when it becomes an immediate short hit or a loss, a common waiting time is set to the interval timer, but when it becomes an immediate short hit, it is a special time longer than when it comes off. An interval timer may be set to an appropriate waiting time. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize that it is not a miss but an immediate short hit by the difference in the length of the waiting time. In addition, when a special waiting time is provided in this way, an effect may be executed during this special waiting time for the player to recognize that it is an immediate short win rather than a loss.

When the processing of steps S386 to S393 is executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not to control the time saving state by the establishment of a predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations in the special symbol. Step S394) is executed, and when the special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S395), this process is terminated.

FIG. 195 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the relief number counting process (step S394).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the initial value of the relief number counter, which is added and counted according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability state, to "0" after power-on with RAM clear. Also, when the big hit flag is set (step S3941), the count value of the relief number counter indicating the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is reset to the initial value "0" (step S3942). ).

Also, if the big hit flag is not set, it is determined whether the high probability flag is not set and the low probability state (low probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state) (step S3943) . Then, if the probability is low, +1 is added to the count value of the relief number counter (step S3944), and if the count value of the relief number counter reaches "600" (step S3945), the time saving flag is set. At the same time, it is set to a time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuations of the time saving state (step S3946). Specifically, when the count value of the relief number counter reaches "600", the time saving number counter is set to "700". In addition, although not shown, in a part of the low-probability non-time-saving state among the low-probability states, +1 is not added to the count value of the relief counter.

As described above, the relief number counter counts each time the special symbol variation display in the low probability state is executed, and when the number of variations in the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the time saving state is entered. It is intended to be controlled. In addition, if the relief frequency counter is in a low probability state, regardless of whether it is a non-working time saving state or a working hours saving state, it counts the variable display of special symbols. Further, in the main control board 1310, when transmitting the symbol determination command toward the peripheral control board 1510, the relief number counter counts up the number of variations of the special symbol. On the other hand, the number-of-rescues counter does not count even if the variable display of special symbols in the high-probability state is executed. In this way, the control of the time saving state by the establishment of the predetermined condition regarding the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is aimed at relieving the disadvantageous game in the low probability state, and in the time saving state, the variable winning opening Since it becomes easy to accept the game ball B into the 2003, the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held by the player. In addition, 700 times are set as the number of times of time saving, and the probability of obtaining the next "big hit" is very high before the fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches 700 times in the time saving state, so the time saving In the state, the game can be played with anticipation. In addition, 700 times as the number of times of time saving is the number of times that the next "jackpot" will not necessarily be obtained even if it is 1/269 of the set value 6, even if it is a long-term time saving state of 700 times To allow a player to continue playing while giving a sense of tension to the player. For this reason, the number of times of saving time given by "control of the time saving state by establishment of predetermined conditions regarding the number of fluctuations of special symbols" using the relief number counter has a high possibility of getting the next "big hit", but the tension It is preferable to set the number of times to such an extent that the feeling does not disappear (the number of times at least 3% or more of the possibility of not getting a big hit occurs). In addition, with regard to the number of times of saving time given in the "control of the time saving state due to the establishment of a predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of special symbols" using the relief number counter, the limit value of the relief number counter (the number of fluctuations practiced by the player) and By setting the number of times equal to or greater than that, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that dispels the feeling of regret given to the player until the limit value of the relief number counter is reached.

Further, when a big win is achieved, the number of relief counters are reset, whereas when a small win or an immediate short win is achieved, the number of relief counters are not reset. That is, unless a big hit is achieved, the counting of the number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state is continued. In this way, the control of the time saving state by establishment of a predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of special symbols is aimed at relieving the state that the jackpot game is not performed continues, and in the time saving state, the variable winning opening Since it becomes easy to accept the game ball B into the 2003, the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held by the player. In addition, 700 times are set as the number of times of time saving, and the probability of obtaining the next "big hit" is very high before the fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches 700 times in the time saving state, so the time saving In the state, the game can be played with anticipation.

The relief number counter is reset not only when a big win is achieved but also when power is turned on with RAM clearing. That is, when the setting value is changed when the power is turned on, or when the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of the internal RAM (the entire area of the RAM). area except for the specific area) is cleared, the relief number counter is reset. In this way, the relief number counter can be reset by the hall manager as appropriate. On the other hand, if the setting value is confirmed when the power is turned on, or if the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the RAM is not cleared, so the count of the number of fluctuations in the special symbol in the low probability state is reset. After the power is turned on, counting is restarted from counting the number of variations of the special symbols in the low-probability state stored when the power is turned off.

In addition, in the variable display in which the number of times of variation of the special symbols in the low probability state has reached 600 times, when it becomes an immediate short hit, the special symbols in the low probability state are prioritized over the time saving state based on the immediate short hit. The number of fluctuations reaches 600 times. This is a time-saving state based on an immediate short hit, which is a time-saving grant until the fluctuation display of the special pattern reaches 20 to 100 times, while the number of fluctuations of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times. The time-saving state based on this is the time-saving provision until reaching 700 times, and priority is given to the time-saving provision that is advantageous to the player. However, in the variable display in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, when the immediate short winning is achieved, control may be performed to the time saving state based on the immediate short winning.

[Transition of game state]
FIG. 196 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of game states. As shown in FIG. 196, the gaming state is roughly divided into a low probability state and a high probability state, and a non-time saving state and a time saving state. In addition, when the power is turned on, the game state is in a low probability non-time saving state.

In the high-probability state, the probability of a big hit is set to be higher than in the low-probability state. In addition, the transition from the low-probability state to the high-probability state can be made when the lottery result of the special symbols becomes a "jackpot". It should be noted that the jackpot probability can also be changed by switching the set value of the pachinko machine 1 . On the other hand, the small-hit probability and the immediate short-hit probability do not change between the low-probability state and the high-probability state, and do not change even when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is switched.

In the time-saving state, it is set so that the reception of the game ball B to the variable winning opening 2003 becomes easier than in the non-time-saving state. For example, when the normal lottery is performed, the probability that the lottery result of the normal pattern is "normal hit" is increased, or when the lottery result of the normal pattern is "normal hit", the variable winning entrance door 2521 is closed. By increasing the time and the number of times that the variable winning opening 2003 is open, acceptance of the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003 is facilitated. As a result, in the non-time-saving state, it is difficult or impossible to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003, so the game in which the game ball B is entered into the first start opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005 is mainstream. On the other hand, in the time-saving state, it is easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003 than in the non-time-saving state. there is In addition, in the time-saving state, it is easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003 than in the non-time-saving state.

In addition, regarding the transition from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state, it is possible to shift when the lottery result of the special pattern becomes "big hit" or "immediate short hit". In addition, when the lottery result of the special design is "big hit", after executing the big hit game, it shifts to the time saving state. It is different in that the jackpot game is not executed and the shift to the time-saving state is made. In addition, even if the lottery result of the special pattern does not become a ``big hit'' or an ``immediate short hit'', a predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special pattern is established, so that the non-working time saving state is shifted to the working time saving state. making it possible. In this example, after the power is turned on or after the execution of the jackpot game, the number of fluctuations in the special design in the low probability state is counted, and when the number of fluctuations in the special design in the low probability state reaches 600 times, a non-time saving state It makes it possible to shift from to the time saving state.

Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbols is "big hit A", control is performed in a high probability time saving state after the execution of the 10R big win game until the next "big hit". Further, when the lottery result of the special symbols is "big hit B", the game is controlled to a high probability non-time-saving state after the execution of the 5R big win game until the next "big win". In addition, when the lottery result of the special pattern is "big hit C", the game is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state A until the variable display of the special pattern reaches 100 times after the execution of the 10R big win game. However, when the lottery result of the special symbols becomes a "jackpot" before the variable display of the special symbols reaches 100 times, the low-probability time-saving state A is ended at that point. In addition, when the lottery result of the special pattern is "big win D", the low probability time saving state A is controlled until the variable display of the special pattern reaches 599 times after the execution of the 10R big win game. However, when the lottery result of the special symbols becomes a "jackpot" before the variable display of the special symbols reaches 599 times, the low-probability time-saving state A is ended at that point. In addition, when the fluctuation display of the special pattern reaches 599 times, immediately after that, the number of fluctuations of the special pattern reaches 600 times, and the non-time saving state to the time saving state (low probability time saving state B) again. It is possible to make it possible to progress the game from the low probability time saving state A to the low probability time saving state B in a substantially continuous manner. In addition, if the lottery result of the special pattern is "jackpot A" or "jackpot B", the period until the next "jackpot" is used as the period for controlling the high probability time saving state or the high probability non-time saving state. Although it is set, such a period is, for example, until the variable display of special symbols reaches 10,000 times, and before the variable display of special symbols reaches 10,000 times, the next "jackpot" is set. It may be the number of times that the probability of obtaining is very high.

Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "small hit", after the execution of the small win game, the game state before the small win game is controlled. In other words, the game state does not change when the lottery result of the special symbols becomes a "minor win". In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "small win", the game state before the small win game may be continuously controlled even during the small win game. In this case as well, the game state does not change when the result of the lottery for the special symbols becomes a "minor win".

Further, when the lottery result of the special pattern is "immediate short win", the big win game is not executed, and the low probability time saving state C is controlled until the variable display of the special pattern reaches a predetermined number of times. Here, the predetermined number of times is 100 times when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short win A", 40 times when it is "immediate short win B", and "immediate short win C". , 20 times is set. However, when the lottery result of the special symbols becomes a ``big hit'' before the variable display of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number of times, the low-probability time-saving state C is terminated at that time.

In the above, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, control to the low-probability time-saving state C is performed only when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit". On the other hand, as a game state other than the low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state A, low probability time saving state B, low probability time saving state C, lottery results of special symbols When "immediate short winning" occurs, the game state is not necessarily controlled to the low-probability time saving state C, and the game state before the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short winning" is maintained. In other words, for game states other than the low-probability non-time-saving state, it is set as an "immediate short-time-saving design invalid period" that is not controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C when the special symbol lottery result becomes "immediate short-time hit". ing. In this way, for "immediate short hit", the purpose is to relieve the disadvantageous game in the low probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving triggered by becoming "immediate short hit" In the state C, since it becomes easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003, the game can be played without reducing the number of balls in the player's possession.

In addition, in this example, in the low probability non-time saving state, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C, but part of the low probability non-time saving state , it is set as an "immediate short winning design invalid period" that does not control to the low probability time saving state C when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short winning". Details will be described later.

In the above, in the low probability non-time saving state, only when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit", but it is assumed to be controlled to the low probability time saving state C, at least in the low probability state, the special symbol Only when the lottery result is "immediate short hit", it is only necessary to control to the low probability time saving state C. In other words, not only in the low-probability non-time-saving state, but also in the low-probability time-saving state A to C, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the already controlled low-probability time-saving state A to C , and may be controlled to the low-probability reduction of working hours state C. Also, as another example, in the low-probability time-saving states A to C, if the lottery result of the special pattern is "immediate short hit", the number of time-saving times applied to the already controlled low-probability time-saving states A to C The number of remaining times may be compared with the number of times of time saving in the low-probability time saving state C triggered by the result of lottery of the special pattern being ``immediate short hit'', and the number of times of time saving may be controlled to be larger. Also, as another example, in the low-probability time-saving states A to C, if the lottery result of the special pattern is "immediate short hit", the number of time-saving times applied to the already controlled low-probability time-saving states A to C It may be controlled so as to add the number of times of time saving in the low-probability time saving state C triggered by the fact that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit" to the remaining number of times.

Also, in the above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the number of times of time saving (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol to be controlled to the low probability time saving state C) varies depending on the type of immediate short hit. However, the content of the low probability time saving state C may be different depending on the type of immediate short hit. Specifically, depending on the type of immediate short hit, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning opening 2003 that can accept the game ball B when the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal hit" are different. Also, both the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning opening 2003 and the number of times of shortening working hours may be different.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", in the variable display of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400, the stop symbol of the special symbol is a unique instant short that is different from the other stop symbols. The winning patterns (immediate short winning A to C patterns may be different) are stopped and displayed, and in the variable display of the decorative patterns on the effect display device 1600, the common immediate short winning patterns (" 549” symbol combination) is stopped and displayed. However, game states other than low-probability non-time-saving state (high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state A, low-probability time-saving state B, low-probability time-saving state C) and "immediate short-time pattern invalid period" , when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", in the variable display of the special symbol in the function display unit 1400, the immediate short winning symbol is stop-displayed as the stop symbol of the special symbol. In the variable display of the decorative design on the display device 1600, the immediate short winning design (symbol combination of "549") is not stopped and displayed as the stop design of the decorative design, and a design different from the immediate short winning design (in this example, the pattern) is to be stopped and displayed. In this way, the game state other than the low probability non-time saving state (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state A, low probability time saving state B, low probability time saving state C) and "immediate short winning pattern invalid In the "period", when the lottery result of the special pattern is "immediate short hit", the stop pattern of the decorative pattern on the production display device 1600 does not suggest that effect, so "immediate short hit" is won. can be made difficult for the player to notice, and the sense of loss caused by the invalidation of the "immediate short win" can be reduced.

Further, even when the lottery result of the special symbols does not result in a ``big win'' or an ``immediate short win'', a predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbols is established, so that the big win game is not executed and the special symbols fluctuate. Until the display reaches a predetermined number of times, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B. Here, 700 times is set as the predetermined number of times. However, when the lottery result of the special symbols becomes a "big hit" before the variable display of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number of times, the low probability time saving state B is ended at that time.

In the above, after turning on the power with clearing the RAM or after executing the jackpot game, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the low probability state is counted by adding from the initial value "0" using the above-mentioned relief number counter, It is assumed that the low probability time saving state B is controlled by the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaching 600 times. Here, after turning on the power with clearing the RAM or after executing a jackpot game, only the number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state is counted, and in the high probability state, the number of variations of the special symbols is not counted. It is set as a "count suppression period" that does not On the other hand, if it is in a low probability state, regardless of whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state, the number of times of variation of special symbols is counted. In addition, when a jackpot game is executed with the result of the lottery of the special symbols becoming "big win", the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the low probability state is reset. Thus, regarding the control of the low-probability time-saving state B due to the establishment of a predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations in the special symbol, the disadvantageous game in the low-probability state is performed, and the state in which the jackpot game is not performed The purpose is to relieve the continuation, and in the low-probability time-saving state B, it is easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003, so that the player can play without reducing the number of balls held by the player. can be done. In addition, 700 times is set as the predetermined number of times, and the probability of obtaining the next "big hit" before the variable display of the special symbol reaches 700 times in the low probability time saving state B is very high. Therefore, in the low probability time saving state B, the game can be played with expectation.

In addition, in this example, after turning on the power with clearing the RAM or after executing the jackpot game, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the low probability state (the number of fluctuations other than the first special symbol and the second special symbol big hit) is counted. However, in some of the low-probability non-time-saving states among the low-probability states, it is set as a "count suppression period" that does not count the number of variations of special symbols. Details will be described later.

Also, in this example, when the number of fluctuations in the special design in the low probability state reaches 600 times, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B, but the number of fluctuations in the special design in the low probability state is a big hit. It is assumed to be larger than the expected value (for example, 319 times if the probability of a big hit is 1/319) of the number of variations of the special symbols until the big win calculated from the probability. Therefore, after the power is turned on with RAM clearing or after the big win game is executed, the probability of getting the next "big win" is high before the number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times. It's becoming

In addition, in this example, the count of the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is reset not only when the jackpot game is executed but also when the power is turned on with RAM clearing. That is, when the setting value is changed when the power is turned on, or when the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of the built-in RAM (the entire area of the RAM). area except for the specific area.) is cleared, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is reset. In this way, the relief number counter can be reset by the hall manager as appropriate. On the other hand, if the setting value is confirmed when the power is turned on, or if the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the RAM is not cleared, so the count of the number of special symbol fluctuations in the low probability state is reset. After the power is turned on, the counting is resumed from the count of the number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state stored when the power is turned off.

In addition, after the power is turned on with RAM clearing or after the execution of the jackpot game, in the variable display in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the low probability state has reached 600 times, if the lottery result of the special symbols is "big hit" , After execution of the jackpot game, the game state corresponding to the type of jackpot (high probability time saving state, high probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state A) is controlled, and after execution of the jackpot game, low probability. It is assumed that the time saving state B is not controlled.

In addition, after the power is turned on with RAM clearing or after the execution of the jackpot game, in the variable display in which the number of times the special symbols have changed in the low probability state has reached 600 times, when the lottery result of the special symbols is a "small hit" is supposed to be controlled to the low probability time saving state B after execution of the small hit game.

In addition, when the special symbol lottery result is "immediate short hit" in the variable display in which the number of special symbol variations in the low probability state has reached 600 times after the power is turned on with RAM clearing or after the execution of the jackpot game. , it is assumed to be controlled to the low-probability short working hours state B. This is a low-probability time-saving state C triggered by the fact that the lottery result of the special design is "immediate short hit" is a time-saving grant until the variable display of the special design reaches 20 to 100 times. On the other hand, the low-probability time-saving state B due to establishment of a predetermined condition regarding the number of times of variation of the special symbol is a time-saving grant until it reaches 700 times, and the time-saving grant advantageous to the player is prioritized. However, after turning on the power with clearing the RAM or after executing a jackpot game, if the special symbol lottery result is "immediate short win" in the variable display in which the number of special symbol variations in the low probability state has reached 600 times. Alternatively, it may be controlled to a low-probability non-time-saving state C triggered by the fact that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit".

Also, after the power is turned on with RAM clearing or after the execution of the jackpot game, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, and when controlling to the low probability time saving state B, in the effect display device 1600 , to notify that the low-probability time-saving state B is started. For example, at the start of the low probability time saving state B, or in the variation display when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 600 times, it may be notified that the low probability time saving state B is started.

By the way, it is assumed that the time saving state is ended when the condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied. In this example, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B and the low-probability time-saving state C, the variable display of the special symbol is a predetermined number of times (when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "big hit" or "immediate short hit") When it reaches the set specified number of times), it is assumed to transition to a low-probability non-time-saving state. In addition to this, for example, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B and the low-probability time-saving state C, an end lottery is performed to determine whether to end the time-saving state each time the special symbol is changed. When the end of the time saving state is determined by the ending lottery, or when the number of times that the lottery result of the special pattern is a 'small hit' reaches a predetermined number, the end condition of the time saving state may be established.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 displays a state indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game state, and the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the gate 2002. It is provided with a normal symbol display made up of two LEDs and a normal reservation display made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the reception of game balls B to the gate 2002. - 特許庁In such a state indicator, when the lottery result of the special symbols is "big win" or "minor win", at the same time when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped (when the big win symbols and the small win symbols are stopped). To light up a ``state display LED corresponding to time saving'' at the end of a big winning game or a small winning game without lighting ``state display LED corresponding to time saving''. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special pattern is "immediate short hit", the "status display LED corresponding to time saving" is emitted at the same time when the variable display of the special pattern is stopped (when the immediate short hit pattern is stopped). Therefore, it is possible to make the outside easily recognize that the winning is other than the big win and the small win.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special pattern is "lost", the "state display LED corresponding to time saving" is not illuminated at the same time as the stop of the variable display of the special pattern (when the lost pattern is stopped). . On the other hand, after turning on the power with clearing the RAM or after executing the jackpot game, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the low probability state using the above-mentioned relief number counter (the number of fluctuations other than the first special symbol and the second special symbol big hit) is added and counted from the initial value "0", and when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the low probability time saving state B is controlled. When executing the variable display of the special symbols in such a low probability state that the number of variations of the special symbols has reached 600 times, at the same time when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped (when the missing symbols are stopped) Since the corresponding status display LED' is caused to emit light, it is possible to make the outside easily recognize that the normal deviation is not caused.

[Example of production related to time saving control when the number of relief times is reached]
In this example, after turning on the power with clearing the RAM or after executing the jackpot game, the number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state (the number of variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol other than the big hit) is counted, By reaching 600 times the number of fluctuations in the special design in the low probability state, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B, but in the period before the number of fluctuations in the special design in the low probability state reaches 600 times is executing a predetermined effect toward the 600th special symbol variable display. Here, with reference to FIG. 197, a specific production example until the number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 197(A), when a variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the variation display of the decorative pattern 1600a is executed in the central part of the effect display device 1600. FIG. Specifically, until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command elapses, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 1600a are variably displayed, and the display is stopped in the order of left decorative pattern→right decorative pattern→middle decorative pattern. do. As the stop design of the decorative design 1600a, the design corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed.

Further, when a variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, a variable display of an identification pattern 1600b that is smaller than the decorative pattern and is less conspicuous is executed. Specifically, until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command elapses, the identification symbol 1600b is variably displayed as ◯ and x, and is stopped at either ◯ or x. As the stop symbol of the identification symbol 1600b, when the lottery result is a win (big win, small win, immediate short win), ◯ is stop-displayed, and when the lottery result is a loss, x is stop-displayed. In addition to this example, when the purpose is to conceal the fact that the lottery result is an immediate short win as much as possible, the stop symbol of the identification symbol 1600b may be a big win or a small win when the lottery result is a big win or a small win. If the lottery result is an immediate short win or a loss, the x may be stop-displayed to make it difficult to recognize the immediate short win from the stop pattern of the identification pattern 1600b.

In addition, in the lower part of the effect display device 1600, the first special symbol pending display 1600c (the state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is on standby) and the second special symbol pending display 1600d (the second special symbol The state in which the variable display is waiting) is enabled. Specifically, for the reserved display 1600c of the first special symbol, the reserved number is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display device 1600, and the reserved display 1600d of the second special symbol is the reserved number. is displayed in the lower right portion of the effect display device 1600 with squares. Then, when the variable display of the reserved symbols is started, the reserved displays 1600c and 1600d for the start are erased. However, the reserved displays 1600c and 1600d of the special symbols may be displayed continuously from the start of the variable display of the reserved special symbols to the end of the variable display of the special symbols. .

Also, in the upper left part of the effect display device 1600, a state display indicating the current game state is executed. In this example, the current gaming state is a low probability non-time saving state, and displays "normally" corresponding to the low probability non-working time saving state.

In addition, as a period before the number of fluctuations in the special design in the low probability state reaches 600 times, from the 500th fluctuation display of the special design, every time the fluctuation display of the decorative design 1600a (special design) is stopped, In the upper part of the effect display device 1600, a count effect is executed to notify how many times the special symbols have changed in the low probability state. In this example, it is the time when the 500th variation display of the special symbol is stopped, and the relief notice image A of "500 variation" corresponding to the 500th variation of the special symbol in the low probability state is displayed. . In this way, by executing the count effect, it is possible to play the game with anticipation that the number of variations of the special symbols in the low-probability state approaches 600 times.

Specifically, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, by transmitting a symbol confirmation command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a in the effect display device 1600 is stopped. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the probability state reaches 500 times, when transmitting the symbol determination command, the main control board 1310 transmits a relief count command to the peripheral control board 1510 separately from the symbol determination command. This relief count command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 each time the symbol confirmation command is transmitted, while the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is 500 to 600 times. The peripheral control board 1510 has a dedicated counter for counting the number of times the relief count command is received, and stores the number of times the relief count command is received. In this way, the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command is received, and by receiving the relief count command for the first time, the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500 times. Recognizing that, by receiving the relief count command for the second time, recognizing that the number of fluctuations in the special design in the low probability state has reached 501 times, and the number of fluctuations in the special design in the low probability state It is possible to grasp how many times it is, and based on this grasped number of fluctuations, at the time of stopping the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a in the effect display device 1600, how many times is the special pattern in the low probability state? It is possible to execute a count effect that notifies. In addition, the relief count command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is not limited to the above-described mode, and every time a design determination command is transmitted, the number of fluctuations in the special design in the low probability state is 500 to 600 times. A different command may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 each time. Even in this case, by receiving the relief count command 1, the peripheral control board 1510 recognizes that the number of fluctuations in the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 500 times, and receives the relief count command 2, It is possible to grasp how many times the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state, such as recognizing that the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state has reached 501 times. becomes possible.

As shown in FIGS. 197(B) and (C), as a period before the number of special symbol variations in the low probability state reaches 600 times, from the 597th special symbol variation display, the decorative symbol 1600a ( Each time the variable display of the special symbol) is stopped, as a count effect, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1600a indicating how many times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state is stopped and displayed. In this example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the low-probability state is 597, on the condition that the lottery result of the special symbols is lost, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1600a is "597" for relief notice. A combination of symbols is selected and set, and is stopped and displayed in place of the normal out-of-stop symbols. This relief notice symbol combination can be displayed both when the ready-to-win effect is not executed and when the ready-to-win effect is executed. (Combination of patterns with different left and right decorative patterns with the same pattern of "0" to "9" and different patterns in the middle decorative pattern; Reach off pattern) as a result of the fluctuation display once Although it is displayed, it is changed and displayed to a symbol combination for relief notice such as "597". In addition, from the 597th special symbol variation display, the upper part of the effect display device 1600 is close to the "help mode" that is executed when the number of special symbol variations in the low probability state reaches 600 times. is displayed.

In addition, during the period before the number of times the special symbols change in the low probability state reaches 600 times, as the 600th special symbol variation display, a variation display in which the lottery result is lost is executed. If there is a hold, as a hold display 1600c of the first special pattern, a special design hold display (Fig. 197 (C) to (G), which are displayed at the lower left, are displayed. As a result, in the period before the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the variable display of the special symbols corresponding to the pending display of the special symbols is executed to enter the "help mode". The player can know in advance that it will rush.

As shown in FIGS. 197(D) and (E), when the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 598th, on the condition that the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, the decorative symbol 1600a is displayed. As a stop symbol, a rescue notice symbol combination of "598" is selected and set, and is stopped and displayed in place of the normal off stop symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 197(F) and (G), when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 599, on the condition that the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the decorative symbol 1600a is displayed. As a stop symbol, a rescue notice symbol combination of "599" is selected and set, and is stopped and displayed in place of the normal off stop symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 197(H) and (I), when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600, on the condition that the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, the decorative symbol 1600a is displayed. As a stop symbol, a symbol combination for relieving notice of "600" is selected and set, and is stopped and displayed in place of the normal stop symbol that is out. In addition, when the 600th special symbol variation display is stopped, a remedy suggesting image "CHANCE!" indicating that the number of special symbol variations in the low-probability state has reached 600 times is displayed on the upper part of the effect display device 1600. are doing.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special design becomes a big hit during the period from when the number of fluctuations of the special design in the low probability state exceeds 500 times to when it reaches the 600th time (while the count effect is being executed) , and the count effect is finished at the end of the variable display of the special symbol that has become a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 197 (J), when the number of fluctuations in the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, control is performed to the low probability time saving state B, and a dedicated time saving state is given. In this example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times, and until the fluctuation display of the special symbols is performed 700 times after that (the total number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the low probability state is 1300 until reaching the time), it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B, and the period of control to such a low probability time saving state B (variation display of special symbols 700 times) is called “help mode L” are called. In the effect display device 1600, at the time of stopping the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) for the 600th time, a remedy of "Enter the help mode L!" A confirmed image is displayed. In FIG. 197(J), the face hold displayed at the bottom left of FIGS. 197(C) to (G) is displayed by moving and enlarging it next to the character display of "Enter help mode L!" , clearly indicates that face hold corresponds to "help mode L".

As shown in FIG. 197(K), after entering the "help mode L", when there is no suspension of the special design, the variable display of the decorative design 1600a (special design) is not immediately started, and the effect display is performed. At the bottom of the device 1600, a volume adjustment bar indicating the currently set volume level and a light amount adjustment bar indicating the currently set light amount level are displayed. The volume adjustment bar can change the memory display as the volume level is changed by operating the volume button, and the light amount adjustment bar can be operated by operating the light amount button to change the light amount level. Along with this, it is possible to change the memory display. In addition, during variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) and during non-variable display of the decorative pattern (special pattern), it is possible to change the volume level and the light quantity level. Thus, after stopping the variable display of the decorative design 1600a (special design), if there is no suspension of the special design and the variable display of the decorative design 1600a (special design) is not executed, the volume adjustment bar and the light amount By displaying the adjustment bar, it is possible to know that it is a period during which the volume level and the light amount level can be changed.

In addition, after entering the "help mode L", in the upper left part of the effect display device 1600, as a state display indicating the current game state, "help mode A rescue-in-progress image of "L in progress" is displayed. In addition, in the low-probability time-saving state B, since it is easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003, in the upper right part of the performance display device 1600, the variable winning opening 2003 located on the left side of the performance display device 1600 It displays an arrow bar of "Left hit!" This relief image and arrow bar can be continuously displayed even when the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is not executed, and is not hidden by the volume adjustment bar or light amount adjustment bar described above (or It is continuously displayed at the display position (not overlapping) so that the player does not accidentally leave the seat despite being in the low-probability time-saving state B. In addition, the display of the relief notice image B "Help is imminent!" and the relief suggestion image "CHANCE!" It can be displayed, and these images are also continuously displayed at display positions that are not hidden (or do not overlap) with the volume adjustment bar or light amount adjustment bar described above, and the player to ensure that they do not accidentally leave their desks.

As shown in FIG. 197 (L), after entering the "help mode L", there is no holding of special symbols, and until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, entry into various winning ports When there is no ball, the effect display device 1600 executes a demonstration effect for introducing the concept of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁At the end of the demonstration effect, an "addiction prevention display" (not shown) is also executed to prevent the player from becoming too addicted to the game. The rescue image and the arrow bar described above can be displayed continuously even during the demonstration effect, and are continuously displayed in a display position that is not hidden (or overlapped) by the demo effect or the "immersion prevention display" described above. , the player is prevented from accidentally leaving the seat despite being in the low-probability time-saving state B.例文帳に追加In addition, the display of the rescue notice image B "Help is imminent!" and the rescue suggestion image "CHANCE!" It is continuously displayed at a display position that is not hidden (or does not overlap) by "prevention display" so that the player does not accidentally leave the seat even though the low-probability time-saving state B is imminent. .

As shown in FIG. 197(M), after entering the "helper mode L", when a ball enters various prize winning openings such as the variable winning opening 2003, the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a is executed. be. It should be noted that, during execution of the demonstration effect, if a ball is entered into various winning holes such as the variable winning hole 2003, only the demonstration effect is terminated at that point, and the image during relief and the arrow bar continue to be displayed. .

As shown in FIG. 197 (N), during the execution of the "help mode L", that is, during the control of the low probability time saving state B, when the variation display of the 700th decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is executed ( When the total number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 1300 times), in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, the last decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) during the execution of the "help mode L" A relief completion image of "Help last!" is displayed to notify that the display is variable.

As shown in FIG. 197 (O), after the execution of "help mode L", that is, after the stop of the 700th decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) during the control of the low probability time saving state B (low probability state (After stopping the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) for the 1300th time), the low probability time saving state B is terminated and the transition to the low probability non-time saving state is performed. In the upper left part of the device 1600, "normal" is displayed to notify that the current game state is a low probability non-time saving state after "help mode L". In addition, in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, a relief history image of "Help L: 1 time" is displayed so that it can be grasped from the outside that "Help mode L" has been executed once. . In addition, during the execution of "help mode L", that is, during the control of the low probability time saving state B, the lottery result is "big hit ', the low-probability time-saving state B is ended and the game state shifts to the game state corresponding to the type of 'jackpot', so the 'help mode L' is ended at that point.

(Restrictions on count effects when a ball enters the second starting hole)
As described above, as a period before the number of fluctuations in the special symbol in the low probability state (the number of fluctuations other than the first special symbol and the second special symbol big hit) reaches 600 times, the 500th to 600th special symbols As for the variable display, every time the variable display of the decorative design (special design) is stopped, a count effect is executed to notify how many times the special design has changed in the low probability state. However, when entering the second starting port 2005, the variable display of the second special symbol (decorative symbol) is performed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the entering ball. In addition, at the time of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol, although the counter for the number of rescues in the main control board 1310 is counted up, it is executed so as not to increase the number of variations of the special symbol notified by the count effect. . Restrictions on the count effect when the ball enters the second starting port 2005 will be described below.

In this example, in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, a variable winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2004, and a second starting opening 2005 are provided as entrances into which the game ball B can enter. , and a first prize winning port 2006 are provided. Of these, the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005 are always open at the top, so it is possible to enter both in the low probability non-time saving state. However, for the first start port 2004, the game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a is accepted with a high probability, but for the second start port 2005, the center There is no possibility that the game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2513 of the accessory 2500 will be accepted. Therefore, the game ball B hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500 will enter the first starting hole 2004 with a higher probability than the second starting hole 2005 . In addition, the second starting port 2005 has the same shape as the general winning port 2001 and is inconspicuous with respect to the first starting port 2004, so in the low probability non-time saving state, the second starting port 2005 Even if a ball enters the second starting port 2005, it is difficult to notice it.

Also, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and when the ball enters the second starting port 2005, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The variable display of the special symbols is executed in the order of entering the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005.

Also, in the low probability non-time saving state, when the ball enters the first start port 2004 and the lottery of the first special symbol is lost, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and the effect display device 1600 A variable display of decorative patterns is being executed. Also, the variation time of the first special symbol (decorative symbol) is set to about 5 to 10 seconds (in the case of deviation without reach). That is, in a low probability non-time saving state, when the lottery of the first special symbol is lost by entering the first starting port 2004, the first special symbol (decoration symbol) is executed.

On the other hand, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, when the ball enters the second starting port 2005 and the lottery of the second special pattern is lost or a small hit, the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, but the effect display device. 1600 restricts the execution of variable display of decorative patterns. In addition, as the variation time of the second special symbol, about 0.1 second (in the case of loss without reach), which is extremely shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol, is set. Also, during the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect sound associated with the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 is output from the speaker, while the variable display of the second special symbol is output. , the effect sound associated with the variable display of the decorative pattern on the effect display device 1600 is not output from the speaker. That is, in the low probability non-time saving state, when the ball is entered into the second start port 2005 and the lottery of the second special pattern is lost or a small hit, the second special in a manner in which it is difficult to recognize the ball The variable display of the pattern is executed. Thereby, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, it becomes difficult to notice the ball entering the second starting port 2005, and it is possible to make it difficult to grasp how many times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state. In addition, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, when the ball enters the second starting port 2005 and the lottery of the second special pattern is a big hit, the performance display device 1600 does not limit the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern. , Variation accompanied by reach in the same manner as the first special symbol, and output of effect sound accompanying the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 are executed.

In this example, as described above, when the fluctuation of the special symbols is stopped, the main control board 1310 transmits a symbol determination command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the symbol determination command, whereby the effect display device 1600 , but when the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 500 times, when transmitting the symbol confirmation command, separately from the symbol confirmation command, from the main control board 1310 A relief count command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 . This relief count command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 each time a symbol determination command is transmitted while the number of special symbol variations in the low probability state is 500 to 600 times. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command is received, thereby grasping how many times the special pattern changes in the low-probability state. When the variable display is stopped, a count effect is executed to notify how many times the special symbols have changed in the low probability state.

Here, in the low probability non-time saving state, when entering the first starting port 2004, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, but when the variation of the first special symbol stops, as a relief count command, the main A relief count command A is transmitted from the control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 . Then, the main control board 1310 counts up the relief number counter, and the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command A is received, thereby determining the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol in the low probability state. In order to grasp whether it is, and at the time of stopping the variable display of the first special design (decorative design), it is executed so as to increase the number of times of variation of the special design notified by the count effect.

On the other hand, in the low probability non-time saving state, when the ball is entered into the second start port 2005, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, but when the variation of the second special symbol stops, the main control as a relief count command A relief count command B is transmitted from the board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 . Then, the main control board 1310 counts up the relief number counter, and the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command B is received, thereby determining the number of times the second special symbol changes in the low probability state. However, when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped, the number of variations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is not increased, and the actual number of variations of the special symbol I am trying to create a gap. In other words, during the execution of the count effect, when the ball enters the second start port 2005, the number of times the special symbol changes due to the relief counter on the main control board 1310 and the special symbol notified by the count effect on the peripheral control board 1510 The number of fluctuations in the design does not match. In this way, when the ball enters the second starting port 2005 during the execution of the count effect, the number of rescue counters on the main control board 1310 is counted up, but the number of fluctuations of the special symbols notified in the count effect is increased. Since it does not, it becomes difficult to notice the ball entering the second starting port 2005, and from the count effect, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp how many times the actual special symbol has changed.

The peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command B is received. It is executed so as to be added to the number of fluctuations in the notified special symbol. In this example, as the predetermined timing, among the 500th to 600th fluctuation display of the special symbols during the execution of the count effect, the number of times of variation of the special symbol notified in the count effect is 520 times, 540 times, 560 times, 580 times. times, 596 times are set, and when these times are reached, the number of times the relief count command B is received for the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol notified in the count effect (difference accumulated without addition) is executed to add That is, for example, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol notified in the count effect is 520 times, the number of balls entered into the second start port 2005 during the 500th to 520th variation display of the special symbol is "relief count It corresponds to the number of times command B is received (difference accumulated without addition)", and the number of times is added to the number of variations of the special symbols notified by the count effect. As a result, there is a possibility that the number of variations of the special symbols notified by the count effect may suddenly increase at once, so that the count effect can be paid attention to with anticipation. The number of times the relief count command B has been received may be calculated by calculating a difference. Alternatively, a counter may be separately provided to count only the number of times the relief count command B has been received, and the value thereof may be calculated at each predetermined timing. A method of referring to and clearing may also be used.

In the above, as the predetermined timing, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol notified by the count effect is a predetermined number, the relief count command B is received for the number of times of variation of the special symbol notified by the count effect. In addition to this, as a predetermined timing, when the number of fluctuations in the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the number of times the relief count command B is received reaches a predetermined number of times. When it is decided by lottery to add the number of times the relief count command B is received, or when a predetermined error or notification is eliminated.

FIG. 198 is a concrete example of effect when the ball enters the second start hole 2005 during execution of the count effect.

As shown in FIG. 198(A), as a period before the number of fluctuations in the special design in the low probability state reaches 600 times, from the 500th special design fluctuation display, the decorative design 1600a (special design) Every time the variable display is stopped, a count effect is executed in the upper part of the effect display device 1600 to notify how many times the special symbols have changed in the low probability state. In this example, it is the time when the 505th special symbol variation display is stopped, and a relief notice image A of "505 variation" corresponding to the fact that the special symbol variation number in the low probability state is 505 times is displayed. . In addition, during the variable display of the special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a), if there is a ball entering the second start port 2005, the second special symbol pending display 1600d (second The state where the variable display of the special symbol is waiting) is displayed, but it is preferable to display the reserved display 1600d of the second special symbol in a less conspicuous manner than the reserved display 1600c of the first special symbol. . As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the ball entering the second start opening 2005 during execution of the count effect. Also, from the viewpoint of making it more difficult to notice the ball entering the second starting port 2005 during the execution of the count effect, the second special symbol pending display 1600d may not be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

As shown in FIGS. 198(B) and (C), during the execution of the count effect, as the 506th special symbol variation display, the second special symbol variation display based on the ball entering the second starting port 2005 is displayed. In the case of execution, the variable display of the decorative design 1600a is not executed until 0.1 seconds have passed as the fluctuation time of the second special design, and the state in which the decorative design 1600a is stopped is displayed continuously. there is However, for the identification symbol 1600b displayed in the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600, the variable display is performed until 0.1 seconds elapse as the second special symbol variation time. When the variable display of such a second special symbol is stopped, it is executed so as not to be added to the number of variations of the special symbol notified by the count effect. That is, although the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the low probability state is the 506th time (relief number counter = 506), the number of fluctuations of the special symbols notified in the count effect remains "505 variations" and does not change. The state is such that there is "1" in the unadded (difference) variation.

As shown in FIGS. 198(D) and (E), during the execution of the count effect, as the 507th special symbol variation display, the first special symbol variation display based on the ball entering the first starting port 2004 is displayed. In the case of execution, when the variation of the first special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a) is stopped, it is performed so as to be added to the number of variations of the special symbol notified by the count effect. That is, although the number of special symbol variations in the low probability state is the 507th (relief number counter=507), "506 variation" is displayed as the number of special symbol variations notified in the count effect. Here, too, the state in which the unadded (difference) variation is "1" is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 198(F), during the execution of the count effect, as the 521st special symbol variation display, when executing the first special symbol variation display based on the ball entering the first start port 2004 , when the first special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a) stops fluctuating, it is executed so as to be added to the number of variations of the special symbol notified by the count effect. In this example, although the number of special symbol variations in the low-probability state is the 521st (relief number counter = 521), "519 variation" is displayed as the number of special symbol variations notified in the count effect. . That is, here, there is a state in which there are "2" fluctuations that have not been added (differences).

As shown in FIGS. 198(G) and (H), during the execution of the count effect, as the 522nd special symbol variation display, the first special symbol variation display based on the ball entering the first starting port 2004 is displayed. When it is executed, an increase effect image "Increase chance!" is displayed on the upper part of the effect display device 1600 to indicate that there is a chance to increase the number of variations of the special symbols notified by the count effect. Then, during the variation display of the special symbols in which the number of variations of the special symbols notified in the count effect is the 500th to 520th, if the number of balls entered into the second start port 2005 is two (not added ( difference), when the variation of the first special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a) is stopped, +2 is added to the number of variations of the special symbol notified by the count effect. In other words, while the number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state is the 522nd (relief number counter = 522), the number of variations of the special symbols notified in the count effect is displayed as "520 variations + 2 variations!" Then, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols will match, and the fluctuation of the unadded (difference) will be in the state of "0".

As shown in FIGS. 198(I) and (J), during the execution of the count effect, as the 523rd special symbol variation display, the first special symbol variation display based on the ball entering the first starting port 2004 is displayed. In the case of execution, when the variation of the first special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a) is stopped, it is performed so as to be added to the number of variations of the special symbol notified by the count effect. That is, while the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the low probability state is the 523rd (relief number counter = 523), "523 fluctuations" is displayed as the number of fluctuations of the special symbols notified in the count effect. .

As described above in detail, during the execution of the count effect, in the variable display of the 597th to 600th special symbols, each time the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is stopped, as a count effect, in the low probability state A stop symbol (relief notice image B) of a decorative symbol 1600a indicating how many times the special symbol has changed is stopped and displayed. In such a period, even when executing the variable display of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 2005, the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a is not executed, and the special symbol is varied in the low probability state. The stop pattern of the decorative pattern 1600a indicating the number of times is not displayed. However, except for the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1600a (relief notice image B) showing how many times the special symbol actually changes in the low probability state. I'm trying to stop at . For example, during the execution of the count effect, of the 597th to 600th special symbol variation displays, only the 598th special symbol variation display is the second special symbol variation display, and the other special symbol variation displays. is the variation display of the first special symbol, the stop symbol (relief notice image B) of the decorative symbol 1600a indicating how many times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state is changed from "597" to "599". ”→“600”, and the count effect proceeds in the form of excluding the 598th special symbol variable display (second special symbol variable display). In addition, temporarily during the execution of the count effect, if all the 597th to 600th special symbol variation display is the second special symbol variation display, the number of special symbol variations in the low probability state is what number 197(J) is displayed in the 600th special symbol fluctuation display without any stop symbol (relief notice image B) of the decorative symbol 1600a indicating whether or not . In such a case, it is possible to give the player another surprise that the "help mode L" is suddenly started, thereby avoiding a decrease in interest even if the count effect is not executed. can.

Also, as described above, during the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) and during the non-variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern), the volume button is operated to change the volume level, and the light amount button is pressed. It is possible to change the light intensity level by operating it. In this respect, after stopping the variable display of the decorative design 1600a (special design), if there is no suspension of the special design, the variable display of the decorative design 1600a is not executed, and when the volume button or the light amount button is operated In addition, the operation sound is output from the speaker. On the other hand, during the execution of the count effect, when executing the variable display of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 2005, the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a is not executed. First, when the volume button and the light amount button are operated, the operation sound is restricted so that it is not output from the speaker. As a result, during the execution of the count effect, when executing the variable display of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second start port 2005, the operation sound when the volume button or the light amount button is operated makes the game The production sound inside is not hindered. In addition, while the decorative pattern 1600a is being displayed non-variably, when the volume button or the light amount button is operated, whether or not the operation sound is output from the speaker confirms whether or not the second special pattern is being variably displayed. You can also

In this example, when the ball is entered into the first start port 2004, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, and when the ball is entered into the second start port 2005, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. , The variable display of each special symbol is executed in the order of entering the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005. On the other hand, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be performed at the same time. Specifically, the second starting port 2005 is arranged so that a large number of balls enter in a low-probability non-time-saving state. At this time, the second start port 2005 is frequently entered, but the second special symbol variation time based on the second start port 2005 is extremely long in the low probability non-time saving state. (for example, 180 seconds) is set. In other words, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 2005 is not frequently executed in the low probability non-time saving state, so the ball is entered into the first starting port 2004, and the first Execution of variable display of special symbols is the mainstream of the game. In such a configuration, when executing the variable display of the second special design, the performance display device 1600 limits the execution of the variable display of the decorative design 1600a, and the variable display of the second special design. At the time of stop, it is executed so as not to increase the number of variations of the special symbols notified by the count effect. In addition, regarding the number of variations of the second special symbol not notified in the count effect, at a predetermined timing during the execution of the count effect, it is executed so as to be added to the number of variations in the special symbol notified in the count effect. ing. Thereby, there can exist an effect similar to the above. Then, after a special jackpot game (jackpot controlled in a non-time-saving state after the jackpot game) or after the number of fluctuations of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number (for example, 600 fluctuations after turning on the power), the second start port The variation time of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 2005 is shortened so that the variation display of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 2005 is frequently executed. As a result, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600), making it possible to shift from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state. After the game, after a big hit controlled in a non-time-saving state) or after the number of times of variation of special symbols reaches a predetermined number (for example, 600 variations after turning on the power), the number of times of variation of special symbols in a low probability state is 600 times. (Relief number counter=600) can be easily approached, and the game can be continued with anticipation.

In the above, the probability that the lottery result of the normal pattern will be "normal hit" in the normal lottery in the low probability non-time saving state and the high probability non-time saving state is 0/100, and other game states (high probability time saving state , low-probability short-time work state A, low-probability short-time work state B, low-probability short-time work state C), the probability that the lottery result of the normal pattern will be "normal hit" is set to 100/100. It is not limited, and the probability that the lottery result of the normal pattern will be "normal hit" in the normal lottery in the low probability non-time saving state and the high probability non-time saving state is 1/100, and other game states (high probability In the ordinary lottery in the short working hours state, the low probability short working hours state A, the low probability short working hours state B, and the low probability short working hours state C), the probability that the lottery result of the normal pattern will be "normal hit" may be set to 100/100. . In this case, the probability that the game ball B is accepted in the variable winning opening 2003 in the low probability non-time saving state increases slightly, and the frequency of transmitting the relief count command B increases (accompanied by the ball entering the second start opening 2005 Relief count command B is transmitted not only when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, but also when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped due to the ball entering the variable winning opening 2003). , the range of addition in the effect of adding the number of times the relief count command B is received at a predetermined timing can be increased, and the amusement of the game can be further improved. In addition, for those in which the game ball B may be accepted in the variable winning opening 2003 in a low probability non-time saving state, it is not necessary to necessarily provide the second start opening 2005 whose upper side is always open, variable winning By using only the relief count command B caused by the ball entering the mouth 2003, an effect may be performed in which the number of times it is received is added at a predetermined timing.

Further, in the above description, the gate 2002, the variable prize winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005 are provided in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a. The variable winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2005 may be provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a. Even in such a case, there is a possibility that a shot ball or the like that the player accidentally hits to the right during normal time (low probability non-time saving state) may enter the variable winning opening 2003 or the second starting opening 2005. , the relief count command B is transmitted even when the variable display of the second special symbol accompanying such a ball entry is stopped, and as described above, the effect of adding the number of times the relief count command B is received at a predetermined timing. By doing so, a game effect equivalent to that described above can be achieved.

In addition, in the above, when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, the number of variations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is not increased, and a deviation from the actual number of variations of the special symbol is caused. , it is desirable to make the player unaware of the discrepancy as much as possible. In view of this point, it is desirable that the player should be configured so that it is difficult for the player to see the general data display installed in the game hall when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in a normal posture. . For example, since the general data display provided in the game hall is located above the pachinko machine 1, the door frame top unit 450 of the pachinko machine 1 is decorated so that the upper side cannot be seen through, and the game It is preferable to design the amount of protrusion toward the player side (front side) to such an extent that the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 obstructs the player's line of sight and makes the data display difficult to see. If the door frame top unit 450 is protruded to such an extent that the data display becomes difficult to see, it may become difficult to operate the attendant call button provided on a general data display. It is desirable to provide a staff call button on the door frame 3 and to transmit the operation signal to the data display through the external terminal board 558 .

(Modification)
Next, a modified example that is partially different from the above-described effect example will be described below. In the modified example, after turning on the power with clearing the RAM or after executing the jackpot game, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol other than the big hit) is calculated for the relief number counter. It is the same in that it is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state B by reaching 600 times (relief counter = 600) in the low-probability state, and the number of times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state. On the other hand, it is possible to count not only during the variable display of the special symbols, but also during the non-variable display of the special symbols.

Also in the modified example, when the fluctuation of the special symbols is stopped, by transmitting a symbol determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the variable display of the decorative symbols in the effect display device 1600 is stopped, but the low probability state When the number of fluctuations in the special design reaches 500 times, when transmitting the design determination command, the main control board 1310 transmits a relief count command A to the peripheral control board 1510 separately from the design determination command. This relief count command A is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 every time a symbol determination command is transmitted, while the special symbol variation frequency in the low probability state is 500 to 600 times. The peripheral control board 1510 has a dedicated counter for counting the number of times the relief count command A is received, and stores the number of times the relief count command A is received. Thus, in the peripheral control board 1510, by counting the number of times the relief count command A is received, by receiving the relief count command for the first time, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500 times. By recognizing that it has been done, and receiving the relief count command for the second time, recognizing that the number of times of special design fluctuations in the low probability state has reached 501 times, the number of times of special design fluctuations in the low probability state It is possible to grasp how many times it is, and based on this grasped number of fluctuations, at the time of stopping the variable display of the decorative pattern in the production display device 1600, the number of fluctuations of the special pattern notified by the count production is increased. is executable.

In the modified example, when a specific condition such as entering a winning hole (for example, general winning hole 2001) that does not execute variable display of special symbols is established, variable display of special symbols is not executed, but in main control board 1310 , counts up the relief number counter. In other words, in the modified example, since the variable display of the special symbols is not executed, the variable display of the decorative symbols is not executed, and only when the specific condition is established, the number of times the special symbols are varied is counted by the relief number counter. allows you to upgrade. At this time, the pattern confirmation command is not transmitted, but the relief count command B is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 . This relief count command B is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 each time a specific condition is satisfied while the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 500 to 600 times. Then, the main control board 1310 counts up the number of times the special symbols are changed by the relief number counter, and the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command B is received, thereby determining the number of times the specific condition is established. I try to grasp whether it is the second time, but when a specific condition is met, I do not increase the number of variations of the special symbols notified by the count effect, and the actual number of variations of the special symbols and the deviation are caused. I'm trying In other words, during the execution of the count effect, when the specific condition is satisfied, the number of times of special design fluctuations by the relief number counter on the main control board 1310 and the number of times of special design fluctuations notified by the count effect on the peripheral control board 1510 and do not match. In this way, when a specific condition is established during the execution of the count effect, although the number of times of variation of the special symbols is counted up by the counter for the number of times of relief in the main control board 1310, the number of times of variation of the special symbols notified by the count effect is not increased, it becomes difficult to notice the establishment of the specific condition, and it is possible to make it difficult to grasp how many times the special symbol is changed by the relief number counter on the main control board 1310 from the count presentation.

In the above description, the specific condition is satisfied when the ball is entered into a winning opening that does not execute variable display of special symbols (for example, general winning opening 2001). Instead, the specific condition may be established when it is decided by lottery to count up the relief number counter.

The peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command B is received. It is executed so as to be added to the number of fluctuations in the notified special symbol. In this example, as the predetermined timing, among the 500th to 600th fluctuation display of the special symbols during the execution of the count effect, the number of variations of the special symbol notified in the count effect is 520 times, 540 times, 560 times, 580 times. times, 596 times are set, and when these times are reached, the number of times the relief count command B is received for the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol notified in the count effect (difference accumulated without addition) is executed to add That is, for example, when the number of fluctuations in the special symbols notified in the count effect is 520 times, the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied during the 500th to 520th special symbol fluctuation display is the number of times the relief count command B is received. Minutes (difference accumulated without addition)", and the number of times is added to the number of times of special symbol fluctuation notified by the count effect. As a result, there is a possibility that the number of fluctuations of the special symbols notified in the count effect may suddenly increase at once, so that the count effect can be paid attention to with anticipation. The number of times the relief count command B has been received may be calculated by calculating the difference. Alternatively, a separate counter may be provided to count only the number of times the relief count command B has been received, and the value thereof may be calculated at predetermined timings. A method of referring to and clearing may also be used.

In the above, as a predetermined timing, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol notified by the count effect is a predetermined number, the relief count command B is received for the number of times of variation of the special symbol notified by the count effect. In addition to this, as a predetermined timing, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the number of times the relief count command B is received reaches a predetermined number of times. When it is decided by lottery to add the number of times the relief count command B is received, or when a predetermined error or notification is eliminated.

It should be noted that when the variation of the special symbols and decorative symbols is stopped, the number of times of variation of the special symbols is counted up by the relief frequency counter on the main control board 1310, and the relief is directed to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal plate 558. Outputs information about the number of times the special symbol changes by the number counter. Similarly, when a specific condition is satisfied, the number of special symbol variations is counted up by the relief number counter on the main control board 1310, and the special symbol by the relief number counter is sent to the outside through the external terminal board 558. Outputs information about the number of fluctuations. As a result, when the specific condition is established, the counter counts up the number of variations of the special symbols, while the number of variations of the special symbols notified by the count effect is not increased. , From the count effect, it is not possible to grasp the number of times the special symbol has changed by the relief number counter on the main control board 1310, but from the outside, the special symbol variation by the relief number counter on the main control board 1310 It is possible to grasp how many times the number of times is. In other words, the hall manager checks whether the number of fluctuations of the special symbol by the relief number counter on the main control board 1310 increases abnormally, thereby illegally attempting to establish a specific condition. It is possible to monitor whether the

Further, when a special abnormality such as detection of a magnet or vibration occurs in the pachinko machine 1, progress of the game is stopped. In other words, when a special abnormality occurs, even if there is a ball entering the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, the main control board 1310 does not execute the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. without counting up the number of fluctuations of the special symbol by the counter of the number of times of relief in the main control board 1310, the information before the occurrence of the special abnormality (the number of times of variation of the special symbol by the number of relief counter of the main control board 1310) is held. . Similarly, when a special abnormality occurs, even if a specific condition is established, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is not counted up by the relief number counter in the main control board 1310, and the number of fluctuations before the special abnormality occurs. Information (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol by the relief number counter in the main control board 1310) is held. As a result, when a special abnormality occurs, it is possible to prevent an act of illegally counting up the number of fluctuations of the special symbol by the relief number counter on the main control board 1310 .

[Example of directing for immediate short hit]
In the present example, in the low probability non-shortening working hours state, when the lottery result becomes "immediate short hit", it is controlled to the low probability short working hours state C. Here, with reference to FIG. 199, a specific example of effect until the lottery result becomes "immediate short hit" will be described.

As shown in FIG. 199(A), when a variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the variation display of the decorative pattern 1600a is executed in the central part of the effect display device 1600. FIG. Specifically, until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command elapses, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 1600a are variably displayed, and the display is stopped in the order of left decorative pattern→right decorative pattern→middle decorative pattern. do. As the stop design of the decorative design 1600a, the design corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed.

Further, when a variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, a variable display of an identification pattern 1600b that is smaller than the decorative pattern and is less conspicuous is executed. Specifically, until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command elapses, the identification symbol 1600b is variably displayed as ◯ and x, and is stopped at either ◯ or x. As the stop symbol of the identification symbol 1600b, when the lottery result is a win (big win, small win, immediate short win), ◯ is stop-displayed, and when the lottery result is a loss, x is stop-displayed. In addition to this example, when the purpose is to conceal the fact that the lottery result is an immediate short win as much as possible, the stop symbol of the identification symbol 1600b may be a big win or a small win when the lottery result is a big win or a small win. If the lottery result is an immediate short win or a loss, the x may be stop-displayed to make it difficult to recognize the immediate short win from the stop pattern of the identification pattern 1600b.

In addition, in the lower part of the effect display device 1600, the first special symbol pending display 1600c (the state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is on standby) and the second special symbol pending display 1600d (the second special symbol A state in which the variable display is on standby) is enabled. Specifically, for the reserved display 1600c of the first special symbol, the reserved number is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display device 1600, and the reserved display 1600d of the second special symbol is the reserved number. is displayed in the lower right portion of the effect display device 1600 with squares. Then, when the variable display of the reserved symbols is started, the reserved displays 1600c and 1600d for the start are erased. However, the reserved displays 1600c and 1600d of the special symbols may be continuously displayed from the start of the variable display of the reserved special symbols to the end of the variable display of the special symbols. .

Also, in the upper left part of the effect display device 1600, a state display indicating the current game state is executed. In this example, the current gaming state is a low probability non-time saving state, and displays "normally" corresponding to the low probability non-working time saving state.

As shown in FIGS. 199(B) and (C), during the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern), the ball enters the first starting port 2004, and the lottery result is "immediate short hit". When there is a hold, as a hold display 1600c of the first special pattern, a hold display of a special design that suggests that the lottery result is the hold of the special design that becomes "immediate short hit" (Fig. 199 (B) , face hold displayed in the lower left of (C)). In addition, for the display of a special pattern on hold, a comment with a balloon saying "Shall we help?" . As a result, in the period before the start of the variable display of the special symbols in which the lottery result is "immediate short hit", the variable display of the special symbols corresponding to the pending display of the special symbols is executed. You can know in advance that you will enter "help mode". In addition, in this example, the above-mentioned 600th special symbol variable display will be executed. Displayed face pending), and a special pattern pending display (displayed at the lower left of FIGS. 199B and 199C), which suggests that the lottery result is a special pattern pending of ``immediate short win''. In the face hold), the common "face hold" image is used, but depending on the presence or absence of the balloon comment "Shall I help?" It is possible to distinguish whether it is intended for "immediate short hit". In addition, if it is possible to more reliably distinguish whether the intention is to "variate display of special symbols for the 600th time" or to intend "immediate short hit", even though it is a reserved image of a common design It is preferable to make the color patterns different from each other, or hold the images with patterns different in shape from each other.

In this example, as a specific example of displaying a special pattern pending display that suggests that the special pattern is reserved for "immediate short hit", when the ball enters various winning ports such as the first start port 2004, By transmitting a prejudgment command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the prejudgment information (whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or an immediate short hit, a big hit in the case of a big hit). type of small win, type of small win, type of immediate short win in case of immediate short win, big win, small win, and in case of no immediate short win, performance display device 1600 executes. Whether the ready-to-win effect is executed as the game effect, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed (type of variation pattern, etc.) is specified. Then, when it is specified as the advance determination information that it will be an immediate short hit, when displaying the reserved display, a special pattern is displayed with a reserved display, and the lottery result is a special pattern of "immediate short hit". is executing a look-ahead effect that suggests that it is pending. In addition, as for the pending display of the special pattern, the pattern may be changed according to the type of immediate short hit. In addition, regarding the pending display of a special pattern, it is possible to display it not only when it is specified that it will be an immediate short hit as preliminary judgment information, but also when it is not an immediate short hit, and such a special pattern can be displayed. A false effect that does not result in a short hit may be executed immediately even if the reserved display of the pattern is displayed. In addition, when specifying that it will be an immediate short win as the advance determination information and displaying the pending display of the special pattern, the effect display device 1600 may immediately display the pending display of the special pattern. , After temporarily displaying a normal pending image (such as the above-mentioned pending image of "○") on the effect display device 1600, perform a predetermined change effect with voice, vibration, character image, etc. at a predetermined timing, and perform such a change effect. After that, the normal reserved image may be changed to a reserved display of a special pattern. In addition, if it is not specified that it will be an immediate short hit as the pre-determination information, once the normal pending image (such as the above-mentioned “○” pending image) is displayed, then at a predetermined timing Voice, vibration, character A predetermined change effect with an image or the like may be performed, and after such change effect, a fake effect may be performed in which the normal reserved image is maintained (not changed to a reserved display of a special pattern).

As described above, if it is specified that it will be an immediate short hit as the pre-determination information, when displaying the pending display, it suggests that the lottery result is a special pattern hold that is "immediate short hit" However, the pre-reading effect that suggests such an "immediate short hit" is restricted so as not to be executed in a part of the period. Specifically, in the low probability non-time saving state, when it becomes an immediate short hit, until the variable display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (in this example, either 20 times, 40 times, or 100 times) During the period, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C, but after stopping the immediate short winning pattern corresponding to such an immediate short winning, the execution of the look-ahead performance suggesting "immediate short winning" is restricted. . Here, as a game state other than the low probability non-time-saving state, in the high probability non-time-saving state, high probability time-saving state, low probability time-saving state A, low probability time-saving state B, low probability time-saving state C, it becomes an immediate short hit In the case of, it is set as "immediate short hit design invalid period" which is not controlled to low probability time saving state C. In other words, in the low-probability time-saving state C after the stop of the immediate short-hit symbol corresponding to the immediate short-hit, although the lottery result may be "immediate short-hit", the lottery result becomes "immediate short-hit". By doing so, it is not controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C again. Further, in the immediate short winning design invalid period, when the immediate short winning is realized, in the variable display of the special symbols in the function display unit 1400, the immediate short winning symbols are stop-displayed as the stop symbols of the special symbols. In the variable display of the decorative symbols on the display device 1600, the immediate short winning symbols are not stopped and displayed as the stop symbols of the decorative symbols, and the symbols different from the immediate short winning symbols (in this example, the missing symbols) are stopped and displayed. there is In this regard, in this example, even if it is specified that the immediate short hit will be the immediate short hit as the pre-determination information after the stop of the immediate short hit symbol corresponding to the immediate short hit, the "immediate short hit" is suggested. By not executing the look-ahead performance, it is possible to reduce the sense of loss caused by the invalidation of the immediate short win without grasping that the immediate short win will be invalidated in the immediate short win pattern invalid period.

In addition, the game state other than the low-probability non-time-saving state (high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state A, low Probable time saving state B, low probability time saving state C), even for the holding of the first start port 2004 that will be displayed in a variable display after the final variable display, the execution of the look-ahead production that suggests “immediate short hit” restricted. For example, when it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C of 100 times corresponding to the immediate short hit A, four game balls are placed in the first start port 2004 during the variable display of the special symbol of the final round (100th time) Enters the ball, and even if the lottery result includes a special design reservation that results in an "immediate short hit", the "immediate short hit" will be applied to all the holds that occurred during the final variable display. The suggested look-ahead effect is not executed. However, regarding the suspension of the first starting port 2004 that will be displayed after the final variable display, since the variable display is performed after the end of the "immediate short winning symbol invalid period", Although the execution of the look-ahead effect suggesting the "immediate short hit" is restricted, when the immediate short hit occurs after the "immediate short hit symbol invalid period" ends, the special symbol fluctuating display on the function display unit 1400 , The immediate short winning design is stopped and displayed as the special design stop design, and in the variable display of the decorative design 1600a on the effect display device 1600, the immediate short winning design ("547" design combination as the stop design of the decorative design 1600a) ) shall be displayed in a stopped state. As a result, during the "immediate short winning pattern invalid period", while not executing the look-ahead effect suggesting "immediate short winning", after the "immediate short winning symbol invalid period" ends, during the normal game A player can be made to grasp the occurrence of an immediate short winning in the same way as when the immediate short winning occurs.

It should be noted that, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, when it becomes an immediate short hit, until the variable display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (in this example, either 20 times, 40 times, or 100 times), Although it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C, after the variable display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times, it is shifted to the low probability non time saving state. Then, after the stop of the immediate short winning pattern corresponding to the immediate short winning, after the variable display of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number of times, when it is specified that the immediate short winning is specified as the preliminary determination information, "immediately It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that suggests a short hit. As a result, after the stop of the immediate short winning pattern corresponding to the immediate short winning, after the variable display of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number of times, attention is paid to whether or not the look-ahead performance suggesting the "immediate short winning" is executed. can be made

In addition, as a look-ahead effect, when it is specified that it will be an immediate short hit as the advance determination information, when the reservation display 1600c, 1600d is displayed, the lottery result is "immediate short hit". In addition to executing a look-ahead performance suggesting that something will happen, a special pattern in which a lottery result is a ``big hit'' when displaying pending displays 1600c and 1600d when it is specified as prior determination information that a big win will occur. It is executing a look-ahead effect that suggests that it is pending. After stopping the immediate short-hit pattern corresponding to the immediate short-hit, the execution of the look-ahead performance suggesting "immediate short-hit" is restricted, while the execution of the look-ahead performance suggesting "big hit" is restricted. not. In this way, after the immediate short winning pattern corresponding to the immediate short winning is stopped, all of the look-ahead performance is not restricted, but only the execution of the look-ahead performance suggesting "immediate short winning" is restricted. , it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the look-ahead effect will be executed with anticipation.

As shown in FIGS. 199(D) and (E), when the variable display of decorative symbols (special symbols) in which the lottery result is "immediate short winning" is executed, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1600a is "547". (a specific symbol among the missing symbols) is stopped and displayed, and the symbols associated with the number symbols are stopped and displayed so that they are the same symbols.

As shown in FIG. 199 (F), in the low probability non-time saving state, when the lottery result becomes "immediate short hit", it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C and time saving is given. In this example, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, the lottery result is "immediate short hit", until the variable display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times, it is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C, The period of control to such a low probability time saving state C is called "help mode S". In the effect display device 1600, when the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) where the lottery result is "immediate short win" is stopped, the "help mode" is notified to enter the "help mode S". S rush!!” is displayed. The predetermined number of times is 100 times if the lottery result is "immediate short win A", 40 times if "immediate short win B", and "immediate short win C". is set to 20 times.

As shown in FIG. 199(G), after entering the "help mode S", when there is no suspension of the special design, the variable display of the decorative design 1600a (special design) is not immediately started, and the effect display is performed. At the bottom of the device 1600, a volume adjustment bar indicating the currently set volume level and a light amount adjustment bar indicating the currently set light amount level are displayed. The volume adjustment bar can change the memory display as the volume level is changed by operating the volume button, and the light amount adjustment bar can be operated by operating the light amount button to change the light amount level. Along with this, it is possible to change the memory display. In addition, during variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) and during non-variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern), it is possible to change the sound volume level and the light amount level. Thus, after stopping the variable display of the decorative design 1600a (special design), if there is no suspension of the special design and the variable display of the decorative design 1600a (special design) is not executed, the volume adjustment bar and the light amount By displaying the adjustment bar, it is possible to know that it is a period during which the volume level and the light amount level can be changed.

Also, after entering the "help mode S", in the upper left part of the effect display device 1600, as a state display indicating the current game state, the "help mode A rescue-in-progress image "S" is displayed. In addition, in the low-probability time-saving state C, it becomes easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003. It displays an arrow bar of "Left hit!" This relief image and arrow bar can be continuously displayed even when the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is not executed, and is not hidden by the volume adjustment bar or light amount adjustment bar described above (or It is continuously displayed at the display position (not overlapping) to prevent the player from accidentally leaving the seat despite being in the low-probability time-saving state C.

As shown in FIG. 199(H), after entering the "help mode S", there is no holding of special symbols, and until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, entry into various winning ports When there is no ball, the effect display device 1600 executes a demonstration effect for introducing the concept of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁At the end of the demonstration effect, an "addiction prevention display (not shown)" is also executed to prevent the player from becoming too addicted to the game. The rescue image and the arrow bar described above can be displayed continuously even during the demonstration effect, and are continuously displayed in a display position that is not hidden (or overlapped) by the demo effect or the "immersion prevention display" described above. , the player is prevented from accidentally leaving the seat in spite of being in the low-probability time-saving state C.

As shown in FIG. 199(I), after entering the "help mode S", when there is a ball entering various prize winning openings such as the variable winning opening 2003, the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a is executed. be. It should be noted that, during execution of the demonstration effect, if a ball is entered into various winning holes such as the variable winning hole 2003, only the demonstration effect is terminated at that point, and the image during relief and the arrow bar continue to be displayed. .

As shown in FIG. 199 (J), during the execution of "help mode S", that is, during the control of the low probability time saving state C, the predetermined number of times (for example, the lottery result is "immediate short hit A" when 100th time), when the variable display of the decorative design 1600a (special design) is executed, in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, the last decorative design 1600a (special design) during the execution of the "help mode S" is changed. A relief end image of "Help Last!" is displayed to notify that the display is on.

As shown in FIG. 199 (K), after the execution of "help mode S", that is, in the control of the low-probability time-saving state C a predetermined number of times (for example, if the lottery result is "immediate short hit A" 100 th) after the stop of the variable display of the decorative pattern (special pattern), the low probability time saving state C is terminated and the state is shifted to the low probability non time saving state, so in the upper left part of the effect display device 1600, the current game state displays "normal" to notify that it is a low-probability non-time-saving state that has passed through "help mode S". Also, in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, a relief history image of "Help S: 1 time" is displayed so that it can be recognized from the outside that the "Help mode S" has been executed once. . In addition, during the execution of the "help mode S", that is, during the control of the low probability time saving state C, the lottery result is " In the case of a "jackpot", the low-probability time-saving state C is terminated and the game state shifts to the game state corresponding to the type of "jackpot", so the "help mode S" is terminated at that point. .

[Regarding the count suppression period]
In this example, after turning on the power with clearing the RAM or after executing a jackpot game, the number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state (relief number counter) is counted, and the number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state is 600. It is assumed that the low-probability time-saving state B is controlled by reaching the number of times (relief number counter = 600). Here, after turning on the power with clearing the RAM or after executing a jackpot game, only the number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state is counted, and in the high probability state, the number of variations of the special symbols is not counted. It is set as a "count suppression period" that does not On the other hand, if it is a low probability state, regardless of whether it is a non-working time saving state or a working hours saving state, it is subject to counting the number of fluctuations of special symbols, but part of the low probability non working hours state among the low probability states , is set as a "count suppression period" that is not subject to counting the number of fluctuations in special symbols. With reference to FIG. 200, the count suppression period set to a part of low-probability non-shortening of working hours state among such low-probability states is demonstrated. FIG. 200 is a time chart showing count suppression periods.

First, in the count valid period, in the low probability non-time saving state, when entering the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and executing the variable display of the special symbol, the relief number counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up, and the number of relief counters that will be controlled to the low-probability time-saving state B is updated so as to approach 600. On the other hand, in the count suppression period, in the low probability non-time saving state, when entering the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and executing the variable display of the special symbol, the relief counter at the main control board 1310 is not counted up, it is updated so as not to approach the relief number counter = 600 that will be controlled to the low probability time saving state B.

Moreover, a plurality of types are provided as the count suppression period. Regarding the count suppression period A, in the low probability non-time saving state, when entering the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and executing the variable display of the special symbol, the relief number counter in the main control board 1310 is not counted up, and the relief number counter is maintained. In addition, for the count suppression period B, in the low probability non-time saving state, when entering the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and executing the variable display of the special symbol, relief at the main control board 1310 The number counter is counted down and updated so as to move away from the relief number counter = 600 that will be controlled to the low probability time saving state B. That is, for the count suppression period B, the relief number counter = 600, which will be controlled to the low-probability time-saving state B, is distant from the relief number counter = 600, and then it becomes difficult to reach the relief number counter = 600. is also an unfavorable period.

In addition, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, when it is determined by lottery to generate the count suppression period, the start condition of the count suppression period is established, and the count suppression period is generated. In this example, when it is decided by lottery to generate the count suppression period, the count suppression period is suddenly generated by not notifying the fact. Therefore, at the start of the count suppression period, it is difficult to notice whether or not the count suppression period has started. However, when it is determined by lottery that the count suppression period should be generated, the fact may be notified. In addition, in this example, in the low probability non-time saving state, when it is determined to generate the count suppression period by lottery, the start condition of the count suppression period is satisfied, but in addition to this, for example, low In the probability non-time-saving state, when the number of fluctuations in the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 200 times), the start condition of the count suppression period may be established.

Further, after the start of the count suppression period, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the end condition of the count suppression period is established, and the count suppression period is terminated. However, in addition to this, for example, after the start of the count suppression period, the end condition of the count suppression period may be established when it is decided by lottery to end the count suppression period.

As shown in FIG. 200, in the count valid period in the low probability non-time saving state, each time entering the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and performing the variable display of the special symbol, the main control board 1310 is counting up the relief number counter. In this example, when the variable displays A to C of the special symbols are executed, the relief number counter in the main control board 1310 is counted up, and the relief number counter changes from 450→451→452.

In addition, in the count valid period in the low probability non-time saving state, each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the special symbol variation display is performed, the pachinko machine via the external terminal unit 558 Information on the number of fluctuations in special symbols is output to the outside of 1. Specifically, a hall computer and an external information device provided on the top of the pachinko machine 1 are connected via the external terminal portion 558 . The external display device displays information about the number of variations of the special symbols, information about the number of big hits, and the like. In this example, when executing the variable displays A to C of the special symbols, information regarding the number of times of variation of the special symbols is output toward the external display device, and the number of times of variation of the special symbols displayed on the external display device is 450→ It has changed from 451 to 452.

In addition, in the count valid period in the low probability non-time saving state, every time the ball is entered into the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the special symbol variation display is performed, the effect display device 1600 corresponds to the variation pattern. When executing the production to be performed, the normal production is executed.

Next, in the count suppression period A that is started when the conditions for starting the count suppression period A are satisfied, each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the special symbol is displayed, the main The relief number counter in the control board 1310 is maintained without counting up. In this example, during the count suppression period A, when the special symbol variation displays D, E, etc. are executed, the relief number counter in the main control board 1310 is not counted up, and the relief number counter is maintained at 452. I have to.

In addition, in the count suppression period A, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the special symbol variation display is executed, information regarding the number of special symbol variations is output to the external display device. are doing. In this example, in the count suppression period A, when performing the special symbol variation display D, E, etc., information about the number of special symbol variations is output to the external display device, and the special symbol displayed on the external display device is displayed. The number of symbol variations has changed from 453 → 454 → (+1 per variation).

In addition, in the count suppression period A, in the effect display device 1600, the special symbol variation display D, which is the first special symbol variation display, and the special symbol variation display E, which is the second and subsequent special symbol variation displays, etc. , and different productions are being performed. Here, in the count suppression period A, during the execution of the special symbol variation display D that is being executed for the first time of the special symbol variation display, when performing the effect corresponding to the variation pattern, the count valid period A common effect that is the same as the variable display A to C of the special symbols in the background image is executed. As described above, when the count suppression period A starts, it is not clearly notified to that effect, so it is difficult to recognize whether it is the count valid period or the count suppression period A. can also make it harder to notice that an adverse period has started.

On the other hand, in the count suppression period A, during the execution of the special symbol variation display E, etc., which is the second or subsequent special symbol variation display, when performing the effect corresponding to the variation pattern, the count is suppressed. A pinch effect 1 (specific effect) that suggests period A is being executed. Here, as the pinch effect 1, a background image suggesting that it is the count suppression period A (a background image different from the special symbol fluctuation display A to C during the count valid period), a mini character, or a count suppression period An effect such as outputting a sound or emitting light suggesting that it is A is executed. As described above, in the count suppression period A, it can be assumed that it is the count suppression period A since it is suggested except for the first variable display of the special symbols. In addition, by not executing the pinch performance 1 only during the execution of the first variation display of the special symbols in the count suppression period A, it is possible to prevent the start of the count suppression period A from being noticed early. .

In the above, at the start of the count suppression period A (during the execution of the variable display D of the special symbol), the pinch effect 1 (specific effect) is not executed, but from the start of the count suppression period A, the pinch Production 1 may be executed.

Next, in the count valid period that is started when the end condition of the count suppression period A is satisfied, the main control The counter for the number of repairs on the board 1310 is counted up. In this example, when executing the variable displays F to H of the special symbols, the relief number counter in the main control board 1310 is counted up, and the relief number counter changes from 453→454→455.

In addition, during the count valid period, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the special symbol variation display is executed, information regarding the number of special symbol variations is output to the external display device. ing. In this example, during the count valid period, when the special symbol variation displays F to H are executed, information regarding the number of special symbol variations is output to the external display device, and the special symbol displayed on the external display device is displayed. The number of fluctuations changes from 463→464→465.

In addition, in the count valid period, each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the effect display device 1600 performs the effect corresponding to the variation pattern. , the normal rendition is running.

Next, in the count suppression period B that is started when the conditions for starting the count suppression period B are satisfied, each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the special symbol is displayed, the main The relief number counter in the control board 1310 is counted down. In this example, during the count suppression period B, when executing the variation display I of the special symbol, etc., the relief number counter in the main control board 1310 is counted down, and the relief number counter is 454 → (-1 per 1 variation). is changing.

In addition, in the count suppression period B, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the special symbol variation display is executed, information regarding the number of special symbol variations is output to the external display device. are doing. In this example, during the count suppression period B, when executing the special symbol variation display I, information regarding the number of special symbol variations is output to the external display device, and the special symbol variation displayed on the external display device is output. The number of times has changed from 466 to (+1 per 1 change).

In addition, in the count suppression period B, the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, and each time the variable display of the special symbol is performed, the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is performed. When executing the production corresponding to , a common production that is the same in terms of the background image and the like as the variable display F to H of the special symbols in the count valid period is executed. As described above, when the count suppression period B is executed, since the fact is not clearly notified, it is difficult to recognize whether it is the count valid period or the count suppression period B. can also make it difficult to notice that an unfavorable period is running.

Next, in the count valid period that is started when the end condition of the count suppression period B is satisfied, the main control The counter for the number of repairs on the board 1310 is counted up. In this example, when the variable display J of the special symbol is executed, the relief number counter in the main control board 1310 is counted up, and the relief number counter is changed to 443.

In addition, during the count valid period, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the special symbol variation display is executed, information regarding the number of special symbol variations is output to the external display device. ing. In this example, when the special symbol variation display J is executed during the count valid period, information regarding the number of variations of the special symbols is output to the external display device, and the number of variations of the special symbols displayed on the external display device is output. is changed to 476.

In addition, in the count valid period, each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the effect display device 1600 performs the effect corresponding to the variation pattern. , the normal rendition is running.

As described above, regarding the information on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols displayed on the external display device, when the count suppression period A or the count suppression period B occurs, the relief number counter in the main control board 1310 does not match. becomes. In other words, even if the information about the number of fluctuations of the special symbols displayed on the external display device is viewed, the number of relief counters that will be controlled to the low probability time saving state B is 600. can't figure out if there is. Therefore, the information on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols displayed on the external display device is only a guideline for the number of relief counters = 600 that will be controlled to the low-probability time-saving state B, and the number of fluctuations of the number of relief counters. You can give fun to guess.

In addition, in the count suppression period B, each time the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and the special symbol variation display is executed, the relief number counter in the main control board 1310 is counted down. , Regarding the count suppression period B, during the control of the low probability non-time-saving state after reaching the relief number counter = 600, than during the control of the low-probability non-time-saving state before reaching the relief number counter = 600 The execution rate is higher (the probability that the start condition is satisfied is higher). Here, the relief number counter counts the number of variations of the special symbol in the count valid period in the low probability non-time saving state, and in the low probability non-time saving state, the relief number counter = 600 By reaching, low probability It is controlled to the time saving state B. Then, in the low-probability time-saving state B, when the variable display of the special symbols is executed 700 times without a big hit, the low-probability non-time-saving state is controlled again, and the number-of-relief counter can be counted up. In this regard, in the low-probability non-time-saving state after reaching the relief number counter = 600 and controlling to the low-probability time-saving state B, the control of the low-probability time-saving state B is already obtained once. The acquisition of the low-probability time-saving state B is more difficult than the first time. In other words, in the low-probability non-time-saving state after reaching the relief number counter = 600 and controlling to the low-probability time-saving state B, by increasing the execution rate of the count suppression period B, the low-probability time-saving state B than the first time acquisition becomes difficult, and excessive bailouts can be suppressed.

Further, the count suppression period A and the count suppression period B can be forcibly terminated by the hall manager's operation. Specifically, when the power is turned off during the count suppression period A or the count suppression period B and then the power is turned on while clearing the RAM, the valid count period is resumed. As a result, when the player avoids playing the game due to the occurrence of the count suppression period A or the count suppression period B, the count suppression period A or the count suppression period B is terminated by the operation of the hall manager. By resetting the valid count period, the player can participate in the game with anticipation.

[About immediate short winning design invalid period]
In this example, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, it is assumed to be controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C when it becomes an immediate short hit. Here, as a game state other than the low probability non-time-saving state, in the high probability non-time-saving state, high probability time-saving state, low probability time-saving state A, low probability time-saving state B, low probability time-saving state C, it becomes an immediate short hit In the case of, it is set as "immediate short hit design invalid period" which is not controlled to low probability time saving state C. In addition, for a part of the low-probability non-time-saving state, when it becomes an immediate short-time hit, it is set as an "immediate short-time winning symbol invalid period" that is not controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C. The immediate short per design invalid period which is set to the part of such low probability non time saving state, referring to Figure 201 you explain. Figure 201 is a time chart showing an immediate short winning symbol invalid period.

First, in the immediate short winning design effective period, in the low probability non-working time saving state, when it becomes an immediate short hitting, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C. On the other hand, in the immediate short hit design invalid period, in the low probability non-time saving state, when it becomes an immediate short hit, without controlling to the low probability time saving state C, as a game state before becoming an immediate short hit, low probability non I try to keep it short.

In addition, a plurality of types are provided as the immediate short winning symbol invalid period. As for the immediate short winning design invalid period A, compared with the immediate short winning design invalid period B, the starting condition is the same and the ending condition is different.

In addition, the immediate short winning design invalid period, when it is determined to generate the immediate short winning design invalid period by lottery in the low probability non-time saving state, the conditions for starting the immediate short winning design invalid period are established, immediately A short hit design invalid period is generated. In this example, when it is decided to generate an immediate short winning design invalid period by lottery, the immediate short winning design invalid period is suddenly generated by not notifying that effect. Therefore, at the start of the immediate short winning design invalid period, it is difficult to notice whether or not the immediate short winning design invalid period has started. However, when it is determined by lottery to generate an immediate short winning symbol invalid period, it may be notified to that effect. In addition, in this example, when it is determined to generate an immediate short winning design invalid period by lottery in the low probability non-time saving state, the conditions for starting the immediate short winning design invalid period are established, but other than this Also, for example, in a low-probability non-time-saving state, when the number of fluctuations of special symbols reaches a predetermined number (for example, 200 times), the conditions for starting the immediate short winning symbol invalid period may be established.

Further, in the immediate short winning design invalid period, after the start of the immediate short winning design invalid period A, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the immediate short winning symbol invalid period A. is satisfied, and the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is terminated. On the other hand, after the start of the immediate short winning design invalid period B, when it is determined by lottery to end the immediate short winning design invalid period B, the termination condition of the immediate short winning design invalid period B is established, and immediately. The short hit symbol invalid period B is ended.

In addition, in the instant short winning design effective period, when the immediate short winning is achieved, in the variable display of the special symbols in the function display unit 1400, the immediate short winning symbols are stopped and displayed as the stop symbols of the special symbols. In the variable display of the decorative symbols on the display device 1600, the immediate short winning symbols are stopped and displayed as the stop symbols of the decorative symbols. On the other hand, in the immediate short winning design invalid period, when the immediate short winning is realized, in the variable display of the special symbols in the function display unit 1400, the immediate short winning symbols are stopped and displayed as the stop symbols of the special symbols. In the variable display of the decorative symbols on the display device 1600, the immediate short winning symbols are not stopped and displayed as the stop symbols of the decorative symbols, and the symbols different from the immediate short winning symbols (outlier symbols in this example) are stopped and displayed. there is Thus, in the immediate short winning design invalid period, when the immediate short winning becomes the immediate short winning, the stop design of the decorative design in the production display device 1600 does not suggest that fact, so the immediate short winning is invalidated. You can reduce your sense of loss.

As shown in FIG. 201, in the immediate short per pattern effective period in the low probability non-time saving state, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, to execute the variable display A ~ C of the special symbol ing. In such an immediate short-hit symbol effective period, it is possible to output information regarding the stoppage of the immediate short-hit symbol to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal portion 558 . In other words, in the immediate short winning pattern effective period, when the immediate short winning is achieved, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short winning symbols is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, whereas the immediate short winning pattern is not achieved. In this case, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short winning pattern is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加Also, a hall computer and an external information device provided on the top of the pachinko machine 1 are connected via the external terminal portion 558 . The external display device displays information on the number of variations of special symbols, information on the number of big hits, information on the number of instant short hits, and the like. Thus, by outputting the information about the stop of the immediate short winning pattern to the hall computer, the hall manager can know that the immediate short winning pattern has occurred, and the immediate short winning pattern is displayed on the external display device. By outputting the information about the stop of the game, the player can know that the short win has occurred immediately.

In addition, in the immediate short winning symbol valid period in the low probability non-time saving state, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the special symbol variation display A to C is executed, the effect display device 1600 , when executing the production corresponding to the variation pattern, the normal production is executed.

Next, in the immediate short winning design invalid period A, which is started when the conditions for starting the immediate short winning symbol invalid period A are satisfied, the special symbols fluctuate each time the ball enters the first start opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005. Displays D, E, etc. are being executed. In such an immediate short-hit design invalid period A, it is impossible to output information regarding the stop of the immediate short-hit design to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal portion 558 . That is, in the immediate short winning design invalid period A, when the immediate short winning occurs, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short winning symbol is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加In this way, even if an immediate short winning pattern occurs during the immediate short winning pattern invalid period A, the information regarding the stoppage of the immediate short winning pattern is not output to the hall computer, so that the immediate short winning pattern is obtained. Since the hall manager cannot know this and the information regarding the stop of the immediate short winning pattern is not output to the external display device, the player cannot know that the immediate short winning has been achieved.

In addition, in the immediate short winning design invalid period A, in the effect display device 1600, the special symbol fluctuation display D that is the first special symbol fluctuation display, and the special symbol fluctuation display that is the second and subsequent special symbol fluctuation displays. Different effects are executed in display E and the like. Here, during the execution of the special symbol variation display D, which is the first special symbol variation display being performed, during the immediate short winning symbol invalid period A, when executing the effect corresponding to the variation pattern, A common performance that is the same as the background image and the variable display A to C of the special symbols in the immediate short winning symbol validity period is executed. In this way, when the immediate short winning design invalid period A is started, since the fact is not clearly notified, it is possible to recognize whether it is the immediate short winning design valid period or the immediate short winning design invalid period A. is difficult, and it is possible to make it difficult to notice that a period more disadvantageous than the immediate short winning symbol valid period has started.

On the other hand, during the execution of the special symbol variation display E, etc., which is the second or subsequent special symbol variation display in the immediate short winning symbol invalid period A, when executing the effect corresponding to the variation pattern , Pinch production 2 (invalid corresponding production) that suggests that it is an immediate short winning symbol invalid period A is executed. Here, as the pinch effect 2, a background image suggesting that it is an immediate short winning design invalid period A (a background image different from the special symbol fluctuation display A to C in the immediate short winning design valid period) and a mini character are displayed. Or, an effect of outputting a sound or light emission suggesting that it is an immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is executed. In this way, in the immediate short winning design invalid period A, except for the first variable display of special symbols, it is suggested that it is the immediate short winning design invalid period A. . In addition, the start of the immediate short winning design invalid period A can be quickly noticed by not executing the pinch performance 2 only during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol in the immediate short winning design invalid period A. can be prevented.

In the above, at the start of the immediate short winning design invalid period A (during the execution of the special symbol fluctuation display D), the pinch production 2 (invalid corresponding production) is not executed, but the immediate short winning design invalid period The pinch effect 2 may be executed from the start of A.

Further, in the immediate short-hit design invalid period A, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the end condition of the immediate short-hit design invalid period A is established, and the immediate short-hit design invalid period A is established. Although the period A is terminated, in the fluctuation display of the special symbols several times (for example, 4 fluctuations) before the termination condition of the immediate short winning symbol invalid period A is satisfied, the effect display device 1600 immediately A count display showing the remaining number of variable display of special symbols until the short winning symbol invalid period A ends is displayed. Thereby, the game can be continued with anticipation until the immediate short winning symbol invalid period A ends.

Next, in the immediate short-hit design effective period started when the end condition of the immediate short-hit design invalid period A is established, every time the ball is entered into the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Running F to H. In such an immediate short-hit symbol effective period, it is possible to output information regarding the stoppage of the immediate short-hit symbol to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal portion 558 . In other words, in the immediate short winning pattern effective period, when the immediate short winning is achieved, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short winning symbols is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, but the immediate short winning is not achieved. In this case, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short winning pattern is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the immediate short winning symbol effective period, each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the special symbol variation display F to H is executed, the effect display device 1600 corresponds to the variation pattern. When executing the production to be performed, the normal production is executed.

Next, in the immediate short winning design invalid period B which is started when the conditions for starting the immediate short winning symbol invalid period B are established, the special symbols fluctuate each time the ball enters the first start opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005. Display I, etc. are being executed. In such an immediate short-hit design invalid period B, it is impossible to output information about the stop of the immediate short-hit design to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal portion 558 . That is, in the immediate short winning design invalid period B, when the immediate short winning is achieved, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short winning symbol is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加In this way, in the immediate short winning design invalid period B, even if the immediate short winning is achieved, since the information regarding the stop of the immediate short winning symbol is not output to the hall computer, the immediate short winning is achieved. Since the hall manager cannot know this and the information regarding the stop of the immediate short winning pattern is not output to the external display device, the player cannot know that the immediate short winning has been achieved.

In addition, in the immediate short winning design invalid period B, in the effect display device 1600, the special symbol fluctuation display I that is the first special symbol fluctuation display, and the special symbol fluctuation display that is the second and subsequent special symbol fluctuation display. Different effects are being performed on the display and on the display. Here, during the execution of the special symbol variation display I, which is the execution of the first special symbol variation display, in the immediate short winning symbol invalid period B, when executing the effect corresponding to the variation pattern, A common performance that is the same as the variable display F to G of the special symbols in the immediate short winning symbol validity period in terms of the background image and the like is executed. In this way, when the immediate short winning design invalid period B is started, since it is not clearly notified to that effect, it is possible to recognize whether it is the immediate short winning design valid period or the immediate short winning design invalid period B. is difficult, and it is possible to make it difficult to notice that a period more disadvantageous than the immediate short winning symbol valid period has started.

On the other hand, during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols, which is the second and later variable display of the special symbols in the immediate short winning symbol invalid period B, when executing the performance corresponding to the variation pattern, A pinch performance 2 (invalid corresponding performance) that suggests that it is a short hit symbol invalid period B is executed. Here, as the pinch effect 2, a background image suggesting that it is the immediate short winning design invalid period B (background image different from the special symbol fluctuation display A to C in the immediate short winning symbol valid period) and a mini character are displayed. Or, an effect of outputting a sound or light emission suggesting that it is an immediate short hit symbol invalid period B is executed. In this way, in the immediate short winning design invalid period B, except for the first variable display of special symbols, it is suggested that it is the immediate short winning design invalid period B. . In addition, the start of the immediate short winning design invalid period B can be quickly noticed by not executing the pinch performance 2 only during the execution of the first special symbol fluctuation display in the immediate short winning design invalid period A. can be prevented. In addition, the pinch performance 2 suggesting that it is the immediate short winning design invalid period B is the same as the pinch performance 2 suggesting that it is the immediate short winning design invalid period A, but the performance contents may be changed. .

In the above, at the start of the immediate short winning design invalid period B (during the execution of the special symbol fluctuation display I), the pinch production 2 (invalid corresponding production) is not executed, but the immediate short winning design invalid period The pinch effect 2 may be executed from the start of B.

In addition, in the immediate short winning design invalid period B, when it is decided by lottery to end the immediate short winning design invalid period B, the end condition of the immediate short winning design invalid period B is satisfied and the immediate short winning design invalid period B is invalidated. Although the period B is ended, it is executed before the immediate short winning design invalid period A ends in the effect display device 1600 before the end condition of the immediate short winning design invalid period B is established. is not displaying the count display. This is because the end condition of the immediate short winning design invalid period B is when it is decided by lottery to end the immediate short winning design invalid period B, so the end timing of the immediate short winning design invalid period B is set in advance. This is because it is not possible to distinguish between

Next, in the immediate short-hit design valid period started when the end condition of the immediate short-hit design invalid period B is established, when the ball is entered into the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, the variable display of the special symbols. I am running J. In such an immediate short-hit symbol effective period, it is possible to output information regarding the stoppage of the immediate short-hit symbol to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal portion 558 . In other words, in the immediate short winning pattern effective period, when the immediate short winning is achieved, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short winning symbols is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, but the immediate short winning is not achieved. In this case, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short winning pattern is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the immediate short winning symbol valid period, when entering the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and executing the variation display J of the special symbol, the effect display device 1600 shows the effect corresponding to the variation pattern. When executing, normal production is executed.

As described above, in the immediate short winning design invalid period A, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the end condition of the immediate short winning design invalid period A is established, and the immediate short winning symbol invalid period A The winning pattern invalid period A is terminated, but when it is determined by a lottery to terminate the immediate short winning design invalid period A before the conditions for terminating the immediate short winning design invalid period A are established, the immediate short winning symbol invalid period A is immediately terminated. The end condition of the short winning design invalid period A may be satisfied, and the immediate short winning design invalid period A may be forcibly terminated. In this example, in the special symbol fluctuation display (for example, 4 fluctuations) several times before the end condition of the immediate short winning design invalid period A is satisfied, the immediate short winning symbol invalid period A count display indicating the remaining number of variable display of the special symbols until A is completed is displayed, but in the case of forcibly ending the immediate short winning design invalid period A, the count display is not completed. , is forcibly terminated even if the count display is in progress.

Further, the immediate short winning symbol invalid period A and the immediate short winning symbol invalid period B can be forcibly terminated by the hall manager's operation. Specifically, in the immediate short winning design invalid period A or the immediate short winning design invalid period B, after the power is turned off, when the power is turned on with RAM clearing, the immediate short winning design valid period is returned. ing. As a result, when the player avoids playing the game due to the occurrence of the immediate short winning pattern invalid period A or the immediate short winning symbol invalid period B, the immediate short winning symbol invalidation is performed by the hall manager's operation. The period A or the immediate short-hit design invalid period B may be terminated, and by returning to the immediate short-hit design valid period, new participation in the game can be expected.

As described above, for a part of the low probability non-time saving state among the low probability states, it is set as a "count suppression period" that does not count the number of times of variation of special symbols. Then, of the count suppression period, for the count suppression period A, in the low probability non-time saving state, when entering the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and executing the variable display of the special symbol, the main The relief number counter in the control board 1310 is maintained without counting up. In such a count suppression period A, an "immediate short winning symbol invalid period" in which control is not performed to the low probability time saving state C even when an immediate short winning occurs may be generated at the same time. A case where such a count suppression period A and an immediate short winning symbol invalid period are used together will be described with reference to FIG. 202 . FIG. 202 is a time chart showing the combined use of the count suppression period A and the immediate short winning symbol invalid period.

As shown in FIG. 202, in the count valid period, since the immediate short per symbol valid period is generated at the same time, in such a count valid period, when it becomes an immediate short hit, low probability time saving state Controlled to C.

Further, in the count suppression period A, an immediate short winning symbol invalid period is generated at the same time. That is, in the count suppression period A, when it becomes an immediate short hit, it is not controlled to the low probability time saving state C, and the low probability non-time saving state is maintained as the game state before becoming an immediate short hit. there is Here, during the execution of the special symbol variation display D, which is during the execution of the first special symbol variation display, in the count suppression period A and the immediate short winning symbol invalid period, an effect corresponding to the variation pattern is performed. When doing so, a common effect that is the same as the variable display A to C of the special symbols in the count valid period and the background image is executed. On the other hand, in the count suppression period A and the immediate short winning symbol invalid period, during the execution of the special symbol variation display E etc. during the second and subsequent special symbol variation display, the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is performed. At the time of execution, a pinch effect 2 (ineffective corresponding effect) that suggests that it is a count suppression period A and an immediate short winning symbol invalid period is executed.

On the other hand, during the count suppression period B, the immediate short winning symbol invalid period is not generated at the same time. That is, in the count suppression period B, when it becomes an immediate short hit, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C. Here, in the count suppression period B, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is executed. When the effect corresponding to the pattern is executed, the common effect that is the same as the background image and the like in the variable displays F to H of the special symbol during the valid counting period is executed.

As described above, for the count suppression period B, in the low probability non-time saving state, enter the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, when performing the variable display of the special symbol, the main control board 1310 is counted down, and updated so as to move away from the number of relief counter=600 that will be controlled to the low-probability short working hours state B. That is, for the count suppression period B, the relief number counter = 600, which will be controlled to the low probability time saving state B, and then it becomes difficult to reach the relief number counter = 600, so from the count suppression period A is also an unfavorable period. Then, in the count suppression period B, if the immediate short winning symbol invalid period is generated at the same time, not only it becomes difficult to reach the relief number counter = 600, but even if it becomes an immediate short winning, it will be low. It is no longer controlled to the probability of short working hours state C, and the probability of obtaining a low probability of short working hours state (low probability of short working hours state B, low probability of short working hours state C) becomes extremely low. In this regard, in this example, in the count suppression period B, by not causing the immediate short winning symbol invalid period to occur at the same time, it is possible to prevent an extremely disadvantageous period from occurring.

[Regarding the priority of RTC production]
In this example, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 acquires calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and controls the peripherals. Current calendar information and current time information are set in the RAM of the IC. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, using such RTC (real time clock) information, every time a predetermined period (for example, 3 hours) elapses after the power is turned on, a symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is generated. Separately, the RTC effect is executed. In this RTC effect, the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the light emission of the lamp, and the sound output are used to execute a dedicated effect different from the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern). Therefore, it is possible to provide enjoyment different from the pattern variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern), and it is possible to expect that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 increases.

The RTC production and the pattern variation production (production corresponding to the variation pattern) are both executed by the production display of the production display device 1600, the movement of the movable bodies A to C, the light emission of the lamp, and the sound output. The production elements used are duplicated (at least partially duplicated). Here, since the RTC effect is to be executed every time a predetermined period (for example, 3 hours) elapses after the power is turned on, the execution timing of the RTC effect and the low probability time saving state B will be controlled. The execution timing of the effect before and after the pattern variation display reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600) may overlap. Similarly, the execution timing of the production before and after the immediate short hit to be controlled to the low probability time saving state C may overlap. In such a case, priority is given to the execution of the RTC production, and the production before and after the variable display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) and part of the production before and after the immediate short win are restricted. I am trying to Here, first, after explaining the RTC effect and the effect before and after the variable display of special symbols reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600), the variable display of special symbols reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600). A case where the start condition of the RTC effect is met before reaching, and a case where the start condition of the RTC effect is met after the variable display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600) will be explained. After explaining the performance before and after the immediate short winning, when the conditions for starting the RTC performance are established before the immediate short winning, and when the conditions for starting the RTC performance are established after the immediate short winning. will be explained.

FIG. 203 is a time chart showing the progress of the RTC presentation. As shown in FIG. 203, before t1 when a predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) has passed since the power was turned on and the conditions for starting the RTC effect are satisfied, the RTC effect is not executed, and the symbol variation effect ( The production corresponding to the variation pattern) is in a normal production state in which execution is possible. In the normal effect state, when the symbol variation (for example, symbol variation A) is executed, the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is executed as the symbol variation effect. In the pattern variation effect, the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the movement of the movable bodies A to C, the light emission of the lamp, the light emission of the sound, etc. are set to a variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310, Based on the variation pattern, the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the motion of the movable bodies A to C, the light emission of the lamp, the light emission of the sound, and the like are executed.

Incidentally, the effect display device 1600 executes the variable display of the decorative symbols as the symbol variable effect, and also executes the effect display suggesting the result of the lottery. Further, the movable bodies A to C are made to move at a predetermined timing in conjunction with the effect display suggesting the result of the lottery. Further, in the lamp light emission, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit light at a predetermined timing in conjunction with the effect display suggesting the result of the lottery. In the audio output, BGM is output from the speaker during the effect display suggesting the result of the lottery.

Next, at t1, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) has passed since the power was turned on and the conditions for starting the RTC presentation are established, the RTC presentation state is set to execute the RTC presentation. When t1 arrives during execution of the symbol variation B, the execution of the symbol variation performance is restricted and the RTC performance is preferentially executed. In the RTC effect, the effect contents for the RTC are executed with respect to the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the motion of the movable bodies A to C, the light emission of the lamp, the light emission of the sound, and the like. Note that the RTC effect state continues execution until t4 when the end condition of the RTC effect is satisfied after a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has passed from t1 when the condition for starting the RTC effect is satisfied. , the RTC presentation state is shifted to the normal presentation state.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 first executes an RTC countdown display that counts down (for example, 3→2→1) until the start of the RTC effect from t1 to t2. The RTC countdown display starts at t1 regardless of the pattern variation and ends at t2 after 3 seconds have elapsed from t1 regardless of the pattern variation. That is, the RTC countdown display is performed for three seconds from t1 to t2. During the period from t2 to tx, the RTC start display is executed to notify the start of the RTC presentation. Regarding the RTC start display, it starts at t2 without depending on the pattern variation, is executed at least from t2 to t3 when 5 seconds have passed, and depends on the pattern variation, the first pattern variation after t3 (symbol variation D) ends at the time tx when D) starts. That is, the RTC start display is executed for a variable time of 5 seconds+α from t2 to tx. If there is a period after t3 when the symbol variation (symbol variation performance) is not started, the RTC start display is finished after waiting for the symbol variation D to start after t3.

The effect display device 1600 executes the RTC effect display that is not executed except for the RTC effect from tx to t4 when the RTC effect end condition is satisfied. Since the effect display for RTC is to be started after waiting for the first pattern variation (symbol variation D) to start after t3, the symbol variation D is to be started early after t3. It is possible to make the player play the game with desire.

As for the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are made to move sequentially in accordance with the execution of the RTC start display on the effect display device 1600 from t2 to t3. Specifically, from t2 to t3, the RTC start operation of the movable body A, the RTC start operation of the movable body B, and the RTC start operation of the movable body C are sequentially executed. On the other hand, in the RTC rendering state t1 to t4, except for the period of t2 to t3, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the RTC rendering, and the movable bodies A to C are in the symbol variation rendering (fluctuation The action specified in the production corresponding to the pattern) is being performed.

In addition, in lamp light emission, the LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit light in the light emission pattern for RTC during the period from t1 to t4 as the RTC effect is executed. . Also, in audio output, BGM for RTC is output from a speaker during the period from t1 to t4 as the RTC effect is executed.

(Limitation of help mode L production)
FIG. 204 is a time chart showing the progress of the effect before and after the variable display of special symbols reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600). As shown in FIG. 204, after the power is turned on with RAM clearing or after the execution of the jackpot game, when the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), symbol variation B is executed. , at the time of t5 when the symbol variation B is stopped, the low-probability non-time-saving state transitions to the low-probability time-saving state B. In addition, before t5, the help mode L precursor effect state is set to execute the "help mode L precursor effect" suggesting that the "help mode L" is imminent. , to the help mode L presentation state for executing the "help mode L presentation" indicating that the "help mode L" is being executed. In this example, the number of fluctuations in the special design in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), so that the fluctuation display of the special design reaches 700 times. The period of control to such a low probability time saving state B is called "help mode L". Then, the help mode L production state is the point of time t6 when the 700th symbol variation X is stopped when the special symbol variation display in the low probability time saving state B reaches 700 times and the big hit does not occur. In the case of a big hit, at the time of t6 when the pattern variation that becomes the big hit is stopped, the low-probability time-saving state B shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving state, and the help mode L production state is changed to the normal production state. are expected to migrate to

In the above-described effect example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern in the effect display device 1600 is stopped, until the variable display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500 to 600 times, the number of fluctuations in the special symbol in the low probability state A count effect for notifying how many times has been reached is executed, and such a count effect corresponds to the "help mode L omen effect". In addition, after starting the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, the effect display device 1600 displays "in help mode L" indicating that the low-probability time-saving state B is under control, but such corresponds to the "help mode L effect".

Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, before t5, the countdown until the start of the help mode L effect ) is executed. Then, after t5, the effect display for the help mode L indicating that the help mode L is being executed (during control of the low-probability time-saving state B) is executed. It should be noted that even if there is a period (for example, between the symbol variation C and the symbol variation D) in which the symbol variation (symbol variation effect) does not start after t5, during that period, the effect for the help mode L Display is running continuously.

In addition, regarding the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the help mode L precursor effect before t5 and the help mode L effect after t5, and the symbol variation effect (variation The action specified in the production corresponding to the pattern) is being performed.

In addition, in the lamp light emission, before t5, with the execution of the help mode L omen effect, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are illuminated in the light emission pattern for the help mode L omen. , and after t5, light is emitted in the light emission pattern for the help mode L along with the execution of the help mode L effect. In the audio output, before t5, BGM for the help mode L precursor is output from the speaker along with the execution of the help mode L precursor effect, and after t5, the help mode L effect is output. , BGM for the help mode L is output from the speaker.

FIG. 205 is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when the condition for starting the RTC effect is established before the variable display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600). In this example, at time t1 when a predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) has passed since the power was turned on and the conditions for starting the RTC effect are established, the help mode L precursor effect state or the help mode L effect state is established. It is determined whether it is in a normal presentation state other than the help mode L precursor presentation state or the help mode L presentation state. In the above description, the case where it is determined to be in the normal effect state at time t1 will be described. Below, the case in which it is determined to be in the help mode L precursor effect state or the help mode L effect state at time t1 will be described. Explaining.

As shown in FIG. 205, at the time t1 at which the condition for starting the RTC effect is established, if the help mode L predictive effect state is reached, the help mode L predictive effect state is shifted to the RTC effect state. there is Further, after power-on accompanied by RAM clearing or execution of a jackpot game, when executing symbol variation B, the variation display of special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue number counter = 600), symbol variation B At the time of t5, which is the time of stopping, the low probability non-shortening working hours state is shifted to the low probability short working hours state B.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 counts down until the start of the help mode L effect at time t1 (for example, a count effect that notifies how many times the special symbol changes in the low probability state). Effect display for the help mode L is being executed, and from t1 to t5 when the symbol variation B stops when the variation display of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600). During this time, the effect display for the help mode L omen is continuously executed. Then, after t5, since it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C, the effect display for the help mode L indicating that the help mode L is being executed (low probability time saving state B is being controlled) Running. That is, during the period from t1 to tx, the RTC countdown display and the RTC start display as RTC effects are not executed.

Further, in the effect display device 1600, during the period from tx to t4 when the end condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, in addition to the effect display for the help mode L, the effect display for the RTC which is not executed except for the RTC effect is displayed. running The effect display for RTC is started after waiting for the first symbol variation (symbol variation D) to start after t3. In such a state, for example, the entire display area is used to perform the effect display for RTC, and in the upper left part of the display area indicates that the low probability time saving state B is under control "In help mode L" The effect display for the help mode L is executed so as to display .

Further, as for the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are made to operate sequentially even though the RTC start display is not executed on the effect display device 1600 from t2 to t3. Specifically, from t2 to t3, the RTC start operation of the movable body A, the RTC start operation of the movable body B, and the RTC start operation of the movable body C are sequentially executed. In this way, during the execution of the symbol variation B, the variation display of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600), and when t2 for starting the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C arrives. 2, the motion designated by the pattern variation effect (the effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is terminated, and the RTC start motion of the movable bodies A to C is forcibly started. Then, during the execution of the RTC start motion of the movable bodies A to C, when the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), and when the symbol variation B stops, t5 arrives. , the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C being executed is continued without ending. Further, among t1 to t4, which are in the RTC effect state, for t2 to t3, the motions specified by the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) are not executed with respect to the movable bodies A to C. , Except for the period of t2 to t3, the movable objects A to C are not used in the RTC production, and the movements specified in the symbol variation production (production corresponding to the variation pattern) for the movable objects A to C running

In addition, in the lamp light emission, although the RTC countdown display and the RTC start display are not executed on the effect display device 1600 from t1 to t3, various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are mounted. The LEDs that are being used are made to emit light in the light emission pattern for RTC, and until t4, they continue to emit light in the light emission pattern for RTC. In other words, during the period from t1 to t3, even though the effect display for the help mode L omen and the effect display for the help mode L are executed on the effect display device 1600, the game board 5 and the door The LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates of the frame 3 do not emit light in the light emission pattern for the help mode L omen or the light emission pattern for the help mode L. In the audio output, even though the effect display device 1600 does not perform the RTC countdown display or the RTC start display from t1 to t3, BGM for RTC is output from the speaker, and t4. Until then, BGM for RTC is continuously output. In other words, during the period from t1 to t3, even though the effect display for the help mode L omen and the effect display for the help mode L are executed on the effect display device 1600, the help mode is displayed from the speaker. The BGM for the L omen and the BGM for the help mode L are not output.

As described above, during the execution of the RTC start motion of the movable bodies A to C, t5 is the time when the symbol variation B stops when the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600). When it arrives, the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C being executed is continued without ending. As a result, during the period from t1 to t2, the effect display device 1600 does not perform the RTC start display, but the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C can be performed without ending in the middle. , the start of the RTC presentation can be notified to the outside, and the start of the RTC presentation can be prevented from being unrecognized.

In addition, the RTC effect and the pattern variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) are both effect display of the effect display device 1600, movement of the movable bodies A to C, lamp emission, and sound output. Rendering elements used for rendering are duplicated (at least partially duplicated). At this time, if the help mode L precursor effect state is reached at the time t1 when the RTC effect start condition is satisfied, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 used in the help mode L precursor effect is as follows. While it is being executed, the execution of the actions of the movable bodies A to C, the light emission of the lamps, and the sound output used in the help mode L omen effect is restricted. That is, the execution of some of the effect elements used in the help mode L omen effect is restricted. Similarly, after t1, if t5, which is the time when the symbol variation B stops, reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) of the special symbol variation display in the low probability state, help mode L production. Regarding the effect display of the effect display device 1600 used in the help mode L effect, while it is being executed, the operation of the movable bodies A to C used in the help mode L effect, Execution of lamp lighting and sound output is restricted. That is, the execution of some of the effect elements used in the help mode L effect is restricted. As a result, from the time t1 when the conditions for starting the RTC effect are established, the actions of the movable bodies A to C, the light emission of the lamps, and the sound output can be used in the RTC effect. It is possible to notify that the RTC presentation is being executed, and to prevent the execution of the RTC presentation from being unrecognized.

On the other hand, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 is used in the help mode L precursor effect and the help mode L effect from the time t1 at which the RTC effect start condition is established. Since the effect display device 1600 is provided in the central part of the game board 5, it is the part that the player pays most attention to. And since the help mode L effect display is executed, the variable display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) and it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B without overlooking, It is possible to prevent that the control start of the low probability time saving state B is not recognized.

As the movable bodies A to C, there are movable bodies that can be contacted by the player and movable bodies that cannot be contacted by the player. Specifically, the movable body A is an upper back front effect unit 3300 attached to the game board 5, the movable body B is a lower back front effect unit 3400 attached to the game board 5, and these movable bodies are movable. The body is made inaccessible to the player. On the other hand, the movable body C is the effect operation section 301 of the effect operation unit 300 attached to the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, and can be touched by the player. Then, the movable bodies A to C sequentially execute the RTC start motion during the execution of the RTC effect, so that each movable body operates. Here, the movable bodies A to C are monitored to see if they operate normally. There is a high possibility that C will not work properly. For this reason, during the execution of the RTC effect, if an abnormality occurs in which the movable body C does not operate normally, the effect elements used in the help mode L precursor effect and the help mode L effect are given as a penalty to the player. We are trying to extend the period that restricts the execution of some of them. In other words, even after t4 when the end condition of the RTC production is satisfied, the state where the execution of some of the production elements used in the help mode L premonition production and the help mode L production is restricted continues. I have to. In addition, as a penalty for the player, in the state where the execution of some of the effect elements used in the help mode L precursor effect and the help mode L effect is restricted, the degree of restriction may be strengthened. For example, during the execution of the RTC effect, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 whose execution is not restricted as the help mode L precursor effect or the help mode L effect may also be limited in execution. . As described above, when an abnormality occurs in which the movable body C does not operate normally during the execution of the RTC effect, a penalty is given to the player so that the player does not mischief with the movable body C. can work.

FIG. 206 is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when the conditions for starting the RTC effect are satisfied after the variable display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600). As shown in FIG. 206, at the time t1 at which the condition for starting the RTC effect is established, if the help mode L effect state is reached, the help mode L effect state is shifted to the RTC effect state. Moreover, when t1 when the start condition of RTC production|presentation is satisfied arrives, it is already controlled by the low probability time saving state B. FIG.

Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, at the time of t1, the effect display for the help mode L indicating that the help mode L is being executed (controlling the low probability time saving state B) is executed. However, during the period from t1 to t2, in addition to the effect display for the help mode L, the RTC countdown display that counts down (for example, 3→2→1) until the start of the RTC effect is executed. Also, during the period from t2 to tx, the RTC start display is executed to notify the start of the RTC presentation. Between tx and tx, during the period from tx to t4 when the end condition of the RTC effect is met, in addition to the effect display for the help mode L, no other effect than the RTC effect is executed. A presentation display for RTC is being executed. The effect display for RTC is started after waiting for the first symbol variation (symbol variation D) to start after t3. In such a state, for example, the RTC countdown display, RTC start display, and RTC effect display are performed using the entire display area, and the low probability time saving state B is being controlled in the upper left part of the display area. Effect display for the help mode L is executed so as to display "in help mode L".

As for the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are made to move sequentially in accordance with the execution of the RTC start display on the effect display device 1600 from t2 to t3. Specifically, from t2 to t3, the RTC start operation of the movable body A, the RTC start operation of the movable body B, and the RTC start operation of the movable body C are sequentially executed. In this way, during the execution of the help mode L (during the control of the low probability time saving state B) during the execution of the symbol variation B, when t2 to start the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C arrives, The action designated by the pattern variation effect (the effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is ended, and the RTC start motion of the movable bodies A to C is forcibly started. Further, among t1 to t4, which are in the RTC effect state, for t2 to t3, the motion specified by the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is not executed for the movable bodies A to C. , Except for the period of t2 to t3, the movable objects A to C are not used in the RTC production, and the movements specified by the symbol variation production (production corresponding to the variation pattern) for the movable objects A to C running

In addition, in lamp light emission, the LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit light in the light emission pattern for RTC during the period from t1 to t4 as the RTC effect is executed. . That is, between t1 and t3, even though the effect display for the help mode L is executed in the effect display device 1600, various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are installed. LED is not emitting light in the light emission pattern for help mode L. Also, in audio output, BGM for RTC is output from a speaker during the period from t1 to t4 as the RTC effect is executed. In other words, during the period from t1 to t3, the BGM for the help mode L is not output from the speaker even though the effect display for the help mode L is executed on the effect display device 1600.

As described above, the RTC effect and the pattern variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) are both the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the movement of the movable bodies A to C, the light emission of the lamp, and the sound output. , and the production elements used for production are duplicated (at least partially duplicated). At this time, if the help mode L effect state is reached at the time t1 when the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 used in the help mode L effect is executed. On the other hand, the operation of the movable bodies A to C used in the help mode L effect, the light emission of the lamp, and the sound output are restricted. That is, the execution of some of the effect elements used in the help mode L effect is restricted. As a result, from the time t1 when the conditions for starting the RTC effect are established, the actions of the movable bodies A to C, the light emission of the lamps, and the sound output can be used in the RTC effect. It is possible to inform that the RTC presentation is being executed, and prevent the execution of the RTC presentation from being unrecognized.

On the other hand, during the execution of the help mode L (during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B), from the time t1 when the condition for starting the RTC effect is satisfied, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 is the help mode L used in the performance. Since the effect display device 1600 is provided in the central part of the game board 5, it is the part that the player pays most attention to. Since it is executed, it is not overlooked that the help mode L is being executed (low probability time saving state B is being controlled), and the help mode L is being executed (low probability time saving state B is being controlled). It is possible to prevent that the effect is not recognized.

(Limitation of help mode S production)
FIG. 207 is a time chart showing the performance progress before and after the instant short hit. As shown in FIG. 207, in the case of executing the symbol variation B that becomes an immediate short hit, at the time t5 when the symbol variation B is stopped, the low probability non-time saving state is shifted to the low probability time saving state C. there is In addition, before t5, during the execution of the symbol variation B that becomes an immediate short hit, the help mode S that executes the "help mode S premonition effect" suggesting that the "help mode S" will be entered. In contrast to the foreshadowing state, from t5, the state shifts to the help mode S effect state in which the "help mode S effect" indicating that the "help mode S" is being executed is executed. In this example, by becoming an immediate short hit, until the fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches 20 to 100 times, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C, such a low probability time saving state C The period during which the control is performed is called "help mode S". And, in the help mode S effect state, until the fluctuation display of the special pattern reaches 20 to 100 times in the low-probability time-saving state C, if the big hit does not occur, the 20th to 100th pattern fluctuation X is stopped. At a certain time t6, when the big hit is achieved, at the time t6 when the pattern variation that becomes the big hit is stopped, the low-probability time-saving state C shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving state, and the help mode S production state. It is designed to shift from to the normal production state.

In the above-mentioned production example, as the pattern fluctuation production (production corresponding to the fluctuation pattern) that becomes an immediate short hit, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed, and the production display that stops at the stop design of the immediate short hit is executed. , Such an immediate short winning symbol variation effect corresponds to "help mode S omen effect". In addition, after starting the control of the low-probability time-saving state C, the effect display device 1600 displays "in help mode S" indicating that the low-probability time-saving state C is under control, but such corresponds to the "help mode S effect".

Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, before t5, during the execution of the symbol variation B that becomes an immediate short hit, the effect display for the help mode S precursor is executed as the symbol variation effect. After t5, the effect display for the help mode S indicating that the help mode S is being executed (the low-probability time saving state C is being controlled) is executed. It should be noted that even if there is a period (for example, between the symbol variation C and the symbol variation D) in which the symbol variation (symbol variation effect) does not start after t5, during that period, the effect for the help mode S Display is running continuously.

In addition, regarding the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the help mode S effect after t5, and the action specified in the pattern variation effect (the effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is executed. are doing.

In addition, in the lamp light emission, before t5, along with the execution of the help mode S precursor effect during the execution of the symbol variation B that becomes an immediate short hit, it is mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3. The LED is made to emit light in the light emission pattern for the help mode S omen, and after t5, it is made to emit light in the light emission pattern for the help mode S along with the execution of the help mode S presentation. In addition, in the voice output, before t5, BGM for the help mode S omen is output from the speaker along with the execution of the help mode S omen effect during the execution of the symbol variation B that becomes an immediate short hit. After t5, BGM for the help mode S is output from the speaker along with the execution of the help mode S effect.

FIG. 208 is a time chart showing the progress of the performance when the conditions for starting the RTC performance are met before the immediate short win. In this example, at time t1 when a predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) has passed since the power was turned on and the conditions for starting the RTC effect are established, the help mode S precursor effect state or the help mode S effect state is established. It is determined whether it is in a normal effect state other than the help mode S premonition effect state or the help mode S effect state. In the above description, the case where it is determined to be in the normal effect state at time t1 will be described. Below, the case in which it is determined to be in the help mode S precursor effect state or the help mode S effect state at time t1 will be described. Explaining.

As shown in FIG. 208, at the time t1 at which the RTC effect start condition is established, if the help mode S precursor effect state is reached, the help mode S precursor effect state is shifted to the RTC effect state. there is In addition, when executing the symbol variation B that becomes an immediate short hit, the low probability non-time saving state changes to the low probability time saving state C at time t5 when the symbol variation B is stopped.

Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, at time t1, the effect display for help mode S omen is being executed as a symbol variation effect, and from t1, when the symbol variation B that becomes an immediate short win is stopped. Until a certain time t5, the effect display for the help mode S sign is continuously executed. And after t5, since it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C, the effect display for the help mode S indicating that the help mode S is being executed (controlling the low probability time saving state C) Running. That is, during the period from t1 to tx, the RTC countdown display and the RTC start display as RTC effects are not executed.

Further, in the effect display device 1600, in addition to the effect display for the help mode S, during the period from tx to t4 when the end condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, the effect display for the RTC which is not executed except for the RTC effect is displayed. running The effect display for RTC is started after waiting for the pattern variation (symbol variation D) to start after t3. In such a state, for example, the display for the RTC is executed using the entire display area, indicating that the low-probability time-saving state C is being controlled in the upper left part of the display area "In help mode S" The effect display for the help mode S is executed so as to display .

Further, as for the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are made to operate sequentially even though the RTC start display is not executed on the effect display device 1600 from t2 to t3. Specifically, from t2 to t3, the RTC start operation of the movable body A, the RTC start operation of the movable body B, and the RTC start operation of the movable body C are sequentially executed. In this way, during the execution of the symbol variation B that becomes an immediate short win, when the time t2 for starting the RTC start motion of the movable bodies A to C arrives, the symbol variation effect (the effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is specified. , and forcibly starts the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C. Then, during the execution of the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C, when t5, which is the time to stop the symbol variation B that becomes an immediate short hit, arrives, the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C being executed is started. I'm trying to keep it running without terminating. Further, among t1 to t4, which are in the RTC effect state, for t2 to t3, the motion specified by the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is not executed for the movable bodies A to C. , Except for the period of t2 to t3, the movable objects A to C are not used in the RTC production, and the movements specified by the symbol variation production (production corresponding to the variation pattern) for the movable objects A to C running

In addition, in the lamp light emission, although the RTC countdown display and the RTC start display are not executed on the effect display device 1600 from t1 to t3, various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are mounted. The LEDs that are being used are made to emit light in the light emission pattern for RTC, and until t4, they continue to emit light in the light emission pattern for RTC. In other words, during the period from t1 to t3, even though the effect display for the help mode S precursor and the effect display for the help mode S are executed on the effect display device 1600, the game board 5 and the door The LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the frame 3 do not emit light in the light emission pattern for the sign of the help mode S or the light emission pattern for the help mode S. In the audio output, even though the effect display device 1600 does not perform the RTC countdown display or the RTC start display from t1 to t3, BGM for RTC is output from the speaker, and t4. Until then, BGM for RTC is continuously output. In other words, during the period from t1 to t3, even though the effect display for the help mode S omen and the effect display for the help mode S are executed on the effect display device 1600, the help mode is displayed from the speaker. The BGM for the S omen and the BGM for the help mode S are not output.

As described above, during the execution of the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C, when t5, which is the time to stop the symbol variation B that becomes an immediate short hit, comes, the RTC of the movable bodies A to C being executed The start operation continues to run without finishing. As a result, during the period from t1 to t2, the effect display device 1600 does not perform the RTC start display, but the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C can be performed without ending in the middle. , the start of the RTC presentation can be notified to the outside, and the start of the RTC presentation can be prevented from being unrecognized.

In addition, the RTC effect and the pattern variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) are both effect display of the effect display device 1600, movement of the movable bodies A to C, lamp emission, and sound output. Rendering elements used for rendering are duplicated (at least partially duplicated). At this time, if the help mode S precursor effect state is reached at the time t1 when the RTC effect start condition is satisfied, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 used in the help mode S precursor effect is as follows. While it is being executed, the execution of the actions of the movable bodies A to C, the light emission of the lamp, and the sound output used in the help mode S omen effect is restricted. That is, the execution of some of the effect elements used in the help mode S omen effect is restricted. Similarly, after t1, when t5, which is the stopping time of the symbol variation B that becomes an immediate short hit, comes, it is the timing to execute the help mode S effect, but it is used in the help mode S effect. While the effect display of the effect display device 1600 is executed, the operation of the movable bodies A to C used in the help mode S effect, the light emission of the lamp, and the sound output are restricted. In other words, the execution of some of the effect elements used in the help mode S effect is restricted. As a result, from the time t1 when the conditions for starting the RTC effect are established, the actions of the movable bodies A to C, the light emission of the lamps, and the sound output can be used in the RTC effect. It is possible to notify that the RTC presentation is being executed, and to prevent the execution of the RTC presentation from being unrecognized.

On the other hand, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 is used in the help mode S precursor effect and the help mode S effect from the time t1 at which the RTC effect start condition is established. Since the effect display device 1600 is provided in the central portion of the game board 5, it is the part that the player pays the most attention to. Since the performance display of the help mode S is executed, the fact that the control to the low-probability time-saving state C is to be controlled by the immediate short hit is not overlooked, and the control start of the low-probability time-saving state C is prevented from being unrecognized. be able to.

As the movable bodies A to C, there are movable bodies that can be contacted by the player and movable bodies that cannot be contacted by the player. Specifically, the movable body A is an upper back front effect unit 3300 attached to the game board 5, the movable body B is a lower back front effect unit 3400 attached to the game board 5, and these movable bodies are movable. The body is made inaccessible to the player. On the other hand, the movable body C is the effect operation section 301 of the effect operation unit 300 attached to the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, and can be touched by the player. Then, the movable bodies A to C sequentially execute the RTC start motion during the execution of the RTC effect, so that each movable body operates. Here, the movable bodies A to C are monitored to see if they operate normally. There is a high possibility that C will not work properly. For this reason, during the execution of the RTC effect, if an abnormality occurs in which the movable body C does not operate normally, the effect elements used in the help mode S precursor effect and the help mode S effect are given as a penalty to the player. We are trying to extend the period that restricts the execution of some of them. In other words, even after t4 when the end condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, the state where the execution of some of the effect elements used in the help mode S premonitory effect and the help mode S effect is restricted continues. I have to. In addition, as a penalty for the player, if the execution of some of the effect elements used in the help mode S omen effect and the help mode S effect is restricted, the degree of restriction will be strengthened. For example, during the execution of the RTC effect, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 whose execution is not restricted as the help mode S premonition effect or the help mode S effect may also be limited in execution. . As described above, when an abnormality occurs in which the movable body C does not operate normally during the execution of the RTC effect, a penalty is given to the player so that the player does not mischief with the movable body C. can work.

FIG. 209 is a time chart showing the progress of the performance when the conditions for starting the RTC performance are established after the immediate short win. As shown in FIG. 209, at the time t1 at which the condition for starting the RTC effect is established, if the help mode S effect state is reached, the help mode S effect state is shifted to the RTC effect state. Moreover, when t1 when the start condition of RTC production|presentation is satisfied arrives, it is already controlled by the low probability time saving state C. FIG.

Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, at the time of t1, the effect display for the help mode S indicating that the help mode S is being executed (controlling the low probability time saving state C) is performed. However, during the period from t1 to t2, in addition to the effect display for the help mode S, an RTC countdown display that counts down (for example, 3→2→1) until the start of the RTC effect is executed. Also, during the period from t2 to tx, the RTC start display is executed to notify the start of the RTC presentation. Between tx and tx, during the period from tx to t4 when the end condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, in addition to the effect display for the help mode S, nothing other than the RTC effect is executed. A presentation display for RTC is being executed. The effect display for RTC is started after waiting for the first symbol variation (symbol variation D) to start after t3. In such a state, for example, the entire display area is used to perform RTC countdown display, RTC start display, and RTC effect display, and in the upper left part of the display area, it is indicated that the low probability time saving state C is being controlled. Effect display for the help mode S is executed so as to display "in help mode S".

As for the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are made to move sequentially in accordance with the execution of the RTC start display on the effect display device 1600 from t2 to t3. Specifically, from t2 to t3, the RTC start operation of the movable body A, the RTC start operation of the movable body B, and the RTC start operation of the movable body C are sequentially executed. In this way, during the execution of the help mode S (during the control of the low probability time saving state C) during the execution of the symbol variation B, when t2 to start the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C arrives, The action designated by the pattern variation effect (the effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is ended, and the RTC start motion of the movable bodies A to C is forcibly started. Further, among t1 to t4, which are in the RTC effect state, for t2 to t3, the motion specified by the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is not executed for the movable bodies A to C. , Except for the period of t2 to t3, the movable objects A to C are not used in the RTC production, and the movements specified by the symbol variation production (production corresponding to the variation pattern) for the movable objects A to C running

In addition, in lamp light emission, the LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit light in the light emission pattern for RTC during the period from t1 to t4 as the RTC effect is executed. . That is, between t1 and t3, even though the effect display for the help mode S is executed in the effect display device 1600, the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are mounted on various decorative substrates. LED is not emitting light in the light emission pattern for help mode S. Also, in audio output, BGM for RTC is output from a speaker during the period from t1 to t4 as the RTC effect is executed. In other words, during the period from t1 to t3, BGM for the help mode S is not output from the speaker even though the effect display for the help mode S is being executed on the effect display device 1600. FIG.

As described above, the RTC effect and the pattern variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) are both the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the movement of the movable bodies A to C, the light emission of the lamp, and the sound output. , and the production elements used for production are duplicated (at least partially duplicated). At this time, if the help mode S effect state is reached at the time t1 when the RTC effect start condition is established, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 used in the help mode S effect is executed. On the other hand, the actions of the movable bodies A to C used in the help mode S effect, the light emission of the lamps, and the voice output are restricted. In other words, the execution of some of the effect elements used in the help mode S effect is restricted. As a result, from the time t1 when the conditions for starting the RTC effect are established, the actions of the movable bodies A to C, the light emission of the lamps, and the sound output can be used in the RTC effect. It is possible to notify that the RTC presentation is being executed, and to prevent the execution of the RTC presentation from being unrecognized.

On the other hand, during the execution of the help mode S (during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C), from the time t1 when the conditions for starting the RTC effect are satisfied, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 is the help mode S used in the performance. Since the effect display device 1600 is provided in the central part of the game board 5, it is the part that the player pays the most attention to, and for such a effect display device 1600, the help mode S effect display is displayed. Since it is executed, the fact that the help mode S is being executed (low probability time saving state C being controlled) is not overlooked, and the help mode S is being executed (low probability time saving state C being controlled) It is possible to prevent that the effect is not recognized.

(Restriction of help mode L omen production)
As explained with reference to FIG. 204, after turning on the power with clearing the RAM or after executing a jackpot game, when executing the symbol variation B, the variation display of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600). In , at the time of t5 when the symbol variation B is stopped, the low-probability non-time-saving state transitions to the low-probability time-saving state B. In addition, before t5, the help mode L precursor effect state is set to execute the "help mode L precursor effect" suggesting that the "help mode L" is imminent. , to the help mode L presentation state for executing the "help mode L presentation" indicating that the "help mode L" is being executed. In this example, the number of fluctuations in the special design in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), so that the fluctuation display of the special design reaches 700 times. The period of control to such a low probability time saving state B is called "help mode L".

In the above-described effect example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern in the effect display device 1600 is stopped, until the variable display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500 to 600 times, the number of fluctuations in the special symbol in the low probability state A count effect for notifying how many times has been reached is executed, and such a count effect corresponds to the "help mode L omen effect". With respect to such a count effect, the main control board 1310 counts up the relief number counter when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops in a low probability state, and the main control board 1310 sends the peripheral control board 1510 information on the relief number counter (relief count command ), so that the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp how many times the special symbols have changed in the low probability state, and when the special symbols (decorative symbols) are stopped, the low probability A count effect is executed to notify how many times the number of times the special symbol has changed in the state. That is, the count effect is executed as the effect determined by the peripheral control board 1510 separately from the effect indicated by the variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310 .

In this example, after turning on the power with clearing the RAM or after executing the jackpot game, the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) In the case of executing symbol variation B, the main control As the variation pattern determined by the substrate 1310, the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect can be determined. Here, in the case where the special symbol variation display in the low probability state does not reach 600 times (relief number counter = 600), when the symbol variation is executed, the variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310 is the normal variation. The pattern is determined, and the variation pattern for the help mode L omen effect is not determined. Then, when the variation pattern for the help mode L omen effect is determined, the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state is executed only with the symbol variation B reaching 600 times (rescue number counter = 600). It is possible to know in advance that the "help mode L" that is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state B will be executed by executing the help mode L precursor effect.

In addition, as the "help mode L omen effect", when the above-described count effect is not executed, the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) When executing symbol variation B In addition, when the variation pattern for the help mode L omen production is determined, the production corresponding to the variation pattern (help mode L omen production) is executed to control the low-probability time-saving state B. While it is possible to know in advance that the "help mode L" will be executed, if a normal variation pattern is determined without determining the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect, the variation pattern will be used. It is not possible to know in advance that the 'help mode L' controlled to the low-probability time-saving state B is executed by executing the corresponding performance (performance other than the help mode L precursor performance). In this example, the above-described count effect is not executed as the "help mode L omen effect". You may perform a performance. In addition, in this example, when the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) and symbol variation B is executed, the variation pattern for help mode L omen effect can be determined. However, it is sufficient if the symbol variation is before the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600). 500 to 600 times), the variation pattern for the help mode L foreshadowing may be determined.

In addition, in this example, when the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), when symbol variation B is executed, the variation pattern for help mode L omen effect (specific variation pattern ) is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a specific variation pattern execution button (not shown), which is a special operation unit for determining . In addition, the specific variation pattern execution button may be any operation unit provided in a place where the player cannot operate and visually recognize it, apart from the power switch 630a related to turning on the power. Examples include a switch-type operation unit, or a type operation unit operated by inserting a special tool (thin rod, etc.) or a key possessed by an administrator. Of these, if the operation unit is operated by inserting a special tool (such as a thin stick) possessed by the administrator or by inserting a key, unintentional erroneous operations in the hall can be suppressed.

Specifically, when the specific variation pattern execution button is operated when the power is turned on, when the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600), when executing the symbol variation B, The variation pattern for help mode L omen production is determined. On the other hand, if the specific variation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, when the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600), when executing symbol variation B, Help mode L A normal variation pattern is determined without determining a variation pattern for the foreshadowing effect. That is, depending on whether or not the hole manager operates the specific variation pattern execution button when the power is turned on, when executing the symbol variation B, the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600) In addition, it is possible to select whether or not to determine the variation pattern for the help mode L omen effect. In this way, when the specific variation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600) When executing symbol variation B , Help mode L The help mode L corresponding to the change pattern for the sign effect is not executed, and the help mode L is being executed with the next pattern change C (low probability time saving state B is being controlled) Since the help mode L effect indicating that is is suddenly executed, it is possible to give a strong impact of giving time saving without getting hit.

In addition, during the execution of the help mode L (during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B), when executing the pattern variation, as a variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310, the variation for the help mode L production determine the pattern. That is, after the start of control of the low-probability time saving state B, the pattern variation until the special symbol variation display in the low-probability time saving state B reaches 700 times determines the variation pattern for the help mode L production. Regarding the variation pattern for this help mode L production, regardless of whether the specific variation pattern execution button is operated when the power is turned on, the help mode L is being executed (low probability time saving state B is being controlled). I am trying to In other words, when the specific variation pattern execution button is operated when the power is turned on, before and after the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600), rather than moving to the low probability time saving state B The help mode L precursor effect is executed before, and the help mode L effect is executed after shifting to the low probability time saving state B. On the other hand, if the specific variation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, before and after the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600), transition to low probability time saving state B The help mode L performance is executed after shifting to the low-probability time-saving state B without executing the help mode L premonition performance before doing so. In this way, when the specific variation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, the help mode L precursor effect is not executed before transitioning to the low-probability time-saving state B, and the low-probability time-saving state Since the help mode L presentation is suddenly executed after the transition to B, it is possible to give a strong impact of saving working hours without getting hit.

Also, when the power switch 630a is operated while operating the RAM clear switch 1310f when the power is turned on, and the power is turned on with RAM clearing, a specific variation pattern different from the RAM clear switch 1310f and the power switch 630a is executed. If the button is not operated when the power is turned on, the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600). No pattern determination (determines normal variation pattern). In other words, depending only on whether or not the hall manager turns on the power with RAM clearing, when executing the symbol variation B, the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600). Since there is no change in whether or not to determine the variation pattern for the help mode L omen effect, when the hall manager operates the specific variation pattern execution button when the power is turned on as necessary and executes the symbol variation B , help mode L makes it possible to determine the variation pattern for the foreshadowing.

In the above, depending on whether or not the hole manager operates the specific variation pattern execution button when the power is turned on, the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) Symbol variation B is executed. In this case, whether or not the variation pattern for the help mode L omen effect is determined is made different, but the configuration may be as follows. Specifically, when the jackpot (jackpot game) has already been obtained after the power is turned on, and after that the variable display of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the 600 When the symbol variation B reaches the times (relief number counter=600), the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect is determined. On the other hand, in a state where a big hit (jackpot game) is not obtained after the power is turned on, if the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the 600 times (relief number Counter = 600), when the pattern variation B is executed, the normal variation pattern is determined without determining the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect. That is, depending on whether a big hit (jackpot game) has already been obtained before the variable display of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600), the 600 times (relief counter = 600) 600), it is made different whether or not to determine the variation pattern for the help mode L omen effect. In such a configuration, it is possible to execute the help mode L precursor effect before moving to the low-probability time-saving state B as a consideration for the already obtained jackpot (jackpot game). It is possible to entertain the mode L omen production.

Also, in the above, if the specific variation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600) When executing symbol variation B In addition, although the normal variation pattern is determined without determining the variation pattern for the help mode L omen effect, the configuration may be as follows. Specifically, after the power is turned on, when the variable display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), it moves from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B. However, in the first low-probability time-saving state B (help mode L) after turning on the power, the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect is determined before transitioning to the low-probability time-saving state B. While there is no (determines the normal fluctuation pattern), in the second and later low-probability time-saving state B (help mode L) after turning on the power, before moving to the low-probability time-saving state B The variation pattern for help mode L omen production is determined. That is, depending on whether it is the first low-probability time-saving state B (help mode L) after power-on, when executing the symbol variation B before transitioning to the low-probability time-saving state B, help It is differentiated whether or not the variation pattern for mode L portent effect is determined. In such a configuration, it is known that in the first low-probability time-saving state B (help mode L) after turning on the power, it is already possible to shift from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B. , In the low-probability time-saving state B (help mode L) after the second time after turning on the power, by newly executing the help mode L precursor effect before moving to the low-probability time-saving state B, the production is It can prevent monotony.

[Regarding resetting the relief counter]
In the above, after turning on the power with clearing the RAM or after executing a jackpot game, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is counted by adding from the initial value "0" using the relief number counter in the main control board 1310. In this way, when the number of fluctuations in the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the low probability time saving state B is controlled. With respect to such a relief number counter, when power is turned on with RAM clearing or when a jackpot game is executed, the count of the number of fluctuations of special symbols in a low probability state is reset. However, regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state, since it is directly linked to whether to transition from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B, whether to reset the count of the relief number counter Regarding the above, it is preferable that the configuration allows the hall manager to make a selection when the power is turned on, regardless of whether the power is turned on with RAM clearing. In this example, a configuration that enables whether or not to reset the counter for the number of repairs when the power is turned on will be described below.

In this example, a relief maintenance button (not shown), which is a special operation unit for resetting the count of the relief number counter when the power is turned on, is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 . It should be noted that, apart from the power switch 630a related to turning on the power, the relief maintenance button may be an operation unit provided at a location where the player cannot operate or visually recognize the operation unit. , or a type of operation unit that is operated by inserting a special tool (such as a thin rod) or a key possessed by the administrator. Of these, if the operation unit is operated by inserting a special tool (such as a thin stick) possessed by the administrator or by inserting a key, unintentional erroneous operations in the hall can be suppressed.

Specifically, when the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on, the count of the number of special symbol variations (relief number counter) in the low probability state is maintained without being reset. On the other hand, when the relief maintenance button is not operated when the power is turned on, the count of the number of variations of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is reset. That is, depending on whether or not the hall manager operates the relief maintenance button, it is possible to select whether or not to reset the count of the number of variations of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state. In this way, when the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on, since the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief counter) is maintained, the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B While the number of times that the special symbols are changed in the low probability state until the transition to , does not need to operate the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on, the number of times the special symbols fluctuate in the low probability state Since the count of (relief number counter) is reset, it is necessary to change the special symbols in the low probability state from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B many times. It is possible to select whether or not to reset according to the environment.

FIG. 210 is a list of RAM clear conditions indicating power-on operations for executing RAM clear. In this example, when the power is turned on (when the power switch 630a is operated), a RAM clear operation is performed by operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, and a setting change operation is performed by turning on the setting key switch 1311a (RAM clear switch). 1310f and the setting key switch 1311a may be turned on.) is performed, execute RAM clear for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and initialize the game state. (Set to low-probability non-time-saving state). In addition, the setting values are stored in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control board 1310a. hour setting value) can be changed. In addition, regarding the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the low probability state (relief number counter), it is stored in the second specific area of the RAM built in the main control board 1310a, and the relief maintenance button is pressed when the power is turned on. When operated, the count can be maintained.

As shown in FIG. 210, during the RAM clear operation, if the relief maintenance button is operated, the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is initialized to initialize the game state. . In addition, since the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 is not backed up when the power is turned off, the rendering state is returned to the initial state. In addition, the setting value is not changed or displayed for confirmation, and the already set setting value (the setting value when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) is maintained. In addition, regarding the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state, the count is maintained. Also, the initialization of the game state is executed at the timing when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation. In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are lit in blue until a predetermined period has elapsed from the timing when the RAM clear signal is determined to be ON. It is made to emit light, and a voice saying "The game state has been cleared. The set value and the number of rescues are maintained." are output from the speaker. Therefore, during the RAM clearing operation, if the relief maintenance button is operated, while maintaining the set value that has already been set, the count for the number of special symbol fluctuations (relief counter) in the low probability state , the count continues from when the power was cut off.

Since the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 is not backed up when the power is turned off, the information about the effect being executed will be lost when the power is turned off. As for the state, it is executed in the initial state, and after waiting for a command relating to the effect to be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the effect state is restored.

Also, during the RAM clearing operation, if the relief maintenance button is not operated, RAM clearing for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed to initialize the game state. In addition, since the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 is not backed up when the power is turned off, the rendering state is returned to the initial state. In addition, the setting value is not changed or displayed for confirmation, and the already set setting value (the setting value when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) is maintained. In addition, regarding the count of the number of variations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state, the count is reset. In addition, initialization of the game state and resetting of the count are executed at the timing when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation. In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are lit in yellow until a predetermined period has passed from the timing when the RAM clear signal is determined to be ON. It is made to emit light, and a voice saying "The game state and the number of rescues have been cleared. The set value is maintained." is output from the speaker. Therefore, during the RAM clear operation, if the relief maintenance button is not operated, while maintaining the set value that has already been set, the number of fluctuations in the special symbol in the low probability state (relief number counter) for the count , is counted from the initial value "0".

On the other hand, when the relief maintenance button is operated at the time of setting change operation, RAM clear for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed to initialize the game state. In addition, since the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 is not backed up when the power is turned off, the rendering state is returned to the initial state. In addition, the setting value can be changed. To change the setting value, the setting change button 1311b is operated from the state in which the already set value (the setting value when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) is maintained. The value increases by 1 each time, and when it reaches the maximum set value of 6, it returns to the set value of 1, which is the initial value, and it is possible to increase the value by 1 again. In addition, regarding the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state, the count is maintained. Also, regarding the initialization of the game state, after the setting change operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF and it is determined that the setting change operation is completed (the input timing is the setting key OFF signal input to the main control MPU 1310a). ). At the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation is completed, the set value decided by the setting change is stored in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are lit in green for a predetermined period from the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation is completed. It is made to emit light, and a voice saying "The set value has been changed and the game state has been cleared. The set value is maintained." is output from the speaker. Therefore, during the setting change operation, if the relief maintenance button is operated, while enabling the setting value to be changed, the power supply It is designed to count from the continuation of the interruption.

Also, during the setting change operation, if the relief maintenance button is not operated, RAM clear for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed to initialize the game state. In addition, since the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 is not backed up when the power is turned off, the rendering state is returned to the initial state. In addition, the setting value can be changed. To change the setting value, the setting change button 1311b is operated from the state in which the already set value (the setting value when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) is maintained. The value increases by 1 each time, and when it reaches the maximum set value of 6, it returns to the set value of 1, which is the initial value, and it is possible to increase the value by 1 again. In addition, regarding the count of the number of variations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state, the count is reset. In addition, regarding the initialization of the game state and the reset of the count, after the setting change operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF and it is determined that the setting change operation is completed (the timing of turning OFF the setting key input to the main control MPU 1310a). signal is input timing). At the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation is completed, the set value decided by the setting change is stored in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are lit in white for a predetermined period from the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation is completed. It is made to emit light, and the sound "The game state and the number of rescues have been cleared by changing the set value" is output from the speaker. Therefore, at the time of setting change operation, if the relief maintenance button is not operated, while enabling the setting value to be changed, the count for the number of special symbol fluctuations (relief counter) in the low probability state is initially It counts from the value "0".

In addition, as described above in detail, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM when the power is turned on, or when the power is turned off, it is determined that the main control side power failure processing has not completed normally. In such a case, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are assumed to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. When such a RAM error occurs, the specific error flag is turned ON, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and when the power is turned on again, the RAM error is corrected by performing a setting change operation. You can proceed with the game by canceling it. Specifically, when the specific error flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), if a setting change operation is performed, regardless of whether the relief maintenance button is operated at the time of the setting change operation, The game state is initialized, and the setting value can be changed. In the setting change of the set value, the value is increased by 1 each time the setting switch button 1311b is operated from the state in which the set value 1, which is the lowest value, which is the initial value, is provisionally set, and when the set value 6, which is the maximum value, is reached, It is possible to return to the set value 1, which is the initial value, and increase the value by 1 again. In addition, regarding the count of the number of variations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state, the count is reset. In addition, regarding the initialization of the game state and the reset of the count, after the setting change operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF and it is determined that the setting change operation is completed (when the setting key OFF input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined). signal is input timing). At the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation is completed, the set value decided by the setting change is stored in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

In the above, when the specific error flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), if a setting change operation is performed, regardless of whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated at the time of the setting change operation, a low probability Resets the count of the number of special symbol fluctuations (relief number counter) in the state. This is because when a RAM error occurs, there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM, and there is a possibility that there is an abnormality in the counting of the number of fluctuations in special symbols (relief number counter) in a low probability state. Therefore, the fairness of the game can be maintained by resetting the count. When the specific error flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), if the power is turned on without changing the settings, the specific error flag will remain ON without resetting the RAM error. there is

In this example, when the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on, when the relief maintenance button is operated during the RAM clearing operation, while maintaining the set value already set, in the low probability state Regarding the count for the number of fluctuations of special symbols (relief number counter), it counts from the continuation of the power shutdown, but when the setting change operation is performed, if the relief maintenance button is operated, the set value setting change , the count for the number of special symbol variations (relief number counter) in the low probability state is continued from the time of power cutoff. In addition, as a case where the relief maintenance button is not operated when the power is turned on, when the relief maintenance button is not operated at the time of the RAM clearing operation, while maintaining the set value already set, special symbols in the low probability state Regarding the count for the number of fluctuations (relief number counter), the count starts from the initial value "0". , the count for the number of special symbol variations (relief number counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0". That is, when the power is turned on, the hall manager determines a predetermined number depending on whether or not the user wants to change the setting value and whether or not he/she wants to maintain the count of the number of times the special symbol changes (relief number counter) in the low-probability state. All that is required is to operate the operation unit, and the hall manager can selectively execute from four patterns according to the hall environment. For example, if the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on at the start of the hall, the number of special symbol fluctuations in the low probability state (relief counter) is maintained. To make a player expect that the special pattern is changed and displayed in a low probability state until the shift to the probability time saving state B is performed only a small number of times, and that the hall shifts to the low probability time saving state B as soon as possible after the opening of the hall. can be done. On the other hand, if the relief maintenance button is not operated when the power is turned on at the start of the hall, the count of the number of special symbol fluctuations (relief counter) in the low probability state is reset, so the low probability non-time saving state A large number of variable display of special symbols in the low probability state from to the transition to the low probability time saving state B is required, and the player does not shift to the low probability time saving state B early from the opening of the hall. does not rise prematurely.

Regardless of whether or not the relief/maintenance button is operated at power-on, normal power-on without RAM clear operation or setting change operation (operation of power switch 630a without ON operation of RAM clear switch 1310f and setting key switch 1311a). only) is performed, the RAM is cleared to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the game state is changed to the state at the time of power interruption based on the backup created at the time of power interruption. I am returning it. In addition, since the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 is not backed up when the power is turned off, the rendering state is returned to the initial state. In addition, the setting value is not changed or displayed for confirmation, and the already set setting value (the setting value when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) is maintained. In addition, regarding the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state, the count is maintained. In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are displayed in purple for a predetermined period from the timing when the RAM clear signal is determined to be ON. It is made to emit light, and a sound saying "The game state has been restored. The set value and the number of rescues are maintained." are output from the speaker. Therefore, in the case of normal power-on, while maintaining the set value that has already been set, the count for the number of special symbol fluctuations (relief counter) in the low probability state will continue from the time of power-off. Also, the game state is restored to the state when the power was cut off.

In addition, in this example, when the game state is initialized, depending on whether the count of the number of fluctuations of special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is maintained or reset, the notification mode to be notified to the outside is changed. there is As a result, for example, even if the hole manager mistakenly operates the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on and maintains the count of the number of special symbol fluctuations (relief counter) in the low probability state, external The error can be noticed by the reporting mode, and it is possible to prevent the hall manager from unintentionally keeping the count.

In the above, the configuration is provided with the relief maintenance button, but for example, even if the configuration is not provided with the relief maintenance button, when the power is turned on, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief counter) in the low probability state is counted. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the hall manager can select whether to maintain or not according to the hall environment. In such a configuration, for example, when the RAM clear operation is performed without turning ON the setting key switch 1311a, while maintaining the set value already set, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state Regarding the count for the (relief number counter), the count is continued from the time when the power is cut off. On the other hand, the count for the number of variations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is counted from "0" which is the initial value. As a result, only when the hall manager performs the RAM clear operation instead of the setting change operation, the count of the number of variations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state can be maintained without being reset. can meet the needs of

Also, even in the case where the relief maintenance button is not provided, when the power is turned on, if it is desired to maintain the count of the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief counter), the hall manager may use some operation unit. is preferably configured to operate. Specifically, the ON operation of the setting key switch 1311a as a setting change operation may be used as some operation unit. In such a configuration, at the time of power-on, when the setting change operation of turning ON the setting key switch 1311a is performed, while enabling the setting change of the setting value, the fluctuation of the special symbol in the low probability state Regarding the count for the number of times (relief number counter), the counting continues from the time when the power is cut off. is maintained, the count for the number of special symbol variations (relief number counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0". As a result, when the power is turned on, if the hall manager does not turn on the setting key switch 1311a, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is reset. It is possible to prevent unintentional maintenance of the count.

In the case of a configuration in which a relief maintenance button is provided, the hole manager can select from four patterns depending on whether to operate the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation, and whether to operate the relief maintenance button. On the other hand, in the case of a configuration without a relief maintenance button, there is only a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation, and the hall manager has only two patterns. Cannot be selectively executed. For this reason, when the pachinko machine 1 is not provided with a relief maintenance button, an operation unit that can be operated on the hall side may be provided to increase the patterns that can be selected by the hall manager.

In this example, in the variable display of the special symbols on the function display unit 1400, the stop symbols of the special symbols are stop-displayed, and in the variable display of the decorative symbols on the production display device 1600, the stop symbols of the decorative symbols are stop-displayed. I am assuming. And, regarding the counting of the number of variations of the special symbols in the low-probability state (relief number counter), it is counted when the special symbols are stopped. Further, in the case of a big hit, in the variable display of the special symbols on the function display unit 1400, the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed as the stop symbols of the special symbols, and in the variable display of the decorative symbols on the effect display device 1600, The jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as the stop pattern of the decorative pattern. After the jackpot pattern is stopped, the jackpot game is executed, but the count of the number of variations of the special patterns (relief number counter) in the low probability state is reset when the jackpot pattern is stopped before the jackpot game is started. . In such a configuration, if the power is cut off during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and if the RAM clear operation or setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on after that, the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed to initialize the variable state, and the variable state is initialized (the variable display is not performed), so that when the power is turned on, the variable display of the special pattern being executed is not restored. In addition, if the power is cut off during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols based on the big win prior to the execution of the big win game, and the RAM clear operation or setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on after that, the main Execute RAM clear for initializing the RAM built in the control MPU 1310a, and initialize the variation state (to the state where the variation is not displayed), thereby returning to the variation display of the special symbol based on the big hit being executed. Therefore, the jackpot game scheduled after that is not executed.

In the above configuration, when the power is cut off during execution of the variable display of the special symbols based on the big win, and the relief maintenance button is operated when the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on after that, the game state is initialized. At the time, while initializing the special symbol variation display based on the running jackpot and maintaining the set value that has already been set, the number of special symbol variations (relief counter) in the low probability state is counted. In contrast to counting from the continuation at the time of interruption, if the relief maintenance button is operated at the time of setting change operation at the time of power on, when initializing the game state, fluctuation of special symbols based on the jackpot being executed While the display is initialized and the setting value can be changed, the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is continued from the time of the power shutdown. In addition, if the power is cut off during execution of the variable display of the special symbols based on the big hit, and the relief maintenance button is not operated when the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on after that, when initializing the game state, The variable display of the special symbols based on the jackpot being executed is initialized, and while maintaining the set value already set, the count for the number of variations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is the initial value. In contrast to counting from "0", if the relief maintenance button is not operated at the time of setting change operation at the time of turning on the power, when the game state is initialized, the variable display of special symbols based on the jackpot being executed is performed. is initialized, and the setting value can be changed, and the count for the number of special symbol variations (relief number counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0". In other words, when the power is turned off during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols based on the big hit, and when the power is turned on after that (when the RAM is cleared or when the settings are changed), when the game state is initialized, Although the variable display of special symbols based on the big hit is initialized, depending on whether or not to change the setting of the set value, or whether to maintain the count of the number of special symbol variations (relief number counter) in the low probability state, A hall manager may operate a predetermined operation unit, and the hall manager can selectively execute from four patterns according to the hall environment.

In addition, in this example, the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state (the number of variations other than the first special symbol and the second special symbol big hit) is counted, and the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600. By reaching the time, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B, but for example, if you add a configuration that initializes all the controls related to the progress of the game like the RAM clear processing of the conventional pachinko machine 1, special Since the RAM clearing process is performed while the symbols are displayed in a variable state, even the count of the number of variations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is reset, and the probability is low in the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1 or the like. There is a possibility that it may be difficult to confirm the transition to the time saving state B. In this regard, in this example, even if a big win is made and the special symbol variation display based on the big win is executed before the number of times of special symbol variations in the low probability state reaches 600 times, it is based on the big win. When the game state is initialized by shutting off the power supply during execution of the variable display of special symbols and then operating the relief maintenance button when turning on the power (during RAM clear operation, setting change operation), execution While initializing the variation display of the special symbols based on the middle jackpot, the number of times of variation of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state can be counted from the continuation of the power shutdown, and the pachinko machine 1 In the manufacturing process, it is possible to perform variable display of special symbols again, and it is possible to facilitate confirmation of transition to the low-probability time-saving state B.

Also, in the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, if you want to check various effects when transitioning to the low-probability time-saving state B, even if you are out, the number of times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state is the 600th time. During the fluctuation display to reach or during the fluctuation display immediately before that, the power is cut off regardless of whether or not the jackpot will be achieved, and the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on after that (during RAM clear operation, setting change operation) By doing so, while the variable display of the special symbols being executed is initialized, the number of times of variation of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state can be counted from the continuation of the power shutdown, and the pachinko In the manufacturing process of the machine 1, it is possible to perform the 600th special pattern variable display and the like again, and it is possible to facilitate confirmation of the effect in the process of shifting to the low probability time saving state B.

Also, when initializing the variable display of the special symbols being executed, the information on the various reservations stored (holding of the lottery result of the first special design, holding of the lottery result of the second special design) is also initialized. By doing so, when confirming the transition to the low-probability time-saving state B and confirming the production of the process of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving state B, the worker has the first special pattern and the second special It is possible to select which of the patterns to execute and to execute the variable display reaching the 600th time or the variable display immediately before that at any timing, so that the degree of freedom of confirmation work can be increased. In addition, this work can be repeatedly executed by operating the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on (during RAM clear operation, setting change operation), and in this respect also, the degree of freedom in confirmation work can be increased.

In the above description, the relief maintenance button is provided. However, for example, even if the relief maintenance button is not provided, during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols up to 600 times or the variable display of the special symbols based on the big hit. When the power is turned off and the power is subsequently turned on (during RAM clear operation, setting change operation), the hall manager determines whether to maintain the count of the number of special symbol fluctuations (relief number counter) in the low probability state. can be selected according to the hall environment. In such a configuration, only when the hall manager performs either the setting change operation or the RAM clear operation, while erasing the variation display being executed, the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief By maintaining the count of the number counter) without resetting, it is possible to meet the needs of the hall manager.

In this example, if the power is turned off during the control of the time saving state, and the relief maintenance button is operated during the RAM clear operation at the time of subsequent power on, when initializing the variable display being executed , While maintaining the set value that has already been set, the count for the number of special symbol fluctuations (relief number counter) in the low probability state is counted from the continuation when the power is turned off, whereas the setting change when the power is turned on If you are operating the relief maintenance button at the time of operation, when initializing the variable display during execution, it will be initialized from the time saving state to the low probability non-time saving state, and the setting value can be changed, while the low probability Regarding the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the state (relief number counter), the counting continues from the time when the power is cut off. Also, if the power is turned off during control of the time saving state, and the relief maintenance button is not operated during the RAM clear operation when the power is turned on after that, when initializing the variable display being executed, from the time saving state While initializing to a low-probability non-time-saving state and maintaining the set value that has already been set, the count for the number of fluctuations (relief counter) of special symbols in the low-probability state is counted from the initial value "0". On the other hand, if the relief maintenance button is not operated when changing the settings when the power is turned on, when initializing the variable display being executed, the time saving state is initialized to a low probability non-time saving state, and the set value , the count for the number of special symbol variations (relief number counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0". In other words, when the power is turned off during the control of the time saving state, and then when the power is turned on (RAM clear operation, setting change operation), when initializing the variable display being executed, from the time saving state to a low probability non Although it is initialized to the time saving state, whether you want to change the setting value or whether you want to maintain the count of the number of special symbol fluctuations (relief counter) in the low probability state, the hall manager determines the predetermined All that is required is to operate the operation unit, and the hall manager can selectively execute from four patterns according to the hall environment.

In the above, when the jackpot is achieved, the jackpot game is executed after the jackpot pattern is stopped, and the count of the number of fluctuations of the special patterns (relief number counter) in the low probability state is reset when the jackpot pattern is stopped. However, as another example, only in the case of a big hit, the count of the number of times the special symbols fluctuate in the low probability state (relief number counter) is counted not when the big win symbols are stopped, but when the big win game is played. (for example, when an ending period set after the end of the final round elapses). In other words, in the case of a miss or a small hit, the count of the number of variations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is counted when the special symbols are stopped, but in the case of a big hit, the low probability state. The timing of resetting the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbols (relief number counter) may be delayed not until the stop of the special symbols but until the subsequent end of the big win game. In such a configuration, if the power is cut off during execution of the jackpot game, and if the RAM clear operation or setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on after that, the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is initialized. Since the game state is initialized (set to a low-probability non-time-saving state) so as to erase the jackpot game by clearing the RAM to be changed, the jackpot game under execution is not returned.

In the above configuration, if the power is cut off during execution of the jackpot game and the relief maintenance button is operated during the RAM clearing operation when the power is turned on after that, when initializing the game state, While initializing the jackpot game and maintaining the set value that has already been set, the count for the number of special symbol fluctuations (relief number counter) in the low probability state is counted from the continuation of the power shutdown, whereas the power supply When the relief maintenance button is operated at the time of the setting change operation at the time of input, when the game state is initialized, the jackpot game being executed is initialized, and the setting value can be changed while the low probability state. Regarding the count for the number of times of fluctuation of special symbols (relief number counter) in , it is designed to count from the continuation when the power is cut off. In addition, if the power is cut off during execution of the jackpot game and the relief maintenance button is not operated when the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on after that, the jackpot game that is being executed is not restarted when the game state is initialized. While maintaining the set value that has already been initialized and set, the count for the number of special symbol variations (relief number counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0", whereas the power is turned on If the relief maintenance button is not operated at the time of the setting change operation at the time, when the game state is initialized, the running jackpot game is initialized, and while the setting value can be changed, in the low probability state The count for the number of variations of the special symbol (relief number counter) is started from the initial value "0". In other words, the power is turned off during execution of the jackpot game, and when the power is turned on after that (when the RAM is cleared or when the setting is changed), the jackpot game being executed is initialized when the game state is initialized. However, if the hall manager operates a predetermined operation unit depending on whether or not he/she wants to change the setting value, or whether or not he or she wants to maintain the count of the number of special symbol fluctuations (relief number counter) in the low probability state, Well, the hall manager can selectively execute from four patterns according to the hall environment.

In addition, in this example, the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state (the number of variations other than the first special symbol and the second special symbol big hit) is counted, and the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600. By reaching the time, it is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state B, but for example, if you add a configuration that initializes all the controls related to the progress of the game like the RAM clear processing of the conventional pachinko machine 1, a big hit By performing RAM clear processing during the game, even the count of the number of fluctuations of special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is also reset, and the low probability time saving state B in the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1 etc. It may be difficult to confirm the transition to In this regard, if a big hit is made and a big win game occurs before the number of variations of the special symbols in the low-probability state reaches 600 times, the power is turned off during the execution of the big win game, and then turned on. By operating the relief maintenance button at time (during RAM clearing operation, setting change operation), when initializing the game state, while initializing the jackpot game being executed, fluctuation of special symbols in the low probability state The count for the number of times (relief number counter) can be counted from the continuation of the power shutdown, and in the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to easily confirm that the state is shifted to the low probability time saving state B.

In the above description, the relief maintenance button is provided. However, for example, even if the relief maintenance button is not provided, the power is cut off during execution of the jackpot game, and when the power is turned on after that (during the RAM clearing operation, (during setting change operation), the hole manager can select whether to maintain the count of the number of special symbol fluctuations (relief number counter) in the low probability state according to the hall environment. preferable. In such a configuration, only when the hall manager performs either the setting change operation or the RAM clear operation, the count of the number of variations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is maintained without being reset. By doing so, it is possible to meet the needs of the hall manager.

In the above, the configuration is provided with a relief maintenance button. During operation), it is preferable that the hole manager can select whether or not to maintain the count of the number of special symbol variations (relief number counter) in the low probability state according to the hall environment. In such a configuration, only when the hall manager performs either the setting change operation or the RAM clear operation, the number of variations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state while erasing the jackpot game. By maintaining the count without resetting it, it is possible to meet the needs of the hall manager.

In addition, as described above in detail, in the effect display device 1600, as "help mode L omen effect", until the variable display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500 to 600 times, the special symbol in the low probability state A count effect is executed to notify how many times the number of fluctuations is. Regarding the current count of the number of fluctuations of special symbols (relief number counter) in such a low probability state, whether the hall manager resets the count even if the fluctuation display of special symbols in the low probability state is other than 500 to 600 times. In order to check whether the setting value is being changed, the setting value is also displayed during the period when the setting value is being changed or the display confirmation of the setting value is being performed, so that the hall manager can check. In the following, the history display displayed during the period in which the setting value is changed or the display of the setting value is being checked will be described.

FIG. 211 shows a history display that can be displayed during a period in which the setting value is being changed or the display of the setting value is being checked. This example shows a state in which a setting change operation is performed without the relief maintenance button being operated when the power is turned on, and the setting value is being changed. When the setting change operation is performed, the already set set value (the set value when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) can be changed.

211(A) and (B) show the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in a state in which the setting value is being changed, and FIG. This is the display screen immediately after the display, in which a message image of "setting change in progress" is displayed in the center of the screen, and a guide image (operation image showing effect operation unit 310) for switching to history display is displayed below it. be. FIG. 211(B) is a history display image switched from the display screen of FIG. 211(A) when the effect operation section 310 is operated.

In FIG. 211(B), a first history display section is displayed in which the history of the past 12 times can be checked line by line on one screen, and the "date and time information" based on the information of the RTC, and the fluctuation of the special symbol described above are displayed. "Information on game state" indicating whether or not the game state has been initialized, including display and jackpot games, "Information on set value" indicating the current set value, "Information on count value of relief number counter", " "Work information such as RAM clear operation and setting change operation" is recorded in order from the left. These pieces of information are stored in a specific storage area of the main control board 1310 so as not to be erased even if a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation is performed. In other words, the displays of FIGS. 211A and 211B transmit various information stored in the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 while the setting value is being changed or the display of the setting value is being checked. , which is an effect image generated and developed by the peripheral control board 1510 .

Also, in FIG. 211(B), the history (2020/3/9 7:15:00) shown in the bottom line of the first history display portion is a display related to the current setting change operation. The information "under change" is recorded in the section "Information on set value", and is updated when the set value is confirmed. In addition, at the lower left of the first history display section, a guide image (operation image showing the effect operation section 310) for returning to the display screen shown in FIG. , the current "information on the count value of the number of relief counters" is highlighted.

The current "information on the count value of the relief number counter" has two types, "the number of variations after clearing the RAM" and "the number of variations after the big hit". When a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation is performed without is operated and the count value of the relief counter is reset to the initial value, the total number of variations counted from the initial value is displayed. In addition, in the "number of fluctuations after jackpot", when a jackpot game is executed in the course of the game and the count value of the relief number counter is reset to the initial value, the number of fluctuations counted from the initial value is displayed. be done. In other words, when the jackpot game is not executed in the process of progressing the game, 'the number of fluctuations after the big win' is displayed as zero, and the numerical value is recorded only in the 'the number of fluctuations after clearing the RAM'. In addition, in the example of FIG. 211(B), it shows a case where a big hit game is executed in the process of progressing the game, and "412" is recorded in the "number of fluctuations after the big hit", and "after clearing the RAM" is recorded. Only "2995" is recorded in the "number of fluctuations", and the hall manager can recognize the count value of the relief number counter by "412" which is the "number of fluctuations after the big win".

In this example, since the setting change operation is performed without the relief maintenance button being operated when the power is turned on, the RAM is cleared when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off and the setting change operation is completed. The count value of the relief number counter is reset to the initial value. In other words, before the count value of the relief number counter is reset to the initial value, the hall manager sets the count value of the relief number counter (the count value before initialization) by "412", which is the "number of fluctuations after the jackpot". ) can be recognized. After recognizing the count value of the remedy number counter (the count value before initialization), if you want to maintain the count value of the remedy number counter, you can do so without ending the setting change operation (setting key switch 1311a), and then when the power is turned on, the relief maintenance button is operated to maintain the count value of the relief number counter.

FIG. 211(C) shows the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in a state where the setting change operation is finished, and the history display image is displayed continuously from the display screen of FIG. 211(B). The display screen of FIG. 211(C) is displayed until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off and the setting change operation is completed. After the predetermined time has passed, the history display screen is erased. Further, in FIG. 211(C), in the history (March 9, 2020 7:15:00) shown in the bottom line of the first history display area, "information about setting value" indicates that the setting change Since the set value is fixed by the end of the operation, the fixed value ("4" in this example) is updated and displayed. This example shows the case where the setting change operation is performed without operating the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on. , and since the count value of the relief number counter is reset to the initial value, the "number of fluctuations after clearing the RAM" and the "number of fluctuations after the jackpot" are updated to their initial values of zero. Is displayed. Note that the date and time information may also be updated and displayed when the setting change operation is completed.

If the relief maintenance button is operated at the time of the setting change operation, the count value of the relief number counter is maintained even though the RAM is cleared when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off to end the setting change operation. , the values displayed during the setting change operation ("2995" for the "number of fluctuations after clearing the RAM", "412") is continuously displayed in the "variation number after big win" without being updated.

As described above, during the period in which the setting value is changed and the display of the setting value is being checked, the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (relief number counter) by performing any operation by the hall manager It is possible to check the current count for the counter, and determine whether or not the hall manager resets the count value of the counter for the number of rescues without carelessly leaking it to the surroundings. In other words, if the hall manager wants to reset the count value of the relief number counter, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief number counter ), and if the hall manager does not want to reset the count value of the relief number counter, operate the relief maintenance button when turning on the power after turning off the power, and in a low probability state A count of the number of special symbol variations (relief number counter) may be maintained.

Also, in the second history display unit, in addition to the above, for example, the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600). etc. may be displayed.

In addition, during the period in which the setting of the set value is changed or the display of the set value is being checked, the ball launching device 540 is in a state in which the game ball B is not controlled to be shot. This is the current count (setting change or setting value (count at the start of display confirmation) is displayed, but if the game ball B can be launched from the ball launcher 540 during such a period, the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 Occasionally, the number of fluctuations of special symbols (relief number counter) in a low probability state is counted up, resulting in a discrepancy with the count being displayed. In this regard, during the period in which the set value is being changed or the display of the set value is being checked, the ball launching device 540 is set to a state in which the game ball B is shot out so as not to be able to be controlled. The hall manager can accurately grasp the current count without any deviation from the count.

[Regarding the return of the short-time production at the time of power failure]
In the above, low probability time saving state AC is set as the low probability time saving state. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit C", the low probability time saving state A is controlled until the next "big hit" after the execution of the 10R big win game. In addition, after the power is turned on with RAM clearing or after the execution of the jackpot game, the number of special symbol variations in the low probability state (relief counter) is counted, and the number of special symbol variations in the low probability state is 600 times (relief When the number of times of variation of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief times counter=600), the lottery result of the special symbols is not a hit. Nevertheless, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B until the number of fluctuations in the subsequent special symbol reaches a predetermined number (700 times in this example). In addition, when the lottery result of the special design is "immediate short hit", the big hit game is not executed, and after the immediate short hit design is stopped, the number of fluctuations of the special design is a predetermined number (20 to 100 times in this example). ), it is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C until it reaches.

In addition, during the period of control to the low-probability time-saving states A to C, production corresponding to each time-saving state is executed. Specifically, as an effect corresponding to the low probability time saving state A, a “time saving effect” indicating that the low probability time saving state A is under control is executed, for example, the upper left part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 , "During time-saving game" is displayed. In addition, as an effect corresponding to the low probability time saving state B, a “help mode L effect” indicating that the help mode L is being executed (low probability time saving state B is being controlled) is executed, for example, the above As shown in the effect example, the upper left part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays "in help mode L". In addition, as an effect corresponding to the low probability time saving state C, a “help mode S effect” indicating that the help mode S is being executed (controlling the low probability time saving state C) is executed, for example, the above As shown in the effect example, the upper left part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays "in help mode S". In addition to this, in "time saving effect", "help mode L effect", and "help mode S effect", it is possible to display background images and mini characters unique to each effect, and to output sound and light emission. making it possible.

In this example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (at the time of power cut), the type of low probability time saving state being executed is stored in the main control built-in RAM, and when the power is turned on again, before the power cut A command corresponding to the type of low-probability state being executed is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 . As a result, after the power is turned on again, the effect corresponding to the time saving state that is being executed before the power failure is restored, and even after the power is turned on again, any of the low probability time saving states A to C It is possible to know whether it is controlled by Specifically, at the time of power failure, if the "time saving effect" is being executed as the effect corresponding to the low probability time saving state A, when the power is turned on again, the command corresponding to the low probability time saving state A is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and after the power is turned on again, it is executed so as to return to the "time saving effect". Also, at the time of power failure, if the "help mode L effect" is being executed as the effect corresponding to the low probability time saving state B, when the power is turned on again, the command corresponding to the low probability time saving state B is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and after the power is turned on again, the "help mode L effect" is executed. In addition, at the time of power failure, if the "help mode S effect" is being executed as an effect corresponding to the low probability time saving state C, when the power is turned on again, a command corresponding to the low probability time saving state C is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and after the power is turned on again, the "help mode S effect" is executed.

Also, at the time of power failure, if the "help mode S effect" is being executed as the effect corresponding to the low probability time saving state C among the low probability time saving states A to C, after turning on the power again, It is executed so as to return to the ``help mode S effect'', but when the ``help mode S effect'' returns, part of the effect of the ``help mode S effect'' is not restored. ing. For example, during the execution of the "help mode S effect", as shown in the above effect example, "help mode S in progress" is displayed in the upper left part of the display area of the effect display device 1600. When returning from "help mode S effect", it is restricted not to display "in help mode S", but it is possible to display the background image and mini characters peculiar to the effect, and output sound and light emission. About to be back running. This is, for the period of control to the low probability time saving state C, the number of times of special symbol fluctuation during the control of the time saving state is as small as 20 to 100 times, compared to the low probability time saving state A and the low probability time saving state B, the game A game that is disadvantageous to a person is being played. In this regard, at the time of returning to the "help mode S effect", by restricting the effect display device 1600 not to display "in the help mode S", it is possible to return to the control of the low probability time saving state C. It becomes difficult to grasp, and dissatisfaction with disadvantageous games in the low-probability time-saving state C can be suppressed.

In addition, after the power is turned on again, it is executed so as to return to the production corresponding to the time saving state that was executed before the power failure, but before returning to the production corresponding to the time saving state, In the effect display device 1600, the common return image (in this example, the display of the arrow bar of "Left shot!" And the message display of "I will return in a short time") are temporarily displayed for a predetermined period. there is In other words, a common return image is temporarily displayed when returning to any of the "time saving effect", the "help mode L effect", and the "help mode S effect" as effects corresponding to the time saving state. Therefore, at that time, it is not possible to grasp which production to return to. In this way, at the time of temporarily displaying the common return image, whether the low probability time saving state A is being controlled, the low probability time saving state B is being controlled, or the low probability time saving state C is Since it is not possible to grasp it, the game is started early in order to return to one of the ``time saving performance'', ``help mode L performance'', and ``help mode S performance'' and to know which time saving state it is. can generate motivation. In addition, as for the timing of returning to one of the “time saving effect”, “help mode L effect”, and “help mode S effect”, after displaying the common return image, the next special symbol will start to be displayed. It is preferable that it is the timing when the Note that this common return image is not displayed after the power is turned off and the power is turned on in a state other than the time saving state.

In addition, as described above in detail, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM when the power is turned on, or when the power is turned off, it is determined that the main control side power failure processing has not completed normally. In such a case, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are assumed to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. Then, at the time of power failure, if the effect corresponding to the time saving state is being executed and such a RAM error occurs after the power is turned on again, the time saving that was being performed before the power failure It is executed so as not to return to the production corresponding to the state. This is because there is a possibility that a RAM error occurred when the power was turned on due to unauthorized transition to the game state before the power failure, and if such a RAM error occurs, it will be executed before the power failure. By giving the player a penalty of not returning to the performance corresponding to the working time saving state and not notifying which working time saving state it is, the player is encouraged not to commit fraudulent acts such as illegally shifting the game state. can be done.

[Regarding the handling of immediate short hits during time saving control]
In the above, in the time saving state, when it becomes an immediate short hit, without newly controlling the time saving state based on the immediate short hit, the already controlled time saving state is continued, but as a modification , In the time saving state, if it becomes an immediate short hit, it can be executed in a new time saving state based on the remaining number of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the already controlled time saving state and the immediate short hit It is also possible to compare with the number of times of variable display of special symbols, and determine the subsequent game progress mode according to the comparison result. Specifically, the number of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in a new time-saving state based on the immediate short-time hit is more than the remaining number of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the already controlled time-saving state. If there are many, control can be exemplified to switch from the already controlled time saving state to a new time saving state based on the immediate short hit. Such modifications will be described below.

FIG. 212 shows the lottery table and symbol determination table of the modification. As shown in FIG. 212 (A), the lottery table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number is provided with an immediate short hit determination value, and FIG. 190 (A) and Unlike the first special random number, the lottery table at low probability that is referenced to compare with the second special random number, the immediate short hit judgment value in the lottery table at low probability that is referenced to compare with the second special random number The values (big hit determination value, small hit determination value) are the same as in FIG. 190(A). Similarly, as shown in FIG. 212 (B), the lottery table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number is provided with an immediate short hit determination value, so FIG. 190 ( B), the instant short hit judgment value in the low probability lottery table referred to for comparison with the first special random number and the low probability lottery table referred to for comparison with the second special random number Other determination values (big hit determination value, small hit determination value) are the same as in FIG. 190(B). As a result, in the time-saving state, it becomes easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003, and in addition to the fact that the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning to the variable winning hole 2003 is easily executed, the variable winning hole Since there is a possibility of winning an immediate short win by the start winning to 2003, even in a state where an advantageous game is played in a time saving state, the game can be played with further expectations.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 212(D), in the symbol determination table at the time of the immediate short hit that is compared with the second symbol random number, the determination value is sorted into the immediate short win A, the immediate short win B, and the immediate short win C. Unlike FIG. 190(D), the symbol determination table at the time of the immediate short hit to be compared with the first symbol random number is the same as that of FIG. 190(D). In other words, after winning the immediate short hit by lottery based on the second special random number, the type of immediate short hit (immediate short hit A, Either the immediate short hit B or the immediate short hit C) is determined. It should be noted that the symbol determination table for the big hit shown in FIG. 212(C) and the symbol determination table for the small hit shown in FIG. This is the same as the symbol determination table for small hits shown in 190(E).

In this example, low probability time saving state AC is set as the low probability time saving state. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special pattern is "big hit C", after the execution of the 10R big hit game, until the number of fluctuations of the special pattern reaches 100 times, control is performed to the low probability time saving state A. there is In addition, when the lottery result of the special pattern is ``big hit D'', the game is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state A until the number of fluctuations of the special pattern reaches 599 times after the execution of the 10R big win game. In addition, after the power is turned on with RAM clearing or after the execution of the jackpot game, the number of special symbol variations in the low probability state (relief counter) is counted, and the number of special symbol variations in the low probability state is 600 times (relief When the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600), the big win game is not executed. , Until the number of fluctuations in the subsequent special symbols reaches a predetermined number (700 times in this example), it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the number of times of change of the special symbol after the stop of the immediate short hit symbol is a predetermined number (in this example, immediate short win) even though the big win game is not executed. Until reaching 20 times, 40 times, 100 times according to the type of winning pattern), it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C. In addition, as the number of times of variable display of the special symbol in the low probability time saving state C based on the immediate short hit, in the case of "immediate short hit A", 100 times, and in the case of "immediate short hit B", 40 20 times is set in the case of "immediate short hit C".

FIG. 213 is a time chart showing the immediate short hit time during control of the low probability time saving state B. FIG. First, during the control of the low probability time saving state B, when it becomes an immediate short hit, the remaining number of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the low probability time saving state B and the low probability time saving based on the immediate short hit The number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in state C is compared. And when the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in low-probability time-saving state C based on immediate short hit is greater than the remaining number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in low-probability time-saving state B is controlled to switch from the low-probability time saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short-time winning design is stopped (switching to the low-probability time saving state C is enabled). Also, when switching from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C, the remaining number of variable display of special symbols executable in the low-probability time-saving state B is discarded and executed in the low-probability time-saving state C It is controlled to newly count the number of times of variable display of possible special symbols (20 times, 40 times, 100 times according to the type of immediate short winning symbol). That is, when switching from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C, control is performed to a low-probability time-saving state than the number of times of variable display of special symbols that should have been executed in the low-probability time-saving state B. The period is extended. On the other hand, when the remaining number of variable display of special symbols executable in low probability time saving state B is greater than the number of variable display of special symbols executable in low probability time saving state C based on immediate short hit maintains the low-probability time-saving state B without switching to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short-hit pattern is stopped, and the remaining number of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state B, It is controlled so that the low-probability reduction of working hours state B continues (disables switching to the low-probability reduction of working hours state C). Thus, when an immediate short hit occurs during control of the low-probability time-saving state B, the low-probability time-saving state with a larger number of variable display of special symbols is selected and executed, so that the player can An advantageous state can be executed for as long as possible without giving a feeling of regret or loss, and the game can be continued with anticipation.

As shown in FIG. 213, during the control of the low probability time saving state B, when it becomes "immediate short hit A" in the N-th special symbol fluctuation display, "700-N < 100" (N = When the switching condition of (the number of variable display of the special pattern already executed in the low-probability time-saving state B) is established, the low-probability time-saving state B is switched to the low-probability time-saving state C after stopping the immediate short winning A pattern. controlled as follows. That is, if it becomes "immediate short hit A" during the execution of the variable display of the 601st to 700th special symbols in the low probability time saving state B, from the low probability time saving state B after the stop of the immediate short hit A symbol It is controlled to switch to the low probability time saving state C. On the other hand, if it becomes "immediate short hit A" during the execution of the variable display of the 1st to 600th special symbols in the low probability time saving state B, the low probability time saving state B after the immediate short hit A symbol stops controlled to maintain. Thus, during the execution of the variable display of the 1st to 600th special symbols in the low probability time saving state B, the period in which switching to the low probability time saving state C is invalid when it becomes "immediate short hit A" On the other hand, during the execution of the variable display of the 601st to 700th special symbols in the low-probability time-saving state B, switching to the low-probability time-saving state C when it becomes "immediate short-time hit A" It is set as a valid period.

Also, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, if it becomes "immediate short-time hit B" in the N-th special symbol variation display, "700-N<40" (N = low-probability time-saving state B When the switching condition of (number of times of variable display of special symbols already executed in ) is satisfied, control is performed to switch from the low probability time saving state B to the low probability time saving state C after the immediate short winning B pattern is stopped. there is That is, if it becomes "immediate short hit B" during the execution of the variable display of the 661st to 700th special symbols in the low probability time saving state B, from the low probability time saving state B after the stop of the immediate short hit B symbol It is controlled to switch to the low probability time saving state C. On the other hand, if it becomes "immediate short hit B" during the execution of the variable display of the 1st to 660th special symbols in the low probability time saving state B, the low probability time saving state B will be displayed after the immediate short hit B pattern is stopped. controlled to maintain. Thus, during the execution of the variable display of the 1st to 660th special symbols in the low probability time saving state B, the period in which switching to the low probability time saving state C is invalid when it becomes "immediate short hit B" On the other hand, during the execution of the variable display of the 661st to 700th special symbols in the low-probability time-saving state B, switching to the low-probability time-saving state C when it becomes "immediate short-time hit B" It is set as a valid period.

Also, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, if it becomes "immediate short-time hit C" in the Nth fluctuation display of the special symbol, "700-N<20" (N = low-probability time-saving state B When the switching condition of (the number of times of variable display of special symbols already executed in ) is satisfied, the control is performed to switch from the low probability time saving state B to the low probability time saving state C after the immediate short winning C pattern is stopped. there is That is, if it becomes "immediate short hit C" during the execution of the variable display of the 681st to 700th special symbols in the low probability time saving state B, from the low probability time saving state B after the stop of the immediate short hit C symbol It is controlled to switch to the low probability time saving state C. On the other hand, if it becomes "immediate short hit C" during the execution of the variable display of the 1st to 680th special symbols in the low probability time saving state B, the low probability time saving state B after the immediate short hit C symbol is stopped controlled to maintain. Thus, during the execution of the variable display of the 1st to 680th special symbols in the low probability time saving state B, the period in which switching to the low probability time saving state C is invalid when it becomes "immediate short hit C" On the other hand, during the execution of the variable display of the 681st to 700th special symbols in the low probability time saving state B, switching to the low probability time saving state C when it becomes "immediate short hit C" It is set as a valid period.

Next, the production progress before and after the immediate short hit during the control of the low probability time saving state B will be described. In this example, of the 601st to 700th special symbol variation display during the control of the low probability time saving state B, at the time of the Nth special symbol variation display (symbol variation Z) "immediate short hit A", The case of controlling to switch from the low probability time saving state B to the low probability time saving state C after the stop of the immediate short winning A symbol is described.

Specifically, during the execution of the variable display of the 1st to 600th special symbols during the control of the low probability time saving state B, switching to the low probability time saving state C when it becomes "immediate short hit A" It is set as an invalid period. Then, during the period in which switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is invalid, when the "immediate short-time hit A" is reached, the remaining number of variable display of the special symbol during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B is maintained, Since the period for controlling to the low probability time saving state is not extended, it is set as an unexecutable period of the extended acquisition effect described later. In addition, during the period when switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is invalid, the "help mode L production" indicating that the "help mode L" is being executed (low-probability time-saving state B being controlled) Running.

Also, during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol after the 681st time during the control of the low probability time saving state B, the period during which switching to the low probability time saving state C is effective when it becomes "immediate short hit A" is set as Then, during the period when switching to the low probability time saving state C is effective, when it becomes "immediate short hit A", control is performed to switch from the low probability time saving state B to the low probability time saving state C, and the low probability time saving state Since the period of control to the state is extended, it is set as an executable period of the extended acquisition effect described later. In addition, during the period when switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is effective, the "help mode L effect" indicating that the "help mode L" is being executed (low-probability time-saving state B is being controlled) In addition to executing, in the production|presentation display apparatus 1600, it is performing the "extension chance display" which shows that it is the period in which extension of the period controlled to a low probability time saving state is possible. Here, the "extension chance display" can be exemplified by an effect display in which a message image regarding the extension ("If character X appears, the time may be shortened and extended...") is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (illustration omitted). As a result, during the execution of the "extension chance display", attention can be paid to whether or not the extension acquisition effect described later is to be executed, and the player can enjoy whether or not the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state is extended.

Also, during the execution of the symbol variation Z, which is the N-th variation display of the special symbols, among the variation displays of the special symbols after the 681st time during the control of the low probability time saving state B, when it becomes an immediate short hit , ``extended acquisition performance'' is executed, and control is performed to switch from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short winning A pattern is stopped, and the period of control to the low-probability state is extended. Here, the “extended acquisition effect” is a display that encourages whether or not the character X will appear from the end of the screen of the effect display device 1600, and a successful pattern in which the character X appears in the center of the screen of the effect display device 1600 (low probability time saving effect). A production that succeeds in extending the period of control to the state) and a failure pattern in which the character X does not appear from the end of the screen of the production display device 1600 (a production that fails to extend the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state) ) (not shown). In addition, during the execution of the pattern variation Z, it is set as an executable period of the extended acquisition performance, and the "extended acquisition performance" that notifies whether the period of control to the low probability time saving state is extended or not is executed. In the ``extended acquisition performance'' executed when an immediate short win is achieved, a performance (extended acquisition performance of a successful pattern) is executed to succeed in extending the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state. As a result, during the execution of the "extended acquisition performance", it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state is extended.

It should be noted that, if the immediate short hit during the control of the low probability non-time saving state, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C after the stop of the immediate short hit pattern, but for the "extended acquisition effect", low It is an effect that is not executed when it becomes an immediate short hit during the control of the probability non-time saving state. Thereby, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, it is possible to enjoy an effect different from the low-probability non-time-saving state.

In addition, during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol after the 681st time during the control of the low probability time saving state B, it is set as an executable period of the extended acquisition performance, and even if it does not become an immediate short hit, the low probability It is possible to execute an “extended acquisition effect” that notifies whether the period of control to the time saving state is extended or not. In this example, during the execution of the symbol variation X which is the N-2th special symbol variation display during the control of the low probability time saving state B, although it does not become an immediate short hit, the "extended acquisition effect" is executed, and the immediate short In the "extended acquisition performance" that is executed when the win does not occur, a fake performance (failure pattern extension acquisition performance) that fails to extend the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state is executed. While the symbol variation X is being executed, the "extended acquisition effect" is executed, but since the immediate short winning pattern is not executed, the immediate short winning pattern is not stopped and displayed.

In addition, after switching from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C, it is set as a period in which switching to a new low-probability time-saving state C becomes effective when it becomes "immediate short hit". . Even in such a case, the remaining number of variable display of special symbols executable in the low probability time saving state C and the variable display of special symbols executable in the new low probability time saving state C based on the immediate short hit When the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the new low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short winning is greater, the probability is low after the immediate short winning symbols are stopped. It is controlled to switch from the time saving state C to a new low probability time saving state C. In other words, when the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the new low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short hit is greater, the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state is extended. In addition, during the period in which switching to the new low-probability short working hours state C is effective, it is set as an executable period of the extended acquisition effect.

Also, when switching from the low probability time saving state B to the low probability time saving state C, during the control of the low probability time saving state C, the "help mode S" corresponding to the low probability time saving state C is being executed. It is not switched to the "help mode S effect" indicating that, and the "help mode L effect" that has been executed in the low probability time saving state B is continuously executed. In this way, before and after switching from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C, the control of the low-probability time-saving state B continues (extended ). In addition, after switching from the low-probability short-time state B to the low-probability short-time state C, it is set as a period in which switching to a new low-probability short-time state C becomes effective when it becomes “immediate short hit”. Since then, the effect display device 1600 continues to execute the "extended chance display".

FIG. 214 is a time chart showing an immediate short hit during control of 100 low-probability short working hours state A started with a big hit C as a trigger. First, during the control of the low probability time saving state A, when it becomes an immediate short hit, the remaining number of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the low probability time saving state A and the low probability time saving based on the immediate short hit The number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in state C is compared. And when the number of times of variable display of special symbols executable in low probability time saving state C based on immediate short hit is larger than the remaining number of times of variable display of special symbols executable in low probability time saving state A is controlled to switch from the low-probability time saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short-time winning design is stopped (switching to the low-probability time saving state C is enabled). Also, when switching from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C, the remaining number of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state A is discarded, and executed in the low-probability time-saving state C. It is controlled to newly count the number of times of variable display of possible special symbols (20 times, 40 times, 100 times according to the type of immediate short winning symbol). That is, when switching from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C, control is performed to a low-probability time-saving state than the number of times of variable display of special symbols that should have been executed in the low-probability time-saving state A. The period is extended. On the other hand, when the remaining number of variable display of special symbols executable in low probability time saving state A is greater than the number of variable display of special symbols executable in low probability time saving state C based on immediate short hit maintains the low-probability time-saving state A without switching to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short-hit design is stopped, and the remaining number of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state A, It is controlled so that the low-probability reduction of working hours state A continues (disables switching to the low-probability reduction of working hours state C). Thus, when an immediate short hit occurs during control of the low-probability time-saving state A, the low-probability time-saving state with a higher number of variable display of special symbols is selected and executed, so that the player can An advantageous state can be executed for as long as possible without giving a feeling of regret or loss, and the game can be continued with anticipation.

As shown in FIG. 214, during the control of the low probability time saving state A, when it becomes "immediate short hit A" in the N-th special symbol fluctuation display, "100-N < 100" (N = When the switching condition of (the number of variable display of the special pattern already executed in the low-probability time-saving state B) is established, the low-probability time-saving state A is switched to the low-probability time-saving state C after stopping the immediate short winning A pattern. controlled as follows. That is, if it becomes "immediate short hit A" during the execution of the variable display of the 1st to 100th special symbols in the low probability time saving state A, from the low probability time saving state A after the immediate short hit A symbol stops It is controlled to switch to the low probability time saving state C. Thus, during the execution of the variable display of the 1st to 100th special symbols in the low probability time saving state A, the period during which switching to the low probability time saving state C is effective when it becomes "immediate short hit A" is set as

Also, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, if it becomes "immediate short-time hit B" in the N-th special symbol variation display, "100-N<40" (N = low-probability time-saving state B The number of times of variable display of special symbols in the low-probability time-saving state A that has already been executed) When the switching condition is satisfied, from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C controlled to switch. In other words, if it becomes "immediate short hit B" during the execution of the variable display of the 61st to 100th special symbols in the low probability time saving state A, from the low probability time saving state A after the immediate short hit B symbol is stopped It is controlled to switch to the low probability time saving state C. On the other hand, if it becomes "immediate short hit B" during the execution of the variable display of the 1st to 60th special symbols in the low probability time saving state A, the low probability time saving state A after the immediate short hit B pattern stops controlled to maintain. Thus, during the execution of the variable display of the 1st to 60th special symbols in the low probability time saving state A, the period during which switching to the low probability time saving state C is invalid when it becomes "immediate short hit B" On the other hand, during the execution of the variable display of the 61st to 100th special symbols in the low-probability time-saving state A, switching to the low-probability time-saving state C when it becomes "immediate short-time hit B" It is set as a valid period.

Also, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, if it becomes "immediate short-time hit C" in the N-th special symbol variation display, "100-N<20" (N = low-probability time-saving state B When the switching condition of the number of variable display of special symbols in the low probability time saving state A that has already been executed) is satisfied, from the low probability time saving state A to the low probability time saving state C after the immediate short hit C symbol is stopped controlled to switch. That is, if the "immediate short hit C" during the execution of the variable display of the 81st to 100th special symbols in the low probability time saving state A, from the low probability time saving state A after the stop of the immediate short hit C symbol It is controlled to switch to the low probability time saving state C. On the other hand, if it becomes "immediate short hit C" during the execution of the variable display of the 1st to 80th special symbols in the low probability time saving state A, the low probability time saving state A after the immediate short hit C symbol stops controlled to maintain. Thus, during the execution of the variable display of the 1st to 80th special symbols in the low probability time saving state A, the period in which switching to the low probability time saving state C is invalid when it becomes "immediate short hit C" On the other hand, during the execution of the variable display of the 81st to 100th special symbols in the low probability time saving state A, switching to the low probability time saving state C when it becomes "immediate short hit C" It is set as a valid period.

Next, the production progress before and after the immediate short hit during the control of the low probability time saving state A will be described. In this example, of the 1st to 100th special symbol variation display during the control of the low probability time saving state A, at the time of the Nth special symbol variation display (symbol variation Z) "immediate short hit A", A case of controlling to switch from the low probability time saving state A to the low probability time saving state C after the stop of the immediate short hitting A symbol is described.

Specifically, during the execution of the variable display of the 1st to 100th special symbols during the control of the low probability time saving state A, switching to the low probability time saving state C when it becomes "immediate short hit A" It is set as a valid period. Then, during the period when switching to the low probability time saving state C is effective, when it becomes "immediate short hit A", it is controlled to switch from the low probability time saving state A to the low probability time saving state C, and the low probability time saving state Since the period of control to the state is extended, it is set as an executable period of the extended acquisition effect. In addition, during the period when switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is valid, in addition to executing the “pull-back mode effect” indicating that the low-probability time-saving state A is being controlled, in the effect display device 1600, the low "Extension chance display" is executed to indicate that it is possible to extend the period of control to the probability time saving state. Here, the "extension chance display" can be exemplified by an effect display in which a message image regarding the extension ("If character X appears, the time may be shortened and extended...") is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (illustration omitted). As a result, during the execution of the "extension chance display", attention can be paid to whether or not the extension acquisition performance is to be executed, and it is possible to enjoy whether or not the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state is extended.

Also, during the execution of the symbol variation Z, which is the Nth special symbol variation display, among the 1st to 100th special symbol variation displays during the control of the low probability time saving state A, when it becomes an immediate short hit Executes the "extended acquisition performance", controls to switch from the low probability time saving state A to the low probability time saving state C after the immediate short winning A pattern is stopped, and extends the period of control to the low probability state. . Here, the “extended acquisition effect” is a display that encourages whether or not the character X will appear from the end of the screen of the effect display device 1600, and a successful pattern in which the character X appears in the center of the screen of the effect display device 1600 (low probability time saving effect). A production that succeeds in extending the period of control to the state) and a failure pattern in which the character X does not appear from the end of the screen of the production display device 1600 (a production that fails to extend the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state) ) (not shown). In addition, during the execution of the pattern variation Z, it is set as an executable period of the extended acquisition performance, and the "extended acquisition performance" that notifies whether the period of control to the low probability time saving state is extended or not is executed. In the ``extension acquisition performance'' executed when an immediate short win is achieved, a performance (extension acquisition performance of a success pattern) is executed to succeed in extending the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state. As a result, during the execution of the "extended acquisition performance", it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state will be extended.

It should be noted that, if the immediate short hit during the control of the low probability non-time saving state, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C after the stop of the immediate short hit pattern, but for the "extended acquisition effect", low It is an effect that is not executed when it becomes an immediate short hit during the control of the probability non-time saving state. Thereby, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, it is possible to enjoy an effect different from the low-probability non-time-saving state.

In addition, during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols for the 1st to 100th times during the control of the low probability time saving state A, it is set as an executable period of the extended acquisition effect, and even if it does not become an immediate short hit, the low It is possible to execute an “extended acquisition effect” that notifies whether the period of control to the probability time saving state is extended or not. In this example, during the execution of the symbol variation X which is the N-2th special symbol variation display during the control of the low probability time saving state A, although it does not become an immediate short hit, the "extended acquisition effect" is executed, and the immediate short In the "extended acquisition performance" that is executed when the win does not occur, a fake performance (failure pattern extension acquisition performance) that fails to extend the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state is executed. While the symbol variation X is being executed, the "extended acquisition effect" is executed, but since the immediate short winning pattern is not executed, the immediate short winning pattern is not stopped and displayed.

In addition, after switching from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C, it is set as a period in which switching to a new low-probability time-saving state C becomes effective when it becomes "immediate short hit". . Even in such a case, the remaining number of variable display of special symbols executable in the low probability time saving state C and the variable display of special symbols executable in the new low probability time saving state C based on the immediate short hit When the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the new low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short winning is greater, the probability is low after the immediate short winning symbols are stopped. It is controlled to switch from the time saving state C to a new low probability time saving state C. In other words, when the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the new low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short hit is greater, the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state is extended. In addition, during the period in which switching to the new low-probability short working hours state C is effective, it is set as an executable period of the extended acquisition effect.

Also, when switching from the low probability time saving state A to the low probability time saving state C, during the control of the low probability time saving state C, the "help mode S" corresponding to the low probability time saving state C is being executed. It is not switched to the "help mode S effect" indicating that, and the "pull back mode effect" that has been executed in the low probability time saving state A is continuously executed. In this way, before and after switching from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C, the control of the low-probability time-saving state A continues (extended) because it does not change in that the “pull-back mode effect” is performed. You can make it look like In addition, after switching from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C, it is set as a period in which switching to a new low-probability time-saving state C becomes effective when it becomes “immediate short hit”. Since then, the effect display device 1600 continues to execute the "extended chance display".

In the above, during the execution of the symbol variation Z, which is the N-th special symbol variation display during the control of the low probability time saving state A and the low probability time saving state B, when it becomes an immediate short hit, the immediate short hit At the time of the pattern fluctuation Z, the "extended acquisition effect" (extended acquisition effect of the success pattern) is executed to notify that the period of control to the low probability time saving state will be extended, but the "extended acquisition effect ” may be executed at the following timing. That is, after switching to the low probability time saving state C without executing the "extension acquisition effect" at the time of the symbol fluctuation Z that became an immediate short hit, the low probability time saving state that is set before becoming an immediate short hit At the timing when the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in A or low-probability time-saving state B expires, "extended acquisition effect" (extended acquisition effect of success pattern) may be executed. For example, the number of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the low probability time saving state A is set to 100 times, and the 80th special symbol variation display during the control of the low probability time saving state A Pattern variation Z During the execution, if it becomes an immediate short hit, after switching to the low probability time saving state C, a special symbol that can be executed in the low probability time saving state A set before becoming an immediate short hit At the timing when the number of times of variable display reaches 100 times, ``extended acquisition performance'' is executed, and the remaining number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state C at that time is notified. As a result, it is possible to make it look as if the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state is suddenly extended without noticing the immediate short-time winning until the ``extended acquisition performance'' is executed.

Also, during the execution of the symbol variation Z, which is the variation display of the N-th special symbol during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A and the low-probability time-saving state B, when it becomes an immediate short hit, the immediate short hit and At the time of the pattern fluctuation Z, the "extended acquisition effect" (extended acquisition effect of the successful pattern) is executed to notify that the period of control to the low probability time saving state will be extended, but the "extended acquisition effect" When power failure occurs during the execution of , after the power is turned on again, the return processing for the execution of the "extended acquisition effect" is performed. In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the execution of the ``extension acquisition effect'', the ``extension acquisition effect'' is executed after the power is turned on again to control the low probability time saving state. It is possible to recognize that the period is extended, and to prevent the inability to grasp how long the period of control to the low-probability short working hours state continues.

Next, the immediate short hit time during the control of the low probability time saving state A of 599 times started in the wake of the big hit D will be described. In order to prevent confusion with "100 low-probability time-saving state A that was started in the wake of the jackpot C" described earlier, below, for convenience of explanation, 599 low-probability time-savings started in the wake of the jackpot D State A is described as "low-probability time-saving state A2".

During the control of the low-probability time-saving state A2, when it becomes an immediate short-hit, regardless of the remaining number of fluctuation display of the special symbols that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state A2, after the immediate short-hit design is stopped. The low-probability time-saving state A2 is maintained without switching to the low-probability time-saving state C, and the low-probability time-saving state A2 continues for the remaining number of variable display of the special symbols that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state A2. Controlling (disable switching to low-probability time-saving state C). That is, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A2, the above-mentioned "immediate short-hit design invalid period (period not controlled to low-probability time-saving state C triggered by the special symbol lottery result becoming "immediate short hit") ” is performed. Low probability time saving state A2, as described above, is one that continues continuously to low probability time saving state B through 599 times of special symbol fluctuation display, and in the middle of such low probability time saving state A2 Low probability time saving state C If it switches to , depending on the timing, there is a risk that the continuity with the low probability time saving state B will be cut off, but in this example, such a disadvantageous situation for the player can be avoided. Also, for example, when switching to the low probability time saving state C 100 times in the variable display of the special symbol after the 501st time, although the above-described disadvantageous situation does not occur, it becomes a low probability time saving state C without any profit Therefore, there is a concern that the original interest of the low-probability time saving state C will be reduced, but in this example, such concerns can be avoided for the player.

In the above, the low probability of reducing working hours state A and the low probability of reducing working hours state C, the low probability of reducing working hours state B and the low probability of reducing working hours state C are set to the same reduction of working hours performance. In other words, in the low-probability time-saving states A to C, when the normal lottery is performed, the probability that the lottery result of the normal pattern is "normal hit" is increased, and the lottery result of the normal pattern is "normal hit". , By increasing the time and the number of times that the variable winning opening 2003 closed by the variable winning opening door 2521 is in an open state, acceptance of the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003 is facilitated. The probability that the lottery result of the symbol is "normal hit" and the time and number of times that the variable prize winning opening 2003 is open are set to be the same. On the other hand, the low probability of reducing working hours state A and the low probability of reducing working hours state C, the low probability of reducing working hours state B and the low probability of reducing working hours state C may be configured to be set to different time saving performances. In such a configuration, the higher the probability that the lottery result of the normal pattern is "normal winning", the more the time and the number of times that the variable winning opening 2003 is open, the more the game ball to the variable winning opening 2003. It is easy to accept B, and it is said that the time saving performance is high.

Specifically, the first time-saving control in the low-probability time-saving state A and the low-probability time-saving state B, and the second time-saving control in the low-probability time-saving state C are set. When the time saving control of 2 has higher time saving performance, when it becomes an immediate short hit during the control of the low probability time saving state A or the low probability time saving state B, the low probability time saving state after the immediate short hitting pattern stops. It is controlled to switch from A or low probability shortening working hours state B to low probability shortening working hours state C. On the other hand, if the first time-saving control has higher time-saving performance than the second time-saving control, when the immediate short hit occurs during the control of the low probability time-saving state A or the low probability time-saving state B, immediate short It is controlled so as to maintain the low probability time saving state A and the low probability time saving state B without switching to the low probability time saving state C after the stop of the winning pattern. As a result, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A and the low-probability time-saving state B, it is possible to enjoy whether the player can switch to the low-probability time-saving state C, which is time-saving performance advantageous to the player.

Also, in the above, if the first time-saving control than the second time-saving control has a higher time-saving performance, when it becomes an immediate short hit during the control of the low probability time-saving state A or the low probability time-saving state B , It is controlled to maintain the low probability time saving state A and low probability time saving state B after the immediate short hit pattern is stopped, but in addition to this, when it becomes an immediate short hit, the low probability time saving state A and The remaining number of variable display of special symbols executable in the low-probability time-saving state B and the number of variable display of special symbols executable in the low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short hit are compared, If the number of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the low-probability short-time state C based on the immediate short hit is larger, the low-probability short-time state A or the low-probability short-time state B after the stop of the immediate short-time hit pattern You may control to switch to the probability time saving state C. As a result, when the remaining number of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the low probability time saving state A or the low probability time saving state B is small, the low probability time saving state that the period of control to the low probability time saving state is extended. You can enjoy whether you can switch to C or not.

Also, in the above, the same period and the same I tried to control the low-probability time-saving state C with the time-saving performance, but apart from this, depending on the game state when it became an immediate short hit, the period of the low-probability time-saving state C and the time-saving performance were to be different. can be For example, when it becomes an immediate short hit A in a low probability non-time saving state A of 100 times triggered by the jackpot C, 100 times low as described above as a low probability time saving state C based on this immediate short hit A While switching to the probability short working state C, when it becomes an immediate short hit A in the low probability non-short working state B, 120 low probability short working hours as a low probability short working state C based on this immediate short hit A Switching to state C may be controlled. Also, for example, when the immediate short hit A occurs in the low probability non-time saving state A 100 times triggered by the big hit C, the first above-described low probability time saving state C based on this immediate short hit A While switching to the low-probability time-saving state C with time-saving control, when it becomes an immediate short-time hit A in the low-probability non-time-saving state B, the low-probability time-saving state C based on this immediate short time A is second. You may make it switch-control to the low probability time-saving state C with 2 time-saving control.

As another example, when the immediate short hit A occurs in the low probability non-time saving state A 100 times triggered by the jackpot C, the low probability time saving state C based on this immediate short hit A is described above. While controlling switching to the low probability time saving state C 100 times as described, when it becomes the immediate short hit A again in the low probability time saving state C based on the immediate short hit A, this second immediate short hit You may make it switch-control to 120 times of low probability time-saving states C as low-probability time-saving state C based on A. Also, for example, when the immediate short hit A occurs in the low probability non-time saving state A 100 times triggered by the big hit C, the second above-described low probability time saving state C based on this immediate short hit A While switching to the low-probability time-saving state C with time-saving control, when it becomes the immediate short-time hit A again in the low-probability time-saving state C based on this immediate short-time hit A, this second immediate short-time hit Switching control to the low probability time saving state C with the third time saving control (time saving control with higher time saving performance than the second time saving control) as the low probability time saving state C based on A may be performed.

In this way, the period of the low-probability time-saving state C and the time-saving performance are varied according to the game state when the instant short-hit occurs. Interest can be improved.

[Restrictions on setting suggestion effects when ID codes do not match]
(About ID code)
In this embodiment, a game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the game area 5a can be viewed from the front, and is attached to the door frame 3 at the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A door frame top unit 450 (decorative member), and an effect operation unit 300 (operating device) attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player are attached. As shown in FIG. 215, the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit 300 can be attached and detached while the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the game island in the hall. , the predetermined game board 5, the door frame top unit 450, and the performance operation unit 300 can be installed as a set as one group for each model series. That is, when changing to a new model series, the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450, and the effect corresponding to the model series before the change are installed in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the game island in the hall. After removing the operation unit 300, the game board 5 corresponding to the new model series, the door frame top unit 450, and the performance operation unit 300 are attached. By adopting such a configuration, when it is desired to update not only the playability but also the appearance of the game machine when changing the model, the cost of changing the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 (door frame base unit 100) can be suppressed, and efficiency can be increased. It is possible to completely renovate the game performance and the appearance of the game machine.

A peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 is electrically connected to a door frame top relay board (not shown) attached to the door frame top unit 450 . The door frame top relay board includes a door frame top center decorative board 455 , a door frame top left decorative board 456 , a door frame top right decorative board 457 , a top center speaker, a top side speaker, and a door frame secondary of the door frame base unit 100 . It is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105 . As a result, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on, for example, the door frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 via the door frame top relay board. The light emission of various LEDs can be controlled.

Also, the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 is electrically connected to the operation section relay board 332 attached to the effect operation unit 300 . The operation part relay board 332 includes the effect operation part peripheral decoration board 320 (front decoration board 321 and rear decoration board 322), button outer decoration board 355, vibration motor 356, contact detection sensor main body 358, button middle decoration board 364, and operation buttons. It is for relaying connection between the elevation drive motor 367, the pressure detection sensor 373, the elevation detection sensor 374, the projection force detection sensor 375, the projection force adjustment drive motor 381, and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210. be. As a result, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 can control light emission of various LEDs mounted on the front decoration board 321 and the rear decoration board 322 via the operation part relay board 332, for example.

As shown in FIG. 216, the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450 and the operation part relay board 332 attached to the effect operation unit 300 are provided with unique numbers for identifying the model series. A unique ID code, which is special information to which a unique code (a unique code that exists in the world) is added, is stored in advance. This ID code is unique to each model series and cannot be rewritten using an external device. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 can take out the ID code from the door frame top relay board and the operation part relay board 332 and refer to it. The RAM built in the peripheral controller 1511 stores a table for referring to the ID code attached to the door frame top relay board and the operation part relay board 332 . The ID code stored in this table matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450 whose model series matches that of the game board 5. The ID code of the operation part relay board 332 attached to the effect operation unit 300 and the ID code of the operation part relay board 332 are matched with each other.

When the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450. A predetermined determination period for determining whether or not they match, and whether or not the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the operation section relay board 332 attached to the effect operation unit 300 match. judged within. Here, when the door frame top unit 450 matching the model series (in a regular relationship) is attached to the game board 5, the ID code stored in the reference table and the door frame The ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the top unit 450 matches, while the model series of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the game board 5 (not in a regular relationship). If installed, the respective ID codes will not match. Similarly, when an effect operation unit 300 matching the model series (in a regular relationship) is attached to the game board 5, the ID code stored in the reference table and the effect operation unit The ID code of the operation part relay board 332 attached to the 300 matches the ID code, and on the other hand, the production operation unit 300 is attached to the game board 5 with a model series that does not match (not in a regular relationship). If there is, the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the operation section relay board 332 attached to the effect operation unit 300 do not match.

When only the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is used to indicate that the effect operation unit 300 whose model series does not match is attached. In-error notification pattern 1 (for example, display of "Please check the type of the door frame top unit") is executed. Further, when only the ID code of the effect operation unit 300 does not match the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is used to indicate that the effect operation unit 300 whose model series does not match is attached. In-error notification pattern 2 to be notified (for example, display of "Please check the type of the effect operation unit") is executed. Further, when the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 and the ID code of the effect operation unit 300 do not match with the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is used to display the model series. Error notification pattern 3 (for example, "Check the types of the door frame top unit and the production operation unit") to notify that the door frame top unit 450 that does not match and the production operation unit 300 that does not match the model series is installed. display).

On the other hand, when the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 are not attached to the door frame 3, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the door frame top relay board and the operation part relay board. The ID code cannot be retrieved from the substrate 332 and referenced. In such a case, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 reads the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450. and whether the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the operation section relay board 332 attached to the effect operation unit 300 match. At that time, the ID code is not input to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the ID code cannot be confirmed. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is disconnected if the ID code is not input from the door frame top relay board or the operation part relay board 332 even after a predetermined determination period. It is determined to be in the state of

In addition, when only the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 cannot be confirmed (cannot be obtained) with respect to the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is used to notify that the effect operation unit 300 is not attached. Medium notification pattern 4 (for example, display of "Please check the connection of the door frame top unit") is executed. In addition, when only the ID code of the effect operation unit 300 cannot be confirmed (cannot be obtained) with respect to the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is used to notify that the effect operation unit 300 is not attached. Information pattern 5 (for example, display of "Please check the connection of the production operation unit") is executed. Further, when neither the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 nor the ID code of the effect operation unit 300 can be confirmed (acquired) with respect to the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is used to display the door frame. An error notification pattern 6 (for example, display of "Please check the connection between the door frame top unit and the effect operation unit") for notifying that the top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 are not attached is executed.

Here, regarding the game board 5, the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450 and the ID code of the operation part relay board 332 attached to the effect operation unit 300 match. Various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5 can be controlled to emit light, regardless of whether or not there is, during execution of normal effects (effects during variation and effects during non-variation). Similarly, regarding the game board 5, even if there is a part for which the ID code has not been confirmed among the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300, normal effects (effects during fluctuation and effects during non-variation ), the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5 can be controlled.

Further, regarding the door frame top unit 450, when the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450, normally (effect during fluctuation or effect during non-fluctuation) is executed, via the door frame top relay board, for example, door frame top center decoration board 455, door frame top left decoration board 456, door frame top right Light emission of various LEDs mounted on the decorative board 457 can be controlled, but if they do not match, the light emission of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the model series (there is no regular relationship). Various LEDs mounted on the board are not controlled to emit light, and the various LEDs are turned off. In addition, when the door frame top unit 450 is not attached and the ID code of the door frame top relay board cannot be confirmed, the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame top unit 450 is controlled. There is no

Similarly, for the effect operation unit 300, when the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the operation section relay board 332 attached to the effect operation unit 300, normal At the time of execution of effects (effects during variation and effects during non-variation), various LEDs mounted on the front decoration board 321 and the rear decoration board 322, for example, are controlled to emit light via the operation part relay board 332. On the other hand, if they do not match, the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the production operation unit 300 that does not match the series of the model (not in a regular relationship) are not controlled to emit light. The various LEDs are turned off. Further, when the effect operation unit 300 is not attached and the operation part relay board 332 is not confirmed, the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the effect operation unit 300 are not controlled.

Further, when a predetermined execution condition is established, when controlling light emission of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5, the light emitting board of the door frame top unit 450 as a member positioned around the game board 5 Light emission control of various mounted LEDs and various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the effect operation unit 300 is performed in cooperation. As a result, not only the game board 5 but also the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 can be used to perform an integrated light emitting effect. However, among the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300, for parts whose ID codes do not match the game board 5, it is possible to control light emission of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting boards of the parts that do not match. Therefore, it is not possible to participate in the lighting performance. Similarly, among the door frame top unit 450 and the production operation unit 300, the parts that are not attached to the door frame 3 and whose ID codes cannot be confirmed are mounted on the light emitting boards of the parts that have not been confirmed. Since there is no light emission control for the various LEDs that are present, it is not possible to participate in the light emission effect.

In this example, the game board 5 can be attached to and detached from the body frame 4, and the game board 5 can be installed on the body frame 4 determined in advance. The peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 is electrically connected to the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 . The interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 includes the plate left decorative board 273 provided around the door window 101a of the door frame 3 via the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3. Plate right decorative board 278, door frame left side upper decorative board 422, door frame left side lower decorative board 423, door frame right side upper decorative board 432, door frame right side lower decorative board 433, door frame top center decorative board 455, It is connected to the door frame top left decorative board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 . As a result, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the door window 101 a of the door frame 3 via the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 , the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 . Plate left decorative board 273, plate right decorative board 278, door frame left side upper decorative board 422, door frame left side lower decorative board 423, door frame right side upper decorative board 432, door frame right side Light emission of various LEDs mounted on the lower decoration board 433, the door frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 can be controlled.

As shown in FIG. 216, the interface board 635 of the body frame 4 has a unique ID, which is special information attached with a unique code (a code that is unique in the world) for identifying the model series. A code is pre-stored. This ID code is unique to each model series and cannot be rewritten using an external device. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 can take out the ID code from the interface board 635 and refer to it. A RAM built in the peripheral controller 1511 stores a table for referring to the ID code attached to the interface board 635 . The ID code stored in this table matches the ID code of the interface board 635 of the body frame 4 that matches the model series.

When the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the interface board 635 of the main frame 4. Judging within the judgment period. Here, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 that matches the model series (there is a legitimate relationship), the ID code stored in the reference table and the main body frame 4 If the game board 5 is attached to the body frame 4 that matches the ID code of the interface board 635, but the model series does not match (there is no regular relationship), it is stored in the reference table. The ID code stored in the main body frame 4 and the ID code of the interface board 635 of the body frame 4 do not match each other. If the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the interface board 635 of the body frame 4 do not match, the model series do not match (there is no regular relationship). On the other hand, since the game board 5 is attached, it is not possible to perform the shooting control for shooting the game ball B from the ball shooting device 540, and the game is stopped.

As described above, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, the door frame top unit is used as a member positioned around the game board 5 when controlling light emission of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5. Light emission control of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of 450 and various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the effect operation unit 300 is performed in cooperation. Light emission control can also be performed cooperatively for the various LEDs provided. As a result, not only the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300, but also the door frame 3 can be used to perform an integrated light emitting effect.

(About setting suggestion production)
In this embodiment, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit 300 are Various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board, various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the door frame 3, etc. are used to execute a setting suggesting effect suggesting the set value currently set. In addition, the currently set value is stored in the RAM on the main control board 1310 side, and at a predetermined timing (when the change of the set value is completed, when the pattern starts to change, etc.), the current setting By transmitting a command related to the currently set value to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the currently set value can be grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side.

In the setting suggesting effect, any one of the suggesting effects A to D is executed as the effect corresponding to the set value currently set. Specifically, an execution determination (execution lottery) is performed as to which of the suggestive effects A to D is to be executed. X is obtained, suggestive effect A suggesting a set value of 6, suggestive effect B suggesting that there is a high possibility of a high set value (set values 4 to 6), even set values (set values 2, 4, 6 ), or a suggestion effect D suggesting that the odd set values (1, 3, 5) are likely to be the currently set value. Determined according to the random value X.

Here, when the set value currently set is the set value 1, the suggestive effect D has a high probability (suggestive effect A: suggestive effect B: suggestive effect C: suggestive effect D=0:1:1:8 ), an effect is determined according to the random number value X with reference to the suggested effect distribution table 1 determined in step 1). Further, when the set value currently set is the set value 2, there is a high probability that the suggestive effect C is performed (suggestive effect A: suggestive effect B: suggestive effect C: suggestive effect D=0:1:8:1). An effect is determined according to the random value X with reference to the suggested effect distribution table 2 determined by . Further, when the set value currently set is the set value 3, there is a high probability that the suggestive effect D is performed (suggestive effect A: suggestive effect B: suggestive effect C: suggestive effect D=0:1:1:8). An effect is determined according to the random value X with reference to the suggested effect distribution table 3 determined by . In addition, when the currently set value is set value 4, there is a high probability that suggestive effect B or suggestive effect C is performed (suggestive effect A: suggestive effect B: suggestive effect C: suggestive effect D=0:5: 4: 1) refers to the suggested effect distribution table 4 determined in 1), effect determination corresponding to the random value X is performed. In addition, when the currently set value is 5, the probability that the suggestive effect B or the suggestive effect D is high (suggestive effect A: suggestive effect B: suggestive effect C: suggestive effect D = 0: 5: 1:4), referring to the suggested effect allocation table 5, the effect is determined according to the random value X. Further, when the set value currently set is set value 6, suggestive effects A to D including suggestive effect A suggesting set value 6 which is not decided when set values are 1 to 5. with a predetermined probability (suggestive effect A: suggestive effect B: suggestive effect C: suggestive effect D=3:4:2:1). is done. In other words, the suggestive effects A to D may be output regardless of the current set value, so the set value is not fixed, but when the suggestive effect A is executed, the currently set value is set. It is determined that the setting value that is being used is the setting value of 6. In this way, when the suggestive effect is executed, the user can have an expectation corresponding to the suggestion of the set value that can be grasped from the suggestive effect.

When the suggestive effect is executed, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5 and the light emitting board of the door frame top unit 450 are illuminated using effect data for emitting light in a predetermined color for each type of suggestive effect. Various LEDs mounted, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the effect operation unit 300, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame 3, and the like are controlled to emit light. Specifically, as a suggestive effect A suggesting a set value of 6, a suggestive effect B that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode (rainbow color) and suggests that the possibility of a high set value (set values 4 to 6) is high. As flashes in red, suggesting that the possibility of even setting values (setting values 2, 4, 6) is high. As the suggestion effect D suggesting that the possibility of 5) is high, light emission is controlled to blink in green.

As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame top unit 450, and mounted on the light emitting board of the effect operation unit 300 The various LEDs mounted on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame 3 can be divided into a plurality of groups and light emission can be controlled for each group, and each group can be caused to emit light of a predetermined color. is possible.

First, as described above in detail, the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 attached to the game board 5 is a back front peripheral edge decoration body formed in an annular shape along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a when assembled to the game board 5. 3201, and a back front peripheral decoration board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted for luminous decoration of the back front peripheral decoration 3201. The back front peripheral decoration 3201 A plurality of LEDs on the peripheral edge decoration substrate enable each of the plurality of parts divided in the circumferential direction to be independently decorated with light. As shown in FIG. 217, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front peripheral edge decoration board as the light emitting substrate of the game board 5 are mounted on the back front peripheral edge decorative body 3201 for luminous decoration on the upper left part of the back front peripheral edge. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the decoration board is LED1, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front peripheral edge decoration board for decorating the lower left part is LED2, and a back front peripheral edge decoration board for decorating the lower right part is LED2. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the board is divided into LED3, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front peripheral decoration board for decorating the upper right part is LED4. It is possible to control the LEDs in the same group to emit light of the same color.

As shown in FIG. 218, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting substrate of the door frame top unit 450 are mounted on the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, LED5 is mounted on the door frame top center decoration substrate 455, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the door frame top center decoration substrate 455. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top right decorative board 457 is divided into LED6, and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is divided into LED7, and the LEDs of the same group are controlled to emit the same color for each group of LEDs 5 to 7. It is possible to control the light emission to

Various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting substrate of the effect operation unit 300 are mounted on the front decoration substrate 321 of the effect operation unit peripheral decoration substrate 320, and LED 8 is mounted on the rear decoration substrate 322. A plurality of LEDs are divided into LEDs 9, . . . , and it is possible to control the light emission of the LEDs for each group of the LEDs 8 to 9 to control the light emission of the LEDs in the same group to the same color.

Various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the door frame 3 are LED 10 mounted on the door-frame left-side upper decoration board 422 of the door-frame left-side unit 420, and the door frame left-side unit 420 has a door frame. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 are LED 11, a plate left decorative substrate 273 provided behind the plate left decorative lens 272, and a plate right decorative substrate provided behind the plate right decorative lens 277. 278 is LED 12, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 of the door frame right side unit 430 is LED 13, and the door frame right side upper decoration substrate of the door frame right side unit 430 is LED 12. A plurality of LEDs mounted on 432 are divided into LEDs 14, and it is possible to control the light emission of the LEDs for each group of the LEDs 11 to 14 and control the light emission of the LEDs in the same group to the same color.

In addition, as the light-emitting substrate of the game board 5, in addition to the above-described back front peripheral edge decoration substrate, a variable winning opening decoration substrate (not shown) for decorating the variable winning opening 2003 with light emission, and the first starting opening 2004 A first starting port decorative substrate (not shown) for decoration and a second starting port decorative substrate (not shown) for decorating the second starting port 2005 with light emission are provided. In this example, among the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting substrate of the game board 5, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the variable winning opening decoration substrate is LED 15, and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first start opening decoration substrate is LED 16. , and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the second starting port decoration board are divided into LEDs 17, and the LEDs in the same group can be controlled to emit the same color by controlling the emission of the LEDs for each group of the LEDs 15 to 17. It's becoming

FIG. 219 is a timing chart showing an example of a suggestive effect executed as an effect during symbol variation. Here, when the power is turned on, the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 match those of the game board 5, and the rainbow A case of executing a light emitting effect of lighting in a light emitting mode will be described below.

First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, as an effect according to the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command, synchronize with the variation display of the special symbol. The effect display device 1600 starts a variable effect such as a variable display of decorative patterns, and in conjunction with the display of the effect display device 1600, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled (timing t0). Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern reaches a predetermined timing, the effect display device 1600 displays a display prompting the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 (for example, "effect Push the operation button!”) is executed.

Then, at timing t1, the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, or the button valid period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses without the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed. Then, LEDs 1 and 2 of the game board 5 are "red", LEDs 3 and 4 of the game board 5 are "purple", LEDs 5 and 6 of the door frame top unit 450 are "blue", LED 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the door The LED 8 of the frame 3 is "green", the LED 9 of the door frame 3 and the LED 10 of the door frame 3 are "orange", the LEDs 11-12 of the door frame 3 are "yellow", and the LEDs 13-14 of the door frame 3 are "white". , to flash. That is, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are caused to emit light of different colors for each two groups. .

Then, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are changed every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). , the LED emitting in "red" is "purple", the LED emitting in "purple" is in "blue", the LED emitting in "blue" is in "green", and the LED emitting in "green" The LED is "orange", the LED emitting "orange" is "yellow", the LED emitting "yellow" is "white", the LED emitting "white" is "red", change to In this way, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are set for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). each time, the luminescent color of the LEDs in each of the two groups is changed in a predetermined order of "red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white→red" until timing t10 is reached. (For example, 5 seconds), such regular changes are repeated.

In this way, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 emit light in a short unit time. By controlling the sequential switching of a plurality of luminescent colors, it is possible to visually recognize that these LEDs are cooperating to emit light in a rainbow luminescence mode, resulting in an impactful luminescence. can perform the performance. In addition, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled by interlocking the LEDs 1 to 14. 14 are caused to emit light in a plurality of colors so that each two groups emit light in different colors, and furthermore, by switching the light emission colors in a short time, a light emission performance with more impact than usual can be executed.

In this example, as light emission in the rainbow light emission mode, seven colors are caused to appear at the same time using a plurality of LEDs, and the respective light emission colors are regularly switched. , it is not necessary to use seven colors, and it is sufficient that three or more predetermined colors appear at the same time.

On the other hand, as the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, when executing the light emission effect lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the effect operation unit 300 The LEDs 8-9 of the door frame 3 and the LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3 are involved, while the LEDs 15-17 of the game board 5 are not involved. As for the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5, during the execution period of the suggestive effect A, the light emitting effect corresponding to the variation pattern is continued regardless of the light emitting colors constituting the rainbow light emitting mode.

Further, as the suggestive effect A suggesting the set value 6, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and each of the plurality of display areas is different during the execution period of the light emitting effect lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. A rainbow mode effect image displayed in display colors is displayed. In such a rainbow effect image, the display colors displayed in each of the plurality of display areas are changed to "red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white" every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). → Red" is changed in a predetermined order, and such regular changes are repeated until timing t10 is reached (for example, 5 seconds). It should be noted that the object for displaying the effect image in the rainbow mode may be a effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, for example, a background image, or may be a part of the display area of the effect display device 1600. Effect images displayed on the screen, for example, effect images of characters, items, and the like, may be targeted.

Further, as described above in detail, the front upper back effect unit 3300 attached to the game board 5 includes a front upper back decoration body 3310 which is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a rear upper front decoration body 3310. Equipped with a back top front decoration board (not shown) provided with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back top front lifting unit (not shown) for lifting and lowering the back top front decoration body 3310 there is The back upper front decoration body 3310 is provided so that seven sumo rankings such as "yokozuna", "ozeki", and "sekiwake" are arranged from the left, and the LED of the back upper front decoration board , each of the seven numbers can be independently decorated with light. In this example, as a suggestive effect A suggesting a set value 6, seven numbered display bodies are lit in a rainbow light emitting mode of emitting different light colors during the execution period of the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. In such a rainbow luminous display, the luminous colors emitted in each of the seven numbers are changed in a predetermined order of "red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white→red". Such regular changes are repeated until timing t10 is reached (for example, 5 seconds).

As explained above, when executing the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 during the fluctuation of the pattern, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the effect operation unit LEDs 8 to 9 of 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in performing a rainbow lighting effect, but LEDs 1 to 14 are also involved when suggesting effects B to D are performed. Then, the light emission effect is executed. That is, in the case of executing the suggestion effect B suggesting that there is a high possibility of a high set value (set values 4 to 6), the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the effect LEDs 8 to 9 of the operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to execute a red blinking light emission effect, suggesting that the even number setting values (setting values 2, 4, and 6) are highly likely. When the suggestion effect C is executed, the LEDs 1 to 14 are also involved to execute the light emission effect of blinking in blue, suggesting that the probability of the odd set value (1, 3, 5) is high. When the effect D is to be executed, the LEDs 1 to 14 are similarly involved to execute the light emission effect of blinking in green.

Specifically, in the case of executing the suggestion effect B suggesting that the possibility of a high set value (set values 4 to 6) is high, the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated by the player at timing t1. When the button effective period (for example, 5 seconds) passes without being pressed or the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and LEDs 5 to 4 of the door frame top unit 450 7. Make the LEDs 8-9 of the effect operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3 flash in red. Also, in the case of executing the suggestion effect C suggesting that there is a high possibility of even-numbered set values (set values 2, 4, and 6), the LEDs 1 to 14 are similarly caused to flash in "blue". Also, when executing the suggestive effect D suggesting that the probability of the odd set value (1, 3, 5) is high, the LEDs 1 to 14 are similarly caused to flash in "green". That is, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are made to flash in the same color for each group. to emit light.

(Restrictions on setting suggestion effects when ID codes do not match)
In the above description, the case where the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 match those of the game board 5 when the power is turned on has been described. and the ID code of the effect operation unit 300 do not match, at least a part of the light emitting effect in the light emitting colors corresponding to the suggestive effects A to D is restricted when the suggestive effect is executed. ing. Similarly, when either one or both of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 are not connected to the door frame 3, when the suggestive effect is executed, the suggestive effects A to D are performed. At least a part of the light emission effect in the light emission color is restricted.

In this example, when the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 matches the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 can be controlled to emit light. If they do not match, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 are not controlled to emit light, and the LEDs 5 to 7 are extinguished. Similarly, when the ID code of the effect operation unit 300 matches the game board 5, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 can be controlled to emit light. If not, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are not controlled to emit light, and the LEDs 8 to 9 are extinguished. That is, among the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300, for parts whose ID codes do not match the game board 5, it is possible to control light emission of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting boards of the parts that do not match. Instead, the LED is turned off while the pattern is fluctuating or not fluctuating.

FIG. 220 is a timing chart showing an example of a suggestive effect that is executed as an effect during symbol fluctuation when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5 . Here, when the power is turned on, the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 out of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 does not match the game board 5, and during the pattern fluctuation, the set value 6 As the suggestive effect A suggesting that, the case where execution of the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is determined will be described below. If the ID code of the effect operation unit 300 does not match the game board 5, or if the ID codes of both the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 do not match the game board 5 , the same control is performed during the execution period of the suggestive effect.

First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, as an effect according to the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command, synchronize with the variation display of the special symbol. In the effect display device 1600, a variable effect such as a variable display of decorative symbols is started, and in conjunction with the display of the effect display device 1600, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LED 10 of the door frame 3 14 are controlled to emit light (timing t0). At this time, for the door frame top unit 450 whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 are not controlled to emit light, and the LEDs 5 to 7 are turned off. Become. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern reaches a predetermined timing, the effect display device 1600 displays a display prompting an operation to the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 (for example, "Press the production operation button!") is executed (timing tA).

Then, when the button operation promotion effect is started at timing tA, among the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, Not only the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 whose ID code does not match the game board 5, but also the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 whose ID code matches the game board 5, the game board LEDs 1 to 4 of door frame 5 and LEDs 10 to 14 of door frame 3 are also extinguished. That is, when the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the game board 5, not only the door frame top unit 450 but also the effect operation unit 300 whose ID code matches the game board 5 is included. Thus, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are turned off.

Then, at timing t1, the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, or the button effective period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses without the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed. Then, as the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, although it is the timing to execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode, until the timing t10 is reached (for example, 5 seconds), light is emitted in the rainbow light emitting mode. No performance is performed. Specifically, among the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, the ID code for the game board 5 Not only the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 that do not match, but also the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 whose ID code matches the game board 5, and the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 The LED is turned off. That is, when the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the game board 5, not only the door frame top unit 450 but also the effect operation unit 300 whose ID code matches the game board 5 is included. Thus, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are turned off.

On the other hand, from the timing t1 to the timing t10, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are turned off. , the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in red. That is, when the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the game board 5, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, The LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 participate in the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 participate in the light emission effect of lighting in red.

As described above, if there is no part whose ID code does not match the game board 5 (all parts match), during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 , LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to light up in a rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, if there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the LEDs 1 to 14 are used to emit rainbow light during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A that suggests the set value 6. The execution of the light emitting effect that lights up is suppressed. If the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 cannot be controlled to emit light. 5 LEDs 1 to 4, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) are used to perform a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode. This results in an incomplete form in which a part is missing, and the light is emitted in a form in which the rainbow light emission form is not established. Therefore, if there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the ID code for the game board 5 is not issued during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6. By suppressing the execution of the lighting effect of lighting in the rainbow lighting mode including the matching parts, it is possible to prevent lighting in a mode in which the rainbow lighting mode is not established, and the suggestion performance A suggesting the set value 6 is executed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which it is not possible to determine whether or not there is

Further, as described above, when there is no part whose ID code does not match the game board 5 (all parts match), at the timing t1 at which the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 is executed, the variable While the execution of the performance corresponding to the variation pattern specified from the pattern command is stopped, when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the suggestion performance A suggesting the set value 6. At the timing tA before the timing t1 to execute, stop the execution of the effect according to the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command, LED1 ~ 4 of the game board 5, LED5 ~ 7 of the door frame top unit 450, The LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are turned off. As a result, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestive effect A suggesting the set value 6, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, It is possible to inform in advance that the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 cannot perform the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode.

Further, as described above, when there is no part whose ID code does not match the game board 5 (all parts match), the execution period of the suggestion effect A suggesting the setting value 6 (timing t1 to t10 ), the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light so as to change in part of the emission colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode, while there are parts whose ID codes do not match the game board 5. In this case, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are illuminated in red without changing the emission color. there is Here, when there is no part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5 (all parts match), a suggestion effect B suggesting that there is a high possibility of a high set value (set values 4 to 6). , the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are caused to flash red. In other words, if there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are replaced with a suggestive effect B in which the LEDs 10 to 14 are lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode as a suggestive effect A. It is performing a lighting effect that lights up in red similar to. As a result, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, the light emission effect lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed, so that the setting value 6 cannot be notified, By using the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 to light up in red, it is possible to indicate as if there is a high possibility of a high set value (set values 4 to 6), and nothing can be expected. You can prevent the situation from occurring.

It should be noted that if there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the execution period (timing t1 to t10 ), the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved, instead of flashing in red. , the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to perform a red lighting effect. In addition, when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the execution period (timing) of the suggestive effect C suggesting that the possibility of even-numbered set values (set values 2, 4, and 6) is high. t1 to t10), the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in the blue flashing effect. Instead, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to perform a blue lighting effect. In addition, when there is no part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5 (all parts match), a suggestive effect suggesting that there is a high possibility that the odd set values (1, 3, 5) are present. During the execution period of D (timings t1 to t10), LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved. Instead of the green flashing light emitting effect, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to perform the green light emitting effect.

In this example, when there is no part whose ID code does not match the game board 5 (all parts match), during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to execute a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode. On the other hand, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 continue to emit light in accordance with the variation pattern regardless of the colors of light that constitute the rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, even if there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 will be LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are not turned off, and the light emission effect according to the variation pattern is continued. I'm trying As a result, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed, but the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are changed according to the variation pattern. By continuing the light emission effect, it is possible to maintain a state in which expectations are given to the light emission effect corresponding to the variation pattern.

In addition, among the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting substrate of the game board 5, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the variable winning opening decoration substrate is LED 15, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first start opening decoration substrate is LED 16, the second A plurality of LEDs mounted on the two-start decorative substrate are divided into LEDs 17, and the LED mounting surfaces of these decorative substrates are coated with a white solder resist (protective material) to increase the reflection efficiency. It is For this reason, even when a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting full-color light are emitted in a wide variety of colors, it is possible to uniformly reflect all the light and produce vivid colors. The first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005 can be decorated with brighter and more vivid (clear) light emission by the LED 17, and the production effect can be enhanced. Also, for the LEDs 15 to 17, an LED that emits light only in a single color (for example, red) may be used. The LEDs 17 can make each of the second start ports 2005 brighter and more vividly (clearly) luminous and decorated, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, in this example, when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the same as the case where there is no part whose ID code does not match the game board 5 (all parts match), During the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestive effect A suggesting the set value 6, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. is displayed. In other words, if there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the door frame The LEDs 5 to 7 of the top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are not used to perform the lighting effects in the rainbow light emission mode. The effect image of the mode is displayed. As a result, as long as attention is paid to the light emitting area (light emitted by LEDs 1 to 14) around the display area of the effect display device 1600, it cannot be determined whether or not the suggestive effect A suggesting the set value 6 is being executed. By paying attention to the display area of the display device 1600, it can be understood that the setting value 6 is suggested by the effect image in the rainbow mode.

Further, in this example, when there is a part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5, the same as the case where there is no part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5 (all parts match), During the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decoration body 3310 are lit in a rainbow luminous mode that emits light of different luminous colors. In other words, when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the door frame The LEDs 5 to 7 of the top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are not used to perform the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. , and the seven numbered display bodies are lit in a rainbow luminous mode in which the luminous colors are different from each other. As a result, as long as attention is focused on the light emitting area (light emission by the LEDs 1 to 14) around the display area of the effect display device 1600, it cannot be determined whether or not the suggestive effect A suggesting the set value 6 is being executed. By paying attention to the back top front decoration 3310 over the display area of the display device 1600, it can be understood that the set value 6 is suggested by the light emission in the rainbow light emission mode.

Further, in this example, if there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, at the timing tA before the timing t1 at which the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 is executed, the variation pattern command Execution of the effect according to the specified variation pattern is stopped, and the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are turned off. However, it is sufficient if it is at least at a stage before the timing t1 at which the suggestive effect A suggesting the set value 6 is executed. The LEDs 1 to 4 of the board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 may be turned off. In such a configuration, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the door frame top unit, and the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 are used as an advance notice effect to anticipate the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode from the start of the pattern variation to the execution of the suggestive effect. 450 LEDs 5 to 7 and the effect operation unit 300 LEDs 8 to 9 are controlled to emit light, such a notice effect is not executed, and the player expects a light-emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light-emitting mode. can be deterred from holding. In addition, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 from the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display to execute the suggestive effect. may be turned off. In such a configuration, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the top of the door frame, and the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 are used as a look-ahead effect to anticipate the light-emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light-emitting mode before the variable display of the symbol that is to execute the suggestive effect. Even when the LEDs 5 to 7 of the unit 450 and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light, such a prefetch effect is not executed, and the expectation of the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is expected in the game. It can deter people from holding.

Further, in this example, if there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, the LED 1 to 4. The LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are turned off, but the execution period of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 (timing t1 to t10) , LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 may continue to be extinguished. In such a configuration, after completion of the suggestive effect, for example, when the pattern fluctuation is stopped and the winning pattern becomes a winning pattern, a light emitting effect of lighting again in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed, or after the winning pattern is reached. Even when executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode again during the winning game, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are extinguished. Since the state is set, it is possible to combine the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode and prevent light emission in a state in which the rainbow light emission mode is not established.

In this example, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 match the game board 5 . Even when the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 are not connected, the same processing as when there is a component whose ID code does not match with the game board 5 is performed. In other words, when the power is turned on, if the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 are not connected to the game board 5, the game board 5 has parts whose ID codes do not match. , during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestive effect A suggesting the set value 6, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, the door frame 3 LEDs 10 to 14 are used to suppress the execution of the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode.

Regarding the above, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 match those of the game board 5 (including determination of whether or not they are connected). Since it is not determined whether or not the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 or the effect operation unit 300 matches the game board 5 after the power is turned on, the game is not played after the power is turned on. When the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 are removed from the board 5, the removal cannot be detected. For this reason, after the power is turned on, the LEDs of the parts removed from the game board 5 are turned off, but the LEDs of the other parts execute the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6. During a period (timings t1 to t10), the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed, and light is emitted in a mode in which the rainbow light emitting mode is not established. That is, when the power is turned on, if the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 or the effect operation unit 300 does not match the game board 5 (including the case that they are not connected), the setting value 6 is suggested. In the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestive effect A, the execution of the light emitting effect lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is restricted, but after the power is turned on, the door frame top unit 450 for the game board 5 or when the effect operation unit 300 is removed (including when it is not connected), the rainbow light emission mode is not established during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6. will emit light. As a result, when the door frame top unit 450 or the effect operation unit 300 is removed from the game board 5 after the power is turned on (including when they are not connected), the traces thereof are notified to the outside. As a result, it is possible to inform the outside that there is a problem with the connection of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 .

Further, after the power is turned on, after the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 are removed from the game board 5, a part having an ID code matching the game board 5 is connected to the removed part. Even if it is connected, it cannot be detected that the component with the matching ID code is connected. For this reason, the LEDs of the parts connected to the game board 5 with the matching ID code are turned off, but for the LEDs of the other parts, the suggestion effect A that suggests the set value 6 is executed. During a period (timings t1 to t10), the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed, and light is emitted in a mode in which the rainbow light emitting mode is not established. On the other hand, after the power is turned on, after the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 are removed from the game board 5, a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5 is connected to the removed part. If so, it cannot be detected that a component whose ID code does not match is connected. For this reason, the LEDs of the parts connected to the game board 5 whose ID codes do not match are turned off, but the LEDs of the other parts execute the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6. During a period (timings t1 to t10), the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed, and light is emitted in a mode in which the rainbow light emitting mode is not established. As a result, when the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 are removed from the game board 5 after the power is turned on (including when they are not connected), Regardless of whether a component with a matching ID code or a component with a non-matching ID code is connected, traces of removal of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 from the game board 5 are externally provided. It is possible to inform the outside that it is necessary to deal with the connection of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 so that the problem does not occur again.

Also, in this example, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 match those of the game board 5 (including determination of whether or not they are connected). ), after the power is turned on, the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 is input to the game board 5, and the door frame top unit 450 and effect are input to the game board 5. It may be determined whether or not the ID codes of the operation units 300 match (including determination of whether or not they are connected). In addition, an operation switch for judging whether or not the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 match with the game board 5 (including judgment of whether or not they are connected) is set to pachinko. It is provided on the back side of the machine 1, and when the operation switch is operated after the power is turned on, it is determined whether the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 or the effect operation unit 300 matches the game board 5 (connected (including determination of whether or not According to such a configuration, when the door frame top unit 450 or the effect operation unit 300 is removed from the game board 5 after the power is turned on, the removal can be performed by operating the operation switch thereafter. can be detected. In other words, if the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 are not connected to the game board 5 at the time the operation switch is operated, there is a component whose ID code does not match the game board 5. Similarly, in the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestive effect A suggesting the set value 6, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 , the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are suppressed so as not to perform the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode.

Also, in this example, when the suggestive effect A suggesting the set value 6 is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame 3 LEDs 10 to 14 are used to perform a lighting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode, but the light emitting effect of lighting in such a rainbow light emitting mode may be performed in a performance other than a suggestive effect, for example, During the variable display of the symbols, it may be executed with a high-expectation effect suggesting that there is a high possibility of winning. Even in such a configuration, if there is no part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5 (all parts match), LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, The LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to execute a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode. When there is a component whose ID code does not match, it is suppressed not to perform the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode during the execution period of the high expectation effect.

In addition, in this example, the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 can be changed when the model is changed, but other modes may be adopted. For example, for the door frame 3 (door frame base unit 100), not only the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300, but also other decoration units may be changed when the model is changed. , an upper decorative unit (similar to the door frame top unit 450 of the above embodiment) located above the door window 101a provided in the door frame 3, a right decorative unit located to the right of the door window 101a, and a left side of the door window 101a. Even if at least four decoration units such as the left decoration unit positioned on the left side and the lower decoration unit positioned below the door window 101a (similar to the effect operation unit 300 of the above embodiment) can be changed when the model is changed. good. As a result, it is possible to further increase the change in the appearance of the gaming machine due to the model change, and to provide the player with a newer sense of freshness. A plurality of LEDs are provided for each of these four decoration units, and an ID code is set for each. It is possible to perform the same processing as described above with respect to the light emission effect such as the rainbow light emission mode, and it is possible to achieve the same game effect as described above.

[The win-or-lose button effect when the rainbow effect is executed]
In this embodiment, during the variable display of symbols, a rainbow effect (luminous effect of lighting in a rainbow luminous mode) is executed as a high expectation effect suggesting that there is a high possibility of winning. Only by executing the rainbow performance, it is not possible to determine whether or not the winning will occur, but it is possible to determine whether or not the winning occurs when operating a predetermined operation part during the execution of the rainbow performance. A player operation effect (button effect) is being executed.

In this example, as an effect corresponding to the variation pattern, it is possible to execute a rainbow effect as a high-expectation effect during the variable display of the symbols, and a rainbow effect at the time of winning in which the winning is derived as a result of the variable display of the symbols, Although the rainbow effect is executed during the variable display of the symbols, the rainbow effect at the time of loss is set as a result of the variable display of the symbols. In other words, it is possible to determine the variation pattern for performing the rainbow performance at the time of winning, and to determine the variation pattern for performing the rainbow performance at the time of losing at the time of loss. Then, when it is out, by lowering the ratio of determining the variation pattern that executes the rainbow effect at the time of deviation from the variation pattern that executes the effect at the time of other deviation, the rainbow at the time of deviation is lower than the effect at the time of other deviation The execution frequency of the production is set to be low. As a result, when the rainbow effect is executed, it cannot be determined whether it is the rainbow effect at the time of winning or the rainbow effect at the time of losing, but the ratio of execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning is high, and the possibility of winning is high. It suggests that

Also, in this example, during the variable display of the symbols, it is possible to execute an effect suggesting a set value of 6 as the suggestion effect A mentioned above, and the rainbow effect as the high expectation effect means light emitting in a rainbow light emission mode. They are the same in that they perform the production. That is, when executing the rainbow effect as a high-expectation effect, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and LEDs 5 to 4 of the door frame top unit 450 are interlocked with the display of the effect display device 1600 in the same manner as when the suggestive effect A is executed. 7. Using the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode is executed. Specifically, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern reaches a predetermined timing (timing different from the execution timing of the suggestive effect A suggesting the set value 6) (timing t1), LEDs 1-2 of the game board 5 are "red", LEDs 3-4 of the game board 5 are "purple", LEDs 5-6 of the door frame top unit 450 are "blue", LED 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and The LED 8 of the door frame 3 is "green", the LED 9 of the door frame 3 and the LED 10 of the door frame 3 are "orange", the LEDs 11-12 of the door frame 3 are "yellow", and the LEDs 13-14 of the door frame 3 are "white". , to emit light. That is, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are caused to emit light of different colors for each two groups. .

Then, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are changed every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). , the LED emitting light in "red" is "purple", the LED emitting light in "purple" is "blue", the LED emitting light in "blue" is "green", and the LED emitting light in "green" The LED is "orange", the LED emitting "orange" is "yellow", the LED emitting "yellow" is "white", the LED emitting "white" is "red", change to In this way, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are set for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). each time, the luminescent color of the LEDs in each of the two groups is changed in a predetermined order of "red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white→red" until timing t10 is reached. (for example, 10 seconds), such regular changes are repeated.

In this way, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 emit light in a short unit time. By controlling the sequential switching of a plurality of luminescent colors, it is possible to visually recognize that these LEDs are cooperating to emit light in a rainbow luminescence mode, resulting in an impactful luminescence. can perform the performance. In addition, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled by interlocking the LEDs 1 to 14. 14 are caused to emit light in a plurality of colors so that each two groups emit light in different colors, and furthermore, by switching the light emission colors in a short time, a light emission performance with more impact than usual can be executed.

In this example, as light emission in the rainbow light emission mode, seven colors are emitted at the same time using a plurality of LEDs, and the respective light emission colors are regularly switched. , it is not necessary to use seven colors, and it is sufficient that three or more predetermined colors appear at the same time.

Further, during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow mode effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. In such a rainbow effect image, the display colors displayed in each of the plurality of display areas are changed to "red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white" every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). → Red" is changed in a predetermined order, and such regular changes are repeated until timing t10 is reached (for example, 5 seconds). It should be noted that the target for displaying the effect image in the rainbow mode may be an effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, for example, a background image, or may be a target image in one of the display areas of the effect display device 1600. Effect images displayed on the screen, for example, effect images of characters, items, and the like, may be targeted.

In this example, for the purpose of further enhancing the fun of the rainbow effect and further improving the amusement of the game, it is determined whether or not a hit will occur when a predetermined operation unit is operated during the execution of the rainbow effect. button effects are executed, and one of the button effects A to C is executed. Here, a case of executing each of the rainbow effect with the button effect A, the rainbow effect with the button effect B, and the rainbow effect with the button effect C will be described below.

(Rainbow effect with button effect A)
First, the plate unit 200 is provided with a light amount adjustment button 228 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the effect operation section 301 in the effect operation unit 300 . As the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs of the door frame 3 As for the LEDs 10 to 14, the light amount adjustment operation is performed using the light amount adjustment button 228, thereby making it possible to adjust the light amount in stages. For example, it is possible to adjust the level of the light intensity of the LED from 1 (minimum light intensity) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum light intensity). , the light amount of the LED increases, and the light amount of the LED decreases as the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated downward to decrease the step. As for the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations, it is possible to adjust the amount of light both during the pattern change and during the non-change.

In the button effect A, during execution of the rainbow effect, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, at least the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3). It is possible to determine whether or not In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed, the amount of light can be adjusted when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, and it is possible to grasp that it is a win. When the in-bow effect at the time of failure is being executed, when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, the light intensity cannot be adjusted, and the failure can be grasped.

FIG. 221 is a timing chart showing an example of button effect A during execution of rainbow effect. First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, as an effect according to the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command, synchronize with the variation display of the special symbol. In the effect display device 1600, a variable effect such as a variable display of decorative symbols is started. Then, when the variation pattern at the time of winning to execute the rainbow effect at the time of winning is determined, or when the variation pattern at the time of losing to perform the rainbow effect at the time of losing is determined, the variation display of the pattern When the elapsed time from the start reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 7 of the effect operation unit 300 9. Start a light emitting effect (rainbow effect) that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode using the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, and until timing t10 is reached (for example, 10 seconds), a light emitting effect that lights up in that rainbow light emitting mode is continuing.

In addition, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the effect display device 1600 executes a button operation promotion effect in which a display prompting the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 (for example, "press the light amount adjustment button!") is performed. At the same time, a display explaining that it is a hit when the light amount can be adjusted by operating the light amount adjustment button 228 and is a failure when the light amount cannot be adjusted (for example, "If the light amount can be adjusted, it will be a hit! If you can't adjust, you're out!") is executed.

When the winning variation pattern for executing the winning rainbow effect is determined, the light amount can be adjusted by operating the light amount adjustment button 228 during the execution period of the winning rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10). Set to a possible light intensity adjustable period. During this light amount adjustable period, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, at least the LEDs (game buttons) that constitute the rainbow light emitting mode among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 The light amount of LEDs 1 to 4 of the board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 changes. As a result, when the amount of light can be adjusted during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, it is possible to grasp that the variable display of the pattern being executed will be a hit, and to know whether or not it will be a hit. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the user to actively operate the light amount adjustment button 228 .

On the other hand, when the variation pattern for the rainbow effect at the time of failure is determined, the amount of light is changed by operating the light amount adjustment button 228 during the execution period of the rainbow effect at the time of failure (timings t1 to t10). Set the light amount adjustment disabled period in which adjustment is disabled. During this light amount adjustment impossible period, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, at least the LEDs (game The light amounts of LEDs 1 to 4 of the board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 do not change. As a result, when the amount of light cannot be adjusted during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, it is possible to grasp that the variable display of the pattern being executed will be lost, and whether or not it will be a hit can be determined. In order to know, it can be encouraged to actively operate the light amount adjustment button 228 .

In this example, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) are capable of adjusting the amount of light. , making it impossible to adjust the amount of light, and always emitting light with a constant amount of light. As a result, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), if the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed, the LED (rainbow light emitting mode) whose light amount is unchanged is set. The light amount of the LED whose light amount can be changed (the LED that constitutes the rainbow light emission mode) changes relatively to the light amount of the LED that does not change). The light amount of the LED whose light amount can be changed (the LED that constitutes the rainbow light emission mode) changes relative to a certain LED (the LED that does not constitute the rainbow light emission mode). Therefore, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), it is possible to easily recognize whether or not the light amount has been adjusted. You can clearly see if it's a hit or not.

Further, in the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of failure, if the light quantity cannot be adjusted even though the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, after the rainbow effect at the time of failure is executed, the effect display device At 1600, a specific image is displayed that does not make the players aware that the variable display of the symbol being executed is a win. Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, a display (for example, "Sorry!") notifying that the variable display of the pattern being executed is off and the result is disappointing, or the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 Sometimes, a display (for example, "You can now adjust the light amount!") is displayed to notify that the state in which the light amount cannot be adjusted has returned to the state in which the light amount can be adjusted. As a result, even if it is not possible to recognize whether or not the light amount has been adjusted when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the rainbow effect execution period (timings t1 to t10), the rainbow effect is displayed after execution. It is possible to clearly grasp that the variable display of the symbol being executed is out of order by the specific image.

In this example, in the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), when the rainbow effect at the time of failure is executed, a specific period (for example, 3 minutes) elapses after the rainbow effect at the time of failure ends. In the meantime, the variation pattern for executing the rainbow performance at the time of failure is not determined, and the rainbow performance at the time of failure is not performed again. On the other hand, it is possible to determine the winning variation pattern for executing the winning rainbow effect until a specific period (for example, 3 minutes) has passed after the end of the rainbow effect at the time of winning. There is no restriction on the execution of the rainbow effect of time. As a result, in a short period such as a specific period, the rainbow performance at the time of failure will not be repeated, and the rainbow performance that is performed as a high-expectation performance that suggests that there is a high possibility of winning will be lost. There is no need to wait for the next rainbow effect to be executed.

In this example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), regardless of whether or not the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, the rainbow effect is terminated when a predetermined time elapses. However, when the rainbow effect at the time of detachment is executed, it is recognized that the light amount cannot be adjusted by operating the light amount adjustment button 228 even before the predetermined time has passed. At the time when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated (at the time when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated), the rainbow effect at the time of detachment may be ended. As a result, after recognizing that the amount of light cannot be adjusted by operating the light amount adjustment button 228, the rainbow effect is not continued, and the rainbow effect is produced even though the variable display of the pattern being executed is not displayed. is being executed.

Also, in this example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the effect display device 1600 displays a button operation prompting effect for prompting the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 (for example, "press the light amount adjustment button!"). , but not limited to this, in the effect display device 1600 during the rainbow effect execution period (timings t1 to t10), while enabling the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228, the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 is performed. It is also possible not to execute the button operation prompting effect for prompting display (for example, "press the light amount adjustment button!"). As a result, the above-described effect functions as a "hidden effect" during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10). For a player who does not usually actively operate the light amount adjustment button 228, a winning result (a winning time to be described later) is displayed as a result of a variable display of symbols after execution of the rainbow effect. A warning message or a warning message at the time of loss may be used.) is displayed, and the user can be thoroughly entertained as to whether or not the player wins.

Also, in this example, if the light amount cannot be adjusted despite the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection, after the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection is executed In the effect display device 1600, a specific image is displayed that does not make the player recognize that the variable display of the symbol being executed will be a hit. ), when the volume control button 227 provided near the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, the specific image may be displayed in the same manner as when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated. As a result, even if the player erroneously operates the volume control button 227 instead of the light level control button 228 during the limited execution period (timings t1 to t10), the intention to operate the light level control button 228 can be confirmed. The effect can be proceeded assuming that it exists, and the same effect as when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated can be exhibited. In this case, when the volume control button 227 is operated instead of the light amount control button 228 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the LED (game board 5 LEDs 1 to 4, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) do not change, but in such a case, the light amount adjustment button 228 It is preferable to issue a special notification (for example, "That's not light intensity adjustment!") that is not performed when is operated, to prompt that it is an erroneous operation.

In addition, in this example, the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect A is executed as the effect during the variable display of the symbols, but this is not the only option. A rainbow effect accompanied by the effect A may be performed. In this case, depending on the status of the rainbow effect (whether or not the amount of light is adjusted) by the button effect A, the player decides whether or not some kind of game profit (probability fluctuation, time reduction, etc.) will be given after the winning game being executed. should be made to recognize it.

In addition, in this example, the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect A is executed as the effect during the variable display of the symbols associated with the start winning, but this is not the only option, and the button effect A is an effect performed without the start winning. You may make it perform the rainbow production accompanying. Specifically, if the start-up winning does not occur for a long time, it will give the player a sense of disgust and irritation. For example, a dummy effect simulating the variable display of is started, and a rainbow effect accompanied by a button effect A is executed in the effect. In this case, as the rainbow effect accompanying the button effect A, the rainbow effect at the time of failure is executed, and during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the light amount is adjusted even if the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated. By disabling it, the player can be made to recognize that the dummy performance will not result in a win.

(Rainbow effect with button effect B)
In the button effect B, during execution of the rainbow effect, when the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated, the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are in the rainbow light emission mode. (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) to continue the rainbow effect using , and it can be determined whether or not it will be a hit. In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated, the rainbow effect continues until a predetermined time elapses without ending, While it is possible to grasp that it is a hit, if the in-bow performance at the time of loss is being executed, the rainbow performance is ended when the performance operation unit 301 is operated, and it is grasped that it is a loss. can do.

FIG. 222 is a timing chart showing an example of button effect B during execution of rainbow effect. First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, as an effect according to the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command, synchronize with the variation display of the special symbol. In the effect display device 1600, a variable effect such as a variable display of decorative symbols is started. Then, when the variation pattern at the time of winning to execute the rainbow effect at the time of winning is determined, or when the variation pattern at the time of losing to perform the rainbow effect at the time of losing is determined, the variation display of the pattern When the elapsed time from the start reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 7 of the effect operation unit 300 9. Start a light emitting effect (rainbow effect) that lights in the rainbow light emitting mode using the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, and until timing t10 is reached (for example, 10 seconds), the light emitting effect that lights in the rainbow light emitting mode is continuing.

Further, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the effect display device 1600 executes a button operation prompting effect for prompting the user to operate the effect operation unit 301 (for example, "press the effect operation button!"). At the same time, a display explaining that it is a hit when the rainbow effect being executed continues even after the operation of the effect operation part 301 is continued, and that it is a loss when the rainbow effect being executed when the effect operation part 301 is operated ends. (For example, "If the rainbow continues, you win! If the rainbow does not continue, you lose!") is executed.

When the winning variation pattern for executing the winning rainbow effect is determined, even if the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period of the winning rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the door is opened. Of the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 5 to 7 of the effect operation unit 300 The rainbow effect using the LEDs 8 to 9 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 continues without ending. As a result, in the execution period of the rainbow performance (timings t1 to t10), when the rainbow performance being executed continues even after the operation of the performance operation part 301, the variable display of the pattern being executed will be a hit. In order to know whether or not the game is a hit, it is possible to encourage the player to actively operate the effect operation unit 301 .

On the other hand, when the variation pattern at the time of failure to execute the rainbow effect at the time of failure is determined, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow effect at the time of failure (timings t1 to t10) , Of the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, production operation unit 300 LEDs 8 to 9 and door frame 3 LEDs 10 to 14) are completed, and the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode change from light emission in the rainbow light emission mode to non-light emission, or light emission in a single color. I am trying to switch to As a result, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), when the effect operation unit 301 is operated and the rainbow effect being executed ends, it can be grasped that the variable display of the symbol being executed is lost. In order to know whether the game is a hit or not, it is possible to encourage the player to actively operate the effect operation unit 301 .

In this example, during the rainbow effect execution period (timing t1 to t10), LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 10 of the door frame 3 14 is involved in executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode, while the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are controlled according to the variation pattern regardless of the light emitting colors constituting the rainbow light emitting mode. A lighting effect is being executed. Then, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of loss, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated, the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450) that constitute the rainbow light emission mode LEDs 5 to 7, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) are switched from light emission in the rainbow light emission mode to non-light emission or to light emission in a single color, whereas the rainbow light emission mode is switched. The non-configured LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) continue to emit light in a predetermined mode by executing a light emission effect according to the variation pattern. As a result, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated, for example, all the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 On the other hand, if the light emission in the rainbow light emission mode is switched to non-light emission, all the LEDs are extinguished, which may cause misunderstanding that the pachinko machine 1 is out of order. Such misrecognition can be prevented by continuing to emit light in a predetermined mode by executing a light emission effect in accordance with the variation pattern for at least some of the LEDs of the light emitting decoration.

In this example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), by operating the effect operation unit 301, it is possible to confirm whether or not to continue the rainbow effect being executed. In addition to the effect operation unit 301, a plurality of operation units for effects that can be operated by the player may be provided, and all of them may be used as the operation targets of the button effect B. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the interest of the button production B by mistakenly operating a part other than the production operation unit 301 during the execution period of the rainbow production (timings t1 to t10). Note that the operation units for a plurality of presentations include, for example, a light amount adjustment button 228 that can be operated by the player to adjust the amount of light, and a button 228 that can be operated by the player to adjust the volume. A volume control button 227 may also be included, and by operating these buttons, it may be possible to confirm whether or not to continue the rainbow effect being executed.

Further, in this example, when the rainbow effect accompanying the button effect A is executed, if the light amount cannot be adjusted even though the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, the effect display device 1600 is displayed after the rainbow effect at the time of detachment is executed. , a specific image is displayed that does not make the player recognize that the variable display of the symbols being executed will be a hit. Similarly, when the rainbow effect accompanying the button effect B is executed, the effect operation unit 301 is operated to perform the rainbow effect. is completed, a specific image may be displayed that does not make the player recognize that the variable display of the symbols being executed will be a win. Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, a display (for example, "Sorry!") may be executed to notify that the variable display of the symbol being executed is out of order, resulting in a disappointing result. As a result, in the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), when the effect operation unit 301 is operated just before the end of the effect operation unit 301 and it is not possible to recognize whether the rainbow effect has ended by the operation of the effect operation unit 301. Even so, the specific image displayed after the execution of the rainbow effect makes it possible to clearly grasp that the variable display of the symbols being executed is incorrect.

Further, in this example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the effect display device 1600 displays a button operation prompting effect for prompting the user to operate the effect operation unit 301 (for example, "press the effect operation button!"). is not limited to this, in the effect display device 1600 during the rainbow effect execution period (timings t1 to t10), while enabling the operation to the effect operation unit 301, the operation to the effect operation unit 301 is performed. It is also possible not to execute the button operation prompting effect for prompting display (for example, "Press the effect operation button!"). As a result, the above-described effect functions as a "hidden effect" during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10). For players who do not usually actively operate the effect operation unit 301, after the execution of the rainbow effect, the result of the winning result (at the time of winning described later) is displayed as a result of the fluctuation display of the symbol. A warning message or a warning message at the time of loss may be used.) is displayed, and the user can be thoroughly entertained as to whether or not the player wins.

Also, in this example, the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect B is executed as the effect during the variable display of the symbols, but this is not the only option. A rainbow effect accompanied by the effect B may be performed. In this case, the player recognizes whether or not some kind of game profit (probability fluctuation, time reduction, etc.) is given after the winning game being executed, depending on the status of the rainbow effect by the button effect B (whether it ends in the middle or not). You should let it run.

Further, in this example, the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect B is executed as the effect during the variable display of the symbols associated with the start winning, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button effect B is performed without the start winning. You may make it perform the rainbow production accompanying. Specifically, if the start-up winning does not occur for a long time, it will give the player a sense of disgust and irritation. For example, a dummy effect simulating the variable display of is started, and a rainbow effect accompanied by a button effect B is executed in the effect. In this case, as a rainbow effect accompanying the button effect B, the rainbow effect at the time of failure is executed. The game may be terminated so that the player can recognize that the dummy effect will not result in a win.

(Rainbow effect with button effect C)
First, the plate unit 200 is provided with a volume control button 227 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the effect operation section 301 in the effect operation unit 300 . The sound output from various speakers (main body frame speaker 622, etc.) can be adjusted step by step by performing a volume adjustment operation using the volume adjustment button 227. FIG. For example, the level of volume output from various speakers can be adjusted from 1 (minimum volume) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum volume). As the level increases, the volume output from the various speakers increases, and as the level is decreased by operating the volume control button 227 downward, the volume output from the various speakers decreases. In this example, the volume of the lowest level (1) is zero volume, and all the production sounds are inaudible. In addition, the volume of sounds output from various speakers can be adjusted both while the patterns are changing and when they are not changing.

In this example, during the execution of the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect C, the volume is forcibly set to the lowest level (1) regardless of the volume control button 227 by the player, and with the start of the rainbow effect this time, the rainbow effect Any effect sound, including the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to , is forcibly changed to an inaudible state in which the player cannot recognize. Although details will be described later, in the button effect C of this example, when the volume control button 227 is operated upward in such an inaudible state to raise the volume level, effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect is generated. It is possible to determine whether or not the player will be successful by performing a presentation as to whether or not the player changes from an inaudible state to an audible state. In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed, when the volume control button 227 is operated, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state, In this way, it is possible to grasp that the hit is a hit, but if the in-bow effect is being executed when the player misses, even if the volume control button 227 is operated, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect is generated. The non-audible state is maintained, thereby making it possible to grasp that it is out.

In addition to the above, in this example, when the volume control button 227 is operated to change the level of the volume, a specific sound (for example, beep-beep) is output as an operation confirmation sound, but the button effect C is accompanied. In the rainbow effect, it is possible to determine whether or not the player will win by using whether or not an operation confirmation sound is output when the volume control button 227 is operated. In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed, even if the volume control button 227 is operated, a specific sound (for example, beep-beep) is not output from the various speakers, and thus a win is achieved. On the other hand, when the in-bow effect is being executed when the player is out, when the volume control button 227 is operated, a specific sound (for example, beep) is output from various speakers. It is possible to grasp that it is out by

That is, in this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed, when the volume control button 227 is operated, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state. However, in this case, a specific sound (for example, beep-beep) as an operation confirmation sound is not output in response to the operation of the volume control button 227 . On the other hand, when the in-bow effect is being executed, even if the volume control button 227 is operated, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect is kept inaudible. Only a specific sound (for example, beep-beep) as an operation confirmation sound is output according to the operation of the volume control button 227 . The details of such effects will be described below.

FIG. 223 is a timing chart showing an example of the button effect C during execution of the rainbow effect. First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, as an effect according to the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command, synchronize with the variation display of the special symbol. In the effect display device 1600, a variable effect such as a variable display of decorative symbols is started. Then, when the variation pattern at the time of winning to execute the rainbow effect at the time of winning is determined, or when the variation pattern at the time of losing to perform the rainbow effect at the time of losing is determined, the variation display of the pattern When the elapsed time from the start reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 7 of the effect operation unit 300 9. Start a light emitting effect (rainbow effect) that lights in the rainbow light emitting mode using the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, and until timing t10 is reached (for example, 10 seconds), the light emitting effect that lights in the rainbow light emitting mode is continuing.

Further, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the effect display device 1600 executes a button operation promotion effect in which a display prompting the operation of the volume control button 227 (for example, "press the volume control button!") is performed. At the same time, by operating the volume control button 227, it is a hit when the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state. When the non-audible state of the production sound such as BGM corresponding to the production is maintained (it does not change to the audible state), a display explaining that it is out (for example, "If it changes to the audible state, it is a hit! Audible If the state does not change, you are out!") is executed.

When the winning variation pattern for executing the winning rainbow effect is determined, when the volume control button 227 is operated during the execution period of the winning rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the rainbow A performance sound such as BGM corresponding to the performance changes from an inaudible state to an audible state. In other words, it is necessary to operate the volume control button 227 in order to confirm whether the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from the non-audible state to the audible state. Note that a specific sound (for example, beep-beep) as the operation confirmation sound is not output when the volume control button 227 is operated. As a result, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), when the sound volume control button 227 is operated and the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state, execution It can be grasped that the variable display of the inside pattern will be a hit, and in order to know whether it will be a hit or not, it is possible to encourage the user to actively operate the volume control button 227.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, when the variation pattern for the rainbow performance at the time of failure is determined, when the volume control button 227 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow performance at the time of failure (timings t1 to t10). , and BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect are maintained in an inaudible state (not changed to an audible state). In other words, it is necessary to operate the volume control button 227 in order to confirm whether or not the non-audible state of the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect is maintained (not changed to the audible state). Further, when the volume control button 227 is operated, a specific sound (eg, beep-beep) is output as an operation confirmation sound. As a result, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the volume control button 227 is operated to maintain the non-audible state of the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect (change to audible state). not), and when a specific sound (for example, beep) is output as an operation confirmation sound, it is possible to grasp that the fluctuation display of the pattern being executed will be off, and in order to know whether it is off, It is possible to encourage the user to actively operate the volume control button 227 .

As described above, when the volume control button 227 is operated during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of loss, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect is kept inaudible ( not only audible state), but also a specific sound (for example, beep-beep) is output as an operation confirmation sound. As a result, if no sound is output when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of loss, it cannot be confirmed whether the operation has been accepted. However, by outputting a specific sound (for example, beep-beep) as the operation confirmation sound, such confirmation can be performed appropriately.

In this example, regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment button 227 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the rainbow effect is terminated when a predetermined time elapses. However, when the rainbow effect at the time of loss is being executed, the volume control button 227 is operated even before the predetermined time elapses, and the effect such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect is produced. At the time when it is recognized that the sound is maintained in an inaudible state (it does not change to an audible state) (when the volume control button 227 is operated), the rainbow effect at that time may end. . Accordingly, after recognizing that the non-audible state of the BGM or the like corresponding to the rainbow effect is maintained (not changed to the audible state) by operating the volume control button 227, the rainbow effect is continued. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the unpleasant feeling that the rainbow effect is being executed even though the variable display of the pattern being executed is out.

Further, in this example, as the button effect C during execution of the rainbow effect, whether or not the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state when the volume control button 227 is operated. is executed, and if the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect does not change from the non-audible state to the audible state, a specific sound (for example, beep) is output as the operation confirmation sound. However, not limited to this, the operation confirmation is performed when the volume control button 227 is operated without executing the effect of whether the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from the non-audible state to the audible state. It may be configured to execute only an effect as to whether or not to output a specific voice (for example, beep-beep) as a sound. With such a configuration, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed, when the volume control button 227 is operated, a specific sound (for example, beep) is not output as an operation confirmation sound, and the win is achieved. On the other hand, when the invoking effect at the time of disconnection is being executed, a specific sound (for example, beep) is output as an operation confirmation sound when the volume control button 227 is operated. , it is possible to grasp that it is out of line. In addition to this, as for the production of whether or not to output a specific sound (for example, beep) as an operation confirmation sound, not only the volume control button 227 but also a plurality of operation units including the volume control button 227 ( The effect operation unit 301, the light amount adjustment button 228, and the volume adjustment button 227) may also be used. In such a configuration, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed, any of the plurality of operation units (the effect operation unit 301, the light amount adjustment button 228, the volume adjustment button 227) can be operated to confirm the operation. It is possible to grasp that it is a hit without outputting a specific sound (for example, beep) as a sound. When any one of the operation unit 301, the light amount adjustment button 228, and the volume adjustment button 227) is operated, a specific sound (for example, beep-beep) is output as an operation confirmation sound, so that it is possible to grasp the disconnection. .

In the above configuration, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, even if any of the plurality of operation units (effect operation unit 301, light amount adjustment button 228, volume adjustment button 227) is operated, various A specific sound (for example, beep-beep) is not output from the speaker. Similarly, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of loss, a specific sound is output from various speakers among the plurality of operation units (effect operation unit 301, light amount adjustment button 228, volume adjustment button 227). With the exception of the different operating units, no particular sound (for example, beep-beep) is output from the various speakers regardless of which one is operated. Therefore, in the production display device 1600, when each of the plurality of operation units (the production operation unit 301, the light amount adjustment button 228, the volume adjustment button 227) is operated, a display corresponding to the operation (for example, "button I manipulated "). As a result, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), any sound is output when any one of the plurality of operation units (the effect operation unit 301, the light amount adjustment button 228, the volume adjustment button 227) is operated. Otherwise, it is not possible to confirm whether the operation has been accepted or not.

Further, in this example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the effect display device 1600 displays a button operation prompting effect for prompting the operation of the volume control button 227 (for example, "press the volume control button!"). is not limited to this, in the effect display device 1600 during the rainbow effect execution period (timings t1 to t10), the operation of the volume control button 227 is enabled while the operation of the volume control button 227 is enabled. It is also possible not to execute the button operation prompting effect for prompting display (for example, "press the volume control button!"). As a result, the above-described effect functions as a "hidden effect" during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10). For a player who does not usually actively operate the volume control button 227, a winning result (hitting time, which will be described later) is displayed as a result of the variable display of symbols after the execution of the rainbow effect. A warning message or a warning message at the time of loss may be used.) is displayed, and the user can be thoroughly entertained as to whether or not the player wins.

Further, in this example, when the rainbow effect accompanying the button effect A is executed, if the light amount cannot be adjusted even though the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, the effect display device 1600 is displayed after the rainbow effect at the time of detachment is executed. , a specific image is displayed that does not make the player recognize that the variable display of the symbols being executed will be a hit. First of all, if the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect does not change from the inaudible state to the audible state, after the rainbow effect at the time of failure is executed, the fluctuation display of the pattern being executed will be a hit. A specific image that is not recognized may be displayed. Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the pattern being executed is out, and the display (for example, "Sorry!") notifying that the result is disappointing, Sometimes, a display (for example, "You can now adjust the volume!") may be displayed to notify that the state in which the volume cannot be adjusted is restored to the state in which the volume can be adjusted. As a result, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), it is determined whether or not the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state when the volume control button 227 is operated. Even if it cannot be recognized, it is possible to clearly grasp that the variable display of the pattern being executed is out of order by the specific image displayed after the execution of the rainbow effect.

In the above-described configuration, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of loss, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state despite the operation of the volume control button 227. When the state does not change, after the execution of the rainbow performance at the time of loss, the performance display device 1600 displays a specific image that does not make the player recognize that the variable display of the symbols being executed will be a win. In addition, when the light amount adjustment button 228 provided near the volume adjustment button 227 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of detachment, the volume adjustment button 227 is also operated. A specific image may be displayed as in the case. As a result, even if the player mistakenly operates the light amount control button 228 instead of the volume control button 227 during a limited execution period (timings t1 to t10), the intention to operate the volume control button 227 can be confirmed. The effect can be proceeded assuming that it exists, and the same effect as when the volume control button 227 is operated can be exhibited. In this case, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated instead of the volume control button 227 during the execution period of the rainbow effect at the time of winning (timings t1 to t10), effect sounds such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect It does not change from the non-audible state to the audible state, but if it does, it executes a special notification that is not given when the volume control button 227 is operated (for example, "That's not volume control!"). In this way, it is preferable to prompt that it is an erroneous operation.

In addition, in this example, the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect C is executed as the effect during the variable display of the symbols, but this is not the only option. A rainbow effect accompanied by the effect C may be performed. In this case, the state of the sound output by the button effect C (whether the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state, and a specific sound (for example, beep beep) as the operation confirmation sound is not output), the player may be made to recognize whether or not some kind of game profit (probability variation, time reduction, etc.) will be given after the winning game being executed.

In addition, in this example, the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect C is executed as the effect during the variable display of the symbols associated with the start winning, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button effect C is performed without the start winning. You may make it perform the rainbow production accompanying. Specifically, if the start-up winning does not occur for a long time, it will give the player a sense of disgust and irritation. For example, a dummy effect simulating the variable display of is started, and a rainbow effect accompanied by a button effect C is executed in the effect. In this case, as the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect C, the rainbow effect at the time of failure is executed. The effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the effect is prevented from changing from an inaudible state to an audible state, and a specific sound (for example, beep) is output as an operation confirmation sound when the volume control button 227 is operated. The player may be made to recognize that the result of the dummy effect is not a win.

In the above description, the rainbow effect with button effect A, the rainbow effect with button effect B, and the rainbow effect with button effect C are executed as individual effects. You can do it. For example, a rainbow effect with a compound button effect D having elements of button effect A and button effect B, a rainbow effect with a compound button effect E having elements of button effect A and button effect C, a button effect B and a button effect A rainbow effect accompanied by a compound button effect F having elements of C, and a rainbow effect accompanied by a compound button effect G having elements of button effect A, button effect B and button effect C may be executed. More specifically, for example, in the rainbow effect with the composite button effect G, the light intensity is determined by the object operated by the player among the plurality of operation units (the light amount adjustment button 228, the effect operation unit 301, and the volume adjustment button 227). (element of button effect A using light amount adjustment button 228), effect of whether to continue rainbow effect (element of button effect B using effect operation unit 301), BGM corresponding to rainbow effect Effect of whether or not the effect sound changes from an inaudible state to an audible state (an element of the button effect C using the volume control button 227). By operating one of the units (light amount adjustment button 228, effect operation unit 301, volume control button 227), the result of the effect corresponding to the operation is derived, and the process ends. Other composite button effects are obtained by missing a part of the effect elements from the composite button effect G, and the objects operated by the player are more limited than the composite button effect G. That is, only when some of the plurality of operation units (the light amount adjustment button 228, the effect operation unit 301, the volume control button 227) are operated, the result of the effect corresponding to the operation is derived. becomes. In such a composite button effect, the player is allowed to select which button effect is to be executed for the rainbow effect (which button effect is to be used for the rainbow effect). , it becomes possible to select the progress mode of the rainbow effect. Therefore, it is possible not only to obtain the same effect as the various button effects described above, but also to further enhance the interest of the rainbow effect.

(Specific alert message after button effect)
As described above in detail, in the button effect B of the button effects A to C, during execution of the rainbow effect, when the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated, the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are provided. Of the LEDs of the light emitting decorations, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, LED 10 of the door frame 3 14) is executed to determine whether or not the rainbow effect is to be continued, and it is possible to determine whether or not the player will win. In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated, the rainbow effect continues until a predetermined time elapses without ending, While it is possible to grasp that it is a hit, if the in-bow performance at the time of loss is being executed, the rainbow performance is ended when the performance operation unit 301 is operated, and it is grasped that it is a loss. can do.

FIG. 224 is a timing chart showing an example in which the effect operation section 301 is not operated in the button effect B during execution of the rainbow effect. In the above, when the variation pattern at the time of winning to execute the rainbow effect at the time of winning is determined, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow effect at the time of winning (timing t1 to t10) 2, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, production operation While the rainbow performance using the LEDs 8-9 of the unit 300 and the LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3 continues without ending, even when the performance operation unit 301 is not operated, the rainbow performance at the time of winning is continued. After the execution period (timings t1 to t10) elapses, the rainbow effect is finished. In addition, when the variation pattern at the time of failure to execute the rainbow effect at the time of failure is determined, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow effect at the time of failure (timing t1 to t10) , Of the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, production operation unit 300 (LEDs 8 to 9, door frame 3 LEDs 10 to 14), the rainbow effect using the door frame 3) is completed. ) to end the rainbow effect. In other words, when the effect operation unit 301 is not operated during the rainbow effect execution period (timings t1 to t10), the rainbow effect is executed after the rainbow effect execution period (timings t1 to t10) elapses. Since it ends, it is not possible to recognize whether it was the rainbow effect at the time of winning or the rainbow effect at the time of losing at the time of the end of the rainbow effect.

In this regard, in this example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect at the time of failure (timings t1 to t10), the performance operation unit 301 is not operated, and the execution period of the rainbow effect at the time of failure (timings t1 to t10) elapses. After that, the effect display device 1600 notifies that the rainbow effect being executed is the rainbow effect at the time of failure, and also displays a warning message at the time of failure corresponding to the rainbow effect at the time of failure (for example, "Don't complain to the clerk because this rainbow is fake"). In this way, after the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of failure has elapsed without operating the effect operation unit 301, it is possible to confirm that the rainbow effect being executed is the rainbow effect at the time of failure. By notifying it, there is no misunderstanding that it is a rainbow effect at the time of winning. In addition, since the rainbow effect is executed as a high-expectation effect that suggests that the possibility of winning is high, simply notifying that it is a rainbow effect at the time of losing will not cause the player's dissatisfaction to the outside. (Hall clerk), but by notifying a message to call attention when the game comes off, it is possible to prevent the player's dissatisfaction from being directed to the outside (hall clerk).

As described above, after the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of failure has elapsed without operating the effect operation unit 301, the effect display device 1600 displays the rainbow effect that has been executed when the rainbow effect is not performed. In addition to notifying that it is a rainbow effect, a display (for example, "This rainbow is a fake, so don't complain to the clerk") is displayed to notify you of a warning message when it is off corresponding to the rainbow effect. However, such a warning message at the time of deviation is composed of fewer colors than the number of colors (seven colors in this example) constituting the rainbow light emission mode. As a result, while the rainbow performance at the time of failure is being executed, the desire to play the game is improved by the number of colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode, but after the rainbow performance at the time of failure is executed, the rainbow light emission mode is configured. By displaying with fewer colors than the number of colors (in this example, 7 colors), the improved desire to play can be reduced, and the display of a warning message, etc. when the game is lost can be effectively notified. be able to. In the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow mode effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. After the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10) has passed, the effect image in the rainbow mode is erased.

Further, in this example, after the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of loss has elapsed without operating the effect operation unit 301, the rainbow effect that has been executed in the effect display device 1600 is released. In addition to notifying that it is a rainbow effect at the time, a display that notifies the attention message at the time of loss corresponding to the rainbow effect at the time of loss (for example, "This rainbow is a fake, so don't complain to the clerk") is executed. However, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the display of such a warning message or the like at the time of failure, it is possible to erase the display of the warning message or the like at the time of failure. As a result, during the display of the warning message or the like at the time of loss, the state in which the player's desire to play continues to decline. state can be terminated. In this example, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the display of the warning message or the like when the player is out, the display of the warning message or the like is erased, but the effect operation unit 301 is operated. Then, in the effect display device 1600, a predetermined display object (display corresponding to the operation of the effect operation unit 301) is displayed on the front side of the display of the warning message, etc. at the time of loss, and the warning message at the time of loss. By hiding at least a part of the display such as, the display such as the warning message at the time of detachment may be configured to be difficult or invisible to the player. Even with such a configuration, by operating the performance operation unit 301 according to the player's will, the display of a warning message or the like when the player is out is made difficult or invisible to the player, and the player's desire to play is reduced. You can end your current state.

On the other hand, during the execution period of the rainbow effect at the time of winning (timings t1 to t10), regardless of whether or not the effect operation unit 301 is operated, after the execution period of the rainbow effect at the time of winning (timings t1 to t10) has passed. executes a display ("This rainbow is a win!") to notify that the variable display of the symbol being executed will be a win. After a predetermined period of time has passed, a display for preventing excessive immersion in the game (for example, "This rainbow is just a win, but don't get addicted to it") is displayed as a warning message at the time of the win corresponding to the rainbow effect at the time of the win. ). As a result, the rainbow effect is executed as a high-expectation effect suggesting that the possibility of winning is high, and by notifying that the rainbow effect is the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the player can A state in which the willingness to play is excessively increased occurs, but after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the display for notifying that the variation display of the symbol being executed will be a win is executed. By notifying the time alert message, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively absorbed in the game in the subsequent game.

As described above, after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the effect display device 1600 executes the display of notifying the attention calling message at the time of losing. In the effect display device 1600, a display is executed to notify a message to call attention at the time of winning. However, after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of loss, immediately after that, a display that notifies the attention message at the time of loss is displayed, while after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of the hit, After executing the display for notifying that the variable display will be a hit, the display for notifying the attention calling message at the time of winning is executed. As a result, immediately after the execution of the rainbow performance at the time of winning, if the display for notifying the attention calling message at the time of winning is executed, the rainbow performance is the rainbow performance at the time of winning, but the afterglow cannot be enjoyed. , After a predetermined period of time has passed (after executing the display notifying that the variable display of the symbol being executed will be a hit), by executing the display notifying the attention alert message at the time of winning, such It is possible to prevent hindrance to enjoyment of reverberation.

Further, in this example, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the display of a warning message or the like at the time of winning, a predetermined display object is displayed on the front side of the display of the warning message or the like at the time of winning in the effect display device 1600. (display corresponding to the operation of the performance operation unit 301) is displayed, and at least a part of the display of the warning message, etc. at the time of winning is hidden, so that the display of the warning message, etc. at the time of winning is displayed to the player. It may be configured to be invisible or invisible. With such a configuration, the state in which the player's willingness to play is excessively increased during the display of the warning message or the like at the time of winning is ended, but the effect operation section 301 is turned off by the player's will. By operating it, it is possible to make the display of a warning message or the like at the time of winning invisible or invisible to the player, so that such a state does not continue too long.

In this example, the case where the button effect B is executed while the rainbow effect is being executed has been described. to t10), without operating the effect operation unit 301, after the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of failure has passed, the effect display device 1600 responds to the rainbow effect at the time of failure. It may be configured to execute a display that notifies an alert message at the time of detachment.

Further, in this example, regardless of whether or not the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow effect at the time of winning (timings t1 to t10), the execution period of the rainbow effect at the time of winning (timings t1 to t10). After the elapse of, after executing a display notifying that the variable display of the symbol being executed will be a win, a display is executed to notify a message to alert attention at the time of winning corresponding to the rainbow effect at the time of winning. However, it is preferable that the execution period of the display for notifying the attention calling message at the time of the hit is longer than the execution period of the display for notifying the attention calling message at the time of the hit. As a result, after the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of failure has elapsed without operating the effect operation unit 301, by notifying the attention message at the time of failure, the rainbow effect that has been executed is displayed. Although it is possible to recognize that the effect is a rainbow effect when the effect is lost, such recognition can be ensured by extending the execution period of the display for notifying the warning message when the effect is lost. In addition, regarding the execution period of the display that notifies the attention message at the time of winning and the execution period of the display that notifies the attention message at the time of loss, the execution period of the rainbow effect executed before that (timings t1 to t10) It is preferable to configure it so as to be shorter than . As a result, during the display of the alert message at the time of winning and the alert message at the time of loss, the state in which the motivation to play is reduced continues, but the execution period for displaying these alert messages is shortened. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the continuation of a state in which the player's desire to play is excessively reduced.

[Simulated rainbow effect]
There are many effects (such as the above-mentioned rainbow effect) that players rarely encounter or experience in the effects performed during the variable display of patterns. There were times when the operation of the Therefore, in this embodiment, as a specific period during which the player can recognize such an effect, an "effect introduction period" is generated during the standby state during non-variable display of symbols. In the effect introduction period of the present embodiment, in addition to the model introduction such as the specs of the pachinko machine 1, even though the symbols are displayed non-variably, the rainbow light emission mode imitates the rainbow effect at the time of winning. A lighting simulated rainbow effect is executed. This effect introduction period is started when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the variable display of the patterns is finished, and the simulated rainbow effect is executed at a predetermined time. I'm trying

In this example, during the variable display of symbols, it is possible to execute an effect suggesting a set value of 6 as the suggestion effect A mentioned above. is the same in that it executes That is, when executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning or the simulated rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and LED 5 of the door frame top unit 450 are interlocked with the display of the effect display device 1600 in the same way as when the suggestive effect A is executed. 7, LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform a light emission production that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode. Specifically, when it is time to execute the rainbow effect at the time of winning, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), the game is played. LEDs 1-2 of the board 5 are "red", LEDs 3-4 of the game board 5 are "purple", LEDs 5-6 of the door frame top unit 450 are "blue", LED 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and door frame 3 LED 8 is "green", LED 9 of the door frame 3 and LED 10 of the door frame 3 are "orange", LEDs 11-12 of the door frame 3 are "yellow", and LEDs 13-14 of the door frame 3 are "white". I am trying to let Further, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, when the elapsed time from the start of the effect introduction period reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), the LEDs 1 and 2 of the game board 5 are turned on. LEDs 3 and 4 of the game board 5 are "purple", LEDs 5 and 6 of the door frame top unit 450 are "blue", LED 7 of the door frame top unit 450 and LED 8 of the door frame 3 are "green", the door The LED 9 of the frame 3 and the LED 10 of the door frame 3 are "orange", the LEDs 11-12 of the door frame 3 are "yellow", and the LEDs 13-14 of the door frame 3 are "white". That is, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are caused to emit light of different colors for each two groups. .

Then, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are changed every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). , the LED emitting in "red" is "purple", the LED emitting in "purple" is in "blue", the LED emitting in "blue" is in "green", and the LED emitting in "green" The LED is "orange", the LED emitting "orange" is "yellow", the LED emitting "yellow" is "white", the LED emitting "white" is "red", change to In this way, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are set for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). each time, the luminescent color of the LEDs in each of the two groups is changed in a predetermined order of "red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white→red" until timing t10 is reached. (For example, 10 seconds), such regular changes are repeated.

In this way, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 each emit light in a short unit light emission time. By controlling the sequential switching of a plurality of luminescent colors, it becomes possible to visually recognize that these LEDs are cooperating to emit light in a rainbow luminescence mode, resulting in an impactful luminescence. can perform the performance. In addition, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled by interlocking the LEDs 1 to 14. 14 are caused to emit light in a plurality of colors so that each two groups emit light in different colors, and furthermore, by switching the light emission colors in a short time, a light emission performance with more impact than usual can be executed.

In this example, as light emission in the rainbow light emission mode, seven colors are emitted at the same time using a plurality of LEDs, and the respective light emission colors are regularly switched. , it is not necessary to use seven colors, and it is sufficient that three or more predetermined colors appear at the same time.

Further, the display contents displayed on the effect display device 1600 may differ between when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed and when the simulated rainbow effect is executed. For example, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed, the patterns are displayed in parallel, but when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the patterns may not be displayed in parallel. As a result, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, misunderstanding that the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed does not occur. Note that the display content displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not limited to this, and for example, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, a display such as "simulating" may be executed.

In addition, the rainbow effect and the simulated rainbow effect at the time of winning are performed using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. Although it is the same in that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed, it is preferable to provide a control program of a different effect instead of the control program of the same effect, and to execute those control programs. That is, the control program for the rainbow effect at the time of winning and the control program for the simulated rainbow effect are stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 as control programs for different effects. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in one of the control program for the rainbow effect at the time of winning and the control program for the simulated rainbow effect, the control program for the other can be executed normally, and an abnormality occurs. It is possible to minimize the non-execution of production at times.

In this way, even during the standby state in which the symbols are displayed in a non-variable manner, the simulated rainbow effect is executed in which the rainbow light is emitted in a manner simulating the rainbow effect at the time of winning. To allow a player to experience a rainbow performance that cannot be experienced during a standby state in which patterns are displayed non-variably, and to make a player recognize that a winning rainbow performance can be executed during the variable display of patterns. can be done.

(Regarding the display of a warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" after the simulated rainbow effect ends)
In addition, when performing a simulated rainbow effect during the effect introduction period as described above, the player's desire to play is excessively increased beyond the introduction of the effect, such as "Let's play until you encounter that effect". There is a risk that "addiction" to the game will occur. Therefore, in this example, the following special processing is performed in order to prevent the simulated rainbow effect from causing the player to become “addicted” to the game.

FIG. 225 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the immersion prevention display is executed after execution of the simulated rainbow effect. In this example, during the variable display of the symbols, the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed as the winning confirmation effect for confirming the win. are running In addition, while the simulated rainbow effect is being executed during the performance introduction period during which the symbols are displayed in a non-variable manner, any one of the simulated rainbow effects A to C is executed as the simulated rainbow effect. For each of the rainbow effects A to C at the time of winning and each of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are the same in that the lighting production is executed in a rainbow light emission mode, but the back upper front decoration body 3310 is changed from the initial position to the appearance position. It differs in whether or not it is operated and whether or not the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decoration body 3310 are lit in a rainbow light emission mode in which each of the seven numbered display bodies emits light of different emission colors. As described above in detail, the front upper back effect unit 3300 attached to the game board 5 includes a front upper back decoration body 3310 that is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a rear upper front decoration body 3310. Equipped with a back top front decoration board (not shown) provided with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back top front lifting unit (not shown) for lifting and lowering the back top front decoration body 3310 When a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the upper back decoration body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position so that the front upper back decoration body 3310 can appear on the front side of the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加.

Specifically, in the rainbow effect A at the time of winning or the simulated rainbow effect A, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the front upper back decorative body 3310 does not move from the initial position to the appearance position. The back upper front decoration 3310 is prevented from lighting in the rainbow luminous mode by using each of the seven numbered display bodies. In addition, in the rainbow effect B at the time of winning and the simulated rainbow effect B, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), it is assumed that the front upper back decoration body 3310 moves from the initial position to the appearance position, and the front upper back decoration. As for the body 3310, each of the seven numbered indicators is used to light up in a rainbow luminous manner. In addition, in the rainbow effect C at the time of winning and the simulated rainbow effect C, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the front upper back decoration body 3310 does not move from the initial position to the appearance position. The back upper front decoration body 3310 is lit in a rainbow luminescence mode using each of the seven numbered display bodies.

In this example, after the completion of the variable display of the symbols, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed without the variable display of the symbols, the effect introduction period is started. During the effect introduction period, the effect display device 1600 is used to display (movie) the model introduction of the pachinko machine 1, etc., and at the end stage, the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. there is At this time, during the display of the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1, one of the simulated rainbow effects A to C is executed, and during the execution period of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, the LEDs 1 to 4 and the door of the game board 5 are displayed. Using the LEDs 5 to 7 of the frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, a rainbow lighting effect is performed. While the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is being displayed, a rainbow effect image is displayed for the logo of the model title. In other words, the display of the logo of the model title is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. In such a rainbow effect image, the display colors displayed in each of the plurality of display areas are changed to "red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white" every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). → Red" is changed in a predetermined order, and such regular changes are repeated until timing t10 is reached (for example, 5 seconds).

Next, when the model title logo display ends, one of the simulated rainbow effects A to C being executed ends, and after the model title logo display ends, the manufacturer that manufactured the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. After that, display a warning message about "prevention of addiction" to prevent excessive addiction (e.g. "Pachinko is something to be enjoyed in moderation. Be careful not to get addicted"). running Then, by executing the display of a warning message regarding "prevention of addiction", the effect introduction period is terminated. Here, when the simulated rainbow effects A to C are executed, since the same effects as the rainbow effects A to C at the time of winning are executed as the winning confirmation effects for confirming the winning, the player's willingness to play the game is enhanced. However, after the execution of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, after the logo of the manufacturer that manufactured the pachinko machine 1 is displayed, a warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is displayed. By executing the display, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively absorbed in the game in the subsequent game.

As described above, in the simulated rainbow effect A, during the execution period of the simulated rainbow effect A (timings t1 to t10), the front upper back decoration 3310 does not move from the initial position to the appearing position and is maintained at the initial position. As for the back upper front decoration body 3310, each of the seven numbered display bodies is used so as not to light up in the rainbow light emission mode. From this, after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed, there is no need for an operation to return the front upper back decoration body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position, and the period until the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersion" is started. is short. That is, after execution of the simulated rainbow effect A, the execution period of displaying the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 is short, and the start timing of displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is early.

On the other hand, in the simulated rainbow effect B, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect B, the front upper back decoration 3310 moves from the initial position to the appearance position. Each of the seven numbered indicators is used to light up in a rainbow luminescence mode. Here, after execution of the simulated rainbow effect B, an operation for returning the front upper back decoration body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position is required, and is executed before the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersion". During the period during which the logo of the model title is displayed, an operation is performed to return the front upper back decoration 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position. For this reason, after the simulated rainbow effect B is executed, it takes a long time to start displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction". That is, after execution of the simulated rainbow effect B, the execution period of displaying the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 is long, and the start timing of displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is late.

Further, in the simulated rainbow effect C, during the execution period of the simulated rainbow effect C (timings t1 to t10), the back upper front decoration body 3310 is maintained at the initial position without moving from the initial position to the appearance position. The upper front decorative body 3310 is lit in a rainbow luminescence mode using each of the seven numbered display bodies. Here, the simulated rainbow effect C is the same as the simulated rainbow effect B in that each of the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decoration body 3310 is lit in a rainbow light emission mode. When the effect C is executed, the front upper back decoration 3310 is maintained at the initial position, but attention is paid to whether the front upper back decoration 3310 moves from the initial position to the appearing position. For this reason, after the simulated rainbow effect C is executed, there is a possibility that the user is paying attention to the back upper front decoration body 3310. ” may be missed. In this regard, after the execution of the simulated rainbow effect C, it is not necessary to return the front upper back decoration body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position during the execution period of displaying the logo of the model title, but the simulated rainbow effect B As with the execution of , it takes a long time to start displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction". In other words, after the simulated rainbow effect C is executed, the execution period of displaying the logo of the manufacturer that manufactured the pachinko machine 1 is long, and by delaying the start timing of displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction", the " It is possible to prevent the user from overlooking the warning message regarding "prevention of immersion".

In this example, in the simulated rainbow effects A to C, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation The LEDs 8 to 9 of the unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform a lighting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode. In addition, in the simulated rainbow effect A, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect A, each of the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decoration body 3310 is used to not light in the rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, in the simulated rainbow effects B and C, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effects B and C, each of the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decoration body 3310 is lit in the rainbow light emission mode. I am trying to That is, the simulated rainbow effects B and C are configured so that there are more members (light-emitting areas) involved in the light emitting effect that is lit in the rainbow light emitting mode than the simulated rainbow effect A. In the simulated rainbow effects B and C, the start timing of displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is later than in the simulated rainbow effect A. - 特許庁In this way, when the simulated rainbow effects B and C are executed, the start timing of displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" to be executed later is delayed, thereby contributing to the light-emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light-emitting mode. It is possible to moderately enjoy the state in which the desire to play is high due to the large number of members (light-emitting regions) that emit light until the warning message is displayed.

Further, in this example, in the simulated rainbow effect B, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect B, the back upper front decoration body 3310 moves from the initial position to the appearance position. The distance that the upper front decoration 3310 moves from the initial position can be changed in a plurality of steps. For this reason, after execution of the simulated rainbow effect B, since the movement distance for returning the front upper back decoration 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position is different, until the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersion" is started. (duration during which the logo of the model title is displayed) is variable according to the moving distance. For example, during the execution period of the simulated rainbow effect B (timings t1 to t10), if the distance that the front upper back decoration 3310 has moved from the initial position as the appearance position is long, after the simulated rainbow effect B is executed, "immersion The period before starting to display a warning message regarding "prevention" is lengthened. On the other hand, in the simulated rainbow effect A, during the execution period of the simulated rainbow effect A (timings t1 to t10), the front upper back decoration body 3310 does not move from the initial position to the appearance position and is maintained at the initial position. Therefore, after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed, there is no need for an operation to return the front upper back decoration body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position, and until the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersion" is started. period (execution period for displaying the logo of the model title) is fixed.

In addition, in this example, the execution period of the simulated rainbow effect A and the simulated rainbow effect B are the same, and the period of executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is the same. Since the front decoration 3310 moves from the initial position to the appearing position, the execution period may be longer than that of the simulated rainbow effect A. Further, as described above, after the execution of the simulated rainbow effect B, a warning message regarding "prevention of immersion" is displayed according to the distance that the front upper back decorative body 3310 moves to return from the appearance position to the initial position. The period until the start (the execution period of displaying the logo of the model title) is made variable. As a result, even if the execution period of the simulated rainbow effect B becomes long, the period until the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" starts to be displayed (execution period of the logo display of the model title) can be made variable. , it is possible to make the completion timing of the series of effect introduction periods by ending the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" as early as possible, and prevent the execution period of the series of effect introduction periods from becoming unnecessarily long. can be prevented.

Further, in this example, after the execution of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, after a predetermined period of time has passed, the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is started. , after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is started. As a result, when the rainbow performances A to C at the time of winning are executed, the performance is executed as a confirmed winning performance in which the winning is confirmed, so that the player's willingness to play may be excessively increased. By executing the display of a warning message regarding ``prevention of addiction'' after execution of the rainbow performances A to C at the time of winning, the player can be prevented from being excessively addicted to the game in subsequent games.

In the above, after the execution of the rainbow effects A to C at the time of winning, the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of getting stuck" is executed, but after the execution of the rainbow effects A to C at the time of winning It is preferable that the execution period of the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" after execution of the simulated rainbow effects A to C is longer than the execution period of the display of the warning message. As a result, when the simulated rainbow effects A to C are executed, the player's desire to play the game may be excessively increased even though the effect is not determined to be a hit, but the execution period of the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is lengthened. By doing so, it is possible to reliably reduce such a state in which the desire to play is excessively increased. In addition, it is preferable that the execution period of the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" be shorter than the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect executed before it. As a result, during the display of the caution message regarding "prevention of addiction", the state in which the player's motivation to play is excessively increased is reduced. It is possible to prevent excessive decrease in desire to play.

(Regarding erasing the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" after the end of the simulated rainbow effect A)
In this example, in the simulated rainbow effect A, during the execution period of the simulated rainbow effect A (timings t1 to t10), LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 8 of the effect operation unit 300 9. The LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, but the back upper front decoration 3310 does not move from the initial position to the appearance position and is maintained at the initial position. As for the back top front decoration 3310, each of the seven numbered display bodies is used so as not to light up in the rainbow luminescence mode. During the execution of the simulated rainbow effect A, compared with the simulated rainbow effects B and C, the player's desire to play is not excessively improved, and after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed. , I don't feel the need to display a warning message about "prevention of immersion". Therefore, in this example, only after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated while the warning message about "prevention of addiction" is being displayed, the display of the warning message about "prevention of addiction" is erased. make it possible to

FIG. 226 is a timing chart showing an example of erasing the immersion prevention display after execution of the simulated rainbow effect. As described above, after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed, a warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is displayed. When 301 is operated, it is possible to erase the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersion". As a result, while the simulated rainbow effect A is being executed, the desire to play the game is improved by the execution of the light emitting effect of lighting up in the rainbow light emitting mode, but after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed, attention is paid to "prevention of addiction". By executing the display of the call-out message, the improved desire to play can be reduced, and the display of the call-out message regarding "prevention of addiction" can be effectively notified. In addition, during the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction", the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" can be erased by operating the effect operation unit 301 at will of the player. It is possible to prevent the continuation of a state in which the desire to play is reduced.

On the other hand, in the simulated rainbow effect B, during the execution period of the simulated rainbow effect B (timings t1 to t10), LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, It is assumed that the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode, and the back top front decoration body 3310 moves from the initial position to the appearance position, and the back top front decoration body As for 3310, each of the seven numbered indicators is used to light up in a rainbow luminescence mode. In other words, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect B, there are more members (light emitting regions) involved in the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode than in the simulated rainbow effect A, and the game motivation is excessively increased. It has become. For this reason, after the simulated rainbow effect B is executed, a warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is displayed. Even if you operate it, it is impossible to erase the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction". As a result, after the simulated rainbow effect B is executed, regardless of whether or not the effect operation unit 301 is operated, by executing the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersion" for a predetermined period, excessive It is possible to reliably reduce the state in which the player's desire to play is enhanced, and to effectively notify the display of a warning message regarding "prevention of addiction".

Further, in this example, after execution of the simulated rainbow effect A, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the display of the warning message about "prevention of addiction", the display of the warning message about "prevention of addiction" is erased. However, during the period from the execution of the simulated rainbow effect A to the start of the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" (execution period of displaying the logo of the model title), the effect operation unit 301 is operated. It is also possible to erase (not execute) the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction". As a result, the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" can be hidden by operating the effect operation unit 301 at will of the player before the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is started. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a state in which the player's desire to play is diminished due to the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction". Similarly, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect A, the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is erased (not executed) after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed. making it possible. Even with such a configuration, by operating the effect operation unit 301 according to the player's will before starting the display of the caution message regarding "prevention of addiction", the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is displayed. can be hidden, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a state in which the desire to play is reduced due to the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction".

(Regarding execution restrictions for simulated rainbow effects)
In this example, during the execution of the effect introduction period during which the symbols are displayed in a non-variable manner, the simulated rainbow effects A to C are executed to light up in the rainbow light emitting mode, and the simulated rainbow effects A to C are executed. Afterwards, a warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is displayed. During the execution of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, since the player's desire to play is enhanced, the player who is likely to be absorbed in the game may have light emission that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode in the first place. There was a danger of performing the rendition. Therefore, in this example, in addition to the effect operation unit 301, a predetermined operation unit that can be operated by the player is newly provided, and when a specific action is detected with respect to the predetermined operation unit, the simulated rainbow effect A By restricting the execution of to C, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming more motivated to play.

FIG. 227 is a timing chart showing an example of limiting the execution of the simulated rainbow effect. First, on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, an "addiction prevention switch" (not shown) that can be operated by the player is provided. The anti-immersion switch adopts a knock type that is configured to maintain the depressed position when pushed all the way down the first time, and return to the initial position when pushed all the way down the second time. Then, when the specific action A is detected by operating the immersion prevention switch to maintain it at the depressed position, the simulated rainbow effects A to C are executed when the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effects A to C comes. First, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to light up in a rainbow light emission mode. are restricted to In addition, when the specific action A is not detected, after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed, a warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is displayed, but when the specific action A is detected also restricts the display of warning messages regarding "prevention of addiction". Further, when the specific action A is detected, the state in which the game cannot be played, for example, the state in which the game ball B is not fired from the ball launching device 540 even if the handle 195 is operated, or the state in which the game ball B is first started Control is made so that even if the ball enters various entrances such as the mouth 2004, the variable display of the symbols is not started.

The immersion prevention switch is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and can be operated by the player, but is assumed to be operated by the player's family or persons involved in the hall. When the player's family member or hall staff member determines that the player is immersed in the game, the player's family member or hall staff member operates the addiction prevention switch to stop the game. Just do it. Here, while the simulated rainbow effects A to C are being executed, the player's motivation to play is enhanced by the execution of the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. By operating the addiction prevention switch, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game without executing the simulated rainbow performances A to C. In addition, when the player's family member or person involved in the hall operates the immersion prevention switch, since the purpose is to stop the game in the first place, the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed, and the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed. It is also assumed that the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersion" after execution of C is not executed.

Further, on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the "addiction prevention switch", an "addiction prevention switch" (not shown) that can be operated by the player is provided. As for the immersion prevention switch, there is a knock type that, like the immersion prevention switch, maintains the depressed position the first time it is pushed all the way down, and returns to the initial position the second time it is pushed all the way down. Adopted. Then, when specific action B is detected by operating the addiction prevention switch to maintain it at the depressed position, as in the case of detecting specific action A by operating the addiction prevention switch to maintain it at the depressed position, When the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effects A to C arrives, the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed, and the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LED 8 of the effect operation unit 300 are turned on. 9, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are restricted so as not to perform the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. However, when specific action B is detected by operating the addiction prevention switch to keep it in the depressed position, it differs from the case where specific action A is detected by operating the addiction prevention switch to maintain it in the depressed position. , to display a warning message regarding "prevention of immersion".

The addiction prevention switch is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and is assumed to be operated by a player. When the player fears that he or she will become addicted to the game, the player himself/herself operates the addiction prevention switch so as not to generate an effect that causes the player to become addicted to the game. Here, while the simulated rainbow effects A to C are being executed, the player's desire to play the game is enhanced by the execution of the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode, but the player himself/herself must turn on the addiction prevention switch. By operating it, the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed, and the player can be prevented from becoming absorbed in the game. In addition, while not executing the simulated rainbow effects A to C, by executing the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" after the execution of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is displayed. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming absorbed in the game due to the occurrence of a state in which the player's desire to play is reduced due to the display.

In this example, a "strong immersion prevention switch" and a "weak immersion prevention switch" are provided as "immersion prevention switches" for restricting execution of the simulated rainbow effects A to C. The strong immersion prevention switch is held in the depressed position the first time it is pushed all the way down, and in a state where simulated rainbow effects A to C are restricted so that it is not executed, pushing it all the way back a second time returns it to the initial position. Even if it is returned, the state in which the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed will not be released, and will continue unless the power is turned on again. As a result, even if the player operates the addiction prevention switch after the player's family member or a person involved in the hall operates the addiction prevention switch, the game can be played without executing the simulated rainbow performances A to C. Since the state in which it is impossible to play continues, the game can be stopped reliably. On the other hand, the weak immersion prevention switch is maintained at the depressed position when pushed all the way down the first time, and in a state where the simulated rainbow effects A to C are restricted so that they are not executed, the switch is pushed all the way back the second time to the initial state. When it is returned to the position, it is possible to release the restricted state in which the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed.

In addition, the immersion prevention switch is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and can be operated not only by the player's family members and persons involved in the hall, but also by the player. It is preferable that a person involved in the hall prepares a remote control or the like so that the specific action A can be detected by operating the remote control or the like from a position away from the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加As a result, even when the player is seated on the pachinko machine 1, the player's family member or a person involved in the hall operates the remote control or the like from a position away from the pachinko machine 1 to detect the specific action A. can be made In addition, if the addiction prevention switch is not provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 but is provided on a remote controller or the like, the player cannot operate the addiction prevention switch without permission, so a simulated rainbow effect is required. The player cannot cancel the state in which the execution of A to C is restricted, and the game can be stopped.

In addition, in this example, the ``weak addiction prevention switch'' and the ``addiction prevention switch'' are maintained at the depressed position when pushed to the back for the first time, and the simulated rainbow effects A to C are restricted so as not to be executed. , the restricted state is not immediately released when it is returned to the initial position by pressing it all the way down for the second time, and the restricted state is released after a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds) has passed. I am assuming. In other words, the state in which the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed continues until the predetermined period elapses after the button is pushed all the way down for the second time to return to the initial position. As a result, immediately before the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, even if the player returns to the initial position by pressing all the way down for the second time, the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed, and the player can play the game. It is possible to effectively prevent the state of becoming immersed in.

In addition, while the "addiction prevention switch" or "addiction prevention switch" is being operated (not released), the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed, and the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the door frame top unit 450 LEDs 5 to 7, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are restricted so as not to execute the light emitting effect lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode, for example, in the rainbow light emitting mode At least part of the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in a single color instead of the lighting effect. It may be configured to notify the outside that the ``addiction prevention switch'' or the ``addiction prevention switch'' is being operated. Also, for each type of "addiction prevention switch" or "addiction prevention switch", LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, LED 10 of the door frame 3 14 may be configured to emit light of different colors. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize from the outside that the simulated rainbow effects A to C are restricted from being executed while the ``addiction prevention switch'' or ``addiction prevention switch'' is being operated. .

[Confirmation of rainbow emission]
In this embodiment, during the variable display of the symbols, a rainbow effect at the time of winning (luminescence effect lighting in a rainbow light emission mode) is executed as a winning confirmation effect for confirming the win. If the performance is not properly executed, there is a risk that it will become a factor in lowering the interest in the game. In particular, since the appearance rate of the rainbow effect at the time of winning is extremely low, it has been difficult even in halls, factories, etc. to confirm whether or not the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode can be normally executed. Therefore, in this example, it is made possible to confirm the rainbow light emitting mode at a timing different from the rainbow effect at the time of winning. Specifically, during the execution of the effect introduction period during which the symbols are displayed in a non-variable manner, as the simulated rainbow effect, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed in the same way as the rainbow effect at the time of winning. It is possible to easily check in a hall, a factory, etc., whether or not the lighting effect of lighting up can be normally executed. The effect introduction period is an effect that is started when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the variable display of symbols is finished, and the model introduction of the pachinko machine 1 is performed. In addition to etc., a simulated rainbow effect is to be executed. In this example, as for the simulated rainbow effect, compared with the rainbow effect at the time of winning, during the execution period of the rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit LEDs 8 to 9 of 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are the same in that the lighting effect is executed in the rainbow light emission mode, but the timing of regularly switching the light emission colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode is advanced. They are different in terms of whether they are slowed down or slowed down.

In this example, during the variable display of symbols, it is possible to execute an effect suggesting a set value of 6 as the suggestion effect A mentioned above. is the same in that it executes That is, when executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning or the simulated rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and LED 5 of the door frame top unit 450 are interlocked with the display of the effect display device 1600 in the same way as when the suggestive effect A is executed. 7, LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform a light emission production that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode. Specifically, when it is time to execute the rainbow effect at the time of winning, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), the game is played. LEDs 1-2 of the board 5 are "red", LEDs 3-4 of the game board 5 are "purple", LEDs 5-6 of the door frame top unit 450 are "blue", LED 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and door frame 3 LED 8 is "green", LED 9 of the door frame 3 and LED 10 of the door frame 3 are "orange", LEDs 11-12 of the door frame 3 are "yellow", and LEDs 13-14 of the door frame 3 are "white". I am trying to let Further, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, when the elapsed time from the start of the effect introduction period reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), the LEDs 1 and 2 of the game board 5 are turned on. LEDs 3 and 4 of the game board 5 are "purple", LEDs 5 and 6 of the door frame top unit 450 are "blue", LED 7 of the door frame top unit 450 and LED 8 of the door frame 3 are "green", the door The LED 9 of the frame 3 and the LED 10 of the door frame 3 are "orange", the LEDs 11-12 of the door frame 3 are "yellow", and the LEDs 13-14 of the door frame 3 are "white". That is, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are caused to emit light of different colors for each two groups. .

Then, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are changed every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). , the LED emitting light in "red" is "purple", the LED emitting light in "purple" is "blue", the LED emitting light in "blue" is "green", and the LED emitting light in "green" The LED is "orange", the LED emitting "orange" is "yellow", the LED emitting "yellow" is "white", the LED emitting "white" is "red", change to In this way, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are set for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). each time, the luminescent color of the LEDs in each of the two groups is changed in a predetermined order of "red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white→red" until timing t10 is reached. (for example, 10 seconds), such regular changes are repeated.

In this example, not only is the rainbow performance at the time of winning during the variable display of the symbols, but also during the performance introduction period during the non-variable display of the symbols, the rainbow performance at the time of the winning is performed as a simulated rainbow performance. As with the above, a lighting effect of lighting in the rainbow lighting mode is executed. Thus, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used. It is possible to confirm whether or not the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode can be executed normally. In addition, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the state of changing the light emission color of the LED in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" can be observed at any time. , LEDs 1 to 14 can normally emit light in each of the colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode, and it is easy to find out whether any abnormality has occurred in the light emission of any of the LEDs. can do.

Also, in the rainbow effect at the time of winning, any of the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 emit light. If there is no abnormality in the LEDs, by controlling each emission color to be switched in turn to a plurality of emission colors in a short unit emission time, these LEDs cooperate to visually emit rainbow emission mode. It becomes possible to visually recognize as if it is being done, and it is possible to execute a lighting effect with impact. In addition, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled by interlocking the LEDs 1 to 14. 14 are caused to emit light in a plurality of colors so that each two groups emit light in different colors, and furthermore, by switching the light emission colors in a short time, a light emission performance with more impact than usual can be executed.

In this example, as light emission in the rainbow light emission mode, seven colors are emitted at the same time using a plurality of LEDs, and the respective light emission colors are regularly switched. , it is not necessary to use seven colors, and it is sufficient that three or more predetermined colors appear at the same time.

Further, the display contents displayed on the effect display device 1600 may differ between when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed and when the simulated rainbow effect is executed. For example, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed, the patterns are displayed in parallel, but when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the patterns may not be displayed in parallel. As a result, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, there is no possibility of erroneously recognizing that the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed. Note that the display content displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not limited to this, and for example, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, a display such as "simulating" may be executed.

In addition, the rainbow effect and the simulated rainbow effect at the time of winning are performed using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. Although it is the same in that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed, it is preferable to provide a control program of a different effect instead of the control program of the same effect, and to execute those control programs. That is, the control program for the rainbow effect at the time of winning and the control program for the simulated rainbow effect are stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 as control programs for different effects. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in one of the control program for the rainbow effect at the time of winning and the control program for the simulated rainbow effect, the control program for the other can be executed normally, and an abnormality occurs. It is possible to minimize the non-execution of production at times.

FIG. 228 is a timing chart showing an example of the case where LED light emission confirmation is performed during execution of the simulated rainbow effect. In this example, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are divided into two groups every predetermined period. The light emission color of the LED is changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red", but when the rainbow effect at the time of the hit is executed, the normal speed (for example 0.1 second), while the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the rainbow emission mode is set so that the LED emission color is switched at a speed slower than the normal speed (for example, 1 second). A light emitting effect that lights up with is started. In other words, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is started so that the intervals at which the light emission colors of the LEDs are switched are longer than in the rainbow effect at the time of winning. Then, after the start of the simulated rainbow effect, the luminescent colors of the LEDs are switched, and after all of the luminescent colors constituting at least the rainbow luminescent mode appear for each of the LEDs 1 to 14, the rainbow at the time of winning appears. As with the effect, a light-emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light-emitting mode is executed so that the luminescent color of the LED can be switched at a normal speed (for example, 0.1 second). In this way, at the start of the simulated rainbow effect, since the intervals at which the LED emission colors are switched are long, it is possible to determine whether each of the LEDs 1 to 14 can normally emit light in each of the emission colors constituting the rainbow emission mode. can be slowly confirmed, and it is possible to easily find out whether an abnormality has occurred in the light emission of any of the LEDs. In addition, after the start of the simulated rainbow effect, by returning the interval at which the luminescent color of the LED is switched to the normal speed, the luminescent color of the LED at the normal speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) like the rainbow effect at the time of winning It can also be confirmed that it is possible to switch between

In addition, as described above in detail, the effect introduction period is started when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the variable display of the symbols is completed (or after the power is turned on). are doing. During the effect introduction period, the effect display device 1600 is used to display (movie) the model introduction of the pachinko machine 1, etc., and at the end stage, the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. there is At this time, while the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is being displayed, the simulated rainbow effect is executed, and during the execution period of the simulated rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, Using the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode is executed. On the other hand, during execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the effect display device 1600 does not display the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, at the time of execution of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, the effect display device 1600 visually confirms whether or not the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is being displayed, whereby the rainbow effect being executed is simulated. It is possible to grasp whether it is an effect or not, and it is possible to grasp that it is an effect for confirming whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the light emission of the LED.

In this example, during execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, an effect image (for example, a background image) displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 or a part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 A rainbow mode effect image is displayed for the effect image (for example, a effect image of a character, an item, or the like) displayed in the . On the other hand, during execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the effect display device 1600 is configured not to display the rainbow mode effect image for the logo display of the model title, the background image, characters, items, and the like. . As a result, at the time of execution of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, the effect display device 1600 visually confirms whether or not the effect image in the rainbow mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600, thereby simulating the rainbow effect being executed. It is possible to easily grasp whether it is a rainbow effect or not, and furthermore it is possible to easily grasp that the effect is for confirming whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the light emission of the LED.

In addition, in this example, during execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the front upper back decoration body 3310 can move from the initial position to the appearance position, and the front upper back decoration body 3310 has seven numbers. Each display member is used to light up in a rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, during execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the front upper back decoration 3310 is maintained at the initial position without moving from the initial position to the appearance position. Each numbered indicator is used so that it does not light up in a rainbow luminescence mode. As described above in detail, the front upper back effect unit 3300 attached to the game board 5 includes a front upper back decoration body 3310 that is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a rear upper front decoration body 3310. Equipped with a back top front decoration board (not shown) provided with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back top front lifting unit (not shown) for lifting and lowering the back top front decoration body 3310 When a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the upper back decoration body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position so that the front upper back decoration body 3310 can appear on the front side of the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加. As a result, at the time of executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode, whether or not the front upper back decoration body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position, and each of the seven numbered display bodies in the front upper back decoration body 3310 is displayed. By visually checking whether or not the lighting is performed in a rainbow light emission mode that emits light of different colors, it is possible to easily grasp whether the rainbow effect being executed is a simulated rainbow effect, and eventually, if there is an abnormality in the light emission of the LED. It can be easily grasped that it is an effect for confirming whether or not it has occurred.

Thus, during execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning or the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame 3 It is the same in that the LEDs 10 to 14 are used to light up in a rainbow light emission mode, but whether or not to display a rainbow mode effect image on the effect display device 1600, and the back top front decoration body 3310 is initialized. Whether or not to move from the position to the appearing position, and whether or not the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decoration body 3310 are lit in a rainbow light emission mode that emits light of different colors are different. In other words, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the effect is executed with imperfect effect contents so that part of the effect contents executed in the rainbow effect at the time of winning is missing. As a result, at the time of execution of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, it is easy to determine whether or not the rainbow effect being executed is the simulated rainbow effect by visually confirming whether the effect is being executed with incomplete content of the effect. In addition, it is possible to easily grasp that the effect is for confirming whether or not there is an abnormality in the light emission of the LED. In addition, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed, rainbow light is emitted using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. As a production related to the light emitting production that lights up in a manner, the operation of the front upper back decoration body 3310 and the lighting of the rainbow light emission form in the front upper back decoration body 3310 are added, and an integrated production is performed so that the number of related members increases. is executed, it is possible to make the performance more interesting than the simulated rainbow performance and to make the performance attracting the player's attention.

In the above, during execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning or the simulated rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, door frame 3 The LEDs 10 to 14 of the game board 5 are the same in that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed. Some of the LEDs 5-7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8-9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3 may be configured so as not to light up. With such a configuration, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the luminescent color that constitutes the rainbow luminous mode is partially missing, and light is emitted in a mode in which the rainbow luminous mode is not established. The difference becomes clear, and it is possible to easily grasp whether the rainbow effect being executed is a simulated rainbow effect.

As described above in detail, the plate unit 200 is provided with a light amount adjustment button 228 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the effect operation section 301 in the effect operation unit 300 . As the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs of the door frame 3 As for the LEDs 10 to 14, the light amount adjustment operation is performed using the light amount adjustment button 228, thereby making it possible to adjust the light amount in stages. For example, it is possible to adjust the level of the light intensity of the LED from 1 (minimum light intensity) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum light intensity). , the light amount of the LED increases, and the light amount of the LED decreases as the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated downward to decrease the step. As for the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations, it is possible to adjust the amount of light both during the pattern change and during the non-change.

Regarding the above, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning or the simulated rainbow effect, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, at least the rainbow It is possible to adjust the light amount of the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) that constitute the light emission mode. I have to. As a result, during execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the rainbow effect is generated using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. It is possible not only to confirm whether or not the light emitting effect of lighting in the light emitting mode can be normally executed, but also to confirm whether or not each of the LEDs 1 to 14 can normally adjust the light amount.

In this example, at least during execution of the simulated rainbow effect, among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light-emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the door LEDs 5 to 7 of the frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) enable adjustment of the amount of light, whereas LEDs (game As for the LEDs 15 to 17) of the board 5, the amount of light cannot be adjusted, so that the LEDs 15 to 17) always emit a constant amount of light. That is, during execution of the simulated rainbow effect, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, LEDs whose light amount is variable (LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode) are replaced with LEDs whose light amount is unchanged (LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode). The light amount of the LEDs constituting the ) is relatively changed. As a result, when the light quantity adjusting button 228 is operated during execution of the simulated rainbow presentation, it can be easily confirmed whether or not the light quantities of the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode can be normally adjusted. It should be noted that the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are not allowed to adjust the light intensity, and not only are they always maintained in a state of emitting light with a constant light intensity, but also the color of the emitted light is maintained. is preferred. Thus, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are not noticed, and the light emission colors of the respective LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode are normally switched. You can focus on checking whether

On the other hand, even during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the door LEDs 5 to 7 of the frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) enable adjustment of the amount of light, whereas LEDs (game Regarding the LEDs 15 to 17) of the board 5, the light intensity cannot be adjusted, and when they are emitted, they are always emitted with a constant light intensity. The decorativeness is not lost during the variable display of the pattern. As in the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode cannot be adjusted in light quantity, and when they are caused to emit light, they are always emitted at a constant light quantity. In addition, it is preferable to maintain the emission color. As a result, during execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, attention is not paid to the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode, and the light emission effect that the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode are lit in the rainbow light emission mode is performed. It can draw attention to what is being done.

In addition, in this example, while the simulated rainbow effect is being executed, it is checked whether or not the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode can be normally executed. When you operate , it is possible to end the simulated rainbow effect. Specifically, during execution of the simulated rainbow effect, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated, among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light-emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) is completed, and the rainbow light emission mode is changed. Constituent LEDs are switched from emitting light in a rainbow light emitting mode to non-light emitting or to emitting light in a single color. As a result, at the time of manufacturing confirmation at the factory, the simulated rainbow effect is executed, and after confirming whether or not the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode can be normally executed, any event during the simulated rainbow effect is performed. By operating the effect operation unit 301 at the appropriate timing, the simulated rainbow effect can be terminated at any time, and unnecessary execution of the rainbow effect after the confirmation does not affect other manufacturing confirmations. can be prevented. In addition, after the simulated rainbow effect is finished, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are switched from emitting light in the rainbow light emitting mode to non-light emitting or emitting light in a single color, thereby clearly indicating that the simulated rainbow effect has ended. can let you know.

On the other hand, while the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed, even if the effect operation unit 301 is operated, the rainbow effect at the time of winning is not ended. Thus, during the execution of the rainbow performance at the time of winning, the rainbow performance at the time of winning does not end in the middle, and it is possible to surely notify that the fixed performance for determining the winning is being executed.

Further, as a modification, at least during execution of the simulated rainbow effect, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5) that constitute the rainbow light emission mode , LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3), the light emission of the LEDs changes with the light emission color that constitutes the rainbow light emission mode, The LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are configured so that they do not emit light, or they emit light without changing the emission color (not flashing). good too. Thus, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are not noticed, and the light emission colors of the respective LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode are normally switched. You can focus on checking whether

Also in the above modification, when the effect operating unit 301 is operated at least during execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the simulated rainbow effect is terminated, and the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, door The LEDs 5 to 7 of the frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) are switched from rainbow light emission to non-light emission or to single color light emission. . On the other hand, for the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated, the LEDs do not emit light, or the LEDs emit light without changing the emission color. I am trying to maintain the state (not blinking). Thus, when the performance operation part 301 is operated during execution of the simulated rainbow performance, only the light emission state of the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode is changed, and the end of the simulated rainbow performance is clearly notified. can be done.

On the other hand, as a modified example, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LED 1 of the game board 5 4, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3), the light emission of the LEDs changes with the light emission colors that constitute the rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, the LEDs (the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode may be configured so that the LEDs can be made to flash or change their emission colors. . As a result, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, even for the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode, the decorativeness during the variable display of the pattern is not lost.

Also, in this example, during execution of the simulated rainbow effect, when the variable display of the symbols is started by entering the various starting ports (the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005), the simulated rainbow effect ends. (End of the effect introduction period), while the simulated rainbow effect is being executed, even if there is no entry into various start ports (first start port 2004 and second start port 2005), the effect When the operation unit 301 is operated, the simulated rainbow effect can be terminated. As a result, at the time of manufacturing confirmation at the factory, when it is desired to terminate the rainbow effect being executed, it is not necessary to enter the ball into various starting holes, and the effect operation section 301 can be operated. Further, on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the production operation unit 301, a plurality of operation units such as a light amount adjustment button 228 and a volume adjustment button 227 are provided. Only when the operation unit 301 is operated, the rainbow effect being executed can be terminated. As a result, for example, even if the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, the simulated rainbow effect being executed will not end, and the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450) that constitute the rainbow light emission mode will not end. It is possible to sufficiently confirm whether or not each of the LEDs 5 to 7, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 can normally adjust the amount of light.

In addition, in this example, during the execution of the effect introduction period that starts when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses of the state in which the symbols are not variably displayed, the simulated rainbow effect is executed and the lighting is performed in the rainbow light emission mode. It is designed to confirm whether or not the luminescence effect can be executed normally, but after the power is turned on, the simulated start operation part, which is a special operation part for forcibly starting the simulated rainbow effect, is placed on the back of the pachinko machine 1. When a simulated start operating part is operated after turning on the power, the simulated rainbow performance is started and it is possible to confirm whether or not the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed. Further, the simulated rainbow performance is not started until a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the simulated start operation unit is operated after the power is turned on, and the simulated rainbow performance is started after the predetermined period has passed. I'm trying As a result, for example, when confirming manufacturing in line work at a factory, the simulated rainbow effect can be started at any timing by operating the simulation start operation section at any timing after power is turned on. This eliminates problems (confirmation mistakes, omissions, etc.) caused by the time difference between the work process of turning on the power and operating the simulated start operation part and the work process of checking the lighting, and the light emission that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode. It is possible to improve the efficiency of confirmation work whether or not the performance can be normally executed. In addition, during the period from when the simulation start operation unit provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is operated until a predetermined period elapses (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow effect), the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 On the side, it is made possible to perform a light emission effect that lights up in a light emission mode other than the rainbow light emission mode (for example, a single color light emission mode, a light emission mode with a plurality of colors less than the rainbow light emission mode, etc.), and depending on the line work mode These confirmations may be made possible using the time difference described above. As a result, it is possible not only to prevent erroneous confirmation and omission of confirmation of the lighting effect of lighting in the rainbow luminous mode executed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, but also to further improve the efficiency of the confirmation work. It should be noted that the simulated start operation unit may be any operation unit that is provided at a location that the player cannot operate or visually recognize, apart from the power switch 630a related to turning on the power. An operation part of a formula, or an operation part of a type operated by inserting a special tool (such as a thin rod) or a key possessed by an administrator can be exemplified. Of these, if the operation part is operated by inserting a special tool (thin rod, etc.) or key possessed by the manager, the action of the simulated start operation part can be made to function only in the factory, and in the hall Unintentional erroneous operations can also be prevented.

In the above, the simulated start operation unit for forcibly starting the simulated rainbow effect is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, whereas the effect operation unit 301 for ending the simulated rainbow effect is provided on the pachinko machine 1 is provided on the front side of the As a result, it is necessary to go around to the front side of the pachinko machine 1 in order to operate the simulation start operation section 301 after the simulation start operation section is operated after the power is turned on and the simulated rainbow performance is started, and the production confirmation at the factory. In this case, the simulated rainbow effect is operated by operating the effect operation part 301 without forgetting to confirm whether or not the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode executed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 can be normally executed. can be prevented from terminating.

(Relationship with confirmation other than rainbow emission)
As described above, in the present embodiment, during the variable display of the symbols, in addition to executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning (luminescence effect lighting in the rainbow light emission mode) as the winning confirmation effect for confirming the win, A simulated rainbow effect is executed at a timing different from the rainbow effect of , so that light emission in the rainbow light emission mode can be confirmed. That is, among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, production operation Regarding the LEDs 8-9 of the unit 300 and the LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3), it is possible to check whether they are lit normally during execution of the simulated rainbow effect, but LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light-emitting mode (game board 5 LEDs 15 to 17) can be checked whether they are lit normally at a timing different from the simulated rainbow effect. In addition, it is possible to check whether contact with the steering wheel 195 is normally detected at a timing different from the simulated rainbow effect.

FIG. 237 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a confirmation period other than the simulated rainbow effect is provided after the power is turned on. In this example, after the power is turned on, all the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are turned off. I try to keep it lit. Further, the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode emit light in a single color (for example, red or blue). As a result, after the power is turned on, it is possible to visually check whether or not the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are lit, thereby determining whether there is an abnormality in the light emission of the LEDs. can be confirmed.

In addition, after the power is turned on, the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode cannot be adjusted in light quantity, and are always maintained in a state of emitting light with a constant light quantity. That is, after the power is turned on, even if the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, the light amount of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode does not change. As a result, after the power is turned on, the amount of light of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode does not become too dark, and it is confirmed whether or not there is an abnormality in the light emission of the LEDs. be able to. It should be noted that the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode cannot be adjusted in light quantity, and not only is it maintained in a state of emitting light with a constant light quantity, but also the light emission color is maintained. is preferred. As a result, after the power is turned on, only the confirmation of whether or not the LEDs (the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are normally lit can be made to be noticed.

Further, after the power is turned on, among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, all the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are turned on. LEDs (LEDs 1-4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 of the effect operation unit 300, LED 10 of the door frame 3 14) is restricted so as not to execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. Specifically, among the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) constituting the rainbow light emission mode , at least some of the LEDs, for example, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit. In addition, regarding the emission colors of the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) that constitute the rainbow light emission mode, , By emitting light in a single color (for example, green or yellow) that is different from the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode, the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LED 15 of the game board 5) 17) is notified that it is a confirmation period to see if there is any abnormality in light emission. In this way, during the period for checking whether or not there is an abnormality in the light emission of the LEDs (the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (the LED 1 of the game board 5) 4, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) do not execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. Instead of paying attention to the switching of the light emission, the attention can be paid to confirming whether each LED (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that does not constitute the rainbow light emission mode is normally lit. Also, the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) constituting the rainbow light emission mode are adjusted Even if the button 228 is operated, the amount of light does not change, and the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are prevented from affecting the confirmation of whether or not they are lit normally. ing.

In this example, after the power is turned on, it is possible to check whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. That is, after the power is turned on, a confirmation period is provided to check whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. In the pachinko machine 1, the handle touch sensor 192 detects whether or not the player is touching the handle 195 on the main control board 1310 side. is detected by the handle rotation detection sensor 189 on the main control board 1310 side, and the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 (the game ball B can be shot from the ball launcher 540). I have to. In other words, even if the player touches the handle 195, the game ball B cannot be hit unless the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. For this reason, after the power is turned on, by providing a confirmation period to see if the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, the hall manager or the like comes into contact with the handle 195, and the contact with the handle 195 is prevented. can be checked to see if it is successfully detected.

Also, during the period for checking whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, if the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected when the hall manager or the like touches the handle 195, , is notified to the outside to the effect that it is normally detected. Specifically, in addition to the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, an LED is provided to notify that contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. there is Further, when the hall manager or the like touches the handle 195, if the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, a confirmation sound is output from the speaker. As a result, when the hall manager or the like touches the handle 195 after the power is turned on, it can be properly confirmed whether the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected.

Further, as described above, after the power is turned on, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the door frame LEDs 5 to 7 of the top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) are restricted so as not to perform the lighting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. In other words, after the power is turned on, the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7. The LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) are restricted so as not to perform the light emitting effect lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. In this way, during the confirmation period whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the effect In the LEDs 8 to 9 of the operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3), since the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not performed, the switch of light emission in the rainbow light emission mode is not noticed, and the handle 195 is operated. attention can be drawn to confirming whether the contact is successfully detected.

As described above in detail, in this example, a simulation start operation unit, which is a special operation unit for forcibly starting the simulated rainbow effect after the power is turned on, is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the simulation is performed after the power is turned on. When the start operation unit is operated, the simulated rainbow effect is started, and it is possible to confirm whether or not the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed. Further, the simulated rainbow performance is not started until a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the simulated start operation unit is operated after the power is turned on, and the simulated rainbow performance is started after the predetermined period has passed. I'm trying As a result, after the power is turned on, it is confirmed whether or not there is an abnormality in the light emission of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode, and the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. After confirming whether or not to be performed, the simulated rainbow effect can be started at any timing by operating the simulation start operation part at any timing during the confirmation period. In addition, since the simulated rainbow effect is started after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation of the simulated start operation unit, for example, when confirming production in line work at a factory, etc., the operation of operating the simulated start operation unit Problems (confirmation mistakes, omissions, etc.) caused by the time difference between the process and the work process of checking the lighting are solved, and the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the door frame top unit 450 that constitute the rainbow light emission mode) LEDs 5-7, LEDs 8-9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3) can improve the efficiency of confirmation work whether or not the light-emitting effect lighting in the rainbow light-emitting mode can be normally executed.

In the above, during the period from when the simulated start operation section is operated until the predetermined period elapses (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow effect), the confirmation executed before the simulated start operation section is operated The period is continued, and when the predetermined period elapses (when the simulated rainbow performance is started), the confirmation period executed before operating the simulated start operating part is terminated. In other words, during the period from when the simulated start operation unit is operated until the predetermined period elapses (while the simulated rainbow effect is waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow effect), the simulated rainbow effect is not started, and the lighting is in the rainbow light emission mode. Since the light emission effect is not executed, it is confirmed whether the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are normally lit, as before the operation of the simulated start operation section. Attention can be drawn to confirming whether a touch to 195 is successfully detected.

Specifically, during the period from when the simulated start operation unit is operated until a predetermined period elapses (while the simulated rainbow effect is waiting to start), the door Of the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the frame 3 and the game board 5, all the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are maintained in a lighting state, and When a predetermined period of time elapses (when the simulated rainbow performance is started), the lighting state of all the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) not constituting the rainbow light emission mode is terminated. As a result, by using the time difference that occurs between the work process of operating the simulated start operation section and the work process of confirming lighting, the light emission of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode is abnormal. can be checked to see if it has occurred. Further, for example, even if it is not confirmed whether or not the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed before operating the simulated start operation section, the rainbow light emission mode is performed after the simulated start operation section is operated. Since it is possible to confirm whether or not the light emitting effect of lighting up can be normally executed, it is possible to prevent confirmation errors, confirmation omissions, and the like from occurring. However, regarding the light emission mode of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode, a different light emission mode (for example, a different light emission mode) from the light emission mode executed before operating the simulation start operation section (e.g. color, blinking instead of always lit). As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp whether or not the simulated start operation section has been operated by the light emission mode of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode.

Similarly, during the period from when the simulated start operation unit is operated until a predetermined period elapses (while the simulated rainbow effect is waiting to start), the handle 195 is operated in the same manner as before the simulated start operation unit is operated. The period for confirming whether the contact is normally detected is continued, and when the predetermined period has passed (when the simulated rainbow effect is started), whether the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. to end the confirmation period. In other words, when the hall manager or the like touches the handle 195 during the period from when the simulated start operation unit is operated until the predetermined period elapses (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow effect), the handle When the contact to 195 is normally detected, the fact that the contact is normally detected is notified to the outside. Thus, it is possible to confirm whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected by using the time difference generated between the work process of operating the simulated start operation part and the work process of confirming the lighting. Further, for example, even if it is not confirmed whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected before operating the simulated start operation section, contact with the handle 195 after operating the simulated start operation section is detected. Since it is possible to check whether or not is normally detected, it is possible to prevent confirmation errors, confirmation omissions, and the like from occurring.

Note that if the simulation start operation unit is not operated after the power is turned on, the confirmation period that is being executed after the power is turned on is terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the power was turned on. I have to. In other words, if the simulation start operation unit is not operated after the power is turned on, the LEDs (the LEDs 15 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode will be displayed after a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the power was turned on. 17) is normally lit, and the confirmation period of whether contact with the steering wheel 195 is normally detected is terminated. In addition, as a predetermined period for ending the confirmation period that is executed after the power is turned on, it is confirmed whether the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode light up normally, and whether the handle 195 is turned on. A period of time is provided that is sufficient to confirm whether contact is successfully detected. In this way, if the simulated start operation unit is not operated after the power is turned on, the simulated rainbow effect will not start immediately after the confirmation period that is being executed after the power is turned on. is executed during the execution of the effect introduction period that starts when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses of the state in which the is not variably displayed. It is possible to check whether the performance can be executed normally.

Further, it may be possible to check whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected by contact with the handle 195 even after the simulated rainbow effect is started. Specifically, if the simulated start operation unit is not operated after power is turned on, the confirmation period that is being executed after power is turned on is canceled when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since power was turned on. After the end of the confirmation period, an extended confirmation period may be generated so that it can be confirmed whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected by contact with the handle 195 during the extended confirmation period. When an extended confirmation period is provided, there is a possibility that the conditions for executing the simulated rainbow effect are established within the extended confirmation period, and the extended confirmation period and the simulated rainbow effect are executed in parallel. In such a case, if there is contact with the handle 195 within the extension confirmation period, similarly to when the effect operation unit 301 is operated, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, The rainbow effect using the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) constituting the rainbow light emission mode is finished. However, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode may be switched from light emission in the rainbow light emission mode to non-light emission or to light emission in a single color.

The main purpose of ending the simulated rainbow effect by operating the effect operation unit 301 is to end the unnecessary simulated rainbow effect. The main purpose is not to end the required simulated rainbow effect, but to confirm whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. In addition, in order to clarify such a difference, when operating the effect operation unit 301 and when the handle 195 is touched, partly different processing is performed at a control point different from light emission (for example, sound control). It is preferable to keep For example, a unique effect end sound is output only when the simulated rainbow effect is terminated by operating the effect operating unit 301, so that the simulated rainbow effect is produced by operating the effect operating unit 301 and touching the handle 195. , the presence or absence of the performance end sound makes it possible for the operator to surely recognize whether or not the unnecessary simulated rainbow performance is over.

Further, in the above example, since a confirmation sound (sound different from the production end sound) is emitted when the handle 195 is touched, the confirmation sound is output when the handle 195 is touched during the extended confirmation period. Then, the difference between the effect end sound and the confirmation sound allows the operator to reliably recognize whether the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected or not. As the confirmation sound, a confirmation sound A when contacting the handle 195 during the extended confirmation period and a confirmation sound B when contacting the handle 195 within the confirmation period preceding the extension confirmation period are provided. In addition to checking whether the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected or not, the difference between the confirmation sounds A and B can be used to determine whether or not the confirmation is during the extended confirmation period. can make people recognize it.

Further, in this example, when the power is turned off in a state where the variable display of the symbols is being performed or a hold state in which the variable display of the symbols is not yet performed is stored, such information is stored. After the power is turned on, such information is restored and the variable display of the symbols is resumed. After the power is turned on, it is checked whether the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are lit normally, and whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. There is no confirmation period for As a result, when the power is turned off while the variable display of the patterns is being displayed or in the state where the variable display of the patterns is not yet performed and the hold is stored, the variable display of the patterns can be started as soon as possible after the power is turned on. It can be restarted and prevented from affecting the restart of the game.

In addition, in this example, a vibration sensor that detects the vibration applied to the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 detects the vibration, and by moving a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1, If the magnetic sensor 1050 for detecting the magnetism applied to the pachinko machine 1 detects the magnetism, there is a possibility that the vibration or the magnetism is causing fraudulent activity, and such an abnormality may occur. We are trying to inform the outside that it has occurred. After the power is turned on, there is a confirmation period for confirming whether or not the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are normally lit, and a confirmation period for confirming whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. , when an abnormality occurs due to detection of vibration or magnetism, such confirmation period is forcibly terminated. As a result, during the confirmation period whether or not the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are normally lit, and during the confirmation period whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, A hall manager or the like is performing confirmation work, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts due to vibration or magnetism during such confirmation work.

In addition, after the power is turned on, in order to confirm whether the front upper back decoration 3310 operates normally, the front upper back decoration 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position, and the effect display device 1600 is displayed. An initial operation is performed in which the back upper front decoration body 3310 appears on the front side. In such a case, after the front upper back decoration body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearing position, return control is performed to return the upper front decoration body 3310 from the appearing position to the initial position, and the front upper back decoration body 3310 returns to the initial position. If not, it is determined that an initial position error has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side. After the power is turned on, there is a period for confirming whether the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are lit normally, and for checking whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. Confirmation periods are provided, but if these confirmation periods were to be performed in parallel with the initial operation of the front upper back decoration 3310, attention would be focused on the initial operation of the front upper back decoration 3310, and confirmation would not be possible. There is a possibility that the confirmation in the period will be neglected. Therefore, for the initial operation of the back upper front decoration body 3310, it is confirmed whether the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are lit normally, and whether the contact with the handle 195 is normal. It is preferable to execute it after the confirmation period of whether or not it is detected. This allows the operator to reliably perform confirmation during the confirmation period and confirmation during the initial operation of the front upper back decoration 3310 .

(Regarding the independent rainbow decorative part for checking the rainbow light emission)
As described above, in the present embodiment, during the variable display of the symbols, in addition to executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning (luminescence effect lighting in the rainbow light emission mode) as the winning confirmation effect for confirming the win, It is possible to check the light emission in the rainbow light emission mode at a timing different from the rainbow effect of . Specifically, during the execution of the effect introduction period during which the symbols are displayed in a non-variable manner, as the simulated rainbow effect, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed in the same way as the rainbow effect at the time of winning. It is possible to check in halls, factories, etc. whether the lighting effect of lighting up can be performed normally. The effect introduction period is an effect that is started when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the variable display of symbols is finished, and the model introduction of the pachinko machine 1 is performed. In addition to etc., a simulated rainbow effect is to be executed. However, at the time of execution of the simulated rainbow effect, if the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode can be normally executed, although it is possible to grasp that it is time to execute the simulated rainbow effect, light emitting in the rainbow light emitting mode is performed. When the production was not executed normally, it was not possible to grasp whether or not the execution timing of the simulated rainbow production had come. Therefore, in this example, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used. In addition to executing a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode, a rainbow independent decoration part 1700 which can be attached separately from the plurality of members is provided, and the LED of the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 emits rainbow light. In order to notify that the simulated rainbow effect is being executed by executing the notification effect of lighting in the mode, and to check in the hall, factory, etc. whether the lighting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed. It is made clear that it is the timing of

FIG. 229 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the game board 5 is equipped with the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700 . The rainbow independent decoration part 1700 is provided so as to be attachable to the game board 5 from the front side. Specifically, in the lower right area of the game board 5 (game area 5a), a connection terminal for connecting the rainbow independent decoration section 1700 is exposed, and the rainbow independent decoration section 1700 is connected to the connection terminal. , the peripheral control board 1510 enables light emission control of the LEDs provided in the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700 .

In this example, the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 is attached to the game board 5 from the front side. The part 1700 can be easily attached and detached. Therefore, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the rainbow light emission mode is performed using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. However, in order to know the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effect, only when checking in the hall, factory, etc., whether the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed. A rainbow independent decorative portion 1700 may be attached to the game board 5 . In addition, even when the rainbow independent decorative portion 1700 is not attached to the game board 5 and is removed, the decorativeness of the front side of the game board 5 is maintained.

In addition, as will be described later, the independent rainbow decorative portion 1700 is provided with a substrate on which 21 LEDs in total, 3 LEDs in the vertical direction and 7 LEDs in the horizontal direction, are mounted. is provided with a transparent cover body (not shown) to mitigate direct viewing light from the LEDs. When the rainbow independent decorative portion 1700 is removed from the game board 5, it is possible to remove the board on which the LEDs are mounted, but only the cover body is removed without removing the board on which the LEDs are mounted. It also makes it possible. As a result, for example, when it is difficult to see the light emission of the LEDs in the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700, it is possible to easily grasp that the simulated rainbow effect is being executed by removing only the cover body.

Further, the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700 is provided in the game area 5a on the front side of the game board 5. As shown in FIG. Therefore, even when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4, the rainbow independent decorative portion 1700 can be easily visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the door window 101a. Further, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to emit rainbow light. A lighting effect is executed. Of these, the light emitting decorations on which the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 are provided are located behind the area where the game ball B flows down, whereas the rainbow The independent decorative portion 1700 is located on the front side of the area where the game ball B flows down. In other words, the light-emitting decoration provided with the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 allows the game ball B to flow down the front side, whereas the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 prevents the game ball B from flowing down the front side. is configured to As a result, when the LED of the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 is lit in the rainbow light emission mode, the user can easily grasp that the simulated rainbow effect is being executed without hindering the visibility due to the game ball B flowing down. can.

FIG. 230 is an explanatory diagram showing the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700. FIG. The independent rainbow decoration part 1700 has a substrate on which 21 LEDs in total, 3 LEDs in the vertical direction and 7 LEDs in the horizontal direction, are mounted. Then, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, a notification effect is executed in which the LED of the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700 is used to light up in the rainbow light emission mode. That is, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the rainbow light emission mode is performed using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. In synchronism with the execution of the light emitting effect of lighting up with , the LED of the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 is used to execute the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. Specifically, when it is time to execute the simulated rainbow effect, when the elapsed time from the start of the effect introduction period reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 are made to emit light in "red, purple, and blue", respectively. In other words, the three LEDs in the row A of the rainbow independent decorative portion 1700 are caused to emit light so that three predetermined colors appear at the same time.

Then, the LEDs of the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700 are changed in the order of row A→row B→row C→row D→row E→row F→row G every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). Three LEDs in a row are switched to light up. In addition, the three LEDs in row A of the rainbow independent decorative portion 1700 emit light in "red, purple, and blue," the three LEDs in row B emit light in "purple, blue, and green," and the LEDs in row C emit light. for the three LEDs in row E emit "blue, green, and orange"; for the three LEDs in row D, emit in "green, orange, and yellow"; and for the three LEDs in row E, " The three LEDs in row F emit in "yellow, white, red", and the three LEDs in row G emit in "white, red, purple". I am assuming. In this way, one of the three colors of the LEDs of the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700 is changed every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) so that the emitted colors appearing at the same time can be switched. By controlling, it is possible to make visually as if these LEDs cooperate to emit light in a rainbow light emission mode. Then, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, such regular switching of the emission colors (switching of the columns in which the three LEDs emit light) is repeated.

FIG. 231 is a timing chart showing an example of executing a simulated rainbow effect when the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700 is attached. In this example, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the rainbow effect is performed using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. In synchronism with the execution of the light emitting effect of lighting in the light emitting mode, the LED of the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700 is used to execute the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. In this way, the rainbow independent decoration section 1700 lights up in the rainbow light emission mode, just like the simulated rainbow effect (lighting effect in which the rainbow light emission mode is lit), so that it is possible to grasp that the simulated rainbow effect is being executed. This can be used as a guideline for determining whether it is time to check in a hall, factory, or the like whether or not the lighting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed. In addition, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, LED 10 of the door frame 3 If there is an abnormality in which the LED does not light up in part of 14), it becomes an incomplete mode in which part of the luminescent colors that make up the rainbow light emission mode is missing, and light is emitted in a mode in which the rainbow light emission mode does not hold. Therefore, it is difficult to know whether the simulated rainbow effect is being executed or not. I am trying to execute a notification effect that lights up with. As a result, during execution of the simulated rainbow effect, if there is an abnormality in which some of the LEDs that make up the rainbow light emission mode do not light up, a visual difference from the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700 will occur. Therefore, even though the simulated rainbow effect is being executed, it can be easily grasped that the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode cannot be normally executed.

Regarding the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700, not only the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effect during the execution of the effect introduction period during the non-variation display of the symbols, but also the execution timing of the rainbow effect at the time of winning during the variable display of the symbols. may be attached to the game board 5. In other words, the rainbow independent decorative portion 1700 may be attached to the game board 5 at all times. In such a case, when executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 In synchronism with the execution of the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the LED of the rainbow independent decoration part 1700, the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is performed. In this way, the rainbow independent decoration section 1700 lights up in the rainbow light emission mode, which is the same as the rainbow effect at the time of winning (lighting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode), so that it is possible to indicate that the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed. This can be grasped, and can be used as a guideline for execution of a win confirmation performance in which a win is confirmed. Also, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed, the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, door frame 3 If there is an abnormality in which some of the LEDs 10 to 14) do not light up, it will be an incomplete mode in which part of the luminescent colors that make up the rainbow light emission mode is missing, and the rainbow light emission mode will not be established. , it is difficult to know whether the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed. , a notification effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode is executed. As a result, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed, even if there is an abnormality in which some of the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode do not light up, the rainbow light emission mode in the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 is generated. By visually recognizing the light emission of , it is possible to grasp that the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking useful information.

As described above in detail, after confirming whether or not the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode can be normally executed during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the simulated rainbow effect can be operated by operating the effect operation unit 301. It is possible to end the production. As a result, at the time of manufacturing confirmation at the factory, the simulated rainbow effect is executed, and after confirming whether or not the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode can be normally executed, any event during the simulated rainbow effect is performed. By operating the effect operation unit 301 at the appropriate timing, the simulated rainbow effect can be terminated at any time, and unnecessary execution of the rainbow effect after the confirmation does not affect other manufacturing confirmations. can be prevented. Also, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame 3 In addition to ending the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the LEDs 10 to 14, the LED of the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700 is used to end the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. Specifically, the LED of the rainbow independent decorative portion 1700 is switched from emitting light in the rainbow light emitting mode to non-emitting light. In this way, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the LED of the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 is switched from light emission in the rainbow light emission mode to non-light emission, thereby completing the simulated rainbow effect. can be clearly communicated.

Regarding the rainbow independent decoration part 1700, even when it is not attached to the game board 5, it is not determined that an abnormality has occurred on the side of the peripheral control board 1510, and the rainbow effect at the time of winning and the simulated rainbow effect are performed. When executing, as usual, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in a rainbow light emission mode. It is designed to execute a light emission effect to be performed. As a result, only when it is confirmed in a hall, a factory, or the like, whether or not the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode can be normally executed, the rainbow independent decoration portion is displayed on the game board 5 in order to know the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effect. 1700 is worn, and the rainbow independent decorative portion 1700 can be removed during other periods. In addition, in the state where the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 is attached to the game board 5, a part of the LED of the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 does not light up. cannot be executed normally, it is not determined that an abnormality has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side. In other words, when executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning or the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame 3 A light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode using the LEDs 10 to 14 is executed, and it is possible to prevent the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning and the simulated rainbow effect from being affected. In addition, some of the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) that constitute the rainbow light emission mode are lit. Even if an abnormality occurs that does not occur, the peripheral control board 1510 side does not determine that an abnormality has occurred, and when the rainbow performance at the time of winning or the simulated rainbow performance is executed, light emission constituting the rainbow light emission mode. Light is emitted in an incomplete mode (a mode in which a rainbow light emission mode is not established) in which a part of the color is missing.

In addition, the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 enables lighting in the rainbow light emission mode as a single member without using a plurality of members, but the back upper front decoration body 3310 also does not use a plurality of members. In addition, as a single member, each of the seven numbered indicators can be used to light up in a rainbow luminescence mode. However, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the front upper back decoration 3310 is maintained at the initial position without moving from the initial position to the appearance position. Each of the display bodies is used so as not to light up in the rainbow emission mode. Therefore, although it is possible to light up the back upper front decoration body 3310 in the rainbow light emission mode, it is not possible to grasp that the simulated rainbow effect is being executed, and the light emission effect is lit in the rainbow light emission mode. It is not possible to use it as a guideline for checking whether it can be executed normally in the hall or at the factory. In addition, since the back top front decoration 3310 is attached to the back side of the game board 5 , when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 , the back top front decoration is attached to the game board 5 . 3310 cannot be detached. In other words, the back upper front decoration 3310 cannot be easily attached and detached from the front side of the game board 5 like the rainbow independent decoration part 1700, and the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode can be normally performed. It is difficult to attach the back upper front decoration 3310 to the game board 5 only when checking whether it is in a hall or a factory. In addition, when the back upper front decoration 3310 is removed from the game board 5, the decorativeness of the front side of the game board 5 is not maintained. As such, it is not suitable as a member for checking the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effect.

As described above, the rainbow single decoration portion 1700 includes a substrate on which 21 LEDs are mounted. Specifically, a top-view type LED is mounted on the front surface of the substrate of the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700 (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player). The top-view type LED can irradiate light toward the front (toward the player) of the independent rainbow decoration section 1700 . For this reason, when executing the simulated rainbow effect, when executing the notification effect in which the LEDs of the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700 are lit in the rainbow light emission mode, each of the luminescent colors forming the rainbow light emission mode should be visually recognized brightly. can be done.

Also, as the substrate of the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700, a white substrate is used in which at least the front surface (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player) is painted white. When a white substrate is used as the substrate on which LEDs are mounted on the front surface, light is reflected with a higher reflectance than when a substrate other than the white substrate (for example, a black substrate or a green substrate) is used. is possible. For this reason, when executing the simulated rainbow effect, when executing the notification effect in which the LEDs of the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700 are lit in the rainbow light emission mode, each of the luminescent colors forming the rainbow light emission mode should be visually recognized brightly. can be done.

In addition, on the front surface of the substrate of the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700 (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player), around each of the mounted LEDs, the same color as the luminescent color constituting the rainbow luminous mode is provided. A coating film made of solder resist is formed. In other words, the 21 LEDs mounted on the front surface of the substrate of the independent rainbow decorative portion 1700 are luminescent colors of red, purple, blue, green, orange, and yellow that constitute the rainbow luminescent mode. , white, etc., and the same color as that of the LED is used for the coating film made of the solder resist. Specifically, a coating film made of a "red" solder resist is formed around the LED emitting "red" light among the emission colors constituting the rainbow emission mode, and the LED emitting "purple" light is formed. A coating film made of a “purple” solder resist is formed around the LED that emits “blue” light, and a coating film made of a “blue” solder resist is formed around the “green” LED. A coating film made of "green" solder resist is formed around the LED that emits light in , and a coating film made of "orange" solder resist is formed around the LED that emits light in "orange". A coating film made of a “yellow” solder resist is formed around the LED that emits “yellow” light, and a “white” solder resist is formed around the LED that emits “white” light. A coating film is formed. Here, when the same color as the luminescent color constituting the rainbow luminous mode is used as the coating film made of the solder resist, the reflectance is higher than when the luminescent color different from the luminescent color constituting the rainbow luminous mode is used. , it is possible to reflect the emission colors that make up the rainbow emission mode. Therefore, when executing the simulated rainbow effect, when executing the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the LEDs of the rainbow independent decoration part 1700, each of the luminescent colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode is clearly visible. be able to.

As for the coating film made of the solder resist described above, a white solder resist is used as a base, and a solder resist having the same color as the emission color constituting the rainbow light emission mode is added. When a white solder resist is used as the coating film made of solder resist, it is possible to reflect light with a higher reflectance than when a non-white solder resist is used. For this reason, when executing the simulated rainbow effect, when executing the notification effect in which the LEDs of the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700 are lit in the rainbow light emission mode, each of the luminescent colors forming the rainbow light emission mode should be visually recognized brightly. can be done. In addition, as the coating film made of solder resist, the higher the ratio of the base white solder resist, the higher the reflectance of light can be reflected. It is preferable to increase the ratio of the white solder resist as a base rather than the solder resist of the same color as the emission color constituting the rainbow light emission mode.

In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning or the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame 3 When executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the LEDs 10 to 14 of the above, each LED has the light emitting colors that make up the rainbow light emitting mode, "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → White", but like the LEDs of the rainbow independent decoration part 1700, each LED has the emission colors "red, purple, blue, green, orange It may be made to emit light in either color, yellow, or white. In other words, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are not full-color LEDs, but rainbow single LEDs. A monochromatic LED may be used as in the decoration part 1700 . Then, like the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700, for example, three predetermined colors appear at the same time, and the three colors are regularly switched to realize a rainbow light emission mode. In such a case, as the substrate of the LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode, a white substrate having at least the front surface (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player) painted in white, like the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700, is used. used. In addition, on the front surface of the substrate of the LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player), around each of the mounted LEDs, like the rainbow independent decorative portion 1700, rainbow light emission A coating film made of a solder resist having the same color as the emission color constituting the embodiment is formed. As for the coating film made of the solder resist, a white solder resist is used as a base, and a solder resist having the same color as the emission color forming the rainbow light emission mode is added. As a result, when executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning or the simulated rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 10 of the door frame 3 14 can be used to produce the same effect as the rainbow independent decoration section 1700 when executing the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. In addition, on the front surface of the substrate of the LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player), around each of the mounted LEDs, the same color as the light emitting color that constitutes the rainbow light emission mode is provided. Due to the formation of a coating film made of colored solder resist, if the color of the light emitted from the LED does not match the color of the solder resist, it can be understood that the LED is not mounted in the correct position. can.

In the above description, as the substrate of the LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode, a white substrate is used in which at least the front surface (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player) is painted white. As the substrate of the LED not involved, a substrate coated with a color (for example, black or green) different from the luminescent color constituting the rainbow emission mode is used. As a result, the LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode can reflect light with high reflectance, while the LEDs not involved in the rainbow light emission mode can reflect light with high reflectance. Since it becomes difficult, a difference occurs in the visibility of the light, and when the rainbow performance at the time of winning or the simulated rainbow performance is executed, the luminous colors constituting the rainbow luminescence mode can be visually recognized so as to stand out.

In addition, regarding the rainbow independent decoration part 1700, an LED is mounted on the front surface of the substrate (the surface part facing the front side facing the player), and the direct light from the LED is configured so that the player can visually recognize it. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a light guide section may be provided to guide the light from the LED so that the player can visually recognize the indirect light from the light guide section. Such another example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 232 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a rainbow independent decoration portion 1700. FIG. The independent rainbow decoration part 1700 of another example is provided with a board on which seven LEDs are mounted side by side, and the board is provided in a direction perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 5 . The seven LEDs mounted on the front surface of the substrate of the independent rainbow decorative portion 1700 of another example have the luminescent colors of red, purple, blue, green, and orange that constitute the rainbow luminescent mode. It is designed to emit light in either color, yellow, or white. In such a case, for example, by causing three predetermined colors to appear at the same time and switching the three colors regularly, a rainbow light emission mode can be realized. In addition, a light guide portion is provided so as to be close to the seven LEDs, and by irradiating the LED light from the side of the light guide portion, the light guide portion can be caused to emit light in the color emitted by the LED. . The front side of the board on which the seven LEDs are mounted (the front side facing the player) is covered with a cover so that the player does not see the direct light from the LEDs. In this way, by providing a light guide section for guiding light from the LEDs and configuring the player to visually recognize the indirect light from the light guide section, the direct-view light of the LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode can be obtained. However, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the eyes become a burden when visually recognizing.

In addition, the separate rainbow decoration part 1700 can be easily detached from the game board 5, but it is also possible to remove only the light guide part without removing the board on which the LED is mounted. making it possible. Here, when only the light guide portion is removed, the light from the LED is no longer guided by the light guide portion, and the light emission (light emission color) of the LED cannot be recognized. For this reason, only during the confirmation period in which it is confirmed in halls, factories, etc., whether or not the luminescence effect of lighting in the rainbow luminescence mode can be normally executed, the light guide part is attached in order to know the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effect. During other periods, the light guide section can be removed for use. In addition, even if the light guide portion is removed, the decorativeness of the front side of the game board 5 can be maintained. It is preferable to remove only the light guide portion without removing the entire decoration portion 1700 .

[Restrictions on rainbow emission when an error is detected]
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute at least the rainbow effect at the time of winning (the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode) during the variable display of the pattern, but the rainbow effect at the time of winning may not be appropriate due to some trouble or abnormality. If it is not executed, there is a risk that it will become a factor in lowering the interest in the game. Therefore, in this example, if some kind of trouble or abnormality occurs, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit 300 are activated during execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning. LEDs 8 to 9 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to limit the execution of the light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode.

In this example, it is sufficient that at least the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning is possible during the variable display of the symbols. As described above, during the variable display of the symbols, the rainbow effect is executed, and during the variable display of the symbols, the effect of suggesting the setting value 6 as the suggestion effect A is executed, and during the non-variable display of the symbols It may be possible to execute a simulated rainbow effect. Such a rainbow effect is the same in that a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode is executed. That is, when the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LED 10 of the door frame 3 are linked to the display of the effect display device 1600. 14 is used to perform a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode. Specifically, in the case of execution of the rainbow effect, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), the game board 5 LEDs 1 and 2 are "red", LEDs 3 and 4 of the game board 5 are "purple", LEDs 5 and 6 of the door frame top unit 450 are "blue", LED 7 of the door frame top unit 450 and LED 8 of the door frame 3 are "blue". LED 9 of the door frame 3 and LED 10 of the door frame 3 are "orange", LEDs 11-12 of the door frame 3 are "yellow", and LEDs 13-14 of the door frame 3 are "white". ing. That is, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are caused to emit light of different colors for each two groups. .

Then, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are changed every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). , the LED emitting in "red" is "purple", the LED emitting in "purple" is in "blue", the LED emitting in "blue" is in "green", and the LED emitting in "green" The LED is "orange", the LED emitting "orange" is "yellow", the LED emitting "yellow" is "white", the LED emitting "white" is "red", change to In this way, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are set for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). each time, the luminescent color of the LEDs in each of the two groups is changed in a predetermined order of "red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white→red" until timing t10 is reached. (For example, 10 seconds), such regular changes are repeated.

In this way, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 each emit light in a short unit light emission time. By controlling the sequential switching of a plurality of luminescent colors, it becomes possible to visually recognize that these LEDs are cooperating to emit light in a rainbow luminescence mode, resulting in an impactful luminescence. can perform the performance. In addition, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled by interlocking the LEDs 1 to 14. 14 are caused to emit light in a plurality of colors so that each two groups emit light in different colors, and furthermore, by switching the light emission colors in a short time, a light emission performance with more impact than usual can be executed.

In this example, as light emission in the rainbow light emission mode, seven colors are emitted at the same time using a plurality of LEDs, and the respective light emission colors are regularly switched. , it is not necessary to use seven colors, and it is sufficient that three or more predetermined colors appear at the same time.

Further, during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow mode effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. In such a rainbow effect image, the display colors displayed in each of the plurality of display areas are changed to "red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white" every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). → Red" is changed in a predetermined order, and such regular changes are repeated until timing t10 is reached (for example, 5 seconds). It should be noted that the target for displaying the effect image in the rainbow mode may be an effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, for example, a background image, or may be a target image in one of the display areas of the effect display device 1600. Effect images displayed on the screen, for example, effect images of characters, items, and the like, may be targeted.

(When an abnormality is detected in the back upper front decoration (movable body))
As described above in detail, the front upper back effect unit 3300 attached to the game board 5 includes a front upper back decoration body 3310 which is long in the left-right direction in a front view, and a front upper back decoration body 3310 provided behind the front upper back decoration body 3310. A back top front decoration board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a back top front lifting unit (not shown) that lifts and lowers the back top front decoration body 3310. When a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, the back top front decoration body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position so that the back top front decoration body 3310 can appear on the front side of the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加In addition, after the back upper front decoration body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position and used for the production, when a predetermined production end condition is established, the return control for returning from the appearance position to the initial position is performed. ing. In such return control, it is detected using a detection sensor whether or not the front upper back decoration 3310 has returned to the initial position. , it is determined that an initial position error has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side. Then, when it is determined that an initial position error has occurred with respect to the front upper back decoration body 3310, even if a predetermined rendering condition is satisfied after that, the front upper back decoration body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position. It restricts the movement control for moving to. Further, when it is determined that an initial position error has occurred with respect to the front upper back decoration 3310, return control for returning the front upper back decoration 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position is performed multiple times. Then, when the back upper front decoration body 3310 returns to the initial position, the judgment that the initial position error has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side is canceled.

In the above, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied during the variable display of the pattern or during the non-variable display, the front upper back decoration body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position, and the upper front decoration body 3310 is moved to the front side of the effect display device 1600. Although the front decoration 3310 is made possible to appear, in addition to this, for example, when the power is turned on, in order to confirm whether the back top front decoration 3310 operates normally, the back top front decoration 3310 By moving the decoration 3310 from the initial position to the appearance position, the back upper front decoration 3310 can appear on the front side of the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加Even in such a case, after the front upper back decoration body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearing position, return control is performed to return the upper front decoration body 3310 from the appearing position to the initial position. has not returned to the initial position, it is determined that an initial position error has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side.

FIG. 233 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a rainbow effect is executed when an initial position error of the back upper front decoration body 3310 occurs. In this example, when the rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame are interlocked with the display of the effect display device 1600. 3 LEDs 10 to 14 are used to perform a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode, but separately from this, when the rainbow effect is performed, seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decoration body 3310 are used. A light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode is executed. Here, the back upper front decoration body 3310 is provided so that seven sumo rankings such as "yokozuna", "ozeki", and "sekiwake" are arranged from the left. Each of the seven numbers can be decorated independently with LEDs. Then, when the rainbow effect is executed, the seven numbered display bodies are lit in a rainbow luminous mode in which the luminous colors are different from each other. In such a rainbow luminous display, the luminous colors emitted in each of the seven numbers are changed in a predetermined order of "red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white→red". Such regular changes are repeated until timing t10 is reached (for example, 5 seconds).

Then, when an initial position error has not occurred with respect to the back upper front decoration 3310, when the rainbow effect is executed, the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decoration 3310 are used in the rainbow light emission mode. In contrast to executing the light emitting effect of lighting, if an initial position error occurs with respect to the back upper front decoration 3310, seven rankings in the back upper front decoration 3310 are performed during the execution of the rainbow effect. The seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decoration body 3310 are turned off without executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the display bodies. In other words, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the back upper front decoration 3310, when the rainbow effect is executed, the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decoration 3310 are used to emit rainbow light. Execution of lighting effect is restricted. For example, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the front upper back decoration 3310, when the seven numbered display bodies in the front upper back decoration 3310 are used to perform lighting in a rainbow light emission mode, The conspicuous light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode makes it easy to notice that an initial position error has occurred with respect to the back upper front decoration body 3310 . However, in this example, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the back upper front decoration 3310, the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decoration 3310 are used to light up in a rainbow light emission mode. is not executed, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which it is easy to notice that an initial position error has occurred with respect to the back upper front decoration body 3310 .

Further, when an initial position error has not occurred for the back upper front decoration 3310, when the rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, effect operation When an initial position error occurs with respect to the back upper front decoration body 3310, while the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed using the LEDs 8 to 9 of the unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 , when the rainbow effect is executed, the rainbow light emission mode is performed using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are turned off and In other words, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the back upper front decoration 3310, when the rainbow effect is executed, the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decoration 3310 are used to emit rainbow light. In addition to restricting the execution of the light emitting effect that lights up, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 Execution of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is restricted. For example, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the back upper front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, the door If only the LEDs 10 to 14 of the frame 3 are used to perform the lighting effect in the rainbow light emitting mode, the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decoration body 3310 are used to perform the lighting effect in the rainbow light emitting mode. A sense of incongruity arises, and it becomes easy to notice that an initial position error has occurred with respect to the back upper front decoration body 3310 . However, in this example, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LED 8 of the effect operation unit 300 9. A situation in which it is easy to notice that an initial position error has occurred with respect to the back upper front decoration body 3310 by not executing the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. can be prevented from occurring.

In the above description, if an initial position error has occurred with respect to the back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 are displayed during execution of the rainbow effect. , LEDs 8-9 of the production operation unit 300 and LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3 are turned off, but as another example, LEDs 1-4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 of the door frame top unit 450, production operation unit LEDs 8 to 9 of 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved and instead of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved and lit in a single color (for example, red or blue). You may make it perform the light emission production|presentation which carries out. As a result, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the back upper front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 10 to 10 of the door frame 3 do not execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode during the execution of the rainbow effect. As for 14, by executing a light emitting effect of lighting in a single color (for example, red or blue), it is possible to maintain a state in which expectations are given to the light emitting effect.

Further, in the above, when the rainbow effect is executed, the rainbow effect is performed using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. In addition to the light emitting effect of lighting in the light emitting mode, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is performed using the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decorative body 3310. Lighting in such a rainbow light emitting mode is performed. The light emission effect to be performed may not be performed separately, but may be performed integrally. That is, when the rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, back upper front decoration 3310 may be integrated to emit light in such a manner that a rainbow light emission mode is established. In such a configuration, for example, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit If only LEDs 8 to 9 of 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to light up in the rainbow light emission mode, part of the light emission colors that make up the rainbow light emission mode is missing, resulting in an incomplete state of rainbow light emission. Light is emitted in a manner in which the manner does not hold. Therefore, in this example, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the back upper front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit 300 By not executing the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the LEDs 8 to 9 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, it is possible to prevent light emission in a state in which the rainbow light emission mode is not realized, and whether the rainbow effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which it is not possible to determine what is going on.

In this example, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the back upper front decoration 3310, rainbow light emission is performed using the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decoration 3310 during the execution of the rainbow effect. However, if an initial position error occurs with respect to the back upper front decorative body 3310 after a predetermined time such as several hours has passed since the power was turned on, then At the time of execution of the rainbow effect, the luminous effect of lighting in the rainbow luminous mode using the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decoration body 3310 is executed. In such a case, when the rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used. In addition, a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode is also executed. For example, until a predetermined period of time, such as several hours, has elapsed since the power was turned on, the predetermined period of time has elapsed despite the execution of the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode, while the game continues. If the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is suddenly prohibited after the light emission mode is set, a sense of incongruity arises when the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed. However, in this example, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the back top front decoration body 3310 after a predetermined time such as several hours has passed since the power was turned on, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent such discomfort from occurring.

In addition, in this example, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the back upper front decoration 3310, seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decoration 3310 are used during the execution of the rainbow effect. Although the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed, after a predetermined time such as several hours has passed since such an initial position error occurred, when the rainbow effect is subsequently executed, Using the seven numbered display bodies in the upper front decorative body 3310, a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode is executed. In such a case, when the rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used. In addition, a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode is also executed. In such a case, the work to eliminate the initial position error should not be performed until a predetermined time such as several hours has passed since the initial position error occurred with respect to the back upper front decoration body 3310 . become. In this regard, in this example, after a predetermined time such as several hours has passed since the initial position error occurred with respect to the back upper front decoration body 3310, light is emitted in a rainbow light emission mode during execution of the rainbow effect. By executing the presentation, the back upper front decoration body 3310 is conspicuous, so that it becomes easy to notice that an initial position error has occurred with respect to the back upper front decoration body 3310, and work to eliminate the initial position error. It is possible to prevent the continuation of the situation in which the

In addition, in this example, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the back upper front decoration 3310, seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decoration 3310 are used during the execution of the rainbow effect. In addition to the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode, the rainbow using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 Although the light emitting effect of lighting in the light emitting mode is not executed, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (back upper front decoration body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, effect The LEDs 8 to 9 of the operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are also used for effects other than the rainbow effect. Then, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the back upper front decorative body 3310, a variation pattern for executing a rainbow effect (a rainbow effect at the time of winning or a rainbow effect at the time of losing) is determined and the rainbow effect is performed. During the variable display of the symbols to be executed, when performing effects other than the rainbow effect, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode are not lit. On the other hand, during the variable display of the symbols that do not execute the rainbow effect by determining the variation pattern that does not execute the rainbow effect, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are lit up when executing the effect other than the rainbow effect. I have to. In such a configuration, during the period from the start of the pattern variation to the execution of the rainbow effect, for example, as a notice effect that anticipates the rainbow effect, the back upper front decoration body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the door Even when the LEDs 5 to 7 of the frame top unit 450 and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light, such advance notice performance is not executed, and the player has expectations for the rainbow performance. can be deterred.

In addition, in this example, when executing the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of winning or rainbow effect at the time of loss), the back upper front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 , LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in performing a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode, whereas LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 emit rainbow light. Regardless of the luminous color that constitutes the mode, the luminous effect is continued according to the variation pattern. On the other hand, if an initial position error has occurred with respect to the back top front decoration 3310, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are set to the back top front decoration 3310 and the game LEDs 1 to 4 of the board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are not turned off, The lighting performance is continued. As a result, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the back upper front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 15 to 15 of the game board 5 do not execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode during the execution of the rainbow effect. As for 17, by continuing the light emission effect according to the variation pattern, it is possible to maintain a situation where the light emission effect according to the variation pattern is expected.

Further, in this example, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the back upper front decoration body 3310, the effect display device is displayed during execution of the rainbow effect, as in the case where the initial position error does not occur. The display area 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. In other words, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the back top front decoration 3310, the back top front decoration 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and the door frame top unit 450 are displayed when the rainbow effect is executed. LEDs 5 to 7, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved and do not execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. A performance image is displayed. As a result, as long as attention is focused on the light-emitting area around the display area of the effect display device 1600 (back upper front decoration body 3310, light emission by LEDs 1 to 14), it is not possible to determine whether the rainbow effect is being executed. By paying attention to the display area of the display device 1600, it can be understood that the rainbow effect is being executed by the effect image in the rainbow mode.

(When a situation occurs in which the rainbow mode effect image cannot be visually recognized)
As described above, when the rainbow effect is executed, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. As for the effect image in the rainbow mode, if another image is displayed on the front side of the effect image, the player cannot see it. In this way, when there is a situation in which the rainbow mode effect image on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the back upper front decoration body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and the door frame top unit 450 LEDs 5 to 7, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to limit the execution of the light emitting effect lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode.

Specifically, when a situation occurs in which the rainbow-mode effect image on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, a light amount adjustment operation using the light amount adjustment button 228 or a volume adjustment operation using the volume adjustment button 227 is performed. time. The plate unit 200 of this example is provided with a light amount adjustment button 228 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the effect operation section 301 in the effect operation unit 300 . As the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs of the door frame 3 As for the LEDs 10 to 14, the light amount adjustment operation is performed using the light amount adjustment button 228, thereby making it possible to adjust the light amount in stages. For example, it is possible to adjust the level of the light intensity of the LED from 1 (minimum light intensity) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum light intensity). , the light amount of the LED increases, and the light amount of the LED decreases as the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated downward to decrease the step. The plate unit 200 is provided with a volume control button 227 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the effect operation section 301 in the effect operation unit 300 . The sound output from various speakers (main body frame speaker 622, etc.) can be adjusted step by step by performing a volume adjustment operation using the volume adjustment button 227. FIG. For example, the level of volume output from various speakers can be adjusted from 1 (minimum volume) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum volume). As the level increases, the volume output from the various speakers increases, and as the level is decreased by operating the volume control button 227 downward, the volume output from the various speakers decreases. It should be noted that the amount of light and sound volume can be adjusted both while the pattern is changing and when it is not changing.

When the light amount adjustment operation is performed using the light amount adjustment button 228, a light amount adjustment image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to indicate the level of the light amount of the LED, and the volume adjustment button 227 is used to adjust the volume. At the time of operation, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a volume adjustment image is displayed for informing the stages of the volume output from the various speakers. These light amount adjustment image and sound volume adjustment image are displayed on the front side of the rainbow mode effect image on the effect display device 1600 . Therefore, at least part of the rainbow effect image can be visually recognized by the light amount adjustment image and the volume adjustment image when the light amount adjustment operation is performed using the light amount adjustment button 228 and the volume adjustment operation is performed using the volume adjustment button 227. Therefore, it is determined that the peripheral control board 1510 side is in a situation where the rainbow effect image cannot be visually recognized. In addition, after a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds) elapses with the end of the light amount adjustment operation using the light amount adjustment button 228 and the volume adjustment operation using the volume adjustment button 227, the light amount adjustment image and the volume Since the adjustment image is erased and the situation returns to the state where the rainbow mode effect image can be visually recognized, the judgment that the rainbow mode effect image cannot be visually recognized on the side of the peripheral control board 1510 is eliminated. I am trying to

In addition, as a situation where the rainbow mode effect image in the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the front side of the effect display device 1600 is abnormally stopped while the back upper front decoration body 3310 is moved to the appearance position. There are cases where The back top front decoration body 3310 of this example moves from the initial position to the appearance position when a predetermined rendering condition is established, and the back top front decoration body 3310 can appear on the front side of the rendering display device 1600. ing. In addition, after the back upper front decoration body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position and used for the production, when a predetermined production end condition is established, the return control for returning from the appearance position to the initial position is performed. However, in such return control, the front upper back decoration 3310 may stop abnormally while being moved to the appearance position, and the front upper back decoration 3310 may not return to the initial position. In such a case, due to the abnormal stoppage of the back upper front decoration body 3310, at least a part of the rainbow effect image cannot be visually recognized. It is determined that an invisible situation has occurred. Further, when it is determined that the front upper back decoration 3310 is abnormally stopped at the appearance position, the return control for returning the front upper back decoration 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position is performed a plurality of times, When the back upper front decoration body 3310 returns to the initial position, the situation returns to a state in which the rainbow mode effect image can be visually recognized, so a situation occurs in which the rainbow mode effect image cannot be visually recognized on the peripheral control board 1510 side. I'm trying to get rid of the judgment that I'm doing it.

FIG. 234 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the rainbow effect is executed when the rainbow mode effect image in the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized. In this example, when there is no situation in which the rainbow-mode effect image on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, when the rainbow effect is executed, the back upper front decorative body 3310 and the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 are displayed. , the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode, whereas the effect display device 1600 In the event that the rainbow effect image cannot be visually recognized, the back upper front decoration 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and the LED 5 of the door frame top unit 450 are displayed when the rainbow effect is executed. 7, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 do not execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode, and are in a state of being extinguished. In other words, when a situation occurs in which the rainbow-mode effect image on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, when the rainbow effect is executed, the light-emitting area around the display area of the effect display device 1600 decoration 3310, light emission by LEDs 1 to 14), the execution of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is restricted. For example, when there is a situation in which the rainbow mode effect image on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, only the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode in the light emitting area around the display area of the effect display device 1600 is executed. , a sense of incongruity arises when the effect image in the rainbow mode cannot be visually recognized. However, in this example, when a situation occurs in which the rainbow-mode effect image on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the light-emitting area around the display area of the effect display apparatus 1600 emits light in the rainbow-light-emission mode. By not executing the effect, it is possible to prevent such discomfort from occurring.

Further, in this example, when a situation occurs in which the rainbow mode effect image on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, when the rainbow effect is executed, the back upper front decorative body 3310 and the LED 1 of the game board 5 are displayed. 4, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved so as not to execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode, In the execution period of the rainbow performance, even if the situation where the performance image of the rainbow mode can be visually recognized is restored, the situation in which the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed is continued for the remaining time. For example, in the execution period of the rainbow effect, if the remaining time after returning to the state where the rainbow mode effect image can be visually recognized is too short, the back upper front decoration body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, Even if the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode, the rainbow effect is not executed. It may not be possible to determine whether For this reason, in this example, even if the situation is restored in which the effect image in the rainbow mode can be visually recognized during the execution period of the rainbow effect, in the remaining time, the lighting effect in which the rainbow light emission mode is lit is not executed. By continuing, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which it is not possible to determine whether or not the rainbow effect is being executed.

In the above description, if there is a situation in which the rainbow mode effect image on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the door frame top unit 450 are displayed when the rainbow effect is executed. , LEDs 8-9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3 are turned off. , LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved, instead of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in a single color (for example, red or You may make it perform the light emission production|presentation which lights in blue). As a result, when a situation occurs in which the rainbow-mode effect image on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the light-emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow-light-emitting mode is not executed during the execution of the rainbow effect, but the door frame is displayed. 3, the LEDs 10 to 14 are illuminated in a single color (for example, red or blue), thereby maintaining a state in which expectations for the light emission effect can be expected.

In addition, in this example, when executing the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of winning or rainbow effect at the time of loss), the back upper front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 , LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in performing a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode, whereas LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 emit rainbow light. Regardless of the luminous color that constitutes the mode, the luminous effect is continued according to the variation pattern. On the other hand, if there is a situation in which the rainbow mode effect image on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are displayed with the back top front decoration when the rainbow effect is executed. Body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 LEDs do not turn off and fluctuate The light emitting effect corresponding to the pattern is continued. As a result, when there is a situation in which the rainbow-mode effect image on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the game board does not execute the light-emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow-light-emitting mode during the execution of the rainbow effect. As for the LEDs 15 to 17 of No. 5, by continuing the light emission effect according to the variation pattern, it is possible to maintain a state in which the light emission effect according to the variation pattern can be expected.

Further, in this example, in a situation where the rainbow mode effect image on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized, a ball jam (for example, many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the upper tray 201 is filled with game balls B) Even if an abnormality such as a full state) occurs, when the rainbow effect is executed, the back upper front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit LEDs 8 to 9 of 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to execute a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode. For example, in a situation where a rainbow-mode effect image on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized, if the light-emitting area around the display area of the effect display device 1600 is not lit in the rainbow-light-emission mode, the rainbow-light-emission mode is not executed. A sense of incongruity arises when the lighting effect of lighting up is not executed. However, in this example, it is possible to prevent such a sense of incongruity from occurring by executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode in a situation where the effect image in the rainbow mode can be visually recognized on the effect display device 1600. .

(When an abnormality is detected in a pachinko machine)
As described above, when the rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame are interlocked with the display of the effect display device 1600. 3 LEDs 10 to 14 are used to light up in a rainbow light emission mode, but if some abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the display of the effect display device 1600 is interlocked. LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to limit the execution of the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. ing. In addition, depending on the type of abnormality in the pachinko machine 1, the LEDs (back upper front decoration 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit 300 that constitutes the rainbow light emission mode) Execution of light emission other than the LEDs 8 to 9 and the LEDs 10 to 14) of the door frame 3 is also restricted.

Specifically, the abnormalities in the pachinko machine 1 are a first abnormality that has a low possibility of fraud, a second abnormality that has a medium possibility of fraud, and a fraudulent activity. There is a third anomaly in which the action is likely to occur. As the first abnormality, many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580, the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with the game balls B, and the game balls B are delivered to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202. There is a state where it becomes impossible to release. In such a state, many game balls B are simply paid out from the payout device 580, and it is determined that the first abnormality has occurred on the main control board 1310 side. Also, when the ball is removed from the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 and the game ball B is returned to the state where it can be released to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202, the main control board 1310 side performs the first It is designed to eliminate the judgment that an abnormality has occurred.

Moreover, as a second abnormality, there is a state in which the body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 . In such a state, there is a possibility that the hall clerk simply opened the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and it is determined that the second abnormality has occurred on the main control board 1310 side. Further, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the determination that the second abnormality has occurred on the main control board 1310 side is cancelled.

Further, as a third abnormality, a state in which vibration is detected by a vibration sensor that detects vibration applied to the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, or a state in which a magnet is attached to the pachinko machine 1 There is a state in which magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor 1050 that detects the magnetism applied to the pachinko machine 1 by bringing it closer. In such a state, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is being carried out due to vibration or magnetism, and a third abnormality occurs on the main control board 1310 side while the detection signal from the vibration sensor or magnetic sensor is being input. I believe it is happening. In addition, even if the state is returned to a state in which no vibration or magnetism is detected, the main control board 1310 side does not cancel the determination that the third abnormality has occurred, and the power is turned on again. By doing so, the determination that the third abnormality has occurred on the main control board 1310 side is eliminated.

FIG. 235 is a timing chart showing an example of the case where the rainbow effect is executed when the first to third abnormalities occur. In this example, when the first to third abnormalities have not occurred, the upper front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and the LEDs 5 to 4 of the door frame top unit 450 are displayed during execution of the rainbow effect. 7. The LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to perform the lighting production in a rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, when the first abnormality occurs, an error notification effect is executed in which only the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in a single color (for example, red or blue) during execution of the rainbow effect. As for the remaining back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, the light emission effect is lit in the rainbow light emission mode. Running. As a result, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 aware that some kind of abnormality has occurred while maintaining a state in which expectations are given to the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode.

In addition, when the second abnormality or the third abnormality occurs, when the rainbow effect is executed, the back upper front decoration body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and the LEDs 5 to 4 of the door frame top unit 450 7. The LEDs (back top front decoration body 3310, LEDs 1 to 14), an error notification effect is executed in which they are illuminated in a single color (eg, red or blue). In other words, if the second abnormality or the third abnormality occurs before the execution of the rainbow effect, the light emitting area around the display area of the effect display device 1600 (back upper front decoration 3310, LED 1 14) restricts the execution of the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. As a result, a situation occurs in which it is not possible to grasp that the rainbow performance is being executed, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 aware that some kind of abnormality has occurred.

In this example, when the first to third abnormalities do not occur, the back upper front decorative body 3310 and the game board 5 are executed when the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of winning or rainbow effect at the time of losing) is executed. LEDs 1-4, LEDs 5-7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3 participate in the rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 continue to emit light in accordance with the variation pattern regardless of the colors of light that constitute the rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, when the first abnormality occurs, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5, like the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, indicate an error during the execution of the rainbow effect. Instead, the light emission effect corresponding to the variation pattern is continued. In this way, when the first abnormality occurs, the light emission effect corresponding to the variation pattern is continued during execution of the rainbow effect, so that the light emission effect corresponding to the variation pattern is expected. Able to maintain favorable conditions.

Similarly, when the second abnormality occurs, when the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (upper back front decoration 3310, LED 1 to As in 14), the LED does not give an error notification, and the light emitting effect corresponding to the variation pattern is continued. As a result, when the second abnormality occurs, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed during the execution of the rainbow effect, but the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are illuminated according to the variation pattern. By continuing the luminous performance, it is possible to maintain a state in which expectations for the luminous performance corresponding to the variation pattern can be expected while notifying the Pachinko machine 1 that some abnormality has occurred. .

On the other hand, when the third abnormality occurs, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 (rear upper front decorations 3310, LEDs 1 to 14 ), the LED is turned on in a single color (for example, red or blue) to notify an error, and the light emitting effect corresponding to the variation pattern is stopped. As a result, when the third abnormality occurs, not only does the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode not be performed during the execution of the rainbow effect, but also the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are changed to a variation pattern. By not executing the light emission performance corresponding to the change pattern, the situation in which the light emission performance corresponding to the variation pattern is expected is eliminated, and the pachinko machine 1 is made aware that some fraudulent act is being performed. can be done.

Further, in this example, when the rainbow effect is executed, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow mode effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. However, when one of the first to third abnormalities has occurred, the effect display device 1600 displays an image notifying the type of the abnormality. However, when the first abnormality has occurred, even if the image for notifying the type of abnormality is displayed, the rainbow-mode effect image can be visually recognized. or a third abnormality occurs, when the image that notifies the type of abnormality is displayed, the rainbow mode effect image is made invisible, and depending on the rainbow mode effect image, the rainbow mode effect image is displayed. It is made so that it cannot be grasped that the performance is being executed.

FIG. 236 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the first to third abnormalities occur during execution of the rainbow effect. In this example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the back upper front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LED 10 of the door frame 3 14 are involved in performing a lighting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode. Then, in the execution period of the rainbow effect, when the first abnormality occurs, an error notification effect is executed in which only the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in a single color (for example, red or blue), and the rest Back upper front decoration 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 of effect operation unit 300 continue the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode. ing. As a result, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 aware that some kind of abnormality has occurred while maintaining a state in which the player can expect the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode.

In addition, when the second abnormality or the third abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the back upper front decoration body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, The LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to stop the light emission production lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, and the LEDs (back upper front decoration 3310, LEDs 1 to 14 ), an error notification effect that lights up in a single color (eg, red or blue) is executed. That is, in the execution period of the rainbow effect, when the second abnormality or the third abnormality occurs, in the light emitting area (back upper front decoration body 3310, LEDs 1 to 14) around the display area of the effect display device 1600 Execution of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is restricted. As a result, a situation occurs in which it is not possible to grasp that the rainbow performance is being executed, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 aware that some kind of abnormality has occurred.

In this example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of winning and rainbow effect at the time of loss), the back upper front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the effect The LEDs 8-9 of the operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3 are involved in performing a light-emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light-emitting mode, whereas the LEDs 15-17 of the game board 5 are in the rainbow light-emitting mode. Regardless of the constituent luminescent color, the luminous effect continues according to the variation pattern. On the other hand, when the first abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are not in a state of error notification like the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. Instead, the light emission effect corresponding to the variation pattern is continued. In this way, when the first abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the light emission effect corresponding to the variation pattern is continued, so that the light emission effect corresponding to the variation pattern can be expected. Situation can be maintained.

Similarly, when the second abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 (rear upper front decorations 3310, LEDs 1 to 14) constituting the rainbow light emission mode , the LED does not give an error notification, and the light emitting effect corresponding to the variation pattern is continued. As a result, when the second abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is stopped, but the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 emit light according to the variation pattern. By continuing the performance, the pachinko machine 1 is notified that some kind of abnormality has occurred, but it is possible to maintain a state in which the light emission performance corresponding to the variation pattern can be expected.

On the other hand, when the third abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the LEDs (back upper front decorations 3310, LEDs 1 to 14) constituting the rainbow light emission mode for the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 , the LED is turned on in a single color (for example, red or blue) to notify an error, and the light emitting effect corresponding to the variation pattern is stopped. As a result, when the third abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, not only is the light emitting effect lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode stopped, but also the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are turned on according to the variation pattern. By canceling the luminous performance, it is possible to eliminate the situation in which the luminous performance corresponding to the variation pattern is expected, and make the pachinko machine 1 aware that some fraudulent act is being performed. .

Further, in this example, when the rainbow effect is executed, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow mode effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. However, when the first to third abnormalities occur during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the effect display device 1600 displays an image notifying the type of the abnormality. However, when the first abnormality occurs, even if the image for notifying the type of abnormality is displayed, the situation in which the rainbow mode effect image can be visually recognized is maintained. When the abnormality 3 occurs, when the image for notifying the type of abnormality is displayed, the rainbow mode performance image is made invisible, and depending on the rainbow mode performance image, the rainbow performance is being executed. I try not to grasp that it is.

In addition, in this example, when the second abnormality occurs, the back upper front decoration 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 are displayed during execution of the rainbow effect. , the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved so as not to execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. Similarly, in the execution period of the rainbow effect, when the second abnormality occurs, the back upper front decoration body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the effect operation unit 300 LEDs 8 to 9 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to stop the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. Under such circumstances, even if the second abnormality is eliminated during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the situation where the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed continues for the remaining time. . For example, in the execution period of the rainbow effect, if the remaining time after returning to the state where the rainbow mode effect image can be visually recognized is too short, the back upper front decoration body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, Even if the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode, the rainbow effect is not executed. It may not be possible to determine whether Therefore, in this example, even if the second abnormality is resolved during the execution period of the rainbow effect, for the remaining time, the situation where the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed continues. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which it is impossible to determine whether or not the performance is being executed.

[Rainbow production with increase and decrease of rainbow-emitting LEDs]
In the above, during the variable display of the symbols, the rainbow effect is executed as a high-expectation effect suggesting that there is a high possibility of winning. LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to light up in a rainbow light emission mode. However, in this example, an annular decorative portion 1710 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring is provided as a light-emitting decoration that participates in the rainbow light emission mode. A case of executing a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode using the light will be described below. With such an annular decorative portion 1710, it is possible to increase or decrease the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode, and to change the impact on the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode.

FIG. 238 is an explanatory diagram showing the annular decorative portion 1710. FIG. Annular decoration 1710 has a first annular decoration 1710A in which seven LEDs are arranged in a ring on the inside, and 14 LEDs on the outside, the number of which is larger than that of first annular decoration 1710A. A second annular decorative portion 1710B in which LEDs are arranged is provided. Further, the annular decorative portion 1710 enables each of the first annular decorative portion 1710A and the second annular decorative portion 1710B to be lit in a rainbow emission mode. The ring-shaped decoration part 1710 is provided as one of the light-emitting decorations provided in the game area 5 a on the front side of the game board 5 .

In this example, the LEDs of the first annular decorative portion 1710A are involved in the rainbow luminous mode in which the LEDs of the first annular decorative portion 1710A emit light in different colors during the execution period of the lighting effect in which the LEDs of the first annular decorative portion 1710A are lit in the rainbow luminous mode. to turn it on. In the first annular decorative portion 1710A having such a rainbow light emitting mode, the colors of light emitted by the respective LEDs of the first annular decorative portion 1710A are set as follows: red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white→ Red" is changed in a predetermined order, and such regular changes are repeated.

In addition, in the execution period of the light emitting effect in which the LEDs of the second annular decorative portion 1710B are involved and lit in the rainbow light emission mode, two LEDs adjacent to each other in the second annular decorative portion 1710B are grouped into two LEDs. are lit in a rainbow luminescence mode in which each group of .lambda. In the second annular decorative portion 1710B having such a rainbow light emission mode, the light emission colors emitted by each of the two LED groups are set in advance to "red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white→red". I try to make changes in a fixed order and repeat such regular changes.

In this way, the LEDs of the first annular decoration portion 1710A and the LEDs of the second annular decoration portion 1710B are controlled so that the respective emission colors are sequentially switched to a plurality of emission colors in a short unit emission time. , these LEDs cooperate with each other to make it visually visible as if rainbow light emission mode is being performed, and it is possible to execute light emission effects with impact. In addition, as for the LEDs of the first annular decorative portion 1710A, the seven LEDs are interlocked and controlled, the seven LEDs are caused to emit light in a plurality of colors so as to emit light in different colors, and further emit light in a short time. By switching the color, it is possible to execute a lighting effect with more impact than usual. Similarly, for the LEDs of the second annular decorative portion 1710B, the 14 LEDs are interlocked and controlled to emit light in a plurality of colors so that each of the two groups of LEDs emits light in a different color, and a short By switching the luminescent color with time, it is possible to execute a luminous effect with more impact than usual.

In this example, as light emission in the rainbow light emission mode, a plurality of LEDs are used to cause seven colors to appear at the same time, and the respective light emission colors are regularly switched. , it is not necessary to use seven colors, and it is sufficient that three or more predetermined colors appear at the same time.

In this example, as an effect corresponding to the variation pattern, it is possible to execute a rainbow effect as a high-expectation effect during the variable display of the symbols, and a rainbow effect at the time of winning in which the winning is derived as a result of the variable display of the symbols, Although the rainbow effect is executed during the variable display of the symbols, the rainbow effect at the time of loss is set as a result of the variable display of the symbols. In other words, it is possible to determine the variation pattern for executing the rainbow performance at the time of winning, and to determine the variation pattern for executing the rainbow performance at the time of losing at the time of loss. Then, when it is out, by lowering the ratio of determining the variation pattern that executes the rainbow effect at the time of deviation from the variation pattern that executes the effect at the time of other deviation, the rainbow at the time of deviation is lower than the effect at the time of other deviation The execution frequency of the production is set to be low. As a result, when the rainbow effect is executed, it cannot be determined whether it is the rainbow effect at the time of winning or the rainbow effect at the time of losing, but the ratio of execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning is high, and the possibility of winning is high. It suggests that

FIG. 239 is a timing chart showing an example of a rainbow effect using the annular decorative portion 1710. FIG. First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, as an effect according to the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command, synchronize with the variation display of the special symbol. In the effect display device 1600, a variable effect such as a variable display of decorative symbols is started. Then, when the variation pattern at the time of winning to execute the rainbow effect at the time of winning is determined, or when the variation pattern at the time of losing to perform the rainbow effect at the time of losing is determined, the variation display of the pattern When the elapsed time from the start reaches a predetermined timing, the first annular decorative portion 1710A among the annular decorative portions 1710 is used to light up in a rainbow luminous mode (rainbow effect). to start.

Further, during the execution period of the rainbow effect using the first annular decorative portion 1710A, in the effect display device 1600, when the subsequent rainbow effect (rainbow effect using the second annular decorative portion 1710B) is executed It is a hit, and a display explaining that it is a loss when the subsequent rainbow effect (rainbow effect using the second annular decoration part 1710B) is not executed (for example, "Rainbow light emission with the second annular decoration part 1710B If you do, you win! If the second annular decorative portion 1710B emits rainbow light, you lose!") is executed.

When the variation pattern at the time of winning to execute the rainbow effect at the time of winning is determined, after starting the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A, at a predetermined timing, In addition to the lighting effect of lighting in the rainbow lighting mode using the first annular decoration part 1710A, the lighting effect of lighting in the rainbow lighting mode using the second annular decoration part 1710B is executed. In other words, both the LEDs of the first annular decorative portion 1710A and the LEDs of the second annular decorative portion 1710B are lit in the rainbow light emission mode. As a result, when the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B is executed after the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A is started, It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the pattern being executed will be a hit, and in order to know whether it will be a hit or not, a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decoration portion 1710B is executed. You can draw attention to whether

In addition, as a rainbow effect at the time of winning, after starting the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative part 1710A, at a predetermined timing, the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative part 1710B. , the effect display device 1600 displays a specific image for recognizing that the variable display of the symbols being executed will be a win. Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, a display (for example, "Congratulations!") is executed to notify that the variable display of the symbols being executed is a win and the result is a happy one. As a result, a failure or abnormality occurs in the second annular decorative portion 1710B, and it is not possible to recognize that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B has been executed. Even so, from the specific image displayed on the effect display device 1600, it is possible to clearly grasp that the variable display of the symbols being executed is a win.

In addition, as a rainbow effect at the time of winning, after starting the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative part 1710A, at a predetermined timing, the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative part 1710B. , the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow mode effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. . In such a rainbow effect image, the display colors displayed in each of the plurality of display areas are changed to "red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white" every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). → Red” is changed in a predetermined order, and such regular changes are repeated. It should be noted that the object for displaying the effect image in the rainbow mode may be a effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, for example, a background image, or may be a part of the display area of the effect display device 1600. Effect images displayed on the screen, for example, effect images of characters, items, and the like, may be targeted. As a result, when a failure or abnormality occurs in the second annular decorative portion 1710B, and it is not possible to recognize that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B has been executed. Even so, from the specific image displayed on the effect display device 1600, it is possible to clearly grasp that the variable display of the symbol being executed is a win.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern at the time of deviation to execute the rainbow effect at the time of deviation is determined, after starting the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A, the second The light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the annular decorative portion 1710B is not executed. In other words, even if the predetermined timing comes after the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A is started, the lighting is performed in the rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B. No light emission effect is executed, the LED of the second annular decorative portion 1710B remains turned off, and only the LED of the first annular decorative portion 1710A continues to be lit in the rainbow light emission mode. . Thus, when the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative part 1710B is not executed after the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative part 1710A is started. , In order to know that the variable display of the pattern being executed will be missed, and to know whether it will be a hit or not, a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decoration part 1710B is executed. You can draw attention to whether or not

In addition, as a rainbow effect at the time of detachment, after starting the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B is started. is not executed, at a predetermined timing, the effect display device 1600 displays a specific image that does not make one recognize that the variable display of the symbols being executed will be a win. Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, a display (for example, "Unfortunate!") is executed to notify that the variable display of the symbol being executed is out of order, resulting in a disappointing result. As a result, a failure or abnormality occurs in the second annular decorative portion 1710B, and it is not possible to recognize that the rainbow lighting effect using the second annular decorative portion 1710B is not executed. Even so, from the specific image displayed on the effect display device 1600, it is possible to clearly grasp that the variable display of the symbols being executed is out of order.

In addition, as a rainbow effect at the time of detachment, after starting the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B is started. is not executed, the effect display device 1600 does not display the effect image in the rainbow mode at a predetermined timing.

In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed, the second annular decoration part 1710B is used at a predetermined timing after starting the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decoration part 1710A. While the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is additionally executed, when the rainbow effect of being out is executed, after starting the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A, At a predetermined timing, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B is not executed, and the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A is continued. I have to. That is, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed, not only the LED of the first annular decorative portion 1710A but also the LED of the second annular decorative portion 1710B are lit in the rainbow light emission mode, and participate in the rainbow light emission mode. The number of LEDs used is increasing. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the variable display of the symbols being executed will be successful depending on whether or not the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode is increased. In addition, by increasing the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emitting mode, it is possible to excessively increase the player's willingness to play, coupled with the fact that the variable display of the symbols being executed is a win.

In this example, the LEDs of the first annular decorative portion 1710A and the LEDs of the second annular decorative portion 1710B are configured to illuminate in a rainbow luminous mode when executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning. However, the first annular decorative portion 1710A and the second annular decorative portion 1710B may be integrally configured to emit light in a rainbow luminescence mode. Further, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed, in addition to the state in which the LED of the first annular decorative portion 1710A is lit in the rainbow light emission mode, the LED of the second annular decoration portion 1710B is lit in the rainbow light emission mode. The LED of the first annular decorative portion 1710A is turned on in the rainbow light emission mode, the LED of the first annular decorative portion 1710A is turned off, and the LED of the second annular decorative portion 1710B is turned off. It may be configured to switch to a state of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode. Even in such a configuration, the number of LEDs in the second annular decorative portion 1710B is larger than that in the first annular decorative portion 1710A. number will increase.

As the rainbow effect at the time of winning, after executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A and the second annular decorative portion 1710B, the winning result (hit symbol) is notified, but during the notification of the winning result, the first annular decorative portion 1710A does not execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B. Only the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using is executed. That is, both the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A and the LED of the second annular decoration portion 1710B are lit when executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning. During the notification of the winning result after execution, the LED of the second annular decorative portion 1710B is turned off, and only the LED of the first annular decorative portion 1710A is lit in a rainbow light emission mode. In such a case, during the notification of the winning result after execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emitting mode is reduced compared to when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed. . Here, when executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning, since the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A and the second annular decorative portion 1710B is executed, the player's game Although there is a possibility that a state in which the motivation is excessively increased, during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, light emission that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A is performed. By executing only the performance, the state in which the player's desire to play the game is excessively increased can be reduced, and in subsequent games, the player can be prevented from being excessively absorbed in the game.

In the above, after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, during the notification of the winning result, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A is executed. Although the same effect as the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A is executed, it is not necessary to be the same effect. Any configuration may be used as long as the impact on the light emission mode is reduced. In addition, during the notification of the winning result after execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode is reduced compared to when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed. The configuration is not limited to this, and may be configured so that the impact on the rainbow light emission mode is reduced compared to when the rainbow effect is executed at the time of winning. For example, when executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the light emitting color of the LED is switched at a normal speed (for example, 0.1 second) when executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, whereas the rainbow at the time of winning During the notification of the winning result after the execution of the performance, the light emitting color of the LED is switched at a slower speed than the normal speed (for example, 1 second) when the light emitting performance of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed. You may In other words, during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the light is lit in the rainbow light emission mode so that the interval at which the light emission color of the LED is switched is longer than when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is performed. You may perform the light emission production|presentation which carries out. Even in such a configuration, the player's desire to play the game is excessively increased because the interval at which the LED emission color is switched becomes longer while the winning result is being notified after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning. By reducing the state, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively absorbed in the game in subsequent games.

Further, for example, when executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the light amount of the LED is increased when executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, while the winning result is notified after the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed. In some cases, the amount of light emitted from the LED may be reduced when executing the lighting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. In other words, during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed so that the light amount of the LED becomes lower than that when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed. You may Even in such a configuration, the amount of light emitted from the LED is reduced during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, so that the state in which the player's willingness to play is excessively increased is reduced. In the subsequent game, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively absorbed in the game.

Further, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed, the LED of the first annular decorative portion 1710A lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode, and the LED of the second annular decorative portion 1710B lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode. In the effect display device 1600, the effect image in the rainbow mode is displayed, but during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the LED of the first annular decorative portion 1710A is lit in the rainbow light emitting mode. Only by turning on, the LED of the second annular decorative portion 1710B does not light up in the rainbow light emission mode, and the effect display device 1600 does not display the rainbow mode effect image. Even in such a configuration, since the effect image in the rainbow mode is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the player's willingness to play is excessively increased. It is possible to prevent the player from being excessively absorbed in the game in the subsequent game.

As described above in detail, the game board 5 can be equipped with a rainbow independent decoration part 1700, and during execution of rainbow effects such as a simulated rainbow effect and a rainbow effect at the time of winning, the game board 5 LEDs 1 to 4, door frame top unit 450 LEDs 5 to 7, effect operation unit 300 LEDs 8 to 9, and door frame 3 LEDs 10 to 14 are used to perform a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode. Thus, it is possible to execute a notification effect in which the LED of the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700 is lit in a rainbow light emission mode. As a result, during execution of the rainbow effect, even if there is an abnormality in which some of the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode do not light up, the rainbow independent decorative portion 1700 emits light in the rainbow light emission mode. By visually recognizing , it is possible to grasp that the rainbow effect is being performed. In this regard, in this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed, the first annular decorative portion 1710A and the second annular decorative portion 1710B are used to perform the lighting effect in the rainbow luminous mode in synchronism with the execution of the rainbow effect. , the LED of the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 is used to execute the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, while the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning is performed, the first annular decoration part 1710A However, the LED of the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 is not executed in the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. Regarding this, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed, it is important to let the player know that the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed so that the player does not miss information that is beneficial to the player. Even if some of the LEDs of the annular decorative portion 1710A and the second annular decorative portion 1710B have an abnormality in which the LEDs do not light up, the rainbow independent decorative portion 1700 emits light in the rainbow luminous mode. By doing so, it is possible to grasp that the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed. On the other hand, during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A is executed, which is beneficial for the player. This information is not necessarily information that should be conveyed to the player. The configuration is such that the LED does not light up in the rainbow light emission mode.

In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of failure is executed, the rainbow effect at the time of failure is executed until a specific period (for example, 3 minutes) elapses after the rainbow effect at the time of failure is completed. It is restricted so that the change pattern of time is not determined and the rainbow effect when it is out again is not executed. On the other hand, it is possible to determine the winning variation pattern for executing the winning rainbow effect until a specific period (for example, 3 minutes) has passed after the end of the rainbow effect at the time of winning. There is no restriction on the execution of the rainbow effect of time. As a result, in a short period such as a specific period, the rainbow performance at the time of failure will not be repeated, and the rainbow performance that is performed as a high-expectation performance that suggests that there is a high possibility of winning will be lost. There is no need to wait for the next rainbow effect to be executed. In addition, when the rainbow effect is started before the specific period elapses after the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection ends, the rainbow effect is started in which the first annular decorative portion 1710A is used to light up in the rainbow light emission mode, The rainbow performance is not the rainbow performance at the time of winning, and the rainbow performance at the time of winning is performed without waiting for adding and executing the light emission performance lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decoration part 1710B. is being executed.

In addition, in this example, a rainbow effect (a rainbow effect at the time of winning and a rainbow effect at the time of losing) is executed as the effect during the variable display of the symbols, but this is not the only option. During a specific period such as during a game, after the first annular decorative portion 1710A is used to perform the lighting effect in the rainbow light emitting mode, the second annular decorative portion 1710B is used to perform the lighting effect in the rainbow light emitting mode. A rainbow effect may be performed as to whether or not to perform. In this case, whether or not to execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B after the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A is executed. Depending on the situation of the rainbow effect, the player may be made to recognize whether or not some kind of game profit (probability variation, time reduction, etc.) will be given after the winning game being executed. In addition, after executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B, since it is after obtaining useful information for the player, the second annular decorative portion 1710B is turned off. Only the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A may be executed without executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode used. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the state in which the player's desire to play is excessively increased, and prevent the player from becoming excessively absorbed in the game in subsequent games.

In addition, as described above in detail, during the execution of the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of hit, rainbow effect at the time of loss), it is possible to determine whether or not it will be a hit when a predetermined operation unit is operated. As such button effects, a rainbow effect with button effect A, a rainbow effect with button effect B, and a rainbow effect with button effect C may be performed. Also, during the execution of the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of hit, rainbow effect at the time of loss), the effect display device 1600 displays a display prompting the operation of a predetermined operation unit (for example, "press the light amount adjustment button!"). It may be configured so that the button operation prompting effect to be performed is not executed, and the button effects A to C function as a "hidden effect" during execution of the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of hit, rainbow effect at the time of loss). . For example, as the button effect A, during execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, The amount of light of at least the LEDs (LEDs 1-4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3) that constitute the rainbow light emission mode changes. On the other hand, during execution of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, at least the rainbow light emission mode among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (LEDs 1-4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3) do not change. That is, as the rainbow effect, after the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A is started, when the light amount can be adjusted, the rainbow effect is the rainbow effect when the rainbow effect is off. Without waiting for the addition and execution of the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B, it is possible to grasp that the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed. . As a result, the player who usually positively operates the light amount adjustment button 228 can quickly grasp whether or not he/she will win, and the player who does not normally operate the light amount adjustment button 228 positively can be prevented from doing so. , it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not to additionally execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B, and to thoroughly enjoy whether or not the player will win.

In addition, in this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A and the second annular decorative portion 1710B is executed. During the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect, only the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A is executed, but after the rainbow effect at the time of winning During the notification of the winning result, the execution period of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is longer than that of the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning. Here, during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode is reduced compared to when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed. Although it is difficult to recognize whether or not it is lit in the rainbow lighting mode, by making the execution period of the lighting in the rainbow lighting mode longer than when the rainbow performance is performed at the time of winning, the rainbow lighting mode is performed. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not the light is on.

Regarding the rainbow effect of the present invention, various rainbow effects are individually described as necessary, but only one of these rainbow effects may be executed, or these rainbow effects may be combined in parallel. It can be executed. For example, as the rainbow effect, a rainbow effect at the time of winning, a rainbow effect at the time of losing, and a simulated rainbow effect may be executed in parallel. In addition, in the rainbow effect of the present invention, not only the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, but also the LEDs of the members other than the game board 5 (LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, door frame 3 LEDs 10 to 14) are used to perform a lighting effect in which the rainbow light emission mode is lit. may be used to execute a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode.

[Time saving control of new mode]
In the above description, an example has been given of a general gaming machine that is controlled to a time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game, but it is also possible to control to a time-saving state in a new manner as follows to further improve the game interest. .

(Time saving control triggered by stop display of time saving sudden pattern)
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol is predetermined in addition to the normal time saving state (low probability time saving state and high probability time saving state described above) that is controlled after the end of the big hit game. It is controlled so that a special time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) is executed when it stops at "time-saving sudden pattern". Specifically, as a lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2004, when winning a "time saving hit" different from any of the big hit, the small hit, and the loss, Based on this, the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is caused to stop and display a predetermined time-saving sudden symbol (a symbol different from any of the big win, the small win, and the loss), without executing any winning game. , It is possible to turn on the time saving flag based on the lapse of the stop display time and control to the time saving state (low probability time saving state). In this way, by performing time-saving control triggered by the stop display of time-saving sudden symbols, it is possible to suddenly shift to a time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) in the normal game progress process, and expand the range of game characteristics. At the same time, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by giving surprise and surprise to the player. Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving sudden design is set only in the first special design, but the time saving sudden design may also be set for the second special design. In this case, it is preferable to display time-saving sudden designs in different modes on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, as the lottery result of the first special symbol, the winning mode of "time saving hit" that triggers the stop display of the time saving sudden symbol is set value 1 in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability in the above-described embodiment. The probability of 2/319, which is the middle of 1/319 which is the probability of a big hit and 3/319 which is a probability of a small hit is set in association with the first special random number. In addition, in the hit determination table at the time of high probability, the time saving hit determination value is not set, so that the time saving hit does not occur during the so-called probability variation.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, as described above, when the power is turned on, the hall manager can use the setting key to set any one of set values 1 to 6 with different jackpot probabilities. , It is preferable that the winning mode per time saving is uniform regardless of the set value (probability of 2/319 for any set value). It is possible to easily design a game as a privilege (a privilege different from a big hit).

In addition, it is possible to provide multiple time-saving sudden patterns, and the period of occurrence of the time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) triggered by the stop display of the time-saving sudden design is, for example, 30 times in the case of time-saving sudden design A. Pattern change, 50 times of pattern fluctuation in the case of time saving sudden pattern B, 100 times of pattern change in the case of time saving sudden pattern C (same period as normal time saving state), etc. Depending on the type of time saving sudden pattern ( It is possible to set the occurrence period of low probability short working hours state) individually. The determination of the time-saving sudden patterns A to C is determined using the symbol random numbers for use in determining the hit types described above, in the same manner as when determining the jackpot types and minor hit types. Also, not limited to this, the occurrence period of the time saving state (low probability time saving state) may be determined at the start of fluctuation by lottery by another lottery means other than the symbol random number. In addition, the time reduction hit determination value set in the big hit determination table at the time of low probability is classified into the time reduction hit determination value A, the time reduction hit determination value B, and the time reduction hit determination value C, and the time reduction sudden pattern is determined according to the time reduction hit determination value. Control may be simplified such that any one of A to C is derived.

In addition, the time saving control triggered by the stop display of the time saving sudden design is after the time saving sudden design is displayed (when the fixed stop time of the time saving sudden design has elapsed) Whether the variable display of the next special design is started It is configured to start operation regardless of whether or not (whether or not there is a hold of a special pattern), and when the stop display time of the time saving sudden pattern has elapsed, or during the fluctuation display prior to the stop display of the time saving sudden pattern , Execute a specific effect that controls display, sound, lamps, etc. in a specific manner, and notify the player that ``the time saving state (low probability time saving state) will start operating without going through a big hit'' It is preferable to As a result, even if the player runs out of balls when the time-saving sudden symbols are stopped and displayed, the player can leave the gaming machine while the time-saving sudden symbols are still displayed. It is possible to suppress sitting. In addition, not limited to the above, when emphasizing that the time saving control is performed triggered by the stop display of the time saving sudden design as much as possible, during the fluctuation display prior to the stop display of the time saving sudden design , To perform common effects (notice, reach, etc.) that are normally performed, display the same pattern combination as when the liquid crystal display device is disconnected, and then suddenly display, sound, lamp, etc. in a specific manner. A specific performance to be controlled may be executed to make the player aware of it.

Time-saving control triggered by the stop display of time-saving sudden patterns is effective when it is in a time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state), and is invalid when it is in a high-probability time-saving state such as a so-called probability change or a high-probability non-time-saving state. be done. "Invalid" here means that although the above-mentioned judgment on whether or not it is a time saving hit (lottery for the first special pattern and lottery for the second special pattern) itself is performed, no matter what the result of the judgment is ( To prevent the start of time-saving control triggered by the stop display of a time-saving sudden pattern regardless of whether the time-saving hit is won or not.

In addition, as the end condition of the time saving state (low probability time saving state) started by the time saving control triggered by the stop display of the time saving sudden pattern, as described above, the occurrence period ended after the specified fluctuation display was performed In addition to the case, the end condition may be that it is controlled by a conventional big hit game, or a small hit game different from the big hit game (hit probability is higher than the big hit game, but the number of balls released is less) a predetermined number of times It is also possible to set the termination condition to have been controlled (for example, 20 times). In particular, when the number of executions of the small hit game is set as the end condition for the end condition of the time saving state (low probability time saving state) started by the time saving control triggered by the stop display of the time saving sudden pattern, the small hit By setting the opening and closing modes of the first big prize opening 2006 and the second big prize opening 2007 in the game to a short period of time compared to the jackpot game, a time saving state (low probability time saving state) is suddenly started in the course of the game progress. Furthermore, it is possible to realize a new game mode in which the time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) suddenly ends at a relatively incomprehensible time (the number of executions of the small winning game), and the range of game characteristics can be further expanded. .

(Time-saving control triggered by the number of rescues)
In the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the time saving state (low probability time saving state) operates based on the stop display of the time saving sudden pattern was described, but as another time saving control, the special pattern in the situation where the big hit is not obtained It is possible to control to operate the time saving state (low-probability time saving state) triggered by the fact that the number of fluctuations has reached the predetermined number of reliefs. The main purpose of time saving control triggered by such relief times is to help players who have not been able to get a big hit for a long time, and from this point of view, the start of a time saving state (low probability time saving state) It is preferable to set the number of relief times as a trigger to a value (an arbitrary number set in advance) that is approximately three times the probability of executing a jackpot game. is set. In addition, the trigger (start timing) to start counting the number of fluctuations (addition type or subtraction type) can be after the end of the big hit game as the starting point, and the normal time saving state (low The number of fluctuations in the probability time saving state) is also counted to avoid complication of control that diversifies the starting point of counting. In addition, the number of fluctuations in a state in which sufficient profit is given to the player, such as a high probability time saving state or a high probability non-time saving state, is not counted. In addition, such a count can be reset (initialized) by performing an operation related to RAM clearing or an operation related to setting change, and when reset, the count starts from the initial value in the same manner as immediately after the end of the jackpot game. is set to start.

In addition, it is possible to set an arbitrary period in advance for the occurrence period of the time saving state (low probability time saving state) that is started by the time saving control triggered by the number of relief times, for example, 700 times of pattern fluctuation, etc. It is also possible to set the number of times the next big win is guaranteed. In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, the hall manager can set any of the setting values 1 to 6 using the setting key. Regarding the occurrence period and the number of relief times of the time saving state (low probability time saving state) started with, it is a constant period regardless of which set value is set.

Further, in the above description, the reset (initialization) of the count of the number of repairs is exemplified by performing an operation related to RAM clearing or an operation related to setting change. may That is, regardless of whether an operation related to RAM clearing or an operation related to setting change is performed, although the count itself of the number of relief times described above is reset, if an operation related to RAM clearing is performed or a setting change is performed, When such an operation is performed, only one side will start counting the number of reliefs associated with the subsequent variable display, and the other side will not start counting the number of reliefs associated with the subsequent variable display. You may try to prevent the time saving state (low probability time saving state) from operating even if it arrives. By doing this, depending on whether the time saving state (low probability time saving state) is started when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol reaches the number of relief, the game determines whether or not the operation related to the setting change is performed It is possible to provide a new game feature that allows people to recognize and guess, and to further expand the range of game features. In addition, when the setting value is downgraded from the higher setting (for example, setting values 4 to 6) to the lower setting (for example, setting value 1 to 3), the number of repairs is started to be counted. 4 to 6) are maintained, the time saving control triggered by the number of reliefs may be changed according to the degree of advantage or disadvantage to the player, such as not starting the counting of the number of reliefs. .

In addition, as the termination condition of the time saving state (low probability time saving state) started by the time saving control triggered by the number of relief times, in addition to reaching the above-mentioned occurrence period (for example, 700 times of pattern fluctuation etc.), conventional It is also possible to set the end condition that the big hit game is played, or the end condition that the small win game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). In particular, if the number of executions of the small hit game is set as the end condition for the end condition of the time saving state (low probability time saving state) started by the time saving control triggered by the number of relief times, the execution of the small winning game As a mode, by keeping the opening and closing mode of the first big winning mouth 2006, the second big winning mouth 2007, etc. in the small winning game for a short time compared to the big winning game, the time of occurrence of the time saving state (low probability time saving state) is clarified, only the ending time can be made relatively difficult to understand (the number of executions of the small winning game), and the range of game characteristics can be further expanded.

In addition, it is also possible to combine the two types of new time-saving control described above (time-saving control triggered by the stop display of the time-saving sudden pattern, and time-saving control triggered by the number of times of relief) in the game. By combining with control, it becomes possible to diversify the operation pattern of the time saving state (low probability time saving state), and it becomes possible to further expand the range of game characteristics. In addition, when the time-saving control triggered by the stop display of the time-saving sudden pattern and the time-saving control triggered by the number of times of relief are used in combination in the game, when both occurrence opportunities overlap In order to avoid complication of control, it is desirable to set the priority in advance in association with the degree of mutual advantage. For example, when it is in a time saving state (low probability time saving state) started by time saving control triggered by the number of relief times, the stop display of the time saving sudden pattern is triggered as in the case of a high probability time saving state or a high probability non-time saving state. It can be exemplified that the time saving control is invalidated and the transition from the advantageous time saving state to the disadvantageous time saving state is not performed.

In addition, if the number of times of special symbol fluctuation reaches the relief number when in the time saving state (low probability time saving state) started by the time saving control triggered by the stop display of the time saving sudden pattern, the time saving state that is occurring (Low-probability time-saving state) is ended, and a new time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) is started with priority given to time-saving control triggered by the number of reliefs. By doing so, the transition to the advantageous time-saving state is not hindered, and the player can be given a sense of security. In addition, if the purpose is not to be disadvantageous to the player, whether to start a new time saving state (low probability time saving state) according to the remaining number of times of the occurring time saving state (low probability time saving state) may be determined.

In addition, when the number of times of special symbol fluctuation reaches the relief number when in the normal time saving state (low probability time saving state) controlled after the end of the jackpot state, or the normal time saving state controlled after the end of the jackpot state If the time saving sudden pattern is stopped and displayed while in (low probability time saving state), terminate the normal time saving state (low probability time saving state) and give priority to time saving control according to each opportunity Then, a new time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) is started. By doing so, the transition to the advantageous time-saving state is not hindered, and the player can be given a sense of security. Also in this case, if the purpose is not to be disadvantageous to the player, a new time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) according to the remaining number of times of the time-saving state that has occurred (low-probability time-saving state) You may make it decide whether to start.

In addition, the above-mentioned various rainbow-related controls are the above-mentioned two new types of time-saving control (time-saving control triggered by the stop display of time-saving sudden symbols, and time-saving control triggered by the number of times of relief). It can be made to appear even under certain circumstances, for example, when and after the time-saving state is started by time-saving control triggered by the stop display of the time-saving sudden pattern, various rainbow-related controls (rainbow production, etc.) It may be executed, or when or after the time-saving state is started by time-saving control triggered by the number of times of relief, various rainbow-related controls (rainbow effects, etc.) may be executed. .

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1 or the slot machine, but the game machine is not limited to this, and the game is a pachislot machine or a game that fuses a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case, the same effects as those described above can be obtained. Also, the present invention can be applied to a so-called enclosed type game machine in which the player never touches the game ball B, or a game machine called a management game machine.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect display device 1600 is attached to the center of the set plate 1650, but this is not a limitation, and the effect display device A display device 1600 may be attached. Also, although one effect display device 1600 is attached to the set plate 1650, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of effect display devices may be attached to the set plate 1650. FIG.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front constituent member 1100 Game panel 2000 Front unit 2500 Center accessory 2555 Center right front plate (holding plate)
2555a First accommodation part (accommodation part)
2555b Second accommodation part (accommodation part)
2555c Peeling hole 2555d In front of the protrusion (protrusion)
2700 Specific obstructive nail group 2701 Interfering nail part 2710 Guiding area 2711 First guiding area 2712 Second guiding area N Obstructing nail

Claims (1)

A game machine having a game board formed with a game area in which game balls can flow down, and capable of being controlled to a big win state based on a winning result being derived in a predetermined lottery,
count value update means for updating a predetermined count value;
specific state control means for controlling to a specific state different from the jackpot state based on the count value becoming a specific value;
Production control means for executing a predetermined production control,
with
The production control means is
a specific notification executing means capable of executing a specific notification that enables a player to recognize information about the count value;
specific notification execution means capable of executing specific notification corresponding to occurrence of the specific state when the count value reaches the specific value and is controlled to the specific state;
has
The specific notification executing means controls the count value to reach the specific value while the specific notification is being executed and the count value when the specific notification is not executed. is the specific value and is controlled to the specific state, the common specific notification can be executed,
Furthermore, while the lottery is performed based on the ball entering the starting hole provided on the game board, the lottery is not performed based on the ball entering the non-starting hole other than the starting hole. ,
The count value can be updated not only when the ball enters the starting hole, but also when the ball enters the non-starting hole.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images